Config600 Configuration Software User Manual. System Training. A well-trained workforce is critical to the success of your operation. Knowing how to correctly ...
Config600™ Configuration Software User Manual. Chapter 1 – Introduction. ... 6.1 Initial Configurations. 6.2 Common Stream Settings. 6.3 Gas – Coriolis.
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual ... an EFM Modbus module link is included in the software). ... LIGHT TP25 GPA TP-25 1998 (API Tables 23E.
Part Number D301220X412
January 2021
Config600TM Configuration Software User Manual
Remote Automation Solutions
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
System Training
A well-trained workforce is critical to the success of your operation. Knowing how to correctly install, configure, program, calibrate, and trouble-shoot your Emerson equipment provides your engineers and technicians with the skills and confidence to optimize your investment. Remote Automation Solutions offers a variety of ways for your personnel to acquire essential system expertise. Our full-time professional instructors can conduct classroom training at several of our corporate offices, at your site, or even at your regional Emerson office. You can also receive the same quality training via our live, interactive Emerson Virtual Classroom and save on travel costs. For our complete schedule and further information, contact the Remote Automation Solutions Training Department at +1-800-3388158 or email us at education@emerson.com.
Contents
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-1
1.1 Enhancements ................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Configuration Updates ..................................................................................................... 1-2 1.3 Scope of Manual .............................................................................................................. 1-2 1.4 Software Basics ............................................................................................................... 1-4 1.5 Installing Config600.......................................................................................................... 1-5 1.6 Accessing Config600 ....................................................................................................... 1-9 1.7 Activating Config600 ...................................................................................................... 1-10 1.8 Additional Technical Information .................................................................................... 1-12
Chapter 2 PCSetup Editor
2-1
2.1 Create a New Configuration............................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.1 Name the Configuration (Step 1 of 6) ................................................................ 2-2 2.1.2 Select Measurement Units (Step 2 of 6)............................................................ 2-3 2.1.3 Specify Modules (Step 3 of 6)............................................................................ 2-4 2.1.4 Specify Stations (Step 4 of 6) ............................................................................ 2-5 2.1.5 Define Streams (Step 5 of 6) ............................................................................. 2-8 2.1.6 Select Communications (Step 6 of 6) .............................................................. 2-15
2.2 Analyse a Configuration (System Graphic).................................................................... 2-17 2.3 Open an Existing Configuration (PCSetup Editor) ......................................................... 2-23
2.3.1 Navigating the PCSetup Editor ........................................................................ 2-25 2.3.2 The Icon Bar .................................................................................................... 2-26 2.4 The Menu Bar ................................................................................................................ 2-27 2.5 Managing Configurations ............................................................................................... 2-28 2.5.1 Save a Configuration ....................................................................................... 2-28 2.5.2 Regenerate a Configuration............................................................................. 2-28 2.6 Display Editor ................................................................................................................. 2-29 2.7 Config Transfer Utility..................................................................................................... 2-29 2.8 Config Organiser Utility .................................................................................................. 2-29
Chapter 3 System Setup
3-1
3.1 Versions ........................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2 Units ................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.1 Supported Units ................................................................................................. 3-4 3.3 Reports............................................................................................................................. 3-6
3.3.1 General Reports................................................................................................. 3-7 3.3.2 Base Time Reports ............................................................................................ 3-8 3.3.3 Default Reports .................................................................................................. 3-9 3.3.4 Report History .................................................................................................... 3-9 3.3.5 Adding a General Report to a Configuration ..................................................... 3-9 3.3.6 User Reports .................................................................................................... 3-11 3.3.7 Adding a Base Time Report to a Configuration ............................................... 3-11 3.3.8 Managing Configuration Reports ..................................................................... 3-13 3.4 Totalisations ................................................................................................................... 3-14 3.5 Time ............................................................................................................................... 3-16
Chapter 4 I/O and Comms Configuration
4-1
4.1 Discrete (Digital) Inputs (DI)............................................................................................. 4-2 4.1.1 Assigning Discrete (Digital) Inputs ..................................................................... 4-2 4.1.2 Editing Discrete (Digital) Inputs ......................................................................... 4-3 4.1.3 Adding Discrete (Digital) Inputs ......................................................................... 4-4
4.2 Discrete (Digital) Outputs (DO) ........................................................................................ 4-5 4.2.1 Assigning Discrete (Digital) Outputs .................................................................. 4-5
Revised January-2021
iii
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4.3 Analog Inputs (AI) ............................................................................................................ 4-6 4.3.1 Assigning Analog Inputs (AI) ............................................................................. 4-6 4.3.2 Editing Analog Inputs (AI) .................................................................................. 4-7 4.3.3 Adding a New I/O Point.................................................................................... 4-15
4.4 Analog Outputs (AO)...................................................................................................... 4-15 4.4.1 Editing Analog Outputs .................................................................................... 4-15
4.5 Density Inputs ................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.5.1 Assigning Density Input ................................................................................... 4-17 4.5.2 Editing Density Inputs ...................................................................................... 4-18
4.6 Turbine Inputs ................................................................................................................ 4-19 4.6.1 Assigning Turbine Inputs ................................................................................. 4-19 4.6.2 Editing Turbine Inputs ...................................................................................... 4-21
4.7 Pulse Outputs................................................................................................................. 4-21 4.7.1 Assigning Pulse Outputs.................................................................................. 4-22
4.8 HART Modules ............................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.1 Editing HART Settings ..................................................................................... 4-23
4.9 PID Loop Settings .......................................................................................................... 4-23 4.9.1 Assigning PID Loops........................................................................................ 4-24 4.9.2 Proportional Plus Integral and Derivative Action ............................................. 4-28
4.10 Communications Port..................................................................................................... 4-30 4.10.1 Editing a Communications Task ...................................................................... 4-30 4.10.2 Setting Up Peer-to-peer Options ..................................................................... 4-35
Chapter 5 Station Configuration
5-1
5.1 Station Flowrate Limits..................................................................................................... 5-2 5.2 Station Averaging Temperature & Pressure .................................................................... 5-4 5.3 Station Secondary Units Setup ........................................................................................ 5-6 5.4 Station Flow Switching ..................................................................................................... 5-8 5.5 Station Gas Composition ............................................................................................... 5-10 5.6 Sampling ........................................................................................................................ 5-14 5.7 Prover Configuration Screens ........................................................................................ 5-17
5.7.1 Flow Balance Setup ......................................................................................... 5-18 5.7.2 Prover Ball (Bi-Directional) (Liquid Only) ...................................................... 5-19 5.7.3 Prover Compact (Liquid Only) ...................................................................... 5-31 5.7.4 Prover Master Meter (Gas and Liquid) ......................................................... 5-44
Chapter 6 Stream Configuration
6-1
6.1 Initial Configurations......................................................................................................... 6-2 6.2 Common Stream Settings ................................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.1 General Settings ................................................................................................ 6-4 6.2.2 Flowrate ............................................................................................................. 6-5 6.2.3 Stream Secondary Units Setup ......................................................................... 6-7 6.2.4 Stream Flow Switching Setup .......................................................................... 6-10 6.2.5 Gas Component Flow Weighted Averaging (GC FWA)................................... 6-11 6.2.6 Density Measurement ...................................................................................... 6-13 6.2.7 Block Valves .................................................................................................... 6-16 6.2.8 Time & Flow Weighted Averaging Methods .................................................... 6-18 6.3 Gas Coriolis................................................................................................................. 6-22 6.3.1 AGA8 (Compressibility).................................................................................... 6-22 6.3.2 Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588) ............................................... 6-25 6.3.3 Gas CV (AGA5) ............................................................................................... 6-30 6.3.4 Stream Gas Composition................................................................................. 6-30 6.3.5 Gas Properties ................................................................................................. 6-35 6.3.6 Ethylene ........................................................................................................... 6-38 6.3.7 Linearisation..................................................................................................... 6-39 6.3.8 Sampling .......................................................................................................... 6-41 6.3.9 Coriolis ............................................................................................................. 6-44 6.4 Gas DP........................................................................................................................ 6-48 6.4.1 Downstream/Upstream Correction .................................................................. 6-48 6.4.2 Pipe Correction ................................................................................................ 6-51
iv
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6.4.3 AGA8 (Compressibility).................................................................................... 6-54 6.4.4 ISO5167 (Mass Flowrate) ................................................................................ 6-57 6.4.5 ISOTR9464 ...................................................................................................... 6-60 6.4.6 V-Cone (Mass Flowrate) .................................................................................. 6-62 6.4.7 Annubar (Mass Flowrate) ................................................................................ 6-63 6.4.8 Pure Gas Air .................................................................................................... 6-65 6.4.9 Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588) ............................................... 6-67 6.4.10 SGERG (Compressibility) ................................................................................ 6-71 6.4.11 NX19 (Compressibility) .................................................................................... 6-74 6.4.12 PTZ (Compressibility) ...................................................................................... 6-75 6.4.13 AGA3 (Volume or Mass Flowrate) ................................................................... 6-77 6.4.14 Stream Gas Composition................................................................................. 6-79 6.4.15 Z Steam (Compressibility) ............................................................................... 6-83 6.4.16 GOST CV ......................................................................................................... 6-85 6.4.17 GOST Flow ...................................................................................................... 6-86 6.4.18 Gas Properties ................................................................................................. 6-89 6.4.19 DP Cell Input Conditioning............................................................................... 6-91 6.5 Gas Turbine .............................................................................................................. 6-108 6.5.1 AGA8 (Compressibility).................................................................................. 6-109 6.5.2 Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588) ............................................. 6-111 6.5.3 AGA7 (Gross Volume Flowrate) .................................................................... 6-116 6.5.4 Stream Gas Composition............................................................................... 6-118 6.5.5 Gas Properties ............................................................................................... 6-122 6.5.6 Linearisation................................................................................................... 6-125 6.6 Gas Ultrasonic........................................................................................................... 6-127 6.6.1 AGA8 (Compressibility).................................................................................. 6-127 6.6.2 Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588) ............................................. 6-130 6.6.3 AGA7 (Gross Volume Flowrate) .................................................................... 6-135 6.6.4 Stream Gas Composition (Gas Ultrasonic).................................................... 6-136 6.6.5 Linearisation................................................................................................... 6-141 6.6.6 Gas Properties (Gas Ultrasonic) .................................................................... 6-143 6.6.7 Ultrasonic Flow Setup .................................................................................... 6-146 6.6.8 Ultrasonic Control .......................................................................................... 6-149 6.6.9 QSonic Interface ............................................................................................ 6-151 6.6.10 SICK Control .................................................................................................. 6-152 6.7 Liquid Coriolis............................................................................................................ 6-154 6.7.1 Local Units ..................................................................................................... 6-155 6.7.2 Linearisation................................................................................................... 6-155 6.7.3 Sampling ........................................................................................................ 6-158 6.7.4 Observed Density Correction......................................................................... 6-161 6.7.5 Standard Density Correction.......................................................................... 6-169 6.7.6 Base Sediment and Water (BSW) ................................................................. 6-176 6.7.7 Coriolis ........................................................................................................... 6-177 6.8 Liquid Turbine ........................................................................................................... 6-179 6.8.1 Local Units ..................................................................................................... 6-179 6.8.2 Linearisation................................................................................................... 6-180 6.8.3 Observed Density Correction......................................................................... 6-184 6.8.4 Standard Density Correction.......................................................................... 6-192 6.8.5 Base Sediment and Water (BSW) ................................................................. 6-198 6.9 Liquid - Ultrasonic ........................................................................................................ 6-200 6.9.1 Local Units ..................................................................................................... 6-200 6.9.2 Linearisation................................................................................................... 6-201 6.9.3 Observed Density Correction......................................................................... 6-204 6.9.4 Standard Density Correction.......................................................................... 6-211 6.9.5 Base Sediment and Water (BSW) ................................................................. 6-217 6.9.6 Daniel Liquid Ultrasonic ................................................................................. 6-218 6.10 Modes of Operation...................................................................................................... 6-221 6.10.1 Density Failure Modes ................................................................................... 6-222
Revised January-2021
v
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 7 Advanced Setup Configuration
7-1
7.1 Conversions/Constants .................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1.1 Editing Conversions/Constants.......................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Totals Descriptions........................................................................................................... 7-2 7.2.1 Editing Totals Descriptors .................................................................................. 7-3
7.3 Alarms .............................................................................................................................. 7-3 7.3.1 Editing Alarms .................................................................................................... 7-4 7.3.2 Alarm Descriptions............................................................................................. 7-6
7.4 Security .......................................................................................................................... 7-13 7.4.1 Editing Security ................................................................................................ 7-14 7.4.2 Editing/Deleting Passwords ............................................................................. 7-15 7.4.3 Data Item Security ........................................................................................... 7-16 7.4.4 PCSetup Editor Login ...................................................................................... 7-18
7.5 Displays/Webserver ....................................................................................................... 7-19 7.5.1 Editing Displays/Webserver ............................................................................. 7-20
7.6 Calc Explorer.................................................................................................................. 7-21 7.6.1 Calc Explorer Options ...................................................................................... 7-22 7.6.2 Adding an Item ................................................................................................. 7-23 7.6.3 Adding All Inputs .............................................................................................. 7-25 7.6.4 Adding All Outputs ........................................................................................... 7-26 7.6.5 Deleting Items .................................................................................................. 7-27 7.6.6 Saving as Bitmaps ........................................................................................... 7-28
Chapter 8 System Editor
8-1
8.1 Accessing the System Editor ........................................................................................... 8-2 8.2 The S600+ Database ....................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.1 Objects ............................................................................................................... 8-4 8.2.2 Tables ................................................................................................................ 8-5 8.3 Navigating the System Editor........................................................................................... 8-5 8.3.1 Finding Objects .................................................................................................. 8-6 8.3.2 The System Editor Icon Bar ............................................................................... 8-6 8.3.3 Special Edit ........................................................................................................ 8-7 8.3.4 Edit Dialog.......................................................................................................... 8-8 8.3.5 Asterisks/No Asterisks ....................................................................................... 8-9 8.4 General Guidelines ........................................................................................................ 8-10
Chapter 9 Config Transfer
9-1
9.1 Connecting to the S600+ ................................................................................................. 9-2 9.1.1 Connecting via Serial Cable .............................................................................. 9-2 9.1.2 Connecting via TCP/IP....................................................................................... 9-2 9.1.3 Enabling the PC Setup Link ............................................................................... 9-2 9.1.4 Checksum Security ............................................................................................ 9-3
9.2 Accessing Config Transfer ............................................................................................... 9-3 9.3 Communications Settings for Transfer............................................................................. 9-4
9.3.1 Setting Communication Parameters .................................................................. 9-4 9.4 Send Configuration .......................................................................................................... 9-6
9.4.1 Sending a Configuration .................................................................................... 9-6 9.4.2 Manually Adding a Configuration File to be Transferred ................................... 9-7 9.5 Receive Configuration...................................................................................................... 9-8 9.5.1 Receiving a Configuration.................................................................................. 9-8 9.6 Log Transfers ................................................................................................................... 9-9 9.6.1 Logging a Transfer............................................................................................. 9-9 9.7 CFX Licensing ................................................................................................................ 9-10 9.7.1 Transferring a License ..................................................................................... 9-10 9.7.2 Removing a License ........................................................................................ 9-12
vi
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 10 Remote Front Panel
10-1
10.1 Configuring Your PC without a Native Serial Comm Port .............................................. 10-1 10.1.1 Changing the Port on Your USB Communications Port .................................. 10-2
10.2 Configuring Your PC with a Native Serial Comm Port ................................................... 10-3 10.3 Configuring the S600+ to Use the Remote Front Panel ................................................ 10-4 10.4 Accessing the Remote Front Panel ............................................................................... 10-7
10.4.1 Remote Front Panel Startup Menu .................................................................. 10-7 10.4.2 Disabling the Remote Front Panel................................................................... 10-8 10.4.3 Restoring the Remote Front Panel .................................................................. 10-9
Chapter 11 Remote Archive Uploader
11-1
11.1 Accessing the Remote Archive Uploader ...................................................................... 11-2 11.2 Automatic Archive Polling .............................................................................................. 11-2
11.2.1 Configure Automatic Polling ............................................................................ 11-2 11.2.2 Add or Edit an Automatic Poll .......................................................................... 11-4 11.2.3 Enable Automatic Polling ................................................................................. 11-6 11.3 Manual Archive Polling................................................................................................... 11-6 11.3.1 Configuring Config600 Communications ......................................................... 11-7 11.3.2 Reload Tree ..................................................................................................... 11-8 11.3.3 Upload All Reports / Upload New Reports..................................................... 11-10 11.4 Viewing Reports ........................................................................................................... 11-11 11.4.1 Report Archive ............................................................................................... 11-11 11.5 Saving .......................................................................................................................... 11-12 11.5.1 Directory Settings (File Locations) ................................................................. 11-12 11.5.2 File Settings ................................................................................................... 11-13 11.5.3 Save As.......................................................................................................... 11-14 11.5.4 Folder Formats............................................................................................... 11-15 11.5.5 Data Integrity.................................................................................................. 11-17 11.6 Printing the Report ....................................................................................................... 11-18 11.6.1 Print................................................................................................................ 11-18 11.6.2 Print Preview .................................................................................................. 11-18 11.6.3 Print Setup ..................................................................................................... 11-19 11.7 Abort Transfer .............................................................................................................. 11-20
Chapter 12 Report Editor
12-1
12.1 Accessing the Report Editor .......................................................................................... 12-2 12.1.1 Via PCSetup .................................................................................................... 12-2 12.1.2 Via Report Editor.............................................................................................. 12-3 12.1.3 Report Names .................................................................................................. 12-5
12.2 Using the Report Editor.................................................................................................. 12-6 12.2.1 Adding a Data Point ......................................................................................... 12-7 12.2.2 Editing a Data Point ......................................................................................... 12-9 12.2.3 Adding Report Lines ........................................................................................ 12-9 12.2.4 Deleting Report Lines .................................................................................... 12-10
Chapter 13 Display Editor
13-1
13.1 Accessing the Display Editor ......................................................................................... 13-1 13.2 Navigating the Display Editor ......................................................................................... 13-2 13.3 Editing the Display Editor ............................................................................................... 13-3
13.3.1 Insert Menu ...................................................................................................... 13-5 13.3.2 Insert/Append Page ......................................................................................... 13-5 13.3.3 Edit Line ........................................................................................................... 13-5 13.3.4 Translate .......................................................................................................... 13-7 13.3.5 Save ................................................................................................................. 13-8 13.3.6 Menu/Page Clipboard ...................................................................................... 13-8
Revised January-2021
vii
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
13.4 Regenerating Displays ................................................................................................... 13-8
Chapter 14 Modbus Editor
14-1
14.1 Supported Function Codes ............................................................................................ 14-1 14.2 Accessing the Modbus Editor ........................................................................................ 14-2 14.3 Using the Modbus Editor................................................................................................ 14-2 14.4 Map Properties ............................................................................................................... 14-3
14.4.1 Insert a Data Point ........................................................................................... 14-5 14.4.2 Quick Insert ...................................................................................................... 14-6 14.4.3 Insert Special ................................................................................................... 14-6 14.4.4 Insert Special ................................................................................................... 14-7 14.4.5 Delete a Data Point.......................................................................................... 14-8 14.4.6 Edit Modbus Format......................................................................................... 14-8 14.4.7 Insert a Message ........................................................................................... 14-10 14.4.8 Insert a Slave ................................................................................................. 14-12 14.5 Regenerating Maps...................................................................................................... 14-12
Chapter 15 LogiCalc Editor
15-1
15.1 Accessing the LogiCalc Editor ....................................................................................... 15-2 15.1.1 LogiCalc Tips ................................................................................................... 15-4 15.1.2 Starting a LogiCalc........................................................................................... 15-5
15.2 Creating a LogiCalc........................................................................................................ 15-5 15.2.1 Variables .......................................................................................................... 15-6 15.2.2 LogiCalc Loops ................................................................................................ 15-7 15.2.3 LogiCalc Constants.......................................................................................... 15-8 15.2.4 Connecting to Data Items ................................................................................ 15-9 15.2.5 If/Then/Endif................................................................................................... 15-11 15.2.6 Special Functions........................................................................................... 15-12 15.2.7 Saving and Compiling a LogiCalc .................................................................. 15-13 15.2.8 Running a LogiCalc in Simulation Mode........................................................ 15-14
15.3 Installing a LogiCalc on the S600+ .............................................................................. 15-15 15.3.1 Remotely Debugging a LogiCalc ................................................................... 15-16
15.4 LogiCalc Examples ...................................................................................................... 15-16 15.4.1 Perform PTZ Calculations.............................................................................. 15-17 15.4.2 Convert Temperature Units ........................................................................... 15-18 15.4.3 Convert Density Units to Kgm3...................................................................... 15-18 15.4.4 Convert Density Units from Kgm3 ................................................................. 15-19 15.4.5 Perform PTZ Calculations and Convert Units................................................ 15-20 15.4.6 Perform PTZ Calculations on All Streams ..................................................... 15-22
15.5 LogiCalc Lanuage Specifications ................................................................................. 15-23 15.5.1 LogiCalc Statements...................................................................................... 15-23 15.5.2 Built-In Functions ........................................................................................... 15-26 15.5.3 Alarms ............................................................................................................ 15-28
Appendix A Glossary
A-1
Appendix B Proving
B-1
B.1 Bi-Directional (Ball) Prover Liquid Only.........................................................................B-2 B.1.1 Inputs/Outputs....................................................................................................B-3 B.1.2 Communications ................................................................................................ B-3 B.1.3 Pulse Measurement ........................................................................................... B-4 B.1.4 Sphere Switch Interface.....................................................................................B-5 B.1.5 Valve Interface ................................................................................................... B-8 B.1.6 Prove Sequence and Control.............................................................................B-9 B.1.7 Prover Run Control Stages..............................................................................B-20 B.1.8 Prove/Stream Data ..........................................................................................B-28 B.1.9 Prove Reports ..................................................................................................B-30
viii
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
B.1.10 Proving Calculations ........................................................................................B-31 B.2 Compact Prover Liquid Only .......................................................................................B-39
B.2.1 Inputs/Outputs..................................................................................................B-40 B.2.2 Communications ..............................................................................................B-41 B.2.3 Pulse Measurement .........................................................................................B-42 B.2.4 Proving Control Signal Timing .........................................................................B-42 B.2.5 Prove Sequence and Control...........................................................................B-44 B.2.6 Prover Run Control Stages..............................................................................B-54 B.2.7 Run Stage Abort Index.....................................................................................B-60 B.2.8 Run Stage Calculation Index ...........................................................................B-61 B.2.9 Prove/Stream Data ..........................................................................................B-61 B.2.10 Prove Reports ..................................................................................................B-63 B.2.11 Proving Calculations ........................................................................................B-64 B.3 Master Meter Prover Gas and Liquid ..........................................................................B-73 B.3.1 Master Meter/Stream combinations.................................................................B-75 B.3.2 Inputs/Outputs..................................................................................................B-76 B.3.3 Communications ..............................................................................................B-76 B.3.4 Pulse Measurement .........................................................................................B-76 B.3.5 Prove Sequence and Control...........................................................................B-77 B.3.6 Prover Run Control Stages..............................................................................B-86 B.3.7 Prove/Stream Data ..........................................................................................B-92 B.3.8 Prove Reports ..................................................................................................B-93 B.3.9 Proving Calculations ........................................................................................B-95
Appendix C Batching
C-1
C.1 Batching Overview ...........................................................................................................C-2 C.1.1 Product Table.....................................................................................................C-2 C.1.2 Station Batch Setup ...........................................................................................C-8 C.1.3 Product Detection Interface .............................................................................C-14 C.1.4 Slops Handling Examples................................................................................C-16
C.2 Batch Sequence and Control .........................................................................................C-17 C.2.1 Batch Sequence Stages ..................................................................................C-18 C.2.2 Retrospective Batch Totals..............................................................................C-27 C.2.3 Batch Alarms....................................................................................................C-28 C.2.4 Batch Report ....................................................................................................C-28
C.3 Interface Detection .........................................................................................................C-29 C.4 Batch Recalculation .......................................................................................................C-34
C.4.1 Displays ...........................................................................................................C-34 C.4.2 Batch Ticket .....................................................................................................C-38 C.4.3 Recalculating Batches .....................................................................................C-41 C.5 Flow Switching ...............................................................................................................C-50 C.5.1 Station Flow Switching Setup ..........................................................................C-50 C.5.2 Stream Flow Switching Setup..........................................................................C-52 C.5.3 Flow Switching Algorithms...............................................................................C-53 C.5.4 Alarms ..............................................................................................................C-56 C.6 Batch Stack ....................................................................................................................C-56 C.6.1 Configuring the Batch Stack Through the PCSetup Editor..............................C-57 C.6.2 Configuring the Batch Stack with the System Editor .......................................C-59 C.6.3 Configuring the Batch Stack through the Front Panel Display ........................C-61 C.6.4 Slot Edit Commands (Front Panel Display) .....................................................C-62 C.6.5 Configuring the Batch Stack from the Webserver ...........................................C-67 C.6.6 Slot Edit Commands (Webserver) ...................................................................C-68 C.7 Basic Batching Setup .....................................................................................................C-72
Appendix D Field Calibration
D-1
D.1 Analogue Input Calibration...............................................................................................D-1 D.1.1 Calibration Control Requirements......................................................................D-2 D.1.2 Linear Two-point ADC Device Calibration .........................................................D-3 D.1.3 Non-linear Three-point Curve-fit ADC Device Calibration .................................D-6 D.1.4 Non-linear Three-point Curve Calibration Control Mechanism..........................D-7
Revised January-2021
ix
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
D.1.5 Offset PRT Device Calibration...........................................................................D-8 D.1.6 Linear Two-point Device PRT Calibration..........................................................D-8 D.1.7 Non-linear Three-point Curve-Fit PRT Device Calibration ................................D-9 D.2 Analogue Output Calibration ..........................................................................................D-10 D.2.1 Calibration Control Requirements....................................................................D-10 D.2.2 DAC Device Calibration ...................................................................................D-11
Appendix E S600+ Database Objects and Fields
E-1
E.1 Database Objects.............................................................................................................E-2 E.1.1 ADC.................................................................................................................... E-2 E.1.2 ALARM...............................................................................................................E-3 E.1.3 ALARMHIST ...................................................................................................... E-3 E.1.4 ARRTXT.............................................................................................................E-3 E.1.5 CALCALMITEM ................................................................................................. E-4 E.1.6 CALCTAB .......................................................................................................... E-5 E.1.7 CONFTAB .......................................................................................................... E-6 E.1.8 CUMTOT............................................................................................................E-6 E.1.9 DACOUT ............................................................................................................ E-6 E.1.10 DIGIO ................................................................................................................. E-6 E.1.11 DOSETUP..........................................................................................................E-7 E.1.12 DPCELL ............................................................................................................. E-7 E.1.13 EVENTHIST ....................................................................................................... E-8 E.1.14 FREQT ............................................................................................................... E-8 E.1.15 HART ................................................................................................................. E-8 E.1.16 HARTTAB ........................................................................................................E-10 E.1.17 IOASSIGN........................................................................................................E-10 E.1.18 KPINT ..............................................................................................................E-10 E.1.19 KPINTARR.......................................................................................................E-10 E.1.20 KPREAL...........................................................................................................E-12 E.1.21 KPREALARR ...................................................................................................E-12 E.1.22 KPSTRING.......................................................................................................E-13 E.1.23 LOG..................................................................................................................E-13 E.1.24 MULTI ..............................................................................................................E-14 E.1.25 PID ...................................................................................................................E-14 E.1.26 PIP ...................................................................................................................E-14 E.1.27 POP..................................................................................................................E-14 E.1.28 PRDTOT ..........................................................................................................E-14 E.1.29 PRT ..................................................................................................................E-15 E.1.30 PRV_CTL.........................................................................................................E-16 E.1.31 REP00 REP39 ..............................................................................................E-17 E.1.32 SECURITY.......................................................................................................E-17 E.1.33 SYSOBJ...........................................................................................................E-17 E.1.34 TASK................................................................................................................E-17 E.1.35 TOTTAB...........................................................................................................E-17
E.2 Database Fields .............................................................................................................E-18 E.2.1 Alarm Text Tables............................................................................................E-19 E.2.2 Batching/Totalisation........................................................................................E-19 E.2.3 DIGIO Setup Table ..........................................................................................E-19 E.2.4 DP Stack Type .................................................................................................E-19 E.2.5 DP Live/Check Mode Selection .......................................................................E-19 E.2.6 DP Cut Off Mode..............................................................................................E-19 E.2.7 Event History Type...........................................................................................E-19 E.2.8 HART Poll Format............................................................................................E-20 E.2.9 HART Master Mode .........................................................................................E-20 E.2.10 I/O (P144) PID Type ........................................................................................E-20 E.2.11 Prover (P154) Dual Chronometry Switch Pair .................................................E-20 E.2.12 Prover (P154) Type..........................................................................................E-21 E.2.13 Password Tables .............................................................................................E-21 E.2.14 Truth Tables.....................................................................................................E-21 E.2.15 Turbine Meter Setup Tables ............................................................................E-21
x
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
E.3 Mode Tables ..................................................................................................................E-21 E.3.1 ADC/PRT/HART Modes (MODE TAB PLANTI/O)...........................................E-21 E.3.2 CALC/ALM Auto Switch Modes .......................................................................E-22 E.3.3 CALC/ALM modes (MODE TAB CALC) ..........................................................E-22 E.3.4 Density Transducer Modes (MODE TAB DENS IP) ........................................E-22 E.3.5 DP Modes (MODE TAB DP STACK)...............................................................E-22 E.3.6 HART Modes (MODE TAB PLANTI/O)............................................................E-23
Appendix F Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-1
F.1 Peer-to-Peer Link Input Functionality............................................................................... F-1 F.2 Enabling the Peer-to-Peer Link ........................................................................................ F-3
F.2.1 Configuring the Peer-to-Peer Link ..................................................................... F-4 F.3 Critical Data...................................................................................................................... F-9
F.3.1 Passing an Object from the Duty to the Standby S600+ ................................. F-14 F.3.2 Period Object Transfer..................................................................................... F-16 F.4 Automatic Failover ......................................................................................................... F-17 F.4.1 Configuring the S600+ for Automatic Failover................................................. F-19 F.5 External / Custom Failover Modes ................................................................................. F-25 F.6 Displays.......................................................................................................................... F-26 F.6.1 Control Displays ............................................................................................... F-26 F.6.2 Feed-back Displays ......................................................................................... F-27 F.6.3 Option Displays ................................................................................................ F-28 F.7 Downloading and Verifying the Peer to Peer Link ......................................................... F-28
Appendix G Firewall
G-1
G.1 Rules File ........................................................................................................................ G-1 G.1.1 *Filter Keyword.................................................................................................. G-2 G.1.2 Default Policies ................................................................................................. G-2 G.1.3 User Defined Chains......................................................................................... G-2
G.2 Adding Rules to the Chain .............................................................................................. G-3 G.2.1 Applying a Rule to a Range of IPs .................................................................... G-3 G.2.2 Inverting a Rule................................................................................................. G-3 G.2.3 After Checking the Rules .................................................................................. G-3 G.2.4 Committing the Rules........................................................................................ G-3
G.3 Operational Behaviour .................................................................................................... G-3
Appendix H CFX Reporting
H-1
H.1 Adding CFX Report Functionality to a Configuration File ................................................H-1 H.2 Enabling CFX at the Stream Level...................................................................................H-3 H.3 Changing CFX Settings from Config600..........................................................................H-4 H.4 Regenerating the CFX Report Template .........................................................................H-5 H.5 Generating a CFX Report from the Web Browser ...........................................................H-5 H.6 Understanding the CFX File Structure .............................................................................H-8
Appendix I Network Printing
I-1
I.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... I-1 I.1.1 Supported Printers .............................................................................................. I-2 I.1.2 Supported Paper Sizes ....................................................................................... I-2
I.2 Configuring Printers from PCSetup................................................................................... I-2 I.3 Configuring Printers from the S600+................................................................................. I-4
I.3.1 Configuring at Runtime ....................................................................................... I-4 I.3.2 Printer Options .................................................................................................... I-4
Revised January-2021
xi
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
I.4 Printing Retries.................................................................................................................. I-5 I.5 Editing Report Line Lengths.............................................................................................. I-5 I.6 Network Printing Alarms.................................................................................................... I-8
Appendix J Sampling
J-1
J.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... J-1 J.2 Input / Outputs.................................................................................................................. J-1
J.2.1 Sampler Output.................................................................................................. J-2 J.2.2 Sampler Can Select Output ............................................................................... J-2 J.3 Sampling Options ............................................................................................................. J-2 J.3.1 Sampler Method................................................................................................. J-2 J.3.2 Sampler Mode.................................................................................................... J-3 J.3.3 Can Fill Indicator ................................................................................................ J-4 J.3.4 Auto Disable....................................................................................................... J-4 J.3.5 Auto Restart ....................................................................................................... J-4 J.4 Sampling Sequence ......................................................................................................... J-5 J.5 Sampling Alarms ............................................................................................................ J-10 J.6 Sampling Displays.......................................................................................................... J-11 J.7 Sampling System Editor.............................................................................................. J-13
Appendix K Chromatographs
K-1
K.1 Station/Stream Assignment ............................................................................................. K-2 K.1.1 Single Metering Stream with No Station ............................................................ K-2 K.1.2 Multiple Metering Streams Assigned to a Common Station .............................. K-2 K.1.3 Individual Metering Streams Assigned to a Chromatograph ............................. K-2 K.1.4 Multiple Metering Streams Separately Assigned to a Stream ........................... K-3 K.1.5 Multiple S600+s Connected to a Single Chromatograph .................................. K-3
K.2 Inputs and Outputs ........................................................................................................... K-3 K.2.1 Main Setup Parameters ..................................................................................... K-4 K.2.2 Component Set Selection Inputs ....................................................................... K-4 K.2.3 Component Set Selection Outputs .................................................................... K-4 K.2.4 Telemetry Configuration Parameters.................................................................K-4 K.2.5 Telemetry Outputs ............................................................................................. K-5
K.3 Configuration Type: Keypad Mole Percentage Set Only ................................................. K-6 K.4 Configuration Type: 2551/2350 Euro ............................................................................... K-7
K.4.1 Telemetry Stages...............................................................................................K-7 K.4.2 Determining the Mole Percentage Set.............................................................K-11 K.4.3 Handling Operator Commands ........................................................................K-11 K.5 Configuration Type: 2251/2350 USA .............................................................................K-11 K.5.1 Telemetry Stages.............................................................................................K-12 K.5.2 Determining the Mole Percentage Set.............................................................K-13 K.5.3 Handling Operator Commands ........................................................................K-14 K.6 Configuration Type: Siemens.........................................................................................K-14 K.6.1 Telemetry Stages.............................................................................................K-14 K.6.2 Determining the Mole Percentage Set.............................................................K-16 K.6.3 Handling Operator Commands ........................................................................K-17 K.7 Configuration Type: Generic ..........................................................................................K-17 K.7.1 Telemetry Stages.............................................................................................K-17 K.7.2 Determining the Mole Percentage Set.............................................................K-19 K.7.3 Handling Operator Commands ........................................................................K-20 K.8 Configuration Type: Download from Supervisory System .............................................K-20 K.9 Normalisation, Additionals, and C+6 Handling ..............................................................K-20 K.9.1 Normalisation ...................................................................................................K-20 K.9.2 Application of Additionals.................................................................................K-21 K.9.3 C6+ Handling ...................................................................................................K-21 K.9.4 C6+ Handling (SIM 2251 Method) ...................................................................K-21 K.9.5 C7+ Handling ...................................................................................................K-22 K.9.6 No C6+ or C7+ Handling .................................................................................K-23 K.10 Alarms, Displays, Reports, and Maps............................................................................K-23 K.10.1 Alarms ..............................................................................................................K-23
xii
Revised January-2021
Index
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
K.10.2 Displays ...........................................................................................................K-23 K.10.3 Reports ............................................................................................................K-24 K.10.4 Modbus Maps ..................................................................................................K-27
Index-1
Revised January-2021
xiii
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual [This page is intentionally left blank.]
xiv
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
In This Chapter
1.1 Enhancements in this Version ............................................................ 1-1 1.2 Configuration Updates ........................................................................ 1-2 1.3 Scope of Manual................................................................................. 1-2 1.4 Software Basics .................................................................................. 1-4 1.5 Installing Config600 ............................................................................ 1-5 1.6 Accessing Config600 .......................................................................... 1-9 1.7 Activating Config600......................................................................... 1-10 1.8 Additional Technical Information ...................................................... 1-12
This manual describes how to use the Config600TM configuration software suite of editors (referred to as "Config600") to configure the FloBossTM S600+ Flow Computer (referred to as "S600+"). The software runs on a personal computer (PC) running Microsoft® Windows® 2000 with Service Pack 2, XP, Vista®, Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit), Windows 10 (32-bit or 64-bit), or Server 2003. Refer to the technical specification ConfigTM 600 Configuration Software (Config600).
This manual discusses configuring S600+ options, including calculations; input/output (I/O); communications; Proportional, Integral, and Derivative (PID) loops; stations; streams; displays; Modbus maps; LogiCalc programming; and reports.
Use this manual in conjunction with the FloBoss S600+ Flow Manager Instruction Manual (part D301150X412).
Caution When implementing control using this product, observe best industry practices as suggested by applicable and appropriate environmental, health, and safety organizations.
This chapter details the structure of this manual and provides an overview of the Config600 software.
1.1 Enhancements
Version 3.3 Enhancements for version 3.3 include: Support for AGA8 2017 Part 1 and Part 2. Support for ISO 6976:2016. Support for Serial / Pulse selection for Ultrasonic. Support for Dual Gas Chromatograph. Support for Dual (or Secondary) Engineering Units. Support for ISO 17089.
Note: Current implementation of the ISO 17089 standard is only applicable to DanielTM JuniorSonicTM Two-Path Gas Ultrasonic Flow Meters.
Revised January-2021
Introduction
1-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1.2 Configuration Updates
The S600+ CPU module has also been enhanced and now contains an upgraded version of firmware. You can download existing configurations from earlier versions of Config600 without change. However, if you use the latest version of Config600 to modify an old configuration, the configuration file upgrades and will work only with version 8 and above. That means you can no longer use old versions of Config600 to edit that configuration. When you open an older configuration in the current version of Config600, the following dialog box displays:
Figure 1-1. Config Upgrade dialog
If you click OK to upgrade, you cannot then use this configuration on an S600+ which has firmware less that version 0.6.05. If you need to use this configuration on older S600+ flow computers, click Close ( ) to end this process. We suggest you then re-create this configuration using the most current version of Config600 or create a copy of the old configuration.
1.3 Scope of Manual
This manual contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 2 PCSetup Editor
Chapter 3 System Setup Configuration Chapter 4 I/O and Comms Configuration Chapter 5 Station Configuration Chapter 6 Stream Configuration Chapter 7 Advanced Setup Configuration
Description
Defines the scope of the document, provides an overview of the Config600 software, and details how to install the software.
Describes the PCSetup Editor interface, the configuration generator, how to save configurations, and the System Graphic utility.
Describes the System Setup screens (Versions, Units, Reports, and Totalisation) in the PCSetup Editor, and the configuration wizard.
Describes the Input/Output (I/O) assignment screens, the PID loop settings screens, and the communication task settings screen in the PCSetup Editor.
Describes the Station Settings screens in the PCSetup Editor.
Describes the Stream Settings screens in the PCSetup Editor.
Describes the Advanced Setup screens (Conversions, Totals Descriptors, Alarms, Security, and Displays/Webserver) in the PCSetup Editor and the Calc Explorer utility.
1-2
Introduction
Revised January-2021
PRO PRO
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter Chapter 8 System Editor
Chapter 9 Config Transfer
Chapter 10 Remote Front Panel
Chapter 11 Remote Archive Uploader Chapter 12 Report Editor Chapter 13 Display Editor Chapter 14 Modbus Editor Chapter 15 LogiCalc Editor
Appendix A: Glossary Appendix B: Proving
Appendix C: Batching
Appendix D: Field Calibration
Appendix E: S600+ Database Objects and Fields
Appendix F: Peer-toPeer Communications
Appendix G: Firewall
Appendix H: CFX
Appendix I: Network Printing Index
Description
Describes the advanced configuration editor, the System Editor (which includes Station Mapping). Note: This utility is available only with Config600 Pro.
Describes the configuration transfer utility. Use this utility to send new or modified files to the S600+ over either a dedicated serial port or a TCP/IP connection. Config Transfer also enables you to retrieve configuration files from the host PC to the S600+.
Describes how to set up the Remote Front Panel to configure your S600+ and perform certain functions from your PC. Note: The Remote Front Panel requires part
S600+EXT (the licence key for Remote Front Panel)
Describes how to automatically upload all reports and alarms in the historical archive in the S600+ flow computer.
Describes the report format editor.
Describes the editor you use to customize the front panel and webserver displays of the S600+.
Describes the Modbus map editor.
Describes the editing tool for the LogiCalc programming language. Note: This tool is available only with Config600 Pro.
Provides definitions of acronyms and terms.
Provides a description of the three proving methods Confi600 supports: bi-directional (and uni-directional), compact, and master meter.
Describes the type of batch method you can use for non-permanent flows or "start-stop" batching.
Describes hardware calibration you perform after production to determine the relationship between analogue converter counts and current.
Provides an alphabetic listing of the database objects you can access through the Connect Wizard (which is part of the Report Editor, Modbus Editor, LogiCalc Editor, Display Editor, and System Editor).
Describes the bi-directional communications link between the A and B computers allowing the duty S600+ to update the standby S600+ with any operator changes made locally at the duty S600+ keypad or through the supervisory system.
Provides information detailing the S600+ firewall to keep out unwanted incoming network connections.
Provides information on creating Common File eXchange (CFX) reports.
Provides information on network printing options for the S600+.
Provides an alphabetic listing of items and topics contained in this manual.
Revised January-2021
Introduction
1-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1.4 Software Basics
Config600 software is a Microsoft Windows-based suite of tools that enables you to configure and communicate with the S600+ using a host PC. The software has three versions:
Config600 Lite, which provides a basic set of tools designed to help you modify existing configurations.
Config600 Lite Plus, which adds a tool to create configurations to Config600 Lite.
Config600 Pro, which provides a more powerful set of tools to help you create and manage configurations.
Note: If you are new to the S600+, review Chapter 2, PCSetup Editor. This section describes the basic steps involved in configuring your S600+ for your application. You can then use the PCSetup Editor (available in Config600 Pro) to edit existing configurations.
Table 1-1 compares the tools available in each version.
Table 1-1. Config600 Tools
Tool PCSetup Config Transfer Report Editor Modbus Editor Display Editor LogiCalc Editor System Editor Config Generator Remote Archive Uploader1 Remote Front Panel1 Version History
Config600 Lite X X X X X
Config600 Lite Plus X X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Config600 Pro X X X X X X X X X X X
1Remote Archive Uploader and Remote Front Panel are extended functions of Config600 which you must license separately to use. Contact your sales representative for further information.
Using the PCSetup Editor in Config600, you define the initial S600+ configuration settings for gas, liquid, or prover applications. These initial configurations include system setup, Input/Output (I/O) setup, stations, and streams. You save these configurations to a configuration directory on the host PC. Using the Config Transfer utility, you send ("download") the configuration to the S600+ through a serial or Ethernet communications port. The download also stores the sent configuration permanently in the S600+'s memory.
With Config600 Pro software, you can:
Use the Config Generator Wizard to create new configurations.
Use the Config Transfer utility to send or receive the configuration to the S600+ through a serial or Ethernet communications port. The exchange also stores the send configuration permanently in the S600+'s memory.
1-4
Introduction
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Use the Display Editor to configure front panel/webserver displays.
Use the LogiCalc Editor to configure LogiCalc applications. Use the Modbus Editor to configure Modbus communications. Use the PCSetup Editor to define the initial S600+ configuration
settings for gas, liquid, or prover applications. These initial configurations include system setup, Input/Output setup, stations, and streams. You save these configurations to a configuration directory on the host PC. Use the Remote Archive Uploader to automatically upload all reports in the historical archive in the S600+ and manually upload other types of files. Use the Remote Front Panel to configure the S600+ to run from the PC. Use the Report Editor to generate system reports. Use the System Editor to configure the S600+ database. Use the Version History text file to view a change history document that explains changes and updates to the Config600 and S600+.
Note: To get help on a specific screen, press F1 or click Help. You can also modify the size of the Config600 editor window by clicking and dragging the lower right corner of the window. When configuration panes have scroll bars, modify the window size to make sure you can view all the configuration settings.
1.5 Installing Config600
Remote Automation Solutions distributes Config600 software either on a CD-ROM or as a downloadable zipped file. You can install Config600 software on a PC running Windows 2000 with Service Pack 2, XP, Vista®, Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit), Windows 10 (32-bit or 64-bit), or Server 2003.
Note: Refer to the product data sheets S600+ and Config600 (available https://www.emerson.com/en-us/catalog/emersonfloboss-s600) for complete product requirements and specifications.
To install Config600:
1. Place the Config600 installation CD-ROM in your PC's CD or DVD drive. The installation should begin automatically.
2. If the CD-ROM does not run automatically, click Start > Run. When the Run dialog box opens, click Browse, navigate to the CDROM drive, and select setup.exe. Click Open. The system completes the file location. Click OK in the Run dialog box.
Revised January-2021
Introduction
1-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: If you are using a zipped executable file, download the file to a temporary location (the installation program installs the file in (C:\Users\<<USERNAME>>\Config600 3.3). Unzip the file and click setup.exe.
The Installation Wizard screen displays, and determines whether you have previously installed Config600. 3. If this is a new installation, the Config600 Welcome screen displays, followed by a License Agreement screen.
Figure 1-2. License Agreement
4. Review the license agreement and click I Agree to continue. A Choose Components screen displays.
1-6
Introduction
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 1-3. Choose Components Note: Config600 Pro activation codes/licences are issued only to
those who successfully complete the RA901 Advanced Config600 training course. 5. Select to install the version of Config600 you have purchased and click Next. The installation wizard identifies the default destination folder (C:\Users\<<USERNAME>>\Config600 3.3). Note: Attendance at the Config600 Pro training class is required to use Config600 Pro.
Revised January-2021
Introduction
1-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 1-4. Install Location
6. Click Browse to select an alternative installation folder. 7. Click Install. As the installation proceeds, the installation wizard
displays a screen showing the progress of the installation.
Figure 1-5. Installation Progress
8. When the installation completes, the wizard displays a completion screen.
1-8
Introduction
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 1-6. Installation Complete
9. Click Close to end the installation.
Note: You may need to restart your PC to complete the installation.
1.6 Accessing Config600
After you successfully install the Config600 software, you can access the application suite either of two ways.
Create applicationspecific shortcut icons your desktop. Select Start > All Programs > Config600 3.3 and select an
application from the menu.
Note: If you have installed the Lite or Lite Plus version, that option appears in the selection menu.
Revised January-2021
Introduction
1-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 1-7. Config600 Menu
Which method you choose depends on personal preference. Proceed to Chapter 2, PCSetup Editor, for further information on the PCSetup utility.
1.7 Activating Config600
After you successfully install the software, you must next activate it. The activation screen (see Figure 1-8) displays when you attempt to open any of the Config600 component tools:
Note:
Remote Archive Uploader can be used for a 30-day trial period after which an activation license must be obtained.
There is no trial period available for Lite / Lite+ / Pro an activation license must be obtained before use.
1-10
Introduction
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 1-8. Config600 Activation Screen
Click Email Codes to send a request to CST.RASEurope@emerson.com for an activation code. The email automatically captures your Site Code and Machine ID.
Note: Each installation of Config600 is unique. Each copy of Config600 you install requires its own activation code.
Once you obtain an activation code, select Unlock application, enter the code in the Activation Code field, and click Continue. The Config600 utility you select opens.
Note: Config600 Pro activation codes/licences are issued only to those who successfully complete the RA901 Advanced Config600 training course.
Re-installing If you need to move your copy of Config600 to a new PC, un-install Config600 the software using PCSetup. The process generates a code you send to CST.RASEurope@emerson.com. You still need to provide the unique site code and machine ID.
Use the authorization code you receive in return to re-activate Config600.
Revised January-2021
Introduction
1-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Changing the If you manually reset the clock on your PC, it is possible that PC Clock Config600 may stop working and require you to re-authorize the software. This is not a problem if you allow the PC software to automatically accommodate changes for daylight saving time.
1.8 Additional Technical Information
Refer to the following technical documentation (available at www.EmersonProcess.com/Remote) for additional and most-current information.
Table 1-2. Additional Technical Information
Document Name FloBossTM S600+ Flow Computer Instruction Manual FloBossTM S600+ Flow Computer Product Data Sheet ConfigTM 600 Configuration Software Product Data Sheet FloBossTM S600+ Field Upgrade Guide
Form Number A6115 S600+
Config600 A6299
Part Number D301150X412 D301151X012 D301164X012 D301668X412
1-12
Introduction
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 2 PCSetup Editor
In This Chapter
2.1 Create a New Configuration ............................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Name the Configuration (Step 1 of 6).................................... 2-2 2.1.2 Select Measurement Units (Step 2 of 6)................................ 2-3 2.1.3 Specify I/O (Step 3 of 6) ........................................................ 2-4 2.1.4 Specify Stations (Step 4 of 6) ................................................ 2-5 2.1.5 Define Streams (Step 5 of 6) ................................................. 2-8 2.1.6 Select Communications (Step 6 of 6) .................................. 2-15
2.2 Analyse a Configuration (System Graphic) ...................................... 2-17 2.3 Open an Existing Configuration (PCSetup Editor) ........................... 2-23
2.3.1 Navigating the PCSetup Editor ............................................ 2-25 2.3.2 The Icon Bar ........................................................................ 2-26 2.4 The Menu Bar ................................................................................... 2-27 2.5 Managing Configurations.................................................................. 2-28 2.5.1 Save a Configuration ........................................................... 2-28 2.5.2 Regenerate a Configuration ................................................ 2-28 2.6 Display Editor.................................................................................... 2-29 2.7 Config Transfer Utility ....................................................................... 2-29 2.8 Config Organiser Utility..................................................................... 2-29
When you start Config600 Pro, the Welcome to Config600 screen displays (see Figure 2-1). Using this screen, you can create a new S600+ configuration, open an existing configuration, transfer data between a PC and the S600+, access on-line help, or control whether the Welcome screen displays when you start the software.
Figure 2-1. Config600 Welcome
2.1 Create a New Configuration
The Configuration Wizard provides several ways for you to create a new configuration:
Revised January-2021
PCSetup Editor
2-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Click the New icon on the PCSetup Editor's toolbar. Click Start > All Programs > Config600 3.3 > Config
Generator. Click the icon next to the Create a new configuration option
from the PCSetup Editor's Welcome to Config600 Screen (View > Startup Screen).
Note: You can also start the Configuration Generator by selecting File > New from the PCSetup screen. The Configuration Generator is included in both the Config600 Pro and Config600 Lite Plus software suites.
The Configuration Generator is a wizard-based software assistant that asks a series of questions to simplify the six-step process of creating a new S600+ configuration file. The wizard also validates your selections to prevent errors. Once you finish, the wizard saves the configuration settings to a file. You can modify the configuration and then send the configuration to the S600+.
2.1.1 Name the Configuration (Step 1 of 6)
Note: All screens in this section are examples intended to show all possible options and do not represent actual configurations.
Use the first screen in the wizard (Figure 2-2) to provide a name and brief description for the configuration file.
Figure 2-2. Configuration Generator, Step 1
1. Enter a name for the configuration. Keep the name short (up to 20 alphanumeric characters) for easy identification.
2-2
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: This step is mandatory. 2. Enter a description for the configuration.
Note: The Configuration Generator displays the name you give the file on the running configuration. This optional description is for your information only.
3. Click Next.
2.1.2 Select Measurement Units (Step 2 of 6)
Use the second screen in the wizard (Figure 2-3) to set the units of measurement for the configuration.
Figure 2-3. Configuration Generator, Step 2
1. Select the units of measurement the S600+ uses. Valid values are Metric or Imperial. The default is Metric. Click to display more values.
Caution This choice affects how Config600 handles a number of options,
including the default ADC and PRT modes, maintenance mode interlock, alarm latch mode, and others.
Note: You can modify this initial setting after you complete the wizard.
2. Click Next.
Revised January-2021
PCSetup Editor
2-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2.1.3
Specify Modules (Step 3 of 6)
Use the third screen in the wizard (Figure 2-4) to indicate the number of I/O, optional HART, and optional prover modules installed in the S600+ for this configuration.
Figure 2-4. Configuration Generator, Step 3
1. Click and to indicate the number and kinds of modules physically installed in the S600+. The S600+ chassis can house up to three modules:
Module I/O Module (P144)
HART Module (P188)
Prover Module (P154)
Description
Each I/O module can handle up to two streams and include both analog and digital I/O.
Note: You must include at least one I/O module in each configuration.
This module enables the S600+ to communicate with HART® devices using the HART protocol. Each HART module has 12 channels, and each channel can accept up to eight devices. However, you cannot have more than 50 devices attached to any one HART module.
The Prover module provides the functions required for liquid prover applications. It is mandatory if you select a prover as part of this configuration.
Note: You can include only one Prover module in any configuration.
2. Click Next.
2-4
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2.1.4
Specify Stations (Step 4 of 6)
Use the fourth screen in the wizard (Figure 2-5) to indicate the number (up to two) and type (gas or liquid) of stations in the configuration. The wizard defaults to one gas station.
You can define a maximum of two provers (ball, compact, or master meter), one for each station.
Figure 2-5. Configuration Generator, Step 4
1. Indicate the number of stations (to a maximum of two) for this configuration. Click or to add or delete stations.
2. Indicate whether the station handles Gas or Liquid. Click to display additional values. The default value is Gas.
3. Click Options to display a list of default values for each type of station. The station options for gas and liquid differ.
Note: As you modify these options, Config600 displays a summary of the options you select.
Revised January-2021
PCSetup Editor
2-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Summary of selected options
Figure 2-6. Gas Station Options Summary
For a Gas station, select the appropriate options. Config600 initially highlights default values.
Option Densitometer/ No Densitometer Single Chromat/ Dual Chromat/ No Chromat MM Prover/ No Prover
Batching/ No Batching Flow Switching/ No Flow Switching Sampling/ No Sampling
Description Performs calculations using densitometer input at the station. Performs calculations using chromatograph input(s) at the station.
Uses a Master Meter Prover. Note: This option requires an associated metering
stream. Only MM volume v Stream volume is
supported. Performs station batch handling. Enable batch reports and totals. Balances the station flow by opening and closing streams. Performs single or twin can sampling.
Note: As you select options, the Additional Options Selected frame (at bottom of the Options screen) summarizes your selections (see Figure 2-7).
2-6
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Summary of selected options
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 2-7. Gas Station Options Summarized
For a Liquid station, select the appropriate options. Config600 initially highlights default values.
Figure 2-8. Liquid Station Options Summary screens
Revised January-2021
PCSetup Editor
2-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Option Option1
Option2 Option3
Ball Prover
Compact Prover MM Prover
No Prover Batching No Batching Flow Switching No Flow Switching Sampling No Sampling Product Table No Product Table
Description Performs no liquid volume calculations at the station. Station standard density is available as a keypad input.
Measures header density but performs no liquid volume calculations at the station.
Calculates station standard density using header density with header temperature and pressure at all station inputs.
Uses a bi-directional or uni-directional prover.
Note: Ball provers are also known as "pipe provers."
Uses a Daniels® Compact ProverTM
Uses a master meter prover.
Note: This option requires an associated metering
stream. The following combinations are supported:
MM volume v Stream volume, MM volume v Stream Mass and MM Mass v Stream Mass.
Indicates this station does not perform prover runs.
Indicates if the station performs batch handling. Enable batch reports and totals.
Indicates if the station balances station flow by opening and closing streams.
Indicates if the station performs no sampling or twin can sampling.
Permits multiple product selection for pipeline batching applications. Select No Product Table to use a single product for continuous flow metering.
Note: As you select options, the graphic in the screen changes and the Additional Options Selected frame (at the bottom of the Options screen) summarizes your selections.
4. Click Additionals to include any optional calculations in the configuration. Config600 opens a text box you use to record the additional calculations.
5. Click OK when you finish adding optional calculations.
6. Click Next.
2.1.5 Define Streams (Step 5 of 6)
Use the fifth screen in the wizard (Figure 2-9) to associate streams and stations. You indicate the number of streams, the type of stream (gas, liquid, or RTU), link the stream to a station, and select stream options.
2-8
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Notes:
For station summation of stream flowrates to work correctly, all stations must have at least one stream configured.
Although you can define up to 10 streams, a standard S600+ chassis can hold only three I/O modules. Each I/O module only has two dual-pulse inputs (2 turbines), so a standard S600+ can support only six dual-pulse turbine streams. However, it could support up to 10 single-pulse or 10 single-cell gas DPs.
Config600 uses the options you selected up to this point to determine operational values, including stream flow rate, density, flow weighted averages, and other specific values, for each type of stream (gas, liquid, or RTU).
Note: The Graphic Preview button that appears on this screen provides a graphic representation of your configuration.
Figure 2-9. Configuration Generator, Step 5
1. Click or to add and delete streams (up to six dual-pulse or ten single-pulse). The screen initially displays only one stream.
Note: If you are configuring a prover application and require remote streams, then set the number of streams to 0 and select Next. You will then be prompted to select the number of remote streams you require (up to 10).
2. Click to select a type (gas, liquid, or RTU) for each stream.
Revised January-2021
PCSetup Editor
2-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: So that S600+ flow computers can share information, you must group similar types of streams together (that is, gas with gas and liquid with liquid) and assign streams to stations. Config600 displays a warning message at the bottom of the screen and disables Next and Graphic Preview. Until you resolve these errors you cannot complete the configuration.
3. Click to select a meter to associate with each stream type.
Stream Type Gas Liquid
Options Coriolis, DP, Turbine, Ultrasonic Coriolis, Turbine, Ultrasonic
RTU
Standard (only option)
4. Click to select a station for each stream-and-meter combination.
Notes:
The RTU stream type essentially collects data for additional I/O handling and has no metering function. Consequently, you cannot associate an RTU stream with a specific metering station. No Station is the appropriate selection.
If you defined two stations on screen 4, the wizard reflects those definitions in the choices at this step on screen 5.
5. Click Options to select the processing options for the first stream (in this example, gas). Config600 displays an Options summary screen with default values.
Note: The Options summary screens are different for gas, liquid, and RTU streams.
Figure 2-10. Gas Stream Options Summary For a Gas stream, select the appropriate options:
2-10
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: The Options summary screens are different for each gas combination. This is a general list of all options; some options may not be available for your selected configuration.
Option Option 1 GOST
Option 2 GOST Option 3 PUREGAS
Station Densitometer
Stream Densitometer No Densitometer
Moles from Station Chromat
Moles from Station Only
Moles at Individual Stream Flowrate AGA3 Volume Flowrate AGA3 Mass Flowrate ISO5167
Flowrate ISO5167 Wet Gas Flowrate Annubar Flowrate VCone
Flowrate VCone Wet Gas Flowrate Daniel
Flowrate QSonic Flowrate SICK CV AGA5 CV GOST CV ISO6976
CV GPA2172-ASTM D3588 Z AGA8
Z NX19 Z SGERG
Description Determines GOST DP using SGERG calculations. Determines GOST DP using VNIC calculations. Determines DP using standard PUREGAS calculations. Measures density at station and transfers density to dependent stream. You must configure a station. Measures density at stream.
Does not measure density at stream or station. This is a default. Uses selectively distributed (from station) analysis data telemetered from the chromatograph to streams with matching cycle number. Uses individual keypad sets. Uses station's in-use moles directly (that is, the station's common set). Does not use local stream moles. Uses stream moles directly (independently of local). This is the default. Determines volume flowrate using AGA3 calculations. Determines mass flowrate using AGA3 calculations. Determines flowrate using ISO5167 calculations. This is a default. Determines flowrate using ISO5167 calculations for wet gas. Determines flowrate using Annubar calculations. Determines flowrate using McCrometer V-Cone® calculations. Determines flowrate using McCrometer V-Cone calculations for wet gas. Receives flowrate from a Daniel Junior or Senior sonic meter. Receives flowrate from a QSonic meter. Receives flowrate from a SICK meter. Performs the AGA5 calorific calculation. Performs the GOST calorific calculation. Performs the ISO6976 calorific calculation. This is the default. Performs the GPA2172-ASTM D3588 calorific calculation. Performs the AGA8 compressibility calculation using DETAIL, GROSS 0, GROSS 1, GROSS 2, or VNIC methods. This is the default. Performs the NX19 compressibility calculation. Performs the SGERG compressibility calculation.
PCSetup Editor
2-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Option Z PUREGAS Z Ethylene Z Steam JT ISOTR9464
Valves No Valves Batching No Batching
Sampling No Sampling TFWA x 4
TFWA x 8 PID with Overrides
Description Performs the pure gas compressibility calculation.
Performs ethylene and propylene compressibility calculation.
Performs compressibility calculation using steam tables.
Calculates the Joule-Thompson coefficient according to ISO/PDTR 9464 2005 section 5.1.5.4.4.
Indicates whether the stream monitors and optionally drives valves. No Valves is the default.
Indicates whether the stream performs batch monitoring and control. You need to configure batch reporting to include batch totals objects. No Batching is the default.
Indicates whether the stream performs twin can sampling. No Sampling is the default.
Indicates whether the stream calculates four time- and flow-weighted averages. This is the default.
Indicates whether the stream calculates eight time- and flow-weighted averages.
Indicates a single or dual PID control loop with override.
Note: As you select options, the Additional Options Selected frame (at the bottom of the Options screen) summarises your selections (this screen shows a variety of options). You may need to scroll down the summary to view all the summarised values.
Figure 2-11. Gas Stream Options Summarized
2-12
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 2-12. Liquid Stream Options Summary
For a Liquid stream, select the appropriate options:
Option Option1
Description
Calculates standard density using header density (from station input) with header temperature and pressure (from stream inputs). Calculates meter density using standard density with meter temperature and pressure.
Option2
Calculates meter density using station standard density and meter temperature and pressure.
Revised January-2021
PCSetup Editor
2-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Option Option3
Option4
Option5
Valves No Valves Batching No Batching
Sampling No Sampling Product Table with History
Product Table Advanced
Product Table Basic
No Product Table TFWA x 4
TFWA x 8 PID with Override
Description
Calculates standard density using header density (from stream inputs) with header temperature and pressure (from stream inputs). Calculates meter density using standard density with meter temperature and pressure.
Calculates standard using meter density (from stream inputs) with meter temperature and pressure.
Calculates meter density using stream standard density with meter temperature and pressure inputs. This is the default.
Indicates whether the stream monitors and optionally drives valves. Valves is the default.
Indicates whether the stream performs batch monitoring and control and configures batch reporting to include batch totals objects. No Batching is the default.
Indicates whether the stream performs twin can sampling. No Sampling is the default.
Selects meter factor history and multiple products for batching applications with productspecific meter factor and K-factor curves for each product.
Note: You must select Product Table with History in order to use the Prover MF Deviation Check stage.
Selects multiple products (manual only) for pipeline batching applications with productspecific meter factor and K-factor curves for each product.
Selects multiple products (manual only) for pipeline batching applications with non-productspecific meter factor and K-factor curves.
Selects a single product for continuous flow metering applications. This is the default.
Indicates whether the stream calculates four time- and flow-weighted averages. This is the default.
Indicates whether the stream calculates eight time- and flow-weighted averages.
Indicates a single or dual PID control loop with override.
Note: As you select options, the graphic in the centre of the page changes (as shown in Figure 2-12), and the Additional Options Selected frame (at the bottom of the Options screen) summarises your selections. You may need to scroll down the summary to view all the summarised values (see Figure 2-13).
2-14
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Summary of selected options
Additional summarized options
Figure 2-13. Liquid Stream Options Summarized
For an RTU stream, the only valid station/stream combination is Standard and No Station.
6. Click Next.
Note: As you select options, Config600 checks to make sure your selections are valid and displays appropriate messages at the bottom of the screen (see Figure 2-9). If an error message displays, Config600 also greys out the Next button to prevent you from finalising an invalid configuration. You must resolve the configuration error before you can finalise your configuration in Step 6.
2.1.6
Select Communications (Step 6 of 6)
Use the sixth screen in the wizard (Figure 2-14) to indicate the external communications for the S600+. The selections depend on the defined stream and station types.
Revised January-2021
PCSetup Editor
2-15
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 2-14. Configuration Generator, Step 6
1. Select the check boxes to include an optional Modbus slave link and Peer to Peer link in the configuration.
Note: The wizard displays only those options relevant to the configuration you have defined in the previous five screens. Valid port options (based on the configuration) include Modbus Slave, Peer to Peer, Chromatograph, Ultrasonic, Coriolis, and Prover.
2. Indicate the addresses for up to 10 prover remote streams.
Notes:
This option appears if you define a single liquid station with a prover option (in Step 4) and no streams (in Step 5). Alternately, if you define a master meter (MM) prover in Step 4, that selection requires you to define one stream for data (Step 5).
If you define stream 1 and stream 2 in the same S600+, enter the same Modbus address for each stream. If the streams are in separate S600+s, enter unique addresses.
Prover remote streams enable you to define Modbus links to other S600+s. You can then use the station prover defined in this configuration to prove up to 10 other S600+s.
3. Click Finish to complete the configuration process. (This may take several seconds to complete.) As the wizard creates the configuration and saves it to the Configs folder, a dialog box displays indicating progress:
2-16
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 2-15. Generating Config dialog box
Note: The configuration generator can only create a new configuration where all of the metering streams are in the same unit as the prover or where all the metering streams are in different S600+ flow computers than the prover application. If you need to create a configuration where some metering streams are in a different S600+ and some streams are in the S600+ that houses the prover application, contact technical support.
4. When the process completes, the S600 PCSetup screen redisplays, showing a graphic representation of your configuration. (Figure 216 is an example graphic):
Figure 2-16. Example System Graphic
2.2 Analyse a Configuration (System Graphic)
System Graphic is the top-most option in the hierarchy menu located on the left side of the S600 PCSetup screen. This is also the default view whenever you open a configuration (see Section 2.3, Open an Existing Configuration).
The System Graphic provides a graphically based analysis of the configuration file you've created or selected. Using the graphic, you can quickly review station or stream settings or correct any errors in the configuration.
Revised January-2021
PCSetup Editor
2-17
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: For further information on selecting and assigning input options, refer to Chapter 5, Station Configuration or Chapter 6, Stream Configuration.
Figure 2-17. System Graphic (Stations and Streams) In the figure above, note the black rectangles labeled Station1 Calculations and Stream1 Calculations. When you move the cursor over one of these blocks, Config600 expands that block to show all the values defined for that stream or station:
Figure 2-18. Stream Values (expanded)
If necessary, you can click on a value in the expanded block (such as Gas Properties) to display the Config600 screen that defines those values:
2-18
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 2-19. Value selection (expanded)
Red circles in the System Graphic alert you to unassigned inputs. When you click on a red circle, Config600 displays a screen within the system hierarchy you can use to assign those inputs.
Revised January-2021
PCSetup Editor
2-19
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 2-20. Input Values (expanded)
Once you assign inputs, you can reselect System Graphic. Config600 removes the red alerting circles (as in the case of the analogue meters):
2-20
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 2-21. Input Values (assigned)
In addition to alerting you to inputs you may need to assign, the System Graphic also provides other icons you can select. When you move the cursor over a selectable icon, the cursor changes to the image of a hand. For example, double-clicking the communication icon accesses the Communications screen:
Revised January-2021
PCSetup Editor
2-21
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 2-22. Selectable icons
Once you are familiar with system components, you can use the System Graphic to review and modify the components of your configuration file.
2-22
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2.3 Open an Existing Configuration (PCSetup Editor)
Using the Configuration wizard you can quickly create a basic configuration file. You can then use the PCSetup Editor to edit and customize the basic settings in an existing configuration file to meet an application's specific requirements.
Note: While you cannot edit a configuration file that resides and is active (online) on the S600+, it is possible to change the configuration using the Front Panel or Webserver.
Editing a configuration includes changing the default values and setting alternative I/O configurations, screen definitions, report formats, and external communications links. You can: Change measurement units. Configure reports. Assign and re-assign I/O. Configure communications links. Enable/disable alarms. Change cold start values (such as densitometer constants). Change descriptors. Configure existing calculations. Change passwords.
Note: You cannot add new calculations to a configuration using the PCSetup Editor.
To edit an existing configuration file: 1. Open a configuration file in one of several ways:
Click the Open icon on the PCSetup Editor's toolbar. Click File > Open in the PCSetup Editor. Click the icon next to the Open an existing configuration
option on the Welcome to Config600 screen (Figure 2-1) to open a previously created configuration file. The Select Config screen displays:
Revised January-2021
Figure 2-23. Select Config...
PCSetup Editor
2-23
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Click the name of a configuration file in the left-hand pane. Note that the OK and Delete buttons in the right-hand pane become active, and the software completes the following fields:
Field Description
Config Version
Last Edited Config Format Min Firmware OK Cancel Delete
Description Displays the description you assigned to this configuration in Step 1 of the configuration wizard.
Indicates the number of times the configuration file has been edited and saved since its creation. The system increments this number only when you save a configuration.
Indicates the date the configuration was last saved.
Identifies the template version number used to generate the configuration file.
Identifies the minimum version of firmware that supports the configuration file.
Click to open the selected configuration file.
Click to cancel the action and close this window.
Click to delete this configuration from the Config folder.
3. Click OK. The system opens a configuration-specific S600 PCSetup screen (note the change in the heading for the screen), displaying a graphic representation of that configuration:
Figure 2-24. Configuration-specific System Graphic
Refer to Section 2.2 for further information on using the System Graphic.
2-24
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: By default, PCSetup logs you in at Security Level 1(as shown in the lower right-hand corner of the screen). Level 1 has the greatest access to software features and functions; level 9 has the most restrictions. Refer to Security in Chapter 7, Advanced Setup Configuration, for further information on defining security levels.
2.3.1
Navigating the PCSetup Editor
The PCSetup Editor window consists of two panes: a hierarchy menu in the left-hand pane and various configuration screens that appear in the right-hand pane. Figure 2-25 shows a sample screen.
Menu bar
Icon bar Configuration Screen
Hierarchy Menu
Revised January-2021
Figure 2-25. PCSetup Editor
Located on the left-hand side of the screen, the hierarchy menu displays the major configuration components: System Graphic, System Setup, I/O Setup, Station(s), Stream(s), and Advanced Setup. Clicking on an item in the hierarchy menu displays a sub-menu. Each submenu has an associated configuration screen.
Refer to the following for information on each configuration component:
System Graphic: Section 2.2 of Chapter 2 System Setup Configuration: Chapter 3. I/O and Communications: Chapter 4. Stations: Chapter 5.
PCSetup Editor
2-25
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Streams: Chapter 6.
Advanced Setup: Chapter 7.
The configuration screens on the right-hand side of the screen contain parameter fields, check boxes, and buttons. Fields allow you to type characters and numbers or to select from drop-down lists. Check boxes enable you to select specific options. Buttons link to dialog boxes that allow you to configure a data point or parameter.
Located at the top of the PCSetup Editor screen, the menu bar and icon bar have the customary Windows-based software options, plus additional menu selections and icons specific to Config600.
2.3.2 The Icon Bar
The icon bar, located immediately below the menu bar at the top of the screen, provides icons for the following actions or shortcuts:
Table 2-1. Config600 Icon Bar
Icon
Meaning New Configuration. Click this icon to open the Config600 Configuration Generation screen sequence. Note: This applies only to the Config600 Pro software.
Open Configuration. Click this icon to open the Select Config dialog box.
Save Configuration. Click this icon to save the current configuration with the current configuration file name.
Cut, Copy and Paste. These clipboard icons are available if not greyed out. Click Cut to remove the selection from the clipboard. Click Copy to store the selection to the clipboard. Click Paste to insert the contents of the clipboard at the cursor's location.
Login. Click this icon to open the Login dialog box. Note: This applies only if Level 1 security has been enabled.
Edit Security. Click this icon to open the Edit Security dialog box.
Assignment. Click this icon to open the Edit Assignments dialog box for the selected data point.
Settings. Click this icon to open the Edit Settings dialog box for the selected data point.
Calc Explorer. Click this icon to open the Calc Explorer utility, and examine calculation relationships between system components.
Config Organiser. Click this icon to display a Config Organiser and add, clone, delete, rename, or reorder components of a configuration.
Displays. Click this icon to open the Display Editor (see Chapter 13, Display Editor).
Config Transfer. Click this icon to open the Config Transfer utility. (see Chapter 9).
Print. Click this icon to open the Print dialog box. Use this icon to print the relevant pane selection to a host printer.
About Config600. Click this icon to open the About Config600 dialog box that displays copyright and version information.
2-26
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2.4 The Menu Bar
The menu bar, located immediately above the icon bar at the top of the screen, provides the following actions or shortcuts:
Table 2-2. Config600 Menu Bar
Menu File Menu
Edit Menu View Menu Tools Menu
Meaning
Use these menu options to print, open, close, and save configuration files.
New Creates a new configuration file.
Open Opens an existing configuration file.
Close Closes an open configuration file.
Save Saves the selected configuration file.
Save As Saves the selected configuration file with a different name.
Login Login to the PCSetup Editor.
Print Prints the selected configuration file.
Print Preview Opens the selected configuration file in the print preview window.
Print Setup Opens the Windows Print Setup window to configure your default printer.
Recent File Opens or view recently edited configuration files.
Regenerate
Regenerates the selected configuration file to overwrites all modifications to displays and Modbus maps with the standard displays and Modbus maps as generated at the build time of the configuration.
Note: To regenerate a report, delete the report and add the report using PCSetup Editor > System Setup > Reports.
Exit Closes the PCSetup Editor.
Use these menu options to open the Config Organiser, Assignment, and Settings screens.
Undo, Cut, Copy, These functions are disabled in the PCSetup Editor. & Paste
Config Organiser Launches the Config Organiser to arrange the priority of configurations so a certain I/O is read before another, rename or
clone I/O modules, streams or stations, and delete I/O modules.
Security Restricts access to authorised system users and determines which data items system users can enter or modify.
Assignment Opens the Edit Assignments dialog box for the selected data point.
Settings Opens the Edit Settings dialog box for the selected data point.
Use these menu options to view the Tool bar, Status bar, change the frame sizes, and open the Startup Screen.
Tool Bar Views or hides the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Views or hides the Status Bar.
Split Changes the frame sizes.
Startup Screen Launches the initial Startup Screen.
Use this menu to open the Display Editor or the Config Transfer utility.
Edit Displays Opens the Display Editor.
Transfer Opens the Config Transfer utility.
Revised January-2021
PCSetup Editor
2-27
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Menu Windows Menu
Help Menu
Meaning
Use these menu options to configure how your screens display, clone a configuration, arrange icons, and view or select open configurations.
New Window Opens a second instance of the configuration file in a new window to view a different screen.
Cascade Displays all open configuration windows in a Cascade view.
Tile Displays all open configuration windows in a Tile view.
Arrange Icons Arranges icons according to a grid pattern.
Open Opens active configurations. Configurations
Use these menu options to access the online help system and view the About PCSetup information screen.
Contents Accesses the online help system.
About PCSetup Displays the About PCSetup dialog box, which contains
information about the software (including the version number).
2.5 Managing Configurations
This section discusses how to save and regenerate a configuration.
2.5.1 Save a Configuration
To avoid losing any work as you develop your configuration, it is a good practice to save the configuration file after you make any changes.
Config600 creates a separate folder in your computer's Config600 folder for each unique configuration. At your request, Config600 saves the configuration files in your computer's Configs folder using the file extension ".cfg" for the master configuration file. Other components have individual sub-folders:
Reports: Contains the report format files.
Modbus: Contains the Modbus configuration files.
Logicalcs: Contains the custom written files that allow userdefined functions.
Extras: Stores user-defined look-up tables and configuration backup files.
To save the configuration file, select File > Save or File > Save As while in any screen in the PCSetup Editor. To save the configuration file with a new name, select File > Save As and then select "<new>" from the list of file names.
2.5.2 Regenerate a Configuration
In the PCSetup Editor, you can edit displays, reports, or Modbus maps using the Display, Report, or Modbus editors. Use the PCSetup Editor to edit assignments, values, and modes of data points. Config600 saves any file modifications in the Config folder and overwrites any previous modifications.
2-28
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: To regenerate reports, delete the report and add the report using PCSetup Editor > System Setup > Reports.
The File > Regenerate command overwrites all modifications to displays and Modbus maps with the standard displays and Modbus maps as generated at the build time of the configuration. Modifications to the settings and assignments in the configuration file (extension .cfg) are reflected in the regenerated files.
Use the Regenerate command to force configuration setting modifications to the displays and Modbus maps.
Regenerating a configuration file results in the loss of any custom
Caution displays or Modbus maps.
2.6 Display Editor
Click the Edit Displays icon on the PCSetup tool bar to open the Display Editor. Use it to customize the appearance of displays on the front panel of the S600+. Refer to Chapter 13, Display Editor, for complete instructions on using this utility.
Note: You can also access this utility either by selecting Tools > Display Editor from the PCSetup menu bar or by selecting Start > Config600 3.3 > Display Editor.
2.7 Config Transfer Utility
Click the Config Transfer icon on the PCSetup tool bar to open the Config Transfer utility. Use it to send new or modified configuration files to the S600+ using either a dedicated serial port or a TCP/IP connection. Config Transfer also enables you to retrieve configuration files from the host PC to the S600+. Refer to Chapter 9, Config Transfer, for complete instructions on using this utility.
Note: You can also access this utility either by selecting Tools > Transfer from the PCSetup menu bar or by selecting Start > Config600 3.3 > Config Transfer.
2.8 Config Organiser Utility
Use the Config Organiser to arrange the priority of configurations so a certain I/O is read before another, rename or clone I/O modules, streams or stations, and delete I/O modules.
Caution
ALWAYS create a backup of your configuration file before using the Config Organiser. The Config Organiser does not automatically update any LogiCalcs, displays, reports, or Modbus maps.
1. To open the Config Organiser, either:
Click the Config Organiser icon on the PCSetup Editor's tool bar.
Revised January-2021
PCSetup Editor
2-29
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Select Edit > Config Organiser from the PCSetup Editor's menu bar.
The Config Organiser screen displays:
Figure 2-26. Config Organiser
2. Click a button to manage the displayed configuration files
Button Move Up Move Down Clone Rename Delete OK
Cancel
Description
Selects an I/O module and moves it to a higher priority in the configuration so a certain I/O is read before another.
Selects an I/O module and moves it to a lower priority in the configuration so a certain I/O is read before another.
Duplicates an I/O module, stream, or station file within the configuration.
Renames an I/O module, stream, or station to rename that file within the configuration.
Deletes an I/O module from the configuration.
Applies the indicated changes to the configuration file.
Note: Config600 displays a verification dialog box. You must answer Yes to finalise your changes.
Cancels the action and closes this window.
2-30
PCSetup Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 3 System Setup
In This Chapter
3.1 Versions .............................................................................................. 3-2 3.2 Units .................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 Supported Units ........................................................................ 3-4 3.3 Reports................................................................................................ 3-6
3.3.1 General Reports ....................................................................... 3-7 3.3.2 Base Time Reports ................................................................... 3-8 3.3.3 Default Reports ......................................................................... 3-9 3.3.4 Report History ........................................................................... 3-9 3.3.5 Adding a General Report to a Configuration ............................ 3-9 3.3.6 User Reports........................................................................... 3-11 3.3.7 Adding a Base Time Report to a Configuration ...................... 3-11 3.3.8 Managing Configuration Reports ............................................ 3-13 3.4 Totalisations ...................................................................................... 3-14 3.5 Time .................................................................................................. 3-16
System Setup is the second option in the hierarchy pane on the S600 PCSetup screen. System settings include company details, units of measurement, required reports, and totals. While you define these during the initial configuration process, you can use the System Setup option to edit these values when necessary.
System Setup
Hierarchy Menu
Hierarchy Pane
Figure 3-1. System Setup screen
When you double-click System Setup, the hierarchy opens to display the sub-options: Versions, Units, Reports, Totalisations, and Time.
Revised January-2021
System Setup
3-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3.1 Versions
Config Format 8
Versions include details of your company and the flow computer being used. Config600 uses this information in webserver access windows.
As shown in Figure 3-2, Version 3.3 of Config600 uses Config Format 8 for its configuration files. Config Format 8 is designed to work with Release 5.0 of the CPU module (P152).
Note: Older configuration files (for release 4.0 or earlier of the CPU module) use Config Format 7. We cannot guarantee that configurations you create using Config Format 8 will work with older releases (4.0 or earlier) of the CPU module.
Figure 3-2. Versions screen
When you click Versions, Config600 displays a configuration screen in the right-hand pane. Unless otherwise indicated, you can edit the following fields:
Field Machine Name
Company Name
Address 1 through Address 5
Description Provides a tag number or stream name, up to four characters in length. Config600 uses this tag (such as "S600") on all printed alarms and events.
Provides a short description (up to ten alphanumeric characters) for the company.
Provides up to five 30-alphanumeric character fields you use to enter your company's address.
Telephone Fax Config Version
Provides up to 30 alphanumeric characters for your company's telephone number.
Provides up to 30 alphanumeric characters for your company's fax number.
This read-only field shows the number of times this configuration has been saved since it was created.
3-2
System Setup
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Config Created
Config Last Edited
Config Format
Description
This read-only field shows the date and time the configuration was originally created.
This read-only field displays the date and time the configuration was last saved.
This read-only field shows the version number of the template used to create the configuration.
Note: Configuration templates are based on the CPU version. Earlier versions (4 or prior) of the CPU module use configuration templates version 7 or earlier; the version 5 CPU module uses the version 8 configuration template. Configurations based on earlier templates function with the new CPU module. However, configurations developed for the new CPU do not work with older CPUs.
Note: If you change any values on this screen and try to exit, Config600 displays a dialog box asking to save those changes to your configuration file.
3.2 Units
Click Yes to apply the changes to your configuration file.
Using the Units options, you define the default standard units of measurement used throughout the configuration. Config600 performs all calculations using units, which conform to the appropriate international standards. However, should the requirements of your application vary, you can change the displayed units of measurement. When you change unit values, the PCSetup Editor automatically performs unit conversions. You can also override a number of units (such as K-factor) at the stream level.
Note: Click Conversions/Constants to switch between the Units screen and the Conversions/Constants option in Advanced Setup.
Revised January-2021
System Setup
3-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 3-3. Units screen
Each process quantity has a predefined list of selectable units. Click to select the units preferred for your application. Config600 removes any units not used in this configuration.
Note: If you change any values on this screen and try to exit, Config600 displays a dialog box asking to save those changes to your configuration file.
Click Yes to apply the changes to your configuration file.
3.2.1 Supported Units
3-4
System Setup
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Table 3-1 lists the standard units of measurement Config600 supports.
Table 3-1. Standard Measurement Units
Unit Category Mass Mass Flow Rate
Uncorrected Vol Uncorrected Vol Flow Rate
Corrected Vol Corrected Vol Flow Rate
Energy Energy Flow Rate
Liquid Alternative Vol
Liquid Alternative Mass TEMP UNITS (Temperature) PRESS UNITS (Pressure) DP UNITS (Differential Pressure) DENS UNITS (Density) ROC TEMP UNITS (Rate of Change, Temperature) ROC PRESSURE UNITS (Rate of Change, Pressure) CV VOL Units (Calorific Value) DYN VISC UNITS (Dynamic Viscosity)
Supported Units kg, lbs, M.lbs, MM.lbs, tonne, UK.ton, US.ton kg/d, kg/h, kg/m, kg/s, lbs/d, lbs/h, M.lbs/d, M.lbs/h, MM.lbs/d, MM.lbs/h, t/d, t/h, UK.t/d, UK.t/h, US.t/d, US.t/h bbl, CF, kL, km3, L, m3, MCF, MMCF, US gal bbl/d, bbl/h, CF/d, CF/h, kL/d, kL/h, km3/d, km3/h, L/d, L/h, L/m, m3/d, m3/h, MCF/d, MCF/h, MMCF/d, MMCF/h, US.gal/d, US.gal/h MMSCF, MSCF, Sbbl, SCF, SkL, Skm3, SL, Sm3, US.Sgal MMSCF/d, MMSCF/h, MSCF/d, MSCF/h, Sbbl/d, Sbbl/h, SCF/d, SCF/h, SkL/d, SkL/h, Skm3/d, Skm3/h, SL/d, SL/h, SL/m, Sm3/d, Sm3/h, US.Sgal/d, US.Sgal/hr Btu, Gcal, GJ, Kkcal, KJ, kW.h, mcal, MJ, MMBtu, MMMBtu, TJ Btu/h, Gcal/d, Gcal/h, GJ/d, GJ/h, Kcal/d, Kcal/h, KJ/d, KJ/h, kW.h/d, kW.h/h, MBTu/d, Mcal/d, Mcal/h, MJ/d, MJ/h, MMBtu/d, MMBtu/h, MMMBtu/d, MMMBtu/h, TJ/d, TJ/h MMSCF, MSCF, Sbbl, SCF, SkL, Skm3, SL, Sm3, US.Sgal Notes: Only used in batching configurations. The conversion between units also
compensates for the difference in metric and imperial `standard' conditions (i.e. m3 @ 15'C / 0 barg is converted to bbl @ 60F / 0 psig) as per the Aramco standard. kg, lbs, M.lbs, MM.lbs, tonne, UK.ton, US.ton Note: Only used in batching configurations. Deg.C, Deg.F, K
bara, barg, kgf/cm2a, kgf/cm2g, kPa.a, kPa.g, mmH2O, mmHg, Mpaa, MPag, psia, psig barg, inH2O, Kg/cm2, kPa, mbar, Mpa, psig
API, gm/cc, kg/L, kg.m3, kg/Sm3, lbs/bbl, lbs/CF, SG Deg.C/s, Deg.F/s, Deg.K/s
bar/s, kPa/s, psi/s
BTU/lb, BTU/SCF, GJ/kg, GJ/Sm3, kcal/m3, kW.h/m3, MJ/kg, MJ/Sm3 cP, lbm/ft.s, mPa.s, Pa.s, uPa.s
System Setup
3-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Unit Category DIAM UNITS (Diameter) LENGTH UNITS VEL UNITS (Velocity) K factor
Supported Units cm, ft, in, m, mm, yd
cm, ft, in, m, mm, yd ft/s , m/s
pls/bbl, pls/CF, pls/kg, pls/L, pls/lbs, pls/M.lbs, pls/MM.lbs, pls/m3, pls/tonne, pls/US.ton
3.3 Reports
Click the Reports option to display a screen identifying the reports currently associated with your configuration (Figure 3-4). Config600 provides two report categories, General and Base Time.
Figure 3-4. Reports screen
Field General Reports
Maintenance Mode Interlock
Time Editor Totals Descriptions Base Time
Description
Displays the general reports available for selection.
Add
Click to add a new report.
Configure Click to configure the selected report.
Edit
Click to edit the selected report using the
Report Editor.
Delete
Click to delete the selected report.
Enables the system to access turbine mode, DP mode, and densitometer information regardless of the Maintenance Mode status. By default, Config600 selects this option for imperial-based configurations but does not select this option for metric configurations.
Click to display the System Setup > Time screen you use to configure time and data parameters for the selected report.
Click to display the the Advanced Setup > Total Descriptions screen you use to configure descriptions for the selected report.
Click or to select the base time for which you
3-6
System Setup
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Hours after midnight Multi-day periods Part hour period Report Periods
Start of
Description want to add a report.
Note: Although you can define three sets of base time reports, Config600 reserves the Hourly and Dailyl reports in base time 2 for Electronic Flow Management (EFM) reports (if an EFM Modbus module link is included in the software). You can overwrite these values, but it may eliminate your abiltity to generate EFM reports.
Sets the beginning hour for the specified base time. 6 is the default hour.
Selects how many days a report should cover. Click to display valid values. 1 is the default.
Note: Once you set this value, the system uses this as a fixed period across all three Base Times. For example, you cannot then change a period of 10 days to a period of 5 days for Base Time 2.
Indicates how many minutes apart you want reports to
generate. Click to display valid values. 1 is the default.
Note: Once you set this value, the system uses this as a fixed period across all three Base Times. For examle, you cannot then change a period of 10 minutes to a period of 5 minutes for Base Time 2.
Displays the current report periods associated with the report you select in the General Reports pane.
Add
Click to add a new report period.
Configure Click to configure the selected report period.
Note: This button does not display until you select a report period.
Edit
Click to edit the report period you
selected in the Reports Editor.
Note: This button does not display until you select a report period.
Delete
Click to configure the selected report.
Note: This button does not display until you select a report period.
Indicates when the report period starts.
Week
Indicates the weekday on which the
report period starts. Click to display valid values. The default is Sunday.
Month
Indicates the day of the month on which the report period starts. Valid values are Last Day and First Day. The default is First Day.
3.3.1
General Reports
General reports, which generate as a result of some exception event, include:
Report Name Batch
Definition Shows totals at the start and end of the batch.
Revised January-2021
System Setup
3-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Current
Maint STN01 Prv Vol and STN02 Prv Vol STN01 Prv Mass and STN02 Prv Mass CHR D/Load
CHR Telemetry
Batch Ticket
User-defined
Shows the current flow rate and cumulative totals. Note: You can request this report from the S600+ front
panel or webserver. Shows totals as you enter and exit maintenance mode. Reserved for prover configurations; summarises trial runs and final volume data for a prove run.
Reserved for prover configurations; summarises trial runs and final mass data for a prove run.
Generates when the chromatograph download data changes or when a timeout or mode change occurs. Generates on the receipt of a new analysis from the chromatograph. Shows totals and batch details at the start and end of the batch. It also generates if a batch recalculation occurs. Note: This report replaces the Batch report. 15 reports with content you define.
Note: If you import older configuration files into Config600, the Compact Hourly report option may appear on this listing. This report, a system-generated base time Hourly report, is available but no longer supported.
3.3.2
Base Time Reports
Base time reports provide system data as of a particular hour (base time) you define. Base time reports include:
Time Hourly 2 Hourly 3 Hourly 4 Hourly 6 Hourly 8 Hourly 12 Hourly Daily Weekly Monthly Batch Hourly
Multi Day
Definition
Shows throughput for the previous hour.
Shows throughput for the previous two hours.
Shows throughput for the previous three hours.
Shows throughput for the previous four hours.
Shows throughput for the previous six hours.
Shows throughput for the previous eight hours.
Shows throughput for the previous twelve hours.
Shows throughput for the previous day.
Shows throughput for the previous week.
Shows throughput for the previous month.
Shows, for each hour during a batch, the batch hourly total and the batch total.
Note: Config600 generates this report only during batches. If a batch finishes midway through an hour, Config600 does not generate the batch hourly value for that hour but does generate the end-of-batch value that contains totals for that batch.
Shows throughput for the previous multi-day period, as defined in the Multi-day period field.
Note:
Once you set this value, the system uses this as a fixed period across all three Base Times. For example, you cannot then change a period of 10 days to a period of 5 days for Base Time 2.
3-8
System Setup
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Time Part Hour
Definition
Shows throughput for previous part-hour period, as defined in the Part hour period field.
Note:
Once you set this value, the system uses this as a fixed period across all three Base Times. For examle, you cannot then change a period of 10 minutes to a period of 5 minutes for Base Time 2.
Note: Although Config600 provides up to three base time categories for reports, Config600 reserves base time 2 for Electronic Flow Measurement (EFM) reports, which typically do not print. Refer to Chapter 14, Modbus Editor, for further information.
3.3.3 Default Reports
Config600 provides five default reports: General Reports: Current (set to print and store five instances). Base Time 1 Reports:
· Hourly (set to print and store 24 instances of this report). · Daily (set to print and store 35 instances of this report). Base Time 2 Reports (reserved for EFM reports): · Hourly (set to store 840 instances of this report). · Daily (set to store 35 instances of this report).
3.3.4
Report History
The S600+ saves all periodic reports in circular buffers. For example, you decide to save five instances of that report. After saving those five reports and generating reports 6 and 7, the S600+ then overwrites the data for reports 1 and 2. How many reports you can save is a function of the available memory on the S600+. Refer to Section 3.3.5, Adding a General Report to a Configuration for information on the total number of reports you can save.
Note: If necessary, you can use the Report Editor to change the report format. Any data existing in Config600 is available for inclusion on a report, and you can change a report's format at any time.
3.3.5 Adding a General Report to a Configuration
Note: Refer to Appendix H, CFX Reporting, for more information on CFX reports.
Use this procedure to add a General report to your configuration file. 1. Click Add in the General Reports pane. The Archive Configuration
dialog box displays:
Revised January-2021
System Setup
3-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 3-5. Archive Configuration dialog box
2. Complete the following values:
Field Archive Period
Number of reports to save
Print when Generated Web history
Report Export Web summary Preformatted HTML
Description Indicates the General reports available for selection. Click to display the reports for selection.
Note: When you select a report from this list and add it to the configuration file, Config600 removes that report name from this listing.
Indicates the number of instances of this report to save. Click or to increase or decrease the displayed value.
Note: The total number of reports you can save is a function of the available storage on the S600+ after you create a configuration file and cold start it. Config600 also uses a "report buffer" to store reports. If you select 5, Config600 overwrites the first iteration of the generated report with the sixth.
Indicates whether Config600 prints the report after generating it.
Indicates whether the selected report appears as an option in the Reports display on the S600+ Webserver.
Exports the report formatted as either a text file or a CSV file to a location you specify.
Indicates whether Config600 includes report data "live" as part of the webserver menu bar.
Indicates whether Config600 uses its native HTML formatting when displaying webserver-based reports or uses your HTML formatting. Select this option to use your HTML formatting for reports.
Note: This is an advanced option. Contact Techical Support for further information.
3-10
System Setup
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3. Click OK when you are finished. The Archive Configuration dialog box closes. Config600 adds your report to the General Reports listing.
3.3.6 User Reports
S600+ also provides 22 user-defined reports (USER18 through USER24) in the General Reports category. Use these reports when you have developed special programs (such as a LogiCalc) to trigger report conditions or desire to use them on the webserver. You can also use these reports to add your own displays on the Webserver menu bar.
Note: The disable form feed function is not available with user reports.
3.3.7 Adding a Base Time Report to a Configuration
Use this procedure to add a base time report to your configuration file. 1. Click or in the Base Time Reports pane of the Report screen
to select the base time for which you want to add a report.
Note: Although you can define three sets of base time reports, Config600 reserves the Hourly and Daily reports in base time 2 for Electronic Flow Management (EFM) reports (if an EFM Modbus module link is included in the software). You can overwrite these values, but it may eliminate your ability to generate EFM reports.
2. Complete the hours after midnight field to indicate the beginning hour for the selected base time.
Revised January-2021
System Setup
3-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3. Click Add in the General Reports pane. The Archive Configuration dialog box displays:
Figure 3-6. Archive Configuration
4. Complete the following values:
Field Archive Period
Number of reports to save
Print when Generated Web history
Report Export Web summary Preformatted HTML
Description Displays the base time reports available for selection. Click to display the reports you can select.
Note: When you select a report from this list and add it to the configuration file, Config600 removes that report name from this listing.
Indicates the number of instances of this report to save.
Note: The total number of reports you can save is a function of the available storage on the S600. Config600 also uses a "report buffer" to store reports. For example, if you select 5, Config600 overwrites the first iteration of the generated report with the sixth.
Indicates whether Config600 prints the report after generating it.
Indicates whether the selected report appears as an option in the Reports display on the Config600 webserver.
Exports the report formatted as either a text file or a CSV file to a location you specify.
Indicates whether Config600 includes report data "live" as part of the webserver menu bar.
Indicates whether Config600 uses its native HTML formatting when displaying webserver-based reports or your HTML formatting. Select this box to use your HTML formatting for reports.
Note: This is an advanced option. Contact Techical Support for further information.
3-12
System Setup
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
CFX Stream X
Description
Indicates whether Config600 generates a CFX report for this stream. For more information on CFX reports, refer to Appendix H, CFX Reporting.
5. Click OK when you finish. The Archive Configuration dialog box closes. Config600 adds your report to the Base Time Reports listing.
6. Complete the following fields if you added these reports:
Report Daily
Monthly
Field
Indicates the beginning day of the week. Click or to select a day. The default is Sunday.
Indicates whether the month "starts" on the last day of the current month (Last Day or March 31) or the first day of the next month (First Day or April 1). Click or to select a value. The default is First Day.
3.3.8 Managing Configuration Reports
At any time you can manage--edit, delete, or reconfigure--the reports you have added to your configuration file. Click on a report and Config600 displays three additional buttons.
Click Configure to display the Archive Configuration dialog box. Click Edit to access the Report Editor (Chapter 10). Click Delete to remove the defined report from the configuration
file.
Figure 3-7. Managing Configurations
Note: If you change any values on this screen and try to exit, Config600 displays a dialog box asking to save those changes to your configuration file.
Revised January-2021
System Setup
3-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Click Yes to apply the changes to your configuration file.
3.4 Totalisations
Click the Totalisation option on the hierarchy to display the Totalisation screen (Figure 3-8). Use this screen to manage how the system displays totals. The Totalisation screen has three components: a Totals Resolutions pane, a Total Rollover Digit field, and an Increment Cumulatives in Maintenance Mode check box. Edit the Totals Resolution values using a dialog (Figure 3-9). For example, if you set the Rollover value to 7 and the Decimal Place value to 3, rollover occurs at 9,999,999.999. Similarly, if you set Rollover to 4 and Decimal Place to 2, rollover occurs at 9,999.99.
Notes:
The main calculation routines always use full double-precision accuracy for all totalisers and maintain accuracy internally, even if you select a restricted number of decimal places for display and reporting.
Base Sediment and Water volumes use Standard Volume Units. This is true even when they are computed as gross volumes.
Figure 3-8. Totalisation
3-14
System Setup
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
To edit totals: 1. Double-click a Station/Stream line in the Totals Resolution pane.
The Totals Detail dialog displays:
Figure 3-9. Totals Detail dialog
2. Complete the following values:
Field Largest Total Rollover
Decimal Places
Description
This read-only field shows the total's current format. The system changes this display as you modify the Rollover and Decimal Places values.
Note: No total can have more than 15 digits.
Indicates the maximum number of digits in the total before it rolls over to zero. Valid values are 3 to 15. The default is 12. Click or to increase or decrease the total number of digits.
Note: Set this value to ensure that when a stream flows at its maximum possible flow rate, this limit would not cause the total to roll over to zero within a 24-hour period. Typically, leave the value at its default of 12 digits.
Indicates the number of decimal places in the total. Valid values are 0 to 5. The default is 2. Click or to increase or decrease the total number of decimal places.
3. Complete the Total Rollover digit field (see Figure 3-8) to indicate the value at which rollover occurs. For example, if you either leave this field at 0 (default) or set it to 9, rollover occurs at 9,999. If you set this field to 3, rollover occurs at 3,999, and so on.
4. Select the Increment Cumulatives in Maintenance Mode check box (see Figure 3-8. Totalisation) to enable the S600+ to increment all totals in maintenance mode. Otherwise the S600+ increments only Maintenance Mode totals when in maintenance mode.
Note: If you change any values on this screen and try to exit, Config600 displays a dialog asking to save those changes to your configuration file.
Revised January-2021
System Setup
3-15
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3.5 Time
Click Yes to apply the changes to your configuration file.
Click the Time option on the hierarchy to display the Date/Time Parameters screen (Figure 3-10) and to manage how the system formats dates and displays time. The FloBoss S600+ provides two methods for time synchronisation: via NTP (refer to section 4.10 Communications Port) and via a supervisory system.
Figure 3-10. Date/Time Parameters
1. Review the Date Format, which S600+ uses when displaying dates throughout the system. Click to display available format options. The default format is DD MM YYYY.
2. Review the Time Accept value, which S600+ uses to perform time synchronisation procedures for a supervisory system. Valid values are:
3-16
System Setup
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Disabled
No time synchronisation is performed via the supervisory computer. The default is Disabled.
Automatic
Time synchronisation is automatically performed whenever there is a change in the time or date downloaded from the supervisory computer. This requires the configuration of the SYSTEM KPINTARR TIME AND DATE (DLOAD fields) in the supervisory Modbus Map. When a change is seen in any of these fields (DLOAD YEAR, DLOAD MONTH, DLOAD DAY, DLOAD HOUR, DLOAD MINUTE, DLOAD SECOND), the FloBoss S600+ immediately sets its internal clock to these values.
It is also possible to configure the FloBoss S600+ to synchronize the time when requested to do so by the supervisory computer. This method allows the supervisory computer to download the new time / date before it is needed (at least 30 seconds in advance) and the synchronization is then triggered when required. This triggering is done by using the SYSTEM KPINT DLOAD TIME ACCEPT parameter. When this field is set to 1 the FloBoss S600+ immediately sets its internal clock to the values previously defined in the DLOAD YEAR, DLOAD MONTH, DLOAD DAY, DLOAD HOUR, DLOAD MINUTE, DLOAD SECOND fields.
To compensate for any delays in the communications link, a DLOAD OFFSET value is provided (in seconds). If this is nonzero then the value is added to the required time (For example if the DLOAD SECOND is set to 30 and the DLOAD OFFSET is set to 10, then the FloBoss S600+ will set its seconds value to 40).
More information on time synchronisation via Modbus can be located in document How To 61" (which can be obtained by contacting Technical Support).
3. Select the Event Time Change option to raise an event whenever you change the system time using Modbus.
4. Enter the Zone Hours and Zone Minutes in the Time Zone Offset pane to set the local time. Local time in each time zone is GMT plus the curent time zone offset (hours/minutes) for the location.
Revised January-2021
System Setup
3-17
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: If time synchronization is being performed by a public NTP server, then the Zone Hours / Zone Minutes fields need to be updated to reflect the time difference from UTC. This ensures the flow computer time is correct for its location. (Public NTP servers send their time as UTC and the configured Zone Hours / Zone Minutes are added or subtracted).
5. Click in the DST Mode field to select the type of Daylight Savings Time to use. Valid values are:
Disabled Uses Daylight Savings Time as set on your computer
User Selects whether the date changes through the years. You configure the DST dates in the System Editor. Contact Technical Support for advice on how to configure the User DST Mode.)
Europe Calcuates DST as outlined in COM(2000)302 final, 2000/0140(COD), "Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on Summer Time Arrangements"
· For the purposes of this Directive "summer time period" shall mean the period of the year during which clocks are put forward by 60 minutes compared with the rest of the year.
· From 2002 onwards, the summer time period shall begin, in every Member State, at 1:00 a.m., Greenwich Mean Time, on the last Sunday in March.
· From 2002 onwards, the summer time period shall end, in every Member State, at 1:00 a.m., Greenwich Mean Time, on the last Sunday in October.
6. It is possible to provide a Daylight Saving Time status flag which indicates Winter Time (value = 0) or Summer Time (value = 1). This is only possible by use of the System Editor. Please contact Technical support for a `How To' document if this feature is required.
Note: System Editor is available only with the Config600 Pro software.
7. Click Yes to apply the changes to your configuration file.
3-18
System Setup
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 4 I/O and Comms Configuration
In This Chapter
4.1 Discrete (Digital) Inputs (DI) ............................................................... 4-2
U
U
U
U
4.1.1 Assigning Discrete (Digital) Outputs...................................... 4-2
U
U
U
U
4.1.2 Editing Discrete (Digital) Outputs .......................................... 4-3
U
U
U
U
4.1.3 Adding Discrete (Digital) Outputs .......................................... 4-4
U
U
U
U
4.2 Discrete (Digital) Outputs (DO)........................................................... 4-5
U
U
U
U
4.2.1 Assigning Discrete (Digital) Outputs...................................... 4-5
U
4.3 Analog Inputs (AI) ............................................................................... 4-6
U
U
U
U
4.3.1 Assigning Analog Inputs (AI) ................................................. 4-6
U
4.3.2 Editing Analog Inputs (AI) ...................................................... 4-7
U
4.3.3 Adding a New I/O Point ....................................................... 4-15
U
4.4 Analog Outputs (AO) ........................................................................ 4-15
U
4.4.1 Editing Analog Outputs ........................................................ 4-15
U
4.5 Density Inputs ................................................................................... 4-17
U
U
U
U
4.5.1 Assigning Density Input ....................................................... 4-17
U
4.5.2 Editing Density Inputs .......................................................... 4-18
U
4.6 Turbine Inputs................................................................................... 4-19
U
U
U
U
4.6.1 Assigning Turbine Inputs ..................................................... 4-19
U
4.6.2 Editing Turbine Inputs.......................................................... 4-21
U
4.7 Pulse Outputs ................................................................................... 4-21
U
U
U
U
4.7.1 Assigning Pulse Outputs ..................................................... 4-22
U
4.8 HART Modules ................................................................................. 4-22
U
U
U
U
4.8.1 Editing HART Settings ......................................................... 4-23
U
4.9 PID Loop Settings............................................................................. 4-23
U
U
U
U
4.9.1 Assigning PID Loops ........................................................... 4-24
U
4.9.2 Proportional Plus Integral and Derivative Action ................. 4-28
U
4.10 Communications Port ....................................................................... 4-30
U
U
U
U
4.10.1 Editing a Communications Task .......................................... 4-30
U
4.10.2 Setting Up Peer-to-peer Options ......................................... 4-35
U
The configuration process assigns default I/O channels to all input and
output data items--including analog input and digital (discrete) input
signals, turbine inputs, Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
(HART®) transmitters, and communication tasks--the S600+ uses.
Using the I/O Setup option in PCSetup Editor, you can change an
assigned channel, unassign channels, and modify settings for your
configured channels. You can also modify the communication tasks,
including allocating communications links and defining serial port
settings. Refer to Figure 4-1 for a sample screen. Note that some items
X
X
have already been assigned values.
Revised January-2021
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 4-1. Typical I/O Setup Screen (Discrete Inputs Shown)
4.1 Discrete (Digital) Inputs (DI)
You can assign each of the data items to a specific digital input channel on an available I/O module. You can also configure additional user-defined inputs for extra signals, if required.
Each I/O module (P144 I/O) you install provides up to 16 digital input channels. Each Prover module (P154 PRV) you install provides up to 32 digital input channels. Each HART (P188) module you install provides up to 12 digital input channels. Finally, the CPU module (CPU I/O) provides a DIGIN channel.
4.1.1 Assigning Discrete (Digital) Inputs
To assign or reassign digital input data items:
1. Select Digital Inputs from the hierarchy menu. 2. Double-click the digital input you desire to edit. The Digital Input
Selection dialog box displays.
Note: You can also click the Assignment icon to display the dialog box.
on the toolbar
4-2
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3. Select the I/O Board to assign the digital input or select Unassigned to deselect the input. Config600 completes the I/O Channel field with available channels:
Figure 4-2. Digital Input Selection dialog box
4. Select an I/O Channel. 5. Select the Sense for the digital input bit. The default is Normal.
Invert reverses the signal's state. 6. Click OK to apply the new assignment. The PCSetup screen
displays showing your new assignment.
Note: The PCSetup Editor displays a warning message if you assign the I/O channel to more than one digital input. Use caution: the PCSetup Editor displays a message but does not prevent you from assigning the input more than once.
4.1.2 Editing Discrete (Digital) Inputs
To edit the description for a digital input data item:
1. Right-click the data item. The system displays a shortcut menu.
Note: You can also click the Settings icon on the toolbar after highlighting the data item to display the menu. However, if this option is not available for this item, the system greys out this icon.
2. Select Settings on the menu. The Edit Descriptions dialog box displays:
Revised January-2021
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 4-3. Edit Description dialog box
3. Edit the current description or enter a new description.
Note: The S600+ does not pass this value to the Config600 configuration or display. Use this process only to customize or clarify the value on this screen.
4. Click OK to confirm the change. The PCSetup screen displays showing the edited label.
4.1.3 Adding Discrete (Digital) Inputs
To add an additional data item:
Note:
When you add a digital I/O point, the point is an object that is capable of using 16 digital inputs to derive its value. This means that a single object can have a value between 0 and 65535 as its decimal equivalent. This value shows as 16 bits in the Digital Inputs list.
1. Right-click in the right pane. A shortcut menu displays.
2. Select New I/O Point from the shortcut menu. The Digital Input Selection dialog box displays:
Figure 4-4. Digital Input Selection (New I/O Point)
4-4
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: The Description field on this screen contains USER, indicating that this I/O point is user-defined.
3. Select the I/O Board to assign the digital input (or select Unassigned to deselect the input).
4. Select an I/O Channel. 5. Select the Sense for the digital input bit. The default is Normal.
Invert reverses the signal's state. 6. Click OK to apply the new assignment. The PCSetup screen
displays showing your new assignment.
4.2 Discrete (Digital) Outputs (DO)
You can assign each digital output channel to an individual data item. Additionally, the S600+ allows you to assign data items to more than one output, making a repeat signal available, if necessary. Up to 12 digital output channels are available on each installed I/O (P144) module, and up to 12 digital output channels are available on each installed Prover (P154) module.
4.2.1 Assigning Discrete (Digital) Outputs
To assign or reassign a digital output data item:
1. Select Digital Outputs from the hierarchy menu. 2. Double-click on a digital output item to edit. The Digital Output
Selection dialog box displays. 3. Select the Item to assign the digital output or select Unassigned to
deselect the output. Config600 completes the Output field with applicable values (such as Output or Open):
Revised January-2021
Figure 4-5. Digital Output Selection dialog box
4. Select an Output channel. 5. Select the Sense for the digital output. Valid values are Normal,
Invert, Pulse On, or Pulse Off. The default is Normal.
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: If you select either Pulse On or Pulse Off, you must also provide a pulse width (a minimum of 1 second) in the Pulse Width field.
6. Click OK to confirm the reassignment. The PCSetup screen displays showing the reassigned values.
4.3 Analog Inputs (AI)
You can assign each displayed data item to a specific Analog or PRT (Platinum Resistance Thermometer)/RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) input channel on the I/O module (P144) or the HART module (P188).
Each installed I/O module provides up to 12 analog input channels and three PRT/RTD input channels. The Prover module (P154) does not have any available analog or PRT/RTD input channels. The HART module supports up to 50 transmitters.
Note: If the densitometer also acts as the temperature element for the meter, you assign both the Meter Temperature and Densitometer Temperature to the same analog input. If the prover has only one temperature element, you assign both inlet and outlet temperature to the same analog input. This also applies to the pressure transmitter.
4.3.1 Assigning Analog Inputs (AI)
To assign or reassign an Analog Input data item:
1. Select Analog Inputs from the hierarchy menu. 2. Double-click an Analog Input to edit. The Analog Input
Assignment dialog box displays.
Note: You can also click the Assignment icon to display the dialog box.
on the toolbar
Figure 4-6. Analog Input Assignment dialog box
4-6
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3. Select an input Type. Valid values are Analog Inputs, PRT/RTD Inputs, or Unassigned. The default is Unassigned.
4. Select an I/O Channel to assign the Analog Input.
Note: This field lists only compatible channels which have either not yet been assigned to a particular unit type or that have already been assigned to inputs of the same unit type. For example, to reassign a pressure input, you can only reassign it to an input that is either currently unassigned or already assigned to a pressure input. The HART transmitter and the S600+ must use matching measurement units.
5. Click OK to apply the new assignment. The PCSetup screen displays showing the new assignment.
4.3.2 Editing Analog Inputs (AI)
To edit operational settings for an analog input, a PRT/RTD, or a HART input data item:
1. Right-click the desired data item. The system displays a shortcut menu.
2. Select Settings on the menu. An input-specific dialog box displays:
Note: You can also click the Settings icon on the toolbar after highlighting the data item to display the menu.
Revised January-2021
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 4-7. Analog Input, PRT/RTD, and HART dialog boxes
3. Select an Initial Mode of operation. Valid values are:
Field Measured Keypad Last Good Average
Weighted
Description
Use the derived calculated value from the incoming signal.
Use the keypad value in place of the calculated value.
Note: This is the default value.
Use the last valid value received from the incoming signal.
Use the rolling average of the last two "good" readings from the incoming signal.
Note: Analog inputs are considered valid if the measured current is within Centigrade HI and LO fail limits. PRT/RTD inputs are considered valid while no integrity fail alarms are present. HART inputs are considered valid when no errors are present in the good comms and second status byte indicates the device is healthy.
Use the rolling time/flow weight average of the signal.
Note:
This mode is valid only if you configure this input in a time/flow weighted average calculation table. Refer to Chapter 6, Section 6.2.8, Time & Flow Weighted Averaging.
4-8
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4. Select a Behaviour value. Valid values are:
Field Disabled Keypad Fail with Recovery
Average Fail with Recovery
Last Good Fail with Recovery
Keypad Fail no Recovery
Average Fail no Recovery
Last Good Fail no Recovery
Weighted Fail no Recovery
Weighted Fail with Recovery
Description
If the input has failed, continue to use this value.
If the input has failed, change the value to use the Keypad value. When the input has recovered, the system reverts to its previous mode. This mode displays as KEYPAD-F on failure.
If the input has failed, change the value to use the average value. When the input has recovered, the system reverts to its previous mode. This mode displays as AVERAGE-F on failure.
If the input has failed, change the value to use the last valid value. When the input has recovered, the system reverts to its previous mode. This mode displays as LASTGOOD-F on failure.
If the input has failed, change the value to use the Keypad value. When the input has recovered, the system remains in Keypad mode until manually changed. This mode displays as KEYPAD-F on failure.
If the input has failed, change the value to use the Average value. When the input has recovered, the system remains in Average mode until manually changed. This mode displays as AVERAGE-F on failure.
If the input has failed, change the value to use the Lastgood value. When the input has recovered, the system remains in Lastgood mode until manually changed. This mode displays as LASTGOOD-F on failure.
If the input has failed, change the value to use the Time / Flow weighted value. When the input has recovered, the system remains in Average mode until manually changed. This mode displays as WEIGHTED-F on failure
If the input has failed, change the value to use the Time / Flow weighted value. When the input has recovered, the system reverts to its previous mode until manually changed. This mode displays as WEIGHTED-F on failure.
5. Enter a Keypad value. The system uses this value either if the Initial Mode is set to Keypad or the input has failed and the Behaviour value is set to Keypad Fail (with or without recovery).
6. Enter an item Tag of up to 12 alphanumeric characters. The system uses this on the front panel of the S600+.
7. Enter an item Description of up to 20 alphanumeric characters. The system uses this description on reports, alarm printouts, and displays.
8. Enter a Rate of Change (ROC) value. If, in one second, the input variable changes by an amount greater than this value and you have enabled alarms (Advanced Setup > Alarms), Config600 alarms the operator.
9. Enter values for Setpoint and Deviation. Config600 uses these values if the operator is required to know when the input variable
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
has changed. The Setpoint field provides a check value, and the Deviation field indicates the allowed variance.
Note: Config600 can raise an alarm only if you have previously enabled Alarms in Advanced Setup.
10. Define Alarm Limits. If you enable an alarm, set a threshold value for that alarm.
On the High and High High alarms, Config600 raises the alarm if the in-use value rises above the entered threshold value. On the Low and Low Low alarms, Config600 raises an alarm if the in-use value falls below the entered threshold value.
11. Select a Conversion value:
If analog, click to select a valid Conversion value:
Value 020mA 420mA
Description Use if you apply a current input directly to the I/O board. Use if you apply a current input directly to the I/O board.
05V
15V
020mA 2 point eng units
Use if you apply a voltage signal directly to the I/O board or if you place a current loop across a 250-ohm resistor and apply the derived voltage to the I/O board.
Use if you apply a voltage signal directly to the I/O board or if you place a current loop across a 250-ohm resistor and apply the derived voltage to the I/O board.
Use if you apply a current input directly to the I/O board with on-line calibration when the transmitter has a straight-line response but an offset is required.
Note: This option enables you to enter Low Scale, High Scale, and Offset values on the S600+ front panel.
420mA 2 point eng units
Use if you apply a current input directly to the I/O board with on-line calibration when the transmitter has a straight-line response but an offset is required.
Note: This option enables you to enter Low Scale, High Scale, and Offset values on the S600+ front panel.
05V 2 point eng units
Use if you apply a voltage signal directly to the I/O board or when you place a current loop across a 250ohm resistor and apply the derived voltage to the I/O board with on-line calibration when the transmitter has a straight-line response but an offset is required.
Note: This option enables you to enter Low Scale, High Scale, and Offset values on the S600+ front panel.
15V 2 point eng units
Use if you apply a voltage signal directly to the I/O board or when you place a current loop across a 250ohm resistor and apply the derived voltage to the I/O board with on-line calibration when the transmitter has a straight-line response but an offset is required.
Note: This option enables you to enter Low Scale, High Scale, and Offset values on the S600+ front panel.
4-10
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Value 020mA 3 point eng units
420mA 3 point eng units
05V 3 point eng units
15V 3 point eng units
020mA 2 point mA
420mA 2 point mA
05V 2 point mA
15V 2 point mA
020mA 3 point mA
Description
Use if you apply a current input directly to the I/O board with on-line calibration when the transmitter does not have a straight-line response.
Note: This option enables you to perform a three-point field calibration on the S600+ front panel or webserver.
Use if you apply a current input directly to the I/O board with on-line calibration when the transmitter does not have a straight-line response.
Note: This option enables you to perform a three-point field calibration on the S600+ front panel or webserver.
Use if you apply a voltage signal directly to the I/O board or if you place a current loop across a 250-ohm resistor and apply the derived voltage to the I/O board with on-lline calibration when the transmitter does not have a straight-line response.
Note: This option enables you to perform a three-point field calibration on the S600+ front panel or webserver.
Use if you apply a voltage signal directly to the I/O board or if you place a current loop across a 250-ohm resistor and apply the derived voltage to the I/O board with on-lline calibration when the transmitter does not have a straight-line response.
Note: This option enables you to perform a three-point field calibration on the S600+ front panel or webserver.
Use if you apply a current input directly to the I/O board with on-line calibration when the transmitter has a straight-line response but an offset is required.
Note: This option enables you to enter Low mA, High mA, and Offset values on the S600+ front panel.
Use if you apply a current input directly to the I/O board with on-line calibration when the transmitter has a straight-line response but an offset is required.
Note: This option enables you to enter Low mA, High mA, and Offset values on the S600+ front panel.
Use if you apply a voltage signal directly to the I/O board or when you place a current loop across a 250ohm resistor and apply the derived voltage to the I/O board with on-lline calibration when the transmitter has a straight-line response but an offset is required.
Note: This option enables you to enter Low mA, High mA, and Offset values on the S600+ front panel.
Use if you apply a voltage signal directly to the I/O board or when you place a current loop across a 250ohm resistor and apply the derived voltage to the I/O board with on-lline calibration when the transmitter has a straight-line response but an offset is required.
Note: This option enables you to enter Low mA, High mA, and Offset values on the S600+ front panel.
Use if you apply a current input directly to the I/O board with on-lline calibration when the transmitter does not have a straight-line response.
Note: This option enables you to perform a three-point field calibration on the S600+ front panel or webserver.
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Value 420mA 3 point mA
05V 3 point mA
15V 3 point mA
Description
Use if you apply a current input directly to the I/O board with on-lline calibration when the transmitter does not have a straight-line response.
Note: This option enables you to perform a three-point field calibration on the S600+ front panel or webserver.
Use if you apply a voltage signal directly to the I/O board or if you place a current loop across a 250-ohm resistor and apply the derived voltage to the I/O board with on-line calibration when the transmitter does not have a straight-line response.
Note: This option enables you to perform a three-point field calibration on the S600+ front panel or webserver.
Use if you apply a voltage signal directly to the I/O board or if you place a current loop across a 250-ohm resistor and apply the derived voltage to the I/O board with on-line calibration when the transmitter does not have a straight-line response.
Note: This option enables you to perform a three-point field calibration on the S600+ front panel or webserver.
Note: Refer to Appendix D, Field Calibration for additional information.
If PRT/RTD, click to select a valid Conversion value:
Value DIN
Description
Converts the incoming resistance reading into temperature using the standard DIN 43760 (using the 385 curve).
American DIN Offset
American Offset
Linear Cal
Non Linear Cal
Converts the incoming reading into temperature using the standard IPTS-68 (using the 392 curve).
Converts the incoming resistance reading into temperature using the standard DIN 43760 (using the 385 curve). Used for on-line calibration where the offset is added to the measured temperature.
Note: This option enables you to enter an offset value on the S600+ front panel or webserver.
Converts the incoming reading into temperature using the standard IPTS-68 (using the 392 curve). Used for on-line calibration where the offset is added to the measured temperature.
Note: This option enables you to enter an offset value on the S600+ front panel or webserver.
Converts the incoming resistance reading to temperature using the American two-point calibration constants.
Note: This option enables you to perform a two-point field calibration on the S600+ front panel or webserver.
Converts the incoming resistance reading to temperature using the American three-point calibration constants.
Note: This option enables you to perform a three-point field calibration on the S600+ front panel or webserver.
4-12
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Value
Calendar Van Dusen
Description
Converts incoming resistance to temperature using the Calendar Van Dusen A, B, C, and R0 constants. Use this option to select other tables (such as IEC) by entering the A, B, C, or R0 constants.
Note: Select the Calendar Van Dusen option to support other temperature curves (such as DIN 43760 1980 or IEC 60751 2008) when using constants from those standards.
12. Complete any conversion-specific fields for the analog conversion value you selected:
Note: Conversion settings in this section may require that you change jumper (bit link) settings on the appropriate I/O board. Refer to the FloBoss S600+ Flow Computer Instruction Manual (Form A6115) for further details.
Value High Scale Mid Scale Low Scale High Fail Low Fail
Description Indicates, in mA or V (depending on the selected conversion option), the high-range scaling value (5 V or 20 mA).
Note: This field does not display for on-line calibration.
Indicates, in mA or V (depending on the selected conversion option), the middle-range scaling value (5 V or 20 mA).
Note: This field does not display for on-line calibration.
Indicates, in mA or V (depending on the selected conversion option), the low-range scaling value (0 V, 1 V, 0 mA, or 4 mA).
Note: This field does not display for on-line calibration.
In current modes, indicates the direct reading of the Analog Input at which the transmitter has failed.
In voltage modes, indicates (in mA) the current required to pass through a 250-ohm conditioning resistor to achieve the required fail voltage.
Indicates, in mA or V (depending on the selected conversion option), the mid-range scaling value (5 V or 20 mA).
13. Complete any required calibration-specific fields for the conversion factor you selected.
If Analog:
Value Low Scale
Mid Scale
Description Indicates, in mA or V (depending on the selected conversion option), the low-range scaling value (0 V, 1 V, 0 mA, or 4 mA).
Note: This field does not display for on-line calibration.
Indicates, in mA or V (depending on the selected conversion option), the mid-range scaling value (5 V or 20 mA).
Note: This field does not display for on-line calibration.
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Value High Scale
Description
Indicates, in mA or V (depending on the selected conversion option), the high-range scaling value (5 V or 20 mA).
Note: This field does not display for on-line calibration.
If PRT/RTD:
Value Low Scale
Mid Scale High Scale
A B C R0
Description Indicates, in degrees Centigrade, the low value for calibration.
Note: This field displays only if you select the Linear Cal or Non Linear Cal conversion options.
Indicates, in degrees Centigrade, the mid value for calibration.
Note: This field displays only if you selected the Non Linear Cal conversion option.
Indicates, in degrees Centigrade, the high value for calibration.
Note: This field displays only if you selected the Linear Cal or Non Linear Cal conversion options.
Provides the A constant value for the Calendar Van Dusen conversion.
Note: This field displays only if you selected the Calendar Van Dusen conversion option.
Provides the B constant value for the Calendar Van Dusen conversion.
Note: This field displays only if you selected the Calendar Van Dusen conversion option.
Provides the C constant value for the Calendar Van Dusen conversion.
Note: This field displays only if you selected the Calendar Van Dusen conversion option.
Provides the R0 constant value for the Calendar Van Dusen conversion.
Note: This field displays only if you selected the Calendar Van Dusen conversion option.
14. Complete any Alarm Limit values:
Value High High High Low Low Low
Description Select the checkbox and enter a value to which the input value must rise to generate a High High alarm.
Select the checkbox and enter a value to which the input value must rise to generate a High alarm.
Select the checkbox and enter a value to which the input value must lower to generate a Low alarm.
Select the checkbox and enter a value to which the input value must lower to generate a Low Low alarm.
15. Click OK to apply the edits. The PCSetup screen displays.
4-14
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4.3.3 Adding a New I/O Point
To add either a new analog input or a new PRT/RTD I/O point:
1. Right-click in the right-hand pane of the PCSetup screen. The system displays a shortcut menu.
2. Select New I/O Point on the shortcut menu. The system displays the Analog Input Assignment dialog box.
Figure 4-8. Analog Input Assignment dialog box
3. Complete the Type, I/O Board, I/O Channel, and Units fields as described in Editing Analog Inputs.
Note: Config600 highlights the default values for each field. You can accept or change those defaults as necessary.
4. Select the type of Units. 5. Click OK to apply the new I/O point to your configuration. The
system redisplays the PCSetup screen with your new I/O point.
4.4 Analog Outputs (AO)
You can assign each analog output channel to an individual data item. You can also assign individual data items to more than one output, which allows you to create a repeat signal. Each installed I/O module (P144) provides up to four analog output channels. Neither the Prover module (P154) nor the HART module (P188) provide any analog output channels.
4.4.1 Editing Analog Outputs
To edit an analog output data item:
1. Select Analog Outputs from the hierarchy menu. The system displays all currently defined analog outputs in the right-hand pane.
Revised January-2021
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-15
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Double-click an analog output to edit. The Analog Output Assignment dialog box displays.
3. Select the Item Type to assign the Analog Output (or select Unassigned to deselect the output). Config600 completes the Item field with available data items:
Figure 4-9. Analog Output Items
4. Select an item in the Item field to assign to the item type.
5. Define the output scales by entering values in the Low scale and High scale fields. S600+ uses these values when converting the raw value into a scaled analog output value. The default value for the Low scale is 0; the default value for the High scale is 10000000. To invert the output, set the High scale lower than the Low scale.
Note: Config600 changes the units associated with these fields (kg/m3, t/h, m3/h, pls/m3, and such) based on the data item you select.
6. Select a Conversion factor for the Low scale and High scale values. Valid options are 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA. The default is 4 to 20mA. For example, if you select the 4 to 20mA option, Config600 equates the Low scale value to 4 mA and the High scale value to 20mA.
7. Click OK to apply your selections. The system redisplays the PCSetup screen with your new assignments.
Note: Refer to Appendix D, Field Calibration, for additional information.
4-16
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4.5 Density Inputs
Config600 supports either single or twin densitometers, which you assign to each station or stream as you develop a configuration. You can assign each densitometer frequency to a specific density input channel on the I/O module.
Each installed I/O module (P144) provides three available density input channels. Each installed Prover module (P154) provides two channels.
Notes:
If the densitometer also acts as the temperature element for the meter, assign the meter temperature, densitometer temperature, and pressure transmitter to the same analog input.
Using the Streams option in the PCSetup Editor, you can switch a frequency input to an analog signal. See Chapter 6, Stream Configuration.
4.5.1 Assigning Density Input
To assign or reassign a density input data item:
1. Select Density Inputs from the hierarchy menu. The system displays all currently defined density inputs in the right-hand pane.
2. Double-click a Density Input to edit. The Assign Input dialog box displays.
Note: You can also click the Assignment icon to display the dialog box.
on the toolbar
3. Select the I/O Board to assign the density input (or select Unassigned to deselect the input). Config600 lists available channels in the I/O Channel field:
Revised January-2021
Figure 4-10. I/O Channels for Density Input
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-17
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4. Select the I/O Channel for the density input. 5. Click OK to apply the assignment. The system redisplays the
PCSetup screen with your new I/O assignment.
Notes:
Before displaying the PCSetup screen, Config600 may display a reminder for you to enable the alarms for the new assignment.
When you assign a densitometer input, the station or stream density configuration page displays.
Figure 4-11. Alarm Reminder
4.5.2 Editing Density Inputs
To edit the description for a density data item:
1. Select Density Inputs from the hierarchy menu. The system displays all currently defined density inputs in the right-hand pane.
2. Right-click a data item to edit. The system displays a shortcut menu.
3. Select Settings on the shortcut menu. The system displays the Edit Description dialog box:
Figure 4-12. Edit Description dialog box
4. Edit the current item description, using no more than 20 alphanumeric characters.
5. Click OK to apply the new item description. The system redisplays the PCSetup screen with your new item description.
4-18
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4.6 Turbine Inputs
A turbine or positive displacement meter provides inputs to the system in the form of single-pulse or dual-pulse data. You assign the turbine pulse inputs to an I/O channel on the I/O board.
Each installed I/O module (P144) or Prover module (P154) provides up to four pulse input channels. You can define these channels as:
Four single-pulse inputs. Two dual-pulse inputs. Two single-pulse and one dual-pulse inputs.
The S600+ cannot count pulses unless the I/O module (P144) or Prover
Caution module (P154) is fitted with a dual-pulse P148 mezzanine board.
4.6.1 Assigning Turbine Inputs
To assign or reassign turbine input data items:
1. Select Turbine Inputs from the hierarchy menu. The system displays all currently defined turbine inputs in the right-hand pane.
2. Double-click a turbine input to edit. The Pulse Input Assignment dialog box displays.
Note: You can also click the Assignment icon to display the dialog box.
on the toolbar
Revised January-2021
Figure 4-13. Pulse Input Assignment dialog box
3. Select a pulse mode:
Field Unassigned Single
Dual Level A
Description Select to un-assign a pulse input.
Select if only one pulse train is available from the meter.
Select if the meter provides dual pulses at the same frequency but out of phase.
Note: This option conforms to Level A interpolation in accordance with ISO 6551 (IP252/76).
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-19
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Dual Level B
Description Select if the meter provides dual pulses at the same frequency but out of phase.
Note: This option conforms to Level B interpolation in accordance with ISO 6551 (IP252/76).
4. Select the I/O board for the pulse turbine input.
5. Select an I/O channel to use. For dual-pulse input on the I/O (P144) module, select channels 1 & 2 or 3 & 4. For dual-pulse input on the Prover (P154) module, select channels 2 & 3 or 4 & 5 (Config600 reserves channel 1 for the I/O board). Four channels (1, 2, 3, and 4 for I/O modules or 2, 3, 4, and 5 for Prover modules) are available for single-pulse inputs.
6. Complete the Low Frequency Cutoff field using a Hertz value. If the S600+ receives pulse frequencies below this value, it sets the flow rate and input frequency to zero.
Note: Totalisation still occurs in Liquid Turbine applications, but does not occur in Gas Turbine applications when the frequency is below the Low Frequency Cutoff value.
7. Complete the fields in the Thresholds pane (which displays only if you selected Dual Level A or B as a pulse mode).
Field Reset
Bad Pulse
Description
Determines the number of consecutive valid pulses the system must receive after the occurrence of the bad pulse alarm before it clears the bad pulse alarm. The default value is 200000.
Note: Config600 ignores all bad pulses that occur below the value you enter in the Error Check Frequency field.
Indicates the number of bad pulses that need to accumulate in the bad pulse buffer before the system raises the bad pulse alarm. The default is 50.
8. Complete the fields in the Bad Pulse Configuration pane (which displays only if you selected Dual Level A or B as a pulse mode).
Field Bad Pulse Reset Mode
Error Check Frequency
Description
Defines how the system manages the bad pulse buffer. Valid values are Clear (clear the buffer when the input frequency is below the error check frequency) or Set (do not clear the buffer). The default value is Clear.
Sets a threshold input frequency value. While Config600 detects and records pulses below this value, it does not include them in bad pulse checking.
9. Click OK to apply the assignments. The PCSetup screen displays showing your new values.
4-20
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4.6.2 Editing Turbine Inputs
To edit the description for a pulse input data item:
1. Select Turbine Inputs from the hierarchy menu. The system displays all defined turbine Inputs.
2. Right-click a data item to edit. The system displays a shortcut menu.
3. Select Settings on the shortcut menu. The system displays the Edit Description dialog box:
Note: You can also click the Settings icon on the toolbar after highlighting the data item to display the menu.
Figure 4-14. Edit Description dialog box
4. Edit the current item Description, using no more than 25 alphanumeric characters.
5. Click OK to apply the new item Description. The system redisplays the PCSetup screen with your new item Description.
4.7 Pulse Outputs
Use pulse outputs to derive cumulative totals for display on a counter, a totaliser, or DCS system. You can assign each pulse output to a specific pulse output channel on the I/O board.
Each installed I/O (P144) module provides five pulse output channels, and each installed Prover (P154) module provides four channels.
Revised January-2021
Figure 4-15. Pulse Output Items
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-21
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4.7.1 Assigning Pulse Outputs
To assign or reassign Pulse Output data items:
1. Select Pulse Outputs from the hierarchy menu. The system displays all defined pulse output data items.
2. Double-click a pulse output to edit. The Pulse Output Assignment dialog box displays.
Figure 4-16. Pulse Output Items
3. Select Cumulative Totals in the Item Type pane. Config600 completes the Item field with available items.
4. Select an Item in the Item pane to associate with the Pulse Output.
5. Edit the Description associated with the item and item type. Config600 uses this value only on screen displays and reports.
6. Complete the Frequency field using a Hertz value to indicate the output's pulse width. For example, a frequency of 5 Hz equates to a 200 millisecond pulse width with a 50/50 duty cycle. The default value is 5.
7. Complete the Grab Size field to indicate the number of units per pulse (the type of unit being dependent on the application) Config600 accumulates before sending a pulse. For example, use a Grab Size value of 10m3 to measure increments in the Cumulative Volume Totals for each outputted pulse. The default is 10.
8. Click OK to apply the new assignment. The PCSetup screen displays showing the new assignment.
4.8 HART Modules
Each Highway Addressable Remote Transducer (HART) module supports 12 channels with up to 8 transmitters per channel. However, the S600+ has an overall restriction of 50 transmitters.
4-22
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: You cannot add a HART module definition to an existing configuration file. If you add a HART module to your S600+, you must create an entirely new configuration file. Be sure to assign the I/O module (P144) to address 1 and the HART module (P188) to address 2.
The S600+ supports 12 channels, with up to 8 sensors multidropped from each channel. Since each sensor takes approximately 0.5 second of scan time, the more sensors you add to each channel, the slower the I/O update time becomes for that channel. Also, the HART module reads only the HART digital signal, not the channel's analogue value. If you require both, you must physically wire the HART signal to an ADC and HART channel.
By default, the S600+ acts as the primary HART master. Ensure there is no other primary master connected to the channel. For dual master support or instructions on how to set the S600+ to secondary master, contact Technical Support.
4.8.1 Editing HART Settings
To edit or reassign settings for the HART data items:
1. Select HART Boards from the hierarchy menu. The system displays the HART Board configuration screen:
Figure 4-17. HART Module Configuration screen
2. Complete the screen based on the number of sensors associated with each channel on the S600+. Click to display valid values.
4.9 PID Loop Settings
The PID control task provides primary control with secondary override control (that is, two control loops, each with its own parameters). You can either select the output according to criteria you can enter or allow a status input to the task to select the output.
You can configure an individual PID task for each station and stream, subject to the I/O providing sufficient analog outputs.
Revised January-2021
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-23
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Typically, a liquid application has flowrate primary control which changes to pressure control if the pressure falls too low. A gas application has a primary pressure control which is overridden by flow control if the flowrate becomes too high.
4.9.1 Assigning PID Loops
To assign or reassign PID data items:
1. Select PID Loops from the hierarchy menu. The system hides the setup fields until you assign an analog output to the PID loop (see Figure 4-18).
Figure 4-18. PID Loop Enabled screen
2. Select Unassigned (or select the Analog Outputs from the hierarchy menu) to identify the Analog Output values you desire to associate with each PID control loop.
Figure 4-19. Analog Output Assignment screen
4-24
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3. Select PID Loops from the hierarchy menu. The system expands the hierarchy to display the control loops defined for each I/O module.
4. Select a control loop. Config600 displays the common data items for this loop.
Figure 4-20. PID Loop Output Assigned screen 5. Assign the Primary Controlled Process Variable to enable the
primary controller. 6. Click PV Channel Settings. A Select Object dialog box displays.
Use it to assign the Analog Output value associated with this PID control loop.
Figure 4-21. PID Loop Output Assigned screen
7. Assign if required the Override Controller process variable. Config600 expands the screen content.
Revised January-2021
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-25
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 4-22. PID Loop PV Assigned screen
8. Select the Control Method for the PID loop. Click to display all valid process variable values.
Field Disable
Dual Auto
Primary Only
Secondary Only User Logic
Description The PID algorithm does not execute and the output does not update
Selects Primary control with Secondary override according to the settings defined in Switch Over Logic field.
Uses the primary control settings with no switching to secondary control.
Uses the second control settings; does not switch to primary control.
Uses a KPINT status input to select either primary or secondary control. The status can be set by an operator, a digital input, user logic in a LogiCalc, or downloaded from a supervisory computer.
9. Complete the Auto/Manual field. Valid values are Manual (the system forces the output to the Manual Position value) or Auto (the system uses the calculated value from the PID algorithm to drive the analog output). The default value is Manual.
10. Indicate an MV Max Rate Of Change as a percentage of the output per second. This value controls the Manipulated Variable output's maximum rate of change (ROC). The default is 60 (60% of output). For example, entering 20 in this field limits a full range (0 to 100) change to a minimum of 5 seconds.
Note: Enter 0 in the MV Max Rate of Change field to override the field.
11. Indicate an MV Clamping High Limit as a percentage of the output. This value limits the Manipulated Variable output's maximum value. The default is 100.
4-26
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
12. Indicate an MV Clamping Low Limit as a percentage of the output. This value limits the Manipulated Variable output's minimum value. The default is 0.
13. PV Channel shows the measured input selected for the PID loop.
Note: The system grays out the Override Controller PV Channel Settings button until you assign the Primary Controller PV Channel.
14. Complete the Control Action field on the PID Loop screen. The system uses this value to determine whether to increase or decrease the output when the process variable exceeds the SP (Setpoint) value. Valid values are Reverse (reduce the output when the process variable is greater than the Setpoint value) or Forward (increase the output when the process variable is greater than the Setpoint value). The default is Reverse.
15. Define a Set Point value, which the system--when in Auto mode--attempts to achieve by controlling the output. This is an initial value that you can change through the S600+ front panel. It must be in the same units as the Process Variable.
16. Complete the SP Rate Of Change field. The default is 0.
Config600 uses this value to control the rate of change (ROC) of the setpoint. The value defines the maximum rate of change, causing the setpoint to change as a percentage of the setpoint range incrementally to the new entered Set Point value. Use this value as a component of flow profiling, for example, at the start of a batch.
Note: Enter 0 to override the SP Rate of Change field.
Warning
If you overrider this parameter, then the rate of change at the output occurs as fast as the unit can react to a new setpoint value being entered. This results in a step change of the output value rather than a smooth transition from one point to another.
17. Select the SP Tracking checkbox to enable setpoint tracking. This field works in conjunction with the value you enter in the Auto/Manual field:
With SP Tracking enabled and in Auto mode, the system sets the value in the Manual Position field equal to the current output value.
With SP Tracking enabled and in Manual mode, the system sets the value in the SP (Setpoint) field equal to the process variable.
With SP Tracking disabled and in Auto mode, the value in the Manual Position field remains unchanged.
With SP Tracking disabled and in Manual mode, the SP value remains unchanged and the system sets the integral action field to the value required to maintain the current position.
Revised January-2021
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-27
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
18. Complete the Manual Position field. This value represents the output value when the Auto/Manual mode is set to Manual.
19. Complete the PV Range field to identify the range for the process variable measuring instrument. The value must be in the same units as the Process Variable.
20. Complete the Prop Band (Proportional Bandwidth) field. This value is a tuning parameter expressed as a percentage of the PV Range. It makes a change to the output proportional to the current error.
21. Complete the Integral Time field. This value, expressed in seconds, is a tuning parameter. It makes a change to the output based on the sum of previous errors.
Note: If the Integral Time is 0, the system sets the integral action to zero.
22. Complete the Derivative Time field. This value, expressed in seconds, is a tuning parameter. It makes a change to the output based on the rate of change of the error.
Note: If the Derivative Action Time is 0, the system sets the derivative action to zero.
23. The Dual Auto Control Method uses Switch Over Logic criteria to decide whether to use the output produced by the primary control loop or the output produced by the secondary override control loop. The test compares the override process variable with an entered limit, and can test for either lower (such as too low pressure) or higher (such as too high flowrate).
Switch to override when override PV is less than the entered value (to the right of this selection on the screen), and switch back when PV reaches the entered value (to the right of this selection on the screen).
Switch to override when override PV is greater than the entered value (to the right of this selection on the screen), and switch back when PV reaches the entered value (to the right of this selection on the screen).
Note: The Switch Over Logic option displays only if you select Dual Action in the Control Method field.
24. Click the hierarchy menu when finished. Config600 displays an Apply Changes dialog box.
25. Click Yes to apply the changes to the configuration file. The PCSetup screen redisplays.
4.9.2 Proportional Plus Integral and Derivative Action
The method for PID control is to calculate an error that is the difference between the current measured value of the process variable (usually flowrate or pressure) and a setpoint value required for the
4-28
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
variable, and to convert the error to a correction which can be applied to the output to reduce the error to zero. Forward/Reverse action describes the direction in which correction is applied to decrease the error. For flowrate control using a flow control valve, when the process variable is greater than the setpoint, the output needs to be reduced to close the valve slightly, and this is defined as Reverse action. For pressure control in the same situation, the output would need to be increased and this is defined as Forward acting. The three components each provide a different type of correction to the output and adjustment of the terms effectively changes the amount of damping applied; the proportional component applies to the current error, the integral component applies to the sum of previous errors over a period and the derivative component applies to the rate of change of the error. PID Controller The PID controller output is calculated from the sum of the proportional, integral, and derivative actions:
Output = P + I + D
Each term depends on the Error and Gain: If the control action is Forward:
Error = Process Variable Setpoint
If the control action is Reverse:
Error = Setpoint Process Variable
If the proportional gain is applied to all three terms:
Gain = 1 / PV Range x 100 / Proportional Band x 100
If the algorithm is processes at regular intervals:
Delta Time = Current Time Previous Time
Proportional The degree of proportional action (P) is directly proportional to the Action (P) error and is calculated from the formula:
P = Error x Gain
A high proportional action produces a large change in the output for a given change in the error, a low proportional action produces a small change in the output, that is the action is less sensitive. If the proportional gain is too high the system becomes unstable. A suitable initial value for flowrate control is 200%.
Integral Action (I) The degree of integral action (I) is calculated from the formula:
I (new) = I (previous) + (Error x Gain x Delta Time) / Integral Action Time
Integral action provides a cumulative offset that eliminates the residual error. A suitable initial value for flowrate control is 3.0 seconds.
Revised January-2021
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-29
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Derivative Action (D) The degree of derivative action (D) is calculated from the formula:
D = (Error (2 x Old Error) + Very Old Error) x Gain x Derivative Action Time / Delta Time
Derivative action responds to rate of change in successive errors. The action is sensitive and anything greater than a small value of the derivative action time can make the system unstable.
A suitable initial value for flowrate control is 0.01 seconds.
4.10 Communications Port
During the creation of a configuration, you specify the communications ports. Once the configuration has been created, you must configure the "tasks" for the communications port(s).
A communication "task" defines the communications links to any devices connected to the S600+. The task defines the communications or network port and communication parameters for the port. You can define up to 20 communications tasks for the S600+ and assign each task a specific function (such as Modbus Master, Modbus Slave, VWI, or Printer). Each task must be allocated to a dedicated communications port. If you configure a serial port, the task allows you to configure the settings for the COM ports to the external devices.
The S600+ supports Modbus, Modbus Enron (Modbus with EFM Extensions), Modbus encapsulated in TCP/IP, Modbus/TCP, and Printing over Ethernet.
Notes:
EFM is Electronic Flow Metering or Measurement.
For Modbus encapsulated in TCP/IP and Modbus/TCP, the maximum number of RTU's that can be connected to a single Port (501, 502, etc.) is 2.
S600+ supports: Slave and master peer-to-peer. Q.Sonic. Slave and master functionality in Modbus. Slave and master functionality in Modbus Enron (EFM). Slave and master functionality in Modbus encapsulated in TCP/IP. Slave functionality in Modbus/TCP. Master TCP/IP communication. Printer. VWI. Network Time Protocol (NTP)
4.10.1 Editing a Communications Task
To edit a communication task:
4-30
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1. Select Comms from the hierarchy menu. The system displays the Communication Task configuration screen:
Figure 4-23. Example Communication Task Configurations
2. Select a value in the Comms Links field. Config600 displays the values associated with that Comm Link type in the right-hand side of the screen. The title of that values pane also changes to reflect the selected Comm Link type.
3. Complete the values for the selected Comms Link:
Note: Not all fields display for each Comm Link option.
Field Function
Protocol
Description
Indicates all valid communication port functions. Click to display all valid functions.
Select a protocol, if appropriate. Click to display all valid protocols, which include Serial (ASCII), Serial (RTU), Ethernet (ASCII), Ethernet (RTU), Modbus/TCP, Printer (Serial), and Printer (Ethernet).
Note: RTU (Remote Transmission Unit) is the preferred protocol for increased performance.
Revised January-2021
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-31
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual Field Port
Setup
Description
Sets the primary port for the communication task. If available, click to display all valid ports. Click Setup (if present) to display a Port Setup dialog that you use to define communication options (baud rate, data bits, stop bits, and parity values) for the port you select. The port depends on the type of Comms link you select.
Notes:
When set to 0, the NTP uses any available port when communicating with a public NTP server.
For Modbus encapsulated in TCP/IP and Modbus/TCP, the maximum number of RTU's that can be connected to a single Port (501, 502, etc.) is 2.
Click to display a Port Setup dialog box that you use to define communication options for the selected port type.
Note: The Comm Link type dictates which fields selectively appear on this dialog box.
Baud Rate
Indicates the serial transfer rate. Click to display all valid values. The default value is 38400.
Data Bits
Indicates the number of data bits the port uses. Click to display all valid values. The default value is 8.
Stop Bits
Indicates the period length. Click to display all valid values. The default value is 1.
Parity
Indicates the type of parity used to detect data corruption during transmission. Click to display all valid values. The default value is None.
Hardware Handshake
Sets RTS/CTS Handshaking. When you select this checkbox, the ready to send (RTS) line fluctuates between on and off.
RTS On Delay
Sets, in milliseconds, the amount of time Config600 waits after turning on the ready to send (RTS) signal before beginning transmission. The default is 0. You can change this value to optimise communications.
The default value should be sufficient for dial-up modems and EIA-232 (RS-232) connections. For older radios, you may need to set this value to 0.2 seconds. For newer radios, 0.02 seconds should be sufficient.
4-32
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Meter Port Address Map IP Address Server Address Slave Address Update Interval
Description
RTS Off Delay
Sets, in milliseconds, the amount of time Config600 waits after transmitting a message before turning off the ready to send (RTS) signal. The default is 0. You can change this value to optimise communications.
The default value should be sufficient for dial-up modems and EIA-232 (RS-232) connections. For radios, a value of 0.01 may be appropriate.
Note: These variables may change per your situation. These are general values that you need to assess for each circumstance.
If you select the VWI function, click Setup to display the Port Comm Setup dialog and configure the port with which to communicate with the meter.
If you select the VWI Function and the Serial protocol, you must also use the Meter Port field to define a COM port for the ultrasonic meter. Although the S600+ provides eight COM ports, ports 1, 2, and 8 are reserved for system use.
Identifies the Modbus file Config600 uses to map data.
Click Edit (if present) to open the Modbus Editor and edit the file (see Chapter 14, Modbus Editor for more information).
If you select the Modbus (Master) function and the Ethernet or Modbus protocols, enter a Slave IP Address in addition to identifying the port.
Indicates the TC/IP address of the NTP server used for time synchronisation.
Note: This option displays only when you select NTP.
If you select the Modbus (Slave) function, you must also complete the Slave Address field. This is a switch, not an IP address. Enter either a valid Modbus address between 1 and 247 or enter 0. If you enter 0, then the Modbus task uses the value entered on the S600+ (refer to Chapter 7, Startup, in the FloBoss S600+ Flow Manager Instruction Manual, Form A6115). This is useful when multiple streams with identical configurations require unique slave addresses.
Indicates how frequently the S600+ connects with the NTP server and checks for time drift. Valid values are Disabled (the default), Daily, or Weekly. Click to display all values. This update occurs between 10 and 50 seconds past the minute.
Note: This option displays only if you select NTP.
Revised January-2021
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-33
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Max Time Drift
Alarm Accept on TX Read Only Secondary Link
Setup Peer to Peer Options
Link to Stream Assignment
Description
Defines (in milliseconds) the threshold at which the the S600+ resets its internal clock. This threshold is the maximum point of difference between the NTP server and the S600+. For example, if the difference between the NTP server and the S600+ check exceeds this value, the S600+ clock adjusts. Any resynchronisations appear in the event log. The time difference is in module (+/- Max time drift).
Note: This option displays only when you select NTP.
Allows the S600+ to automatically acknowledge and accept alarms locally when they are transmitted on the Modbus link. With this option enabled, the S600+ accepts all alarms when polled for any data.
Prevents the Modbus link from writing data to the S600+.
If you select the Modbus (Slave) function and the Ethernet (RTU) or Modbus/TCP protocol, select Secondary Link in Dual Ethernet Systems to indicate that the slave unit is on the secondary Ethernet port.
Note: Modbus (Master) is not supported on the second network card.
Click to display the Peer Params Setup dialog, which you use to select options for peer-to-peer networking.
Note: This option displays only when you select the Peer Master Link or Peer Slave Link.
Assign streams in an ascending order to Comm Links in an ascending order. For example, Streams 1 and 2 to Link 1; Streams 3 and 4 to Link 2; and Streams 5, 6, and 7 to Link 3.
Note: This option displays only when you select the GDUS Link 1 or Coriolis Link 1.
Stream
Select the stream to which to link the stream.
Address
Enter the address to which to link the stream.
Notes:
If you select the Modbus (Master) function and the Ethernet or Modbus protocols, you must provide a slave IP address in addition to identifying the port.
If you select the Modbus (Slave) function and the Ethernet or Modbus protocol, a Secondary Link check box appears at the bottom of the screen below the Address Map field. Select this option to indicate that the slave unit is on the secondary Ethernet port.
If you select the VWI function and the Serial protocol, you must also use the Meter Port field to define a COM port for the ultrasonic meter. Although the S600+ provides eight COM ports, ports 1, 2, and 8 are reserved for system use.
4-34
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
If you select the Printer function for multiple tasks, all the tasks can have the Printer function.
4. Once you are done configuring communications, click on the hierarchy menu. Config600 displays an Apply Changes dialog box.
5. Click Yes to apply the changes to the configuration file. The PCSetup screen redisplays.
4.10.2 Setting Up Peer-to-peer Options
To set up peer-to-peer communication options, refer to Appendix F, Peer-to-peer Link Communications.
Revised January-2021
I/O and Comms Configuration
4-35
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
[This page is intentionally left blank.]
4-36
I/O and Comms Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 5 Station Configuration
In This Chapter
5.1 Station Flowrate Limits........................................................................ 5-2 5.2 Station Averaging Temperature & Pressure ....................................... 5-4 5.3 Station Secondary Units Setup ........................................................... 5-6 5.4 Station Flow Switching ........................................................................ 5-8 5.5 Station Gas Composition .................................................................. 5-10 5.6 Sampling ........................................................................................... 5-14 5.7 Prover Configuration Screens ........................................................... 5-17
5.7.1 Flow Balance Setup ........................................................... 5-18 5.7.2 Prover Ball (Bi-Directional) (Liquid Only) ........................ 5-19 5.7.3 Prover Compact (Liquid Only)......................................... 5-31 5.7.4 Prover Master Meter (Gas and Liquid) ........................... 5-44
Use Stations to provide functions, such as station totals, batching, flow switching, and proving. They may also provide a common point for chromatograph information, sampler output, header density measurement and the corresponding liquid volume correction calculations. Streams can work stand alone, but you may also assign a stream to a station together with other streams. For example, stations can provide proving functions to streams you configure in other S600+ computers. If you assigned streams to stations during the initial configuration process, then up to two stations appear as choices in the hierarchy menu in the left pane. The stations can be gas or liquid or one of each.
Notes:
For station summation of stream flowrates to work correctly, all stations must have at least one stream configured.
Some station settings affect stream settings.
Stations
Figure 5-1. Stations on the Hierarchy Menu
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Station settings for the S600+ allow the configuration to be organised according to the application's operational requirements. The initial configuration process assigns default values to the station settings. Using the PCSetup Editor, you can define alarm limits for a maximum of two stations in each configuration file.
To edit the station settings, select the required station from the left pane (hierarchy menu) in the PCSetup Editor.
Note: You can also access and edit station settings through the System Editor and the System Graphic.
Station settings include:
Common Station Settings Gas Station Settings
Liquid Station Settings
Flow Rate Limits Station Averaging Secondary Units Station Setup Flow Switching (Station) Batching (Refer to Batching) Density Measurement (Refer to Stream
Configuration) Chromatograph Data Product Table (Refer to Batching) Batching (Refer to Batching) Proving (Refer to Proving) Flow Switching (Station) Density Measurement (Refer to Stream
Configuration) Sampling Liquid Volume Correction Flow Balance Setup
5.1 Station Flowrate Limits
Editing Flowrate Alarms
Flowrate settings define the alarm setpoints for each type of flowrate. You can enable up to four types of alarms for each flowrate. The settings enable or disable the alarms, and are system-activated when the calculated result for the relevant flowrate is not within the limits you specify.
To edit or activate flowrate alarm settings:
1. Select the Flowrate component from the hierarchy menu. The system displays the associated settings in the right-hand pane.
5-2
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 5-2. Flowrate Options
2. Double-click the required flowrate object. The system displays a Calculation Result dialog box.
Figure 5-3. Calculation Result dialog box
3. Select one or more alarms to enable. The system adds limit fields and default values to the dialog box.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 5-4. Calculation Result (with limits) 4. Review and modify the limits for any alarms you have enabled. 5. Click OK to apply the changes to the configuration file. The
PCSetup screen displays your changes.
Figure 5-5. Flowrate Alarms with Limits
5.2 Station Averaging Temperature & Pressure
Use the Station Averaging settings to set the alarm limits of the average temperature and pressure and define how the S600+ performs averaging. 1. Select the Average Temp & Pres component from the hierarchy
menu. The system displays the associated settings in the right-hand pane.
5-4
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 5-6. Average Temp & Pressure
2. Select an averaging mode. Click to display all valid options:
Value All
All Online
1st Online
Description
Average the pressure and temperature of all streams, regardless of status.
Average the pressure and temperature of only those streams currently on-line.
Use the pressure and temperature of the first stream on-line as the average station pressure and temperature.
3. Click STN TEMP or STN PRESS to display a Calculation Result dialog box.
Figure 5-7. Calculation Result dialog box for Temp & Pressure
Revised January-2021
4. Select the appropriate alarms to enable and indicate the specific values (temperatures and pressure in pre-defined units) for each alarm.
5. Click OK to apply the changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Station Configuration
5-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
5.3 Station Secondary Units Setup
The station secondary units setup allows for the configuration of selected flow rates and totals in different units as selected in the unit's section. 1. Select the Secondary Units STN Setup component from the
hierarchy menu. The system displays the associated settings in the right-hand pane.
Figure 5-8. Secondary Units STN Setup
2. Select the Gas STN Setup or Liquid STN Setup button to display the Dual Units Setup dialog.
Note: The dialog box consists of two screens (Cumulative Totals and Periodic Totals). You can switch between each screen by selecting the To Periodic Totals/To Cumulative Totals button.
5-6
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 5-9. Dual Units Setup Cumulative Totals dialog box
3. The Cumulative Totals screen consists of the following: The first 4 slots are pre-defined and indicate the available flow rates. You can configure the next 8 slots as station cumulative totals. The last slot is pre-defined and indicates which station is linked to the selected Dual Units Setup instance. To add a cumulative total, click on the Add button, and the first available cumulative total appears. Use the button to change the cumulative total for each slot.
Note: You should only configure Station Cumulative Totals.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 5-10. Dual Units Setup Periodic Totals dialog box
4. Click the the To Periodic Totals button to view the Periodic Totals screen. The Periodic Totals screen consists of the following: Pre-defined Slot 1 is read-only and indicates the converted flow rates and cumulative totals. Pre-defined Slot 2 is read-only and indicates the converted periodic totals. You can configure the next 12 slots as periodic totals. To add a periodic total, click on the Add button. Use the button to select the required periodic total.
Note: You should only configure Periodic Totals belonging to the selected station.
5. Click OK to apply the changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
5.4 Station Flow Switching
Flow Switching settings define the method and parameters that determine which streams should open and close. You can set up flow switching for a station and then disable it until you need this option. 1. Select Flow Switching from the hierarchy menu. The Flow
Switching screen displays.
5-8
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Revised January-2021
Figure 5-11. Flow Switching screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Enabled
Algorithm
Flowrate Setpoint Loading Units
Auto Close First
Manually Open First Manually Close Last Deviation Time
Post Move Time
Description Disables flow switching for the station. The default is checked (flow switching is enabled). Sets the algorithm to open and close streams. The default is 1. Note: Refer to Appendix C, Batching, for algorithm
descriptions. Sets, if applicable, the required station flowrate.
Identifies whether the measured flowrate is Mass (=1) or Volume (=0) units. The default is Volume. Identifies whether to close highest priority stream first (checked) or to close lowest priority stream first. Note: This does not apply to Algorithm 1. Select to open the first stream manually.
Select to close the last stream manually.
Sets the minimum time the flowrate must be above or below the limit before automatically opening or closing a stream. Sets a delay time after opening or closing a valve before moving to the monitor flow stage.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
Station Configuration
5-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
5.5 Station Gas Composition
Station Gas Composition settings define the processing and port telemetry parameters for stations receiving data from the gas chromatograph controller. The chromatograph controller measures the individual component concentrations found in the line gas. The chromatograph controller settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the chromatograph data are not within specified limits. 1. Select Gas Composition from the hierarchy menu. The Gas
Composition screen displays.
Figure 5-12. Station Gas Composition screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Type
Description
Indicates the chromatograph configuration. Click to display all valid values.
KP ONLY
Not controller-connected; uses information entered via keypad. This is the default.
Note: If you select KP ONLY, the system hides a number of fields on this screen.
CHROMAT A
Controller connected; uses data from Chromatograph A. If a fault is detected on Chromatograph A, then the system uses data from Chromatograph B (if healthy) or keypad data / last good data as fallback.
CHROMAT B Controller connected; uses data
5-10
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Initial Mode
Acceptance Type
Apply Splits
Revert to Last Good after Failure Check Critical Alarms
Description
from Chromatograph B. If a fault is detected on Chromatograph B, then the system uses data from Chromatograph A (if healthy) or keypad data / last good data as fallback.
CHROMAT AUTO
Controller connected; uses data from both Chromatographs based on the new analysis flag (GC A GC B GC A GC B). If a fault is detected on one of the Chromatographs, then the data from the other is used. If a fault is detected on both Chromatographs, then the keypad data / last good data is used as fallback.
Indicates the operational mode for the in-use composition data. Click to display all valid values.
KEYPAD
Use data entered via keypad. This is the default.
CHROMAT
Use live data from the chromatograph controller.
DOWNLOAD
Download gas composition data directly to each stream. Used only if connected to a remote supervisory computer.
USER
Use customised program for gas composition in S600+.
KEYPAD_F
Start by using keypad-entered data then switch to chromatograph data when a good analysis is received.
Indicates how the S600+ manages in-use data. Click to display all valid values.
ACC/COPY
Copy and normalise keypad data to in-use data only after it is accepted. This is the default.
ACC/NORM
Copy normalised keypad data to inuse data after it is accepted.
AUTO/NORM Automatically copy normalised keypad data to in-use data.
Indicates the type of analyser connected to the S600+. For a C6+ analyser, use the C6Plus option. Click to display all valid values. The default is NO SPLITS.
If you select any value other than NO SPLITS, the system displays the MOLE SPLITS button. Use it to define the specific percentage splits for the gases.
Note:
This field displays only if you selected CHROMAT A, CHROMAT B, or CHROMAT AUTO as the chromatograph configuration type.
Continues using the last good composition in the event of failure. Otherwise the system reverts to keypad data.
Marks the received composition as failed if any critical alarm is set (such as the pre-amp fail on the Danalyzer for a Daniel 2551 Controller).
Note: This field displays only if you selected CHROMAT A, CHROMAT B, or CHROMAT
Station Configuration
5-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Check Non Critical Alarms CHROMAT COMMS Initial Mode
Type
MOLE ORDER
Description AUTO as the chromatograph configuration type.
Marks the received composition as failed if any noncritical alarm is set (such as the pre-amp fail on the Danalyzer for a Daniel 2551 Controller).
Note:
This field displays only if you selected CHROMAT A, CHROMAT B, or CHROMAT AUTO as the chromatograph configuration type.
Click to display the Comm screen in I/O Setup.
Identifies the chromatograph and any fallback controllers. Currently, the only valid value is PAY, which indicates one chromatograph and no fallback controller.
Note:
This field displays only if you selected CHROMAT A, CHROMAT B, or CHROMAT AUTO as the chromatograph configuration type.
Indicates the type of chromatograph controller. Click to display all valid values.
Note:
This field displays only if you selected CHROMAT A, CHROMAT B, or CHROMAT AUTO as the chromatograph configuration type.
2551 EURO
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2551 (European) controller. This is the default.
2350 EURO
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2350 (European) controller set in SIM_2251 mode.
2350 USA
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2350 (USA) controller set in SIM_2251 mode.
2251 USA
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2251 controller.
Generic
S600+ is connected to another type of controller.
Siemens
S600+ is connected to a Siemens Advance Maxum via a Siemens Network Access Unit (NAU).
Click this button to display a dialog box on which you indicate the order in which the gas composition information comes into the S600+ via telemetry. 0 indicates any component which is not included in the Modbus map.
Note:
The Modbus map you create must be compatible with the controller to which the S600+ is connected. Refer to Chapter 14, Modbus Editor, for further information.
This field displays only if you selected CHROMAT A, CHROMAT B, or CHROMAT AUTO as the chromatograph configuration type.
This is applicable only if you select Siemens or Generic in the Type field.
5-12
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Address
Stream
Analysis Timeout
Download Timeout
KEYPAD MOLES
MOLE ADDITIONAL
USER MOLES
Check Limits
Description
Configures multi-drop chromatograph support. Do not change unless advised to do so.
Note:
This field displays only if you selected CHROMAT A, CHROMAT B, or CHROMAT AUTO as the chromatograph configuration type.
Sets the chromat analysis stream assigned to this metering stream. The default is 0.
Note:
This field displays only if you selected CHROMAT A, CHROMAT B, or CHROMAT AUTO as the chromatograph configuration type. If you need to support more than one stream, contact Technical Support.
Sets the maximum number of seconds the S600+ waits to receive a new composition from the chromatograph controller before raising an alarm. The default is 900.
Note:
This field displays only if you selected CHROMAT A, CHROMAT B, or CHROMAT AUTO as the chromatograph configuration type.
Sets the maximum number of minutes the S600+ waits to receive a new composition from the supervisory computer before raising a DL Timeout Alarm. The default is 15.
Note:
A value of 0 disables the timeout.
This field displays only if you select KP ONLY in the Type field.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for each gas component.
Note:
The system assumes the keypad composition adds to 100% (normalised) when the Acceptance Type is ACC/COPY. If you select ACC/NORM or AUTO/NORM, the system automatically normalises the keypad composition.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for gas components not analysed by the Danalyzer. The system assumes any additional components to be normalised values, so the analyser components are re-normalised to (100 sum of additional components).
Note:
This field displays only if you selected CHROMAT A, CHROMAT B, or CHROMAT AUTO as the chromatograph configuration type.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for each gas component. The system assumes user moles to be normalised.
Note:
The S600+ uses these values only if you set the Initial Mode to USER. A Modbus download from another computer may overwrite these values on a running configuration.
Enables limit checking on each gas component. When you select this check box, the MOLE LO LIMITS and MOLE HI LIMITS buttons display.
Station Configuration
5-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field MOLE LO LIMITS
MOLE HI LIMITS Check Deviations
MOLE DEVN LIMITS
Description
Click to display a dialog box you use to define low mole percentage limit values for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
Note:
The system uses the values you enter through these buttons only if you select the Check Limits check box. The system applies this test to the keypad, downloaded, user, additionals, and new analysis components. When enabled, the system applies the limit check against the high and low limits. Limits are considered valid if the limit is greater than zero (0). The system also applies the check to the Total field. If you disable the limit check, the keypad, downloaded, and user Total field must lie within 0.1% and 150%. A sum of the new analysis must be within 99.5% and 100.5%.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define high mole percentage limit values for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
Note: See note in description of Mole Lo Limits field.
Enables checking on the deviation from the last good analysis for each component. When you select this check box, the MOLE DEVN LIMITS button displays.
Note:
This field displays only if you selected CHROMAT A, CHROMAT B, or CHROMAT AUTO as the chromatograph configuration type.
Displays a dialog box you use to define the maximum deviation allowed for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
Note: This field displays only if you place a check mark in the Check Deviations field.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
5.6 Sampling
Sampling defines the method and interval period for sampling product from a flowing pipeline. By default, Config600 supports one sampler per stream. Config600 uses the following stages during the sampling process:
Stage 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Description Idle Monitor Digout n Min Intvl Post Pulse Stopped Manually Stopped Can Full
5-14
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Description Stopped Low Flow Initial Time Check Flow Switch Stopped Flow Switch Stopped Press Switch Stopped Initialise Can Switch Over
1. Select Sampling from the hierarchy menu. The system displays the associated settings in the right-hand pane.
Note: Batch auto-resets the sampler at the start of the batch.
Figure 5-13. Station Sampling
2. Complete the following fields:
Field Sampler ID
Method
Description
Provides an identifying label for the sampler. Each stream or station must have a unique sampler ID. This value, which must be greater than 0, is for identification purposes only and is not used in any calculation.
Identifies a sampling method. Click to display valid values.
Time Prop
Divides the value in the Can Fill Period field by the number of grabs needed to fill the can (derived from the Can Volume and Grab Volume values) to determine a time interval per pulse. This is the default.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-15
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Mode Can Fill Indicator
Auto Disable
Auto Restart Expected Volume / Mass Can Fill Period Flowrate Low Limit
Description Flow Prop1
Divides the value in the Expected Volume/Mass field by the number of grabs needed to fill the can (derived from the Can Volume and Grab Volume values) to determine a volume throughput per pulse.
Flow Prop2
Uses the value in the Expected Volume/Mass field as the volume throughput per pulse.
Flow Prop3
Uses the value in the Expected Volume/Mass field as the volume throughput per pulse, but supports low pressure digital input and pump prime output.
Indicates the sampling mode. Valid values are Single (acquire sample in one can) or Dual (acquire sample in two cans).The default value is Single.
Note: If you select Dual, the sampler switches to a second can when the current can is full (according to the twin can changeover mode).
Determines when the sampling can is full. Click to display valid values.
Grab Count
Uses the number of pulses output to the sample to determine when the can is full. This is the default.
Dig I/P
Uses a digital input to determine when the can is full.
Analog I/P
Uses an analog input to determine when the can is full.
Indicates the event at which the system automatically disables the sampling process. Select one of the check boxes to identify the event.
On Can Full
Disables the sampling process when the can is full.
On Flowrate Limit
Disables the sampling process when the flowrate is less than the value of the Flowrate Low Limit.
On Flow Status
Disables the sampling process when the flow status value is not online.
Automatically restarts the sampling process following an automatic disabling.
Indicates, in cubic meters, the flow volume or mass during which the samples are to be taken. This is the value the Flow Prop1 and Flow Prop2 sampling methods use for their calculations. The default is 1000.
Indicates, in hours, the amount of time required to fill the sampling can. This is the value the Time Prop sampling method uses for its calculations. The default is 24.
Note: This field is required for the TIME PROP sampling method.
Indicates, in cubic meters, the flowrate limit for the Auto Disable on Flowrate option. The default is 0.
Note: This field is required if you select the On Flowrate Limit check box for Auto Disable.
5-16
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Minimum Interval
Can Volume Grab Volume Can Low Limit Can High Limit Can High High Limit Twin can changeover mode
Description
Indicates, in seconds, the minimum amount of time between grabs. This is the value the Time Prop sampling method uses for its calculations. The default is 30.
Note: If the sample exceeds this limit, the system sets the overspeed alarm and increments the overspeed counter.
Indicates, in cubic meters, the volume of the sampling can. The default is 0.5.
Indicates, in cubic meters, the volume of the sampling grab. The default is 0.001.
Indicates the low alarm value as a percentage of the can volume. The default is 5.
Indicates the high alarm value as a percentage of the can volume. The default is 90.
Indicates the high high alarm value as a percentage of the can volume. The default is 95.
Indicates whether the system automatically changes to a second sampling can. Click to display valid values.
3. Click the hierarchy menu when finished. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
5.7 Prover Configuration Screens
This section provides an overview of the four S600+-supported proving methods--bi-directional, uni-directional, compact, and master meter--and their specifications and applications.
Note: Refer to Appendix B, Proving, for additional information.
The uni-directional prover differs from the bi-directional prover only in the run control sequence described in Prover Run Control Stages.
Station Based
With release 3.0 of Config600 software, proving is a station-based function. Each S600+ can support two stations, and you can assign up to 10 streams (depending on the complexity of the configured streams) to each station. The provers do not need to be the same type. However, the S600+ supports only one Prover (P154) module, which means that you can perform only one prove sequence at a time.
You can configure the streams to be proved either internally (within the same S600+) or externally in other S600+ flow computers (using a Modbus communication link to transfer process data to the prover). The S600+ does not provide an option supporting both internal and external streams in one configuration.
You select the prover type when building the configuration with the PCSetup Wizard.
Local or Remote The software also allows you to prove streams that are "local" (that is, part of the same configuration) or prove streams that are "remote" (in a separate configuration or separate S600+) to the prover.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-17
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
However, you cannot mix the two (for example, have a prover config with three metering streams and prove a remote, separate stream). If you require this feature, contact technical support.
5.7.1 Flow Balance Setup
Use flow balancing in conjunction with proving to regulate the flow through the meters to maintain a set flowrate through the prover.
The objective is to distribute the flow evenly across available streams. If the overall flowrate through the skid increases, flow balancing can open another meter run, or if the flow reduces the flow balancing, it can close a meter run to maintain an optimum flowrate through each meter.
You can open and close meter runs by configuring the streams to open and close valves.
1. Select Flow Balance Setup from the hierarchy menu. The system displays Flow Balance settings in the right-hand pane.
Figure 5-14. Flow Balance Setup screen
2. Complete the following fields:
Field Flow Rate
Preset O/P Initialisation Tolerance Band
Description
Select the source of the proof flowrate. Valid values are Preset (sets the proof flowrate to the Preset data field value plus the Offset data field value) or Snapshot (sets the proof flowrate to a snapshot of the stream under prove flowrate plus the Offset data field value). The default is Preset.
Sets the proof flowrate.
Sets the initial manual mode output position for the prover flow control valve. The default value is 50.
Sets the tolerance for the deviation of the prover flowrate and its setpoint during the prove. The prove aborts if this value is exceeded. The default value is 60.
5-18
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Offset Wait Time Hold Time
Adj. Interval PID Loop
Description
Sets a flowrate to be added to the proof flowrate to offset the change in flowrate between the prover and the stream under prove. The default value is 0.
Sets, in seconds, how long the S600+ waits for the proof flowrate to achieve before moving to the hold stability stage. The default value is 300.
Sets, in seconds, how long the S600+ holds the proof flowrate before starting prover runs. The default value is 60.
Note: S600+ aborts the prover sequence if stability is lost during the stability Hold Time.
Sets a time interval between making successive adjustments to the non-proving streams flowrate.
Sets the PID loop you use to control the flowrate at the prover. Click to display valid options. The default is None.
Notes:
This field displays only if you have configured a PID Control calctable or used the PRV01 CNTRL 1 and PRV01 CNTRL 2 by changing type to PID Control.
You define flowrate band settings for each stream on the Flowrate screen.
5.7.2 Prover Ball (Bi-Directional) (Liquid Only)
Two components enable you to control the prove:
Prove sequence Station-based function which sets up the prove environment.
Run control Prover-based function that drives the 4-way valve, counts pulses, and performs the K-factor calculations.
Following a successful prove, the system verifies the stream normal flow rate value:
If the normal flow rate is set to zero, the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved, but the stream does not use the data until it is accepted either locally at the S600+ or via a supervisor computer.
If the normal flow rate is set to a value greater than zero (Aramcostyle linearisation), the run control waits for a predefined amount of time for you to reject the current prove results. If a prove is rejected, the proving report is annotated as "ABORTED". If the time-out elapses, the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved and the data is automatically used in the subsequent calculations.
If the normal flow rate is zero (non-Aramco-style linearisation), the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved, but does not use the data until it is accepted either locally at the S600+ or via a supervisory computer.
When the prove runs complete, you can either re-run the prove or terminate, at which point (if so configured) the sequence restores the valves to their pre-prove state.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-19
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Notes:
The prove sequence downloads both a K-factor and a meter factor. Applications typically use the original K-factor from the meter calibration report and update the meter factor, which may be either a fixed value or derived from a linearisation process. Alternatively the meter factor can remain unchanged and the K-factor (fixed or linearised) updated.
The meter factor deviation tests and the historical meter factor database are only supported for "local" streams (part of the same configuration with the prover), if you configure the stream normal flow rate to a value greater than zero.
You define a ticket as Official or Unofficial when you configure a prove. This selection applies to both the Aramco-style and nonAramco-style linearisation.
Following an Official prove, the prove sequence is determined by the Aramco / non-Aramco style linearisation selection.
Following the Unofficial prove, the prove sequence does not download the prove results to the stream being proved. This is typically used to determine an approximate K-Factor / Meter Factor before an official prove takes place or when maintenance activities are being performed on the site.
The Official/Unofficial selection displays in the report header.
Run Data
Run Data settings allow you to define the prover stability check variables, the number of prove runs from which the system can calculate a K-factor/meter factor, and the tolerances allowed on the Kfactor/meter factor. Once the S600+ completes a prove and calculates these values, you can select a new K-factor or meter factor to replace the current K-factor or meter factor.
To edit the prover run data settings:
1. Select Run Data from the hierarchy menu. The Run Data screen displays.
5-20
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Revised January-2021
Figure 5-15. Run Data screen (Ball Prover)
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Override Wait Time Hold Time Required
Maximum
Description
Disables temperature and pressure stability checking. The default is unchecked (stability checking is enabled).
Note: If you do not enable this option, you must complete the Wait Time and Hold Time fields.
Sets, in seconds, how long the S600+ waits for stability before moving to the hold stability prover stage. The default is 60.
Sets, in seconds, how long the S600+ holds stability before starting prover runs. The default is 10.
Note: The S600+ aborts the prover run if stability is lost during the stability hold time.
Sets the required number of consecutive runs which must be within the defined tolerance limits (typically, 5). The default is 5.
Note:
It is possible that the number of required runs cannot be achieved before the maximum number of runs reached. In this situation, the user can either wait for the prove to abort (once the maximum number of runs has been reached) or perform a manual abort.
Sets the maximum number of runs to perform before aborting the sequence (up to 12 for the S600+). The default is 12.
Station Configuration
5-21
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Average Method
Time Tolerance Algorithm
Conf. Level Prover mode
Enable User Stages
Description
Indicates the value to determine the repeatability and to indicate whether the final K-factor and meter factor are taken as the average of the run values, or are recalculated. Click to display valid values.
METER FACTOR
Use the run Meter Factors for repeatability and the average Meter Factor as the final value. The default is METER FACTOR.
K-FACTOR
Use the run K-factors for repeatability and the average Kfactor as the final value.
PULSES
Use the run pulse counts for repeatability. This option also signifies to recalculate the final K-factor and Meter Factor using the average pulse count and other average values. See API Ch.12 Section 2 part 3.
Sets, in seconds, the amount of time either between forward and reverse prover runs or between full prover runs. The default is 5.
Sets, as a percentage, the maximum deviation allowed before a run is unacceptable. The default is 1.
Indicates the algorithm the system uses to calculate the K-factor tolerance. Click to display valid values.
API I
API method: max deviation from (Average Run) / Average. This is the default.
MX-MN/AVG (Max Min) / Average
MX-
(Max Min) / ((Max + Min) / 2)
MN/MX+MN2
MX-MN/MN
(Max Min) / MIn
MXMN/MX*MN
(Max Min) / (Max * Min)
MX-AV/AV
(Max Average) / Average
AV-MN/AV
(Average Min) / Average
STATISTICAL
Calculates the statistical k-factor deviation using a Student-t table distribution.
Sets the confidence level for a two-sided Student-t table used in statistical proving. Click to display valid values. For more information, see Appendix B, Proving.
Note: This field displays only if you select STATISTICAL in the Algorithm field.
Indicates the prover mode. Click to display valid values.
BIDI 4-WAY
Bi-directional prover mode. This is the default.
UNI ROTORK Uni-directional prover using a ROTORK valve.
UNI TYPE 2
Uni-directional prover with no valve driving and assumes an external valve controller.
Enables Logicalc user stages. The default is unchecked (user stages are disabled).
5-22
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
User Student-t Table
Description
Indicates the Student-t table values for degrees of freedom 1-40. For more information, see Appendix B, Proving.
Note: These fields display only if you select STATISTICAL in the Algorithm field and USER in the Confidence Level field.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Constants
The Constants screen has two major areas. One area (consisting of the Stability R.O.C, Stability Bands, and Base Volume panes) defines stability checking parameters. The other area (consisting of the Reference, Setup, and Misc panes) provides set-up information for the prover, including reference conditions and physical properties.
1. Select Constants from the hierarchy menu. The Constants screen displays.
Figure 5-16. Constants screen (Ball Prover)
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Temperature
Description
Sets, in seconds, the Rate of Change (ROC) threshold limit for temperature, which the S600+ uses to check the ROC between the inlet, the outlet, and the meter. The default is 0.1.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-23
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Pressure
UVOL Temperature Pressure Base Volume 1 through 4
Pre Switch (Forward) Pre Switch (Reverse) Cal Temperature Cal Pressure CTL Temperature Density Units
Product Type
Description
Sets, in seconds, the Rate of Change (ROC) threshold limit for pressure, which the S600+ uses to check the ROC between the inlet, the outlet, and the meter. The default is 0.5.
Sets, in seconds, the Rate of Change (ROC) threshold limit for the stream uncorrected volume (UVOL) flowrate. The default is 10.
Sets the maximum temperature difference between the inlet, the outlet, and the meter. The default is 10.
Sets the maximum pressure difference between the inlet, the outlet, and the meter. The default is 10.
Sets the calibration volume (base volume) between the relevant sphere switches. Valid values are:
1
Defines the calibration volume between sphere
switches 1 and 3. The default is 1.
2
Defines the calibration volume between sphere
switches 2 and 4.
3
Defines the calibration volume between sphere
switches 1 and 4.
4
Defines the calibration volume between sphere
switches 2 and 3.
Note: Click Initial to identify the required base volume. These values are critical to the calculations.
Sets the forward pre-run volume (that is, the volume before switch 1). The default is 0.
Note: Set this field to zero (0) to disable timeouts.
Sets the reverse pre-run volume (that is, the volume before switch 1). The default is 0.
Note: Set this field to zero (0) to disable timeouts.
Sets the reference temperature value for calculations
(typically 15°C in Europe). The default is 15.
Sets the reference pressure value for calculations (typically 0 barg in Europe). The default is 0.
Sets the reference temperature for the correction of the temperature of the liquid factor. The default is 15.
Indicates the density units Config600 uses for the density correction calculations. Click to display all valid values.
DEG.API
Use degrees API.
KG/M3
Use kilograms per cubic meter. This is the default.
S.G.
Use specific gravity.
CH. 11 2004/7 Use API MPMS Chapter 11.1 2004,
CUST
Addendum 1, 2007 Imperial Units.
CH. 11 2004/7 Use API MPMS Chapter 11.1 2004,
METRIC
Addendum 1, 2007 Metric Units.
NORSOK I-105
Use Norsok I-105 Appendix D density corrections.
Indicates the type of petroleum product involved in the calculation. Click to display all valid values.
5-24
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Field
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description TABLE LOOKUP A CRUDE
B REFINED
S600+ reads values from a file in the Config600 3.0/Config/Project Name/extras directory and transfers that data into the S600+ with the configuration file. The default files hold values for the ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 5 and 6.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59A and 60A.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
This is the default.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53B and 54B.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59B and 60B.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23B and 24B.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5B and 6B.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-25
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Description C SPECIAL
D LUBE OILS
LIGHT 1986 ASTM IP 1952
If Density Table Units = KG/M3, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Table 54C.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23C and 24C.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5C and 6C.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Note: Table 53C is not implemented as the assumption is made that the base density is already known. This is because Table 53C allows for a keypad entry of Alpha, and if this is known then the base density would be known.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 53D and 54D.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59D and 60D.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 23D and 24D.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 5D and 6D.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
ASTM-IP-API Petroleum Measurement Tables for Light Hydrocarbon Liquids 1986 Tables 53 and 54.
ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 23, 24, 53 and 54.
5-26
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Field
CPL Calculation Rounding
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description
USER K0K1
If Density Table = KG/M3, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A with user entered values for K0 and K1.
If Density Table = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A with user entered values for K0 and K1.
If Density Table = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A with user entered values for K0 and K1.
LIGHT TP25 GPA TP-25 1998 (API Tables 23E and 24E).
AROMATICS ASTM D1555-95 Table Lookup. D1555-95
LIGHT TP27 GPA TP-27 2007 (API Tables 23E, 24E, 53E, 54E, 59E and 60E).
AROMATICS ASTM D1555M-00 Table Lookup. D1555M-00
AROMATICS ASTM D1555-04a Calculation. D1555-04A
AROMATICS ASTM D1555M-08 Calculation. D1555-08
STO5.9 08 B1 UGC
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.1 Unstable Gas Condensate.
STO5.9 08 B2 SLH
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.2 Stable Liquid Hydrocarbon.
STO5.9 08 B3 WFLH
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.3 Wide Fraction Liquid Hydrocarbon.
Indicates the specific CPL calculation the S600+ uses to calculate the liquid pressure correction factor. Click to display all valid values.
Note: This field does not display if you select Density Table Units CH.11 2004 CUST or CH.11 2004 METRIC or a Gazprom Product Type because these standards also specify the CPL calculation.
OFF
No CPL calculation. CPL value is set to 1.0.
API1121
API MPMS Ch.11.2.1 1984.
API1121M
API MPMS Ch.11.2.1M 1984. The default is API1121M.
API1122
API MPMS Ch.11.2.2 1986.
API1122M
API MPMS Ch.11.2.2M 1986. This is the default.
CONSTANT Use a value you enter.
DOWNER
Paper entitled Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International Use presented by L. Downer 1979.
Enables or disables calculation rounding. Click to display valid values.
OFF
Rounding is disabled. The default is OFF.
Station Configuration
5-27
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Pipe Diam Elasticity Wall Thick Tube Coeff Density Factor Location
Meter Factor Deviation 1 Limit
Meter Factor Deviation 2 Limit
Description
NATIVE
Rounding to the rules specified in the selected calculation standard.
API Ch.12.2 Rounding to API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part
Part 2
2 Measurement Tickets 1995.
API Ch.12.2 Rounding to API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part
Part 3
3 Proving Reports 1998.
Flocheck
Rounding to Emerson Flocheck verification software package.
ASTM D1250-04 Ch. 11
API MPMS Ch.11.1 2004 (ASTM D1250-04) method to round to the Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables.
Sets the internal pipe diameter of the prover loop. The default is 500.
Sets the value for Young's modulus of elasticity (expansion coefficient of tube steel), typically 2100000. The default is 10000.
Sets the wall thickness of the prover loop. The default is 5.
Sets the tube temperature expansion coefficient, typically 0.000033. The default is 0.01.
Used in conjunction with METER (DF) to correct meter density to prover density. The default is 1.
Used by volume v mass proving to select the location of the prover density used to convert prover volume to mass. Click to display valid values.
AT PROVER Read density at the prover. This is the default value.
METER (C2) Use Meter Density * CTLp * CPLp / (CTLm * CPLm), defined for proving a Micro Motion Coriolis meter.
METER (DF) Use Meter Density * Density Factor
KNOWN PRODUCT
Enter a value.
Sets the maximum allowed deviation from the initial base meter factor. The default value is 0.25%. The system uses this value while performing the proved meter factor deviation checks. Refer to Appendix B, Proving for further information.
Note: This stage is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation).
Sets the maximum allowed deviation from the initial base meter factor. The default value is 0.1%. The system uses this value while performing the proved meter factor deviation checks. Refer to Appendix B, Proving for further information.
Note: This stage is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation).
5-28
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Meter Factor Reject Timeout
Description
Following a successful prove, this value specifies the time period before the current prove results are automatically accepted and totals are adjusted based on the current prove results. During this time period, the current prove results can be manually ACCEPTED (totals will be adjusted) or ACCEPTED NO ADJUST (no totals adjustment). The default is 40 seconds. Refer to Appendix B, Proving for further information. Note: This stage is performed only if you configure
the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation).
Figure 5-17. Two-switch Bi-directional Prover Loop
Figure 5-18. Four-switch Bi-directional Prover Loop
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Hardware
Hardware settings relate to the Prover (P154) module. You use these settings to define how the S600+ processes the raw pulse inputs to the prover. Typically, when the pulse count is low (less than 10,000 pulses per round trip), the S600+ uses either "Phase Locked Loop" or "Dual Chronometry" processing. This effectively divides each pulse into smaller parts to maintain accuracy.
1. Select Hardware from the hierarchy menu. The Hardware screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-29
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 5-19. Hardware screen (Ball Prover)
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Dual Chronometry
Phase Locked Loop
Interpolation Factor
Number of Switches
Description
Enables dual chronometry. Dual chronometry determines meter pulses by counting a series of whole meter pulses and then multiplying that value by the ratio of the time between the detector switches and the time required to accumulate the pulses. The default is unchecked (disabled).
Enables the phase locked loop. A phased locked loop multiplies the number of actual turbine pulses by a value (the Interpolation Factor) for greater accuracy. The default is checked (enabled).
Note: If you select this check box, you must also provide an Interpolation Factor value.
Sets the interpolation factor value for the phase locked loops option, typically associated with the Pulse Interpolation Module (PIM). For that module, scaling factors range between x2 and x100. Set this value to be the same as the external unit. If the external unit is set to x10, enter 10 in this field. The default is 1.
Note: This field displays only if you select the Phase Locked Loop option.
Indicates the number of switches in the prover. Click to display valid values. Valid values are 1, 2, and 4; the default is 2.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Alarm Limits The Alarm Limits screen sets the prover alarms. For a description of the alarms, refer to Alarm Descriptions in Chapter 7, Advanced Setup Configuration.
5-30
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1. Select Alarm Limits from the hierarchy menu. The Alarm Limits screen displays.
Figure 5-20. Alarm Limits screen (Ball Prover)
2. Click any of the following buttons to set alarm limits.
Button
Description
RTRIP PULSES Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for round trip (RTRIP) pulses.
Note: In a bi-directional (BIDI) prover, this value reflects the sum of forward and reverse pulses.
RTRIP K-FACTOR
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for round trip Kfactors.
Note: In a uni-directional prover, this value reflects the forward pulses.
RTRIP M.FACTOR
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for round trip Meter Factors.
Note: In a uni-directional prover, this value reflects the forward pulses.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A
confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
5.7.3 Prover Compact (Liquid Only)
Two components enable you to control the prove:
Prove sequence Station-based function which sets up the prove environment.
Run control Prover-based function that drives the prover hardware, counts pulses, and performs the K-factor calculations.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-31
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Following a successful prove, the system verifies the stream normal flow rate value:
If the normal flow rate is set to zero, the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved, but the stream does not use the data until it is accepted either locally at the S600+ or via a supervisor computer.
If the normal flow rate is set to a value greater than zero (Aramcostyle linearisation), the run control waits for a predefined amount of time for you to reject the current prove results. If a prove is rejected, the proving report is annotated as "ABORTED". If the time-out elapses, the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved and the data is automatically used in the subsequent calculations.
If the normal flow rate is zero (non-Aramco-style linearisation), the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved, but does not use the data until it is accepted either locally at the S600+ or via a supervisory computer.
When the prove runs complete, you can either re-run the prove or terminate, at which point (if so configured) the sequence restores the valves to their pre-prove state.
The compact prover has a small volume chamber so a proof run consists of repeated proof passes (a default of 5, a maximum of 39). The S600+ does not create a proof report, although you can add this option through a user stage. Contact Technical Support.
Notes:
The prove sequence downloads both a K-factor and a meter factor. Applications typically use the original K-factor from the meter calibration report and update the meter factor, which may be either a fixed value or derived from a linearisation process. Alternatively the meter factor can remain unchanged and the K-factor (fixed or linearised) updated.
The meter factor deviation tests and the historical meter factor database are only supported for "local" streams (part of the same configuration with the prover), if you configure the stream normal flow rate to a value greater than zero.
You define a ticket as Official or Unofficial when you configure a prove. This selection applies to both the Aramco-style and nonAramco-style linearisation.
Following an Official prove, the prove sequence is determined by the Aramco / non-Aramco style linearisation selection.
Following the Unofficial prove, the prove sequence does not download the prove results to the stream being proved. This is typically used to determine an approximate K-Factor / Meter Factor before an official prove takes place or when maintenance activities are being performed on the site.
The Official/Unofficial selection displays in the report header.
5-32
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Run Data
Run Data settings allow you to define the prover stability check variables, the number of prove runs from which the system can calculate a K-factor/meter factor, and the tolerances allowed on a Kfactor/meter factor. Once the S600+ completes a prove and calculates these values, you can select a new K-factor or meter factor to replace the current K-factor or meter factor.
To edit the prover run data settings:
1. Select Run Data from the hierarchy menu. The Run Data screen displays.
Figure 5-21. Run Data screen (Compact Prover)
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Override
Wait Time
Description
Disables temperature and pressure stability checking. The default is unchecked (stability checking is enabled).
Note: If you do not select this option, you must complete the Wait Time and Hold Time fields.
Sets, in seconds, how long the S600+ waits for stability before moving to the hold stability prover stage. The default is 300.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-33
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Hold Time Runs Reqd
Passes Reqd Runs Max Average Method
Switch Delay Averages Reqd Tolerance Algorithm
Description
Sets, in seconds, how long the S600+ holds stability before starting prover runs. The default is 10.
Sets the required number of consecutive runs which must be within the defined tolerance limits (typically, 5). The default is 5.
Note: It is possible that the number of required runs cannot be achieved before the maximum number of runs reached. In this situation, the user can either wait for the prove to abort (once the maximum number of runs has been reached) or perform a manual abort.
Sets the number of passes per prover run, to a maximum of 5. The default is 5.
Sets the maximum number of runs to perform before aborting the sequence (up to 12 for the S600+). The default is 12.
Indicates the value to determine the repeatability and to indicate whether the final K-factor and meter factor are taken as the average of the run values, or are recalculated. Click to display valid values.
METER FACTOR
Use the run Meter Factors for repeatability and the average meter factor as the final value. This is the default.
K-FACTOR
Use the run K-factors for repeatability and the average Kfactor as the final value.
PULSES
Use the run pulse counts for repeatability. This option also signifies to recalculate the final Kfactor and Meter Factor using the average pulse count and other average values. API Ch.12 Section 2 part 3.
Sets, in microseconds, the amount of time the S600+ waits before checking for switch 2. The default is 2.
Note: This parameter helps eliminate bounce on single-switch prover applications.
Sets the required number of pre-run average samples. The default is 0.
Sets, as a percentage, the maximum deviation allowed before a run is unacceptable. The default is 1.
Indicates the algorithm the system uses to calculate the K-factor tolerance. Click to display valid values.
API 1
API method: max deviation from (Average Run) / Average. This is the default.
MX-MN/AVG (Max Min) / Average
MX-
(Max Min) / ((Max + Min) / 2)
MN/MX+MN2
MX-MN/MN
(Max Min) / MIn
MXMN/MX*MN
(Max Min) / (Max * Min)
MX-AV/AV
(Max Average) / Average
AV-MN/AV
(Average Min) / Average
5-34
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Conf. Level
Ready Plenum
Launch Flight Retrieve User Student-t Table
Description
STATISTICAL
Calculates the statistical K-factor deviation using a Student-t table distribution.
Sets the confidence level for a two-sided Student-t table used in statistical proving. Click to display valid values. For more information, see Appendix B, Proving.
Note: This field displays only if you select STATISTICAL in the Algorithm field.
Sets, in seconds, the maximum time the S600+ waits for the ready signal. The default is 300.
Sets, in seconds, the maximum time the S600+ allows for plenum control. The default is 0.
Note: To disable plenum control, set this value to zero (0).
Sets, in seconds, the maximum time the S600+ waits for switch 1 after the launch command. The default is 300.
Sets, in seconds, the maximum time the S600+ waits for switches 1 and 2 after the launch command. The default is 300.
Sets, in seconds, the maximum time the S600+ waits for an upstream signal. The default is 300.
Indicates the Student-t table values for degrees of freedom 1-40. For more information, see Appendix B, Proving.
Note: These fields display only if you select STATISTICAL in the Algorithm field and USER in the Confidence Level field.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Constants
The Constants screen has two major areas. One area (consisting of the Stability R.O.C, Stability Bands, and Base Volume panes) defines stability checking parameters. The other area (consisting of the Reference, Setup, Plenum, and Misc panes) provides set-up information for the prover, including reference conditions and physical properties.
1. Select Constants from the hierarchy menu. The Constants screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-35
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 5-22. Constants screen (Compact Prover)
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Temperature (Stability R.O.C.)
Pressure (Stability R.O.C.)
UVOL (Stability R.O.C.)
Temperature (Stability Bands) Pressure (Stability Bands) Temperature (Reference)
Pressure (Reference) Calibration Temp Pipe Diam
Description Sets the Rate of Change (ROC) threshold limit for temperature, which the S600+ uses to check the ROC between the inlet, the outlet, and the meter. The default is 0.1. Sets the Rate of Change (ROC) threshold limit for pressure, which the S600+ uses to check the ROC between the inlet, the outlet, and the meter. The default is 0.05. Sets the Rate of Change (ROC) threshold limit for the stream uncorrected volume (UVOL) flowrate. The default is 10. Sets the maximum temperature difference between the inlet, the outlet, and the meter. The default is 10.
Sets the maximum pressure difference between the inlet, the outlet, and the meter. The default is 10.
Sets the prover reference temperature used by the base volume correction calculation (CTSp). The default is 15. Sets the prover reference pressure used by the base volume correction calculation (CPSp). Sets the base temperature used by the liquid volume correction calculations. The default is 15. Sets the internal pipe diameter of the prover loop. The default is 500.
5-36
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Elasticity Wall Thick Tube Coeff Rod Coeff Base Volume 1, 2, 3, 4 Density Units
Product Type
Description
Sets the value for Young's modulus of elasticity (expansion coefficient of tube steel), typically 2100000. The default is 10000.
Sets the wall thickness of the prover loop. The default is 5.
Sets the tube temperature expansion coefficient. The default is 1.5e-005.
Sets the coefficient of linear expansion for the invar rod. The default is 1e-005.
Sets the calibrated cylinder volume between detector switch activation (base volume). The default is 1.
Indicates the density units the S600+ uses for the density correction calculations. Click to display valid values.
DEG.API
Use degrees API.
KG/M3
Use kilograms per cubic meter. The default is KG/M3.
S.G.
Use specific gravity.
CH. 11
Use API MPMS Chapter 11.1 2004,
2004/7 CUST Addendum 1, 2007 Imperial Units.
CH. 11 2004/7 METRIC
Use API MPMS Chapter 11.1 2004, Addendum 1, 2007 Metric Units.
NORSOK I-105
Use Norsok I-105 Appendix D density corrections.
Indicates the type of petroleum product involved in the calculation. Click to display valid values. The default is A CRUDE.
TABLE LOOKUP
S600+ reads values from a file in the Config600 3.0/Config/Project Name/extras directory and transfers that data into the S600+ with the configuration file. The default files hold values for the ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 5 and 6.
A CRUDE
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59A and 60A.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Station Configuration
5-37
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Description B REFINED
C SPECIAL
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53B and 54B.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59B and 60B.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23B and 24B.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5B and 6B.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Table 54C.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23C and 24C.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5C and 6C.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Note: Table 53C is not implemented as the assumption is made that the base density is already known. This is because Table 53C allows for a keypad entry of Alpha, and if this is known then the base density would be known.
5-38
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Field
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description D LUBE OILS
LIGHT 1986
ASTM IP 1952 USER K0K1
LIGHT TP25 AROMATICS D1555-95 LIGHT TP27 AROMATICS D1555M-00 AROMATICS D1555-04A AROMATICS D1555-08 STO5.9 08 B1 UGC STO5.9 08 B2 SLH STO5.9 08 B3 WFLH
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 53D and 54D. If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59D and 60D. If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 23D and 24D. If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 5D and 6D. If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004. If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004. ASTM-IP-API Petroleum Measurement Tables for Light Hydrocarbon Liquids 1986 Tables 53 and 54. ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 23, 24, 53 and 54. If Density Table = KG/M3, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A with user entered values for K0 and K1. If Density Table = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A with user entered values for K0 and K1. If Density Table = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A with user entered values for K0 and K1. GPA TP-25 1998 (API Tables 23E and 24E). ASTM D1555-95 Table Lookup.
GPA TP-27 2007 (API Tables 23E, 24E, 53E, 54E, 59E and 60E). ASTM D1555M-00 Table Lookup.
ASTM D1555-04a Calculation.
ASTM D1555M-08 Calculation.
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.1 Unstable Gas Condensate. Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.2 Stable Liquid Hydrocarbon. Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.3 Wide Fraction Liquid Hydrocarbon.
Station Configuration
5-39
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field CPL Calculation
Rounding
Density Factor Location
R N2K Pos Limit Neg Limit
Description
Indicates the specific correction for the pressure of the liquid (CPL) value the S600+ Uses. Click to display valid values. The default is API1121M.
OFF
No CPL calculation. CPL value is set to 1.0.
API1121
API MPMS Ch.11.2.1 1984.
API1121M API MPMS Ch.11.2.1M 1984.
API1122
API MPMS Ch.11.2.2 1986.
API1122M API MPMS Ch.11.2.2M 1986.
CONSTANT Use a value you enter.
DOWNER
Paper entitled Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International Use presented by L. Downer 1979.
Enables or disables calculation rounding. Click to display valid values. The default is OFF.
OFF
Rounding is disabled.
NATIVE
Rounding to the rules specified in the selected calculation standard.
API Ch.12.2 Rounding to API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part
Part 2
2 Measurement Tickets 1995.
API Ch.12.2 Rounding to API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part
Part 3
3 Proving Reports 1998.
Flocheck
Rounding to Emerson Flocheck verification software package.
ASTM D1250-04 Ch. 11
API MPMS Ch.11.1 2004 (ASTM D1250-04) method to round to the Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Table.
Used in conjunction with METER (DF) to correct meter density to prover density. The default is 1.
Used by volume v mass proving to select the location of the prover density used to convert prover volume to mass. Click to display valid values. The default value is AT PROVER.
AT PROVER Read density at the prover.
METER (C2) Use Meter Density * CTLp * CPLp / (CTLm * CPLm), defined for proving a Micro Motion Coriolis meter.
METER (DF) Use Meter Density * Density Factor
KNOWN PRODUCT
Enter a value.
Sets the R constant value used in the plenum control algorithm. The default is 3.5.
Sets the N2K constant value used in the plenum control algorithm. The default is 5.
Sets the positive plenum pressure tolerance. The default is 0.5.
Sets the negative plenum pressure tolerance. The default is 0.5.
5-40
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Meter Factor Deviation 1 Limit
Meter Factor Deviation 2 Limit
Meter Factor Reject Timeout
Description
Sets the maximum allowed deviation from the initial base meter factor. The default value is 0.25%. The system uses this value while performing the proved meter factor deviation checks. Refer to Appendix B, Proving for further information.
Note: This stage is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation).
Sets the maximum allowed deviation from the initial base meter factor. The default value is 0.1%. The system uses this value while performing the proved meter factor deviation checks. Refer to Appendix B, Proving for further information.
Note: This stage is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation).
Following a successful prove, this value specifies the time period before the current prove results are automatically accepted and totals are adjusted based on the current prove results. During this time period, the current prove results can be manually ACCEPTED (totals will be adjusted) or ACCEPTED NO ADJUST (no totals adjustment). The default is 40 seconds. Refer to Appendix B, Proving for further information.
Note: This stage is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation).
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Hardware
Hardware settings relate to the Prover (P154) module. You use these settings to define how the S600+ processes the raw pulse inputs to the prover. Typically, when the pulse count is low (less than 10,000 pulses per round trip), the S600+ uses either "Phase Locked Loop" or "Dual Chronometry" processing. This effectively divides each pulse into smaller parts to ensure accuracy is maintained.
1. Select Hardware from the hierarchy menu. The Hardware screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-41
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 5-23. Hardware screen (Compact Prover)
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Dual Chronometry
Phase Locked Loop
Description
Enables dual chronometry. Dual chronometry determines meter pulses by counting a series of whole meter pulses and then multiplying that value by the ratio of the time between the detector switches and the time required to accumulate the pulses. The default is unchecked (disabled).
Enables phase locked loops. A phased locked loop multiplies the number of actual turbine pulses by a value (the Interpolation Factor) for greater accuracy. The default is unchecked (disabled).
Note:
If you select this check box, you must also provide an Interpolation Factor value.
If you select this check box and are not using a physical PIM module, the raw pulses need to be wired into the PIMLOOP input on the P154 prover board (inputs 8 and 20).
Dual Chronometry and PLL can be used independently or together.
5-42
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Interpolation Factor
Description
Sets the interpolation factor value for the phase locked loops option, typically associated with the Pulse Interpolation Module (PIM). The default is 1.
If using a physical PIM module, the scaling factors should be set to 1 as the multiplication of the pulses is done in the PIM.
Note:
This field displays only if you select the Phase Locked Loop option.
If no physical PIM is used, the interpolation factor should be set between 0 and 1 where 1 indicates no interpolation (this value is used as a divider). For example, a value of 0.1 will cause the actual pulse count to be divided by 0.1 (in effect multiplying the value by 10).
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Alarm Limits The Alarm Limits screen sets the prover alarms. For a description of the alarms, refer to "Alarm Descriptions" in Chapter 7, Advanced Setup Configuration.
1. Select Alarm Limits from the hierarchy menu. The Alarm Limits screen displays.
Figure 5-24. Alarm Limits screen (Compact Prover)
2. Click any of the following buttons to set alarm limits:
Button
Description
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-43
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button PULSES
K FACTOR MTR FACTOR
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for pulses.
Note: This value reflects the cumulative pulses over a run, which consists of multiple passes. You set the number of passes in the Run Data screen.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for K-factors.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for Meter Factors.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining alarm limits. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
5.7.4
Prover Master Meter (Gas and Liquid)
The primary function of the Master Meter is to provide an accurate "meter factor" value for the proving stream. The S600+ then uses this value to calibrate all other meters.
The proving stream receives pulses from its meter and generates a pulse train output, which represents the number of pulses received. The Master Meter counts these pulses during a proof run and also counts the pulses from its own meter (the master). When the proof run completes, the S600+ calculates a meter factor for the stream, based on the Master Meter's meter factor and the ratio of the correct stream output pulse count to the Master Meter's turbine pulse count.
Caution
It is extremely unlikely that any one S600+ configuration would contain all the settings discussed in this section. For that reason, several sample configurations demonstrate the settings.
Two components enable you to control the prove:
Prove sequence Station-based function which sets up the prove environment.
Run control Prover-based function that drives the prover hardware, counts pulses, and performs the K-factor calculations.
Following a successful prove, the system verifies the stream normal flow rate value:
If the normal flow rate is set to a value greater than zero (Aramcostyle linearisation), the run control waits for a predefined amount of time for you to reject the current prove results. If a prove is rejected, the proving report is annotated as "ABORTED". If the time-out elapses, the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved and the data is automatically used in the subsequent calculations.
If the normal flow rate is zero (non-Aramco-style linearisation), the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved, but does not use the data until it is accepted either locally at the S600+ or via a supervisory computer.
5-44
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
When the prove runs complete, you can either re-run the prove or terminate, at which point (if so configured) the sequence restores the valves to their pre-prove state.
Notes:
Aramco-style linearisation is only applicable to Liquid Master Meter proving. Gas Master Meter proving always uses the nonAramco style linearisation.
The prove sequence downloads both a K-factor and a meter factor. Applications typically use the original K-factor from the meter calibration report and update the meter factor, which may be either a fixed value or derived from a linearisation process. Alternatively the meter factor can remain unchanged and the K-factor (fixed or linearised) updated.
The meter factor deviation tests and the historical meter factor database are only applicable to Liquid Master Meter proving.
The meter factor deviation tests and the historical meter factor database are only supported for "local" streams (part of the same configuration with the prover) if you configure the stream normal flow rate to a value greater than zero and have selected "Product Table with History" in PC Setup.
You define a ticket as Official or Unofficial when you configure a prove. This selection applies to both the Aramco-style and nonAramco-style linearisation.
Following an Official prove, the prove sequence is determined by the Aramco / non-Aramco style linearisation selection.
Following the Unofficial prove, the prove sequence does not download the prove results to the stream being proved. This is typically used to determine an approximate K-Factor / Meter Factor before an official prove takes place or when maintenance activities are being performed on the site.
The Official/Unofficial selection displays in the report header.
For a list of supported Master Meter/Stream combinations, refer to Appendix B.3.1 Master Meter/Stream Combinations.
Run Data
Run Data settings allow you to define the prover stability check variables, the number of prove runs from which the system can calculate a K-factor/meter factor, and the tolerances allowed on a Kfactor/meter factor. Once the S600+ completes a prove and calculates these values, you can select a new K-factor or meter factor to replace the current K-factor or meter factor.
To edit the prover run data settings:
1. Select Run Data from the hierarchy menu. The Run Data screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-45
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 5-25. Run Data (MMeter Prover)
5-46
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Override Wait Time Hold Time Required
Maximum Method
Average Method
Description
Disables temperature and pressure stability checking. The default is unchecked (stability checking is enabled).
Note: If you do not select this option, you must complete the Wait Time and Hold Time fields.
Sets, in seconds, how long the S600+ waits for stability before moving to the hold stability prover stage. The default is 60.
Sets, in seconds, how long the S600+ holds stability before starting prover runs. The default is 10.
Note: The S600+ aborts the prover run if stability is lost during the stability hold time.
Sets the required number of consecutive runs which must be within the defined tolerance limits (typically, 5). The default is 5.
Note: It is possible that the number of required runs cannot be achieved before the maximum number of runs reached. In this situation, the user can either wait for the prove to abort (once the maximum number of runs has been reached) or perform a manual abort.
Sets the maximum number of runs to perform before aborting the sequence (up to 12 for the S600+). The default is 12.
Indicates the method used to define a run. Click to display valid values.
PULSE
Run completes when the pulse count equals the value defined in the Pulses field. This is the default.
VOLUME
Run completes when the flowed volume equals the value defined in the Volume field.
TIME
Run completes when the time elapsed equals the value defined in the Timeout field.
MASS
Run completes when the flowed mass equals the value defined in the mass field.
Indicates the value to determine the repeatability and to indicate whether the final K-factor and meter factor are taken as the average of the run values, or are recalculated. Click to display valid values.
METER FACTOR
Use the run Meter Factors for repeatability and the average meter factor as the final value. This is the default.
KFACTOR
Use the run K-factors for repeatability and the average Kfactor as the final value.
PULSES
Use the run pulse counts for repeatability. This option also signifies to recalculate the final Kfactor and meter factor using the average pulse count and other average values. API Ch.12 Section 2 part 3.
Station Configuration
5-47
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Tolerance Algorithm
Conf. Level
Pulses Volume Timeout Nominated Master Meter Stream User Student-t Table
Description
Identifies, as a percentage, the maximum deviation allowed before a run is unacceptable. The default is 1.
Indicates the algorithm the system uses to calculate the K factor tolerance. Click to display valid values.
API 1
API method: max deviation from (Average Run) / Average. This is the default.
MX-MN/AVG (Max Min) / Average
MX-
(Max Min) / ((Max + Min) / 2)
MN/MX+MN2
MX-MN/MN
(Max Min) / MIn
MXMN/MX*MN
(Max Min) / (Max * Min)
MX-AV/AV
(Max Average) / Average
AV-MN/AV
(Average Min) / Average
STATISTICAL
Calculates the statistical K-factor deviation using a Student-t table distribution.
Sets the confidence level for a two-sided Student-t table used in statistical proving. Click to display valid values. For more information, see Appendix B, Proving.
Note: This field displays only if you select STATISTICAL in the Algorithm field.
Defines the number of pulses required for one run. The default is 10000.
Note: This field displays only if you select PULSE as a Run Method.
Defines the required volume for one run. The default is 50.
Note: This field displays only if you select VOLUME as a Run Method.
Sets, in seconds, the maximum time for any prover run. The default is 300.
Note: If you select TIME as a Run Method, this field indicates the maximum duration for a run.
Sets the stream number to use as the master meter.
Indicates the Student-t table values for degrees of freedom 1-40. For more information, see Appendix B, Proving.
Note: These fields display only if you select STATISTICAL in the Algorithm field and USER in the Confidence Level field.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Constants
The Constants screen is split into two areas. One area (consisting of the Stability R.O.C and Stability Bands panes) defines stability checking parameters. The other area (consisting of the Reference, Master Meter, and Setup panes) provides set-up information for the prover, including reference conditions and physical properties.
5-48
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1. Select Constants from the hierarchy menu. The Constants screen displays.
Figure 5-26. Constants screen (MMeter Prover)
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Temperature (Stability R.O.C)
Pressure (Stability R.O.C.)
UVOL (Stability R.O.C.) Temperature (Stability Bands) Pressure (Stability Bands) Temperature (Reference) Pressure (Reference) Base K Factor
Description Sets the Rate of Change (ROC) threshold limit for temperature, which the S600+ uses to check the ROC between the inlet, the outlet, and the meter. The default is 0.1. Sets the Rate of Change (ROC) threshold limit for pressure, which the S600+ uses to check the ROC between the inlet, the outlet, and the meter. The default is 0.05. Sets the Rate of Change (ROC) threshold limit for the stream uncorrected volume (UVOL) flowrate. The default is 10. Sets the maximum temperature difference between the inlet, the outlet, and the meter. The default is 10.
Sets the maximum pressure difference between the inlet, the outlet, and the meter. The default is 10.
Sets the reference temperature value for calculations (typically 15°C in Europe). The default is 15. Sets the reference pressure value for calculations (typically 0 barg in Europe). The default is 0. Sets the base K-factor value for Master Meter calculations. Note: This may be a read-only field in some
applications.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-49
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Density Units
Product Type
Description
Indicates the density units the S600+ uses for the density correction calculations. Click to display all valid values.
Note: This selection is applicable only to Liquid Master Meter proving.
DEG.API
Use degrees API.
KG/M3
Use kilograms per cubic meter. This is the default.
S.G.
Use specific gravity.
CH. 11 2004/7 Use API MPMS Chapter 11.1 2004,
CUST
Addendum 1, 2007 Imperial Units.
CH. 11 2004/7 Use API MPMS Chapter 11.1 2004,
METRIC
Addendum 1, 2007 Metric Units.
NORSOK I-105
Use Norsok I-105 Appendix D density corrections.
Indicates the type of petroleum product involved in the calculation. Click to display all valid values. The default is A CRUDE.
Note: This selection is applicable only to Liquid Master Meter proving.
TABLE LOOKUP
S600+ reads values from a file in the Config600 3.0/Config/Project Name/extras directory and transfers that data into the S600+ with the configuration file. The default files hold values for the ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 5 and 6.
A CRUDE
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59A and 60A.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
5-50
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Field
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description B REFINED
C SPECIAL
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53B and 54B.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59B and 60B.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23B and 24B.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5B and 6B.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Table 54C.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23C and 24C.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5C and 6C.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Note: Table 53C is not implemented as the assumption is made that the base density is already known. This is because Table 53C allows for a keypad entry of Alpha, and if this is known then the base density would be known.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-51
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Description D LUBE OILS
LIGHT 1986
ASTM IP 1952 USER K0K1
LIGHT TP25 AROMATICS D1555-95 LIGHT TP27 AROMATICS D1555M-00 AROMATICS D1555-04A AROMATICS D1555-08 STO5.9 08 B1 UGC STO5.9 08 B2 SLH
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 53D and 54D. If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59D and 60D. If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 23D and 24D. If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 5D and 6D. If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004. If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004. ASTM-IP-API Petroleum Measurement Tables for Light Hydrocarbon Liquids 1986 Tables 53 and 54. ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 23, 24, 53 and 54. If Density Table = KG/M3, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A with user entered values for K0 and K1. If Density Table = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A with user entered values for K0 and K1. If Density Table = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A with user entered values for K0 and K1. GPA TP-25 1998 (API Tables 23E and 24E). ASTM D1555-95 Table Lookup.
GPA TP-27 2007 (API Tables 23E, 24E, 53E, 54E, 59E and 60E). ASTM D1555M-00 Table Lookup.
ASTM D1555-04a Calculation.
ASTM D1555M-08 Calculation.
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.1 Unstable Gas Condensate. Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.2 Stable Liquid Hydrocarbon.
5-52
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field CPL Calculation
Rounding
Density Factor Location
Description
STO5.9 08 B3 WFLH
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.3 Wide Fraction Liquid Hydrocarbon.
Indicates the specific CPL calculation the S600+ uses to calculate the liquid pressure correction factor. Click to display all valid values.
Note: This selection is applicable only to Liquid Master Meter proving.
OFF
No CPL calculation. CPL value is set to 1.0.
API1121
API MPMS Ch.11.2.1 1984.
API1121M
API MPMS Ch.11.2.1M 1984. This is the default.
API1122
API MPMS Ch.11.2.2 1986.
API1122M
API MPMS Ch.11.2.2M 1986.
CONSTANT Use a value you enter.
DOWNER
Paper entitled Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International Use presented by L. Downer 1979.
Enables or disables calculation rounding. Click to display valid values.
OFF
Rounding is disabled. This is the default.
NATIVE
Rounding to the rules specified in the selected calculation standard.
API Ch.12.2 Part 2
Rounding to API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part 2 Measurement Tickets 1995.
API Ch.12.2 Part 3
Rounding to API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part 3 Proving Reports 1998.
Flocheck
Rounding to Emerson Flocheck verification software package.
ASTM D125004 Ch. 11
API MPMS Ch.11.1 2004 (ASTM D1250-04) method to round to the Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables.
Used in conjunction with METER (DF) to correct meter density to prover density. The default is 1.
Note: This selection is applicable only to Liquid Master Meter proving.
Used by volume v mass proving to select the location of the prover density used to convert prover volume to mass. Click to display valid values.
Note: This selection is applicable only to Liquid Master Meter proving.
AT PROVER
Read density at the prover. This is the default.
METER (C2)
Use Meter Density * CTLp * CPLp/ (CTLm * CPLm), defined for proving a Micro Motion Coriolis meter.
METER (DF) Use Meter Density * Density Factor
KNOWN PRODUCT
Enter a value.
Station Configuration
5-53
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Meter Factor Deviation 1 Limit
Meter Factor Deviation 2 Limit
Meter Factor Reject Timeout
Description
Sets the maximum allowed deviation from the initial base meter factor. The default value is 0.25%. The system uses this value while performing the proved meter factor deviation checks. Refer to Appendix B, Proving for further information.
Notes:
This stage is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation).
This selection is applicable only to Liquid Master Meter proving.
Sets the maximum allowed deviation from the initial base meter factor. The default value is 0.1%. The system uses this value while performing the proved meter factor deviation checks. Refer to Appendix B, Proving for further information.
Notes:
This stage is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation).
This selection is applicable only to Liquid Master Meter proving.
Following a successful prove, this value specifies the time period before the current prove results are automatically accepted and totals are adjusted based on the current prove results. During this time period, the current prove results can be manually ACCEPTED (totals will be adjusted) or ACCEPTED NO ADJUST (no totals adjustment). The default is 40 seconds. Refer to Appendix B, Proving for further information.
Notes:
This stage is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation).
This selection is applicable only to Liquid Master Meter proving.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Hardware
Hardware settings relate to the Prover I/O module. You use these settings to define how the S600+ processes the pulse inputs to the prover. Typically, when the pulse count is low (less than 10,000 pulses per round trip), the S600+ uses "Phase Locked Loop" processing. This effectively divides each pulse into smaller parts to ensure accuracy is maintained.
1. Select Hardware from the hierarchy menu. The Hardware screen displays.
5-54
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 5-27. Hardware screen (MMeter Prover)
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Phase Locked Loop
Master Meter Channel Proving Meter Channel
Description
Enables phase locked loops. A phased locked loop multiplies the number of actual turbine pulses by a value for greater accuracy. The default is unchecked (phase locked loops are disabled).
Indicates the I/O channel to which the S600+ sends pulse I/O information for the Master Meter.
Indicates the I/O channel to which the S600+ sends pulse I/O information for the proving meter.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Alarm Limits The Alarm Limits screen sets the prover alarms. For a description of the alarms, refer to Alarm Descriptions in Chapter 7, Advanced Setup Configuration.
1. Select Alarm Limits from the hierarchy menu. The Alarm Limits screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Station Configuration
5-55
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 5-28. Alarm Limits screen (MMeter Prover)
2. Click any of the following buttons to set alarm limits:
Button PRV PULSES MTR PULSES PROVED KF
PROVED MF
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for prover pulses.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for meter pulses.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the proved Kfactor.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the proved Meter Factor.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining alarm limits. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
5-56
Station Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 6 Stream Configuration
In This Chapter
6.1 Initial Configurations ........................................................................... 6-2 6.2 Common Stream Settings................................................................... 6-4
6.2.1 General Settings................................................................. 6-4 6.2.2 Flowrate .............................................................................. 6-5 6.2.3 Stream Secondary Units Setup .......................................... 6-7 6.2.4 Stream Flow Switching Setup .......................................... 6-10 6.2.5 Gas Component Flow Weighted Averaging (GC FWA) ... 6-11 6.2.6 Density Measurement ...................................................... 6-13 6.2.7 Block Valves ..................................................................... 6-16 6.2.8 Time & Flow Weighted Averaging Methods ..................... 6-18 6.3 Gas Coriolis ................................................................................... 6-22 6.3.1 AGA8 (Compressibility) .................................................... 6-22 6.3.2 Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588)................ 6-25 6.3.3 Gas CV (AGA5) ................................................................ 6-30 6.3.4 Stream Gas Composition ................................................ 6-30 6.3.5 Gas Properties.................................................................. 6-35 6.3.6 Ethylene............................................................................ 6-38 6.3.7 Linearisation ..................................................................... 6-39 6.3.8 Sampling........................................................................... 6-41 6.3.9 Coriolis.............................................................................. 6-44 6.4 Gas DP .......................................................................................... 6-48 6.4.1 Downstream/Upstream Correction ................................... 6-48 6.4.2 Pipe Correction................................................................. 6-51 6.4.3 AGA8 (Compressibility) .................................................... 6-54 6.4.4 ISO5167 (Mass Flowrate) ................................................ 6-57 6.4.5 ISOTR9464....................................................................... 6-60 6.4.6 V-Cone (Mass Flowrate) .................................................. 6-62 6.4.7 Annubar (Mass Flowrate) ................................................. 6-63 6.4.8 Pure Gas Air ..................................................................... 6-65 6.4.9 Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588)................ 6-67 6.4.10 SGERG (Compressibility)................................................. 6-71 6.4.11 NX19 (Compressibility)..................................................... 6-74 6.4.12 PTZ (Compressibility) ....................................................... 6-75 6.4.13 AGA3 (Volume or Mass Flowrate).................................... 6-77 6.4.14 Stream Gas Composition ................................................. 6-79 6.4.15 Z Steam (Compressibility) ................................................ 6-83 6.4.16 GOST CV ......................................................................... 6-85 6.4.17 GOST Flow....................................................................... 6-86 6.4.18 Gas Properties.................................................................. 6-89 6.4.19 DP Cell Input Conditioning ............................................... 6-91 6.5 Gas Turbine ................................................................................. 6-108 6.5.1 AGA8 (Compressibility) .................................................. 6-109 6.5.2 Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588).............. 6-111 6.5.3 AGA7 (Gross Volume Flowrate)..................................... 6-116 6.5.4 Stream Gas Composition ............................................... 6-118 6.5.5 Gas Properties................................................................ 6-122 6.5.6 Linearisation ................................................................... 6-125 6.6 Gas Ultrasonic ............................................................................. 6-127 6.6.1 AGA8 (Compressibility) .................................................. 6-127 6.6.2 Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588).............. 6-130 6.6.3 AGA7 (Gross Volume Flowrate)..................................... 6-135 6.6.4 Stream Gas Composition (Gas Ultrasonic) .................... 6-136 6.6.5 Linearisation .................................................................. 6-141 6.6.6 Gas Properties (Gas Ultrasonic) .................................... 6-143 6.6.7 Ultrasonic Flow Setup .................................................... 6-146 6.6.8 Ultrasonic Control ........................................................... 6-149 6.6.9 QSonic Interface............................................................. 6-151 6.6.10 SICK Control................................................................... 6-152
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6.7 Liquid Coriolis .............................................................................. 6-154 6.7.1 Local Units...................................................................... 6-155 6.7.2 Linearisation .................................................................. 6-155 6.7.3 Sampling......................................................................... 6-158 6.7.4 Observed Density Correction ......................................... 6-161 6.7.5 Standard Density Correction .......................................... 6-169 6.7.6 Base Sediment and Water (BSW).................................. 6-176 6.7.7 Coriolis............................................................................ 6-177
6.8 Liquid Turbine .............................................................................. 6-179 6.8.1 Local Units...................................................................... 6-179 6.8.2 Linearisation ................................................................... 6-180 6.8.3 Observed Density Correction ......................................... 6-184 6.8.4 Standard Density Correction .......................................... 6-192 6.8.5 Base Sediment and Water (BSW).................................. 6-198
6.9 Liquid - Ultrasonic ........................................................................... 6-200 6.9.1 Local Units...................................................................... 6-200 6.9.2 Linearisation ................................................................... 6-201 6.9.3 Observed Density Correction ......................................... 6-204 6.9.4 Standard Density Correction .......................................... 6-211 6.9.5 Base Sediment and Water (BSW).................................. 6-217 6.9.6 Daniel Liquid Ultrasonic.................................................. 6-218
6.10 Modes of Operation ........................................................................ 6-221 6.10.1 Density Failure Modes.................................................... 6-222
Stream settings define the calculation inputs and limits plus alarm setpoints for the stream input data from gas, liquid, and prover applications. Using these settings, the S600+ calculates operational values--including flowrates, density, calorific values and flowweighted averages--which conform to AGA and ISO calculation standards.
Caution
It is extremely unlikely that any one S600+ configuration would contain all the settings discussed in this section. For that reason, several sample configurations demonstrate the settings.
6.1 Initial Configurations
The Configuration Generator assigns default settings to the streams in your configuration file. To edit these settings, select the required stream number from the left pane in the PCSetup Editor. Some stream settings are common to all stream types and some are applicationspecific.
6-2
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-1. Stream Hierarchy screen
Stream settings include:
Common Stream Settings (applicable to gas and liquid) Gas-Specific Stream Settings
Liquid-Specific Stream Settings
General Flowrate Sampling Coriolis Flow Switching Block Valves Time/Flow Weighted Averaging Downstream/Upstream Correction Pipe Correction Flowrate (for ISO5167, AGA3, Annubar, V-
Cone®, or AGA3 US Application) Compressibility (for AGA8, NX-19, PTZ, and
SGERG) Gas CV Calorific Value (ISO6976/GPA) Calorific Value (AGA5) GC FWA Gas Composition (Gas Chromatograph) DP Cell Input Conditioning Gas Turbine (AGA7) Linearisation QSonic Interface Ultrasonic Control Ultrasonic Flowrate Setup Z Ethylene Z Stream Meter Correction Liquid Volume Correction Linearisation Local Units
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6.2 Common Stream Settings
Use the Stream settings to configure the Stream Type, Meter Location, Manufacturer, Model, Serial No., Tag Number, Meter Size, Alarms, Flow rate data, Batching options, Block Values, and Time & Flow Weighted Averaging Techniques.
6.2.1 General Settings
Use the General settings screen to define the Meter Location name and Stream Type, indicate various meter-specific values, manage alarms, and configure the initial Maintenance mode setting.. 1. Select General from the hierarchy menu. Config600 displays the
Stream Details settings in the right-hand pane.
Figure 6-2. General Settings
2. Provide Stream Type and Meter Location descriptions, defining up to 30 alphanumeric characters for each.
3. Provide the Manufacturer, Module, Serial No., Tag Number, Meter Size
Note: All the values on this screen appear on reports, although you can define Manufacturer, Model, Serial No., Tag Number, and Meter Size only for liquid type streams.
4. Select Maintenance Mode to force the stream to start up in maintenance mode, in which current maintenance totals do increment but normal totals do not.
Note: This is only the initial mode of operation. You can change the mode on an operating S600+. You can also override this mode by selecting the Increment Cumulatives in Maintenance Mode check box in the Totalisation section of the PCSetup Editor. To fully enable maintenance mode, you must first define a maintenance mode report.
6-4
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
5. Click Suppress alarms in Maintenance to suppress alarms in maintenance mode. An Alarm Suppression dialog box displays.
Figure 6-3. Alarm Suppression dialog box
6. For each of the objects, select the alarms to suppress. Click Add or Remove to select or de-select objects from the listing.
7. Click OK when you finish identifying alarms to suppress. The PCSetup screen displays.
8. Click the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
9. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.2.2
Flowrate
Flowrate settings define the alarm setpoints for each type of flowrate. You can define up to four types of alarms for each flowrate, and then enable or disable each alarm. The system activates these alarms when the calculated result for the relevant flowrate is not within the specified limits.
1. Select Flowrate from the hierarchy menu. The Flowrate Settings screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-4. Flowrate Settings
2. Double-click a flowrate object in the Alarm Limits pane. A Calculation Result dialog box displays.
Figure 6-5. Calculation Result dialog box
3. Select the alarms you want to enable and then verify or edit the flowrate associated with that alarm.
4. Click OK to apply your changes. The Flowrate Settings screen displays.
5. Complete the Low Flow Cutoff field to set a cutoff rate.
6. Click Alarms to Supress on Cutoff if you want to suppress alarms while the flowrate is below the Low Flow Cutoff value. An Alarm Suppression dialog box displays.
6-6
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-6. Alarm Suppression dialog box
7. Select an object for alarm suppression, and then select the appropriate check boxes. You can define up to 20 objects.
8. Click OK when you finish. The Flowrate Settings screen displays.
9. If you are editing a liquid stream, indicate values for the High Band and Low Band fields. For flow switching, these values set the stream's allowable limits. For flow balancing, these values set the highest and lowest flowrates within which flow balancing functions.
10. Complete the PID Loop field to indicate the loop configured to control the flowrate through the selected stream. Click to display all valid values.
Note: Be sure to configure the PID.
11. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
12. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.2.3
Stream Secondary Units Setup
The stream secondary units setup allows for the configuration of selected flow rates and totals in different units as selected in the unit's section.
1. Select the Secondary Units STR Setup component from the hierarchy menu. The system displays the associated settings in the right-hand pane.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-7. Secondary Units STR Setup 2. Select the Gas STR Setup or Liquid STR Setup button to display
the Dual Units Setup dialog. Note: The dialog box consists of two screens (Cumulative Totals and
Periodic Totals). You can switch between each screen by selecting the To Periodic Totals/To Cumulative Totals button.
6-8
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-8. Dual Units Setup Cumulative Totals dialog box
3. The Cumulative Totals screen consists of the following: The first 4 slots are pre-defined and indicate the available flow rates. You can configure the next 8 slots as stream cumulative totals. The last slot is pre-defined and indicates which stream is linked to the selected Dual Units Setup instance. To add a cumulative total, click on the Add button, and the first available cumulative total appears. Use the button to change the cumulative total for each slot.
Note: You should only configure Stream Cumulative Totals.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-9. Dual Units Setup Periodic Totals dialog box
4. Click the To Periodic Totals button to view the Periodic Totals screen. The Periodic Totals screen consists of the following: Pre-defined Slot 1 is read-only and indicates the converted flow rates and cumulative totals. Pre-defined Slot 2 is read-only and indicates the converted periodic totals. You can configure the next 12 slots as periodic totals. To add a periodic total, click on the Add button. Use the button to select the required periodic total.
Note: You should only configure Periodic Totals belonging to the selected stream.
5. Click OK to apply the changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.2.4 Stream Flow Switching Setup
Flow switching settings define the priorities and number of valves present, as well as control loop specifics. You can set up flow switching for a stream and then disable it until you need this option. 1. Select Flow Switching from the hierarchy menu. The Flow
Switching screen displays.
6-10
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-10. Flow Switching screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Priority
Number of Values Disabled Setpoint
Description Sets the priority of the stream. The higher the number, the higher the stream's priority. For example, 2 has priority over 1, and 3 has priority over 2. The default is 1.
Sets the number of values controlled on the selected stream. The default is 2.
Disables flow switching for the selected stream. The default is unchecked (flow switching is disabled).
Sets, if applicable, the ideal flowrate required on the selected stream.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.2.5 Gas Component Flow Weighted Averaging (GC FWA)
Gas Component Flow Weighted Averaging (GC FWA) defines how the system averages gas components for a given period. For this option you define two groups of settings, one group for forward flow and one for reverse flow. Select TFWAx4 or TFWAx8 in the Options for Stream screen to configure GC FWA.
1. Select GC FWA from the hierarchy menu.
2. Open the option so that you can see both the FWD (forward) and REV (reverse) settings.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: Forward and reverse settings are linked. Changes made to settings for either direction are automatically reflected in settings for both directions.
3. Select the FWD option. The Gas Component FWA screen displays.
Figure 6-11. Gas Component Flow Weighted Averaging screen
4. Complete the following fields.
Field Method
Period
Mol Flag
Description
Indicates the averaging method. Click to display all options.
FWA Flow weighted averaging, calculated with respect to the total. This is the default value.
TWA
Time weighted averaging, calculated with respect to time and totals. The system calculates this value only when the flowrate is greater than zero.
TWAXFLOW
Time weighted averaging, calculated with respect only to time. The system calculates this value regardless of the measured flowrate.
Indicates the period for the averaging. Click to display all options. Select only one period. The default is BASE PRD 1.
BASE PRD Bases averaging on the Base Period 1 1 time period. This is the default.
BATCH Bases averaging on the batch time period.
HOURLY Bases averaging on the hourly time period.
MAINT Based averaging on the time period in maintenance mode.
Indicates how the system averages the component of each value. Click to display all options.
GPA8173 Calculates the liquid equivalent volume LIQ EQV for each gas component according to
6-12
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Normalisation Table
Description VOL GPA8173-94.
MASS %
Provides the proportion of each gas component with respect to its molecular mass. The option you select in the Table field provides the component's molecular mass value. This is the default.
MOL % Average based on the mol percentage each component contributes.
TOTALS Determine component mass totals based on the percentage mass each
component contributes. .
Indicates whether the system normalises the output of the components. Click to display all options. The default is CLEAR (non-normalised).
Indicates the gas table the S600+ uses to provide gas component molecular mass and liquid density values for calculating the component liquid equivalent volumes. Click to display all options.
ISO6976- Uses ISO6976 2016 gas component 1995 molecular mass values.
Note: ISO6976 does not provide liquid density values; they default to 0.0.
ISO6976- Uses ISO6976 gas component 2016 molecular gas values. This is the default.
Note: ISO6976 does not provide liquid density values; they default to 0.0.
GPA2145- Uses GPA2145 2009 gas component 2009 molecular mass and liquid density values.
GPA2145- Uses GPA2145-2003 gas component 2003 molecular gas values.
GPA2145- Uses GPA2145-1994 gas component 1994 molecular gas values.
5. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
6. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.2.6 Density Measurement
Density Measurement settings define the constants and calculation limits for densitometer inputs. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use a densitometer.
1. Select Density Measurement from the hierarchy menu.
2. Select Common Data from the hierarchy menu. The Densitometer screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-12. Density Measurement Calculation Limits screen
3. Click one of the buttons:
Button OBSERVED DENSITY
SPECIFIC GRAVITY(RD)
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the specific gravity relative density value.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes.
6. Select Density Measurement > DensitometerA or Densitometer B from the hierarchy menu. The Density Measurement Densitometer screen displays.
6-14
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-13. Density Measurement Densitometer screen
7. Complete the following fields:
Field DENS A TEMP/ DENS B TEMP
DENS A PRESS/ DENS B PRESS Meter Type
Description Click to display the analog input configuration screen to configure the density temperature input and associated values.
Click to display the analog input configuration screen to configure the density pressure input and associated values.
Indicates the meter associated with each densitometer. Click to display all valid values:
MMI Micro Motion (formerly Solartron) 3096/98 SI 3096/98 metric units version.
MMI CDM Micro Motion (formerly Solartron) 7835 SI 7835/45/46 metric units version.
MMI GDM Micro Motion (formerly Solartron) 7812/28 SI 7812/28 metric units version.
Sarasota/ Sarasota/Peek FD/Anton Paar metric Peek SI units version.
DENS Observed density from analogue input ANIN (ADC)
RD ANIN Observed relative density from an analogue input (ADC)
MMI Micro Motion (formerly Solartron) 3096/98 3096/98 Imperial units version.
IMP
MMI CDM Micro Motion (formerly Solartron) 7835 IMP 7835/45/46 Imperial units version.
MMI GDM Micro Motion (formerly Solartron)
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-15
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Density correction factor (0.5 to 1.5) Densitometer high period fail Density low period fail Specific meter constants
Description 7812/28 7812/28 Imperial units version. IMP
Sarasota/ Sarasota/Peek FD/Anton Paar Imperial Peek IMP units version.
MMI CDM Micro Motion (formerly Solartron) 7835 7835 DPT metric pressure-temperature coupling
SI version.
MMI GDM Micro Motion (formerly Solartron) 7835 7835 DPT imperial pressure-temperature coupling
IMP version.
Sets the value between 0.5 and 1.5 to scale the calculated density at the densitometer. The default value is 0.
Sets the limits of measured period value above which the densitometer must reach before it fails. Default value is 2000. Refer to Density Failure Modes.
Sets the limits of measured period value below which the densitometer must reach before it fails. Default value is 100. Refer to Density Failure Modes.
Sets calibration constants for the selected densitometer. Each densitometer type has its own calibration constants.
Note:
The meter manufacturer provides these constants, which are mandatory for the correct functioning of the density calculations.
8. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining these settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
9. Click Yes to apply your changes.
6.2.7 Block Valves
Block valve settings define the type of valves used as well as any associated settings and alarms. The system activates these alarms when the relevant timers expire or when the status is different than expected.
1. Select Block Values from the hierarchy menu. The Block Valves screen displays.
6-16
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-14. Block Valves screen
2. Select a valve setup type.
Field Type
Description
Indicates the valve setup type. Click to display all valid values.
MOV
Motorised valve that uses separate opened and closed status inputs as well as separate open and close commands. This is the default.
SOLENOID
Valve that uses separate opened and closed status inputs and a single open command.
PRV 4-WAY
Four-way prover valve that uses separate forward and reverse (home) inputs and separate forward and reverse commands.
Note: The PRV 4-WAY is the only valid valve choice when the configuration type is BiDi Prover and for use with the four-way valve.
3. Provide a Valve Timings value.
Field Travel Settle
Test
Description
Sets, in seconds, the maximum allowed stroke time for the valve to move from fully closed to fully open or from fully open to fully closed before raising a timeout alarm.
Sets, in seconds, the settling time allowed from the valve reaching its closed limit (or any limit for a 4-way valve) before the test seal is applied.
Note: Contact technical support to configure valve seal checking or valve local remote selection.
Sets, in seconds, the seal test active time which starts when the Settle time has elapsed.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-17
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: Seal checking, which determines if a seal is leaking, is performed only during test time.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.2.8 Time & Flow Weighted Averaging Methods
Time and Flow Weighted Averaging settings define the stream inputs the system uses to calculate the time-weighted or flow-weighted averages for a given reporting period. You can define a maximum of four stream inputs.
Note: Use the System Editor to configure additional change FWA calculations.
Figure 6-15. Time & Flow Weighted Averaging Example
Averaging Methods Config600 provides three methods to calculate the weighted average: flow-weighted (FWA), time-weighted (TWA), and a combination (TWA-XFLOW).
6-18
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Notes:
Depending on the method you select, Config600 also computes a 60-minute rolling average for each object. Refer to Chapter 4, I/O and Comms Configuration.
The system requires sufficient accumulated flow in order to calculate a flow-weighted average. If there is not enough accumulated flow to calculate a flow-weighted average, the system uses a flow-weighted average of 1.0.
Flow-Weighted Averaging (FWA)
For each period type, the algorithm multiples the elapsed total for the period (that is, flowrate x time) by the present FWA value to give the "weight" for the average. The latest measured value, when multiplied by the elapsed total since the algorithm ran, provides the new "weight" to be incorporated into the whole.
Delta = cumulative total last snapshot of cumulative total If Delta > 0.0 then invoke the flow weighted algorithm:
FWA = ((FWA period total*FWA )+(process var*delta)) / (FWA period total + delta) FWA period total = FWA period total + delta Last snapshot of cumulative total = cumulative total
As an example, steady flowrate = 360 m3/hour, initial temperature = 15 deg.C, increasing at 0.1 deg.C every second, present FWA = 15.0
At 00:00:00, cumulative total = 0.0, FWA period total = 0.0, t = 15.0, FWA=15.0 No action (FWA remains at 15.0)
At 00:00:01, cumulative total=0.1, FWA period total = 0.0, t = 15.1, FWA=15.0 Delta = 0.1 0.0 = 0.1 FWA = (0.0 * 15.0) + (15.1*0.1) /(0.0 + 0.1) = 15.1 FWA period total = 0.0 + 0.1 = 0.1
At 00:00:02, cumulative total= 0.2, FWA period total = 0.1, t = 15.2, FWA=15.1 Delta = 0.2 0.1 = 0.1 FWA = (0.1 * 15.1) + (15.2*0.1) /(0.1 + 0.1) = 15.15 FWA period total = 0.1 + 0.1 = 0.2
At 00:00:03, cumulative total= 0.3, FWA period total = 0.2, t = 15.3, FWA=15.15 Delta = 0.3 0.2 = 0.1 FWA = (0.2 * 15.15) + (15.3*0.1) /(0.2 + 0.1) = 15.2 FWA period total = 0.2 + 0.1 = 0.3
At 00:00:04, cumulative total= 0.4, FWA period total = 0.3, t = 15.4, FWA=15.2 Delta = 0.4 0.3 = 0.1 FWA = (0.3 * 15.2) + (15.4*0.1) /(0.3 + 0.1) = 15.25 FWA period total = 0.3 + 0.1 = 0.4
Time-Weighted Averaging (TWA)
The S600+ calculates TWA only when the flowrate is greater than zero. For each period type, the algorithm multiplies the elapsed time for the period by the present TWA value to give the "weight" for the average. The latest measured value, when multiplied by the elapsed
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-19
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
time since the algorithm ran, gives the new "weight" to be incorporated into the whole.
Delta = time interval since task last run If flowrate > 0.0 then
TWA = ((period time * TWA ) + (process var * delta)) / (period time + delta) period time = period time + delta As an example, steady flowrate = 360 m3/hour, initial temperature = 15 deg.C, increasing at 0.1 deg.C every second, present TWA = 15.0 At 00:00:00, TWA period time = 0.0, t = 15.0, TWA=15.0 No action (TWA remains at 15.0) At 00:00:01, TWA period time = 0.0, t = 15.1, TWA=15.0 Delta = 0.1 0.0 = 0.1 TWA = (0.0 * 15.0) + (15.1*0.1) /(0.0 + 0.1) = 15.1 TWA period time = 0.0 + 0.1 = 0.1 At 00:00:02, TWA period time = 0.1, t = 15.2, TWA=15.1 Delta = 0.2 0.1 = 0.1 TWA = (0.1 * 15.1) + (15.2*0.1) /(0.1 + 0.1) = 15.15 TWA period time = 0.1 + 0.1 = 0.2 At 00:00:03, TWA period time = 0.2, t = 15.3, TWA=15.15 Delta = 0.3 0.2 = 0.1 TWA = (0.2 * 15.15) + (15.3*0.1) /(0.2 + 0.1) = 15.2 TWA period time = 0.2 + 0.1 = 0.3 At 00:00:04, TWA period time = 0.3, t = 15.4, TWA=15.2 Delta = 0.4 0.3 = 0.1 TWA = (0.3 * 15.2) + (15.4*0.1) /(0.3 + 0.1) = 15.25 TWA period time = 0.3 + 0.1 = 0.4
Time-Weighted Averaging XFLOW (TW-XFLOW)
The S600+ calculates TWA-XFLOW regardless of the measured flowrate. The algorithm used is the same as that for TWA, with the exception that the system does not check if the flowrate is greater than zero. Refer to the TWA description for an example.
Note: The methods detailed for flow and time weighted averaging should yield the same results as those specified for the linear averaging as detailed in API (September 1993) Chapter 21, Appendix B. The system supports formulas for both flowdependent time weighted linear average (B.1.1 a) and flowdependent flow weighted linear average (B.1.1.c).
Weighted Averaging To access this screen: Screen 6. Select Time/Flow Weighted Averaging from the hierarchy menu.
7. Select a stream. The Weighted Averaging screen displays.
6-20
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-16. Weighted Averaging screen
8. Complete the following field:
Field Method
Description
Indicates the averaging method. Click to display all valid values.
FWA
Flow weighted averaging, calculated with respect to the total. This is the default value.
TWA
Time weighted averaging, calculated with respect to time and totals. The system calculates this value only when the flowrate is greater than zero.
TWAXFLOW
Time weighted averaging, calculated with respect only to time. The system calculates this value regardless of the measured flowrate.
9. Click any of the following buttons to define variables:
Note: Forward and reverse settings are linked. Changes made to settings for either direction are automatically reflected in settings for both directions.
Button METER PRESSURE (Pf)
METER TEMP (Tf)
Description Click to display a Select Object dialog box you use to review or re-associate an object type with an object for meter pressure.
Note: The STR01 label changes based on the selected stream.
Click to display a Select Object dialog box you use to review or re-associate an object type with an object for meter temperature.
Note: The STR01 label changes based on the selected stream/application type.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-21
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button BASE DENS
MASS FR
Description Displays a Select Object dialog box you use to review or re-associate an object type with an object for base density.
Note: The STR01 label changes based on the selected stream.
Displays a Select Object dialog box you use to review or re-associate an object type with an object for mass flowrate.
Note: The STR01 label changes based on the selected stream.
Note: The system automatically applies any changes to TWFA assignments to reports. Any unassigned average variables are hidden on the live reports and displays.
10. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
11. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.3 Gas Coriolis
These stream settings are specific to gas applications using a Coriolis meter. When you initially create a configuration, the calculation selections you make determine which calculation screens appear in the hierarchy menu.
Caution
It is extremely unlikely that any one S600+ configuration would contain all the settings discussed in this section. For that reason, settings are demonstrated using a number of example configurations.
6.3.1 AGA8 (Compressibility)
Compressibility settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters including pressure, temperature, density, and compressibility factors. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the main AGA8 standard to calculate base compressibility, standard compressibility, and flowing compressibility for natural gases.
Note: Standard conditions are assumed as 14.73 psia and 60° F.
The compressibility settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select AGA8 from the hierarchy menu. The AGA8 screen displays.
6-22
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-17. AGA8 (Compressibility) screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Status/Control Method
Description
Indicates the compressibility method. Click to display all valid values.
DETAIL
Uses 21 component values, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 1994 standard. This is the default.
GROSS1 Uses SG, Heating Value, CO2, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 1991 standard.
Note: Gross1 only supports volumetric heating value and does not support mass heating value.
GROSS2 Uses SG, N2, CO2, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 1991 standard.
VNIC
Uses 20 component values, temperature and pressure in accordance with GOST 30319 1996.
MGERG
Uses 19 component values (As indicated in GERG Technical Monograph 2 1998) to calculate compressibility of natural gas mixtures based on a full compositional analysis.
PT 1 DETAIL 2017
Uses 21 component values, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 2017 standard.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-23
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Pressure (Standard) Temperature (Standard) Limit Check
Pressure (Inputs) Temp (Inputs)
REAL RD (SG) GROSS HV
Description
PT 1
Uses SG, Heating Value, CO2,
GROSS1 temperature and pressure in accordance
2017
with the 2017 standard.
Note: Gross1 only supports volumetric heating value and does not support mass heating value.
PT 1
Uses SG, N2, CO2, temperature and
GROSS2 pressure in accordance with the 2017
2017
standard.
PT 1
Uses 21 component values, temperature
GROSS0 and pressure in accordance with the 2017
2017
standard.
PT 2 GERG 2008
Uses 21 component values [as indicated in Table 1 AGA8 2017 Part 2 (GERG 2008)] to calculate compressibility of natural gas mixtures based on a full compositional analysis.
Sets the pressure under standard conditions. The default is 0.
Sets the temperature under standard conditions. The default is 15.
Disables the system's calculation limit checking. The default is On (enabled).
Note: Compressibilities and densities are less accurate and calculations may fail when operating outside the calculation limits.
Sets the current pressure used to calculate compressibility and density at flowing conditions.
Note: On some streams this field may be read-only as this reflects the pressure in use when the flow computer is operational.
Sets the current temperature used to calculate compressibility and density at flowing conditions.
Note: On some streams this field may be read-only as this reflects the pressure in use when the flow computer is operational.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the relative density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the gross heating value (HV).
3. Click any of the following buttons to set calculation limits:
Button METER DENSITY
UPSTR COMP(Zf)
MOLAR MASS
BASE DENSITY
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the meter density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream (flowing) compressibility.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the molar mass.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the base density.
6-24
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button BASE COMP(Zb)
IDEAL RD
STD COMP(Zs)
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the base compressibility.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the ideal relative density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the standard compressibility.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.3.2 Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588)
Calorific Value (CV) settings define the constants and calculation limits for the ideal and real calorific values. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use either the ISO6976 or GPA2172/ ASTM D3588 standard (in step 5, Options, of the PCSetup Editor's Configuration Wizard) to calculate the calorific value (heating value) of the gas mixture.
The calorific value settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select Gas CV from the hierarchy menu. The Calorific Value screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-25
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-18. Gas CV screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field CV Table
Description
Indicates the specific type of GPA scenario calculation the S600+ uses. Click to display all valid values.
Note: Change units and CV table if you want CV in mass units.
ISO6976/ 1995 Vol
Calculates CV based on volume, using the 1995 table. This is the default if you choose CV ISO6976 as your initial stream option.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
ISO6976/ Calculates CV based on mass, using the 1995 Mass 1995 table.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
ISO6976/ Calculates CV based on volume, using 1983 Vol the 1983 table.
Note: Support for the 1983 table is limited to superior volumetric at 15/15. This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
6-26
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Field
Reference Condition
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description
ISO6976/ Calculates CV based on volume, using 2016 Vol the 2016 table.
Note: This option only displays if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
ISO6976/ Calculates CV based on mass, using the 2016 Mass 2016 table.
Note: This option only displays if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
GPA/2003 AGA
Calculates CV based on a base pressure of 14.75 psia. This is the default if you choose CV GPA2172ASTMD3588 as your initial stream option.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/2003 Calculates CV based on a base
ISO
pressure of 14.696 psia.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/2000 Calculates CV based on a base
AGA
pressure of 14.73.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/2000 Calculates CV based on a base
ISO
pressure of 14.696 psia.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/1996 Calculates CV based on a base
AGA
pressure of 14.73 psia.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/1996 Calculates CV based on a base
ISO
pressure of 14.696 psia.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
Indicates the t1/t2 value, where t1 is the calculation reference temperature for combustion and t2 is the reference condition for metering. Click to display all valid values. The default is 15/15 DEG C.
Note:
For ISO6976 1983 VOL selection, the 60/60F and 15/15.55 Deg C selections are not supported.
For ISO6976 1995 VOL and MASS selections, the 60/60F selection refers to a combustion temperature (t1) of 60 Deg F and a metering temperature (t2) of 15 Deg C. The 15/15.55 Deg C selection is not supported.
Stream Configuration
6-27
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Method
User Temp T2 User Press P2 Table Revision
Base Comp(Zb) Composition Type
Description For ISO6976 2016 VOL and MASS selections,
the 60/60F selection refers to a combustion temperature (t1) of 60 Deg F and a metering temperature (t2) of 15 Deg C. The 15/15.55 Deg C selection refers to a combustion temperature (t1) of 15.55 Deg C (60 Deg F) and a metering temperature (t2) of 15.55 Deg C (60 Deg F).
If you select CV ISO6976 in your initial configuration and you select the 1995 standard, you have the choice of Alternative or Definitive methods (using table 4 Mass / table 5 volume) for calculating the ideal, superior, and inferior CV values. This selection is not applicable to the 1983 or 2016 standards.
If you select CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588 in your initial configuration, you have the choice of the Simple (using equation 7 from the GPA2172ASTMD3588-09 standard) or Rigorous (using equations 8 & 9 from the GPA2172-ASTMD358809 standard) methods for calculating the standard compressibility.
Note: This option is valid only for configurations created with Config600 version 3.1 or greater.
Applicable to the ISO6976 2016 VOL and ISO6976 2016 MASS selections. Also applicable to the ISO6976 1995 VOL and ISO6976 1995 MASS selections when the Definitive method is selected.
Note: It may be necessary to add this item to a display so that it can be correctly initialised.
Applicable to the ISO6976 1995 VOL and ISO6976 1995 MASS selections when the Definitive method is selected.
Note: It may be necessary to add this item to a display so that it can be correctly initialised.
This replaces the above AGA and ISO selections in the CV Table field for GPA 2172. You can select the GPA2145 table revision from one of the following:
1996
2000
2003
2009
Note: This option is valid only for configurations created with Config600 version 3.1 or greater.
Click to supply an externally calculated base compressibility from another calculation. The entered value is used in GPA2172-ASTMD3588 calculations instead of using its own internally calculated value based on the composition input.
Defines the composition input type. Valid options are:
mass to energy using mole percent
mass to energy using mole fraction
volume to energy using mole percent
volume to energy using mole fraction
Note: This option is valid only for AGA5 configurations.
6-28
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3. Click any of the following buttons to define calculation limits for either the ISO6976 or GPA2172-ASTMD3588 standard.
Button STD COMP (Zs) IDEAL RD
IDEAL DENSITY
IDEAL CV (SUP)
Gross HV
REAL RD
REAL DENSITY
REAL CV (SUP)
REAL VOL IDEAL HV
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for standard compressibility (Zs).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for ideal relative density.
Note: This field displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for ideal density.
Note: This field displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV IS6976.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for ideal calorific value.
Note:
The superior CV is output to calc field 1 of the CV object and the inferior CV is output to calc field 3. You can select either using the CV object mode from the Front Panel display.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for gross heating value.
Note: This field displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for real relative density.
Note: This field displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for real density.
Note: This field displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for real calorific value.
Note:
The superior CV is output to calc field 1 of the CV object and the inferior CV is output to calc field 3. You can select either by the CV object mode from the Front Panel display. This field displays only if you initially configure the stream to use ISO6976.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the real volume ideal heating value.
Note: This field displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
Stream Configuration
6-29
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.3.3 Gas CV (AGA5)
Calorific Value settings define the constants and calculation limits for ideal and real calorific values. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the AGA5 (CVAGA5) standard to calculate calorific value (heating value) for the gas mixture. )
The calorific value settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select Gas CV from the hierarchy menu. The Calorific Value screen displays.
Figure 6-19. Calorific Value screen
2. Click either of the buttons to define calorific value parameters.
Button MIXTURE SG
ENERGY RATIO
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for specific gravity.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the actual calorific value.
Note: The energy ratio is equivalent to the real calorific value or real heating value.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.3.4
Stream Gas Composition
Stream Gas Composition settings define the processing and port telemetry parameters for streams receiving data from the gas chromatograph controller. The chromatograph controller measures the individual component concentrations found in the line gas. The chromatograph controller settings also allow you to define alarms. The
6-30
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the chromatograph data are not within specified limits. 1. Select Gas Composition from the hierarchy menu. The Gas
Composition screen displays.
Figure 6-20. Gas Composition screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Type
Initial Mode
Description
Indicates the chromatograph configuration. Click to display all valid values.
CHROMAT A Controller-connected; uses keypad data as fallback information.
KP ONLY
Not controller-connected; uses information entered via keypad. This is the default.
Note: If you select KP ONLY, the system hides a number of fields on this screen.
Indicates the operational mode for the in-use composition data. Click to display all valid values.
KEYPAD
Use data entered via keypad. This is the default.
CHROMAT
Use live data from the chromatograph controller.
DOWNLOAD
Download gas composition data directly to each stream. Used only if connected to a remote supervisory computer.
USER
Use customised program for gas composition in S600+.
KEYPAD-F
Start by using keypad-entered data then switch to chromatograph data when a good analysis is received.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-31
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Acceptance Type
Station Number Apply Splits
Revert to Last Good after Failure Check Critical Alarms
Check Non Critical Alarms
CHROMAT COMMS Initial Mode
Type
Description
Indicates how the S600+ manages in-use data. Click to display all valid values.
ACC/COPY
Copy and normalise keypad data to in-use data only after it is accepted. This is the default.
ACC/NORM
Copy normalised keypad data to inuse data after it is accepted.
AUTO/NORM Automatically copy normalised keypad data to in-use data.
Sets the station associated with this stream.
Indicates the type of analyser connected to the S600+. For a C6+ analyser, use the C6Plus option. Click to display all valid values. The default is NO SPLITS.
If you select any value other than NO SPLITS, the system displays the MOLE SPLITS button. Use it to define the specific percentage splits for the gases.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Continues using the last good composition in the event of failure. Otherwise the system reverts to keypad data.
Marks the received composition as failed if any critical alarm is set (such as the pre-amp fail on the Danalyzer for a Daniel 2551 Controller).
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Marks the received composition as failed if any noncritical alarm is set (such as the pre-amp fail on the Danalyzer for a Daniel 2551 Controller).
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Click to display the Comm screen in I/O Setup.
Identifies the chromatograph and any fallback controllers. Currently, the only valid value is PAY, which indicates one chromatograph and no fallback controller.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Indicates the type of chromatograph controller. Click to display all valid values.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
2551 EURO
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2551 (European) controller. This is the default.
2350 EURO
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2350 (European) controller set in SIM_2251 mode.
2350 USA
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2350 (USA) controller set in SIM_2251 mode.
6-32
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
MOLE ORDER
Address Stream
Analysis Timeout Download Timeout
KEYPAD MOLES
Description
2251 USA
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2251 controller.
Generic
S600+ is connected to another type of controller.
Siemens
S600+ is connected to a Siemens Advance Maxum via a Siemens Network Access Unit (NAU).
Click this button to display a dialog box on which you indicate the order in which the gas composition information comes into the S600+ via telemetry. 0 indicates any component which is not included in the Modbus map.
Note:
The Modbus map you create must be compatible with the controller to which the S600+ is connected. Refer to Chapter 14, Modbus Editor, for further information.
This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
This field is applicable only when selecting Siemens or Generic in the Type field.
Configures multi-drop chromatograph support. Do not change unless advised to do so.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Sets the chromat analysis stream assigned to this metering stream. The default is 0.
Note:
This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type. If you need to support more than one stream, contact Technical Support.
Sets the maximum number of seconds the S600+ waits to receive a new composition from the chromatograph controller before raising an alarm. The default is 900.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Sets the maximum number of minutes the S600+ waits to receive a new composition from the supervisory computer before raising a DL Timeout Alarm. The default is 15.
Note:
A value of 0 disables the timeout.
This field displays only if you select KP ONLY in the Type field.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for each gas component.
Note:
The system assumes the keypad composition adds to 100% (normalised) when the Acceptance Type is ACC/COPY. If you select ACC/NORM or AUTO/NORM, the system automatically normalises the keypad composition.
Stream Configuration
6-33
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field MOLE ADDITIONAL
USER MOLES
Check Limits MOLE LO LIMITS
MOLE HI LIMITS Check Deviations
MOLE DEVN LIMITS
Description
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for gas components not analysed by the Danalyzer. The system assumes any additional components to be normalised values, so the analyser components are re-normalised to (100 sum of additional components).
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for each gas component. The system assumes user moles to be normalised.
Note:
The S600+ uses these values only if you set the Initial Mode to USER. A Modbus download from another computer may overwrite these values on a running configuration.
Enables limit checking on each gas component. When you select this check box, the MOLE LO LIMITS and MOLE HI LIMITS buttons display.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define low mole percentage limit values for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
Note:
The system uses the values you enter through these buttons only if you select the Check Limits check box. The system applies this test to the keypad, downloaded, user, additionals, and new analysis components. When enabled, the system applies the limit check against the high and low limits. Limits are considered valid if the limit is greater than zero (0). The system also applies the check to the Total field. If you disable the limit check, the keypad, downloaded, and user Total field must lie within 0.1% and 150%. A sum of the new analysis must be within 99.5% and 100.5%.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define high mole percentage limit values for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
Note: See note in description of Mole Lo Limits field.
Enables checking on the deviation from the last good analysis for each component. When you select this check box, the MOLE DEVN LIMITS button displays.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Displays a dialog box you use to define the maximum deviation allowed for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6-34
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6.3.5 Gas Properties
Gas Properties settings define methods the system uses to calculate viscosity, isentropic exponent (also known as "specific heat ratio" or "adiobatic exponent"), and the velocity of sound.
These settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select Gas Properties from the hierarchy menu. The Gas Properties screen displays.
Figure 6-21. Gas Properties screen
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-35
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Viscosity @ Tn Viscosity Tn Sutherland Constant Viscosity Calc Type
Isentropic Exponent
Description
Sets the reference viscosity for the gas. The default is 0.010861.
Note: Used only by VDI/VDE.
Sets the reference viscosity temperature for the gas. The default is 15.
Note: Used only by VDI/VDE.
Sets the Sutherland constant for the gas. The default is 164 (Methane).
Note: Used only by VDI/VDE.
Indicates the method for calculating the viscosity of the gas. Click to display all valid values.
Disabled
Value not calculated; defaults to keypad-entered value. This is the default.
SGERG GOST Uses calculations from GOST
30139-2015
30139-2015. Requires base density,
N2, and CO2 inputs.
VDI/VDE 2040 1987
Uses calculations from VDI/VDE 2040 Part 2 1987. Requires viscosity @Tn, viscosity Tn, and Sutherland Constant inputs.
VNIC GOST 30319-2015
Uses calculations from GOST 30319-2015. Requires full gas composition input.
Indicates the method for calculating the isentropic exponent of the gas. Click to display all valid values.
AGA10 2003
Uses calculations from AGA10 2003. Requires full gas composition input.
Disabled
Value not calculated; defaults to keypad-entered value. This is the default.
GRI 1991
Uses calculations from GRI 1991. Requires full gas composition input.
SGERG GOST Uses calculations from GOST
30139-2015
30139-2015. Requires Base
Density, N2 and CO2 inputs.
VNIC GOST 30319-2015
Uses calculations from GOST 30319-2015. Requires full gas composition input.
6-36
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Speed of Sound
Description
Indicates the method for calculating the speed of sound. Click to display all valid values.
AGA10 2003
Uses calculations from AGA10 2003. Requires full gas composition input.
Disabled
Value not calculated; defaults to keypad-entered value. This is the default.
GRI 1991
Uses calculations from GRI 1991. Requires full gas composition input.
SGERG GOST Uses calculations from GOST
30139-2015
30139-2015. Requires Base
Density, N2 and CO2 inputs.
VNIC GOST 30319-2015
Uses calculations from GOST 30319-2015. Requires full gas composition input.
3. Click any of the following buttons to display a dialog box you use to set gas property outputs or variables:
Button VISCOSITY ISENTROPIC EXPONENT VOS
METER PRESS
METER TEMP
BASE DENSITY INUSE COMPOSITION
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for viscosity.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the isentropic exponent.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the velocity of sound (VOS).
Note: AGA10 refers to VOS as "speed of sound."
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the meter pressure.
Note: This button may be disabled on some applications.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the meter temperature.
Note: This button may be disabled on some applications.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Click to display a read-only table of gas compositions. This corresponds to the table defined through the Gas Composition screen's KEYPAD MOLES button.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-37
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6.3.6 Ethylene
This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the Ethylene standards to calculate base compressibility, base density, flowing compressibility and flowing density for ethylene. The S600+ also uses it to calculate the flowing compressibility and flowing density for Propylene.
The compressibility settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select Ethylene from the hierarchy menu. The Ethylene screen displays.
Figure 6-22. Ethylene screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Calculation Type
Pressure (Base Conditions) Temperature (Base Conditions) Pressure (Flowing Conditions) Temperature (Flowing
Description
Indicates the type of calculation to use. Click to display all valid values.
IUPAC ETHYLENE
Uses IUPAC 1988 (Liquid and Gas Phase). This is the default.
API ETHYLENE
Uses API 11.3.2.1 1985 (Gas Phase).
NB5 1045 ETHYLENE
Uses NBS 1045 1981 (Liquid and Gas Phase)
API
Uses API 11.3.3.2 1974 (Liquid
PROPYLENE phase).
Sets the pressure under base conditions. The default is 0.
Sets the temperature under base conditions. The default is 15.
Sets the current flowing pressure to calculate compressibility and density.
Note: On some streams this field may be read-only.
Sets the current flowing temperature to calculate compressibility and density.
6-38
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Conditions)
Description Note: On some streams this field may be read-only.
3. Click any of the following buttons to set calculation limits.
Button BASE DENSITY
BASE COMP(Zb)
METER DENSITY
UPSTR COMP(Zf)
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the base density
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the meter density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the base compressibility.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream (flowing) compressibility.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.3.7
Linearisation
Linearisation settings define the constants and calculation limits for the meter factor. The S600+ calculates a meter factor corresponding to the frequency by interpolating the frequency between fixed points and then cross-referencing the result against a lookup table. Linearisation settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the Meter Factor are not within specified limits.
Notes:
The linearisation curve for Gas Coriolis configurations uses frequency as the default input for Meter Factor calculations. The ability to change the default is available only with Config600 Pro software.
Batching systems that employ meter factor linearisation with retrospective meter factor adjustments assume that the adjusted value has a "keypad" mode.
To prevent the live metering system from applying a double correction, use either a calculated meter factor or a calculated Kfactor linearisation (that is, only one factor should have a calculated mode).
1. Select Linearisation from the hierarchy menu. The Linearisation screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-39
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-23. Linearisation screen
6-40
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Meter Factors
M-FACTOR K-FACTOR Meter Factor Method
Description
Sets up to 20 flow rate and values for the meter correction factors.
Flowrate/Freq Sets the flowrate and frequency for each of the meter correction factors.
Value
Sets the corresponding values for each of the meter correction factors.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the respective factor.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the respective factor.
Selectable between METER FACTOR (values entered as normal) and ERROR PERCENT (Meter Factor entered as a percentage).
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.3.8
Sampling
Sampling defines the method and interval period for sampling product from a flowing pipeline. By default, Config600 supports one sampler per stream. Config600 uses the following stages during the sampling process:
Stage 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Description Idle Monitor Digout n Min Intvl Post Pulse Stopped Manually Stopped Can Full Stopped Low Flow Initial Time Check Flow Switch Stopped Flow Switch Stopped Press Switch Stopped initialise Can Switch Over
Note: Batch auto-resets the sampler at the start of the batch.
1. Select Sampling from the hierarchy menu. The Sampling screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-41
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-24. Stream Sampling screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Sampler ID
Method
Description
Provides an identifying label for the sampler. Each stream or station must have a unique sampler ID and must be greater than zero.
Indicates the sampling method. Click to display all valid values.
TIME PROP
Divides the value in the Can Fill Period field by the number of grabs needed to fill the can (derived from the Can Volume and Fill Volume values) to determine a time interval per pulse. This is the default.
FLOW PROP1
Divides the value in the Volume field by the number of grabs needed to fill the can (derived from the Can Volume and Fill Volume values) to determine a volume throughput per pulse.
FLOW PROP2
Uses the value in the Volume field as the volume throughput per pulse.
FLOW PROP3
Uses the value in the Volume field as the volume throughput per pulse, but supports low pressure digital input and pump prime output.
6-42
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Mode
Can Fill Indicator
Auto Disable
Auto Restart Expected Volume/Mass Can Fill Period Flowrate Low Limit Minimum Interval
Description
Indicates the sampling mode. Click to display all valid values. The S600+ uses Can 1 or Can 2.
SINGLE
Acquire sample in one trial. This is the default.
DUAL
Acquire samples in two trials.
Note:
If you select Dual, the sampler switches to a second can when the current can is full (according to the two can switchover mode).
Indicates when the sampling can is full. Click to display all valid values.
GRAB COUNT
Uses the number of pulses output to the sampler to determine when the sample is full. This is the default.
DIG I/P
Uses a digital input to determine when the sampler is full.
ANALOG I/P
Uses an analog input to determine when the sampler is full.
Indicates the event at which the system automatically disables the sampling process. Select the appropriate check box to identify the specific event.
On Can Full
Disables the sampling process when the can is full. This is the default.
On Flowrate Limit
Disables the sampling process when the flowrate is less than the value of the Flowrate Low Limit.
On Flow Status Disables the sampling process when the flow status value is not on-line.
Automatically restarts (if selected) sampling following an automatic disabling.
Indicates, in cubic meters, the expected flow volume or mass of the sampling can. This is the value the Flow Prop1 and Flow Prop2 sampling methods use for calculations. The default is 1000.
Sets, in hours, the time required to fill the sampling can. The default is 24.
Note: The Time Prop sampling method uses this value for its calculations.
Indicates flowrate low limit used by the Auto Disable on Flowrate Limit option. The default is 0.
Note: This field is required if you select the On Flowrate Limit check box for Auto Disable.
Indicates, in seconds, the minimum amount of time between grabs. This is the value the Time Prop sampling method uses for its calculations. The default is 30.
Note: If the sample exceeds this limit, the system sets the overspeed alarm and increments the overspeed counter.
Stream Configuration
6-43
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Volumes
Can Limits
Twin Can Changeover Mode
Description
Can Volume Grab Volume
Indicates, in cubic meters, the volume of the sampling can. The default is 0.5.
Indicates, in cubic meters, the volume of the sampling grab. The default is 0.001.
Can Low Limit
Indicates the low alarm value as a percentage of the can volume. The default is 5.
Can High Limit
Indicates the high alarm value as a percentage of the can volume. The default is 90.
Can High High Limit
Indicates the high high alarm value as a percentage of the can volume. The default is 95.
Indicates whether the system automatically change to a second sampling can. Click to display all valid values.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.3.9 Coriolis
Coriolis settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters, including stream input sources and modes of operation. The Coriolis settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within specified limits.
Flow data is received from a Coriolis meter via Modbus serial communications or a pulse input, or a combination of both. The S600+ generates its own totals incrementally from the comms or pulses.
1. Select Coriolis from the hierarchy menu. The Coriolis screen displays.
6-44
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-25. Coriolis screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Flow Units
Flow Data Source
Kdpf
Density Calib Pressure
Ktpf1
Description
Indicates the primary measurement for flow units. Click to display all valid values. Select MASS (configures the Coriolis meter for mass-based pulses) or VOLUME (configures the meter for volume-based pulses). The default is MASS.
Indicates the source of flow data. Click to display all valid values. Select SERIAL (enables the system to take the primary variable from the serial mass or volume flowrate) or PULSE I/P (calculates the primary variable from the mass or volume pulse input). The default is SERIAL.
Sets a density correction factor value. The default is 0.
Note:
Please contact your Coriolis supplier or reference the supplied calibration sheet for more information regarding this field and value.
Sets a density calibration pressure value. The default is 0.
Note:
Please contact your Coriolis supplier or reference the supplied calibration sheet for more information regarding this field and value.
Sets a pulse correction factor value. The default is 0.
Note:
Please contact your Coriolis supplier or reference the supplied calibration sheet for more information regarding this field and value.
Stream Configuration
6-45
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Flow Calib Pressure
Pressure
Temperature
Density
Use 64 bit totals
Use ext temp/press
Max Acceptable Gap Flow Integral Acceptance Factor Max Meter Total Max Flowrate
Description
Sets a flow calibration pressure value. The default is 0.
Note:
Please contact your Coriolis supplier or reference the supplied calibration sheet for more information regarding this field and value.
Indicates the source of pressure I/O. Click to display all valid values. Select CORIOLIS (use data from the Coriolis serial link) or I/O (use data either from the ADC/PRT/Density inputs [if correctly configured] or from the Coriolis serial link [if incorrectly configured]). The default is CORIOLIS.
Note: If you select I/O, remember to configure the analogue inputs.
Indicates the source of temperature I/O. Click to display all valid values. Select CORIOLIS (use data from the Coriolis serial link) or I/O (uses data either from the ADC/PRT/Density inputs [if correctly configured] or from the Coriolis serial link [ff incorrectly configured]). The default is CORIOLIS.
Note: If you select I/O, remember to configure the analogue inputs.
Indicates the source of density I/O. Click to display all valid values. Select CORIOLIS (use data from the Coriolis serial link) or I/O (use data either from the ADC/PRT/Density inputs [if correctly configured] or from the Coriolis serial link [if incorrectly configured]. The default is CORIOLIS.
Note: If you select I/O, remember to configure the densitometer.
Indicates whether the S600+ uses the 64-bit totals received from the Coriolis meter in its totalisation routines.
NO Use the 32-bit totals received from the Coriolis meter. This is the default.
YES Use the 64-bit totals received from the Coriolis meter.
Indicates which serial temperature and pressure values the S600+ uses in calculations.
Note: This is valid only if the temperature and pressure I/O selections are set to CORIOLIS.
NO Use the internally derived temperature and pressure values. This is the default.
YES Use the external temperature and pressure input values.
Sets, in seconds, the maximum acceptable gap between successive polls. The default is 50. The system's incremental validation logic uses this value to determine communication failures.
Sets the acceptance tolerance factor for comparing flowrate to elapsed totals. Used by the increment validation logic.The default is 20.
Sets a maximum allowable increment in the received total. Used by the increment validation logic.
Sets a maximum allowable flowrate. Used by the increment validation logic.The default is 160.
6-46
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3. Click any of the following buttons to set meter variable limits:
Button SERIAL PRESS
SERIAL TEMP
SERIAL DENSITY I/O PRESSURE
I/O TEMPERATURE
I/O DENSITY
Coriolis Comms
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for serial pressure.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for serial temperature.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for serial density.
Click to display an Analog Input dialog box you use to define various values for the analog input. For further information, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3, Analog Inputs.
Click to display an Analog Input dialog box you use to define various values for the analog input. For further information, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3, Analog Inputs.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for I/O density.
Click to access the I/O Setup screen in Comms.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Coriolis Validation Logic
The system supports logic to check whether the flowrate and totals values received across the serial link are in proportion and correspond to data received on the previous poll.
The expressions in upper case are keypad entered values. The default values are:
MAX POLL GAP = 50 seconds FLOW INTEGRAL FACTOR = 20 MAX FLOWRATE = 2000 t/h MAX INCREMENT = 9990000 tonne
The task runs approximately once per second, so delta_t would normally be about 1 second.
proc validate_inc() valid = FALSE delta_t = current time previous time increment = current total previous total flow_inc = (current fr + previous fr) / 2 * delta_t
ifdelta_t < MAX POLL GAP then if increment <= FLOW INTEGRAL FACTOR * flow_inc then if increment < MAX FLOWRATE * delta_t then
if increment < MAX INCREMENT then valid = TRUE
endif endif endif endif return (valid)
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-47
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
endproc
6.4 Gas DP
These stream settings are specific to gas applications using differential pressure (DP) meters. When you initially create a configuration, the calculation selections you make determine which calculation-specific screens appear in the hierarchy menu.
Caution
It is extremely unlikely that any one S600+ configuration would contain all the settings discussed in this section. For that reason, several sample configurations demonstrate the settings.
6.4.1 Downstream/Upstream Correction
Downstream and Upstream correction settings define the parameters required to either correct upstream measurements to downstream measurements or correct downstream measurements to upstream measurements.
For gas, the system obtains pressure and density measurements from either downstream or upstream of the orifice plate. DP flow calculations require temperature, pressure, and density to be upstream values.
These correction settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select Downstream Upstream Correction from the hierarchy menu for the desired stream.
2. Select CORR T/P (to correct temperature and pressure) or CORR DENS (to correct density). The system displays the Downstream/Upstream Correction screen.
Note:
For the purpose of explanation, we include two figures (Figure 6-26 and Figure 6-27) that display all options. Depending on your selections in the previous step, Config600 displays only portions of these screens.
6-48
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-26. Temperature/Pressure Correction screen
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-27. Density Correction screen
3. Click the appropriate button or complete the following fields.
Field Correction
Description Indicates the correction methodology the S600+
Stream Configuration
6-49
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-50
Field Type
METER PRESS Measurement Point (Pressure) DOWNSTREAM DENSITY
DENS EXP CONSTANT
DENSITY COMP(Zd) UPSTR COMP(Zf) METER TEMP Measurement Point (Temperature)
TEMP EXP CONSTANT
JT
Description applies to temperature and density corrections. Click to display all valid values.
SIMPLE
Upstream and downstream temperatures are the same.
EXTENDED
Calculates upstream temperature from measured downstream temperature and upstream density from measured downstream density. Calculation uses exponents calculated from the isentropic exponent. This is the default.
JT METHOD
Calculates upstream temperature from measured downstream temperature using the JouleThomson coefficient as described in ISO5167-2003.
Note: This selection adds the JT Coefficient button to the screen.
Click to display an Analog Input dialog box you use to define various values for the analog input.
Indicates the source of flow data for pressure calculations. Click to display all valid values. The default is UPSTREAM.
Note: This represents the physical measurement point on the metering system.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for downstream density.
Note: This button displays only if you select the CORR DENS component.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for density expansion.
Note: This button displays only if you select the CORR DENS component.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for densitometer compressibility (Zd).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream compressibility (Zf) at upstream conditions.
Click to display an Analog Input dialog box you use to define various values for the analog input.
Indicates the source of flow data for temperature calculations. Click to display all valid values. The default is DOWNSTREAM.
Note:
This field, which represents the physical measurement point on the metering system, displays only if you select EXTENDED as a Correction Type.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for temperature expansion.
Note: This button displays only if you select EXTENDED as a Correction Type.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field COEFFICIENT
Description define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for density expansion.
Note: This button displays only if you select JT COEFFICIENT as a Correction Type.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.2 Pipe Correction
Pipe Correction settings define the calibrated diameter, temperature, and materials of manufacture for the pipe and orifice plate. Use these settings to correct the calibrated pipe and orifice diameters to line conditions.
The pipe correction settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select Pipe Correction from the hierarchy menu. The system displays the Pipe Correction screen.
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-28. Pipe Correction screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Pipe Calib Diameter
Calib Temperature
Description
Sets, in mm, the calibrated diameter of the pipe. The default is 300. Sets, in Deg C., the calibrated temperature of the pipe.
Stream Configuration
6-51
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Pipe Material
User Exp Coeff
Description The default is 20.
Identifies the material for the pipe. Click to display all valid values.
STAINLESS Uses a value of either 0.00000925
in/in°F or 0.0000167 mm/mm°C. This is the standard expansion coefficient for a US application using Imperial or metric units. This is the default.
MONEL
Uses a value of either 0.00000795
in/in°F or 0.0000143 mm/mm°C. This is the standard expansion coefficient for a US application using Imperial or metric units.
CARBON ST Uses a value of either 0.00000620
in/in°F or 0.0000112 mm/mm°C. This is the standard expansion coefficient for a US application using Imperial or metric units.
USER
Uses the coefficient value entered in the User Exp Coeff field.
GOST 8563.C1 COEFFS
Calculates the expansion coefficient from additional coefficients in GOST 8.563.1 (Table C.1).
Note: The GOST option displays only if you select GOST1 or GOST2 from PCSetup.
304/316 Stainless
Uses a value of either 0.000000925 in/in°F or 0.0000167 mm/mm°C. This is the standard expansion coefficient for a US application using Imperial or metric units.
304 Stainless Uses a value of either 0.000000961
in/in°F or 0.0000173 mm/mm°C. This is the standard expansion coefficient for a US application using Imperial or metric units.
316 Stainless Uses a value of either 0.000000889
in/in°F or 0.0000160 mm/mm°C. This is the standard expansion coefficient for a US application using Imperial or metric units.
Monel 400
Uses a value of either 0.000000772
in/in°F or 0.0000139 mm/mm°C. This is the standard expansion coefficient for a US application using Imperial or metric units.
Sets a specific expansion coefficient the S600+ uses for the pipe correction.
Note: This field displays only if you select USER for Pipe Material.
6-52
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Coefficient a, b, c
Orifice Calib Diameter Calib Temperature Orifice Material
Description
Sets the specific coefficients the S600+ uses for the orifice expansion correction.
Note:
These fields display only if you select GOST 8563.C1 COEFFS for Pipe Material, which supplies its own algorithm and coefficients to calculate the pipe and orifice material expansion coefficients.
Sets, in mm, the calibrated diameter of the orifice. The default is 200.
Sets, in Deg C., the calibrated temperature of the orifice. The default is 15.
Identifies the material for the orifice. Click to display all valid values.
STAINLESS Uses a value of either 0.00000925
in/in°F or 0.0000167 mm/mm°C. This is the standard expansion coefficient for a US application using Imperial or metric units. This is the default.
MONEL
Uses a value of either 0.00000795
in/in°F or 0.0000143 mm/mm°C. This is the standard expansion coefficient for a US application using Imperial or metric units.
CARBON ST Uses a value of either 0.00000620
in/in°F or 0.0000112 mm/mm°C. This is the standard expansion coefficient for a US application using Imperial or metric units.
USER
Uses the coefficient value entered in the User Exp Coeff field.
GOST 8563.C1 COEFFS
Calculates the expansion coefficient from additional coefficients in GOST 8.563.1 (Table C.1).
Note: The GOST option displays only if you select GOST1 or GOST2 from PCSetup.
304/316 Stainless
Uses a value of either 0.000000925 in/in°F or 0.0000167 mm/mm°C. This is the standard expansion coefficient for a US application using Imperial or metric units.
304 Stainless Uses a value of either 0.000000961
in/in°F or 0.0000173 mm/m°C. This is the standard expansion coefficient for a US application using Imperial or metric units.
316 Stainless Uses a value of either 0.000000889
in/in°F or 0.0000160 mm/mm°C. This is the standard expansion coefficient for a US application using Imperial or metric units.
Monel 400
Uses a value of either 0.000000772
in/in°F or 0.0000139 mm/mm°C. This is the standard expansion coefficient for a US application using Imperial or metric units.
Stream Configuration
6-53
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field User Exp Coeff
Coefficient a, b, c
Description
Sets a specific expansion coefficient the S600+ uses for the orifice correction. The default is 1.6e-005.
Note: This field displays only if you select USER for Pipe Material.
Sets the specific coefficients the S600+ uses for the orifice expansion correction.
Note:
These fields display only if you select GOST 8563.C1 COEFFS for Pipe Material, which supplies its own algorithm and coefficients to calculate the pipe and orifice material expansion coefficients.
Note: GOST applications refer to stainless steel as 12X17, to monel as 12X18H9T, and to carbon steel as 20. The correction constants are taken from GOST 8.563.1.
3. Click any of the following buttons to set calculation limits.
Button UPSTREAM TEMP
CORRECTED PIPE DIAM
CORRECTED ORIF DIAM
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream temperature.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the corrected pipe diameter.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the corrected orifice diameter.
6.4.3
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
AGA8 (Compressibility)
Compressibility settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters including pressure, temperature, density, and compressibility factors. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the main AGA8 standard to calculate base compressibility, standard compressibility, and flowing compressibility for natural gases.
Note: "Standard conditions" are assumed as 14.73 psia and 60° F.
The compressibility settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select AGA8 from the hierarchy menu. The AGA8 screen displays.
6-54
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-29. AGA8 (Compressibility) screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Method
Description
Indicates the compressibility method. Click to display all valid values.
DETAIL
Uses 21 component values, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 1994 standard. This is the default.
GROSS1 Uses SG, Heating Value, CO2, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 1991 standard.
Note: Gross1 only supports volumetric heating value and does not support mass heating value.
GROSS2 Uses SG, N2, CO2, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 1991 standard.
VNIC
Uses 20 component values, temperature and pressure in accordance with GOST 30319 1996.
MGERG
Uses 19 component values (As indicated in GERG Technical Monograph 2 1998) to calculate compressibility of natural gas mixtures based on a full compositional analysis.
PT 1 DETAIL 2017
Uses 21 component values, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 2017 standard.
PT 1
Uses SG, Heating Value, CO2,
GROSS1 temperature and pressure in accordance
2017
with the 2017 standard.
Note: Gross1 only supports volumetric heating value and does not support mass heating value.
PT 1
Uses SG, N2, CO2, temperature and
GROSS2 pressure in accordance with the 2017
2017
standard.
Stream Configuration
6-55
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Pressure Temperature Limit Check
UPSTREAM PRESS UPSTREAM TEMP REAL RD (SG) GROSS HV DENSITY PRESS (P2) DENSITY TEMP (T3)
Description
PT 1
Uses 21 component values, temperature
GROSS0 and pressure in accordance with the 2017
2017
standard.
PT 2 GERG 2008
Uses 21 component values [as indicated in Table 1 AGA8 2017 Part 2 (GERG 2008)] to calculate compressibility of natural gas mixtures based on a full compositional analysis.
Sets the pressure at base conditions. The default is 0.
Sets the temperature at base conditions. The default is 15.
Overrides the system's calculation limit checking. Click to select Off and disable limit checking. The default is On.
Note:
Compressibilities and densities are less accurate and the calculation may fail completely when operating outside the calculation limits.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream pressure.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream temperature.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for real relative density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for gross heating value (HV).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for density pressure (P2).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for density temperature (T3).
3. Click one or more of the following buttons to define AGA8 calculation limits.
6-56
Button UPSTREAM DENSITY
UPSTR COMP(Zf)
MOLAR MASS
BASE DENSITY
BASE COMP(Zb)
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream compressibility (Zf).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for molar mass.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button
IDEAL RD
STD COMP(Zs)
DENSITY COMP (Zd)
Description use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base compressibility (Zb).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for ideal relative density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for standard compressibility (Zs).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the densitometer compressibility.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.4
ISO5167 (Mass Flowrate)
ISO5167 mass settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters including pressure, density, flow coefficient, and pressure loss. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the ISO5167 standard to calculate gas flow through the orifice meter.
Mass flowrate settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select ISO5167 from the hierarchy menu. The ISO5167 screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-57
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-30. ISO5167 (Mass Flowrate) screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Calculation Version Expansion Factor
Limit Check
Description
Indicates the specific version of the ISO5167 calculation. Click to display all valid versions. The default is 1991.
Displays options for calculating the fluid expansion factor. Click to display all valid versions.
GAS ORIFICE
Use the expansion factor formula as defined by calculation you select in the Calculation Version field. This is the default.
LIQUID ORIFICE
Use an Expansion Factor = 1.0 (no expansion).
Overrides the system's calculation limit checking. Click to select Off and disable limit checking. The default is On.
Note: If you enable limit checking, ISO5167 validates the calculation inputs and outputs in accordance with the following sections:
All tap types
Corner and D-D/2 taps
Flange taps
SA 1932 nozzles
Long radius nozzles
Venturi
Pressure taps
6-58
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Forward Premium Flow Limit
Reverse Premium Flow Limit
Premium Billing Mode
Tap Type
VISCOSITY
ISENTROPIC EXPONENT RSMT Dish Calib Factor
UPSTREAM PRESSURE UPSTREAM DENSITY DOWNSTREAM PRESSURE
Description
In Premium Billing FLOW mode and Flow Direction FORWARD, sets a flowrate limit above which the system increments forward premium totals whenever the flowrate exceeds the keypad limit.
In Premium Billing TOTAL mode and Flow Direction FORWARD, sets a total limit above which the system increments forward premium totals whenever the period total exceeds the keypad limit. The default is 100
In Premium Billing FLOW mode and Flow Direction REVERSE, sets a flowrate limit above which the system increments reverse premium totals whenever the flowrate exceeds the keypad limit.
In Premium Billing TOTAL mode and Flow Direction REVERSE, sets a total limit above which the system increments reverse premium totals whenever the period total exceeds the keypad limit. The default is 100.
Indicates the premium total mode, in which the system increments premium totals at the end of a period only if the period total exceeds the keypad limit. Click to display all valid values. The default is FLOW.
Indicates the position of the differential pressure tap on the metering assembly. Click to display all valid values. The default is FLANGE.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for viscosity.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the isentropic exponent.
Sets the discharge coefficient calibration factor for the Rosemount 1595 conditioning orifice plate.
Note: This field displays only if you select RSMT1595 2003 as the Calculation Version.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream pressure.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for downstream pressure.
3. Click any of the following buttons to define ISO5167 calculation result limits.
Button MASS FLOWRATE
PRESSURE LOSS
BETA
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for mass flowrate.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for pressure loss.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the calculated diameter ratio.
Stream Configuration
6-59
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button REYNOLDS NUMBER
EXPANSION FACTOR
DISCHARGE COEFF
FLOW COEFFICIENT
VEL OF APPROACH FAC
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the Reynolds number.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the expansion factor.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the discharge coefficient.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the flow coefficient.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the velocity of approach coefficient.
4. For wet gas, complete the following values.
Field Calc Type
WET GAS INPUTS REYNOLDS NUMBERS DISCHARGE COEFFICIENTS
Description Click to to set the specific type of wet gas calculation the S600+ uses. Possible options are CHISHOLM, DE-LEEUW, MURDOCK, AND STEVEN. The default is MURDOCK.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define specific input values for wet gases.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define the wet gas Reynolds numbers for up to 30 fields.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define the wet gas coefficients for up to 30 fields.
5. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
6. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.5 ISOTR9464
ISOTR9464 settings provide a calculation of the Joule-Thomson coefficient used in upstream temperature correction. The settings define the upstream temperature and pressure input limits and the Joule-Thomson coefficient output limits. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use a DP method to calculate gas flow.
1. Select ISOTR9464 from the hierarchy menu. The ISOTR9464 screen displays.
6-60
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-31. ISOTR9464 screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field UPSTREAM TEMP UPSTREAM PRESS Limit Check
JT COEFFICIENT
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream temperature.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream pressure.
Enables limit checking. The default is enabled.
With limit checking enabled, the system checks that the temperature is between 0 °C and 100 °C, that the pressure is between 100 and 200 bar, and that methane is > than 80%. If any of these parameters are out of range, the system sets the coefficient to zero, which prevents the calculation of upstream temperature correction.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the Joule-Thomson coefficient.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-61
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6.4.6
V-Cone (Mass Flowrate)
V-Cone® mass flowrate settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters including pressure, density, flow coefficient, and pressure loss. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the V-Cone standard to calculate gas flow through the orifice meter.
Mass flowrate settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select VCone from the hierarchy menu. The VCone screen displays.
Figure 6-32. V-Cone (Mass Flowrate) screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field VISCOSITY
ISENTROPIC EXPONENT
FLOW COEFFICIENT
Gas Expansion
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for viscosity.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the isentropic exponent.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the flow coefficient.
Identifies the specific gas expansion calculation the S600+ uses. Click to display all valid values.
VCONE 2.3
The S600+ uses the McCrometer 2.3 V-Cone Flowmeter / ISO5167 Gas Expansion (Y) calculation.
VCONE 3.0 2001
The S600+ uses the McCrometer 3.0 2001 V-Cone Gas Expansion (Y) calculation. This is the default.
WCONE 3.0 2001
The S600+ uses the McCrometer 3.0 2001 Wafer Cone Gas Expansion (Y) calculation.
6-62
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Description LIQUID 2001
The S600+ uses a value of 1.0 for the Gas Expansion Factor.
Thermal Expansion
MASS FLOWRATE PRESSURE LOSS BETA
REYNOLDS NUMBER EXPANSION FACTOR UPSTREAM PRESSURE UPSTREAM DENSITY Forward Premium Flow Limit Reverse Premium Flow Limit Premium Billing Mode
Identifies the specific type of thermal expansion
calculation the S600+ uses. Click to display all valid values.
S500 LEGACY
Sets the Thermal Expansion factor to 1.
Note: This option appears only if you select VCONE 2.3 in the Gas Expansion field.
DIAMETERS The S600+ uses the calibrated diameters in the thermal expansion calculation. This is the default.
BETA RATIO
The S600+ uses the beta ratio in the thermal expansion calculation.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the mass flowrate.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the pressure loss.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the calculated diameter ratio.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the Reynolds number.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the expansion factor.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream pressure.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream density.
Sets the premium forward flow mode, in which the system increments premium totals whenever the flowrate exceeds the keypad limit. The default is 100.
Sets the premium reversed flow mode, in which the system increments premium totals whenever the flowrate exceeds the keypad limit. The default is 100.
Indicates the premium total mode, in which the system increments premium totals at the end of the hour only if the hourly total exceeds the keypad limit. Click to display all valid values. The default is FLOW.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.7 Annubar (Mass Flowrate)
Annubar mass flowrate settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters including pressure, density, flow
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-63
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
coefficient, and pressure loss. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the 1998 Dieterich Standard Annubar Diamond II+ to calculate gas flow through the orifice meter.
Mass flowrate settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select Annubar from the hierarchy menu. The Annubar screen displays.
Figure 6-33. Annubar (Mass Flowrate) screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Annubar Base Temp VISCOSITY
ISENTROPIC EXPONENT
FLOW COEFFICIENT
Pipe Diameter
Probe Diameter
Coefficient Linear Exp UPSTREAM PRESSURE
Description Sets the Annubar calibration temperature. The default is 15.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for viscosity.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the isentropic exponent.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the flow coefficient.
Sets, in millimeters, the uncorrected internal pipe diameter. The default is 300.
Sets, in millimeters, the corrected internal probe diameter. The default is 200.
Sets the coefficient the S600+ uses for linear expansion. The default is 1.59e-005.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream pressure.
6-64
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field UPSTREAM TEMP UPSTREAM DENSITY Calculation Version Forward Premium Flow Limit
Reverse Premium Flow Limit
Premium Billing Mode
MASS FLOWRATE PRESSURE LOSS THERMAL EXPN FCTR GAS EXPN FACTOR REYNOLDS NUMBER
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream temperature.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream density.
This read-only field shows the default calculation Config600 uses for the Annubar settings, based on the Annubar device in use.
In Premium Billing FLOW mode and Flow Direction FORWARD. sets a flowrate limit above which the system increments forward premium totals whenever the flowrate exceeds the keypad limit.
In Premium Billing TOTAL mode and Flow Direction FORWARD, sets a total limit above which the system increments forward premium totals whenever the period total exceeds the keypad limit. The default is 100.
In Premium Billing FLOW mode and Flow Direction REVERSE, sets a flowrate limit above which the system increments reverse premium totals whenever the flowrate exceeds the keypad limit.
In Premium Billing TOTAL mode and Flow Direction REVERSE, sets a total limit above which the system increments reverse premium totals whenever the period total exceeds the keypad limit. The default is 100.
Indicates the premium total mode, in which the system increments premium totals at the end of a period only if the period total exceeds the keypad limit. Click to display all valid values.The default is FLOW.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the mass flowrate.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the pressure loss.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the thermal expansion factor.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the gas expansion factor.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the Reynolds number.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.8 Pure Gas Air
Pure Gas Air mass flowrate settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters including pressure, density, flow coefficient, and pressure loss. This screen displays when you
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-65
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
configure the S600+ to use the Pure Gas and Air standards to calculate gas flow through the orifice meter. flowrate Mass flowrate settings also allow you to define alarms. The system actives these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits. The calculations use ISO6976 tables for CV and Molar Mass. 1. Select Pure Gas/Air from the hierarchy menu. The Pure Gas/Air
screen displays.
Figure 6-34. Pure Gas/Air screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field/Button Calculation Type
Reference Conditions GAS COMPOSITION Relative Humidity CO2 Content Pressure
Description
Indicates the specific type of Pure Gas or Air calculation the S600+ uses. Click to display all valid values. The default is PURE GAS (VIRIAL EQ).
Pure Gas (Virial Eq)
The S600+ uses a Third Order Virial Equation with derived constants to calculate the virial coefficients.
Air (BIPM 1981/91)
The S600+ uses the BIPM Equation for the Determination of Density of Moist Air (1981/91) by R.S Davies.
Indicates the reference conditions the S600+ uses for the Pure Gas/Air calculation. Click to display all valid values. The default is 15/15 DEG C.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define the gas percentages of the mixture.
Sets the relative humidity for air at base conditions. The default is 0.
Sets the percentage of CO2 content at base conditions. The default is 0.04.
Sets the pressure at base conditions. The default is 0.
6-66
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field/Button Temperature
UPSTREAM PRESSURE
UPSTREAM TEMP
Base Viscosity
Sutherland Constant BASE DENSITY
BASE COMP(Zb)
ISENTROPIC EXPONENT
METER DENSITY
UPSTR COMP(Zf)
FLOWING VISCOSITY
REAL RD
REAL CV
Description Sets the temperature at base conditions. The default is 15.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream pressure.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream temperature.
Sets the base viscosity value the S600+ uses for viscosity calculations. The default is 0.
Sets the Sutherland constant the S600+ uses for viscosity calculations. The default is 0.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the base density
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the base compressibility (Zb).
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the Isentropic exponent.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the meter density.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream compressibility (Zf).
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the flowing viscosity.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the real relative density.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the real calorific value (CV).
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.9 Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588)
Calorific Value (CV) settings define the constants and calculation limits for ideal and real calorific values. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use either the ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588 standard (defined in step 5, Options, of the PCSetup Editor's Configuration Wizard) to calculate the calorific value (heating value) of the gas mixture.
Calorific value settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select Gas CV from the hierarchy menu. The Calorific Value screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-67
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-35. Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588) screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field CV Table
Description
Identifies the specific compressibility value the program uses. Click to display all valid values. The default is ISO6976/1995.
ISO6976/1995 Vol
Calculates CV based on volume, using the 1995 table. This is the default if you choose CV ISO6976 as your initial stream option.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
ISO6976/1995 Calculates CV based on mass,
Mass
using the 1995 table.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
ISO6976/1983 Calculates CV based on volume,
Vol
using the 1983 table.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976. Support for the 1983 table is limited to superior volumetric at 15/15.
6-68
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Field
Reference Condition
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description
ISO6976/2016 Vol
Calculates CV based on volume, using the 2016 table.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
ISO6976/2016 Calculates CV based on mass,
Mass
using the 2016 table.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
GPA/2003 AGA
Calculates CV based on a base press of 14.73 psia. This is the default if you choose CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588 as your initial stream option.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/2003 ISO
Calculates CV based on a base press of 14.696 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172ASTMD3588.
GPA/2000 AGA
Calculates CV based on a base press of 14.73 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172ASTMD3588.
GPA/2000 ISO
Calculates CV based on a base press of 14.696 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172ASTMD3588.
GPA/1996 AGA
Calculates CV based on a base press of 14.73 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172ASTMD3588.
GPA/1996 ISO
Calculates CV based on a base press of 14.696 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172ASTMD3588.
Indicates the t1/t2 value, where t1 is the calculation reference temperature for combustion and t2 is the reference condition for metering. The default is 15/15 DEG C.
Note:
For ISO6976 1983 VOL selection, the 60/60F and 15/15.55 Deg C selections are not supported.
Stream Configuration
6-69
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-70
Field
Method
User Temp T2 User Press P2 Table Revision
BASE COMP(Zb) Composition Type
Description For ISO6976 1995 VOL and MASS selections,
the 60/60F selection refers to a combustion temperature (t1) of 60 Deg F and a metering temperature (t2) of 15 Deg C. The 15/15.55 Deg C selection is not supported.
For ISO6976 2016 VOL and MASS selections, the 60/60F selection refers to a combustion temperature (t1) of 60 Deg F and a metering temperature (t2) of 15 Deg C. The 15/15.55 Deg C selection refers to a combustion temperature (t1) of 15.55 Deg C (60 Deg F) and a metering temperature (t2) of 15.55 Deg C (60 Deg F).
If you select CV ISO6976 in your initial configuration and you select the 1995 standard, you have the choice of Alternative or Definitive methods (using table 4 Mass / table 5 volume) for calculating the ideal, superior, and inferior CV values. This selection is not applicable to the 1983 or 2016 standards.
If you select CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588 in your initial configuration, you have the choice of the Simple (using equation 7 from the GPA2172ASTMD3588-09 standard) or Rigorous (using equations 8 & 9 from the GPA2172-ASTMD358809 standard) methods for calculating the standard compressibility.
Note: This option is valid only for configurations created with Config600 version 3.1 or greater.
Applicable to the ISO6976 2016 VOL and ISO6976 2016 MASS selections. Also applicable to the ISO6976 1995 VOL and ISO6976 1995 MASS selections when the Definitive method is selected.
Note: It may be necessary to add this item to a display so that it can be correctly initialised.
Applicable to the ISO6976 1995 VOL and ISO6976 1995 MASS selections when the Definitive method is selected.
Note: It may be necessary to add this item to a display so that it can be correctly initialised.
This replaces the above AGA and ISO selections in the CV Table field for GPA 2172. You can select the GPA2145 table revision from one of the following:
1996
2000
2003
2009
Note: This option is valid only for configurations created with Config600 version 3.1 or greater.
Click to supply an externally calculated base compressibility from another calculation. The system uses the entered value in GPA2172-ASTMD3588 calculations instead of using its own internally calculated value based on the composition input.
Defines the composition input type. Valid options are:
mass to energy using mole percent
mass to energy using mole fraction
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Description volume to energy using mole percent volume to energy using mole fraction Note: This option is valid only for AGA5
configurations.
3. Click any of the following buttons to define calculation limits for either the ISO6876 or GPA standard.
Button
Description
STD COMP(Zs)
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for standard compressibility (Zs).
IDEAL RD
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for ideal relative density.
IDEAL DENSITY Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for ideal density.
IDEAL CV (SUP)
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for ideal calorific value.
Note:
The superior CV is output to calc field 1 of the CV object and the inferior CV is output to calc field 3. You can select either by the CV object mode from the S600+ front panel.
Gross HV
Click to displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for gross heating value.
Note: This field displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
REAL RD
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for real relative density.
REAL DENSITY Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for real density.
REAL CV (SUP) Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for real calorific value.
Note:
The superior CV is output to calc field 1 of the CV object and the inferior CV is output to calc field 3. You can select either by the CV object mode from the S600+ front panel.
RELA VOL IDEAL HV
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the real volume ideal heating value.
Note: This field displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A
confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.10 SGERG (Compressibility)
SGERG settings define the constants and calculation limits for ideal and real calorific values. This screen displays when you configure the
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-71
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
S600+ to use the SGERG standard to calculate the compressibility of the gas mixture. SGERG settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits. 1. Select SGERG from the hierarchy menu. The SGERG screen
displays.
Figure 6-36. SGERG (Compressibility) screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Type
Description
Indicates the specific type of SGERG calculation the S600+ uses. Click to display all valid values.
SGERG CV/RD/CO2
Calculate SGERG from calorific value, relative density, and CO2. This is the default.
SGERG
Calculate SGERG from calorific
CV/RD/CO2/H2 value, relative density, CO2, and
hydrogen.
ISO CV/RD/CO2
Calculate ISO 12213-3 from calorific value, relative density, and CO2.
6-72
ISO CV/RD/CO2/H2
SGERG CV/CO2/N2 SGERG CV/CO2/N2/H2 GOST BD/CO2/N2
Calculate ISO 12213-3 from calorific value, relative density, CO2, and hydrogen.
Calculate SGERG from calorific value, CO2, and nitrogen.
Calculate SGERG from calorific value, CO2, nitrogen, and hydrogen.
Calculate GOST from base density, CO2, and nitrogen.
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Pressure Temperature Inputs Limit Check
Description
SGERG CV/RD/N2
Calculate SGERG from calorific value, relative density, and nitrogen.
SGERG CV/RD/N2/H2
Calculate SGERG from calorific value, relative density, nitrogen, and hydrogen.
SGERG RD/CO2/N2
Calculate SGERG from relative density, CO2, and nitrogen.
SGERG
Calculate SGERG from relative
RD/CO2/N2/H2 density, CO2, nitrogen, and
hydrogen.
Sets the pressure the S600+ uses to calculate compressibility at base conditions. The default is 0.
Sets the temperature the S600+ uses to calculate compressibility at base conditions. The default is 15.
Performs limit checking on the inputs. The default is checked (limit checking occurs).
3. Click any of the following buttons to define SGERG miscellaneous values and calculation limits.
Button RELATIVE DENSITY (SG)
SUPERIOR CV (25/0)
METER PRES
METER TEMP
DENSITY PRESS (P2) BASE COMP(Zb) STD COMP(Zs)
BASE DENSITY
UPSTR DENSITY UPSTR COMP(Zf) DENSITY COMP(Zd)
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the relative density.
Note: Relative density is assumed to be at reference 0°C.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the calculated calorific value.
Note: Calorific value is assumed to be 25/0.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream meter pressure.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream meter temperature.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the density pressure (P2).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the base compressibility (Zb).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the standard compressibility (Zs).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the calculated base density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream compressibility factor.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the densitometer compressibility.
Stream Configuration
6-73
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.11 NX19 (Compressibility)
NX19 settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters including pressure, temperature, density, and compressibility factors. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the NX19 standard to calculate base compressibility and density, standard compressibility, flowing compressibility and density, and compressibility at density conditions. NX19 settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits. 1. Select NX19 from the hierarchy menu.
Figure 6-37. NX19 (Compressibility) screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field UPSTREAM PRESSURE
Pseudo Critical
UPSTREAM TEMPERATURE
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream pressure.
Sets the pseudo-critical limits for pressure. The default is 673.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream temperature.
Note: This button displays only if you select the NX19 UPSTR component.
6-74
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Pseudo Critical Calculation Type
SG/RD
DENSITY PRESS (P2) DENSITY TEMP (T3) UPSTR COMP (Zf) DENSITY COMP (Zd) UPSTREAM DENSITY BASE COMP(Zb) STD COMP(Zs)
Description
Sets the pseudo-critical limits for temperature. The default is 344.
Indicates the calculation type the S600+ uses for the specific gravity/relative density calculation. Click to display all valid values.
1962
Use AGA manual, December 1962 to determine supercompressibility factor for natural gas. Assumes
reference conditions at 60° F.
MODIFIED
Use NX-19 (Mod). Assumes
reference condition at 0° C. This is the default.
VDI/VDE 2040 Use VDI/VDE 2040. Assumes
reference condition at 0° C.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the specific gravity/relative density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the density pressure (P2).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the density temperature (T3).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream compressibility factor.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the densitometer compressibility.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream compressibility.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for standard compressibility.
Note: This button displays only if you select the NX19 STND component.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.12 PTZ (Compressibility)
PTZ settings take the pressure, temperature, and calculated values from the NX19 compressibility calculations to calculate an upstream density. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the PTZ calculation and is supported only by older configurations.
PTZ settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-75
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1. Select PTZ from the hierarchy menu. The PTZ screen displays.
Figure 6-38. PTZ (Compressibility) screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Pressure Temperature STD COMP(Zs)
BASE DENSITY
UPSTREAM PRESSURE
UPSTREAM TEMP
UPSTR COMP(Zf)
UPSTREAM DENSITY
Description Sets pressure at base conditions. The default is 0.
Sets temperature at base conditions. The default is 15.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the standard compressibility (Zs).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the base density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream pressure.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream temperature.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream compressibility (Zf).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream density.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6-76
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6.4.13 AGA3 (Volume or Mass Flowrate)
AGA3 settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters including pressure, temperature, density, and compressibility factors. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the AGA3 standard to calculate gas flow through the orifice meter.
AGA3 settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
You select the AGA3 Volume or AGA3 Mass calculations during the PCSetup Editor's Configuration Wizard because the choice affect the totalisation configuration.
1. Select AGA3 from the hierarchy menu. The AGA3 screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-39. AGA3 (Volume Flowrate) screen
2. Complete the following Inputs fields.
Field Calc Type DP Cell Type
ISENTROPIC EXPONENT VISCOSITY
UPSTR PRESS
UPSTR DENSITY
Description This read-only field shows the basis (volume or mass) for the AGA3 calculation.
Indicates the position of the differential pressure taps on the metering assembly. Click to display all valid values. The default is FLANGE.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the isentropic exponent.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for viscosity.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream pressure.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream density.
Stream Configuration
6-77
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field RSMT Dish Calib Factor
UPSTR TEMP
RELATIVE DENSITY (SG)
Description Indicates the discharge coefficient calibration factor for the Rosemount 1595 conditioning orifice plate.
Note: This field displays only if you select the AGA3 RSMT 1595 Calculation Version.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream temperature.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the relative density.
3. Enter the base pressure under standard conditions.
4. Enter the base temperature under standard conditions.
5. Click any of the following buttons to define AGA3 calculation limits.
Button CVOL FLOWRATE EXP FACTOR
VEL OF APP FACTOR
UVOL FLOWRATE BETA
DISCHARGE COEFF FLOW EXTENSION
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the corrected volume flowrate.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the expansion factor.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the velocity of approach factor.
Note:
This is a mathematical expression that relates the velocity of flowing fluid in the orifice meter house to the velocity in the orifice plate bore.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the uncorrected volume flowrate.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the calculated diameter ratio.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the calculated orifice plate coefficient of discharge.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the flow extension.
6. Select a calculation option.
Field Calculation Version
Expansion Factor
Description
Sets the version of calculation. Click to display all valid values. The default is AGA3-1992.
Displays options for calculating the fluid expansion
factor. Click to display all valid versions.
GAS
Use the expansion factor formula as
ORIFICE defined by calculation you select in the
Calculation Version field. This is the
default.
LIQUID ORIFICE
Use an Expansion Factor = 1.0 (no expansion).
6-78
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Limit Check
Description
Enables limit checking associated with the pipe diameter values, orifice diameter values, and the beta ratio. The default is On; select this field to disable limit checking.
7. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A
confirmation dialog box displays.
8. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.14 Stream Gas Composition
Stream Gas Composition settings define the processing and port telemetry parameters for streams receiving data from the gas chromatograph controller. The chromatograph controller measures the individual component concentrations found in the line gas. The chromatograph controller settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the chromatograph data are not within specified limits.
1. Select Gas Composition from the hierarchy menu. The Gas Composition screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-40. Gas Composition screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Type
Description
Indicates the chromatograph configuration. Click to display all valid values.
CHROMAT A Controller-connected; uses keypad data as fallback information.
KP ONLY
Not controller-connected; uses information entered via keypad. This is the default.
Note: If you select KP ONLY, the system hides a number of fields on this screen.
Stream Configuration
6-79
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Initial Mode
Acceptance Type
Station Number Apply Splits
MOLE SPLITS
Revert to Last Good after Failure Check Critical Alarms
Check Non Critical Alarms
Description
Indicates the operational mode for the in-use composition data. Click to display all valid values.
KEYPAD
Use data entered via keypad. This is the default.
CHROMAT
Use live data from the chromatograph controller.
DOWNLOAD
Download gas composition data directly to each stream. Used only if connected to a remote supervisory computer.
USER
Use customised program for gas composition in S600+.
KEYPAD_F
Start by using keypad-entered data then switch to chromatograph data when a good analysis is received.
Indicates how the S600+ manages in-use data. Click to display all valid values.
ACC/COPY
Copy and normalise keypad data to in-use data only after it is accepted. This is the default.
ACC/NORM
Copy normalised keypad data to inuse data after it is accepted.
AUTO/NORM Automatically copy normalised keypad data to in-use data.
Sets the station associated with this stream. The default is 1.
Indicates the type of analyser connected to the S600+. For a C6+ analyser, use the C6Plus option. Click to display all valid values. The default is NO SPLITS.
If you select any value other than NO SPLITS, the system displays the MOLE SPLITS button. Use it to define the specific percentage splits for the gases.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Click to display a Gas Composition dialog box you use to indicate the mole splits for hexane, heptane, octane, nonane, and decane.
Note: This button displays only if you select any value other than NO SPLITS in the Apply Splits field.
Continues using the last good composition in the event of failure. Otherwise the system reverts to keypad data.
Marks the received composition as failed if any critical alarm is set (such as the pre-amp fail on the Danalyzer for a Daniel 2551 Controller).
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Marks the received composition as failed if any noncritical alarm is set (such as the pre-amp fail on the Danalyzer for a Daniel 2551 Controller).
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
6-80
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field CHROMAT COMMS Initial Mode Type
MOLE ORDER
Address Stream
Description
Click to display the Comm screen in I/O Setup (see Chapter 4, Section 4.10).
Identifies the chromatograph and any fallback controllers. Currently, the only valid value is PAY, which indicates one chromatograph and no fallback controller.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Indicates the type of chromatograph controller. Click to display all valid values.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
2551 EURO
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2551 (European) controller. This is the default.
2350 EURO
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2350 (European) controller set in SIM_2251 mode.
2350 USA
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2350 (USA) controller set in SIM_2251 mode.
2251 USA
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2251 controller.
Generic
S600+ is connected to another type of controller.
Siemens
S600+ is connected to a Siemens Advance Maxum via a Siemens Network Access Unit (NAU).
Click this button to display a dialog box on which you indicate the order in which the gas composition information comes into the S600+ via telemetry. 0 indicates any component which is not included in the Modbus map.
Note:
The Modbus map you create must be compatible with the controller to which the S600+ is connected. Refer to Chapter 14, Modbus Editor, for further information.
This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
This field is applicable only if you select Siemens or Generic in the Type field.
Configures multi-drop chromatograph support. Do not change unless advised to do so.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Sets the chromat analysis stream assigned to this metering stream. The default is 0.
Note:
This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type. If you need to support more than one stream, contact Technical Support.
Stream Configuration
6-81
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Analysis Timeout
Download Timeout
KEYPAD MOLES
MOLE ADDITIONAL
USER MOLES
Check Limits
Description
Sets the maximum number of seconds the S600+ waits to receive a new composition from the chromatograph controller before raising an alarm. The default is 900.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Sets the maximum number of minutes the S600+ waits to receive a new composition from the supervisory computer before raising a DL Timeout Alarm. The default is 15.
Note:
A value of 0 disables the timeout.
This field displays only if you select KP ONLY in the Common Type field.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for each gas component.
Note:
The system assumes the keypad composition adds to 100% (normalised) when the Acceptance Type is ACC/COPY. If you select ACC/NORM or AUTO/NORM, the system automatically normalises the keypad composition.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for gas components not analysed by the Danalyzer. The system assumes any additional components to be normalised values, and the analyser components are re-normalized (100 sum of additional components).
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for each gas component. The system assumes user moles to be normalised.
Note:
The S600+ uses these values only if you set the Initial Mode to USER. A Modbus download from another computer may overwrite these values on a running configuration.
Enables limit checking on each gas component. When you select this check box, the MOLE LO LIMITS and MOLE HI LIMITS buttons display.
6-82
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field MOLE LO LIMITS
MOLE HI LIMITS Check Deviations
MOLE DEVN LIMITS
Description
Click to display a dialog box you use to define low mole percentage limit values for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
Note:
The system uses the values you enter through these buttons only if you select the Check Limits check box. The system applies this test to the keypad, downloaded, user, additionals, and new analysis components. When enabled, the system applies the limit check against the high and low limits. Limits are considered valid if the limit is greater than zero (0). The system also applies the check to the Total field. If you disable the limit check, the keypad, downloaded and user Total field must lie within 0.1% and 150%. A sum of the new analysis must be within 99.5% and 100.5%.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define high mole percentage limit values for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
Note: See note in description of Mole Lo Limits field.
Enables checking on the deviation from the last good analysis for each component. When you select this check box, the MOLE DEVN LIMITS button displays.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define the maximum deviation allowed for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.15 Z Steam (Compressibility)
This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the Steam standards to calculate flowing density and flowing enthalpy for steam. The compressibility settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the device calculates results that are not within the limits you configure.
Note: The S600+ only supports-mass based CV units
1. Select Steam from the hierarchy menu. The Z Steam screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-83
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-41. Z Steam (Compressibility) screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Type Phase Option
UPSTREAM PRESS UPSTREAM TEMP
Description
Indicates the compressibility method. Click to display all valid values. Available calculation methods are IFC 1967 and IAPWS-IF97.
Indicates the phase calculation method. Click to display all valid values.
Note: This option is available only if you select IAPWS-IF97 in the Type field.
AUTO
The S600+ automatically selects the region to use based on the temperature and pressure inputs. This is the default.
STEAM
The S600+ uses Region 2 for calculations and raises an alarm if this is not possible
WATER
The S600+ uses Region 1 for calculations and raises an alarm if this is not possible
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream pressure.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream temperature.
6-84
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field METER DENSITY
ENTHALPY(H)
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the meter density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for enthalpy(H).
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.16 GOST CV
Calorific Value settings define the composition type, table to be used, and calculation limits for a range of parameters including density, relative density, and calorific value. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the GOST 30319.1-96 Section 7 standards to calculate the calorific value (heating value) of the gas mixture.
The GOST CV settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the chromatograph data are not within specified limits.
1. Select Gost CV from the hierarchy menu. The GOST CV screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-42. GOST CV screen
2. Click any of the following buttons to define GOST CV settings.
Button INUSE COMP
BASE DENSITY
Description Click to display a dialog box you use to define the specific percentages for all components of the gas mixture.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you
Stream Configuration
6-85
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button (RHOc)
COMBUSION HEAT (Hcb)
COMBUSION HEAT (Hch)
Description use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the base density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for superior CV.
Note: This is the Superior Calorific value.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for inferior CV.
Note: This is the Inferior Calorific value.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.17 GOST Flow
GOST flow settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters including pressure, density, flow coefficient, and pressure loss. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the GOST 8563 standard to calculate gas flow through the orifice meter.
The GOST Flow settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within specified limits.
1. Select Gost Flow from the hierarchy menu. The GOST Flow screen displays.
6-86
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-43. GOST Flow screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Calculation Version
Expansion Factor
Limit Check
Description
Indicates the version of the GOST calculation the S600+ uses. Click to display all valid values.
GOST8586 The S600+ uses GOST 8.586-05 for
05
the flow rate calculation. This is the
default.
GOST8563 The S600+ uses GOST 8.563.2-97 for
97
the flow rate calculation
GOST8586 RSMT1595
The S600+ uses GOST 8.586-05 for the flow rate calculation with the specific discharge coefficient equations for the Rosemount 1595 Conditioning Orifice Plate
Displays options for calculating the fluid expansion factor. Click to display all valid versions.
GAS ORIFICE
Use the expansion factor formula as defined by calculation you select in the Calculation Version field. This is the default.
LIQUID ORIFICE
Use an Expansion Factor = 1.0 (no expansion).
Activates calculation limit checking. Click to display all valid values. The default is ON.
Note: If you activate limit checking, GOST validates the calculation inputs and outputs in accordance with section GOST 8.563.1 97.
Stream Configuration
6-87
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Tap Type
VISCOSITY
ISENTROPIC EXPONENT RSMT Dish Calib Factor
Inlet Edge Radius
Int Pipe Roughness
Inspection Period
UPSTREAM PRESSURE UPSTREAM DENSITY DOWNSTREAM PRESSURE
Description Indicates the position of the differential pressure tap on the metering assembly. Click to display all valid values. The default is FLANGE.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for viscosity.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the Isentropic exponent.
Indicates the discharge coefficient calibration factor added for the Rosemount 1595 conditioning orifice plate.
Note: This field displays only if you select RSMT1595-2003 as the Calculation Version.
Sets the radius of the inlet edge. The default is 0.05.
Note: The program uses this value as part of the orifice dulling correction calculation.
Sets the pipe roughness factor. The default is 0.01.
Note: The program uses this value as part of the roughness coefficient factor.
Sets, in whole non-fractional years, the inspection period (or calibration span) for the inlet edge radius used in the calculation of the orifice dulling correction coefficient. The default is 1.
Note: You must enter a whole number. Fractions are not allowed.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream pressure.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for downstream pressure.
3. Click any of the following buttons to define GOST flow calculation results limits.
Button MASS FLOWRATE
PRESSURE LOSS
BETA
REYNOLDS NUMBER
EXPANSION FACTOR
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the mass flowrate.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for pressure loss.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the calculated diameter ratio.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the Reynolds number.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the expansion factor.
6-88
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button DISCHARGE COEFF
FLOW COEFFICIENT
VEL OF APPROACH FAC
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the discharge coefficient.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the flow coefficient.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the velocity of approach factor.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.18 Gas Properties
Gas properties settings define methods the system uses to calculate viscosity, isentropic exponent (also known as "specific heat ratio" or "adiobatic exponent"), and the velocity of sound.
These settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select Gas Properties from the hierarchy menu. The Gas Properties screen displays.
Figure 6-44. Gas Properties screen
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-89
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Viscosity @ Tn Viscosity Tn Sutherland Constant Viscosity Calc Type
Isentropic Exponent
Description
Sets the reference viscosity for the gas. The default is 0.010861.
Note: Used only by VDI/VDE.
Sets the reference viscosity temperature for the gas. The default is 15.
Note Used only by VDI/VDE.
Sets the Sutherland constant for the gas. The default is 164.
Note Used only by VDI/VDE.
Indicates the method for calculating the viscosity of the gas. Click to display all valid values.
Disabled
Value not calculated; defaults to keypad-entered value. This is the default.
SGERG GOST Uses calculations from GOST 30139-2015 30139-2015. Requires base
density, N2, and CO2 inputs.
VDI/VDE 2040 1987
Uses calculations from VDI/VDE 2040 Part 2 1987. Requires viscosity @Tn, viscosity Tn, and Sutherland Constant inputs.
VNIC GOST 30319-2015
Uses calculations from GOST 30319-2015. Requires full gas composition input.
Indicates the method for calculating the isentropic exponent of the gas. Click to display all valid values.
AGA10 2003
Uses calculations from AGA10 2003. Requires full gas composition input.
Disabled
Value not calculated; defaults to keypad-entered value. This is the default.
GRI 1991
Uses calculations from GRI 1991. Requires full gas composition input.
SGERG GOST Uses calculations from GOST 30139-2015 30139-2015. Requires Base
Density, N2 and CO2 inputs.
VNIC GOST 30319-2015
Uses calculations from GOST 30319-2015. Requires full gas composition input.
6-90
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Speed of Sound
Description
Indicates the method for calculating the speed of sound. Click to display all valid values.
AGA10 2003
Uses calculations from AGA10 2003. Requires full gas composition input.
Disabled
Value not calculated; defaults to keypad-entered value. This is the default.
GRI 1991
Uses calculations from GRI 1991. Requires full gas composition input.
SGERG GOST Uses calculations from GOST 30139-2015 30139-2015. Requires Base
Density, N2 and CO2 inputs.
VNIC GOST 30319-2015
Uses calculations from GOST 30319-2015. Requires full gas composition input.
3. Click any of the following buttons to set gas property outputs or variables.
Button VISCOSITY
VOS
ISENTROPIC EXPONENT UPSTREAM PRESS
BASE DENSITY
UPSTREAM TEMP
INUSE COMPOSITION
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for viscosity.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the velocity of sound (VOS).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the isentropic exponent.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream pressure.
Note: This button may be disabled on some applications.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream temperature.
Note: This button may be disabled on some applications.
Click to display a read-only table of gas compositions. This corresponds to the table defined using the Gas Composition screen's KEYPAD MOLES button.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.4.19 DP Cell Input Conditioning
Differential pressure (or DP) Cell Input Conditioning settings define how the S600+ sequences (or "stacks") input cell information and sets calculation limits for differential pressure measurements.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-91
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
These settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
Cell Input The Stack Type you select on the DP Cell Input Conditioning screen Stacking (see Figure 6-67) defines how the S600+ sequences (or "stacks")
differential pressure values. DP stack handling enables you to mark each input cell as available under either of the following conditions: Not available when the value is under-range, over-range, in
Keypad mode, or in a Failed mode (for example, Keypad-F).
Available when the value is within the low and high fail limits of the analog input or in Measured mode.
The S600+ determines the value to use based on the stack types you select, which include:
Single Lo-Hi Hi Hi Lo Mid Hi Lo Hi Hi 3 Identical
The switch up / switch down percentages are always calculated based on the cell scaling - irrespective of any analogue conversion selection that has been configured.
Additionally, enhanced error checking (an option you also select on the DP Cell Input Conditioning screen) provides another stacking criteria.
Note: If you select Imperial units, enhanced error checking is disabled by default. If you select metric units, enhanced error checking is enabled by default.
The stack type, along with enhanced error checking, result in the following.
Single Select Single when you connect to only a single input cell. This is the default input stack value. If you enable enhanced error checking and the input cell is available, the S600+ uses its value. If the cell is unavailable, the S600+ uses the value you define in the DP Keypad field.
If you disable enhanced error checking, the S600+ uses the single cell's In-Use value, regardless of operating mode, low or high fail limits, or whether the input cell is available.
Lo-Hi Select Lo Hi when you connect two cells in a tier. If you enable enhanced error checking, the S600+ first checks both cells to ensure they are either within the low and high fail limits of the analog input or in Measured mode. It then proceeds to perform cell selection.
The cell selector compares the DP values returned from both cells and changes range when one of the following occurs:
6-92
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
o When using the Lo Cell, the DP value returned from the Lo Cell is greater than the switch up percentage of the Lo Cell range.
o When using the Hi Cell, the DP value returned from the Hi Cell is less than the switch down percentage of the Lo Cell range.
To avoid too much switching between ranges, define switch-up and switch-down percentage values using the Up and Down fields in the DP Cell Input Condition screen's Switching Points pane. The S600+ uses the difference between the switch-up and switch-down percentage as hysteresis. The normal value used is 5% hysteresis.
For example, the Lo Cell = 0250 mbar and the Hi Cell = 0500 mbar. If you define a Up value of 95 and a Down value of 90, then the difference is 5%.
If the low range is in use and the differential pressure is rising, the S600+ continues to use this range until it reaches point A (237.5 mbar). At that point, the S600+ switches to the high range, point B (see Figure 6-45).
If the high range is in use and the differential pressure is falling, the S600+ continues to use this range until it reaches point C (225.0 mbar). At that point, the S600+ switches to the low range, point D (see Figure 6-45).
Figure 6-46 provides a flowchart of Lo Hi input cell handling.
22
20
Low Cell
A
Hi Cell
18 D
16
14
12
10
CB
8
6
4
2
0
250
500
750
Differential Pressure (mbar)
1000
Figure 6-45. Lo Hi Cell Input Handling
Transducer Current (mA)
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-93
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Enter
Is Lo Cell Available No Yes
Is Hi Cell Available No Yes
Fail to DP Stack
Keypad Value
Use Hi Cell
Is Hi Cell Available No
Use Lo Cell
Yes
Is Lo Cell Currently In No Use
Yes Is Hi Cell Currently In Yes Use
No
Is Lo Cell < Lo Cell
Switch Up AND Hi Cell Yes
< Hi Cell Switch Down
Is Lo Cell > Lo Cell Switch Up AND Hi Cell
Yes
No
> Hi Cell Switch Down
No
Use Lo Cell
Use Lo Cell Use Hi Cell
If DP Value < 0, Use 0
Exit
Figure 6-46. Lo Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart
If you disable enhanced error checking, the S600+ automatically uses the value of the In-Use cell (the one currently selected by the switch-up or switch-down criterion). The switch-up and switchdown points are based on the lower of the two available cells. The cells are always available for selection, regardless of their operating mode.
For example, if cell 1 is above its switch-up point, the stack switches up to cell 2, regardless of cell 2's value.
Hi-Hi Select Hi Hi when you connect two cells, both of which are ranged to the same values and working in Duty-Standby mode. S600+ designates the cell currently being used as the "In Use" cell. If you enable enhanced error checking, the S600+ first checks both cells to ensure they are within the low and high fail limits of the analog input or in Measured mode and that there are no discrepancies between the Hi(1) and Hi(2) cells.
o If the Hi(1) range is in use, the S600+ continues to use the Hi(1) range unless it becomes unavailable. At that point, the S600+ switches to the Hi(2) cell.
o If the Hi(2) range is in use, the S600+ continue to use the Hi(2) range unless it becomes unavailable. At that point, the S600+switches to the Hi(1) cell.
o If neither cell is available, the S600+ uses the defined DP Stack Keypad value and raises an alarm.
6-94
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
If you disable enhanced error checking, the S600+ uses the selected cell's In-Use value, regardless of operating mode or low or high fail limits.
Figure 6-47 shows Hi Hi cell handling.
Enter
Yes Is Hi(1) Cell In Use
No
Yes Is Hi(2) Cell In Use
No
Yes Is Hi(1) Cell Available
No Yes
Is Hi(2) Cell Available No
Yes Is Hi(2) Cell Available
No Yes
Is Hi(1) Cell Available No
Yes Is Hi(1) Cell Available
No Yes
Is Hi(2) Cell Available
No
Use Hi(1) Cell
Use Hi(2) Cell Fail to DP Stack
Keypad Value
Use Hi(2) Cell
Use Hi(1) Cell Fail to DP Stack
Keypad Value
Use Hi(1) Cell
Use Hi(2) Cell Fail to DP Stack
Keypad Value
If DP Value < 0, Use 0
Exit
Figure 6-47. Hi Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart
Lo-Mid-Hi Cell Select Lo Mid Hi when you connect three cells in a tier. If you enable enhanced error checking, the S600+ designates the cell currently being used as the "In Use" cell. The S600+ also checks for sustained discrepancies between:
o Lo Cell and Mid Cell
o Lo Cell and Hi Cell
o Mid Cell and Hi Cell.
The cell selector compares the DP values returned from all three cells and changes range when one of the following occurs: When using the Lo Cell, the DP value returned from the Lo
Cell is greater than the switch up percentage of the Lo Cell range. When using the Mid Cell, the DP value returned from the Mid Cell is greater than the switch up percentage of the Mid Cell range.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-95
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
When using the Mid Cell, the DP value returned from the Mid Cell is less than the switch down percentage of the Lo Cell range.
When using the Hi Cell, the DP value returned from the Hi Cell is less than the switch down percentage of the Mid Cell range.
To avoid too much switching between ranges, define switch up and switch down percentage values using the Up and Down fields in the DP Cell Input Condition screen's Switching Points pane. The S600+ uses the difference between the switch up and switch down percentage as hysteresis. The normal value used is 5% hysteresis.
For example, the Lo Cell = 0250 mbar and the Hi Cell = 0500 mbar. If you define an Up value of 95 and a Down value of 90, then the difference is 5%.
See Figure 6-48 for a graphical presentation of the following usage situation.
If the low range is in use and the differential pressure is rising, the S600+ continues to use this range until it reaches point A (237.5 mbar). At that point, the S600+ switches to the mid range, point B.
If the mid range is in use and the differential pressure is still rising, the S600+ continues to use this range until it reaches point E (475.0 mbar). At that point, the S600+ switches to the high range, point F.
If the high range is in use and the differential pressure is falling, the S600+ continues to use this range until it reaches point H (450.0 mbar). At that point, the S600+ switches to the mid range, point G.
If the mid range is in use and the differential pressure is still falling, the S600+ continues to use this range until it reaches point C (225.0 mbar). At that point, the S600+ switches to the low range, point D.
22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0
6-96
Transducer Current (mA)
A D
Low Cell
E G
Mid Cell
CB
HF
Hi Cell
250
500
750
Differential Pressure (mbar)
Figure 6-48. Lo Mid Hi Cell Input Handling
Stream Configuration
1000 Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-49 through Figure 6-52 provide flowcharts showing how the S600+ handles this.
Enter
Is Lo Cell Yes In Use
No
Is Lo Cell No Available
Yes
Is Mid Cell No Available
Yes
Is Mid Cell Yes In Use
No
Is Mid Cell No Available
Yes
Is Lo Cell No Available
Yes
Is Hi Cell Yes In Use
No
Is Hi Cell No Available
Yes
Is Mid Cell No Available
Yes
Is Lo Cell Yes Available
No
Is Mid Cell Yes Available
No
Is Hi Cell Yes Available
No
Fail to DP Stack Keypad Value
Is Hi Cell No Available
Yes
Is Hi Cell No Available
Yes
Is Lo Cell No Available
Yes
Fail to DP Stack Keypad Value
3 2 1
Fail to DP Stack Keypad Value
3 1 2
Fail to DP Stack Keypad Value
1 2 3
1
2
3
If DP Value < 0, Use 0
Exit
Figure 6-49. Lo Mid Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart (1)
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-97
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1
Enter
No Is Lo Cell > Switch Up
Yes
Is Mid Cell Available Yes AND
Is Mid Cell > Switch Down No
Is Hi Cell Available Yes AND
Is Mid Cell > Switch Down No
Use Lo Cell
Use Mid Cell
Use Hi Cell
Use Mid Cell
Return
Figure 6-50. Lo Mid Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart (2)
2 Enter
No Is Mid Cell < Switch Down
Yes
Is Lo Cell Available Yes AND
Is Lo Cell < Switch Up No
No Is Mid Cell > Switch Up
Yes
Is Hi Cell Available
AND
Yes
Is Hi Cell > Switch Down
No
Use Mid Cell
Use Hi Cell
Use Mid Cell
Use Lo Cell
Use Mid Cell
Return
Figure 6-51. Lo Mid Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart (3)
6-98
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
3
Enter
No Is Hi Cell < Switch Down
Yes
Is Mid Cell Available Yes AND
Is Mid Cell < Switch Up No
Is Lo Cell Available Yes AND
Is Lo Cell < Switch Up No
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Use Hi Cell
Use Mid Cell
Use Lo Cell
Use Hi Cell
Return
Figure 6-52. Lo Mid Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart (4)
If you disable enhanced error checking, the S600+ automatically uses the value of the In-Use cell (the one currently selected by the switch-up or switch-down criterion). The switch-up and switchdown points are based on the lowest of the three available cells. The cells are always available for selection, regardless of their operating mode.
For example, if cell 2 is above its switch-up point, the stack switches up to cell 3, regardless of the value of cell 3.
Lo-Hi-Hi Select Lo Hi Hi when you connect three cells, two of which are ranged to the same value and work in a tier, but the Hi cells are working in Duty-Standby mode. S600+ designates the cell currently being used as the "In Use" cell. The S600+ also checks for sustained discrepancies between the Lo cell and the Hi(1) cell, the Lo cell and the Hi(2) cell, and the Hi(1) cell and the Hi(2) cell. If you enable enhanced error checking, the cells must be within the low and high fail limits of the analog input or in Measured mode.
If you disable enhanced error checking, the S600+ automatically uses the value of the In-Use cell (the cell currently selected by the switch-up or switch-down criterion). The switch-up and switchdown points are based on the lowest of the three available cells. The cells are always available for selection, regardless of the low and high fail limits and their operating mode.
The cell selector compares the DP values returned from all three cells and changes range when one of the following occurs:
o When using the Lo Cell, the DP value returned from the Lo Cell is greater than the switch-up percentage of the Lo Cell range.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-99
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0
6-100
Transducer Current (mA)
o When using the Hi(1) Cell, the DP value returned from the Hi(1) Cell is less than the switch-down percentage of the Lo Cell range.
o When using the Hi(2) Cell, the DP value returned from the Hi(2) Cell is less than the switch-down percentage of the Lo Cell range.
o When using the Lo Cell, the cell becomes unavailable.
o When using the Hi(1) Cell, the cell becomes unavailable.
o When using the Hi(2) Cell, the cell becomes unavailable.
To avoid too much switching between ranges, define switch-up and switch-down percentage values using the Up and Down fields in the DP Cell Input Conditioning screen's Switching Points pane. The S600+ uses the difference between the switch-up and switchdown percentage as hysteresis. The normal value used is 5% hysteresis.
For example, the Lo Cell = 0250 mbar and the Hi Cell = 0500 mbar. If you define a Up value of 95 and a Down value of 90, then the difference is 5%.
See Figure 6-53 for a graphical presentation of the following usage situation.
If the low range is in use and the differential pressure is rising, the S600+ continues to use this range until it reaches point A (237.5 mbar). At that point, the S600+ switches to the Hi(1) or Hi(2) range, point B.
If the Hi(1) or Hi(2) range is in use and the differential pressure is still falling, the S600+ continues to use this range until it reaches point C (225.0 mbar). At that point, the S600+ switches to the low range, point D.
A D
Low Cell
Hi Cell 1
Hi Cell 2
CB
250
500
750
1000
Differential Pressure (mbar)
Figure 6-53. Lo Hi Hi Cell Input Handling
Figure 6-54 through Figure 6-57 provide flowcharts illustrating how the S600+ handles this.
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Enter
Is Lo Cell Yes In Use
No
Is Lo Cell No Available
Yes
Is Hi(1) CellYes Is Hi(1) Cell No
In Use
Available
No
Yes
Is Hi(2) CellYes Is Hi(2) Cell No
In Use
Available
No
Yes
Is Lo Cell Yes Available
No
Is Hi(1) Cell Yes Available No
Is Hi(2) Cell Yes Available No
Fail to DP Stack Keypad Value
Is Hi(1) Cell No Available Yes
Is Lo Cell No Available
Yes
Is Lo Cell No Available
Yes
Is Hi(2) Cell No Available Yes
Is Hi(2) Cell No Available Yes
Is Hi(1) Cell No Available Yes
Fail to DP Stack Keypad Value
3 2 1
Fail to DP Stack Keypad Value
3 1 2
Fail to DP Stack Keypad Value
2 1 3
1
2
3
If DP Value < 0, Use 0
Exit
Figure 6-54. Lo Hi Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart (1)
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-101
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1
Enter
No Is Lo Cell > Switch Up
Yes
Is Hi(1) Cell Available Yes AND
Is Hi(1) Cell > Switch Down No
Is Hi(2) Cell Available Yes AND
Is Hi(2) Cell > Switch Down No
Use Lo Cell
Use Hi(1) Cell
Use Hi(2) Cell
Use Lo Cell
Return
Figure 6-55. Lo Hi Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart (2)
2
Enter
No Is Hi(1) Cell < Switch Down
Yes
Is Lo Cell Available Yes AND
Is Lo Cell < Switch Up No
Use Hi(1) Cell
Use Lo Cell
Use Hi(1) Cell
Return
Figure 6-56. Lo Hi Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart (3)
6-102
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
3
Enter
No Is Hi(2) Cell < Switch Down
Yes
Is Lo Cell Available Yes AND
Is Lo Cell < Switch Up No
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Use Hi(2) Cell
Use Lo Cell
Use Hi(2) Cell
Return
Figure 6-57. Lo Hi Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart (4)
3 Identical The 3 Identical cell arrangement uses a voting scheme to select which cells are to be averaged to yield the stack's DP value.
Note: The mode is supported only when you enable enhanced error checking.
If all three cells are available, the S600+ uses the instantaneous results from discrepancy checking to determine which cells are within tolerance of each other (where " =" means "within discrepancy limits" and "" means "not within discrepancy limits"): If all are within tolerance, then use the average of the three.
If only two cells are outside tolerance (for example, cell1 = cell2, cell1 = cell3, cell2 cell3), then choose the pair with the smallest difference and take their average.
If only two cells are within tolerance (for example, cell1 = cell2, cell1 cell3, cell2 cell3), then choose this pair and take their average.
If all three cells are outside the discrepancy limits, select the middle cell.
If only two cells are available, then take their average.
If only one cell is available, then use it.
Figure 6-58 through Figure 6-66 provide flowcharts showing how the S600+ handles this scheme.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-103
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Enter
Check Discrepancies between available cells
(active or expired)
In the decision and notes boxes; '=' means within discrepancy limits, '' means outside discrepancy limits
Are all 3 Cells Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Available
Hi(1) = Hi(2)
Hi(1) = Hi(3)
Hi(2) = Hi(3)
1
No
No
No
No
2
Yes
Hi(2) = Hi(3)
3
No
4
Yes
Yes
Hi(1) = Hi(3)
Hi(2) = Hi(3)
5
No
No
6
Yes
Hi(2) = Hi(3)
7
No
8
Are Hi(1) AND HI(2) Yes Cells Available No
Are Hi(1) AND HI(3) Yes Cells Available No
Are Hi(2) AND HI(3) Yes Cells Available No
Is Hi(1) Cell Yes Available No
Is Hi(2) Cell Yes Available No
Is Hi(3) Cell Yes Available No
DP= [Hi(1) + Hi(2)] / 2 DP= [Hi(1) + Hi(3)] / 2 DP= [Hi(2) + Hi(3)] / 2
DP = Hi(1) Cell DP = Hi(2) Cell DP = Hi(3) Cell
Fail to DP Stack Keypad Value
If DP Value < 0, Use 0
Exit
Figure 6-58. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (1)
6-104
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1
Enter
DP = [Hi(1) + Hi(2) + Hi(3)] / 3
Note :All Cells Agree
Return
Figure 6-59. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (2)
2
Enter
Difference (Hi(1), Hi(3)) <
Difference (Hi(1), Hi(2)) No
DP = [Hi(1) + Hi(2)] / 2
Yes DP = [Hi(1) + Hi(3)] / 2
Return
Note :Hi(1) = Hi(2) Hi(1) = Hi(3) Hi(2) Hi(3)
Figure 6-60. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (3)
3
Enter
Difference (Hi(2), Hi(3)) <
Difference (Hi(1), Hi(2)) No
DP = [Hi(1) + Hi(2)] / 2
Yes DP = [Hi(2) + Hi(3)] / 2
Return
Note :Hi(1) = Hi(2) Hi(1) Hi(3) Hi(2) = Hi(3)
Figure 6-61. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (4)
4
Enter
DP = [Hi(1) + Hi(2)] / 2
Return
Note :Hi(1) = Hi(2) Hi(1) Hi(3) Hi(2) Hi(3)
Figure 6-62. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (5)
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-105
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
5
Enter
Difference (Hi(2), Hi(3)) <
Difference (Hi(1), Hi(3)) No
DP = [Hi(1) + Hi(3)] / 2
Yes DP = [Hi(2) + Hi(3)] / 2
Return
Note :Hi(1) Hi(2) Hi(1) = Hi(3) Hi(2) = Hi(3)
Figure 6-63. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (6)
6
Enter
DP = [Hi(1) + Hi(3)] / 2
Return
Note :Hi(1) Hi(2) Hi(1) = Hi(3) Hi(2) Hi(3)
Figure 6-64. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (7)
7
Enter
DP = [Hi(2) + Hi(3)] / 2
Return
Note :Hi(1) Hi(2) Hi(1) Hi(3) Hi(2) = Hi(3)
Figure 6-65. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (8)
8
Enter
'Take the Middle Cell'
Return
Note :No Two Cells Are Within the Discrepancy
Limits
Figure 6-66. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (9)
DP cell stack handling runs continuously. The S600+ immediately
Caution implements any changes you make.
Configure the MAXIMUM number of input cells you will EVER require. This enables you to change Stack Type through a running S600+'s front panel without the risk of triggering configuration alarms because of insufficient input cells defined in the configuration file.
6-106
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
DP Cell Input Conditioning Screen To access this screen: 1. Select DP Cell Input Conditioning from the hierarchy menu. The DP Cell Input Conditioning screen displays.
Figure 6-67. DP Cell Input Conditioning screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Stack Type
ASSIGNMENT
SETTINGS
Description Indicates how the S600+ determines the DP value. Click to display all valid values. The default is Single.
Note: Refer to Cell Input Stacking for a description of each stack type.
Click to display an Analog Input Assignment dialog box you use to assign AI to the selected stack type.
Once you select a Stack Type, Config600 displays the associated input cell(s). If any items are unassigned, use this button to assign AI to the cell.
Click to display an Analog Input Settings dialog box you use to edit the input assignments for the input cell with assigned AI.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-107
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Use enhanced error check
Value Mode
Up Down Value
Time-out
Startup Mode Keypad High High High Low Low Low
Description
Enables enhanced error checking in the S600+. The default is checked (enabled).
Note:
If you select metric as your measurement units, the S600+ automatically enables enhanced error checking. If you select Imperial as your measurement units, the S600+ automatically disables enhanced error checking.
Sets the value below which the S600+ does not totalise DP measurements. The default is 10.
Note: This value is valid only for Normal mode.
Indicates the cell input mode of operation. Click to display all valid values.
Normal
Totalisation does not occur when the measured DP is less than the value in the Value field. This is the default.
Cats
(Common Area Transmission System) Totalisation does not occur when the measured DP is less than the defined Low Low Alarm Limit.
Sets the switch-up point between two input cells, expressed as a percentage of the range of the lower cell. The default is 95. The S600+ uses this value for all cell ranges.
Sets the switch-down point between two input cells, expressed as a percentage of the range of the lower cell. The default is 90. The S600+ uses this value for all cell ranges.
Sets the discrepancy allowed between the readings of two active input cells in the operating range. The value is defined as a percentage of the high scale value from the lower of the two cells. The default is 10.
Note: The S600+ performs this test continuously.
Sets a period of time during which the S600+ ignores the discrepancy between the readings of two available transducers. The default is 5. When the duration of the discrepancy exceeds this time limit, the S600+ raises an alarm.
Indicates the S600+ startup mode. MEASURED is the only currently valid value.
Sets a keypad value the S600+ uses as a default if it cannot select a cell (for example, all are out of range). The default is 100.
Enables and defines a high high alarm limit.
Enables and defines a high alarm limit.
Enables and defines a low alarm limit.
Enables and defines a low low alarm limit.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.5 Gas Turbine
These stream settings are specific to gas applications. When you initially create a configuration, the calculation selections you make
6-108
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Caution
determine which calculation-specific screens appear in the hierarchy menu.
It is extremely unlikely that any one S600+ configuration would contain all the settings discussed in this section. For that reason, several sample configurations demonstrate the settings.
6.5.1 AGA8 (Compressibility)
Compressibility settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters including pressure, temperature, density, and compressibility factors. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the main AGA8 standard to calculate base compressibility and density, flowing compressibility and density, and standard compressibility for natural gases.
Note: "Standard conditions" are assumed as 14.73 psia and 60°F.
The compressibility settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select AGA8 from the hierarchy menu. The AGA8 screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-68. AGA8 screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Method
Description
Indicates the compressibility calculation method. Click to display all valid values.
Detail
Uses 21 component values, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 1994 standard. This is the default.
Gross1
Uses SG, Heating Value, CO2, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 1991 standard.
Stream Configuration
6-109
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Pressure Temperature Limit Check METER PRESSURE METER TEMP REAL RD (SG) GROSS HV
Description
Note: Gross1 only supports volumetric heating value and does not support mass heating value.
Gross2
Uses SG, N2, CO2, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 1991 standard.
VNIC
Uses 20 component values, temperature and pressure in accordance with GOST 30319 1996.
MGERG
Uses 19 component values (As indicated in GERG Technical Monograph 2 1998) to calculate compressibility of natural gas mixtures based on a full compositional analysis.
PT 1 DETAIL 2017
Uses 21 component values, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 2017 standard.
PT 1
Uses SG, Heating Value, CO2,
GROSS1 temperature and pressure in accordance
2017
with the 2017 standard.
Note: Gross1 only supports volumetric heating value and does not support mass heating value.
PT 1
Uses SG, N2, CO2, temperature and
GROSS2 pressure in accordance with the 2017
2017
standard.
PT 1
Uses 21 component values, temperature
GROSS0 and pressure in accordance with the 2017
2017
standard.
PT 2 GERG 2008
Uses 21 component values [as indicated in Table 1 AGA8 2017 Part 2 (GERG 2008)] to calculate compressibility of natural gas mixtures based on a full compositional analysis.
Sets the pressure at base conditions. The default is 0.
Sets the temperature at base conditions. The default is 15.
Click to select Off to disable the calculation limit checking. The default is On.
Note:
The compressibilities and densities will be less accurate and the calculation may fail completely when operating outside the calculation limits.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter pressure.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter temperature.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for real relative density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for gross heating value (HV).
6-110
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3. Click any of the following buttons to define AGA8 calculation limits.
Button METER DENSITY UPSTR COMP(Zf) MOLAR MASS
BASE DENSITY
BASE (COMP(Zb) IDEAL RD
STD COMP(Zs)
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream (flowing) compressibility (Zf).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for molar mass.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base compressibility (Zb).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for ideal relative density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for standard compressibility (Zs).
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.5.2 Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588)
Calorific Value settings define the composition type, table to be used, and calculation limits for a range of parameters including density, relative density, and calorific value. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588 standard (in step 5, Options, of the PCSetup Editor's Configuration Wizard) to calculate the calorific value (heating value) of the gas mixture.
Calorific value settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select Gas CV from the hierarchy menu. The Calorific Value screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-111
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-112
Figure 6-69. Gas CV screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field CV Table
Description
Indicates the particular compressibility value the program uses. Click to display all valid values.
ISO6976/1995 Vol
Calculates CV based on volume, using the 1995 table. This is the default if you choose CV ISO6976 as your initial stream option.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
ISO6976/1995 Calculates CV based on mass,
Mass
using the 1995 table.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
ISO6976/1983 Calculates CV based on volume, using the 1983 table.
Note:
Support for the 1983 table is limited to superior volumetric at 15/15. This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Field
Reference Condition
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description
ISO6976/2016 Vol
Calculates CV based on volume, using the 2016 table.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
ISO6976/2016 Calculates CV based on mass,
Mass
using the 2016 table.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
GPA/2003 AGA
Calculates CV based on a base pressure of 14.73 psia. This is the default if you choose CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588 as your initial stream option.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/2003 ISO Calculates CV based on a base pressure of 14.696 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/2000 AGA
Calculates CV based on a base pressure of 14.73 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/2000 ISO Calculates CV based on a base pressure of 14.696 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/1996 AGA
Calculates CV based on a base pressure of 14.73 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/1996 ISO Calculates CV based on a base pressure of 14.696 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
Indicates the t1/t2 value, where t1 is the calculation reference temperature for combustion and t2 is the reference condition for metering. The default is 15/15 DEG C.
Note:
For ISO6976 1983 VOL selection, the 60/60F and 15/15.55 Deg C selections are not supported.
Stream Configuration
6-113
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-114
Field
Method
User Temp T2 User Press P2 Table Revision
BASE COMP(Zb) Composition Type
Description For ISO6976 1995 VOL and MASS selections,
the 60/60F selection refers to a combustion temperature (t1) of 60 Deg F and a metering temperature (t2) of 15 Deg C. The 15/15.55 Deg C selection is not supported.
For ISO6976 2016 VOL and MASS selections, the 60/60F selection refers to a combustion temperature (t1) of 60 Deg F and a metering temperature (t2) of 15 Deg C. The 15/15.55 Deg C selection refers to a combustion temperature (t1) of 15.55 Deg C (60 Deg F) and a metering temperature (t2) of 15.55 Deg C (60 Deg F).
If you select CV ISO6976 in your initial configuration and you select the 1995 standard, you have the choice of Alternative or Definitive methods (using table 4 Mass / table 5 volume) for calculating the ideal, superior, and inferior CV values. This selection is not applicable to the 1983 or 2016 standards.
If you select CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588 in your initial configuration, you have the choice of the Simple (using equation 7 from the GPA2172ASTMD3588-09 standard) or Rigorous (using equations 8 & 9 from the GPA2172-ASTMD358809 standard) methods for calculating the standard compressibility.
Note: This option is valid only for configurations created with Config600 version 3.1 or greater.
Applicable to the ISO6976 2016 VOL and ISO6976 2016 MASS selections. Also applicable to ISO6976 1995 VOL and ISO6976 1995 MASS selections when the Definitive method is selected.
Note: It may be necessary to add this item to a display so that it can be correctly initialised.
Applicable to the ISO6976 1995 VOL and ISO6976 1995 MASS selections when the Definitive method is selected.
Note: It may be necessary to add this item to a display so that it can be correctly initialised.
Replaces the above AGA and ISO selections in the CV Table field for GPA 2172. You can select the GPA2145 table revision from one of the following:
1996
2000
2003
2009
Note: This option is valid only for configurations created with Config600 version 3.1 or greater.
Click to supply an externally calculated base compressibility from another calculation. The entered value is used in GPA2172-ASTMD3588 calculations instead of using its own internally calculated value based on the composition input.
Defines the composition input type. Valid options are:
mass to energy using mole percent
mass to energy using mole fraction
volume to energy using mole percent
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Description volume to energy using mole fraction
Note: This option is valid only for AGA5 configurations.
3. Click any of the following buttons to compressibility calculation limits.
Button STD COMP(Zs) IDEAL RD IDEAL DENSITY IDEAL CV (SUP)
Gross HV
REAL RD REAL DENSITY REAL CV (SUP)
REAL VOL IDEAL HV
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the calculated standard compressibility.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the calculated ideal relative density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the calculated ideal density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for ideal calorific value.
Note:
The superior CV is output to calc field 1 of the CV object and the inferior CV is output to calc field 3. You can select either by the CV object mode from the S600+ front panel.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for gross heating value.
Note: This field displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172ASTMD3588.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for real relative density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for real density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for real calorific value.
Note:
The superior CV is output to calc field 1 of the CV object and the inferior CV is output to calc field 3. You can select either by the CV object mode from the S600+ front panel.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the real volume ideal heating value.
Note: This field displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172ASTMD3588.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-115
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6.5.3 AGA7 (Gross Volume Flowrate)
The AGA7 settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters including meter pressure, temperature, and compressibility. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the AGA7 standards to calculate the gross volume flowrate from a gas turbine.
The AGA7 settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within specified limits.
1. Select AGA7 from the hierarchy menu. The AGA7 screen displays.
6-116
Figure 6-70. AGA7 screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field METER PRESS
METER TEMP
UPSTR COMP(Zf) BASE COMP(Zb) STREAM DENSITY BASE DENSITY REAL CV
Description Click to display an Analog Inputs dialog box you use to define the analog input values associated with this stream, I/O module, and channel, as well as conversion factors and alarm limits.
Click to display an Analog Inputs dialog box you use to define the analog input values associated with this stream, I/O module, and channel, as well as conversion factors and alarm limits.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream compressibility (Zf).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the base compressibility (Zb).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the stream density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the base density
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Premium Flow Limit
Premium Billing Mode Pressure Temperature UVOL Fail Mode
CVOL Fail Mode
Mass Fail Mode
Energy Fail Mode
Description to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the real calorific value.
In Premium Billing FLOW mode. sets a flowrate limit above which the system increments forward premium totals whenever the flowrate exceeds the keypad limit.
In Premium Billing TOTAL mode, sets a total limit above which the system increments forward premium totals whenever the period total exceeds the keypad limit. The default is 100.
Indicates the premium total mode, in which the system increments premium totals at the end of a period only if the period total exceeds the keypad limit. Click to display all valid values. The default is FLOW.
Sets pressure at base conditions. The default is 0.
Sets temperature at base conditions. The default is 15.
Indicates the fault total option for the uncorrected volume. Click to display all valid values.
Note: If you define fault totals but do not use them, the S600+ does not include them in reports and displays at run time.
FAULT ONLY
When fault condition is active, only increment fault totals.
NORMAL ONLY When fault condition is active, only increment normal totals.
NORMAL/FAULT When fault condition is active, increment both normal and fault totals. This is the default.
Indicates the fault total option mode for the corrected volume. Click to display all valid values.
Note: If you define fault totals but do not use them, the S600+ does not include them in reports and displays at run time.
FAULT ONLY
When fault condition is active, only increment fault totals.
NORMAL ONLY When fault condition is active, only increment normal totals.
NORMAL/FAULT When fault condition is active, increment both normal and fault totals. This is the default.
Indicates the fault total option for the mass fail mode. Click to display all valid values.
Note: If you define fault totals but do not use them, the S600+ does not include them in reports and displays at run time.
FAULT ONLY
When fault condition is active, only increment fault totals.
NORMAL ONLY When fault condition is active, only increment normal totals.
NORMAL/FAULT When fault condition is active, increment both normal and fault totals. This is the default.
Indicates the fault total option for the energy fail mode. Click to display all valid values.
Note: If you define fault totals but do not use them, the S600+ does not include them in reports and displays at run time.
Stream Configuration
6-117
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
TURBINE INPUT EDITOR
Description
FAULT ONLY
When fault condition is active, only increment fault totals.
NORMAL ONLY When fault condition is active, only increment normal totals.
NORMAL/FAULT When fault condition is active, increment both normal and fault totals. This is the default.
Click to display the Turbine Inputs screen on the I/O Setup option.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.5.4 Stream Gas Composition
Stream Gas Composition settings define the processing and port telemetry parameters for streams receiving data from the gas chromatograph controller. The chromatograph controller measures the individual component concentrations found in the line gas. The chromatograph controller settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the chromatograph data are not within specified limits.
1. Select Gas Composition from the hierarchy menu. The Gas Composition screen displays.
6-118
Figure 6-71. Gas Composition screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Type
Description Indicates the chromatograph configuration. Click to display all valid values.
CHROMAT A Controller-connected; uses keypad data as fallback information.
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Initial Mode
Acceptance Type
Station Number Apply Splits
Revert to Last Good after Failure Check Critical Alarms
Description
KP ONLY
Not controller-connected; uses information entered via keypad. This is the default.
Note: If you select KP ONLY, the system hides a number of fields on this screen.
Indicates the operational mode for the in-use composition data. Click to display all valid values.
KEYPAD
Use data entered via keypad. This is the default.
CHROMAT
Use live data from the chromatograph controller.
DOWNLOAD
Download gas composition data directly to each stream. Used only if connected to a remote supervisory computer.
USER
Use customised program for gas composition in S600+.
KEYPAD_F
Start by using keypad-entered data then switch to chromatograph data when a good analysis is received.
Indicates how the S600+ manages in-use data. Click to display all valid values.
ACC/COPY
Copy and normalise keypad data to in-use data only after it is accepted. This is the default.
ACC/NORM
Copy normalised keypad data to inuse data after it is accepted.
AUTO/NORM Automatically copy normalised keypad data to in-use data.
Sets the station associated with this stream.
Indicates the type of analyser connected to the S600+.
For a C6+ analyser, use the C6Plus option. Click to display all valid values. The default is NO SPLITS.
If you select any value other than NO SPLITS, the system displays the MOLE SPLITS button. Use this button to define the specific percentage splits for the gases.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Continues using the last good composition in the event of failure. Otherwise the system reverts to keypad data.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Marks the received composition as failed if any critical alarm is set (such as the pre-amp fail on the Danalyzer for a Daniel 2551 Controller).
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-119
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Check Non Critical Alarms CHROMAT COMMS Initial Mode Type
MOLE ORDER
Address
Description
Marks the received composition as failed if any noncritical alarm is set (such as the pre-amp fail on the Danalyzer for a Daniel 2551 Controller).
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Click to display the Comm screen in I/O Setup (see Chapter 4, Section 4.10).
Identifies the chromatograph and any fallback controllers. Currently, the only valid value is PAY, which indicates one chromatograph and no fallback controller.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Indicates the type of chromatograph controller connected to the S600+. Click to display all valid values.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
2551 EURO
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2551 (European) controller. This is the default.
2350 EURO
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2350 (European) controller set in SIM_2251 mode.
2350 USA
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2350 (USA) controller set in SIM_2251 mode.
2251 USA
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2251 controller.
Generic
S600+ is connected to another type of controller.
Siemens
S600+ is connected to a Siemens Advance Maxum via a Siemens Network Access Unit (NAU).
Click this button to display a Gas Composition dialog box on which you use to indicate the order in which the gas composition information comes into the S600+ via telemetry. 0 indicates any component which is not included in the Modbus map.
Note:
The Modbus map you create must be compatible with the controller to which the S600+ is connected. Refer to Chapter 14, Modbus Editor, for further information.
This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
This field is applicable only if you select Siemens or Generic in the Type field.
Configures multi-drop chromatograph support. Do not change unless advised to do so.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
6-120
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Stream
Analysis Timeout
Download Timeout
KEYPAD MOLES
MOLE ADDITIONAL
USER MOLES
Check Limits
Description
Sets the chromat analysis stream assigned to this metering stream. The default is 0.
Note:
This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type. If you need to support more than one stream, contact Technical Support.
Sets the maximum number of seconds the S600+ waits to receive a new composition from the chromatograph controller before raising an alarm. The default is 900.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Sets the maximum number of minutes the S600+ waits to receive a new composition from the supervisory computer before raising a DL Timeout Alarm. The default is 15.
Note:
A value of 0 disables the timeout.
This field displays only if you select KP ONLY in the Common Type field.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for each gas component.
Note:
The system assumes the keypad composition adds to 100% (normalised) when the Acceptance Type is ACC/COPY. If you select ACC/NORM or AUTO/NORM, the system automatically normalises the keypad composition.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for gas components not analysed by the Danalyzer. The system assumes any additional components to be normalised values, and the analyser components are re-normalised (100 sum of additional components).
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for each gas component. The system assumes user moles to be normalised.
Note:
The S600+ uses these values only if you set the Initial Mode to USER. A Modbus download from another computer may overwrite these values on a running configuration.
Enables limit checking on each gas component. When you select this check box, the MOLE LO LIMITS and MOLE HI LIMITS buttons display.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-121
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field MOLE LO LIMITS
MOLE HI LIMITS Check Deviations
MOLE DEVN LIMITS
Description
Click to display a dialog box you use to define low mole percentage limit values for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
Note:
The system uses the values you enter through these buttons only if you select the Check Limits check box. The system applies this test to the keypad, downloaded, user, additionals, and new analysis components. When enabled, the system applies the limit check against the high and low limits. Limits are considered valid if the limit is greater than zero (0). The system also applies the check to the Total field. If you disable the limit check, the keypad, downloaded and user Total field must lie within 0.1% and 150%. A sum of the new analysis must be within 99.5% and 100.5%.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define high mole percentage limit values for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
Note: See note in description of Mole Lo Limits field.
Enables checking on the deviation from the last good analysis for each component. When you select this check box, the MOLE DEVN LIMITS button displays.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define the maximum deviation allowed for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.5.5 Gas Properties
Gas Properties settings define methods the system uses to calculate viscosity, isentropic exponent (also known as "specific heat ratio" or "adiabatic exponent), and the velocity of sound. ")
These settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select Gas Properties from the hierarchy menu. The Gas Properties screen displays.
6-122
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-72. Gas Properties screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Viscosity @ Tn Viscosity Tn Sutherland Constant Viscosity Calc Type
Isentropic Exponent
Description
Sets the reference viscosity for the gas. The default is 0.010861.
Note: Used only by VDI/VDE.
Sets the reference viscosity temperature for the gas. The default is 15.
Note: Used only by VDI/VDE.
Sets the Sutherland constant for the gas. The default is 164.
Note: Used only by VDI/VDE.
Indicates the method for calculating the viscosity of the gas. Click to display all valid values.
Disabled
Value not calculated; defaults to keypad-entered value. This is the default.
SGERG GOST Uses calculations from GOST 30139-2015 30139-2015. Requires base
density, N2, and CO2 inputs.
VDI/VDE 2040 1987
Uses calculations from VDI/VDE 2040 Part 2 1987. Requires viscosity @Tn, viscosity Tn, and Sutherland Constant inputs.
VNIC GOST 30319-2015
Uses calculations from GOST 30319-2015. Requires full gas composition input.
Indicates the method for calculating the isentropic exponent of the gas. Click to display all valid values.
AGA10 2003
Uses calculations from AGA10 2003. Requires full gas composition
Stream Configuration
6-123
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Speed of Sound
Description
input.
Disabled
Value not calculated; defaults to keypad-entered value. This is the default.
GRI 1991
Uses calculations from GRI 1991. Requires full gas composition input.
SGERG GOST Uses calculations from GOST 30139-2015 30139-2015. Requires Base
Density, N2 and CO2 inputs.
VNIC GOST 30319-2015
Uses calculations from GOST 30319-2015. Requires full gas composition input.
Indicates the method for calculating the speed of sound. Click to display all valid values.
AGA10 2003
Uses calculations from AGA10 2003. Requires full gas composition input.
Disabled
Value not calculated; defaults to keypad-entered value. This is the default.
GRI 1991
Uses calculations from GRI 1991. Requires full gas composition input.
SGERG GOST Uses calculations from GOST 30139-2015 30139-2015. Requires Base
Density, N2 and CO2 inputs.
VNIC GOST 30319-2015
Uses calculations from GOST 30319-2015. Requires full gas composition input.
3. Click any of the following buttons to set gas property outputs or variables.
Button VISCOSITY
ISENTROPIC EXPONENT VOS
UPSTREAM PRESS UPSTREAM TEMP BASE DENSITY
INUSE COMPOSITION
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for viscosity.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the isentropic exponent.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the velocity of sound.
Note: AGA10 refers to VOS as "speed of sound."
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream pressure.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream temperature.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Click to display a read-only table of gas compositions. This corresponds to the table defined using the Gas Composition screen's KEYPAD MOLES button.
6-124
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.5.6
Linearisation
Linearisation settings define the constants and calculation limits for the meter factor and K-factor. The S600+ calculates a meter factor and Kfactor corresponding to the turbine frequency by interpolating the frequency between fixed points and then cross-referencing the result against a lookup table.
Linearisation settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the meter factor and K factor are not within specified limits.
Flow meters produce pulses proportional to the total flow through the meter, and the K-factor represents the number of pulses produced per unit volume.
Notes:
The linearisation curve for Gas Turbine configurations uses frequency as the default input for both K-factor and Meter Factor calculations. The ability to change the defaults is available only with Config600 Pro software.
Batching systems that employ meter factor or K-factor linearisation with retrospective meter factor/K-factor adjustments assume that the adjusted value has a "keypad" mode.
To prevent the live metering system from applying a double correction, use either a calculated meter factor or a calculated Kfactor linearisation (that is, only one factor should have a calculated mode).
1. Select Linearisation from the hierarchy menu. The Linearisation screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-125
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-73. Linearisation screen
6-126
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Complete the following field.
Field Meter Factors
K-Factors
METER FACTOR K-FACTOR
K Factor Method Meter Factor Method
Description
Sets up to 20 flow rate and values for the meter corrector factors.
Flowrate/Freq Sets the flowrate and frequency for each of the meter correction factors.
Value
Sets the corresponding values for each of the meter correction factors.
Sets up to 20 flow rate and values for the K-factors.
Flowrate/Freq Sets the flowrate and frequency for each of the K-factors.
Value
Sets the corresponding values for each of the K-factors.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the respective factor.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the respective factor.
Selectable between K FACTOR (values entered as normal) and ERROR PERCENT (K Factor entered as a percentage).
Selectable between METER FACTOR (values entered as normal) and ERROR PERCENT (Meter Factor entered as a percentage).
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.6 Gas Ultrasonic
These stream settings are specific to gas ultrasonic applications. When you initially create a configuration, the calculation selections you make determine which calculation-specific screens appear in the hierarchy menu.
Caution
It is extremely unlikely that any one S600+ configuration would contain all the settings discussed in this section. For that reason, several sample configurations demonstrate the settings.
6.6.1
AGA8 (Compressibility)
Compressibility settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters including pressure, temperature, density, and compressibility factors. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the main AGA8 standard to calculate base compressibility and density, flowing compressibility and density, and standard compressibility for natural gases.
Note: "Standard conditions" are assumed as 14.73 psia and 60 °F.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-127
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
The compressibility settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits. 1. Select AGA8 from the hierarchy menu. The AGA8 screen
displays.
6-128
Figure 6-74. AGA8 screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Method
Description
Indicates the compressibility method. Click to display all valid values.
DETAIL
Uses 21 component values, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 1994 standard. This is the default.
GROSS1 Uses SG, Heating Value, CO2, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 1991 standard.
Note: Gross1 only supports volumetric heating value and does not support mass heating value.
GROSS2 Uses SG, N2, CO2, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 1991 standard.
VNIC
Uses 20 component values, temperature and pressure in accordance with GOST 30319 1996.
MGERG
Uses 19 component values (As indicated in GERG Technical Monograph 2 1998) to calculate compressibility of natural gas mixtures based on a full compositional analysis.
PT 1 DETAIL 2017
Uses 21 component values, temperature and pressure in accordance with the 2017 standard.
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Pressure Temperature Limit Check METER PRESS METER TEMP REAL RD (SG) GROSS HV
Description
PT 1
Uses SG, Heating Value, CO2,
GROSS1 temperature and pressure in accordance
2017
with the 2017 standard.
Note: Gross1 only supports volumetric heating value and does not support mass heating value.
PT 1
Uses SG, N2, CO2, temperature and
GROSS2 pressure in accordance with the 2017
2017
standard.
PT 1
Uses 21 component values, temperature
GROSS0 and pressure in accordance with the 2017
2017
standard.
PT 2 GERG 2008
Uses 21 component values [as indicated in Table 1 AGA8 2017 Part 2 (GERG 2008)] to calculate compressibility of natural gas mixtures based on a full compositional analysis.
Sets the pressure at base conditions. The default is 0.
Sets the temperature at base conditions. The default is 15.
Click to select Off to disable the calculation limit checking. The default is On.
Note:
The compressibilities and densities will be less accurate and the calculation may fail completely when operating outside the calculation limits.
Click to display an Analog Inputs dialog box you use to define the analog input values associated with this stream, I/O card, and channel, as well as conversion factors and alarm limits.
Click to display an Analog Inputs dialog box you use to define the analog input values associated with this stream, I/O card, and channel, as well as conversion factors and alarm limits.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the real relative density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the gross heating value (HV).
3. Click any of the following buttons to set calculation limits:
Button UPSTREAM DENSITY
UPSTR COMP(Zf)
MOLAR MASS
BASE DENSITY
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for upstream compressibility.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for molar mass.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-129
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button BASE COMP(Zb)
IDEAL RD
STD COMP(Zs)
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base compressibility.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for ideal relative density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for standard compressibility.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.6.2 Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588)
Calorific Value settings define the composition type, table to be used, and calculation limits for a range of parameters including density, relative density, and calorific value. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use either the ISO6976 or GPA2172/ASTM D3588 standards (defined in step 5 of the PCSetup Editor's Configuration Wizard) to calculate the calorific value (heating value) of the gas mixture.
The calorific value settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select Gas CV from the hierarchy menu. The Calorific Value screen displays.
6-130
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-75. Gas CV screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field CV Table
Description
Identifies the particular compressibility value the program uses. Click to display all valid values.
ISO6976/1995 Vol
Calculates CV based on volume, using the 1995 table. This is the default if you choose CV ISO6976 as your initial stream option.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
ISO6976/1995 Calculates CV based on mass,
Mass
using the 1995 table.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
ISO6976/1983 Calculates CV based on mass,
Vol
using the 1983 table.
Note:
Support for the 1983 table is limited to superior volumetric at 15/15. This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
Stream Configuration
6-131
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Reference Condition
Description
ISO6976/2016 Calculates CV based on volume,
Vol
using the 2016 table.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
ISO6976/2016 Calculates CV based on mass,
Mass
using the 2016 table.
Note: This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV ISO6976.
GPA/2003 AGA
Calculates CV based on a base pressure of 14.73 psia. This is the default if you choose CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588 as your initial stream option.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/2003 ISO Calculates CV based on a base pressure of 14.696 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/2000 AGA
Calculates CV based on a base pressure of 14.73 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/2000 ISO Calculates CV based on a base pressure of 14.696 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/1996 AGA
Calculates CV based on a base pressure of 14.73 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
GPA/1996 ISO Calculates CV based on a base pressure of 14.696 psia.
Note:
This option displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
Indicates the t1/t2 value, where t1 is the calculation reference temperature for combustion and t2 is the reference condition for metering. The default is 15/15 DEG C.
Note:
For ISO6976 1983 VOL selection, the 60/60F and 15/15.55 Deg C selections are not supported.
6-132
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Method
User Temp T2 User Press P2 Table Revision
BASE COMP(Zb)
Description
For ISO6976 1995 VOL and MASS selections, the 60/60F selection refers to a combustion temperature (t1) of 60 Deg F and a metering temperature (t2) of 15 Deg C. The 15/15.55 Deg C selection is not supported.
For ISO6976 2016 VOL and MASS selections, the 60/60F selection refers to a combustion temperature (t1) of 60 Deg F and a metering temperature (t2) of 15 Deg C. The 15/15.55 Deg C selection refers to a combustion temperature (t1) of 15.55 Deg C (60 Deg F) and a metering temperature (t2) of 15.55 Deg C (60 Deg F).
If you select CV ISO6976 in your initial configuration and you select the 1995 standard, you have the choice of Alternative or Definitive methods (using table 4 Mass / table 5 volume) for calculating the ideal, superior, and inferior CV values. This selection is not applicable to the 1983 or 2016 standards.
If you select CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588 in your initial configuration, you have the choice of the Simple (using equation 7 from the GPA2172ASTMD3588-09 standard) or Rigorous (using equations 8 & 9 from the GPA2172-ASTMD358809 standard) methods for calculating the standard compressibility.
Note:
This option is valid only for configurations created with Config600 version 3.1 or greater.
Applicable to the ISO6976 2016 VOL and ISO6976 2016 MASS selections. Also applicable to ISO6976 1995 VOL and ISO6976 1995 MASS selections when the Definitive method is selected.
Note: It may be necessary to add this item to a display so that it can be correctly initialised.
Applicable to the ISO6976 1995 VOL and ISO6976 1995 MASS selections when the Definitive method is selected.
Note: It may be necessary to add this item to a display so that it can be correctly initialised.
This replaces the above AGA and ISO selections in the CV Table field for GPA 2172. You can select the GPA2145 table revision from one of the following:
1996
2000
2003
2009
Note:
This option is valid only for configurations created with Config600 version 3.1 or greater.
Click to supply an externally calculated base compressibility from another calculation. The system uses the entered value in GPA2172-ASTMD3588 calculations instead of using its own internally calculated value based on the composition input.
Stream Configuration
6-133
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-134
Field
Composition Type
Description Defines the composition input type. Valid options are: mass to energy using mole percent mass to energy using mole fraction volume to energy using mole percent volume to energy using mole fraction Note: This option is valid only for AGA5
configurations.
3. Click any of the following buttons to define ISO6976 or GPA2172/ ASTM D3588 calculation limits.
Button STD COMP(Zs) IDEAL RD IDEAL DENSITY IDEAL CV (SUP)
Gross HV
REAL RD REAL DENSITY REAL CV (SUP)
REAL VOL IDEAL HV
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the calculated standard compressibility (Zs).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the calculated ideal relative density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the calculated ideal density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for ideal calorific value.
Note:
The superior CV is output to calc field 1 of the CV object and the inferior CV is output to calc field 3. You can select either by the CV object mode from the S600+ front panel.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for gross heating value.
Note: This field displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for real relative density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for real density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for real calorific value.
Note:
The superior CV is output to calc field 1 of the CV object and the inferior CV is output to calc field 3. You can select either by the CV object mode from the S600+ front panel.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the real volume ideal heating value.
Note: This field displays only if you initially configure the stream to use CV GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.6.3
AGA7 (Gross Volume Flowrate)
The AGA7 settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters including meter pressure, temperature, and compressibility. This screen displays when you configure the S600+ to use the AGA7 standards to calculate the gross volume flowrate from a gas turbine.
The AGA7 settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within specified limits.
1. Select AGA7 from the hierarchy menu. The AGA7 screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-76. AGA7 screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field METER PRESS
METER TEMP
UPSTR COMP(Zf) BASE COMP(Zb) STREAM DENSITY BASE DENSITY
Description Click to display an Analog Inputs dialog box you use to define the analog input values associated with this stream, I/O module, and channel, as well as conversion factors and alarm limits.
Click to display an Analog Inputs dialog box you use to define the analog input values associated with this stream, I/O module, and channel, as well as conversion factors and alarm limits.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the upstream compressibility (Zf).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the base compressibility (Zb).
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the stream density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific
Stream Configuration
6-135
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field REAL CV
Premium Flow Limit
Premium Billing Mode
Pressure Temperature TURBINE INPUT EDITOR
Description alarm limits for the base density
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the real calorific value.
In Premium Billing FLOW mode. sets a flowrate limit above which the system increments forward premium totals whenever the flowrate exceeds the keypad limit.
In Premium Billing TOTAL mode, sets a total limit above which the system increments forward premium totals whenever the period total exceeds the keypad limit. The default is 100.
Indicates the premium total mode, in which the system increments premium totals at the end of a period only if the period total exceeds the keypad limit. Click to display all valid values. The default is FLOW.
Sets pressure at base conditions. The default is 0.
Sets temperature at base conditions. The default is 15.
Click to display the Turbine Inputs screen on the I/O Setup option.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.6.4 Stream Gas Composition (Gas Ultrasonic)
Stream Gas Composition settings define the processing and port telemetry parameters for streams receiving data from the gas chromatograph controller. The chromatograph controller measures the individual component concentrations found in the line gas. The chromatograph controller settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the chromatograph data are not within specified limits.
1. Select Gas Composition from the hierarchy menu. The Gas Composition screen displays.
6-136
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-77. Gas Composition screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Type
Initial Mode
Acceptance Type
Description
Indicates the chromatograph configuration. Click to display all valid values. The default is KP ONLY.
CHROMAT A Controller-connected; uses keypad data as fallback information.
KP ONLY
Not controller-connected; uses information entered via keypad. This is the default.
Note: If you select KP ONLY, the system hides a number of fields on this screen.
Indicates the operational mode for the in-use composition data. Click to display all valid values.
KEYPAD
Use data entered via keypad. This is the default.
CHROMAT
Use live data from the chromatograph controller.
DOWNLOAD
Download gas composition data directly to each stream. Used only if connected to a remote supervisory computer.
USER
Use customised program for gas composition in S600+.
KEYPAD_F
Start by using keypad-entered data then switch to chromatograph data when a good analysis is received.
Indicates how the S600+ manages in-use data. Click to display all valid values.
ACC/COPY
Copy and normalise keypad data to in-use data only after it is accepted. This is the default.
ACC/NORM
Copy normalised keypad data to inuse data after it is accepted.
AUTO/NORM Automatically copy normalised keypad data to in-use data.
Stream Configuration
6-137
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Station Number Apply Splits
MOLE SPLITS
Revert to Last Good after Failure
Check Critical Alarms
Check Non Critical Alarms
CHROMAT COMMS Initial Mode
Type
Description
Sets the station associated with this stream.
Indicates the type of analyser connected to the S600+. For a C6+ analyser, use the C6Plus option. Click to display all valid values. The default is NO SPLITS.
If you select any value other than NO SPLITS, the system displays the MOLE SPLITS button. Use it to define the specific percentage splits for the gases.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define the specific percentage splits for the gases.
Note: This button displays only if you select any value other than NO SPLITS.
Continues using the last good composition in the event of failure. Otherwise the system reverts to keypad data.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Marks the received composition as failed if any critical alarm is set (such as the pre-amp fail on the Danalyzer for a Daniel 2551 Controller).
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Marks the received composition as failed if any noncritical alarm is set (such as the pre-amp fail on the Danalyzer for a Daniel 2551 Controller).
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Click to display the Comm screen in I/O Setup (see Chapter 4, Section 4.10).
Identifies the chromatograph and any fallback controllers. Currently, the only valid value is PAY, which indicates one chromatograph and no fallback controller.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Indicates the type of chromatograph controller. Click to display all valid values.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
2551 EURO
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2551 (European) controller. This is the default.
2350 EURO
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2350 (European) controller set in SIM_2251 mode.
2350 USA
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2350 (USA) controller set in SIM_2251 mode.
2251 USA
S600+ is connected to a Daniel 2251 controller.
6-138
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field MOLE ORDER
Address Stream Analysis Timeout
Description
Generic
S600+ is connected to another type of controller.
Siemens
S600+ is connected to a Siemens Advance Maxum via a Siemens Network Access Unit (NAU).
Click this button to display a dialog box on which you indicate the order in which the gas composition information comes into the S600+ via telemetry.
0 indicates any component which is not included in the Modbus map.
Note:
This button displays only if you select Generic as a Type. Additionally, The Modbus map you create must be compatible with the controlled to which the S600+ is connected. Refer to Chapter 14, Modbus Editor, for further information.
This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
This field is applicable only if you select Siemens or Generic in the Type field.
Configures multi-drop chromatograph support. Do not change unless advised to do so.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Sets the chromat analysis stream assigned to this metering stream. The default is 0.
Note:
This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type. If you need to support more than one stream, contact Technical Support.
Sets the maximum number of seconds the S600+ waits to receive a new composition from the chromatograph controller before raising an alarm. The default is 900.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-139
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-140
Field Download Timeout
KEYPAD MOLES
MOLE ADDITIONAL
USER MOLES
Check Limits MOLE LO LIMITS
MOLE HI LIMITS
Description
Sets the maximum number of minutes the S600+ waits to receive a new composition from the supervisory computer before raising a DL Timeout Alarm. The default is 15.
Note:
A value of 0 disables the timeout.
This field displays only if you select KP ONLY in the Common Type field.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for each gas component.
Note:
The system assumes the keypad composition adds to 100% (normalised) when the Acceptance Type is ACC/COPY. If you select ACC/NORM or AUTO/NORM, the system automatically normalises the keypad composition.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for gas components not analysed by the Danalyzer. The system assumes any additional components to be normalised values, and the analyser components are re-normalized (100 sum of additional components).
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define mole percentage values for each gas component. The system assumes user moles to be normalised.
Note:
The S600+ uses these values only if you set the Initial Mode to USER. A Modbus download from another computer may overwrite these values on a running configuration.
Enables limit checking on each gas component. When you select this check box, the MOLE LO LIMITS and MOLE HI LIMITS buttons display.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define low mole percentage limit values for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
Note:
The system uses the values you enter through these buttons only if you select the Check Limits check box. The system applies this test to the keypad, downloaded, user, additionals, and new analysis components. When enabled, the system applies the limit check against the high and low limits. Limits are considered valid if the limit is greater than zero (0). The system also applies the check to the Total field. If you disable the limit check, the keypad, downloaded and user Total field must lie within 0.1% and 150%. A sum of the new analysis must be within 99.5% and 100.5%.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define high mole percentage limit values for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
Note: See note in the description of the Mole Lo Limits field.
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Check Deviations
MOLE DEVN LIMITS
Description
Enables checking on the deviation from the last good analysis for each component. When you select this check box, the MOLE DEVN LIMITS button displays.
Note: This field displays only if you select CHROMAT A as the chromatograph configuration type.
Click to display a dialog box you use to define the maximum deviation allowed for each gas component. Enter 0 in any field to prevent the test for the selected component.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.6.5 Linearisation
Linearisation settings define the constants and calculation limits for the meter factor and K factor. The S600+ calculates a meter factor corresponding to the frequency by interpolating the frequency between fixed points and then cross-referencing the result against a lookup table. Linearisation settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the meter factor are not within specified limits.
Notes:
The linearisation curve for Gas Ultrasonic configurations uses frequency as the default input for Meter Factor calculations. The ability to change the default is available only with Config600 Pro software.
Batching systems that employ meter factor with retrospective meter factor assume that the adjusted value has a "keypad" mode.
To prevent the live metering system from applying a double correction, use either a calculated meter factor or a calculated Kfactor linearisation (that is, only one factor should have a calculated mode).
1. Select Linearisation from the hierarchy menu. The Linearisation screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-141
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-78. Linearisation screen
6-142
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Complete the following field.
Field Meter Factors
M-FACTOR K-FACTOR Meter Factor Method
Description
Sets up to 10 flow rate and values for the meter corrector factors.
Flowrate/Freq Sets the flowrate and frequency for each of the meter correction factors.
Value
Sets the corresponding values for each of the meter correction factors.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the respective factor.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the respective factor.
Selectable between METER FACTOR (values entered as normal) and ERROR PERCENT (Meter Factor entered as a percentage).
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.6.6 Gas Properties (Gas Ultrasonic)
Gas Properties settings define methods the system uses to calculate viscosity, isentropic exponent (also known as "specific heat ratio" or "adiabatic exponent"), and the velocity of sound.
These settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within the specified limits.
1. Select Gas Properties from the hierarchy menu. The Gas Properties screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-143
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-144
Figure 6-79. Gas Properties screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Viscosity @ Tn Viscosity Tn Sutherland Constant Viscosity Calc Type
Isentropic Exponent
Description
Sets the reference viscosity for the gas. The default is 0.010861.
Note: Used only by VDI/VDE.
Sets the reference viscosity temperature for the gas. The default is 15.
Note: Used only by VDI/VDE.
Sets the Sutherland constant for the gas. The default is 164.
Note: Used only by VDI/VDE.
Indicates the method for calculating the viscosity of the gas. Click to display all valid values.
Disabled
Value not calculated; defaults to keypad-entered value. This is the default.
SGERG GOST Uses calculations from GOST 30139-2015 30139-2015. Requires base
density, N2, and CO2 inputs.
VDI/VDE 2040 1987
Uses calculations from VDI/VDE 2040 Part 2 1987. Requires viscosity @Tn, viscosity Tn, and Sutherland Constant inputs.
VNIC GOST 30319-2015
Uses calculations from GOST 30319-2015. Requires full gas composition input.
Indicates the method for calculating the isentropic exponent of the gas. Click to display all valid values.
AGA10 2003
Uses calculations from AGA10 2003. Requires full gas composition
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Speed of Sound
Description
input.
Disabled
Value not calculated; defaults to keypad-entered value. This is the default.
GRI 1991
Uses calculations from GRI 1991. Requires full gas composition input.
SGERG GOST Uses calculations from GOST 30139-2015 30139-2015. Requires Base
Density, N2 and CO2 inputs.
VNIC GOST 30319-2015
Uses calculations from GOST 30319-2015. Requires full gas composition input.
Indicates the method for calculating the speed of sound. Click to display all valid values.
AGA10 2003
Uses calculations from AGA10 2003. Requires full gas composition input.
Disabled
Value not calculated; defaults to keypad-entered value. This is the default.
GRI 1991
Uses calculations from GRI 1991. Requires full gas composition input.
SGERG GOST Uses calculations from GOST 30139-2015 30139-2015. Requires Base
Density, N2 and CO2 inputs.
VNIC GOST 30319-2015
Uses calculations from GOST 30319-2015. Requires full gas composition input.
3. Click any of the following buttons to define gas property outputs or variables.
Button VISCOSITY ISENTROPIC EXPONENT VOS
LINE PRESS
LINE TEMP
BASE DENSITY
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for viscosity.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the isentropic exponent.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the velocity of sound (VOS).
Note: AGA10 refers to VOS as "speed of sound."
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for line pressure.
Note: This button may be disabled on some applications.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for line temperature.
Note: This button may be disabled on some applications.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Stream Configuration
6-145
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button
INUSE COMPOSITION
Description
Click to display a read-only table of gas compositions. This corresponds to the table defined using the Gas Composition screen's KEYPAD MOLES button.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.6.7 Ultrasonic Flow Setup
The Ultrasonic flow meter settings define the primary inputs, calculation limits, and spool values for flowrate data received from a Daniels or an Instromet Q.Sonic ultrasonic meter.
These settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the flowrates are not within specified limits.
1. Select Ultrasonic Flow Setup from the hierarchy menu. The Ultrasonic Flow Setup screen displays.
6-146
Figure 6-80. Ultrasonic Flow Setup screen
2. Click any of the following buttons to define primary inputs and calculation limits for the ultrasonic flow.
Button
Description
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button GAS VELOCITY
METER DENSITY METER TEMP
METER PRESS
UVOL FLOWRATE REYNOLDS NUMBER CTSM FOR SPOOL
CPSM FOR SPOOL
VEL CORRN FACTOR
INUSE MFACTOR
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for gas velocity.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter density.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter temperature.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter pressure.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for uncorrected volume flowrate.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the Reynolds Number.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction factor for the effects of temperature on the spool.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction factor for the effects of pressure on the spool.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for the velocity correction factor.
Note: This value is used only for JuniorSonic meters.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the in-use meter factor.
3. Complete the following fields.
Field Velocity
Meter Factor
Flow Rate Points (Forward MF) Meter Factors (Forward MF)
VISCOSITY
Description Indicates a velocity correction factor. Click to display all valid values. The default is SET. Note: This velocity correction factor applies only to
the JuniorSonic meters. Indicates a meter correction factor. Click to display all valid values. The default is CLEAR. Note: This velocity correction factor applies only to
the JuniorSonic meters. Sets up to 10 flow rate points for forward meter factor linearisation.
Sets up to 10 meter factor values for forward meter factor linearisation. Note: If the Meter Factor Method is ERROR
PERCENT, enter the meter factors as a percentage. Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for viscosity of the metered product.
Stream Configuration
6-147
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Youngs Modulus Spool Wall Roughness Flow Rate Points (Reverse MF) Meter Factors (Reverse MF)
Forward Premium Limit
Reverse Premium Limit
Description Sets the value for the Youngs Modulus of the meter spool. Default value is 220000000000.
Sets the value for the roughness of the spool wall. Default is 1.6e-005.
Sets up to 10 flow rate points for reverse meter factor linearisation.
Sets up to 10 meter factor values for reverse meter factor linearisation. Note: If the Meter Factor Method is ERROR
PERCENT, enter the meter factors as a percentage.
In Premium Billing FLOW mode and Flow Direction FORWARD. sets a flowrate limit above which the system increments forward premium totals whenever the flowrate exceeds the keypad limit. In Premium Billing TOTAL mode and Flow Direction FORWARD, sets a total limit above which the system increments forward premium totals whenever the period total exceeds the keypad limit. The default is 100.
In Premium Billing FLOW mode and Flow Direction REVERSE, sets a flowrate limit above which the system increments reverse premium totals whenever the flowrate exceeds the keypad limit.
Premium Billing Mode
Meter Factor Method
FlowSource
In Premium Billing TOTAL mode and Flow Direction REVERSE, sets a total limit above which the system increments reverse premium totals whenever the period total exceeds the keypad limit. The default is 100.
Indicates the premium total mode, in which the system increments premium totals at the end of the hour only if the hourly total exceeds the keypad limit. Click to display all valid values.
FLOW
In Premium Billing Flow mode, the system increments premium totals whenever the flowrate exceeds the keypad limit. This is the default.
TOTAL
In Premium Billing Total mode, the system increments premium totals whenever the period total exceeds the keypad limit.
Indicates the method used to linearise the meter factor. Click to display all valid values.
ERROR PERCENT
Interpolate between the two nearest percentage error values in the linearisation table.
METER FACTOR
Interpolate between the two nearest Meter Factors in the linearisation table. This is the default.
Indicates the source for generating flowtotals. Possible options are:
SERIAL
Use the serial communication link. This is the default.
PULSE I/P
Use the pulse input.
6-148
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Auto Switch to Serial
Internal
External
Pressure (Spool Calibration) Temperature (Spool Calibration) Pressure (Spool Exponent) Temperature (Spool Exponent)
Description
SERIAL + PULSE I/P
Use the serial communications link as default and switch to the pulse input if a fault is detected.
Note: This option requires both a serial interface and pulse input to be configured.
If selected, the S600+ will revert to using serial communications once available.
Note: This option is available only if you select SERIAL + PULSE I/P in the Flow Source.
Sets the internal diameter of the spool for calibration calculations. The default is 300.
Sets the external diameter of the spool for calibration calculations. The default is 310.
Sets the spool pressure for calibration calculations. The default is 15.
Sets the spool temperature for calibration calculations. The default is 20.
Sets the exponent coefficients for pressure calculations. The default is 5e-005.
Note: This field is not used in Daniel calculations.
Sets the temperature coefficients for pressure calculations. The default is 6e-005.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.6.8 Ultrasonic Control
The Ultrasonic Control settings define the input parameters and calculation limits for interfacing to the Daniels Gas ultrasonic meter.
These settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within specified limits.
1. Select Ultrasonic Control from the hierarchy menu. The Ultrasonic Control screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-149
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-150
Figure 6-81. Ultrasonic Control screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Modbus Timeout
Description Sets, in seconds, the amount of time the system waits before triggering a Modbus timeout. The default is 30.
Note: If a timeout occurs, the system sets the gas velocity to zero (0) and raises a timeout alarm.
3. Click any of the following buttons to define input parameters and calculation limits for the ultrasonic flow.
Button Ultrasonic Comms GAS VELOCITY Calc Type
Transducer Separation Number of Bounces
Description
Click to display the Comms screen in the I/O Setup screen, and focuses on the Daniel USonic link comm settings.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for gas velocity.
Sets which calculations the system uses with ultrasonic meters. Click to display all valid calculations.
Daniel Equations
Use Daniel equations for ultrasonic meter calculations.
ISO17089 Equations
Use ISO 17089-1 Annex E (correction of meter geometry for ultrasonic meter calculations).
Note: Current implementation of the ISO 17089 standard is only applicable to DanielTM JuniorSonicTM Two-Path Gas Ultrasonic Flow Meters.
Enter the distance, in millimeters, between the first and second transducer.
Note: This field displays only in you select ISO17089 Equations in the Calc Type field.
Enter the number of reflections in the path between transducers.
Set to 0 (For Daniel USM)
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button
Distance Between the Flanges Poisson Ratio
VELOCITY OF SOUND
Description Note: This field displays only in you select ISO17089
Equations in the Calc Type field.
Enter the distance, in millimeters, between the inlet and outlet flanges of the meter body.
Note: This field displays only in you select ISO17089 Equations in the Calc Type field.
Sets the Poisson's Ratio value of the pipe. The default is 0.3.
Note: This field displays only in you select ISO17089 Equations in the Calc Type field.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the velocity of sound.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.6.9
QSonic Interface
The QSonic Interface control settings define the input parameters and calculation limits for the interface to the QSonic ultrasonic meter.
These settings allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the gas velocity are not within specified limits.
1. Select QSonic Interface from the hierarchy menu. The QSonic Interface screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-82. Qsonic Flow Setup screen
2. Complete the following fields to set up QSonic values.
Button Comms port
QSonic Comms
Description Indicates the communication port to receive the QSonic information. Click to display all valid values. The default is PORT 5.
Displays the Comms Link screen, which you use to
Stream Configuration
6-151
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button
Description define the QSonic Link (see Chapter 4, Section 4.10).
3. Click any of the following buttons to define QSonic alarm limits.
Field VELOCITY OF SOUND GAS VELOCITY
PRESS
TEMP
Description Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and specific alarm limits for the velocity of sound.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and specific alarm limits for the gas velocity.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and specific alarm limits for pressure.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and specific alarm limits for temperature.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.6.10 SICK Control
The SICK Control settings define the primary inputs, calculations limits, and spool values for flowrate data received from the SICK ultrasonic meter.
These settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results are not within specified limits.
1. Select Sick Control from the hierarchy menu. The Sick Control screen displays.
6-152
Figure 6-83. SICK Control screen
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Click any of the following buttons to define alarm limits for the ultrasonic flow.
Button GAS VELOCITY
VELOCITY OF SOUND
UVOL FLOWRATE
INUSE MFACTOR
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for gas velocity.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the velocity of sound.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the specific alarm limits for uncorrected volume flowrate.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the in-use Meter factor.
3. Complete the following fields.
Field Modbus Timeout SICK COMMS Forward MF
Flow Rate Points
Meter Factors
Reverse MF Flow Rate Points
Meter Factors
Forward Premium Limit
Reverse Premium Limit
Description Sets, in seconds, the amount of time the S600+ waits before triggering a Modbus timeout. The default is 30.
Click to display the Comm screen in I/O Setup.
Sets up to 10 flow rate points for forward meter factor linearisation
Sets up to 10 meter factor values for forward Meter Factor linearisation. Note: If the Meter Factor Method is ERROR
PERCENT, enter the meter factors as percentages.
Sets up to 10 flow rate points for reverse meter factor linearisation.
Sets up to 10 meter factor values for reverse meter factor linearisation. Note: If the Meter Factor Method is ERROR
PERCENT, enter the meter factors as percentages.
In Premium Billing FLOW mode and Flow Direction FORWARD. sets a flowrate limit above which the system increments forward premium totals whenever the flowrate exceeds the keypad limit. In Premium Billing TOTAL mode and Flow Direction FORWARD, sets a total limit above which the system increments forward premium totals whenever the period total exceeds the keypad limit. The default is 100.
In Premium Billing FLOW mode and Flow Direction REVERSE, sets a flowrate limit above which the system increments reverse premium totals whenever the flowrate exceeds the keypad limit. In Premium Billing TOTAL mode and Flow Direction REVERSE, sets a total limit above which the system increments reverse premium totals whenever the period total exceeds the
Stream Configuration
6-153
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Premium Billing Mode
Meter Factor Method
Limit Flow Cut Off Limit Flow Source
Auto Switch to Serial
Description keypad limit. The default is 100.
Indicates the premium total mode, in which the system increments premium totals at the end of the hour only if the hourly total exceeds the keypad limit. Click to display all valid values.
FLOW
In Premium Billing Flow mode, the system increments premium totals whenever the flowrate exceeds the keypad limit. This is the default.
TOTAL
In Premium Billing Total mode, the system increments premium totals whenever the period total exceeds the keypad limit.
Indicates the method used to calculate meter factor. Click to display all valid values.
METER FACTOR
Interpolate between the two nearest meter factors in the linearisation table. This is the default.
ERROR PERCENT
Interpolate between the two nearest percentage error values in the linearisation table
Sets a low flow value at which point the meter sets the output flowrate to zero.
Indicates the source for generating flow totals.
SERIAL
Use the serial communications link. This is the default.
PULSE I/P
Use the pulse input.
SERIAL +
Use the serial
PULSE I/P
communications link as
default and switch to the pulse
input if a fault is detected.
Note: This option requires
both a serial interface
and pulse input to be
configured.
If selected, the S600+ will revert to using serial
communications once available.
Note: This option is available only if you select
SERIAL + PULSE I/P in the Flow
Source.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.7 Liquid Coriolis
These stream settings are specific to liquid applications using a Coriolis meter. When you initially create a configuration, the calculation selections you make determine which calculation-specific screens appear in the hierarchy menu.
6-154
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Caution
It is extremely unlikely that any one S600+ configuration would contain all the settings discussed in this section. For that reason, several sample configurations demonstrate the settings.
6.7.1 Local Units
This option allows you to override the global K-factor unit, since a liquid application may have more than one type of meter, each using different K-factor units.
1. Select Local Units from the hierarchy menu. The Local Units screen displays.
Figure 6-84. Local Units screen
2. Complete the following field.
Field
Description
K-Factor Units Indicates the type of units to use and override the
system K-factor units of measurement. Click to display all valid values. The default is SYSTEM
UNITS.
Note: If you select System Units, the stream uses
the global default value.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A
confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.7.2 Linearisation
Linearisation settings define the constants and calculation limits for the meter factor and K factor. The S600+ calculates a meter factor corresponding to the frequency by interpolating the frequency between
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-155
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
fixed points and then cross-referencing the result against a lookup table. Linearisation settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the Meter Factor is not within specified limits.
Notes:
The linearisation curve for Liquid Coriolis configurations uses Mass Flow Rate as the default input for Meter Factor calculations. The ability to change the default is available only with Config600 Pro software.
Batching systems that employ meter factor linearisation with retrospective meter factor adjustments assume that the adjusted value has a "keypad" mode.
To prevent the live metering system from applying a double correction, use either a calculated meter factor or a calculated Kfactor linearisation (that is, only one factor should have a calculated mode).
1. Select Linearisation from the hierarchy menu. The Linearisation screen displays.
6-156
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-85. Linearisation screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Meter Factors
METER FACTOR K- FACTOR
Description
Sets up to 20 flow rate and values for the meter correction factors.
Flowrate/Freq Set the flowrate and frequency for each of the meter correction factors.
Value
Set the corresponding values for each of the meter factors.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the respective factor.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the respective factor.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-157
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Product Table Aramco
Meter Factor Method
Description
It allows the selection of the "default" Product Table (the in-use functionality) and the 16 other Product Tables in order to set up to 10 flow rates and values for the meter correction factors and K-factors for each product type. When you select a specific product, the meter factors and K-factors update accordingly.
Note: This field displays only if you enable the Product Table when you create the configuration.
Aramco-style linearisation is identical to normal linearisation, but is only used to generate the first meter factor subsequent meter factors are generated from proving.
Notes:
Ignore the fields in the Aramco frame unless directed by technical support.
You must select Product Table with History when you create your configuration in order to use the Prover MF Deviation Check stage.
Normal Flow Rate
Set to zero for standard linearisation. Set to non-zero only for Aramco-style linearisation.
Date of Initial Base Meter Factor
Set the time stamp of the initial base meter factor.
Note: This field displays only if you enable the Product Table with History when you create the configuration.
Selectable between METER FACTOR (values entered as normal) and ERROR PERCENT (Meter Factor entered as a percentage).
6.7.3
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Sampling
Sampling settings define the method and interval period for sampling product from a flowing pipeline. By default, the S600+ supports one sampler per stream. If you require more than one sampler per stream, contact Technical Support personnel. Config600 uses the following stages during the sampling process:
Stage 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Description Idle Monitor Digout n Min Intvl Post Pulse Stopped Manually Stopped Can Full Stopped Low Flow Initial Time Check Flow Switch Stopped Flow Switch
6-158
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 11 12 13
Description Stopped Press Switch Stopped initialise Can Switch Over
Note: Batch auto-resets the sampler at the start of the batch.
1. Select Sampling from the hierarchy menu. The Sampling screen displays.
Figure 6-86. Sampling screen
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-159
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-160
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Sampler ID Method
Mode Can Fill Indicator
Auto Disable Auto Restart Expected Volume/Mass Can Fill Period Flowrate Low Limit Minimum Interval
Description
Provides an identifying label for the sampler. Each stream or station must have a unique sampler ID.
Indicates the sampling method. Click to display all valid values.
TIME PROP
Divides the value in the Can Fill Period field by the number of grabs needed to fill the can (derived from the Can Volume and Fill Volume values) to determine a time interval per pulse. This is the default.
FLOW PROP1
Divides the value in the Volume field by the number of grabs needed to fill the can (derived from the Can Volume and Fill Volume values) to determine a volume throughput per pulse.
FLOW PROP2
Uses the value in the Volume field as the volume throughput per pulse.
FLOW PROP3
Uses the value in the Volume field as the volume throughput per pulse, but supports low pressure digital input and pump prime output.
Indicates the sampling mode. Click to display all valid values. The default is SINGLE.
Indicates how the S600+ determines when the sampling can is full. Click to display all valid values. The default is GRAB COUNT.
GRAB COUNT
Uses the number of pulses output during the sample to determine when the can is full.
DIG I/P
Uses a digital input to determine when the can is full.
ANALOG I/P
Uses an analog input to determine when the can is full.
Indicates the event at which the system automatically disables the sampling process. Select the appropriate check box to identify the specific event.
Indicates whether the system automatically restarts sampling after automatically disabling sampling.
Sets the volume or mass of the sampling can. The default is 1000.
Sets, in hours, the time required to fill the sampling can. The default is 24.
Note: This field is required for the TIME PROP sampling method.
Sets the volume at which automatic disabling occurs. The default is 0.
Note: This field is required if you select the On Flowrate Limit check box for Auto Disable.
Sets the minimum interval, in seconds, for sampling. The default is 30.
Note: If the sample exceeds this limit, the system sets the overspeed alarm and increments the overspeed counter.
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Can Volume
Grab Volume
Can Low Limit
Cam High Limit
Can High High Limit Twin Can Changeover Mode
Description Sets the volume of the sampling can. The default is 0.5.
Sets the volume of each sampling grab. The default is 0.001.
Sets the low limit alarm as a percentage of the Can Volume. The default is 5.
Sets the high limit alarm as a percentage of the Can Volume. The default is 90.
Sets the high high alarm as a percentage of the Can Volume. The default is 95.
Indicates the changeover method for twin can sampling. Click to display all valid values.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.7.4
Observed Density Correction
This option enables you to determine base density from measured density. You can include density measurement from a densitometer or from the Coriolis meter, as your needs demand.
You configure the Observed Density Correction according to the densitometer location options you select at the station and stream when you initially build the configuration. If you select the Use Standard Density stream option then the observed density screen does not display.
A Coriolis meter can measure density and so you may read density from the Coriolis or density from a densitometer. SEL TO BASE is only available for Coriolis applications.
The system uses base density, coordinated with the standard density correction, to calculate correction values for the temperature of the liquid at the meter (CTLm) and the pressure of the liquid at the meter (CPLm). The system then uses the CTLm and CPLm values to correct the metered volume to reference conditions.
Note: Depending on the configuration, you may need to define both densitometer values (DT TO BASE) and selected meter densities (SEL TO BASE) options. Although the following screen examples do not show these options, descriptions of these options (which occur in the Calculation Results and Live Inputs buttons) are included in the field descriptions.
1. Select Observed Density Correction from the hierarchy menu.
2. Select the appropriate component of Observed Density Correction (DT TO BASE or SEL TO BASE) from the hierarchy menu, if necessary. The Observed Density Correction screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-161
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-162
Figure 6-87. Observed Density Correction screens
3. Complete the following fields.
Field Density Table Units
Description
Indicates the density units the S600+ uses for the density correction calculations. Click to display all valid values.
CH. 11
Use API MPMS Chapter 11.1 2004,
2004/7 CUST Addendum 1, 2007 Imperial Units.
CH. 11 2004/7 METRIC
Use API MPMS Chapter 11.1 2004, Addendum 1, 2007 Metric Units.
DEG API
Use degrees API.
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Iteration Type
Hydrometer Correction Product Type
Description
KG/M3
Use kilograms per cubic meter. This is the default.
S.G.
Use specific gravity.
KG/M3
Use kilograms per cubic meter. This is the default.
NORSOK I-105
Use Norsok I-105 Appendix D density correction.
Indicates the iteration type for the density correction calculations. Valid values are ASTM (use the iterative temperature and pressure correction as defined by ASTM/API, Chapter 12) or IP2 (use the iterative temperature and pressure correction as defined in IP 2 [ISO 91-1]). The default is ASTM.
Indicates whether the S600+ applies hydrometer correction values to the calculation. Valid values are YES and NO; the default is NO.
Indicates the type of petroleum product involved in the calculation. Click to display all valid values. The default is A CRUDE.
A CRUDE
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59A and 60A.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
B REFINED Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53B and 54B.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59B and 60B.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23B and 24B.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5B and 6B.
If CH.11 2004/7 = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Stream Configuration
6-163
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Description C SPECIAL
D LUBE OILS
LIGHT 1986 ASTM-IP 1952 TABLE LOOKUP
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If KG/M3 =, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Table 54C.
If SG =,Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23C and 24C.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5C and 6C.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Note: Table 53C is not implemented as the assumption is made that the base density is already known. This is because Table 53C allows for a keypad entry of Alpha, and if this is known then the base density would be known.
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 53D and 54D.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59D and 60D.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 23D and 24D.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 5D and 6D.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust API = MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7 = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
ASTM-IP-API Petroleum Measurement Tables for Light Hydrocarbon Liquids 1986 Tables 53 and 54.
ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 23, 24, 53 and 54.
Note: The output is based on the relevant formula or look up tables dependent on the density input.
S600+ reads values from a file in the Config600 3.0/Config/Project Name/extras directory and transfers that data into the S600+ with the configuration file. The default files hold values for the ASTM-IP Petroleum
6-164
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Field
CPL Calculation
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 5 and 6.
USER K0K1 Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If KG/ = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A with user entered values for K0 and K1.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A with user entered values for K0 and K1.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A with user entered values for K0 and K1.
LIGHT TP25 GPA TP-25 1998 (API Tables 23E and 24E).
LIGHT TP27 GPA TP-27 2007 (API Tables 23E, 24E, 53E, 54E, 59E and 60E).
AROMATICS ASTM D1555-95 Table lookup. D1555M-95
AROMATICS ASTM D1555M-00 Table Lookup. D1555M-00
AROMATICS ASTM D1555-04a Calculation. D1555M-04A
AROMATICS ASTM D1555M-08 Calculation. D1555M-08
STO5.9 08 B1 UGC
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.1 Unstable Gas Condensate.
STO5.9 08 B2 SLH
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.2 Stable Liquid Hydrocarbon.
STO5.9 08 B3 WFLH
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.3 Wide Fraction Liquid Hydrocarbon.
Indicates the specific CPL calculation the S600+ uses. Click to display all valid values.
Note:
This field does not display if you select CH.11 2004 CUST or CH.11 2004 METRIC as the Density Table Units or one of the Gazprom options as Product Type because these standards also specify the CPL calculation.
OFF
No CPL calculation.
API121
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.1 1984.
API1121M
Use API MPMS Ch. 11.2.1M 1984. This is the default.
API122
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.2 1986
API122M
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.2M 1986
CONSTANT Use a value you enter.
DOWNER
Use calculations specified in L. Downer's 1979 paper Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International Use
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-165
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Rounding
Reference Temp Alpha FFactor PE Calculation
Aromatics Type Aromatics CCF
Description
Indicates whether the S600+ rounds the calculation results. Click to display all valid values.
OFF
No rounding occurs. This is the
default.
NATIVE
Round to the rules specified in the selected calculation standard.
API Ch.12.2 Part 2
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part 2 Measurement Tickets 1995
API Ch.12.2 Part 3
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part 3 Proving Reports 1998
Flocheck
Round in accordance with Emerson Flowcheck verification software package
ASTM D1250-04 Ch.11
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.11.1 2004 (ASTM D1250-04) method to round to the Petroleum Measurement Table 1980 Tables
DECC 1980
DTI/DECC requirements for Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables. No rounding occurs and an iteration tolerance of 0.0001.
Indicates, in degrees Centigrade, the reference temperature for the correction calculations. The default is 15 degrees C.
Sets the coefficient of thermal expansion. The default is 0.
Sets the compressibility factor for the liquid (also known as the beta factor). The default is 0.
Sets the option to calculate the fluid's Equilibrium Vapour Pressure. While this is normally assumed to be 0, you can use it for natural gas liquids (NGL) and similar applications. Click to display all valid values.
OFF
Do not calculate PE value. This
is the default.
GPA TP-15 1988 Use the GPA TP-15 1988
Equation 2
Equation 2
GPA TP-15 2003 Use the GPA TP-15 2003
Equation 2
Equation 2
GPA TP-15 1988 Use the GPA TP-15 1988
Equation 3
Equation 3
GPA TP-15 2003 Use the GPA TP-15 2003
Equation 3
Equation 3
Sets the type of aromatics product. Click to display all valid values. The default is Benzene.
Sets the method for calculating a combined corrector factory (CCF) for aromatics products. Valid values are Density (calculate using a density you enter) or Table 1 (calculate use a density from an embedded table).
6-166
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Table 6-1. Observed Density Correction Product Selection
Density Units DEG API
S.G.
KG/M3
CH. 11 2004/7 CUST CH. 11 2004/7 METRIC NORSOK I-105
ASTM-IP 1952 ASTM D1250 (1952)
Table 5
ASTM D1250 (1952) Table 23
ASTM D1250 (1952) Table 53
n/a
A Crude
ASTM D1250-80 Table 5A
B Refined
ASTM D1250-80 Table 5B
ASTM D1250-80 Table 23A
ASTM D1250-80 Table 23B
ASTM D1250-80 Table 53A
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 59A (20'C
Reference Temp)
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-80 Table 53B
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 59B (20'C
Reference Temp)
ASTM D1250-04
C Special
n/a
n/a
n/a
ASTM D1250-04
Product Type
D
Light
Lube Oils
1986
ASTM
n/a
D1250-80
Table 5D
Light TP25
n/a
ASTM
n/a
GPA TP-
D1250-80
25/ 1988
Table 23D
Table 23E
ASTM
ASTMIP-
n/a
D1250-80
API
Table 53D Petroleum
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 59D (20'C
Reference
Measurement tables for light
hydrocarbon liquids 1986
Temp)
ASTM
n/a
n/a
D1250-04
Light TP27
n/a
GPA TP27 Table
23E
GPA TP27 Table
53E GPA TP27 Table 59E (20'C Reference
Temp)
n/a
Table Lookup
User lookup table
User lookup table
User lookup table
User K0 K1
ASTM D1250-80 Table 5A/
User K0,K1
ASTM D1250-80
Table 23A/ User
K0,K1
ASTM D1250-80
Table 53A/ User
K0,K1
n/a
n/a
n/a
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-
04
ASTM D1250-04
4. Click any of the following buttons to define calculation results for the observed density correction calculations.
Button BASE DEN FROM MTR
BASE DENSITY
BASE DENS (DT)
BASE DENS (SEL)
METER CTL
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Note: This button displays only if you select the densitometer (DT TO BASE) stream component.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Note: This button displays only if you select th meter (SEL TO BASE) stream component.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the temperature of the liquid at the meter (CTLm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-167
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button METER CTL (SEL)
METER CCF
METER CCF (SEL)
METER CPL
METER CPL (SEL)
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the temperature of the liquid at the meter (CTLm).
Note: This button displays only if you select the meter (SEL TO BASE) stream component.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the combined correction factor at the meter (CCFm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the combined correction factor at the meter (CCFm).
Note: This button displays only if you select the meter (SEL TO BASE) stream component.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the pressure of the liquid at the meter (CPLm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the pressure of the liquid at the meter (CPLm).
Note: This button displays only if you select the meter (SEL TO BASE) stream component.
5. Click any of the following buttons to define live inputs for the observed density correction calculations:
Button MTR DENSITY
OBS DENS (DT)
MTR DENS (SEL)
MTR TEMP
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed density.
Note: This button displays only if you select the densitometer (DT TO BASE) stream component.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter density.
Note: This button displays only if you select the meter (SEL TO BASE) stream component.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter temperature.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
6-168
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button OBS TEMP (DT)
MTR TEMP (SEL) MTR PRESS
OBS PRESS (DT)
MTR PRESS (SEL) MTR Pe
Pe
Pe (DT)
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed temperature.
Note: This button displays only if you select the densitometer (DT TO BASE) stream component.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter temperature.
Note: This button displays only if you select the meter (SEL TO BASE) stream component.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter pressure.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed pressure.
Note: This button displays only if you select the densitometer (DT TO BASE) stream component.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter pressure.
Note: This button displays only if you select the meter (SEL TO BASE) stream component.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for equilibrium vapour pressure (Pe).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed equilibrium vapour pressure (Pe).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed equilibrium vapour pressure (Pe).
Note: This button displays only if you select the densitometer (DT TO BASE) stream component.
6. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
7. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.7.5
Standard Density Correction
This calculation enables you to use base density to determine the factors for the correction for temperature of the liquid at the meter (CTLm) and the correction for the pressure of the liquid at the meter
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-169
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
(CPLm). The system then uses the CTLm and CPLm values to correct the metered volume to reference conditions. 1. Select Standard Density Correction from the hierarchy menu.
The Standard Density Correction screen displays.
6-170
Figure 6-88. Standard Density Correction screens
2. Complete the following fields.
Field
Density Table Units
Description
Indicates the density units the S600+ uses for the density correction calculations. Click to display all valid values.
CH. 11 2004/7 Use API MPMS Ch. 11.1 2004,
CUST
Addendum 1, 2007 Imperial units.
CH. 11 2004/7 Use API MPMS Ch. 11.1 2004,
METRIC
Addendum 1, 2007 Metric Units
DEG.API
Use degrees API.
KG/M3
Use kilograms per cubic meter. This is the default.
S.G.
Use specific gravity.
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Product Type
Description
NORSOK I-105
Use Norsok I-105 Appendix D density correction.
Note: See Table 6-2 for product selection.
Indicates the type of petroleum product involved in the calculation. Click to display all valid values. The default is A CRUDE.
A CRUDE
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59A and 60A.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
B REFINED Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53B and 54B.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59B and 60B.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23B and 24B.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5B and 6B.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
C SPECIAL Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If KG/M3 = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Table 54C.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23C and 24C.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5C and 6C.
If CH.11 2004/7 Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/, Metric = API MPMS
Stream Configuration
6-171
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-172
Field
Description
D LUBE OILS
LIGHT 1986 ASTM-IP 1952 TABLE LOOKUP USER K0K1
Chapter 11 2004.
Note: Table 53C is not implemented as the assumption is made that the base density is already known. This is because Table 53C allows for a keypad entry of Alpha, and if this is known then the base density would be known.
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 53D and 54D.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59D and 60D.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 23D and 24D.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 5D and 6D.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
ASTM-IP-API Petroleum Measurement Tables for Light Hydrocarbon Liquids 1986 Tables 53 and 54.
ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 23, 24, 53 and 54.
Note: The output is based on the relevant formula or look up tables dependent on the density input.
S600+ reads values from a file in the Config600 3.0/Config/Project Name/extras directory and transfers that data into the S600+ with the configuration file. The default files hold values for the ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 5 and 6.
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If KG/M3 = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A with user entered values for K0 and K1.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A with user entered values for K0 and K1.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A with
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
CPL Calculation Rounding
Description user entered values for K0 and K1.
LIGHT TP25 GPA TP-25 1998 (API Tables 23E and 24E).
LIGHT TP27 GPA TP-27 2007 (API Tables 23E, 24E, 53E, 54E, 59E and 60E).
AROMATIC S D1555M95
ASTM D1555-95 Table lookup.
AROMATIC S D1555M00
ASTM D1555M-00 Table Lookup.
AROMATIC S D1555M04A
ASTM D1555-04a Calculation.
AROMATIC S D1555M08
ASTM D1555M-08 Calculation.
STO5.9 08 B1 UGC
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.1 Unstable Gas Condensate.
STO5.9 08 B2 SLH
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.2 Stable Liquid Hydrocarbon.
STO5.9 08 B3 WFLH
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.3 Wide Fraction Liquid Hydrocarbon.
Indicates the specific CPL calculation the S600+ uses. Click to display all valid values.
Note:
This field does not display if you select CH.11 2004 CUST or CH.11 2004 METRIC as the Density Table Units or one of the Gazprom options as Product Type because these standards also specify the CPL calculation.
OFF
No CPL calculation.
API121
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.1 1984.
API1121M
Use API MPMS Ch. 11.2.1M 1984. This is the default.
API122
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.2 1986
API122M
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.2M 1986
CONSTANT Use a value you enter.
DOWNER
Use calculations specified in L. Downer's 1979 paper Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International Use
Indicates whether the S600+ rounds the calculation results. Click to display all valid values.
OFF
No rounding occurs. This is the
default.
NATIVE
Round to the rules specified in the selected calculation standard.
API Ch.12.2 Part 2
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part 2 Measurement Tickets 1995
API Ch.12.2 Part 3
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part 3 Proving Reports 1998
Flocheckl
Round in accordance with Emerson Flocheck verification software package
Stream Configuration
6-173
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Reference Temp Alpha FFactor PE Calculation
BASE DENSITY BASE DENS (DT)
Description
ASTM D1250-04 Ch.11
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.11.1 2004 (ASTM D1250-04) method to round to the Petroleum Measurement Table 1980 Tables
DECC 1980
DTI/DECC requirements for Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables. No rounding occurs and an iteration tolerance of 0.0001.
Sets, in degrees Centigrade, the reference temperature for the correction calculations. The default is 15 degrees C.
Sets the coefficient of thermal expansion. The default is 0.
Sets the compressibility factor for the liquid (also known as the beta factor). The default is 0.
Sets the option to calculate the fluid's Equilibrium Vapour Pressure. While this is normally assumed to be 0, you can use it for natural gas liquids (NGL) and similar applications. Click to display all valid values.
OFF
Do not calculate PE value. This
is the default.
GPA TP-15 1988 Use the GPA TP-15 1988
Equation 2
Equation 2
GPA TP-15 2003 Use the GPA TP-15 2003
Equation 2
Equation 2
GPA TP-15 1988 Use the GPA TP-15 1988
Equation 3
Equation 3
GPA TP-15 2003 Use the GPA TP-15 2003
Equation 3
Equation 3
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Note: This button displays only if you select the density to stream option.
Density Units DEG API
S.G.
KG/M3
ASTM-IP 1952
ASTM D1250 (1952) Table 6
A Crude
ASTM D1250-80 Table 6A
Table 6-2. Standard Density Correction Product Selection
B Refined
ASTM D1250-80 Table 6B
C Special
ASTM D1250-80 Table 6C
Product Type
D Lube Oils
Light 1986
ASTM
n/a
D1250-80
Table 6D
Light TP25
n/a
Light TP27
n/a
Table Lookup
User lookup table
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
GPA TP- GPA TP-
User
D1250
D1250-80 D1250-80 D1250-80 D1250-80
25/ 1988 27 Table
lookup
(1952)
Table 24A Table 24B Table 24C Table 24D
Table 24E
24E
table
Table 24
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTMIP-
n/a
GPA TP-
User
D1250
D1250-80 D1250-80 D1250-80 D1250-80
API
27 Table
lookup
(1952)
Table 54A Table 54B Table 54C Table 54D Petroleum
54E
table
Table 54
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 60A (20'C
Reference Temp)
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 60B (20'C
Reference Temp)
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 60D (20'C
Reference Temp)
Measure ment
tables for light
hydrocarb on liquids
1986
GPA TP27 Table 60E (20'C Reference Temp)
User K0 K1
ASTM D1250-80 Table 6A/
User K0,K1
ASTM D1250-80 Table 24A/
User K0,K1
ASTM D1250-80 Table 54A/
User K0,K1
6-174
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
CH. 11 2004/7 CUST
CH. 11 2004/7 Metric
NORSOK I-105
n/a
n/a
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
n/a
n/a
ASTM D1250-04
n/a
n/a
ASTM D1250-04
n/a
n/a
ASTM D1250-04
n/a
n/a
ASTM D1250-04
n/a
n/a
ASTM D1250-04
3. Click any of the following buttons to define live inputs for the density correction calculation:
Button MTR TEMP SEL TEMP MTR PRESS SEL PRESS MTR Pe Pe
Description
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the temperature of the liquid at the meter (CTLm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the temperature of the liquid at the meter (CTLm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the pressure of the liquid at the meter (CPLm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the pressure of the liquid at the meter (CPLm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the equilibrium vapour pressure (Pe).
Note: The label on this button change depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed equilibrium vapour pressure (Pe).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
4. Click any of the following buttons to define calculation results for the density correction calculation:
Button METER DENSITY
MTR DENS (DT)
Description Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-175
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button
Description on the configuration.
5. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
6. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.7.6 Base Sediment and Water (BSW)
This option provides base sediment and water (BSW) settings for the calculation of the net volume totals.
1. Select BSW from the hierarchy menu. The BSW screen displays.
6-176
Figure 6-89. BSW screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Calc Select
IP VII/2 4.12 REF METER DENS REF STD DENS
US METHOD 1
NORSOK I-105
Description Indicates the standard the S600+ uses for the BSW calculations. Click to display all valid values.
Use IP VII/2 4.12 standard. This is the default.
Use the meter density; mass = meter dry volume * meter density.
Use the standard density; mass = std dry volume * std density.
Use the meter density; mass = meter wet volume * meter density.
Use Norsok I-105 Appendix D method of computing totals. This must be used in conjunction
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Description with Norsok I-105 Density Table Units option.
6.7.7 Coriolis
Coriolis settings define the constants and calculation limits for a range of parameters, including stream input sources and modes of operation.
These settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the flowrates are not within specified limits.
1. Select Coriolis from the hierarchy menu. The Coriolis screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-90. Coriolis screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Flow Units
Flow Data Source
Kdpf
Density Calib
Description
Indicates the primary flow units measurements. Valid values are MASS (configure the Coriolis meter for mass-based input) or VOLUME (configure the meter for volume-based inputs). The default is MASS.
Indicates the source of flow data. Valid values are SERIAL (enable the system to take the primary variable from the serial mass or volume flowrate) or PULSE I/P (calculate the primary variable from the mass or volume pulse input.). The default is SERIAL.
Sets a density correction factor value. The default is 0.
Note:
Please contact your Coriolis supplier or reference the supplied calibration sheet for more information regarding this field and value.
Sets a density calibration pressure value. The default
Stream Configuration
6-177
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Pressure
Description is 0.
Note:
Please contact your Coriolis supplier or reference the supplied calibration sheet for more information regarding this field and value.
Ktpf1
Sets a pulse correction factor value. The default is 0.
Note:
Please contact your Coriolis supplier or reference the supplied calibration sheet for more information regarding this field and value.
Flow Calib Pressure
Sets a flow calibration pressure value. The default is 0.
Note:
Please contact your Coriolis supplier or reference the supplied calibration sheet for more information regarding this field and value.
Pressure
Indicates the source of pressure I/O. Valid values are CORIOLIS (use data from the Coriolis serial link) or I/O (use data either from ADC/PRT/Density inputs [if correctly configured] or from the Coriolis serial link [if incorrectly configured]). The default is CORIOLIS.
Note: If you select I/O, remember to configure the analog inputs.
Temperature
Indicates the source of temperature I/O. Valid values are CORIOLIS (use data from the Coriolis serial link) or I/O (use data either from the ADC/PRT/Density inputs [if correctly configured] or from the Coriolis serial link [if incorrectly configured]). The default is CORIOLIS.
Note: If you select I/O, remember to configure the analog inputs.
Density
Indicates the source of density I/O. Valid values aret CORIOLIS (se data from the Coriolis serial link) or I/O (use data either from the ADC/PRT/Density inputs [if correctly configured] or from the Coriolis serial link [if incorrectly configured]). The default is CORIOLIS.
Note: If you select I/O, remember to configure the densitometer.
Use 64 bit totals
Indicates whether the S600+ uses the 64-bit totals received from the Coriolis meter in totalisation routines.
NO Use the 32-bit totals received from the Coriolis meter. This is the default.
YES Use the 64-bit totals received from the Coriolis meter.
Use ext temp/press
Indicates which serial temperature and pressure values the S600+ uses in calculations.
Note: This is valid only if the temperature and pressure I/O selections are set to CORIOLIS.
NO Use the internally derived temperature and pressure values. This is the default.
YES Use the external temperature and pressure input values.
Max Acceptable Gap Between Successive Polls
Sets, in seconds, the maximum acceptable gap between successive polls. The default is 50. The system uses this value to determine communication failures.
6-178
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Flow Integral Acceptance Factor
Max Meter Total
Max Flowrate
Description Sets the acceptable tolerance factor for comparing flowrate to elapsed totals. The default is 20.
Sets a maximum allowable increment in the received total. Used by the increment validation logic. Sets a maximum allowable flowrate. The default is 500.
3. Click any of the following buttons to set meter variable limits.
Button SERIAL PRESS
SERIAL TEMP
SERIAL DENSITY I/O PRESSURE I/O TEMPERATURE I/O DENSITY
Coriolis Comms
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for serial pressure.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for serial temperature.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for serial density.
Click to display an Analog Input dialog box you use to define various values for the analog input.
Click to display an Analog Input dialog box you use to define various values for the analog input.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for I/O density.
Click to display the I/O Setup screen in Comms.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.8 Liquid Turbine
These stream settings are specific to liquid applications using turbine meters. When you initially create a configuration, the calculation selections you make determine which calculation-specific screens appear in the hierarchy menu.
Caution
It is extremely unlikely that any one S600+ configuration would contain all the settings discussed in this section. For that reason, several sample configurations demonstrate the settings.
6.8.1
Local Units
This option allows you to override the global K-factor unit as a liquid application may have more than one type of meter, each using different K-factor units.
1. Select Local Units from the hierarchy menu. The Local Units screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-179
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-91. Local Units screen
2. Complete the following field.
Field K-factor Units
Description
Indicates the type of units you desire to use and override the system K-factor units of measurement. Click to display all valid values. The default is SYSTEM UNITS.
Note: If you select System Units, the stream uses the global default value.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.8.2 Linearisation
Linearisation settings define the constants and calculation limits for the meter factor and the K-factor typically taken from a Meter Calibration Certificate. The system calculates a meter factor and K-factor corresponding to the turbine frequency by interpolating the frequency between fixed points and then cross-referencing this value to a look-up table. and the K-factor.
Flow meters produce pulses proportional to the total flow through the meter. The K-factor represents the number of pulses produced per unit volume.
Linearisation settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the meter factor and K-factor are not within the specified limits.
6-180
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Notes:
The linearisation curve for Liquid Turbine configurations uses IVOL Flow Rate as the default input for both K-factor and Meter Factor calculations. The ability to change the defaults is available only with Config600 Pro software.
Batching systems that employ meter factor or K-factor linearisation with retrospective meter factor/K-factor adjustments assume that the adjusted value has a "keypad" mode.
To prevent the live metering system from applying a double correction, use either a calculated meter factor or a calculated Kfactor linearisation (that is, only one factor should have a calculated mode).
1. Select Linearisation from the hierarchy menu. The Linearisation screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-181
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-182
Figure 6-92. Linearisation screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Meter Factors
K Factors
Description
Sets up to 12 flow rate and values for the meter correction factors.
Flowrate/Freq Set the flowrate and frequency for each of the meter correction factors.
Value
Set the corresponding values for each of the meter factors.
Sets up to 10 flow rate and values for the K-factors.
Flowrate/Freq Set the flowrate and frequency for each of the K-factors.
Value
Set the corresponding values for each of the K-factors.
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field METER FACTOR K-FACTOR Product Table
Aramco
K Factor Method Meter Factor Method
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the respective factor.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the respective factor.
It allows the selection of the "default" Product Table (the in-use functionality) and the 16 other Product Tables in order to set up to 10 flow rates and values for the meter correction factors and K-factors for each product type. When you select a specific product, the meter factors and K-factors update accordingly.
Note: This field displays only if you enable the Product Table when you create the configuration.
Aramco-style linearisation is identical to normal linearisation, but is only used to generate the first meter factor subsequent meter factors are generated from proving.
Notes:
Ignore the fields in the Aramco frame unless directed by technical support.
You must select Product Table with History when you create your configuration in order to use the Prover MF Deviation Check stage.
Normal Flow Rate
Set to zero for standard linearisation. Set to non-zero only for Aramco-style linearisation.
Date of Initial Base Meter Factor
Set the time stamp of the initial base meter factor.
Note: This field displays only if you enable the Product Table with History when you create the configuration.
Selectable between K FACTOR (values entered as normal) and ERROR PERCENT (K Factor entered as a percentage).
Selectable between METER FACTOR (values entered as normal) and ERROR PERCENT (Meter Factor entered as a percentage).
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-183
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6.8.3
Observed Density Correction
This option enables you to determine base density from measured density. The system uses base density, coordinated with the standard density correction, to calculate correction values for the temperature of the liquid at the meter (CTLm) and the pressure of the liquid at the meter (CPLm). The system then uses the CTLm and CPLm values to correct the metered volume to reference conditions.
You can measure density at the header, which is associated with the station because it is a common density available to all streams (OBS TEMP and OBS PRESS), or you can measure it at the meter, which is associated with a specific stream (MTR TEMP and MTR PRESS). If you do not measure density, this screen does not display and you enter a density at standard conditions.
Note: Options selected when the configuration was created determine whether the screen for standard density or observed density displays. This example configuration only shows observed density correction. For standard density settings, see either the example for Coriolis stream or Liquid Ultrasonic stream.
1. Select Observed Density Correction from the hierarchy menu. The Observed Density Correction screen displays.
6-184
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-93. Observed Density Correction screens
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Density Table Units
Description
Indicates the density units the S600+ uses for the density correction calculations. Click to display all valid values.
CH. 11
Use API MPMS Chapter 11.1 2004,
2004/7 CUST Addendum 1, 2007 Imperial Units.
CH. 11 2004/7 METRIC
Use API MPMS Chapter 11.1 2004, Addendum 1, 2007 Metric Units.
DEG API
Use degrees API.
KG/M3
Use kilograms per cubic meter. This is the default.
S.G.
Use specific gravity.
NORSOK I-105
Use Norsok I-105 Appendix D density correction.
Stream Configuration
6-185
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Iteration Type
Hydrometer Correction Product Type
Description
Indicates the iteration type for the density correction calculations. Valid values are ASTM (use the iterative temperature and pressure correction as defined by ASTM/API, Chapter 12) or IP2 (use the iterative temperature and pressure correction as defined in IP 2 [ISO 91-1]). The default is ASTM.
Indicates whether the S600+ applies hydrometer correction values to the calculation. Valid values are YES and NO; the default is NO.
Indicates the type of petroleum product involved in the calculation. Click to display all valid values. The default is A CRUDE.
A CRUDE
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59A and 60A.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
B REFINED Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53B and 54B.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59B and 60B.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23B and 24B.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5B and 6B.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
6-186
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Field
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description C SPECIAL
D LUBE OILS
LIGHT 1986 ASTM-IP 1952
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If KG/M3 = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 54C.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23C and 24C.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5C and 6C.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Note: Table 53C is not implemented as the assumption is made that the base density is already known. This is because Table 53C allows for a keypad entry of Alpha, and if this is known then the base density would be known.
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 53D and 54D.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59D and 60D.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 23D and 24D.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 5D and 6D.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
ASTM-IP-API Petroleum Measurement Tables for Light Hydrocarbon Liquids 1986 Tables 53 and 54.
ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 23, 24, 53 and 54 (Algorithm).
Note: The output is based on the relevant formula or look up tables dependent on the density input.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-187
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Description TABLE LOOKUP
USER K0 K1
LIGHT TP25 LIGHT TP27 AROMATICS D1555M-95 AROMATICS D1555M-00 AROMATICS D1555M-04A AROMATICS D1555M-08 STO5.9 08 B1 UGC STO5.9 08 B2 SLH STO5.9 08 B3 WFLH
S600+ reads values from a file in the Config600 3.x/Config/Project Name/extras directory and transfers that data into the S600+ with the configuration file. The specific file selected is based on the value in the Density Table Units field: If SG, values are read from the ASTMIP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 23 file. If DEG API, values are read from the ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 5 file. For KG/M3, please consult technical support. Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field: If KG/M3 = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A with user entered values for K0 and K1. If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A with user entered values for K0 and K1. If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A with user entered values for K0 and K1. GPA TP-25 1998 (API Tables 23E and 24E). GPA TP-27 2007 (API Tables 23E, 24E, 53E, 54E, 59E and 60E). ASTM D1555-95 Table lookup.
ASTM D1555M-00 Table Lookup.
ASTM D1555-04a Calculation.
ASTM D1555M-08 Calculation.
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.1 Unstable Gas Condensate. Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.2 Stable Liquid Hydrocarbon. Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.3 Wide Fraction Liquid Hydrocarbon.
6-188
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Field CPL Calculation
Rounding
Reference Temp Alpha FFactor
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description
Indicates the specific CPL calculation the S600+ uses. Click to display all valid values.
Note:
This field does not display if you select CH.11 2004 CUST or CH.11 2004 METRIC as the Density Table Units or one of the Gazprom options as Product Type because these standards also specify the CPL calculation.
OFF
No CPL calculation.
API121
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.1 1984.
API1121M
Use API MPMS Ch. 11.2.1M 1984. This is the default.
API122
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.2 1986
API122M
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.2M 1986
CONSTANT Use a value you enter.
DOWNER
Use calculations specified in L. Downer's 1979 paper Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International Use
Indicates whether the S600+ rounds the calculation results. Click to display all valid values.
OFF
No rounding occurs. This is the
default.
NATIVE
Round to the rules specified in the selected calculation standard.
API Ch.12.2 Part 2
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part 2 Measurement Tickets 1995
API Ch.12.2 Part 3
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part 3 Proving Reports 1998
Flocheck
Round in accordance with Emerson Flowcheck verification software package
ASTM D1250-04 Ch.11
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.11.1 2004 (ASTM D1250-04) method to round to the Petroleum Measurement Table 1980 Tables
DECC 1980
DTI/DECC requirements for Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables. No rounding occurs and an iteration tolerance of 0.0001.
Indicates, in degrees Centigrade, the reference temperature for the correction calculations. The default is 15 degrees C.
Sets the coefficient of thermal expansion. The default is 0.
Sets the compressibility factor for the liquid (also known as the beta factor). The default is 0.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-189
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field PE Calculation
Aromatics Type Aromatics CCF
Description
Sets the option to calculate the fluid's Equilibrium Vapour Pressure. While this is normally assumed to be 0, you can use it for natural gas liquids (NGL) and similar applications. Click to display all valid values.
OFF
Do not calculate PE value. This
is the default.
GPA TP-15 1988 Use the GPA TP-15 1988
Equation 2
Equation 2
GPA TP-15 2003 Use the GPA TP-15 2003
Equation 2
Equation 2
GPA TP-15 1988 Use the GPA TP-15 1988
Equation 3
Equation 3
GPA TP-15 2003 Use the GPA TP-15 2003
Equation 3
Equation 3
Sets the type of aromatics product. Click to display all valid values. The default is Benzene.
Sets the method for calculating a combined corrector factory (CCF) for aromatics products. Valid values are Density (calculate using a density you enter) or Table 1 (calculate use a density from an embedded table).
Density Units DEG API
S.G.
KG/M3
CH. 11 2004/7 CUST CH. 11 2004/7 METRIC NORSOK I-105
ASTM-IP 1952 n/a
ASTM D1250 (1952) Table 23 Algorithm
ASTM D1250 (1952) Table 53 Algorithm
n/a
Table 6-3. Observed Density Correction Product Selection
Product Type
A Crude
B Refined
C Special
D Lube Oils
Light 1986
Light TP25
Light TP27
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
ASTM
n/a
n/a
n/a
D1250-80 D1250-80
D1250-80
Table 5A Table 5B
Table 5D
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
ASTM
n/a
GPA TP- GPA TP-
D1250-80 D1250-80
D1250-80
25/ 1988 27 Table
Table 23A Table 23B
Table 23D
Table 23E
23E
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
ASTM
ASTMIP-
n/a
GPA TP-
D1250-80 D1250-80
D1250-80
API
27 Table
Table 53A Table 53B
Table 53D Petroleum
53E
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 59A (20'C
Reference Temp)
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 59B (20'C
Reference Temp)
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 59D (20'C
Reference Temp)
Measure ment
tables for light
hydrocarb on liquids
1986
GPA TP27 Table 59E (20'C Reference Temp)
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
n/a
n/a
D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04
Table Lookup
ASTM-IP Petroleum Measure-
ment Tables 1952 Tables 5 lookup table
ASTM-IP Petroleum Measure-
ment Tables 1952 Tables 23 lookup table
Consult technical support
User K0 K1 ASTM D1250-80 Table 5A/ User K0,K1
ASTM D1250-80 Table 23A/
User K0,K1
ASTM D1250-80 Table 53A/
User K0,K1
n/a
n/a
n/a
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
3. Click any of the following buttons to define calculation results for the observed density correction calculations.
6-190
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button BASE DENSITY METER CTL
METER CCF
METER CPL
Description
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the temperature of the liquid at the meter (CTLm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the combined correction factor at the meter (CCFm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the pressure of the liquid at the meter (CPLm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
4. Click any of the following buttons to define live inputs for the observed density correction calculations.
Button METER DENSITY OBS DENS
MTR TEMP
OBS TEMP
MTR PRESS
OBS PRESS
Description Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter temperature.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed temperature.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter pressure.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed pressure.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Stream Configuration
6-191
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button Pe
Description
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed equilibrium vapour pressure (Pe).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
5. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
6. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.8.4
Standard Density Correction
This calculation enables you to use base density to determine the factors for the correction for temperature of the liquid at the meter (CTLm) and the correction for the pressure of the liquid at the meter (CPLm). The system then uses the CTLm and CPLm values to correct the metered volume to reference conditions.
1. Select Standard Density Correction from the hierarchy menu. The Standard Density Correction screen displays.
Figure 6-94. Standard Density Correction screen
6-192
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Density Table Units
Product Type
Description
Indicates the density units the S600+ uses for the density correction calculations. Click to display all valid values.
CH. 11 2004/7 Use API MPMS Ch. 11.1 2004,
CUST
Addendum 1, 2007 Imperial units.
CH. 11 2004/7 Use API MPMS Ch. 11.1 2004,
METRIC
Addendum 1, 2007 Metric Units
DEG.API
Use degrees API.
KG/M3
Use kilograms per cubic meter. This is the default.
S.G.
Use specific gravity.
NORSOK I-105
Use Norsok I-105 Appendix D density correction.
Note: See Table 6-2 for product selection.
Indicates the type of petroleum product involved in the calculation. Click to display all valid values. The default is A CRUDE.
A CRUDE
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59A and 60A.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
B REFINED Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53B and 54B.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59B and 60B.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23B and 24B.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5B and 6B.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Stream Configuration
6-193
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Description C SPECIAL
D LUBE OILS
LIGHT 1986 ASTM-IP 1952 TABLE LOOKUP
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If KG/M3 = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Table 54C.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23C and 24C.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5C and 6C.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Note: Table 53C is not implemented as the assumption is made that the base density is already known. This is because Table 53C allows for a keypad entry of Alpha, and if this is known then the base density would be known.
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 53D and 54D.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59D and 60D.
If SG =,Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 23D and 24D.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 5D and 6D.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
ASTM-IP-API Petroleum Measurement Tables for Light Hydrocarbon Liquids 1986 Tables 53 and 54.
ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 23, 24, 53 and 54 (Algorithm).
Note: The output is based on the relevant formula or look up tables dependent on the density input.
S600+ reads values from a file in the Config600 3.x/Config/Project Name/extras directory and transfers that data into the S600+ with the configuration file. The specific file selected is based on the value in the
6-194
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Field
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description
USER K0 K1
LIGHT TP25 LIGHT TP27 AROMATICS D1555M-95 AROMATICS D1555M-00 AROMATICS D1555M-04A AROMATICS D1555M-08 STO5.9 08 B1 UGC STO5.9 08 B2 SLH STO5.9 08 B3 WFLH
Density Table Units field: If SG, values are read from the ASTMIP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 23 file. If DEG API, values are read from the ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 5 file. For KG/M3, please consult technical support. Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field: If KG/M3 = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A with user entered values for K0 and K1. If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A with user entered values for K0 and K1. If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A with user entered values for K0 and K1. GPA TP-25 1998 (API Tables 23E and 24E). GPA TP-27 2007 (API Tables 23E, 24E, 53E, 54E, 59E and 60E). ASTM D1555-95 Table lookup.
ASTM D1555M-00 Table Lookup.
ASTM D1555-04a Calculation.
ASTM D1555M-08 Calculation.
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.1 Unstable Gas Condensate. Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.2 Stable Liquid Hydrocarbon. Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.3 Wide Fraction Liquid Hydrocarbon.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-195
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field CPL Calculation
Rounding
Reference Temp Alpha FFactor
Description
Indicates the specific CPL calculation the S600+ uses. Click to display all valid values.
Note:
This field does not display if you select CH.11 2004 CUST or CH.11 2004 METRIC as the Density Table Units or one of the Gazprom options as Product Type because these standards also specify the CPL calculation.
OFF
No CPL calculation.
API121
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.1 1984.
API1121M
Use API MPMS Ch. 11.2.1M 1984. This is the default.
API122
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.2 1986
API122M
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.2M 1986
CONSTANT Use a value you enter.
DOWNER
Use calculations specified in L. Downer's 1979 paper Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International Use
Indicates whether the S600+ rounds the calculation results. Click to display all valid values.
OFF
No rounding occurs. This is the
default.
NATIVE
Round to the rules specified in the selected calculation standard.
API Ch.12.2 Part 2
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part 2 Measurement Tickets 1995
API Ch.12.2 Part 3
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part 3 Proving Reports 1998
Flocheck
Round in accordance with Emerson Flowcheck verification software package
ASTM D1250-04 Ch.11
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.11.1 2004 (ASTM D1250-04) method to round to the Petroleum Measurement Table 1980 Tables
DECC 1980
DTI/DECC requirements for Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables. No rounding occurs and an iteration tolerance of 0.0001.
Sets, in degrees Centigrade, the reference temperature for the correction calculations. The default is 15 degrees C.
Sets the coefficient of thermal expansion. The default is 0.
Sets the compressibility factor for the liquid (also known as the beta factor). The default is 0.
6-196
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field PE Calculation
BASE DENSITY BASE DENS (DT) Aromatics Type
Description
Sets the option to calculate the fluid's Equilibrium Vapour Pressure. While this is normally assumed to be 0, you can use it for natural gas liquids (NGL) and similar applications. Click to display all valid values.
OFF
Do not calculate PE value. This
is the default.
GPA TP-15 1988 Use the GPA TP-15 1988
Equation 2
Equation 2
GPA TP-15 2003 Use the GPA TP-15 2003
Equation 2
Equation 2
GPA TP-15 1988 Use the GPA TP-15 1988
Equation 3
Equation 3
GPA TP-15 2003 Use the GPA TP-15 2003
Equation 3
Equation 3
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Note: This button displays only if you select the density to stream option.
Sets the type of aromatics product. Click to display all valid values. The default is Benzene.
Density Units DEG API
S.G.
KG/M3
CH. 11 2004/7 CUST CH. 11 2004/7 Metric NORSOK I-105
ASTM-IP 1952 ASTM D1250 (1952)
Table 6
ASTM D1250 (1952) Table 24
ASTM D1250 (1952) Table 54
n/a
A Crude
ASTM D1250-80 Table 6A
Table 6-4. Standard Density Correction Product Selection
B Refined
ASTM D1250-80 Table 6B
C Special
ASTM D1250-80 Table 6C
D Lube Oils
ASTM D1250-80 Table 6D
Product Type Light 1986
n/a
Light TP25
n/a
Light TP27
n/a
Table Lookup
User lookup table
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
GPA TP- GPA TP-
User
D1250-80 D1250-80 D1250-80 D1250-80
25/ 1988 27 Table
lookup
Table 24A Table 24B Table 24C Table 24D
Table 24E
24E
table
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTMIP-
n/a
GPA TP-
User
D1250-80 D1250-80 D1250-80 D1250-80
API
27 Table
lookup
Table 54A Table 54B Table 54C Table 54D Petroleum
54E
table
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 60A (20'C
Reference Temp)
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 60B (20'C
Reference Temp)
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 60D (20'C
Reference Temp)
Measure ment
tables for light
hydrocarb on liquids
1986
GPA TP27 Table 60E (20'C Reference Temp)
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04
User K0 K1 ASTM D1250-80 Table 6A/ User K0,K1 ASTM D1250-80 Table 24A/ User K0,K1 ASTM D1250-80 Table 54A/ User K0,K1
n/a
n/a
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
3. Click any of the following buttons to define live inputs for the calculations.
Button MTR TEMP
Description Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-197
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button MTR PRESS Pe
Description limits for meter temperature.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter pressure.
Note: This button displays only if you select the meter (SEL TO BASE) stream component.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for equilibrium vapour pressure (Pe).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
4. Click any of the following buttons to define calculation results for the correction calculations.
Button METER DENSITY METER CCF
METER CTL
METER CPL
Description
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the combined correction factor at the meter (CCFm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the temperature of the liquid at the meter (CTLm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the pressure of the liquid at the meter (CPLm)
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
5. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
6. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.8.5
Base Sediment and Water (BSW)
This option provides base sediment and water (BSW) settings for the calculation of the net volume totals.
1. Select BSW from the hierarchy menu. The BSW screen displays.
6-198
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-95. BSW screen
2. Complete the following field.
Field Calc Select
Description
Indicates the standard the S600+ uses for the BSW calculations. Click to display all valid values.
IP VII/2 4.12
Use IP VII/2 4.12 standard. This is the default.
REF METER DENS
Use the meter density; mass = meter dry volume * meter density
REF STD DENS
Use the standard density; mass = std dry volume * std density.
US METHOD 1 Use the meter density; mass = meter wet volume * meter density.
NORSOK I-105
Use Norsok I-105 Appendix D method of computing totals. This must be used in conjunction with Norsok I-105 Density Table Units option.
3. Click any of the following buttons to define BSW parameters.
Button BASE DENSITY
BSW PERCENT
Analogue Inputs
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Click to display an Analog Input dialog box you use to define various values for the analogue input.
Click to display the I/O Setup screen's settings related to the BSW analog input for the selected stream.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Stream Configuration
6-199
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6.9 Liquid - Ultrasonic
These stream settings are specific to liquid ultrasonic applications using turbine meters. When you initially create a configuration, the calculation selections you make determine which calculation-specific screens appear in the hierarchy menu.
Caution
It is extremely unlikely that any one S600+ configuration would contain all the settings discussed in this section. For that reason, several sample configurations demonstrate the settings.
6.9.1 Local Units
This option allows you to override the global K-factor unit as a liquid application may have more than one type of meter, each using different K-factor units.
1. Select Local Units from the hierarchy menu. The Local Units screen displays.
Figure 6-96. Local Units screen
6-200
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Complete the following field.
Field K-factor Units
Description
Indicates the type of units you desire to use and override the system K-factor units of measurement. Click to display all valid values. The default is SYSTEM UNITS.
Note: If you select System Units, the stream uses the global default value.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.9.2 Linearisation
Linearisation settings define the constants and calculation limits for the meter factor and K-factor. The S600+ calculates a meter factor corresponding to the frequency by interpolating the frequency between fixed points and then cross-referencing the result against a lookup table. Linearisation settings also allow you to define alarms. The system activates these alarms when the calculated results for the Meter Factor are not within specified limits.
Notes:
The linearisation curve for Liquid Ultrasonic configurations uses IVOL Flow Rate as the default input for Meter Factor calculations. The ability to change the default is available only with Config600 Pro software.
Batching systems that employ meter factor linearisation with retrospective meter factor adjustments assume that the adjusted value has a "keypad" mode.
To prevent the live metering system from applying a double correction, use either a calculated meter factor or a calculated Kfactor linearisation (that is, only one factor should have a calculated mode).
1. Select Linearisation from the hierarchy menu. The Linearisation screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-201
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-97. Linearisation screen
6-202
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Meter Factors
METER FACTOR K-FACTOR Product Table
Aramco
Meter Factor Method
Description
Sets up to 20 flow rate and values for the meter correction factors.
Flowrate/Freq
Set the flowrate and frequency for each of the meter correction factors.
Value
Set the corresponding values for each of the meter factors.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the respective factor.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the respective factor.
It allows the selection of the "default" Product Table (the in-use functionality) and the 16 other Product Tables in order to set up to 10 flow rates and values for the meter correction factors and K-factors for each product type. When you select a specific product, the meter factors and K-factors update accordingly.
Note: This field displays only if you enable the Product Table when you create the configuration.
Aramco-style linearisation is identical to normal linearisation, but is only used to generate the first meter factor subsequent meter factors are generated from proving.
Notes:
Ignore the fields in the Aramco frame unless directed by technical support.
You must select Product Table with History when you create your configuration in order to use the Prover MF Deviation Check stage.
Normal Flow Rate
Set to zero for standard linearisation. Set to non-zero only for Aramco-style linearisation.
Date of Initial Base Meter Factor
Set the time stamp of the initial base meter factor.
Note: This field displays only if you enable the Product Table with History when you create the configuration.
Selectable between METER FACTOR (values entered as normal) and ERROR PERCENT (Meter Factor entered as a percentage).
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-203
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6.9.3
Observed Density Correction
This option enables you to determine base density from measured density. The system uses base density, coordinated with the standard density correction, to calculate correction values for the temperature of the liquid at the meter (CTLm) and the pressure of the liquid at the meter (CPLm). The system then uses the CTLm and CPLm values to correct the metered volume to reference conditions.
You can measure density at the header, which is associated with the station because it is a common density available to all streams (OBS TEMP and OBS PRESS), or you can measure it at the meter, which is associated with a specific stream (MTR TEMP and MTR PRESS). If you do not measure density, this screen does not display and you enter a density at standard conditions.
1. Select Observed Density Correction from the hierarchy menu. The Observed Density Correction screen displays.
6-204
Figure 6-98. Observed Density Correction screen
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Density Table Units
Iteration Type
Hydrometer Correction Product Type
Description
Indicates the density units the S600+ uses for the density correction calculations. Click to display all valid values.
CH. 11
Use API MPMS Chapter 11.1 2004,
2004/7 CUST Addendum 1, 2007 Imperial Units.
CH. 11 2004/7 METRIC
Use API MPMS Chapter 11.1 2004, Addendum 1, 2007 Metric Units.
DEG API
Use degrees API.
KG/M3
Use kilograms per cubic meter. This is the default.
S.G.
Use specific gravity.
NORSOK I-105
Use Norsok I-105 Appendix D density correction.
Indicates the iteration type for the density correction calculations. Valid values are ASTM (use the iterative temperature and pressure correction as defined by ASTM/API, Chapter 12) or IP2 (use the iterative temperature and pressure correction as defined in IP 2 [ISO 91-1]). The default is ASTM.
Indicates whether the S600+ applies hydrometer correction values to the calculation. Valid values are YES and NO; the default is NO.
Indicates the type of petroleum product involved in the calculation. Click to display all valid values. The default is A CRUDE.
A CRUDE
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59A and 60A.
If SG =,Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
B REFINED Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53B and 54B.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59B and 60B.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement
Stream Configuration
6-205
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-206
Field
Description C SPECIAL
D LUBE OILS
LIGHT 1986 ASTM-IP 1952
Tables 1980 Tables 23B and 24B.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5B and 6B.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If KG/M3 = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Table 54C.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23C and 24C.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5C and 6C.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Note: Table 53C is not implemented as the assumption is made that the base density is already known. This is because Table 53C allows for a keypad entry of Alpha, and if this is known then the base density would be known.
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 53D and 54D.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59D and 60D.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 23D and 24D.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 5D and 6D.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
ASTM-IP-API Petroleum Measurement Tables for Light Hydrocarbon Liquids 1986 Tables 53 and 54.
ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 23, 24, 53 and 54 (Algorithm).
Note: The output is based on the relevant formula or look up tables dependent on the
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Field
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description
density input.
TABLE LOOKUP
USER K0 K1
LIGHT TP25 LIGHT TP27 AROMATICS D1555M-95 AROMATICS D1555M-00 AROMATICS D1555M-04A AROMATICS D1555M-08 STO5.9 08 B1 UGC STO5.9 08 B2 SLH STO5.9 08 B3 WFLH
S600+ reads values from a file in the Config600 3.x/Config/Project Name/extras directory and transfers that data into the S600+ with the configuration file. The specific file selected is based on the value in the Density Table Units field: If SG, values are read from the ASTMIP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 23 file. If DEG API, values are read from the ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 5 file. For KG/M3, please consult technical support. Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field: If KG/M3 = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A with user entered values for K0 and K1. If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A with user entered values for K0 and K1. If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A with user entered values for K0 and K1. GPA TP-25 1998 (API Tables 23E and 24E). GPA TP-27 2007 (API Tables 23E, 24E, 53E, 54E, 59E and 60E). ASTM D1555-95 Table lookup.
ASTM D1555M-00 Table Lookup.
ASTM D1555-04a Calculation.
ASTM D1555M-08 Calculation.
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.1 Unstable Gas Condensate. Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.2 Stable Liquid Hydrocarbon. Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.3 Wide Fraction Liquid Hydrocarbon.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-207
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field CPL Calculation
Rounding
Reference Temp Alpha FFactor
Description
Indicates the specific CPL calculation the S600+ uses. Click to display all valid values.
Note:
This field does not display if you select CH.11 2004 CUST or CH.11 2004 METRIC as the Density Table Units or one of the Gazprom options as Product Type because these standards also specify the CPL calculation.
OFF
No CPL calculation.
API121
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.1 1984.
API1121M
Use API MPMS Ch. 11.2.1M 1984. This is the default.
API122
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.2 1986.
API122M
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.2M 1986.
CONSTANT Use a value you enter.
DOWNER
Use calculations specified in L. Downer's 1979 paper Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International Use
Indicates whether the S600+ rounds the calculation results. Click to display all valid values.
OFF
No rounding occurs. This is the
default.
NATIVE
Round to the rules specified in the selected calculation standard.
API Ch.12.2 Part 2
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part 2 Measurement Tickets 1995
API Ch.12.2 Round in accordance with API MPMS
Part 3
Ch.12.2 Part 3 Proving Reports 1998
Flocheck
Round in accordance with Emerson Flowcheck verification software package
ASTM D1250-04 Ch.11
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.11.1 2004 (ASTM D1250-04) method to round to the Petroleum Measurement Table 1980 Tables
DECC 1980
DTI/DECC requirements for Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables. No rounding occurs and an iteration tolerance of 0.0001.
Indicates, in degrees Centigrade, the reference temperature for the correction calculations. The default is 15 degrees C.
Sets the coefficient of thermal expansion. The default is 0.
Sets the compressibility factor for the liquid (also known as the beta factor). The default is 0.
6-208
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field PE Calculation
Aromatics Type Aromatics CCF
Description
Sets the option to calculate the fluid's Equilibrium Vapour Pressure. While this is normally assumed to be 0, you can use it for natural gas liquids (NGL) and similar applications. Click to display all valid values.
OFF
Do not calculate PE value. This is
the default.
GPA TP-15 1988 Use the GPA TP-15 1988
Equation 2
Equation 2
GPA TP-15 2003 Use the GPA TP-15 2003
Equation 2
Equation 2
GPA TP-15 1988 Use the GPA TP-15 1988
Equation 3
Equation 3
GPA TP-15 2003 Use the GPA TP-15 2003
Equation 3
Equation 3
Sets the type of aromatics product. Click to display all valid values. The default is Benzene.
Sets the method for calculating a combined corrector factory (CCF) for aromatics products. Valid values are Density (calculate using a density you enter) or Table 1 (calculate use a density from an embedded table).
Table 6-5. Observed Density Correction Product Selection
Density Units DEG API
S.G.
KG/M3
CH. 11 2004/7 CUST CH. 11 2004/7 METRIC NORSOK I-105
ASTM-IP 1952 ASTM D1250 (1952)
Table 5 Algorithm
ASTM D1250 (1952) Table 23 Algorithm ASTM D1250 (1952) Table 53 Algorithm
n/a
A Crude
ASTM D1250-80 Table 5A
B Refined
ASTM D1250-80 Table 5B
ASTM D1250-80 Table 23A
ASTM D1250-80 Table 23B
ASTM D1250-80 Table 53A
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 59A (20'C
Reference Temp)
ASTM D1250-80 Table 53B
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 59B (20'C
Reference Temp)
ASTM
ASTM
D1250-04 D1250-04
C Special
n/a
n/a
n/a
ASTM D1250-04
Product Type
D Lube Oils
Light 1986
ASTM
n/a
D1250-80
Table 5D
ASTM
n/a
D1250-80
Table 23D
ASTM D1250-80 Table 53D
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 59D (20'C
Reference Temp)
ASTM D1250-04
ASTMIPAPI
Petroleum Measure
ment tables for
light hydrocarb on liquids
1986
n/a
Light TP25
n/a
GPA TP25/ 1988 Table 23E
n/a
n/a
Light TP27
n/a
GPA TP27
Table 23E
GPA TP27 Table
53E GPA TP27 Table 59E (20'C Reference
Temp)
n/a
n/a
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
n/a
n/a
D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
Table Lookup
User lookup table
User lookup table
User lookup table
User K0 K1
ASTM D1250-80 Table 5A/
User K0,K1
ASTM D1250-80 Table 23A/
User K0,K1
ASTM D1250-80 Table 53A/
User K0,K1
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
3. Click any of the following buttons to define calculation results for the observed density correction calculations.
Button BASE DENSITY
Description
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-209
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button METER CTL
METER CCF
METER CPL
Description
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the temperature of the liquid at the meter (CTLm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the combined correction factor at the meter (CCFm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the pressure of the liquid at the meter (CPLm).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
4. Click any of the following buttons to define live inputs for the observed density correction calculations.
Button METER DENSITY OBS DENS
MTR TEMP
OBS TEMP
MTR PRESS
OBS PRESS
Description Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter temperature.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed temperature.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter pressure.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed pressure.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
6-210
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button Pe
Description
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed equilibrium vapour pressure (Pe).
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
5. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
6. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.9.4
Standard Density Correction
This calculation enables you to use base density to determine the factors for the correction for temperature of the liquid at the meter (CTLm) and the correction for the pressure of the liquid at the meter (CPLm). The system then uses the CTLm and CPLm values to correct the metered volume to reference conditions.
1. Select Standard Density Correction from the hierarchy menu. The Standard Density Correction screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-99. Standard Density Correction screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field
Density Table Units
Description
Indicates the density units the S600+ uses for the density correction calculations. Click to display all valid values.
CH. 11 2004/7 Use API MPMS Ch. 11.1 2004,
CUST
Addendum 1, 2007 Imperial units.
CH. 11 2004/7 Use API MPMS Ch. 11.1 2004,
METRIC
Addendum 1, 2007 Metric Units
DEG.API
Use degrees API.
KG/M3
Use kilograms per cubic meter. This is the default.
S.G.
Use specific gravity.
Stream Configuration
6-211
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Product Type
Description
NORSOK I-105
Use Norsok I-105 Appendix D density correction.
Note: See Table 6-2 for product selection.
Indicates the type of petroleum product involved in the calculation. Click to display all valid values. The default is A Crude.
A CRUDE
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59A and 60A.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust Density Table Units = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
B REFINED Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53B and 54B.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59B and 60B.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23B and 24B.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5B and 6B.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
C SPECIAL Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If KG/M3 = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Table 54C.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23C and 24C.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5C and 6C.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
6-212
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Field
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description
D LUBE OILS
LIGHT 1986 ASTM-IP 1952 TABLE LOOKUP
USER K0 K1
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Note: Table 53C is not implemented as the assumption is made that the base density is already known. This is because Table 53C allows for a keypad entry of Alpha, and if this is known then the base density would be known.
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 53D and 54D.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59D and 60D.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 23D and 24D.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 5D and 6D.
If CH.11 2004/7, Cust = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If CH.11 2004/7, Metric = API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
ASTM-IP-API Petroleum Measurement Tables for Light Hydrocarbon Liquids 1986 Tables 53 and 54.
ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 23, 24, 53 and 54 (Algorithm).
Note: The output is based on the relevant formula or look up tables dependent on the density input.
S600+ reads values from a file in the Config600 3.x/Config/Project Name/extras directory and transfers that data into the S600+ with the configuration file. The specific file selected is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If SG, values are read from the ASTMIP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 23 file.
If DEG API, values are read from the ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 5 file.
For KG/M3, please consult technical support.
Selection is based on the value in the Density Table Units field:
If KG/M3 = Petroleum
Stream Configuration
6-213
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
CPL Calculation
Description
Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A with user entered values for K0 and K1.
If SG = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A with user entered values for K0 and K1.
If DEG API = Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A with user entered values for K0 and K1.
LIGHT TP25 GPA TP-25 1998 (API Tables 23E and 24E).
LIGHT TP27 GPA TP-27 2007 (API Tables 23E, 24E, 53E, 54E, 59E and 60E).
AROMATIC S D1555M95
ASTM D1555-95 Table lookup.
AROMATIC S D1555M00
ASTM D1555M-00 Table Lookup.
AROMATIC S D1555M04A
ASTM D1555-04a Calculation.
AROMATIC S D1555M08
ASTM D1555M-08 Calculation.
STO5.9 08 B1 UGC
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.1 Unstable Gas Condensate.
STO5.9 08 B2 SLH
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.2 Stable Liquid Hydrocarbon.
STO5.9 08 B3 WFLH
Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.3 Wide Fraction Liquid Hydrocarbon.
Indicates the specific CPL calculation the S600+ uses. Click to display all valid values.
Note:
This field does not display if you select CH.11 2004 CUST or CH.11 2004 METRIC as the Density Table Units or one of the Gazprom options as Product Type because these standards also specify the CPL calculation.
OFF
No CPL calculation.
API121
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.1 1984.
API1121M
Use API MPMS Ch. 11.2.1M 1984. This is the default.
API122
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.2 1986.
API122M
Use API MPMS Ch.11.2.2M 1986.
CONSTANT Use a value you enter.
DOWNER
Use calculations specified in L. Downer's 1979 paper Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International Use
6-214
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Rounding
Reference Temp Alpha FFactor PE Calculation
BASE DENSITY BASE DENS (DT) Aromatics Type
Description
Indicates whether the S600+ rounds the calculation results. Click to display all valid values.
OFF
No rounding occurs. This is the
default.
NATIVE
Round to the rules specified in the selected calculation standard.
API Ch.12.2 Part 2
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part 2 Measurement Tickets 1995.
API Ch.12.2 Part 3
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part 3 Proving Reports 1998.
Flocheckl
Round in accordance with Emerson Flocheck verification software package .
ASTM D1250-04 Ch.11
Round in accordance with API MPMS Ch.11.1 2004 (ASTM D1250-04) method to round to the Petroleum Measurement Table 1980 Tables.
DECC 1980
DTI/DECC requirements for Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables. No rounding occurs and an iteration tolerance of 0.0001.
Sets, in degrees Centigrade, the reference temperature for the correction calculations. The default is 15 degrees C.
Sets the coefficient of thermal expansion. The default is 0.
Sets the compressibility factor for the liquid (also known as the beta factor). The default is 0.
Sets the option to calculate the fluid's Equilibrium Vapour Pressure. While this is normally assumed to be 0, you can use it for natural gas liquids (NGL) and similar applications. Click to display all valid values.
OFF
Do not calculate PE value. This
is the default.
GPA TP-15 1988 Use the GPA TP-15 1988
Equation 2
Equation 2.
GPA TP-15 2003 Use the GPA TP-15 2003
Equation 2
Equation 2.
GPA TP-15 1988 Use the GPA TP-15 1988
Equation 3
Equation 3.
GPA TP-15 2003 Use the GPA TP-15 2003
Equation 3
Equation 3.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on the configuration.
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Note: This button displays only if you select the density to stream option.
Sets the type of aromatics product. Click to display all valid values. The default is Benzene.
Stream Configuration
6-215
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Density Units DEG API
S.G.
KG/M3
CH. 11 2004/7 CUST CH. 11 2004/7 Metric NORSOK I-105
Field Aromatics CCF
Description
Sets the method for calculating a combined corrector factory (CCF) for aromatics products. Valid values are Density (calculate using a density you enter) or Table 1 (calculate use a density from an embedded table).
ASTM-IP 1952
ASTM D1250 (1952) Table 6
Table 6-6. Standard Density Correction Product Selection
Product Type
A Crude
B Refined
C Special
D Lube Oils
Light 1986
Light TP25
Light TP27
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
n/a
n/a
D1250-80 D1250-80 D1250-80 D1250-80
Table 6A Table 6B Table 6C Table 6D
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
GPA TP- GPA TP-
D1250
D1250-80 D1250-80 D1250-80 D1250-80
25/ 1988 27 Table
(1952)
Table 24A Table 24B Table 24C Table 24D
Table 24E
24E
Table 24
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTMIP-
n/a
GPA TP-
D1250
D1250-80 D1250-80 D1250-80 D1250-80
API
27 Table
(1952)
Table 54A Table 54B Table 54C Table 54D Petroleum
54E
Table 54
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 60A (20'C
Reference Temp)
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 60B (20'C
Reference Temp)
IP Paper 3 (1988)
Table 60D (20'C
Reference Temp)
Measurem ent tables
for light hydrocarb on liquids
1986
GPA TP27 Table 60E (20'C Reference Temp)
n/a
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
n/a
n/a
D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04
Table Lookup
User lookup table
User lookup table
User lookup table
n/a
User K0 K1 ASTM D1250-80 Table 6A/ User K0,K1 ASTM D1250-80 Table 24A/ User K0,K1 ASTM D1250-80 Table 54A/ User K0,K1
n/a
n/a
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
ASTM
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04 D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
ASTM D1250-04
3. Click any of the following buttons to define live inputs for the standard density correction calculations.
Button MTR TEMP
MTR PRESS
Pe
Description Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter temperature.
Note: This button displays only if you select the meter (SEL TO BASE) stream component.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter pressure.
Note: This button displays only if you select the meter (SEL TO BASE) stream component.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for observed equilibrium vapour pressure (Pe).
Note: This button displays only if you select the meter (SEL TO BASE) stream component.
4. Click any of the following buttons to define calculation results for the standard density correction calculations.
Button
METER DENSITY
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for meter density.
Note: The label on this button changes depending on whether you select the DT TO BASE or SEL TO BASE stream component.
6-216
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Button METER CCF
METER CTL
METER CPL
Description
Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the combined correction factor at the meter (CCFm).
Note: This button displays only if you select the SEL TO BASE stream component.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the temperature of the liquid at the meter (CTLm).
Note: This button displays only if you select the SEL TO BASE stream component.
Displays a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for the correction of the pressure of the liquid at the meter (CPLm).
Note: This button displays only if you select the SEL TO BASE stream component.
5. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
6. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.9.5 Base Sediment and Water (BSW)
This option provides base sediment and water (BSW) settings for the calculation of the net volume totals.
1. Select BSW from the hierarchy menu. The BSW screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure 6-100. BSW screen
2. Complete the following fields
Field Calc Select
Description
Indicates the standard the S600+ uses for the BSW calculations. Click to display all valid values.
Stream Configuration
6-217
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Description IP VII/2 4.12
REF METER DENS REF STD DENS US METHOD 1
NORSOK I-105
Use IP VII/2 4.12 standard. This is the default.
Use the meter density; mass = meter dry volume * meter density
Use the standard density; mass = std dry volume * std density.
Use the meter density; mass = meter wet volume * meter density.
Use Norsok I-105 Appendix D method of computing totals. This must be used in conjunction with the Norsok I-105 Density Table Units option.
3. Click any of the following buttons to define BSW parameters.
Button BASE DENSITY
BSW PERCENT
Analogue Inputs
Description Click to display a Calculation Result dialog box you use to define the mode, keypad value, and the specific alarm limits for base density.
Click to display an Analogue Input dialog box you use to define various values for the analogue input.
Click to display the I/O Setup screen's settings related to the BSW analogue input for the selected stream.
4. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.9.6 Daniel Liquid Ultrasonic
This option provides an interface between the Modbus comms and the generic ultrasonic increments handling.
The S600+ can generate a totals increment from:
Forward or reverse totals from the ultrasonic meter (USM), corrected for spool housing effects by the ultrasonic meter using temperature and pressure input to the ultrasonic meter.
Forward or reverse raw totals not corrected for the spool housing at the USM, but corrected in this task using temperature and pressure measurements input directly to the S600+.
Flowrate calculated by this task from the fluid velocity using the selected temperature and pressure.
Pulses input from the USM. If there is a good comms link, this task produces CTS and CPS values you can use to correct the flow the pulse input generates.
The flowrate read from the USM corresponds to the totals, corrected at the USM or corrected at the S600+, and can be positive or negative. The flowrate output from this task is always positive and a separate object indicates direction. Flow direction for the velocity option is read from the USM flow direction object.
1. Select Daniel Liquid Ultrasonic from the hierarchy menu. The Daniel Liquid Ultrasonic screen displays.
6-218
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 6-101. Daniel Liquid Ultrasonic screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Source
Serial Flow Type
Description
Indicates whether the temperature and pressure inputs are wired to the USM or to the S600+ I/O. Click to display all valid values.
USONIC Use USM as the source for the pressure and temperature. This is the default.
I/O
Use S600+ inputs as the source for the
pressure and temperature.
Note: If you do not connect temperature and pressure to the USM, disable the pressure and temperature expansion correction (CTSm/CPSm) at the USM.
The system assumes that if pressure and temperature are from the USM, the task polls for the corrected flowrate and totals, and if pressure and temperature are from the S600+ the task polls for uncorrected flowrate and totals and applies its own CTS and CPS correction.
If you acquire the pressure and temperature from the S600+ and you do not assign the analogues, then the system uses the corrected totals from the USM, such as it assumes that if you do not assign S600+ I/O they must connect to the USM and are read from USM.
If you configure only temperature or pressure (not both), the system assumes that the nonconfigured value is read from the USM and the correction is done by the S600+ based on the combination of S600+ and serial data.
Sets the method for generating S600+ totals if you select Serial as the Flow Selection option. .
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-219
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-220
Field
Flow Source
Auto switch to Serial Calc Type
Transducer Separation Distance Between the Flanges Number of Bounces
Temperature Coef Calib Temperature Calib Pressure Pipe Inside
Description
TOTALS
Calculate S600+ totals from the USM totals. This is the default.
Note:
The totals format is from Daniel Series 3800 Liquid Ultrasonic Flow Meter Appendix B.8 Oct 2006.
VELOCITY Calculate S600+ flow rate and totals from the USM velocity
Indicates the source for generating flow totals.
SERIAL
Use the serial comms link. This is the default.
PULSE I/P Use the pulse input.
SERIAL + PULSE I/P
Use the serial communications link as default and switch to the pulse input if a fault is detected. Note: This option requires both a
serial interface and pulse input to be configured.
If selected, the S600+ will revert to using serial communications once available.
Note: This option is available only if you select SERIAL + PULSE I/P in the Flow Source.
Sets which calculations the system uses with ultrasonic meters. Click to display all valid calculations.
Daniel Equations
Use Daniel equations for ultrasonic meter calculations.
ISO17089 Equations
Use ISO 17089-1 Annex E (Daniel ultrasonic meters, correction of meter geometry) for ultrasonic meter calculations.
Note: Current implementation of the ISO 17089 standard is only applicable to DanielTM JuniorSonicTM Two-Path Gas Ultrasonic Flow Meters.
Enter the distance, in millimeters, between the first and second transducer.
Note: This field displays only in you select ISO17089 Equations in the Calc Type field.
Enter the distance, in millimeters, between the inlet and outlet flanges of the meter body.
Note: This field displays only in you select ISO17089 Equations in the Calc Type field.
Enter the number of reflections in the path between transducers.
Set to 0 (For Daniel USM)
Note: This field displays only in you select ISO17089 Equations in the Calc Type field.
Sets the temperature coefficient of the pipe. The default is 6e-005.
Indicates the calibrated temperature of the pipe. The default is 20.
Indicates the calibrated pressure of the pipe. The default is 1.
Indicates the inside diameter of the pipe. The default is
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Diameter
Description 300.
Pipe Outside Diameter
Indicates the outside diameter of the pipe. The default is 350.
Young's Modulus
Indicates the Young's Modulus value of the pipe. The default is 2070000.
Poisson's Ratio Indicates the Poisson's Ratio value of the pipe. The default is 0.3.
Comms Settings
Click to display the I/O comms screen.
I/O PRESS
Click to display an Analog Input dialog box you use to define various values for the analog input.
I/O TEMP
Click to display an Analog Input dialog box you use to define various values for the analog input.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A
confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
6.10 Modes of Operation
Following are the modes of operation for the S600+:
Mode Average Average (Density)
Calculated Check
Chromat Compress
Corrected
CV
Description
Uses the value obtained from the average of the last two readings. Used on the Analog and PRT/RTD inputs.
Uses the value obtained from the average of densitometer A and densitometer B. Use when you select the Twin Density densitometer option during generation of the configuration.
Note: This option is not valid if there is only a single densitometer connected to the flow computer.
Uses the calculated value obtained from the relevant calculation for the selected item. This option is often used when there is a simple choice between one calculated result and a fallback keypad value.
Uses a check value to allow a flow computer to be more easily checked. This option is normally used for density and turbine inputs when a check period or frequency can be entered. This option is normally only valid if the flow computer is in maintenance mode.
Uses the "live" values obtained from the chromatograph controller for the selected item.
Uses the value obtained from compressibility calculations for the selected item. This mode uses the calculation you select during the generation of the configuration and is calculated by the same calculation used t produce the compressibility at meter conditions, such as AGA8, ISO6976, and GPA2172-ASTMD3588.
Uses the value that has been corrected from one condition to another. As an example, the pipe diameter will be a calibrated diameter at a known temperature. If the current temperature is different to the calibrated temperature, the corrected pipe diameter will be the diameter corrected to current temperature conditions.
Uses the calorific value and uses the compressibility value at base conditions calculated by ISO6976 or GPA2172ASTMD3588. This mode uses the calculation you select during the generation of the configuration.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-221
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Mode Dens A Dens B
Keypad Lastgood Measured
Description Uses the value obtained from Densitometer A. Used on the Density inputs.
Uses the value obtained from Densitometer B. Used on the Density inputs.
Note: This option is not valid if there is only a single densitometer configured.
Uses a value entered on the keypad or web access server interface or fallback value for the selected item.
Uses the last good value obtained from the input. Used on analog and PRT/RTD inputs.
Uses the measured value from a transmitter for the selected item. The measured value is converted from the raw input prior to use. As an example a pressure input would be first seen by the flow computer as raw current (mA) value but will be displayed as the calculated pressure value according to the scaling of the input.
6.10.1 Density Failure Modes
Following are the failure modes of operation for the S600+:
KF and MF You may enter a 16-point curve for both K-factors and meter factors. Linearisation
The curves consist of pairs of turbine frequency versus K-factor and turbine frequency versus meter factor points and linear interpolation based on turbine frequency is performed between these points.
The polynomial curve fit (US requirement) is not yet implemented.
The in-use K-factor and meter factor may be selected from the linearised (calculated) values or from an operator entered keypad value. Any combination of linearised/keypad K-factor and meter factor is selectable.
On completion of a successful prove, the prover micro is able to download a new K-factor or meter factor and associated turbine frequency to the stream. These values are placed in the K-factor or meter factor curves by overwriting the entries nearest to them in the existing curves.
Density The system supports single or twin densitometer. A densitometer fail frequency is included in the system and if a densitometer falls below this frequency it is deemed to have failed and the corresponding density value is set to zero. This prevents negative densities arising from very low frequency inputs.
Currently there is no densitometer fail upper limit. Any frequency is considered OK. In practice the hardware will be the limiting factor.
On detection of a densitometer failure an alarm occurs:
FAIL A Dens A has failed FAIL B Dens B has failed
These alarms are suppressed in maintenance mode and below low flow cut off. You can enter a densitometer check period for test purposes. This is only possible only in maintenance mode.
Densitometer failure handling:
6-222
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
If KEYPAD is selected, density stays in KEYPAD mode. If DENS A is selected: If transducer A is OK, DENS A remains selected. If transducer A fails, DENS B automatically selected.
Revised January-2021
Stream Configuration
6-223
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
[This page is intentionally left blank.]
6-224
Stream Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 7 Advanced Setup Configuration
In This Chapter
7.1 Conversions/Constants ....................................................................... 7-1 7.1.1 Editing Conversions/Constants ............................................... 7-1
7.2 Totals Descriptors ............................................................................... 7-2 7.2.1 Editing Totals Descriptions...................................................... 7-3
7.3 Alarms ................................................................................................. 7-3 7.3.1 Editing Alarms ......................................................................... 7-4 7.3.2 Alarm Descriptions .................................................................. 7-6
7.4 Security ............................................................................................. 7-13 7.4.1 Editing Security ..................................................................... 7-14 7.4.2 Editing/Deleting Passwords .................................................. 7-15 7.4.3 Data Item Security................................................................. 7-16 7.4.4 PCSetup Editor Login............................................................ 7-18
7.5 Displays/Webserver .......................................................................... 7-19 7.5.1 Editing Displays/Webserver .................................................. 7-20
7.6 Calc Explorer..................................................................................... 7-21 7.6.1 Calc Explorer Options ........................................................... 7-22 7.6.2 Adding an Item ...................................................................... 7-23 7.6.3 Adding All Inputs ................................................................... 7-25 7.6.4 Adding All Outputs................................................................. 7-26 7.6.5 Deleting Items ....................................................................... 7-27 7.6.6 Saving as Bitmaps................................................................. 7-28
You initially define the Advanced settings--which include conversion factors, totals descriptors, alarm mappings, Passwords and stream-tostation mappings--when you create an S600+ configuration file. To edit these settings, select Advanced Setup in the PCSetup Editor.
7.1 Conversions/Constants
S600+ acquires the default conversion factors from the API Publication 2564, Chapter 15. However, you can edit these settings. If the units/conversions have been changed elsewhere, change the values in Conversions including Density of Water.
Note: The S600+ does not perform unit conversions on coefficients. For that reason, always ensure that the coefficients are related to the selected units. For example, if the Gas Orifice Stream units are in degrees Celsius and millimeters, make sure the expansion coefficients for the Orifice and Pipe diameters are values corresponding to m3/mm°C.
7.1.1 Editing Conversions/Constants
To edit the conversion factors:
1. Select Conversions/Constants from the hierarchy menu. The Conversions/Constants screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Advanced Setup Configuration
7-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 7-1. Conversion/Constants screen
2. Review and modify the conversion factor values for Mass, Volume, Temperature, Energy, Length, Misc, and Density.
3. Complete the values in the Pressure pane in psia or bara. The local pressure displays in the engineering units you select.
Notes:
Click Units Editor to switch between the Conversions/Constants screen and the Units option in System Setup.
The Atm-liveP (bara/psia) can be updated to reflect the actual atmospheric pressure value based on the pressure units selected.
4. When you are through defining the settings, click in the hierarchy menu. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply the changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
7.2 Totals Descriptions
Config600 applies any changes you make on the Totals Descriptions screen elsewhere in the configuration and uses these descriptions for totals calculations.
Note: The system displays abbreviated short descriptions on the front panel, remote front panel and reports. The system creates these short descriptions based on the standard descriptions. For example, "STR01 UVOL" becomes "UVOL" and "PRV01 MASS." These short descriptions are only created for the standard descriptions. If you change a description, the system
7-2
Advanced Setup Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
does not create a short description and instead displays the new full description in the short description field.
7.2.1 Editing Totals Descriptors
To edit the descriptor for any of the listed totals: 1. Select the Totals Descriptors component from the hierarchy
menu. The Totals Descriptors screen displays.
Figure 7-2. Totals Descriptor screen
2. Double-click a Description. The system displays an Edit Description dialog box.
7.3 Alarms
Revised January-2021
Figure 7-3. Edit Description dialog box
3. Edit the Description as necessary. 4. Click OK to apply your edits. The Totals Descriptor screen
redisplays showing your new description.
Config600 allows you to individually enable or disable S600+ alarms. You can also establish up to 16 alarm groupings (for ease of polling) or poll alarms individually. Normally you do not need to change the default alarm groups for each alarm.
Config600 defines three default alarm groups.
Advanced Setup Configuration
7-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Computer (Group 1). This group generally includes failures of the computer or the program internally.
Note: This alarm is permanently routed to the watchdog alarm relay on the CPU module's processor board. You cannot remove this routing, since it is implicit in the S600+ code (see Chapter 3, CPU Module, in the FloBoss S600+ Flow Computer Instruction Manual (part D301150X412).
Process (Group 2). This group generally includes limits, such as a high or low Analog Input.
System (Group 3). This group generally includes I/O failures, such as an under-range alarm on an Analog Input.
You can define up to 13 more report groupings.
The Available Alarms dialog box lists all of the system modules, which have associated alarms. Config600 displays the associated alarms as you select the module. A check indicates the enabled alarms.
7.3.1
Editing Alarms
To edit the alarm configuration: :
1. Select the Alarms component from the hierarchy menu. The Alarms screen displays.
Figure 7-4. Alarms screen
7-4
Advanced Setup Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Select Alarm System Operation parameters:
Field Alarm Mode
Print Alarms/Events Archive Alarms/Events Printer Comms
Description
Indicates whether the system reports or timestamps an alarm as cleared once it has been acknowledged. Valid values are:
Latched
Prevents system from reporting or time-stamping an alarm as cleared until it has been acknowledged; the value automatically sets when entering an alarm value and clears when leaving the alarm value.
Note: The default value is Latched.
Unlatched
System reports and time-stamps an alarm as cleared as soon as the error conditions have been resolved; value automatically sets when entering an alarm value and automatically clears when leaving the alarm value.
Note: Selecting Unlatched may result in the alarm log filling up more quickly when fleeting alarms occur.
Select this check box to send alarm reports to the printer as they are raised, cleared, and acknowledged.
Select this check box to save alarm reports to an alarm history file. You can still query on these values.
Click to access the Printer definition on the Comms Links screen in I/O Setup.
3. Define Alarm Archive Size parameters:
Field Automatic
Alarms
Description
Select this check box to automatically save alarms to the Alarm Archive file.
Note: If you select this option, you cannot use the Alarms field to indicate a specific number of archived alarms. Instead, the S600+ archives alarms based on memory resources, as well as the settings in the Event Archive Size fields.
Indicates the total number of alarms you want to save in the Alarm Archive file.
Note: If you complete this field, you cannot use the Automatic function. You may also find that your configuration will not cold start if you do not have enough memory. To resolve this, you may need to reduce the number of alarms saved in the archive file.
Revised January-2021
Advanced Setup Configuration
7-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4. Define Event Archive Size parameters:
Field Automatic
Events
Description
Select this check box to automatically save events to the Event Archive file. If you complete this field, you cannot use the Automatic function.
Note: If you select this option, you cannot use the Events field to indicate a specific number of archived events. Instead, the S600+ archives events based on memory resources, as well as the settings in the Alarm Archive Size fields.
Indicates the total number of events you want to save in the Event Archive file.
Note: If you complete this field, you cannot use the Automatic function. You may also find that your configuration will not cold start if you do not have enough memory. To resolve this, you may need to reduce the number of events saved in the archive file.
5. Select an alarm from the list of available alarms. For example, click on SYS HOST.
6. Enable--or disable--an alarm by selecting each check box.
7. Assign the alarm to a Group, if necessary. Click to display available alarm groupings.
8. If you enable an object's alarm limit, the Limits field displays the value of that limit.
9. When you are through defining alarms, click in the hierarchy menu. A confirmation dialog box displays:
10. Click Yes to apply the changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
7.3.2
Alarm Descriptions
The following alphabetic list describes each alarm code.
Code A-FAIL ABT 1
ADDNLS
B-FAIL BAD PULSE BATT FAIL BLOCKED CALC FAIL CAN FULL
Description Occurs when turbine channel A is either open or has a short circuit.
Occurs when the prover has aborted. The prover displays an error code to assist with diagnosing the cause of the abort.
Occurs if the additionals (ADDitioNaLS) do not add up to 100% or if you have also defined an additional component in the "Splits."
Occurs when turbine channel B is either open or has a short circuit.
Occurs when the number of bad pulses exceeds the alarm threshold.
Occurs when the battery voltage has fallen below 2.8 volts and should be replaced as soon as possible.
Occurs when the flow computer detected that the filter is blocked.
Occurs when a general calculation failure has occurred in this task.
Occurs when the Sampler can is 100% full.
7-6
Advanced Setup Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Code CAN HIGH COLD ST COMMON COMPLETE CONF CSUM CONF ERR
CONFIG CONFIG CHG CRC FAIL CRITICAL
DATA TOUT DENIED
Description
Occurs when the Sampler can contents exceed the high alarm limit.
Occurs when the S600+ has performed a Cold Start, all settings have been re-initialized.
Occurs when any of the alarms in displayed group occur. This is a common alarm if you use only a minimum alarm set. You then need to determine the cause of the problem.
Occurs when the batch total is greater than the required total (that is, the batch has completed).
Occurs when parameters in the configuration (CONFiguration CheckSUM) have changed. The S600+ calculates a configuration checksum as part of its background tasks and compares it against the previous checksum on a rolling basis.
Occurs when there is an error in the configuration (CONFig ERRor). Remove the S600+ from service if this alarm occurs and immediately contact either the person who configured your application or technical support personnel.
Note: This alarm can also occur from the IO Section. If an I/O board CONF ERR occurs, remove the S600+ from service and exchange the faulty I/O board with a replacement before returning the S600+ to service.
Occurs when either the Additionals or Splits (CONFIGuration error) are in error. This alarm is only raised on receipt of a good composition.
Occurs when the configuration held in the Coriolis transmitter has changed.
Occurs when the S600+ receives a bad checksum.
Occurs when S600+ receives either a Critical or NonCritical alarm from an attached 2251, 2551 or 2350 chromatograph controller.
The following alarms have been classified as Critical and Non-Critical on a 2551 EURO or 2350 EURO European chromatograph controller:
CRITICAL
Peak Overflow, Unknown Error, Peak Analysis, Peak Analysis Start, I/O Start Failure, Stack Overflow, Buffer Overflow, Input Out of Range, Preamp Fail, Autostart Fail, Analysis Fail, Autostart Alarm.
NONCRITICAL
ADC 1 Fail, ADC 2 Fail, ADC 3 Fail, Preamp Adjust, Calibration Fail, 24 Hour Average.
The following alarms have been classified as Critical and Non-Critical on a 2251 USA or 2350 USA chromatograph controller:
CRITICAL
Preamp Fail, Analysis Fail.
NONCRITICAL
ADC 1 Lo or Failed, ADC 2 Lo or Failed.
Occurs when the Ultrasonic Meter has failed to communicate within the time-out period. This forces the flowrate to zero.
Occurs when the selection algorithm has determined that a range change is required but no suitable cell is available.
Advanced Setup Configuration
7-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Code DENS LIMIT DEV ERR
DEV OPEN
DISCREP
DL T/OUT
DP INCREMENT I/P ERR DRV GAIN DSCRP
EEPROM FAIL ERROR EVENT 1 EVENT 2 EXCEPTION FAIL A
FAIL B
FAIL CH_A FAIL CH_B FAIL CH_C FAIL CH_D FAIL IO'x' (1-7) FATAL CRD FAIL WARN
Description Occurs when the density of the Coriolis transmitter is out of limits.
Occurs when any of the alarms (DEVice ERRor) in displayed group occur. This is a common alarm if you use only a minimum alarm set. You then need to determine the cause of the problem.
Occurs when the I/O module has failed to communicate correctly with the identified device (DEVice OPEN). A system fault.
Occurs when operating within range and a discrepancy in the engineering values returns from two or more cells.
Occurs when the S600+ has not received a gas composition from the supervisory system within the configured Download Timeout period.
Occurs when differential pressure is not greater than or equal to 0.0.
Occurs when the Drive Gain of the Coriolis transmitter has gone over range.
Occurs when the identified variable exceeds the discrepancy limit (DiSCRePancy) from the check value for longer than the time-out period. This alarm is used where two transducers are checked against each other or where the process variable is checked against previous values.
Occurs when a Checksum failure has been detected in the Coriolis transmitter.
Occurs when the Coriolis transmitter has reported an error.
Occurs when the Coriolis transmitter has reported that Event 1 is ON.
Occurs when the Coriolis transmitter has reported that Event 2 is ON.
Occurs when a Modbus Exception reply has been received from the other computer.
Occurs when the densitometer frequency is below 1Hz, or the measured period is outside the period limits, or the calculated density is negative.
Occurs when the densitometer frequency is below 1Hz, or the measured period is outside the period limits or the calculated density is negative.
For Daniel Gas Ultrasonic meters, occurs when bit 14 of the CHORD A status byte is set.
For Daniel Gas Ultrasonic meters, occurs when bit 14 of the CHORD B status byte is set.
For Daniel Gas Ultrasonic meters, occurs when bit 14 of the CHORD C status byte is set.
For Daniel Gas Ultrasonic meters, occurs when bit 14 of the CHORD D status byte is set.
Occurs when I/O module 'x' has failed to communicate.
For Daniel Gas Ultrasonic meters, occurs when bit 8 of the SYSTEM STATUS byte is set.
Occurs when any of the alarms in displayed group has been raised. This is a common alarm if you use only a minimum alarm set. You then need to determine the cause of the problem.
7-8
Advanced Setup Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Code FIXED VEL FRQ O-RNGE H HH HIGH PRD H/W FAIL ILLEGAL
INTEG-FAIL
INVALID INC I/P ERR IP O-RNGE K_COMP L LL LINK 'x' (1-10) LOW FLOW LOW PRD MA IP ERR MA OP FXD MA OP SAT MOLE DV
MOLE HI
MOLE LO
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description Occurs when a keypad-entered flow velocity is in use.
Occurs when the Coriolis reports the frequency is over range.
Occurs when the In-Use value for the identified variable exceeds the Hi alarm limit.
Occurs when the In-Use value for the identified variable exceeds the Hi Hi alarm limit.
Occurs when the Measured period exceeds (HIGH PeRioD) the high period alarm limit.
For Daniel Gas Ultrasonic meters, occurs when bits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 of the SYSTEM STATUS byte is set.
Occurs when the valve status inputs indicate that the valve is not in a valid position (that is, not Open, Closed, or Moving).
Occurs when the S600+ detects the constant current for the PRT/RTD circuitry to be outside the range 0.8 mA to 1.5 mA (INTEGrity FAIL).
Occurs when the S600+ receives an invalid increment from the Coriolis transmitter.
Occurs when an input to the calculation is outside the valid range.
Occurs when the Coriolis transmitter reports an input is over range.
Occurs when the Keypad composition is outside the limits set on the Gas Composition page on PCSetup.
Occurs when the In-Use value for the identified variable falls below the Low alarm limit.
Occurs when the In-Use value for the identified variable falls below the Low Low alarm limit.
Occurs when slave address 'x' is in fault condition.
Occurs when the flow rate falls below the low flow rate alarm limit set on the sampler page of PCSetup.
Occurs when the Measured period falls below the low period (LOW PeRioD) alarm limit
Occurs when the Coriolis transmitter reports a failure of its analog input.
Occurs when the analog outputs of the Coriolis transmitter have been fixed.
Occurs when the analog outputs on the Coriolis transmitter are saturated.
Occurs when any component (MOLE DeViation) exceeds the deviation limit percentage set up in PCSetup on the Gas Composition page. This alarm is raised for the complete composition; diagnose the component that is in error.
Occurs when any component exceeds the highest acceptable percentage set up in PCSetup on the Gas Composition page. This alarm is raised for the complete composition; diagnose the component that is in error.
Occurs when any component falls below the lowest acceptable percentage set up in PCSetup on the Gas Composition page. This alarm is raised for the complete composition; diagnose the component that is in error.
Advanced Setup Configuration
7-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Code MONITOR
MOVE FAIL MOVE UNCM NCRITICAL NEG FLOW NO PERMIT O-FLOW O-RANGE
O/P ERR OVERFLOW PATH 1 ERROR PATH 2 ERROR PATH 3 ERROR PATH 4 ERROR PIC FAIL
PR OP FXD PR OP SAT PRE WARN PRINTING ERR
PWR RESET RESET
Description Occurs when the software watchdog time has timedout for this task.
Note: If this alarm is raised on a Modbus Master TCP task, it indicates that the communications link has been broken (i.e. the S600+ master cannot open a connection to the slave) and has therefore caused the software watchdog to time out.
Occurs when the valve has not reached the required position within the allowable time-out period.
Occurs when the valve has moved position without any command being issued (MOVE UNCoMmanded).
Refer to CRITICAL.
Not used.
Occurs when an item in the configuration is locked or write protected by the flow computer.
Occurs when the high frequency limit has been exceeded. Some pulses may be unaccounted for.
Occurs when the raw input exceeds acceptable values. For Analog Inputs this value can be entered but defaults to 20.5 mA. For PRT/RTD inputs the limit is 216 ohms. For the case of the Analog Outputs, the value to be output is higher than the high scale value.
Occurs when an output to the calculation is outside the valid range.
Occurs when the Pulse Output cannot match the required pulse rate or when the number of pulses to be output exceeds the pulse reservoir.
For SICK Ultrasonic meters occurs when bit 5 of the SYSTEM STATUS byte is set.
For SICK Ultrasonic meters occurs when bit 6 of the SYSTEM STATUS byte is set.
For SICK Ultrasonic meters occurs when bit 7 of the SYSTEM STATUS byte is set.
For SICK Ultrasonic meters occurs when bit 8 of the SYSTEM STATUS byte is set.
Occurs when the S600+ detects a hardware failure of the indicated I/O board (I/O Board Hardware Failure). If this alarm occurs, remove the S600+ from service and replace the faulty I/O board before returning the S600+ to service.
Occurs when the primary Analog Output of the Coriolis transmitter is in fixed mode.
Occurs when the primary Analog Output of the Coriolis transmitter is saturated.
Occurs when a batch is at 'n'% where 'n' is set on the Batching page in PCSetup.
Occurs when the internal printer queue is filled. This may clear if the printer is made available but some data may have been lost.
Note: When requesting report printouts, a five second delay should be observed between print requests to allow the report to be generated.
Occurs when a power reset occurs on the Coriolis transmitter.
Not used.
7-10
Advanced Setup Configuration
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Code RAM FAIL
ROM FAIL
ROC RT INT RX FAIL SAMPLER SCALING SEAL FAIL SEC BREACH SEC OP SAT SEC OP FXD SEL TO BASE I/P ERR
Description Occurs if the S600+ detects a discrepancy between the data written to and from RAM. The S600+ continually writes data to RAM and reads it back for comparison. If this alarm occurs, remove the S600+ from service. Note: This alarm is also used to check the I/O board
RAM; the alarm indicates the area of failure.
Occurs if the S600+ detects a discrepancy between the S600+-calculated checksum and a preset checksum. If this alarm occurs, remove the S600+ from service. Note: This alarm is also used to check the I/O board
ROM; the alarm indicates the area of failure.
Occurs when the ROC (Rate Of Change) exceeds the alarm limit for the identified variable.
Occurs when the Coriolis transmitter has had a Real Time interrupt failure.
Occurs when the reply from the slave computer has not been received within the time-out period.
Occurs when the sampler has been commanded to reset by the batching, but has not reset.
Occurs when the scaling values for the identified variable are either the same or the high scale value is lower than the low scale value.
Occurs when the valve reports that it has not sealed during the test period.
Occurs when a security breach has been detected in the Coriolis meter.
Occurs when the secondary Analog Output of the Coriolis transmitter is saturated.
Occurs when the secondary Analog Output of the Coriolis transmitter is in fixed mode.
Occurs when a density input is out of range. Possible inputs include: Density Units Product Type CPL Calc Type Rounding Enable REF Temperature Alpha FFactor Iteration Type HYC Enable OBS Density OBS Temp OBS Press Pe Aromatic Product Aromatic Density PE100 PE Calc Type
The limits to these inputs are user-defined based on the data type.
Advanced Setup Configuration
7-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Code SELECT SELF CALIB SENS FAIL SLUG FLOW SPEED
SPLITS STOPPED TASK ERR TASK FAIL TEMP FAIL TOT CORR
TOT PART
TOT RES TOT ROLL OVR
TOT ROLL UDR
TPU FAIL
TSK ERR
TSK OFLOW TX CONFIG TX ELEC TX FAIL
U-RANGE
Description Occurs when all cells have failed (a fatal cell selection error) or are in Keypad mode.
Occurs when the Coriolis transmitter performs a selfcalibration.
Occurs when a Sensor failure is detected at the Coriolis transmitter.
Occurs when the Coriolis transmitter reports slug flow.
Occurs when the Pulse Output for the sampler cannot match the required pulse rate. The number of pulses to be output has exceeded the pulse reservoir.
Occurs if the total of the splits does not equal 100%.
Occurs when the sampler has stopped.
Occurs when a task within the I/O module detects an error.
Occurs when a task within the I/O board fails.
Occurs when the Coriolis temperature sensor fails.
Occurs when all three totals tri-registers disagree (TOTals CORRupt). Totalization is inhibited. Take the S600+ out of service and perform a Totals Reset.
Occurs when only two of the three totals tri-registers agree (TOTals PARTially corrupt). The S600+ corrects the third register automatically and clears the alarm.
Occurs when the totals have been reset to zero (TOTals RESet).
Occurs when at least one of the totals within the S600+ reaches its maximum value and rolls over to zero (TOTals ROLL OVeR).
Occurs when at least one of the totals within the S600+ rolls under zero (TOTals ROLL UnDeR).
Note: This should occur only if using reverse totals.
Occurs when the S600+ detects a hardware failure of the indicated I/O module (I/O module hardware failure system fault).
Note: If this alarm occurs, remove the S600+ from service and replace the I/O module before returning the S600+ to service.
Occurs when any of the alarms in displayed group occur (TaSK ERRor). This is a common alarm if you use only a minimum alarm set. You then need to determine the cause of the problem.
Occurs when the S600+ traps an attempt to write an infinite number.
Occurs when the Coriolis transmitter reports that it is not configured.
Occurs when the Coriolis transmitter reports an electronics failure.
Occurs when the S600+ is unable to place the information to the flow computer hardware (system fault).
Occurs when the raw input falls below acceptable values. For Analog Inputs this value can be entered but defaults to 3.5 mA. For PRT/RTD inputs the limit is 60 ohms. For the case of the Analog Outputs, the value to be output is lower than the low scale value.
7-12
Advanced Setup Configuration
Revised January-2021
7.4 Security
Revised January-2021
Code UNAVAIL
UNDEFINED VCONE I/P
WARM ST
WARN CH_A WARN CH_B WARN CH_C WARN CH_D WARNING ZERO DIV ZERO LOW ZERO HIGH ZERO NOISE ZERO OP ZERO PROG
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description Occurs when the signal for Local or Remote control from the valve indicates the valve is in local control (UNAVAILable).
Occurs when the Coriolis transmitter reports an undefined error.
Occurs when a V-Cone input is out of range. Possible cause include: Differential pressure is not greater than or equal to
0.0 Gas density is not greater than or equal to 0.0 (pipe diameter ration) ^4 is not greater than or equal
to 1.0
Occurs when the S600+ performs a Warm Start, possibly due to a power dip or software failure. Settings have been retained. In the I/O alarms section this alarm indicates if an I/O board has restarted.
For Daniel Gas Ultrasonic meters, occurs when bit 13 of the CHORD A status byte is set.
For Daniel Gas Ultrasonic meters, occurs when bit 13 of the CHORD B status byte is set.
For Daniel Gas Ultrasonic meters, occurs when bit 13 of the CHORD C status byte is set.
For Daniel Gas Ultrasonic meters, occurs when bit 13 of the CHORD D status byte is set.
Occurs when at least one cell has failed or is in Keypad mode.
Occurs when the S600+ traps an attempt to divide by zero.
Occurs when the zero value of the Coriolis transmitter is too low.
Occurs when the zero value of the Coriolis transmitter is too high.
Occurs when the signal into the Coriolis transmitter is too noisy.
Occurs when the Coriolis transmitter has failed in its zeroing operations.
Occurs when the Coriolis transmitter is currently zeroing.
The Config600 suite of programs is protected by a multi-level security system that both restricts access to authorised system users and determines which data items system users can enter or modify. Each system user is assigned a security access Level (between 1 and 9) and a password. Security access Level 1 provides the largest number of privileges; Level 9 provides the fewest number of privileges. Access to any one level provides access to all the other less-privileged levels (that is, Level 3 access has the privileges of Levels 4 through 9 but is denied privileges of Levels 2 and 1).
When you send the configuration to the S600+, the security settings (including the user access levels) become the login Passwords for access via the front panel and webserver.
Advanced Setup Configuration
7-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
You can define a maximum of 50 users on each configuration file. You cannot repeat the username or S600+ password for any user, since the S600+ uses this value to determine who logged in when changes are made through the S600+ front panel or PCSetup.
Note: By default, PCSetup opens with the user logged on a Level 1 security. To activate the security on PCSetup, you must enter a username and a PCSetup password for Level 1 security (see Figure 7-5). The PCSetup program does not allow you to delete Level 1 logins.
If you do not enable Level 1 security at PCSetup, this allows anyone to modify the configuration at PCSetup. The default S600+ front panel password is configured so that only authorized personnel can change data at the S600+ front panel.
Note: With Security Level 1, any items you change using the S600+ front panel create checksum alarms. Any objects at Security Level 1 change the NMI checksum. Security Level 1 is activated when jumper P3 is OFF (see Chapter 3, CPU Module, in the FloBoss S600+ Flow Computer Instruction Manual, part D301150X412).
7.4.1 Editing Security
To edit security settings:
1. Select the Security hierarchy menu. The Security screen displays.
Figure 7-5. Security screen
2. Using the Security for Data Editing pane, complete the Required Level field to assign an access security level (1 through 9) to each of the PCSetup data item groups. Remember that 1 is the most comprehensive level of access and 9 is the most restrictive level of access.
7-14
Advanced Setup Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: Click Displays/Webserver to switch between this screen and the Displays/Webserver screen. This helps you determine which functions should have webserver access.
3. Click Add in the Passwords pane to add a Password for an additional user. The Passwords dialog box displays.
Figure 7-6. Passwords dialog box
4. Complete the following fields:
Field Username
PC Password
S600 Password Security Level
Description Enter a name the user types to access the relevant program. The S600+ also prints this Username on event logs to show which user logged in to change parameters.
Note: This value is case-sensitive.
Enter an alphanumeric value up to 15 characters in length to log on to the Config600 software applications. For security, a password should be a random combination of numbers and upper- and lower-case letters.
Note: This value is case-sensitive.
Enter a number (click or to increase or decrease the values) the user must provide to change parameters using the S600+ front panel.
Enter a number (between 9 and 1) to indicate the Security Level associated with this user ID.
5. Click OK to apply the changes. The Security screen displays, showing the user ID you have just defined.
7.4.2 Editing/Deleting Passwords
As administrator, you may need to edit, reset, or remove system Passwords:
1. Click a username in the Passwords pane. Config600 adds two buttons (Edit and Delete) to the pane.
Revised January-2021
Advanced Setup Configuration
7-15
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 7-7. Security screen, Password Edits
2. Click Edit to display the Passwords dialog box for that username.
Note: You can also double-click the username to immediately display the Passwords dialog box.
Figure 7-8. Passwords dialog box
Note: To delete a password, click Delete. Config600 removes the password from the Passwords pane.
3. Modify the content as necessary. 4. Click OK to apply your changes. The Security screen displays.
7.4.3 Data Item Security
You can also assign security levels to individual data items on the hierarchy menu. This provides an additional level of system security.
Note: Because of the variation in the nature of data items, this process varies slightly from data item to data item. This section is presented as an example to familiarize you with the general concept of applying security to data items.
7-16
Advanced Setup Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1. Select a component from the hierarchy menu (in this example, select Units from the System Setup hierarchy).
Figure 7-9. Data Item Security
2. Select Edit > Security (using the menu bar at the top of the screen). The Security dialog box (in this case, security for units) displays.
Revised January-2021
Advanced Setup Configuration
7-17
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 7-10. Units Security dialog box
3. Review the current Security Levels. If appropriate, select a data point from the menu. Config600 completes the Security Level field with that item's current security level.
Figure 7-11. Units Security Level
4. Change the value in the Security Level field, if necessary. 5. Click Apply to apply the change. 6. Once the new value displays in the Security Level column, click
Done to close the dialog box and redisplay the data item screen.
7.4.4 PCSetup Editor Login
If you enable Level 1 security, Config600 restricts access to the PCSetup Editor by a login procedure. You cannot make any changes
7-18
Advanced Setup Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
or perform any functions in PCSetup Editor until you complete login. Each system user has an assigned security Level that determines the type of data that user can enter or modify. Login To log in to PCSetup: 1. Select File > Login from the PCSetup menu bar. The Login dialog
box displays.
Note: You can also click the Login icon to open the Login dialog box. You see this same dialog box when you open a configuration file using the PCSetup Editor.
Figure 7-12. Login dialog box
2. Enter your username. 3. Enter your case-sensitive password. Config600 uses asterisks (***)
to mask the actual characters you type. 4. Click OK. If Config600 recognizes your username and password,
the PCSetup screen displays. Checksum Before sending a configuration file to the S600+, Config600 checks
the configuration to make sure it has not been manually modified. Config600 accomplishes this by calculating a checksum on the file. If the calculated and recorded checksums do not match, Config600 displays a warning message. To repair the configuration checksum, you must login to PCSetup with the Level 1 username and password. Once Config600 recognizes and accepts that username and password, it saves the file with the correct checksum. Click Cancel to stop Config600 from correcting the checksum.
Note: You cannot transfer a configuration from the host PC to the S600+ with an incorrect checksum.
7.5 Displays/Webserver
Use the Displays/Webserver option to determine what information each security level (1-9) may access using the webserver.
Once you have assigned users to an access level, verify (and modify, if
Caution necessary) the amount of information available to them.
Note: Click Security to switch between this screen and the Security screen. This helps you determine which functions should have webserver access.
Revised January-2021
Advanced Setup Configuration
7-19
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
7.5.1 Editing Displays/Webserver
To edit displays and webserver access: 1. Select the Displays/Webserver component from the hierarchy
menu. The Displays/Webserver screen displays.
Figure 7-13. Displays/Webserver screen
2. Indicate webserver access options by selecting the appropriate check box.
Option Displays Reports
Alarm Accept Ident
Diagnostics Remote Access
Print
Language Support Auto hide unused displays
Description Permit access to the S600+ display layouts. View history reports and request instantaneous reports. Permit alarm accepting. Change data as though logged in through the S600+ front panel (according to your login security Level). View diagnostics on S600+ calculations. Perform system diagnostics. Note: This option is reserved only for use by technical
support personnel. Leave all settings at the default values. Adds a "Print" button (and printing capability) to webserver-displayed pages. Note: When requesting report printouts, a five second delay should be observed between print requests to allow the report to be generated. Select the default language.
Select to hide the screens that do not have data.
7-20
Advanced Setup Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Option Security
Description
Click to display the PCSetup > Advanced Setup > Security screen.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you are through editing this screen. A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click Yes to apply the changes. The Displays/Webserver screen displays.
7.6 Calc Explorer
Use the Calc Explorer option to access a graphical tool that enables you to analyze how system components link together.
Note: Although the option is discussed as part of the Advanced Setup options, you can also access this feature at any time by clicking the Calc Explorer icon on the PCSetup screen's menu bar.
1. You can start Calc Explorer in several ways:
Click the Calc Explorer icon on the PCSetup Editor's toolbar.
Select the Calc Explorer component from the hierarchy menu.
The Calc Explorer screen displays.
Figure 7-14. Calc Explorer (blank)
2. Right-click in the right-hand panel to display a menu of Calc Explorer options.
Revised January-2021
Advanced Setup Configuration
7-21
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 7-15. Calc Explorer menu
7.6.1
Calc Explorer Options
Once you add an item and right-click on it, the system displays a menu of Calc Explorer options. The following table describes the all options on that menu.
Figure 7-16. Calc Explorer Menu Options
Note: This menu modifies its content to reflect the available inputs or outputs of any item you select.
Option Add Input
Description Displays a list of all defined inputs for the selected item. You can add inputs individually.
Note: This menu option displays only if the selected item has defined inputs.
7-22
Advanced Setup Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Option Add Output
New Item Delete Item(s)
Add All Inputs
Add All Outputs Auto Unit Explore --> Auto Unit Explore <-Clear All Zoom In Zoom Out Save As Bitmap
Description Displays a list of all defined outputs for the selected item. You can add outputs individually.
Note: This menu option displays only if the selected item has defined outputs.
Displays a Connect Wizard dialog box you use to add system components ("items") to the Calc Explorer graphic.
Removes the selected item from the Calc Explorer graphic.
Note: To select more than one item, place the cursor in a blank area of the screen. Click and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the cursor. This creates a box. Drag the box over one or more items. Note that their border becomes a dashed line, indicating you have selected them. Release the right mouse button and left-click any selected item to display the menu.
Adds all inputs related to the selected item to the Calc Explorer graphic.
Note: This option is grayed out if the selected item does not have defined inputs.
Adds all outputs related to the selected item to the Calc Explorer graphic.
Note: This option is grayed out if the selected item does not have defined outputs.
Locates and displays calculations where an input to a calculation matches the inputs of the selected item.
Note: This menu option displays only if the selected item has units.
Locates and displays outputs of calculations that match the units of the selected item.
Note: This menu option displays only if the selected item has units.
Removes all items from the Calc Explorer graphic.
Reduces the Calc Explorer graphic to its default display size.
Magnifies the Calc Explorer graphic.
Saves the displayed Calc Explorer graphic as a bitmap (CalcExplorer.bmp) in the folder housing the Config600 software.
Note: Config600 uses the same name for each bitmap. To save bitmaps of several configurations, you must uniquely rename each bitmap.
7.6.2 Adding an Item
Use this procedure to add a new item to the Calc Explorer screen.
1. Click New Item on the menu. The Connect Wizard displays.
Revised January-2021
Advanced Setup Configuration
7-23
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 7-17. Connect Wizard 2. Select an option from each of the three columns and click OK.
Calc Explorer adds the defined item to the screen.
Figure 7-18. Newly Added Item
Notes:
When you first add an item, Calc Explorer gives it a dashed (not solid) outline (see Figure 7-18). This indicates that the item is currently selected. When you right-click a selected item, the Calc Explorer menu displays for that item. When you add a second item, that item receives the dashed outline. The previous item now has a solid outline, indicating it is no longer selected.
You can move any item on the graphic to any location. Place the cursor over the item, hold down the left-click button, and drag the item to its new location. This enables you to organize the items you place on the Calc Explorer screen.
7-24
Advanced Setup Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
7.6.3 Adding All Inputs
Use this option to add all defined inputs for the selected item to the Calc Explorer screen. 1. Right-click an item to display the Calc Explorer menu.
Figure 7-19. Adding Inputs
2. Click Add All Inputs. The Calc Explorer displays all inputs for the selected item.
Figure 7-20. Added Inputs
Revised January-2021
Advanced Setup Configuration
7-25
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual Notes:
Use the Add Input menu option to add individual inputs to the screen.
Shaded (or gray) items indicate calculation tables. Unshaded (or white) items indicate inputs or outputs.
A thick line connecting items indicates that the item has many values (such as arrays).
7.6.4 Adding All Outputs
Use this option to add all defined outputs for the selected item to the Calc Explorer graphic. 1. Right-click an item to display the Calc Explorer menu.
Figure 7-21. Adding Outputs 2. Click Add All Outputs. The Calc Explorer displays all outputs for
the selected item.
7-26
Advanced Setup Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 7-22. Added Outputs
Note: Use the Add Output menu option to add individual outputs to the screen.
7.6.5 Deleting Items
Use this option to remove one or more selected items from the Calc Explorer screen.
Note: Calc Explorer does not have an "undo" feature. Once you delete an item, you can only re-add it.
1. Right-click an item to select it and display the menu.
2. Click Delete Item(s). The menu closes and the item disappears from the screen.
To delete more than one item:
1. Move the cursor in a blank area of the screen near the items you intend to delete.
2. Click and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the cursor. This creates a box.
3. Drag the box over one or more items. Note that as the box touches any item, the border of that item becomes a dashed line, indicating you have selected that item.
4. Release the right mouse button and left-click any of the selected items to display the menu.
5. Click Delete Item(s) to delete all of the selected items.
Note: Use the Clear All menu option to remove all items from the Calc Explorer screen.
Revised January-2021
Advanced Setup Configuration
7-27
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
7.6.6 Saving as Bitmaps
Use this option to save the current contents of the Calc Explorer screen as a bitmap (.BMP) graphic on your PC's hard drive.
Config600 saves the bitmap (as the file CalcExplorer.bmp) in the directory in which you have installed the Config600 software. If you intend to create bitmaps of several images, rename the CalcExplorer.bmp file immediately after you capture the image. Otherwise Config600 reuses the CalcExplorer.bmp filename and overwrites the most recent file.
1. Right-click in the screen to display the Calc Explorer menu.
Figure 7-23. Saving a Bitmap
Note: Depending on the complexity and size of your Calc Explorer image, you may want to maximize the screen size.
2. Click Save As Bitmap. The Calc Explorer menu closes and the saves the bitmap image on your PC's hard drive.
7-28
Advanced Setup Configuration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 8 System Editor
In This Chapter
8.1 Accessing the System Editor .............................................................. 8-2 8.2 The S600+ Database .......................................................................... 8-3
8.2.1 Objects .................................................................................... 8-4 8.2.2 Tables...................................................................................... 8-5 8.3 Navigating the System Editor.............................................................. 8-5 8.3.1 Finding Objects ....................................................................... 8-6 8.3.2 The System Editor Icon Bar .................................................... 8-6 8.3.3 Special Edit ............................................................................. 8-7 8.3.4 Edit Dialog ............................................................................... 8-8 8.3.5 Asterisks/No Asterisks............................................................. 8-9 8.4 General Guidelines ........................................................................... 8-10
Note: This editor is available only with the Config600 Pro software.
The System Editor enables you to configure the S600+ database. Just as the PCSetup Editor provides a guided interface for editing data points in a configuration, the System Editor enables the advanced user to create and modify data points. Using the System Editor, you can create, remove, or change database objects and tables.
Caution
This chapter is intended for use in conjunction with materials from the RA901 Advanced Config600 training course. That training is critical to understanding the concepts in this chapter. Unless you have completed that training, do not attempt to use the material in this chapter as a sole means of learning about the System Editor.
The System Editor does not have a Configuration Generator. Instead, use the System Editor to edit existing configurations. Through the System Editor, you can: Change units. Change report information. Change I/O. Change communications tasks and links. Enable and disable alarms. Configure alarms object by object. Change cold start values (for example, densitometer constants). Change descriptors. Configure existing calculations. Create and delete calculations. Change passwords. Create and delete database objects.
Revised January-2021
System Editor
8-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
8.1 Accessing the System Editor
Use this process to open and select a configuration file to edit. 1. Select Start > Programs > Config600 3.3 > System Editor. A
blank System Editor screen displays.
Figure 8-1. System Editor screen (blank)
Note: You can also define a shortcut for your desktop to easily access this application.
2. Select a specific configuration file. From the menu bar, select File > Open. The Open dialog box displays.
Figure 8-2. Open dialog box
3. Open the Configs folder (in which Config600 stores all configuration files) and click Open.
4. Select the name of a configuration file to edit and click Open. Config600 opens another dialog box that shows the contents of that folder.
8-2
System Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 8-3. Open Dialog box (with .cfg file)
5. Double-click the S600conf.cfg file.
Note: You must provide a username and password if the configuration file has password protection.
6. Once you select a configuration (.CFG) file, the System Editor opens:
Figure 8-4. System Editor screen (loaded)
8.2 The S600+ Database
The S600+ database is divided into sections. Each section contains a selection of available data types. Within the sections, the database item locations are numbered: System.
Revised January-2021
System Editor
8-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
I/O Boards 1 to 7. Stations 1 and 2. Streams 1 to 10.
Caution
If you add any new objects to the database, the System Editor automatically re-indexes the Modbus map, displays, and reports. However, the System Editor does not re-index any LogiCalc programs, which may cause LogiCalc programs to stop functioning.
Note: For further information about the structure of the database, refer to Chapter 12, Report Editor.
8.2.1
Objects
The S600+ database contains objects and tables. The following list identifies the objects in the S600+database. Your configuration may or may not contain all these objects, depending on your application.
Cumulative Totals. Period Totals. Analog Inputs. PRT/RTD Inputs. Pulse Inputs. Frequency Inputs. Digital I/Os. Analog Outputs. Pulse Outputs. Keypad Integers. Keypad Integer Arrays. Keypad Reals. Keypad Real Arrays.
Keypad Strings. Calculation Results. Configuration Items. System Objects. DP Stacks. PID Control Loops. Alarm Items. Multi-States. Prove Controls. Array Texts. HART Devices. Event History. Alarm History.
Some objects can be associated with tables. For example, the `VALUE' of a keypad integer can be linked to a text string. See the example below for the Calculation Alarm object. The Mod_Tab_id object is associated with Mode Table #3 (Calculated or Keypad).
CALCALM #30 DESC Tab_units_id Mod_tab_id Obj_almitem_id INUSE and such.
TRUTH TABLE #21
1
MJ/kg
2
GJ/kg
...
ALARM ITEM #141
1
STATUS
2
UNACC
3
INHIBIT
MODE TABLE #3
1
CALCULATED
5
KEYPAD
Figure 8-5. Object/Table Relationship
8-4
System Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
8.2.2 Tables
Tables map an integer to a text string. For example, when describing AGA8 calculations, you can link the options Detail, Gross 1 and Gross 2 by a Truth table to the integers 0, 1, and 2, respectively. The database can then use the integer value and refer back to the Truth table for its meaning.
The following list presents some of the tables in the S600+database. Your configuration may or may not contain all these tables, depending on your application.
Turbine Meter Setup. Truth Tables.
Digital Input.
Alarm Text.
Totalisation.
Calculation.
Task Control.
Prover Setup.
Digital Output.
Password.
Internal Index.
I/O Assignment.
Mode Text.
HART.
8.3 Navigating the System Editor
The System Editor splits the S600+ database into four categories: System. I/O Boards. Stations. Streams.
Depending on the system configuration, you may have multiple I/Os, Stations, and Streams.
You access these four database categories through the hierarchy menu, presented in the window's left-hand pane. As with the PCSetup Editor, the System Editor window consists of two panes. Clicking on an item in the hierarchy menu in the left-hand pane displays a screen in the right-hand pane.
Figure 8-6. System Editor screen
Revised January-2021
System Editor
8-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Unique to the System Editor is its "spreadsheet-style" presentation of the right-hand pane. Each object and table has its own spreadsheet screen with headings appropriate to that object or table. Right-clicking on a line in the right-hand pane displays a shortcut menu with the options Edit, Special Edit (for calculation tables only), Insert (insert above), Append (insert below), and Delete. Use these menu functions to manage the object or table information.
Each line in the right-hand pane presents one object or table entry. The spreadsheet headings indicate the number (ID), the descriptor (DESC), and several parameters for that specific object or table entry.
8.3.1
Finding Objects
Finding objects in the System Editor requires that you think about what the object is.
For example, if you are looking for Analog Channel 3, first determine on which I/O board the channel is located (in this example, I/O Board 1). Expand the I/O Board 1 option in the hierarchy menu and highlight ADC. Alternately, if you are looking for the Pipe Material data item, realize that it is a Keypad Integer value. Determine the stream (Stream 1 in this example). When you expand the Stream 1 option, highlight KPINT (for this example) to find it as item ID #262.
8.3.2 The System Editor Icon Bar
The System Editor's icon bar provides icons for the following actions and shortcuts:
Icon
Meaning Open Configuration. Click to open the Select Config dialog box.
Save Configuration. Click to save the current configuration with the current configuration file name.
Cut, Copy and Paste. These clipboard icons are available if not greyed out. Click Cut to remove the selection from the clipboard. Click Copy to store the selection to the clipboard. Click Paste to insert the contents of the clipboard to the cursor's location.
Relative IDs. Click to change the way the System Editor displays identification numbers. With Rel IDs off, the numbering shows the object's absolute reference (that is, the absolute number of the object in a global list referenced from 0). With Rel IDs on, the list numbering becomes relative to the section you are currently displaying.
For example, the KPINTs start in the IO Board section as ID 66 (the 67th entry in the list of KPINTs). Clicking the Rel ID button changes this number to 0, since it now becomes the first entry in this section.
This icon is particularly useful in the LogiCalc Editor. LogiCalc referencing is relatively-based, so KPINT 66 displays as I/O Board 1, Rel ID 0.
Calc Explorer. Click to open the Calc Explorer utility, and graphically examine calculation relationships between system components.
Print. Click to open the Print dialog box. Use this icon to print an entire configuration to a host printer.
8-6
System Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Icon
Meaning
About. Click to open the About Config600 dialog box that lists the software version and copyright information.
8.3.3 Special Edit
The Special Edit dialog box for calculation tables allows you to edit an existing calculation or build a new calculation. You can configure the calculation's description, sources (Inputs), type, and destinations (Outputs).
To access this dialog box, double-click the Calculation table or rightclick the Special Edit option on the shortcut menu (Figure 8-6). The Calc Editor dialog box displays (see Figure 8-7).
To switch from inputs settings to outputs settings, click the button (located below the word "Inputs" or the word "Outputs" on the Calc Editor screen, Figure 8-7). For each source or destination in the calculation, you can edit the Description, select the Type, assign it to an Object, enter a Field, and enter a Bit No. These all correspond to the Spreadsheet style headings for the calculation table screen.
You can also add and delete sources and destinations.
The Calc Editor does not have an Undo feature. If you mistakenly delete
Caution a source or destination, you must manually re-create it.
Figure 8-7. Calc Editor dialog box To add a new input/output calculation:
Revised January-2021
System Editor
8-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1. Click Add (on the right-hand side of the dialog box). The Calc Editor screen adds a new numbered line under Inputs or Outputs. Note: To edit an existing calculation, skip step 1 and click the number of the line.
2. Click the number for the new line. The Connect Wizard displays.
Figure 8-8. Connect Wizard
Note: Although you can individually select calculation components on the Calc Editor dialog box, using the Connect Wizard is the safest--and most accurate--way of selecting calculation components.
3. Select, from left to right, the calculations components.
4. Click OK when you are done. The Calc Editor dialog box redisplays, showing the newly defined calculation line.
8.3.4 Edit Dialog
When you select Edit from the shortcut menu, the Edit dialog box appears. Use it to edit or create a new row in the spreadsheet-style screen or to configure the data point, text string, or value in each column of the spreadsheet-style screen. The Columns field lists the headings for this object/table's screen. Clicking on a heading from this list displays the Data fields for that object or table. The Data (ID:,Col:) field in the upper right corner provides the location in the spreadsheet for this data point. The Data field shows the current assignment for the heading highlighted in the Columns field.
8-8
System Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 8-9. Edit Dialog (System Editor)
8.3.5 Asterisks/No Asterisks
If the heading displayed in the Columns listing is appropriate for entering integer values or text strings, then the heading in the Columns list does not have a trailing asterisk, and a field appears in the Data area for data entry of the integer value or text.
If the heading has options from a pre-defined list, then the heading in the Columns list has a trailing asterisk. Additionally, a list displays under the Data field. You can select a value from the list either by clicking with a mouse or by entering the item's number that appears in the Data field.
No Trailing Asterisk
Figure 8-10. Edit dialog box
Trailing Asterisk
Revised January-2021
System Editor
8-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
8.4 General Guidelines
Observe the following guidelines with the System Editor: The File > Save and File > Save As options have the same
function in this editor. You can use them interchangeably. Assign the Measured and Calculated (R/O) data points a security
level of 0 so that only the input source, the PC, or the S600+ processor can write to them. Exercise great caution when inserting or deleting information. The System Editor does not have an Undo function. You cannot restore deletions. Save your work every few minutes. If you inadvertently delete or modify a configuration file, you can restore by closing without saving. Re-open with the last save, thereby losing only a few modifications. S600+ displays the description for each data point on the S600+ front panel display and web server access. Whenever possible, type descriptions for each data point in upper case letters (CAPS). Upper-case text (CAPS) is easier to read on the front panel display.
8-10
System Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 9 Config Transfer
In This Chapter
9.1 Connecting TO THE S600+ ................................................................... 9-2 9.1.1 Connecting via Serial Cable................................................... 9-2 9.1.2 Connecting via TCP/IP ........................................................... 9-2 9.1.3 Enabling the PC Setup Link ................................................... 9-2 9.1.4 Checksum Security ................................................................ 9-3
9.2 Accessing Config Transfer .................................................................. 9-3 9.3 Communications Settings for Transfer................................................ 9-4
9.3.1 Setting Communication Parameters ...................................... 9-4 9.4 Send Configuration ............................................................................. 9-6
9.4.1 Sending a Configuration......................................................... 9-6 9.4.2 Manually Adding a Configuration File to be Transferred ....... 9-7 9.5 Receive Configuration......................................................................... 9-8 9.5.1 Receiving a Configuration ...................................................... 9-8 9.6 Log Transfers ...................................................................................... 9-9 9.6.1 Logging a Transfer ................................................................. 9-9 9.7 CFX Licensing ................................................................................... 9-10 9.7.1 Transferring a License ......................................................... 9-10 9.7.2 Removing a License............................................................. 9-12
Use the Configuration Transfer (Config Transfer) utility to send new or modified configuration files to the S600+ over either a dedicated serial port or a TCP/IP connection. Config Transfer also enables you to retrieve configuration files from the host PC to the S600+.
Performing configuration changes while equipment is operating may
WARNING: result in unexpected behavior. Take appropriate action to prevent
impact to field devices.
Config600 saves configuration files in the Configs directory on the host PC, and automatically creates a separate sub-directory for each new configuration. Config600 also places the following additional components in separate sub-directories:
Note: You can also access this utility either by selecting Tools > Transfer from the PCSetup menu bar or by selecting Start > Config600 3.3 > Config Transfer.
Reports (report format files). Modbus (Modbus configuration files). Override (custom files, such as customized versions of the
displays, reports, and Modbus files).
Note: Config600 uses this folder only for older existing configurations. Config600 does not use the Override folder for new configurations.
LogiCalcs (custom-written files that permit the creation of userdefined functions).
Extras (user-defined look-up tables and configuration backup files).
Revised January-2021
Config Transfer
9-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Config Transfer also provides a utility that enables you to license Config600
9.1 Connecting to the S600+
You can connect to the S600+ using either a serial cable or a TCP/IP connection.
9.1.1 Connecting via Serial Cable
The S600+ comes with a serial cable you can use to connect your PC to the S600+. One end of the cable has a DB-9 female connector, which you attach to your PC's serial port. The other end of the cable has two connectors, a male DB-15 (for serial connection) and an RJ-12 (EIA-232/RS-232D). Alternately, you can insert the RJ-12 connector into the port on the bottom of the S600+ flow computer's front panel.
9.1.2
Connecting via TCP/IP
You can connect to the S600+ using an Ethernet cable. In this case, you must first define an IP, subnet, and gateway addresses for your S600+. Refer to the FloBossTM S600+ Flow Computer Instruction Manual Form Number A6115.
9.1.3
Enabling the PC Setup Link
Regardless of the connection method you use, the S600+ (by default) does not allow you to download or upload configurations or license applications until you either access the Startup menu (refer to the FloBossTM S600+ Flow Computer Instruction Manual Form Number A6115) or enable the PC Setup link from the S600+. If you proceed without enabling the PC Setup link, Config600 displays a warning dialog:
Figure 9-1. PCSetup Error Message
To enable the PC Setup link: 1. From the S600+ front panel's main menu, select
TECH/ENGINEER > SECURITY. 2. Press to access the PC Setup Link screen, which indicates that
the PC Setup Link is currently DISABLED. 3. Press CHNG and enter the security code defined for your ID.
9-2
Config Transfer
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4. Select ENABLE and select ENABLE again. The PC Setup Link screen displays, indicating that the PC Setup Link is now ENABLED.
9.1.4
Checksum Security
When you send a configuration to the S600+, it checks the configuration to ensure that it has not been modified manually. Config600 calculates and applies a checksum value on the file. If the checksum value the S600+ detects does not match the Config600applied checksum value, the S600+ displays a warning message.
If the error persists after repeating the configuration download, it may be possible to resolve the warning and repair the configuration checksum. Use a registered copy of Config600 and login with the Level 1 Username and Password. Once you have correctly entered the Username and Password, Config600 saves the configuration file with the correct checksum.
9.2 Accessing Config Transfer
You can start Config Transfer using any one of three methods: Click the Transfer icon on the PCSetup Editor's toolbar. Select Tools > Transfer from the PCSetup Editor's menu bar. Click Start > All Programs > Config600 3.3 > Config Transfer. The Config Transfer screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure 9-2. Config Transfer screen
This screen uses a tab design to present the major components-- Transfer, Send, Receive, and Logging--of the transfer process, as well as to include software licensing (Licensing).
Tab Transfer
Description
Sets the communication parameters between the S600+ and the PC.
Config Transfer
9-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Tab Send
Receive
Logging
Licensing
Description Identifies the configuration file you want to send from the PC to the S600+.
Identifies the configuration file you want to retrieve from the S600+.
Activates logging for the transfer process and selects the select of detail included in the log.
Enables you to transfer a license from a secure USB drive ("dongle") to Config600.
9.3 Communications Settings for Transfer
The host PC uses a dedicated serial or Ethernet port to connect to the S600+, and transfers data in accordance with the communication settings defined for that communications port.
Notes:
Both the host PC and the S600+ must use the same communications settings for data to transfer successfully.
If you are downloading a configuration via Ethernet, disable any communication links from a device that is communicating with the S600+ before attempting to download the configuration as this may disrupt the confirmation upload/download.
9.3.1 Setting Communication Parameters
The Transfer screen displays when you first open the utility.
Note: Both the S600+ and the host PC must have the same communications settings to communicate successfully.
1. Start the Config Transfer utility. 2. Select the Transfer tab. 3. Enter the Modbus address for the S600+ in the S600 ID field.
This value is available from the S600+ front panel (select Tech/Engineer > Communications > Assignment > Modbus Address) or from the Network option on the Cold Start menu.
Figure 9-3. Config Transfer screen
9-4
Config Transfer
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4. Indicate the specific serial or network (Ethernet) COM port in the S600 Connections field.
Note: To verify the serial connection, click Scan to display the current serial port connected to the S600+.
5. If you are using a serial port, review the following fields. Change the default values only if you have a good reason for doing so.
Field S600 ID
S600 Connections Scan
Hostname 16 Bit Mode
Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity
Description Identifies the S600+; the default value is 1.
You can verify the S600+ ID from the front panel of the S600+ by selecting Tech/Engineer > Communications > Assignment > Modbus Address.
Lists all available communication connections.
Click to validate the currently available IP or serial connections. If you have a valid network connection, the system detects it and automatically completes the Hostname field with an IP address. If you have a valid serial connection, the system detects it and automatically completes the serial port settings.
Indicates the IP address of the host PC.
Note: This field is available only if you selected a network connection.
Provides compatibility with legacy Modbus configurations.
Note: The 16 Bit Mode checkbox represents an advanced Modbus option. It permits a 16-bit byte count on Modbus communications, allowing longer messages. Refer to Chapter 14, Modbus Editor, for further information. For most systems, this option should be unchecked.
Indicates the serial transfer rate. Click to display all valid values. The default value is 38400.
Note: You can modify this field only if you select a serial port.
Indicates the number of data bits the port uses. Click to display all valid values. The default value is 8.
Note: You can modify this field only if you select a serial port.
Indicates the period length. Click to display all valid values. The default value is 1.
Note: You can modify this field only if you select a serial port.
Indicates the type of parity used to detect data corruption during transmission. Click to display all valid values. The default value is None.
Note: You can modify this field only if you select a serial port.
6. If you are using a network (Ethernet) port, complete the Hostname field.
Config Transfer
9-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
9.4 Send Configuration
You can send up to 20 user configurations files to the S600+ from the host PC.
Note: Although you cannot clear a configuration from a slot; you can overwrite it.
Each configuration may be comprised of 55 files of the following:
Config The main configuration file for the S600+ including all the initialization values.
Displays Configuration file for the display menus and data pages. Reports Report format configuration files. Modbus Maps Modbus configuration files, including slave
register maps and master polling sequences. LogiCalcs Custom-written files that allow creation of user-
defined functions. Extras User-defined look-up tables, configuration backup files,
and prover sequence files.
Caution
You can use Config Transfer to download the following files (image files):
Binary Package Embedded software for the FloBoss S600+; a basic version is installed in the S600+ prior to delivery. To transfer this package, copy the binary.app file into Binary folder from Config S600+ directory.
Firmware Software firmware and embedded software for the FloBoss S600+. This is for internal Emerson use only.
Updating the binary or firmware file could affect the entire metering accuracy and stability of your S600+. It is strongly recommended that you update this file only under the specific instruction of technical support personnel.
9.4.1 Sending a Configuration
Note: If you are updating the firmware or binary file (only under the direction of technical support personnel), you must first place the S600+ in Reflash Firmware mode. For further instructions, refer to "Reflash Firmware" in Chapter 8, Troubleshooting, in the FloBoss S600 Flow Manager Instruction Manual (part number D301150X412).
To send a new or modified configuration file to the S600+ from a host PC:
Note: You must cold-start the S600+ before you can send a configuration file.
1. Select System Settings > System Status > CHNG > Enter valid operator code > Cold Start > Yes to cold-start the S600+ before you send a configuration file
9-6
Config Transfer
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Launch Config Transfer. 3. Select the Send tab on the Config Transfer screen.
Figure 9-4. Config Transfer Send tab
4. Select a configuration from the Available Configurations listing. 5. Click Send to initiate the transfer. A confirmation message displays when your configuration send is successful.
Note: If you are updating the firmware or binary file (under the direction of technical support personnel), you must first place the S600+ in Reflash Firmware mode. For further instructions, refer to "Reflash Firmware" in Chapter 8, Troubleshooting, in the FloBoss S600 Flow Manager Instruction Manual (A6115).
9.4.2 Manually Adding a Configuration File to be Transferred
To manually add a configuration file to the Config600 to transfer the file to the S600+ from a host PC: 1. Open the folder where you installed Config600.
Note: By default, this is in the C:\Users\<<USERNAME>>\Config600 3.3\Configs folder.
Revised January-2021
Config Transfer
9-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Copy the configuration folder into the Configs folder.
Note: All configuration files are encrypted in an archive folder.
9.5 Receive Configuration
You can receive the following files from the S600+ onto the host PC: Config (the main configuration file for the S600+ including all the
initialization values). Displays (configuration file for the display menus and data pages). Reports (report format configuration files). Modbus Maps (Modbus configuration files, including slave register
maps and master polling sequences). LogiCalcs (custom-written files that allow creation of user-defined
functions). Extras (user-defined look-up tables and configuration backup files).
9.5.1 Receiving a Configuration
To receive a configuration file from the S600+ into a host PC: 1. Select the Receive tab on the Config Transfer screen.
Figure 9-5. Config Transfer Receive tab
2. To overwrite an existing configuration, select it from the Available Configurations listing. You can also select <new> to create a new configuration on the host PC.
Note: Click Refresh List to update the list with the configuration files in S600+.
3. Click Receive to initiate the transfer.
9-8
Config Transfer
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4. If you selected <new>, Config600 now prompts you to name the folder to receive the new configuration files.
Figure 9-6. Save As New Config dialog box
5. Enter up to 30 characters to name the folder. A confirmation message displays when your configuration receive is successful.
9.6 Log Transfers
You can create a log of the activity and events of the transfer application. This log can be useful for diagnosing and resolving communication problems.
When you enable the logging function, the S600+ creates a log file with the current time stamp in the working configuration folder. The log file contains all details of the transfer session until you either disable the logging option or close the Config Transfer application.
9.6.1
Logging a Transfer
To initiate an activity and event log for the transfer session: 1. Select the Logging tab on the Config Transfer screen.
Revised January-2021
Figure 9-7. Config Transfer Logging tab
2. Select the Enabled check box. This activates the Logging Detail field.
Config Transfer
9-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3. Click to indicate the logging detail. Valid values are General (include only events) and Detailed (include both events and activity). The default is General.
Note: The S600+ maintains the log until you either close the application or disable the logging process.
9.7 CFX Licensing
Note: This utility requires you to install firmware binary 06.21 or later.
The Licensing utility with Config Transfer enables you to transfer a CFX software license from a USB drive ("dongle") installed on a host PC to the S600+. The drive used to transfer Config600 licenses is a secure USB drive designed for this purpose. You cannot use a standard USB drive with this utility.
Note: To activate this utility, you must first cold-start the S600+ from its front display and leave the S600+ at the Cold Start menu. Also, make sure that the secure USB drive containing the license is installed on the host PC.
9.7.1 Transferring a License
To transfer a license: 1. Select the Licensing tab on the Config Transfer screen. The
Licensing screen displays.
Figure 9-8. Config Transfer Licensing tab
2. Click Connect to Dongle. The utility shows all licenses on the license key in the Dongle list on the left side of the screen:
9-10
Config Transfer
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 9-9. Licenses on Key
3. Click Connect to S600+ to establish a connection to the S600+. A series of Transferring dialogs may appear while the utility makes the connection.
Note: When the connection completes, the utility activates the arrow keys in the center of the screen.
4. Select a license from the Dongle list and click the right-pointing arrow () to move the license from the USB drive to the S600+. The utility displays a series of Transferring dialogs as the process occurs.
When the process completes, the utility displays a notification dialog:
5. Click OK to close the dialog. The License screen now shows the license installed on the S600+. Note also that the quantity of licenses on the USB has decreased by 1.
Revised January-2021
Config Transfer
9-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 9-10. Transferred License 6. Click Quit to close the License utility.
9.7.2 Removing a License
Removing a license from the S600+ and transferring it to the secure USB drive is just as simple. After you connect to the USB drive and the S600+, select the license in the S600+ column and click the leftpointing () arrow. The system displays a notification dialog when the process completes. When you click OK, the utility displays the Licensing screen. Note that the quantity of licenses on the USB drive has increased by one.
9-12
Config Transfer
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 10 Remote Front Panel
In This Chapter
10.1 Configuring Your PC without a Native Serial Comm Port ................ 10-1 10.1.1 Changing the Port on Your USB Communications Port ....... 10-2
10.2 Configuring Your PC with a Native Serial Comm Port ..................... 10-3 10.3 Configuring the S600+ to Use the Remote Front Panel ................... 10-4 10.4 Accessing the Remote Front Panel .................................................. 10-7
10.4.1 Remote Front Panel Startup Menu ....................................... 10-7 10.4.2 Disabling the Remote Front Panel........................................ 10-8 10.4.3 Restoring the Remote Front Panel ....................................... 10-9
Use the Remote Front Panel to configure your S600+ to perform certain functions from your PC. Connect your computer to the S600+ as directed in the FloBoss S600+ Flow Computer Instruction Manual (part D301150X412). The Remote Front Panel requires part number S600+EXT (the License Key for Remote Front Panel).
Note: For more information on the complete functionality of the Front Panel, refer to the FloBoss S600+ Flow Computer Instruction Manual, part D301150X412.
10.1 Configuring Your PC without a Native Serial Comm Port
This section details how to configure your PC to communicate between the S600+ and the Remote Front Panel application on your PC if you do not have a native serial communications port on your PC. If this is the case, you require a USB-to-Serial convertor cable.
1. Install the convertor software if necessary.
2. Verify the communications port number.
Windows 10: Right -click Start and select Device Manager Windows 7 or Vista:
Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers > Device Manager. Windows XP: Select Start > Control Panel > System > Hardware tab> Device Manager.
3. Select Ports (COM & LPT).
4. Verify that the Communications Port number is 1, 2, 3, or 4. The Remote Front Panel only supports communications ports 1 through 4.
Note: If the communications port is not 1, 2, 3, or 4, you must change it. Refer to Changing the Communications Port.
Revised January-2021
Remote Front Panel
10-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 10-1. Device Manager
10.1.1 Changing the Port on Your USB Communications Port
The Remote Front Panel only supports communications ports 1 through 4. To change your communications port:
1. Right-click on the Communications Port (COM1) and select Properties.
2. Select the Port Settings tab.
3. Click Advanced.
4. Click in the COM Port Number field to select a communications port between 1 and 4. This is the communication port through which you communication with the S600+ and the Remote Front Panel on the PC.
5. Click OK in the Advanced Comm Ports Setting screen.
6. Click OK in the Communications Port (COM1) Properties screen.
7. Restart your computer.
8. Configure the S600+. Refer to Configuring the S600+ to Use the Remote Front Panel.
10-2
Remote Front Panel
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
10.2 Configuring Your PC with a Native Serial Comm Port
This section details how to configure your PC to communicate between the S600+ and the Remote Front Panel application on your PC if you have a native serial communications port on your computer. The Remote Front Panel only supports communications ports 1 through 4. Typically a native serial port uses communication port number 1.
1. Open Device Manager.
Windows 10: Right -click Start and select Device Manager Windows 7 or Vista:
Select Start > Settings > Control Panel > System > Advanced System Settings >Hardware tab > Device Manager. Windows XP: Select Start > Control Panel > System > Hardware > Device Manager.
2. Select Ports (COM & LPT).
Figure 10-2. Device Manager
3. Right-mouse click on the Communications Port you desire to change and select Properties.
4. Select the Port Settings tab. 5. Click Advanced.
Revised January-2021
Remote Front Panel
10-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 10-3. Advanced Settings
6. Click on the COM Port Number field to select a communication port between 1 and 4. This is the communications port through which you communicate with the S600+ and the Remote Front Panel on the PC.
7. Click OK in the Advanced Settings screen. 8. Click OK in any remaining screen. 9. Restart your computer. 10. Configure the S600+. Refer to Configuring the S600+ to Use the
Remote Front Panel.
10.3 Configuring the S600+ to Use the Remote Front Panel
To use the Remote Front Panel, you must launch the Remote Front Panel application and configure your S600+. 1. Select Start > Programs > Config600 3.3 > Remote Front Panel. On the S600+ front panel: 2. If the S600+ is metering, you need to access the Cold Start menu to
set up the serial port parameters. To do this, select 5 (System Settings).
1* FLOW RATES 2* TOTALS 3* OPERATOR 4* PLANT I/O 5* SYSTEM SETTINGS 6* TECH/ENGINEER
8* CALCULATIONS
3. Select 6 (System Status).
10-4
Remote Front Panel
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1* UNIT SETUP 2. REPORT SETUP 3. ALARM SETUP 4. MAINTENANCE MODE 5. TOTAL RESET 6. SYSTEM STATUS 7. SOFTWARE VERSION
4. Press CHNG.
SYSTEM RUN MODE
NORMAL
*
P145.1 <of 1>
S
5. Enter your password in the Enter Code field.
SYSTEM RUN MODE
ENTER CODE:
P145.1 <of 1>
S
6. Select 1 (Cold Start).
1. COLD ST 2. WARM ST 3. GO BACK
7. Select 1 (Yes).
CONFIRM SET TO: COLD ST 1. YES 2. NO
8. Select 8 (Factory Setup).
1* WARM START 2* COLD START 3* NETWORK SETUP 4. REFLASH FIRMWARE 5. CONFIG SELECTION
8* FACTORY SETUP
9. Select 3 (Serial Ports).
1. CLEAR SRAM 2. FORMAT FLASH 3* SERIAL PORTS 4* DISPLAY 5* FIRMWARE 6. USB LOCK 7. DEBUG MODE 8. GO BACK
10. Select 1 (PC Setup Port).
1. PC SETUP PORT 2. GO BACK
Remote Front Panel
10-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
11. Press 0 to change the Port from 2 to 0.
FloBoss S600+
ENTER SERIAL PORT RANGE 2 TO 8 CURRENT 2
0
12. Press Enter.
13. Select 2 (Go Back).
1. PC SETUP PORT 2. GO BACK
14. Select 8 (Go Back).
1. CLEAR SRAM 2. FORMAT FLASH 3* SERIAL PORTS 4* DISPLAY 5* FIRMWARE 6. USB LOCK 7. DEBUG MODE 8. GO BACK
15. Select 8 (Factory Setup).
1* WARM START 2* COLD START 3* NETWORK SETUP 4. REFLASH FIRMWARE 5. CONFIG SELECTION
8* FACTORY SETUP
16. Select 4 (Display).
1. CLEAR SRAM 2. FORMAT FLASH 3* SERIAL PORTS 4* DISPLAY 5* FIRMWARE 6. USB LOCK 7. DEBUG MODE 8. GO BACK
17. Select 1 (Display Port).
1. DISPLAY PORT 2. DISPLAY TYPE 3. GO BACK
18. Press 2 to change the Display from 2 to 1.
FloBoss S600+
ENTER SERIAL PORT RANGE 1 TO 8 CURRENT 1
2
19. Press Enter.
10-6
Remote Front Panel
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
20. Power cycle the S600+. After launching the Remote Front Panel and configuring the S600+, the S600+ displays "REMOTE FRONT PANEL IN USE" on the Front Panel. This places the S600+'s front panel under the control of the Remote Front Panel utility.
10.4 Accessing the Remote Front Panel
To start the Remote Front Panel, click Start > Programs > Config600 3.3 > Remote Front Panel. The Remote Front Panel displays.
Figure 10-4. Remote Front Panel
The Remote Front Panel utility functions exactly like the actual S600+ front panel. Refer to the FloBoss S600+ Flow Manager Instruction Manual (part D301150X412).
10.4.1 Remote Front Panel Startup Menu
After you launch the Remote Front Panel and configure the S600+, the S600+ displays "REMOTE FRONT PANEL IN USE" on the Front Panel. This places the S600+ front panel under the control of the Remote Front Panel utility.
The Remote Front Panel displays the Startup Menu:
Revised January-2021
Remote Front Panel
10-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1* WARM START 2* COLD START 3* NETWORK SETUP 4. REFLASH FIRMWARE 5. CONFIG SELECTION
8* FACTORY SETUP
Figure 10-5. Remote Front Panel Startup Menu
Note: An asterisk (*) after an option number indicates a sub-menu. A period indicates a subsequent data screen.
Field 1* Warm Start
2* Cold Start
3* Network Setup 4. Reflash Firmware 5. Config Selection 8* Factory Setup
Description Restarts a S600+ from the point prior to where the S600+ lost power.
Builds a new metering database on the S600+ from the files in Flash memory.
Configures the TCP/IP, Gateway, and Modbus addresses.
Reprograms the S600+ operating system firmware from Flash memory.
Displays the configuration files currently downloaded to the S600+.
Clears the SRAM and formats Flash memory and changes additional settings. Note: Use this option only at the direction of a
factory representative.
10.4.2 Disabling the Remote Front Panel
To disable the Remote Front Panel, you must perform the following in the Remote Front Panel application:
From the Remote Front Panel:
1. Return to the main Remote Front Panel menu.
1* WARM START 2* COLD START 3* NETWORK SETUP 4. REFLASH FIRMWARE 5. CONFIG SELECTION
8* FACTORY SETUP
2. Select 8 (Factory Setup).
1. CLEAR SRAM 2. FORMAT FLASH 3* SERIAL PORTS 4* DISPLAY 5* FIRMWARE 6. USB LOCK 7. DEBUG MODE 8. GO BACK
10-8
Remote Front Panel
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3. Select 4 (Display).
1. DISPLAY PORT 2. DISPLAY TYPE 3. GO BACK
4. Select 1 (Display Port).
Floboss S600+
ENTER SERIAL PORT
RANGE 1 to 8 CURRENT 2 1
5. Press 1 to change the display port from 2 to 1. 6. Press Enter. 7. Press 3 (Go Back).
1. DISPLAY PORT 2. DISPLAY TYPE 3. GO BACK
8. Press 3 (Go Back). 9. Select Factory Setup. 10. Select Serial Ports.
1. PC SETUP PORT 2. GO BACK
11. Select 1 (PC Setup Port).
FloBoss S600+
ENTER SERIAL PORT
RANGE 2 to 8 CURRENT 0 2
12. Press 2 to change the port from 0 to 2. 13. Press Enter.
Note: Disregard any undesirable characters that may occur in the display.
14. Power cycle the S600+.
10.4.3 Restoring the Remote Front Panel
In the event of a remote front panel communications failure, you may need to restore the serial communications to the normal front panel. This is possible by pressing the S600+ Front Panel keys in the following order when powering up the S600+:
To restore the Remote Front Panel if remote communications fail:
Revised January-2021
Remote Front Panel
10-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1. Remove power and then re-apply power to the S600+. 2. When the "REMOTE FRONT PANEL ENABLED" message
displays, press 123 456 789 -0. from left to right (the last three keys in the sequence are the dash, the zero, and the period).
Note: You must complete the key sequence within 5 seconds after the message displays. If you are unsuccessful the first time, repeat the process.
3. The Cold Start menu displays when the process is successful.
10-10
Remote Front Panel
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 11 Remote Archive Uploader
In This Chapter
11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5
11.6 11.7
Accessing the Remote Archive Uploader ....................................... 11-2 Automatic Archive Polling ............................................................... 11-2 11.2.1 Configure Automatic Polling ............................................. 11-2 11.2.2 Add or Edit an Automatic Poll........................................... 11-4 11.2.3 Enable Automatic Polling ................................................. 11-6 Manual Archive Polling ................................................................... 11-6 11.3.1 Configuring Config600 Communications.......................... 11-7 11.3.2 Reload Tree...................................................................... 11-8 11.3.3 Upload All Reports / Upload New Reports ..................... 11-10 Viewing Reports ............................................................................ 11-11 11.4.1 Report Archive................................................................ 11-11 Saving ........................................................................................... 11-12 11.5.1 Directory Settings (File Locations) ................................. 11-12 11.5.2 File Settings.................................................................... 11-13 11.5.3 Save As .......................................................................... 11-14 11.5.4 Folder Formats ............................................................... 11-15 11.5.5 Data Integrity .................................................................. 11-17 Printing the Report ........................................................................ 11-18 11.6.1 Print ................................................................................ 11-18 11.6.2 Print Preview .................................................................. 11-18 11.6.3 Print Setup...................................................................... 11-19 Abort Transfer ............................................................................... 11-20
Revised January-2021
The Remote Archive Uploader allows you to automatically upload all reports and alarms in the historical archive in the S600+ flow computer, and manually upload the following:
Constant Log Display Dump List of all available alarms List of current alarms Current report Alarm / Event History File
Note: Support for the Alarm / Event History feature was withdrawn for firmware version 5.0 and later.
All reports in the Historical Archive
Note: The Remote Archive Uploader requires part number S600+EXT (the license key for Archive Uploader).
The Remote Archive Uploader logs all significant events to a log file, which is also held in the archive folder. Logged events include:
Manual Upload of Constant Log Manual Upload of Display Dump Manual Upload of All Alarms Manual Upload of Current Alarms Manual Upload of Current Report Manual Upload of Alarm/Event History Failed to Open Communications Port Link Failed
Remote Archive Uploader
11-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Manual Load of Report Files Automatic Load of Report Files All events are date- and time-stamped.
11.1 Accessing the Remote Archive Uploader
To launch the Remote Archive Uploader, from your PC select Start > All Programs > Config600 3.3 > Remote Archive Uploader. The Remote Archive Uploader screen displays.
Figure 11-1. Remote Archive Uploader screen
11.2 Automatic Archive Polling
The Remote Archive Uploader allows you to automatically poll all reports and alarms in the historical archive of the S600+ flow computer. You configure the archive type, frequency, and the communications link the Config600 software uses on the Flow Computer Poll Sequence screen.
11.2.1
Configure Automatic Polling
You must configure the archive type, frequency, and the communications link the Config600 software uses to poll for data.
1. Select Tools > Flow Computer List. The Flow Computer Poll Sequence screen displays showing any previously configured reports.
11-2
Remote Archive Uploader
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Notes:
Each column on the Flow Computer Poll Sequence screen represents a single configured archive poll.
The Flow Computer poll sequence list is reset whenever you change the directory settings (Tools > Directory settings). For more information, refer to Section 11.5, Saving.
Figure 11-2. Display Editor with shortcut menu
2. Review the values displayed for each configured archive poll:
Option Name
Period Date
Day
Description Shows a description of the archive poll. This is used by Config600 to create file or folder names when storing archives on your PC.
Note: You enter this description in the Comment field on the Edit FC List screen.
Shows the frequency that Config600 polls the flow computer for the archive. Valid values are Hourly, Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.
Shows the date of the month Config600 polls the flow computer for the archive. Valid values are 131.
Note: Data is displayed only for Monthly archive uploads.
Shows the day of the week Config600 polls the flow computer for the archive.
Note: Data is displayed only for Weekly archive uploads.
Revised January-2021
Remote Archive Uploader
11-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Option Time
Action
Comm Type
MB Address Port Baud Data
Stop
Parity
TCP/IP Addr TCP/IP Port
MODEM Port Phone Delete New Copy
Description Shows the time of day to Config600 polls the flow computer for the archive.
Note: Data displays only for Daily, Weekly, or Monthly archive uploads.
Shows the archive poll type of the selected poll. Valid values are Auto Upload All (uploads ALL of the archived reports from the S600+) or Auto Upload New (uploads only new archived reports from the S600+).
Shows the communication type the Config600 software uses to poll the flow computer for the archive data. Valid values are Serial, Ethernet, or Modem.
Shows the Modbus address of the remote flow computer.
Shows the PC port Config600 uses when polling the S600+ for archive data.
Shows the baud rate Config600 uses when polling the S600+ for archive data.
Shows the number of data bits in use for serial communications Config600 uses when polling the S600+ for archive data.
Shows the number of stop bits in use for serial communications used by Config600 when polling the S600+ for the archive data.
Shows the parity in use for serial communications Config600 uses when polling the S600+ for archive data.
Shows the TCP/IP address of the flow computer.
Enter the dedicated TCP port at the S600+ with which you desire to communicate. Valid ports are 6001, 6002. Ensure no other device is communicating with the S600+ on this port.
Note: Port 6002 is recommended over 6001.
PC port in use for MODEM communications.
Phone number in use for MODEM communications.
Select a flow computer and click Delete to remove it from the Flow computer poll sequence screen.
Click New to add a new flow computer to poll.
Select a flow computer and click Copy to duplicate an existing configuration.
11.2.2
Add or Edit an Automatic Poll
To add a new or edit an existing flow computer:
1. Click New or double-click the name of an existing archive poll configuration to edit. The Edit FC List Item screen displays.
11-4
Remote Archive Uploader
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 11-3. Edit FC List Item screen
2. Complete (or update) the values for the selected flow computer:
Option Period Date Day Time Action
Comment
Description
Selects the frequency that Config600 software polls the S600+ for the archive. Click to display all valid options. Valid options are Hourly, Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.
Sets the date of the month to perform the poll.
Note: This field is active only if you select Monthly in the Period field.
Sets the day of the week to perform the poll.
Note: This field is active only if you select Weekly in the Period field.
Sets the time of day to perform the poll.
Note: This field is active only if you select Daily, Weekly, or Monthly in the Period field.
Selects the archive data to upload. Click to display all valid options. Valid options include Auto Upload All or Auto Upload New.
Auto Upload All
Uploads all of the archived reports from the S600+ and saves them into the folder on the PC using the Tools > Manual Comms Settings.
Auto Upload New
Uploads only new archived reports from the S600+ and saves them into the folder on the PC using the Tools > Manual Comms Settings.
Indicates a name to identify the archive poll. Config600 software uses this name to create file or folder names for the reports uploaded from the selected flow computer.
Revised January-2021
Remote Archive Uploader
11-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Option Comms...
Description
Click Comms... to configure communication settings the Config600 software uses to retrieve data from the selected flow computer. Refer to Section 11.3.1, Configuring Config600 Communications.
11.2.3
Enable Automatic Polling
If you enable automatic polling, Config600 performs any archive polls you configure in the Flow Computer Poll Sequence screen (Section 11.3). To enable the automatic polling:
Select Tools > Enable Automatic Operation. Config600 automatically retrieves any reports that you defined on the Flow Computer Poll Sequence screen.
Figure 11-4. Tools Menu - Automatic Operation Enabled
Config600 software automatically polls the S600+ at the specified times and saves the uploaded archives in the Archive folder.
Note: The format is exactly the same as for the Manual upload command except that the folder names are based on the row in the flow computer list.
11.3 Manual Archive Polling
You can manually upload reports on an as-needed basis. You can manually upload the following data types:
Constant Log Display Dump List of all available alarms List of current alarms Current report Alarm / Event History File
11-6
Remote Archive Uploader
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: Support for the Alarm / Event History feature was withdrawn for firmware version 5.0 and above.
All reports in the Historical Archive
To perform a manual archive poll, you must configure the communication settings Config600 uses to perform the manual poll. Config600 then waits for you to issue the Reload Tree, Upload All, or Upload New command from the File menu to poll the S600+.
11.3.1
Configuring Config600 Communications
You must configure the communication settings Config600 uses to retrieve data from selected flow computers. An editor is available from the Tools menu, which allows you to set up the port, TCP/IP address, or telephone details to use in connecting to the flow computer.
1. Select Tools > Manual Comm Settings to display the Comms Properties screen.
Figure 11-5. Typical Display Page (Stream 2 Flow Limits shown)
2. Complete the values for the communications port Config600 uses:
Field Comm Type
Slave Address
Description
Selects the communication type Config600 uses to perform a manual poll. Click to display all valid types. Valid values are Serial (the default), Ethernet, or Modem.
Sets a valid Modbus slave address for the flow computer.
Revised January-2021
Remote Archive Uploader
11-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Retry Count TCP/IP Address TCP/IP Port
Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity
Port
Modem Phone No. Properties
Description Sets the number of times the Remote Archive Uploader should attempt to communicate with the S600+ before it times out.
Sets IP address for the S600+ with which you desire to communicate.
Note: This field is active only if you select Ethernet in the Comms Type field.
Sets the dedicated TCP port at the S600+ with which you desire to communicate. Valid ports are 6001 and 6002; port 6002 is recommended. Ensure no other device is communicating with the S600+ on this port.
Note: This field is active only if you select Ethernet in the Comms Type field.
Sets the serial transfer rate. Click to display all valid values. The default value is 38400.
Note: This field is active only if you select Serial or Modem in the Comms Type field.
Sets the number of data bits the port uses. Click to display all valid values. The default value is 8.
Note: This field is active only if you select Serial or Modem in the Comms Type field.
Sets the period length. Click to display all valid values. The default value is 1.
Note: This field is active only if you select Serial or Modem in the Comms Type field.
Sets the type of parity used to detect data corruption during transmission. Click to display all valid values. The default value is None.
Note: This field is active only if you select Serial or Modem in the Comms Type field.
Sets the communication port to using during serial transmissions. Click to display all valid values. The default value is COM1.
Note: This field is active only if you select Serial in the Comms Type field.
Sets the type of modem you will use in communications. Click to display all valid values.
Note: This field is active only if you select Modem in the Comms Type field.
Sets the phone number of the modem you will use in communications.
Note: This field is active only if you select Modem in the Comms Type field.
Click the Properties button to configure additional parameters for the modem.
Note: This button is active only if you select Modem in the Comms Type field.
3. Click OK to save any changes. The Remote Archive Uploader screen redisplays.
11.3.2
Reload Tree
This command enables you to manually generate, view, print, and save the following:
11-8
Remote Archive Uploader
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Constant Log Display dump List of all available alarms List of current alarms Current report Alarm / Event History File
Note: Support for the Alarm / Event History file feature was withdrawn for firmware 05.xx and above. Please contact technical support for assistance.
Select the File > Reload Tree. Config600 software reads the report index file from the S600+ (using the parameters you configure on the Manual Communication Settings screen) and displays the contents.
Note: If you set the manual communication type to Modem, you must manually connect the modem before you can select the Reload Tree command.
Figure 11-6. Remote Archive Uploader Tree
The tree shows a list of the files available in the S600+ archive. To upload a file, click the file in the tree. The package extracts that file from the S600+ and displays it on the right side of the screen.
Revised January-2021
Remote Archive Uploader
11-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Notes:
The system does not automatically store data generated using this method on the PC. You must manually save these reports using the File > Save As command.
The Current Report generated using this method is not archived in the S600+, as its generation bypasses the S600+ print and archiving mechanism. If a generated Current Report is required, it should be generated manually. If a Current Report has been generated at the S600+, it appears along with all other archived reports in the tree on the left side of the screen.
Progress Bar
A progress bar display at the bottom of the window and provides details of the action underway and its percentage completion. A small modem graphic has also been added to display the modem connection status.
Figure 11-7. Progress Bar
11.3.3
Upload All Reports / Upload New Reports
The Upload All Reports and Upload New Reports commands enable manual polling of the S600+ using the communication parameters you entered on the Tools > Manual Comms Settings page. The system automatically saves files generated by this method in the user-defined file directory on your PC.
To perform an manual poll using the Upload All Reports or Upload New Reports command:
1. Select File > Upload All Reports (to upload all archived reports from the S600+ and save them into the folder on the PC) ) or select File > Upload New Reports (to upload only new archived reports from the S600+ and save them into the folder on the PC). The Flow Computer Selection screen displays.
11-10
Remote Archive Uploader
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 11-8. Manual Upload Options
2. Complete the values for the desired flow computer:
Field Flow computer list
New Flow computer
Description Click to display all valid flow computers you defined on the Flow Computer List screen.
Notes:
These options then become either the folder name (extended folder structure) or part of the file name (compact folder structure).
The flow computer list option uses the communications details you enter into the list (Tools > Flow Computer List).
Sets the name of the new flow computer with which you desire to communicate.
Notes:
These options then become either the folder name (extended folder structure) or part of the file name (compact folder structure).
New Flow Computer option uses the default communications settings as per the Reload Tree command although the modem now connects and disconnects automatically.
3. Click OK to perform the manual poll.
11.4 Viewing Reports
You can view reports stored on the S600+.
Note: The system retrieves reports from the S600+ using the communication settings you configured on the Manual Comms Settings screen.
11.4.1 Report Archive
You can view reports stored in the S600+ archives. To view reports:
Revised January-2021
Remote Archive Uploader
11-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1. Select File > Reload Tree to display all reports loaded in the S600+ archive.
2. Double-click Report Archive. 3. Double-click the report you desire to view.
Figure 11-9. Report Archive
11.5 Saving
By default, the system saves automatically retrieved archives on your PC's Config600 Archive folder. You can change the default location using the Directory Settings command or manually save a report using the Save As command.
11.5.1
Directory Settings (File Locations)
Archives retrieved automatically are saved on your PC in the Config600 Archive folder. You can configure Config600 to save archive uploads to a different folder using the Directory Settings command. To configure a different folder:
1. Select Tools > Directory Settings. The Select Folder screen displays.
11-12
Remote Archive Uploader
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 11-10. Select Folder
2. Navigate to the folder on your PC where you want Config600 to save your uploaded archives.
3. Click Open to select the new location.
11.5.2
File Settings
You can configure the file format when saving archive uploads. You can choose from two formats: .txt file format or .PDF file format. To configure the file format:
1. Select Tools > File Settings. The Save File Settings screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure 11-11. Select Folder
Remote Archive Uploader
11-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Click to display all valid file format options. If you select Text File (*.txt) format type, the archive uploads are saved as .txt files. If you select PDF Documents (*.pdf) format type, the archive uploads are saved as .pdf files.
Field File Format
User Password
Enable Printing Enable Copy Title Author Subject Keywords
Description Click to choose a file format for report uploads. Valid options are Text File (*.txt) (the system saves archive uploads as .txt files) or PDF Documents (*.pdf) (the system saves archive uploads as .pdf files). The default is PDF Documents (*.pdf).
Indicates the password for the user of the document. The user_password is allowed to be set to NULL or zero length string.The max length of user pass is 32 characters. If the password is set, the min length is 8 characters.
Note:The option is valid only if you select PDF Documents (*.pdf) as the file format type.
Enables if selected, the Print option in the PDF file.
Note:The option is valid only if you select PDF Documents (*.pdf) as the file format type.
Enables, if selected, the Copy option in the PDF file.
Note:The option is valid only if you select PDF Documents (*.pdf) as the file format type.
Sets a name to be saved in the Document Properties of the PDF file.
Note:The option is valid only if you select PDF Documents (*.pdf) as the file format type.
Sets an author name to be saved in the Document Properties of the PDF file. The default is the user computer name.
Note:The option is valid only if you select PDF Documents (*.pdf) as the file format type.
Sets a subject to be saved in the Document Properties of the PDF file. The default value is S600 Archive.
Note: The option is valid only if you select PDF Documents (*.pdf) as the file format type.
Provides the keywords to be saved in the Document Properties of the PDF file.
Note:The option is valid only if you select PDF Documents (*.pdf) as the file format type.
3. Click OK to save your changes.
11.5.3
Save As
To manually save a report:
1. When viewing a report, select File > Save As. The Save As screen displays.
11-14
Remote Archive Uploader
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 11-12. Save As
2. Type a file name in the File Name field. 3. Navigate to the location where you desire to store the report. 4. Click Save to save the report.
11.5.4
Folder Formats
You can configure what folders on your PC are created when saving archive uploads. You can choose from two folder formats: compact folder format or extended folder format.
Revised January-2021
Remote Archive Uploader
11-15
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Compact Folder Select Tools > Compact Folder Format to enable files uploaded Formats through either manual or automatic operation, to be automatically stored in the same folder (called FCD Data).
Figure 11-13. Compact Folder Format
Note: Since the entry in New Flow Computer manual option uses the default communications settings and forms part of the file name, take great care in using this option: you can accidentally overwrite files from other computers.
11-16
Remote Archive Uploader
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Extended Folder Formats
Select Tools > Extended Folder Format to enable files uploaded through either manual or automatic operation, to be automatically stored in individual folders as named by the manual load options or the Flow Computer List.
Figure 11-14. Extended Folder Format
Note: Config600 creates the Basetime 1 period 1 and 2 folders and places archived reports as text files in these folders.
11.5.5
Data Integrity
The package carries out checks to ensure integrity of data transfers as follows.
Field File Size
Comm Fail
Description All files are checked to ensure they have a non-zero size. Any Zero sized files are deleted. This will appear in the error log. Due to differences in file sizes, only the Zero size is checked.
Any file in transit if a COMMS FAIL alarm is detected is deleted irrespective of its file size. This appears in the error log. Failures include: Slave fails to respond. Slave sends exception reply. CRC fail.
PC cannot connect to port or socket.
Revised January-2021
Remote Archive Uploader
11-17
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field File Names
Description
Any files that do not match those you configure in the Flow Computer List display in the error log.
11.6 Printing the Report
This section details how to print reports.
11.6.1 Print
To print the report select File > Print. The Windows Print screen displays
Figure 11-15. Print dialog
11.6.2
Print Preview
To display a preview of the report before you print it: 1. Select File > Print Preview. The Print Preview screen displays.
11-18
Remote Archive Uploader
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 11-16. Print Preview
2. Review the values for in the following fields:
Field Print Next Page Previous Page Two Page
Zoom In Zoom Out
Description Click to print the report. Click to see the next page in the report. Click to see the previous page in the report. Click to see the report in a two page layout side-byside. Click to zoom in on the report to make it larger. Click to zoom out on the report to make it smaller.
11.6.3
Print Setup
To display and configure the Print dialog, select File > Print Setup. The Print Setup screen displays:
Revised January-2021
Remote Archive Uploader
11-19
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 11-17. Print Setup
Review (or change as necessary) the fields on this screen and then click OK to accept the changes.
11.7
Abort Transfer
Select Tools > Abort Transfer to stop data from being transferred between the Remote Archive Uploader and the S600+.
11-20
Figure 11-18. Abort Transfer
Remote Archive Uploader
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 12 Report Editor
In This Chapter
12.1 Accessing the Report Editor ........................................................... 12-2 12.1.1 Via PCSetup ..................................................................... 12-2 12.1.2 Via Report Editor .............................................................. 12-3 12.1.3 Report Names .................................................................. 12-5
12.2 Using the Report Editor................................................................... 12-6 12.2.1 Adding a Data Point ......................................................... 12-7 12.2.2 Editing a Data Point.......................................................... 12-9 12.2.3 Adding Report Lines ......................................................... 12-9 12.2.4 Deleting Report Lines ..................................................... 12-10
The Report Editor is a Windows-based tool that is a part of the Config600 software suite. The Report Editor enables you to modify the reports that you have defined in the S600+ configuration. The Report Editor allows you to add both background text and data points, therefore enabling the generation of completely customized reports.
Reports have a maximum of 80 characters per line. The system automatically numbers each report using a "docket number" system that maintains up to 65,536 unique reports. The docket number starts at 0 and increments to 65535. When the numbering reaches 65535, the numbering system restarts at 0 and replaces the report with the original docket number 0.
You can use the Report Editor to modify the format of current, period, and batch reports, which either print upon trigger events you define or appear on the webserver. However, you cannot use the Report Editor to change the format of constant logs, display dumps, security dumps, alarm dumps, config reports, Modbus maps, or help text.
The procedures in this chapter describe how to change the fields and text in the body of reports. You configure basetime and other report parameters on the System Setup > Reports screen.
Note: Because the reports do not affect the metering accuracy of the S600+, changing the report layout does not increase the Config Version of the selected configuration.
The PCSetup Editor has been modified to integrate with the Report Editor. PCSetup generates only new reports that have been added and deletes any that have been removed. This allows the Report Editor to edit the reports directly in the main reports folder without the intervention of PCSetup.
Period total indexes are fixed for any particular stream, period, and index to ensure the integrity of the database. Config600 uses a formula to generate an index from these variables, and adding or removing reports does not change any other indexes. The period total indexes can be referenced in the reports.
Revised January-2021
Report Editor
12-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
12.1
Accessing the Report Editor
You access the Report Editor either as a selection from the PCSetup Editor or as its own application.
12.1.1 Via PCSetup
While you are using the PCSetup Editor, this method enables you to select a specific report you have already defined and stored in the current configuration.
1. From the PCSetup Editor hierarchy, select System Setup > Reports. The Reports screen displays.
Figure 12-1. PCSetup Reports screen
Note: If you have more than one version of Config600 on your machine, select the version appropriate to the configuration file.
2. Select a report from either the General Reports or the Base Time Reports pane. Config600 adds Configure, Edit, and Delete buttons next to the report listing.
12-2
Report Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 12-2. PCSetup Reports screen with Edit button 3. Click Edit. The Report Editor opens, displaying the selected report.
Figure 12-3. Report Editor
12.1.2 Via Report Editor
Use this method to open the Report Editor application independently of the PCSetup Editor. 1. Click Start > All Programs > Config600 3.3 > Report Editor. A
Select Config dialog displays.
Revised January-2021
Report Editor
12-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 12-4. Select Config dialog
2. Select a configuration. Note that Config600 completes the information fields for the selected configuration.
Figure 12-5. Select Config dialog
3. Click OK. Config600 loads all of the reports defined within that configuration file and displays the first report on the Report Editor screen. Note that the screen's title bar now displays the report name (rep8.txt, in this case).
12-4
Report Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 12-6. Report Editor screen (populated)
Note: By default, Report Editor displays the rep8.txt report first. To display a list of all currently defined reports within this configuration file, click the Window option on the menu bar.
12.1.3 Report Names
Config600 uses the following naming convention for the report files. You cannot change these report file names, which are listed so you can locate them in the Reports directory, if necessary.
Report File Name rep00.txt rep01.txt rep02.txt rep03.txt rep04.txt rep05.txt rep06.txt rep07.txt rep08.txt rep09.txt rep10.txt rep11.txt rep12.txt rep13.txt rep14.txt rep15.txt
Description Fixed Hourly Report Batch Report Maintenance Report Base Time 1 Period 1 Report Base Time 1 Period 2 Report Base Time 1 Period 3 Report Base Time 1 Period 4 Report Base Time 2 Period 1 Report Base Time 2 Period 2 Report Base Time 2 Period 3 Report Base Time 2 Period 4 Report Base Time 3 Period 1 Report Base Time 3 Period 2 Report Base Time 3 Period 3 Report Base Time 3 Period 4 Report Current Report
Revised January-2021
Report Editor
12-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Report File Name rep16.txt
rep17.txt rep18.txt rep19.txt rep20.txt rep21.txt rep22.txt rfep23.txt rep24.txt rep25 rep39.txt
Description Stream Prover Volume Report Note: Previous versions of the Config600
software grouped the Prover Volume report and the Prover Mass report in one report, rep16.txt. Stream Prover Mass Report Station 1 Prover Volume Report Station 1 Prover Mass Report Station 2 Prover Volume Report Station 2 Prover Mass Report CHR D/LOAD CHR TELEMETRY BATCH TICKET User defined reports
12.2
Using the Report Editor
Regardless of the access method, once you open the Report Editor you can begin using it to modify the format and content of your reports.
You select editing functions from a pop-up menu, which displays when you right-click any part of the Report Editor screen:
Figure 12-7. Report Editor menu
Note: You can also access this menu by selecting Edit from the menu bar.
12-6
Report Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
The menu provides these options:
Option Cut Copy Paste New Placement
Edit Placement Delete Insert Line Delete Line
Description Removes the selected element from the report and places it on the Clipboard.
Copies the selected element from the report and places it on the Clipboard.
Places content from the Clipboard to the cursor's location.
Accesses the Placement Editor, which you use to define a new data point (see Section 12.2.1, Adding a Data Point).
Accesses the Placement Editor, which you use to edit a current data point.
Removes the selected element from the report without placing it on the Clipboard.
Adds a line to the report at the cursor's current position.
Removes the selected line from the report.
Note: The Report Editor does not provide an "undo" function. Once you have deleted a report element or a line, you cannot restore it. You must recreate it.
12.2.1 Adding a Data Point
Use this procedure to add a data point field to the selected report. 1. Place the cursor where you want to insert the new data point. 2. Right-click and select New Placement from the shortcut menu.
The Placement Editor dialog box displays.
Note: You can also select Edit > New Placement from the menu bar.
Figure 12-8. Placement Editor
3. Click System Run Mode / Desc to select a data point. The Connect Wizard displays.
Revised January-2021
Report Editor
12-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 12-9. Connect Wizard 4. Define the new data point by highlighting values in each of the four
columns. Select from left to right. You can click or to display more values. Refer to Appendix E, S600+ Database Objects and Fields for additional information. 5. Click OK once you have defined the new data point. The Placement Editor dialog box re-displays. Note that the label on the button now reflects the choices you made using the Connect Wizard.
Figure 12-10. Placement Editor with revised label
6. Complete the following fields on the Placement Editor dialog box:
Field Minimum Field Width
Alignment
Description
Indicates the number of characters reserved for the data item, counted to the right of where you placed the data item. If the number or text exceeds the minimum field width, the data item automatically expands to the right.
Indicates whether the data point aligns to the left or right of the placed position.
7. Click OK to apply your new data point definition to the report file. The report file displays, showing your new data point.
12-8
Report Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
12.2.2 Editing a Data Point
Use this procedure to edit an existing data point field on the selected report. 1. Select an existing data point and right-click. The edit pop-up menu
displays. 2. Select Edit Placement. The Placement Editor dialog box displays.
Figure 12-11. Placement Editor dialog box 3. Click the button at the top of the dialog box. The Connect Wizard
displays. Note: The label on this button changes depending on the data
point you select.
Figure 12-12. Connect Wizard
4. Modify the selections on the Connect Wizard as necessary. 5. Click OK when you finish. The Placement Editor dialog box
displays. 6. Click OK to apply your changes to the data point. The report file
displays.
12.2.3 Adding Report Lines
Use this procedure to insert a new line on the report. 1. Place the cursor where you desire to insert the new line.
Revised January-2021
Report Editor
12-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Right-click and select Insert Line from the shortcut menu. Config600 adds a blank line to the report above the cursor position.
12.2.4 Deleting Report Lines
Use this procedure to delete a line from the report. 1. Place the cursor on the desired line. 2. Right-click and select Delete Line from the shortcut menu.
Config600 removes the line from the report.
This editor does not provide an "undo" facility. Once you delete a
Caution report line, you cannot restore it. You must rebuild it.
12-10
Report Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 13 Display Editor
In This Chapter
13.1 Accessing the Display Editor .......................................................... 13-1 13.2 Navigating the Display Editor ......................................................... 13-2 13.3 Editing............................................................................................. 13-3
13.3.1 Insert Menu....................................................................... 13-5 13.3.2 Insert/Append Page.......................................................... 13-5 13.3.3 Edit Line............................................................................ 13-5 13.3.4 Translate........................................................................... 13-7 13.3.5 Save ................................................................................. 13-8 13.3.6 Menu/Page Clipboard....................................................... 13-8 13.4 Regenerating Displays ................................................................... 13-8
The S600+ Display Editor allows you to customize the visual display on your S600+'s front panel. The Display Editor provides a graphical "what-you-see-is-what-you-get" (WYSIWYG) feel for the final appearance of the front panel and the navigation of your configuration in the S600+. The Display Editor presents your configuration, allowing you to view the actual data point initialization values for your specific application.
Note: The Display Editor front panel does not display live data from the S600+.
13.1 Accessing the Display Editor
You can start the Display Editor in any of three ways:
Click the Edit Displays icon on the PCSetup Editor's tool bar. The Display Editor menu displays.
Select Tools > Edit Displays from the PCSetup Editor's Menu bar. Click Start > All Programs > Config600 3.3 > Display Editor.
You select a configuration from the Select Config dialog box. The Display Editor menu displays.
Caution
Because of the way S600+ creates and saves displays, you should edit displays only after you have finished creating the configuration file. This ensures the inclusion of any changes to the configuration.
Revised January-2021
Display Editor
13-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 13-1. Display Editor main menu screen
13.2 Navigating the Display Editor
To navigate through the Display Editor, click menu options 1 through 6 and 8. To move back up through the menus, click the menu button or the 4-direction arrow key. These keys behave just as they do on the S600+ front panel itself. Refer to Chapter 5 in the FloBoss S600+ Flow Computer Instruction Manual (part D301150X412) for more details on front panel navigation.
13-2
Display Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 13-2. Typical Display Page (Stream 2 Flow Limits shown)
13.3 Editing the Display Editor
To edit the displays: 1. Right-click on a menu line to display a shortcut menu.
Revised January-2021
Display Editor
13-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 13-3. Display Editor with shortcut menu
This menu provides the following options:
Option Insert Menu Insert Page
Append Page Edit Line Translate
Save Menu/Page Help
Description Creates a submenu.
When you select Insert Page from a menu, the Display Editor creates and inserts a page link at the position of the cursor.
When you select Insert Page from a page, the Display Editor creates and inserts a page before the selected page.
Creates and inserts a page after the selected page.
Edits the selected line.
Re-indexes the placements on the displays to use an alternative stream or station selection, such as to change stream objects from their current stream selection to the equivalent selection in another stream.
Saves any modifications you have made to the configuration file.
Cut, copy, delete or paste the menu item or page link.
Accesses the online help for the Display Editor.
Config600 grays out any options that do not apply to the selected item.
13-4
Display Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
13.3.1
Insert Menu
To create a new menu, right-click on any empty menu slot and select Insert Menu.
The S600+ can display more than eight options in a menu. However, unless the menu already has eight or more options, you cannot currently add more options.
Note: If you create empty menus while editing, the S600+ does not display them because the Display Editor automatically removes them on startup.
13.3.2
Insert/Append Page
To create a new page, right-click on any empty menu slot. You can add a new page to an existing menu option by navigating to a page on that row, right-clicking, and selecting either Insert Page (to create a page before the current one) or Append Page (to create a page after the current one).
The S600+ can display more than eight options in a menu. However, due to technical limitations with the Display Editor, you cannot add more options. Contact technical support personnel if you need to add more options.
13.3.3
Edit Line
To edit an existing line in the display menu:
1. Right-click on the required line and select Edit Line. The Edit dialog box displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure 13-4. Edit dialog box
Display Editor
13-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. If the line contains only text, use the Text field to change the displayed description.
Note: The description cannot contain any commas (,).
3. Click OK when you are finished. The menu displays, showing your edit.
4. If the line contains a data point or you want to place a data point on a blank line, select the Data Point checkbox. Config600 activates the rest of the Edit dialog box.
Figure 13-5. Edit dialog box
5. Click the Data Point button at the top of the Data Point pane to define a data point. The Connect Wizard displays.
Figure 13-6. Connect Wizard
13-6
Display Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6. Define the new data point by highlighting values in each of the four columns (object source, object type, object, object field). Select from left to right. Click or to display more values.
Note: Refer to Appendix E, S600+ Database Objects and Fields.
7. Click OK when you have finished. The Edit dialog box displays.
8. Complete, as necessary, the remaining fields on the Edit dialog box.
Field Security Exponential Format
Decimal Places Leading Zeroes High Limit Low Limit
Description Indicates a security Level (0 to 9) for the field. Note: The default is 0 (cannot be changed).
Select to indicate the representation of numbers in an exponential format.
Note: If you select this checkbox, S600+ greys out the Decimal Places and Leading Zeroes fields.
Indicates the number of decimal places required for the selected field.
Select to indicate whether leading zeroes are required for this field.
Indicates the high (maximum) limit for the value in this field.
Indicates the low (minimum) limit for the value in this field.
9. Click OK when you have finished defining the field. The Display Editor displays, showing the new value you have defined.
13.3.4
Translate
This shortcut menu option allows you to translate or copy a menu structure for one stream or station into that for another stream or station. To translate a menu structure:
Note: The Translate function only translates stream or station data.
1. Build the display structure you require for one stream or station. (This is the "model" structure.)
2. Right-click on another line and select Translate. The Translate dialog box displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure 13-7. Translate dialog box
Display Editor
13-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3. Select a model stream or station from the left-hand column and a target stream or station in the right-hand column. Config600 activates the OK button when you identify a target stream or station.
4. Click OK to apply the model structure to the target stream or station.
13.3.5 Save
If you have changed any display content, Config600 gives you the option of saving your changes through the Save option on the shortcut menu. Establishing the habit of saving your work frequently is a highly recommended practice.
13.3.6
Menu/Page Clipboard
The Display Editor has a built-in clipboard that can store any number of menus and/or pages. This enables you to copy or move menus and pages by right-clicking and using the shortcut menu.
To copy a page to the clipboard, navigate to that page and select Menu/Page > Copy from the shortcut menu.
To copy a whole row of pages to the clipboard, navigate to the menu above the row of pages, right-click on the title of the row of pages, and select Menu/Page > Copy.
To copy a menu structure complete with all submenus and pages, navigate to the menu above the menu structure you wish to copy, right-click on the menu title required, and select Menu/Page > Copy.
Deleting and cutting menus and pages is the same as copying but you select Menu/Page > Delete or Menu/Page > Cut. A Cut is similar to a Delete, except that the action places the deleted items on the clipboard.
Once you have a page or a row of pages on the clipboard, you can paste them either to an empty menu slot or into an already existing row of pages.
To paste the page(s) to an empty slot, right-click on an empty menu slot and select Menu/Page > Paste.
To paste the page(s) into an already existing row of pages, navigate to an already existing page and select Menu/Page > Paste. Config600 pastes a copy of the page or pages on the clipboard after the current display in the page row.
When you have a menu structure in the clipboard, you can paste it into any empty menu slot by right-clicking on it and selecting Menu/Page > Paste. You cannot paste menu structures into pages or page rows.
13.4 Regenerating Displays
Using an option in PCSetup, you can restore S600+ displays to the appearance and values as defined in the selected configuration.
13-8
Display Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual This option overwrites any edits or customisations you may have made
Caution to the displays in the selected configuration. 1. Select File > Regenerate from the PCSetup menu bar. The Display and Modbus Regeneration dialog box displays.
Figure 13-8. Display Regeneration 2. Select the Displays check box and click OK. Config600 restores
all S600+ displays to the default values defined in the selected configuration.
Revised January-2021
Display Editor
13-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual [This page is left intentionally blank.]
13-10
Display Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 14 Modbus Editor
In This Chapter
14.1 Supported Function Codes ............................................................. 14-1 14.2 Accessing the Modbus Editor ......................................................... 14-2 14.3 Using the Modbus Editor................................................................. 14-2 14.4 Map Properties................................................................................ 14-3
14.4.1 Insert a Data Point............................................................ 14-5 14.4.2 Quick Insert ...................................................................... 14-6 14.4.3 Insert Special.................................................................... 14-6 14.4.4 Insert Special.................................................................... 14-7 14.4.5 Delete a Data Point .......................................................... 14-8 14.4.6 Edit Modbus Format ......................................................... 14-8 14.4.7 Insert a Message ............................................................ 14-10 14.4.8 Insert a Slave.................................................................. 14-12 14.5 Regenerating Maps....................................................................... 14-12
The Modbus protocol is the standard communications interface to the S600+. The protocol is based on Gould/Modicon Modbus. The S600+ supports Modbus, Modbus Enron (also referred to as Modbus with EFM Extensions), and Modbus encapsulated in TCP/IP. The FloBoss S600+ supports both slave and master functionality in Modbus and Modbus Enron, and slave functionality in Modbus encapsulated in TCP/IP.
Modbus is the Config600 software interface to the S600+. This communications link uses Function Code 65, with specially designed sub-functions to provide file transfer, system edit commands, and other specialized functionality. The S600+ is the slave on this link.
14.1 Supported Function Codes
The Config600 Modbus supports the following function codes.
Function Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 15 16 65 66 67 68
Description Read Output Status Read Input Status Read Output Registers Read Input Registers Read Single Coil Read Single Register Loopback Write Multiple Coils Write Multiple Registers Read Floats (PCSetup only) Write Floats (PCSetup only) Read Doubles (PCSetup only) Write Doubles (PCSetup only)
Revised January-2021
Modbus fully supports RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) Modbus and ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) Modbus. In RTU mode, you must configure the link for 8 data bits. No message header or trailer is included. The checksum is the 16-bit CRC
Modbus Editor
14-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
specified in the Gould Modbus specification. No inter-character gaps are required on received RTU Modbus messages.
In ASCII mode, you can set the link to 7 or 8 data bits. The message starts with the ASCII Modbus start character ":" (colon). The checksum is the 8-bit LRC defined in the Gould Modbus specification. The message terminates with the ASCII Modbus trailer characters "CR" then "LF".
The communications configuration is split into two parts: link configuration for the ten tasks (links) and map configuration. The Modbus map configuration is the assignment of database points and fields to Modbus coils, inputs, and registers. This is accomplished through a text file you build using the Modbus Editor.
14.2 Accessing the Modbus Editor
You can start the Modbus Editor in either of two ways: From the PCSetup Editor's hierarchy menu, select I/O Setup >
Comms. Select a Modbus task that includes an Address Map and click Edit. The Modbus Editor displays. From Windows, click Start > All Programs > Config600 3.3 > Modbus Editor. Select File > Open and select a configuration file from the Select Config dialog box. The Modbus Editor displays.
Note: If you have more than one version of Config600 on your machine, select the version appropriate to the configuration file. Starting with Config600 3.1, the system derives the Slave Modbus map from the in-use display file.
14.3 Using the Modbus Editor
The Config600 Modbus Editor enables you to configure the Modbus maps the Config600 sends to the S600+ to allow communications.
Using the Modbus Editor, you create Modbus maps as text files. All Modbus maps must use the naming convention "mbxxxxxx.txt": file names begin with mb followed by six characters of your choosing. The S600+ only recognizes map files that start with mb.
Note: As you edit maps, make sure to save (using either the Save icon or File > Save) all modifications to the files.
The interface shows the coils, inputs, and registers in a spreadsheetstyle tables. The editor consists of two panes: a hierarchy menu in the left pane and the tables in the right pane.
14-2
Modbus Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: Addresses that display and that you enter at the S600+ are the actual address transmitted and received within the Modbus messages, they are not pre-processed. Functions are entered separately and are not associated with a specific address range. Each function can access any address.
Figure 14-1. Modbus Editor main screen
Note: Using the PCSetup Editor's Comms screen (I/O Setup > Comms), you can define an entire Modbus map as read-only. This prevents the host PC--or any other computer--from editing or overwriting the map.
14.4 Map Properties
Use the Modbus map Properties dialog box to set parameters for the map's .txt file. 1. Select Register in the left pane. 2. Select File > Properties from the Modbus Editor's menu bar. The
Properties dialog box displays.
Revised January-2021
Modbus Editor
14-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 14-2. Properties dialog box
Note: If you selected a slave map to edit, Config600 greys out the Master Settings.
3. Complete the following fields:
Field TX Buffer Size RX Buffer Size Message Length Mode
Poll Delay Loop Delay Retry Limit
Description
Sets, in bytes, the size of the message transmit buffer. Valid values are 256 to 65535. For normal Modbus operation, set this to 256, since this is the maximum message size Modbus supports.
Sets, in bytes, the size of the message receive buffer. Valid values are 256 to 65535. For normal Modbus operation, set this to 256, since this is the maximum message size Modbus supports.
Indicates how the system handles the message length section of the Modbus message. Click to display valid values, which include Byte 8, Byte 16, Item 8, and Item 16.
The basic Modbus specification defines this field as a single byte, which defines the number of bytes of data in the message. Many implementations have changed this field to be an item count, indicating the number of data items in the message.
To increase the amount of data you can transfer, the S600+ supports a 16-bit value for this field. This 16-bit value is not compatible with standard Modbus.
Note: If you use either of the 16-bit formats, messages may be longer than 256 bytes. Adjust the values in the TX Buffer Size and RX Buffer Size fields accordingly.
Sets, in sixtieths of a second, the delay between system polls.
Sets, in sixtieths of a second, the delay at the end of a poll loop.
Sets the number of retries the master polls for a single message before classing it as failed.
14-4
Modbus Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Timeout Slave Status Object
Slave Control Object
Slave Address Object
Description
Sets, in seconds, the amount of time the master waits for a response from the slave.
The slave status KPINTARR gives the communication link status of an individual slave on a Modbus master link. Each field of the KPINTARR represents the status of a specific slave. For example, a Modbus master link with three slaves would use FIELD01, FIELD02 and FIELD03 as they appear listed in the Modbus map editor tree view. Note the field number bears no relation to the Modbus slave address. The individual fields can have a value of 0 (healthy), 1 (disabled) or 2 (communication error).
The slave control KPINTARR uses to enable or disable an individual slave on a Modbus master link. Each field of the KPINTARR represents the status of a specific slave. For example, FIELD01 enables or disables the first slave as listed in the Modbus map editor tree view. Note the field number bears no relation to the Modbus slave address.
The slave address KPINTARR uses to define the Modbus address of an individual slave on a Modbus master link. Each field of the KPINTARR represents the address of a specific slave. For example, FIELD01 contains the address of the first slave as listed in the Modbus map editor tree view.
4. Click OK when you have finished. The Modbus Editor screen displays.
14.4.1
Insert a Data Point
The Modbus Editor provides three ways to add a data point to the Modbus map:
Quick Insert (base new data point entirely on selected data point). Insert Special (define new data point by using the Enter Details
and Choose dialog boxes). Insert (do not base new data point on selected data point; use the
Enter Details dialog box and Connect Wizard to define data point components).
Note: Regardless of the method you select, be sure to save the Modbus map after you add each new point.
These methods correspond to the options on the Edit shortcut menu, which are also available through the Edit menu on the Modbus Editor menu bar.
Revised January-2021
Modbus Editor
14-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
14.4.2
Figure 14-3. Insert shortcut menu
Quick Insert
To base a new data point on a selected data point: 1. Select the data type in the hierarchy menu. The associated list
displays in the right pane. 2. Select a data point in the right pane. Right-click the data point to
display the shortcut menu 3. Select Quick Insert. Using the next available starting address, the
Modbus Editor adds the new data point to the data point listing.
Note: To further define this data point, refer to the procedures described in Section 14.4.6, Edit Modbus Format.
14.4.3
Insert Special
To add a data point field to the report:
1. Select the data type in the hierarchy menu. The associated list displays in the right pane.
2. Select a data point in the right pane. Right-click the data point to display the shortcut menu.
3. Select Insert Special. The Modbus Editor displays the Enter Details dialog box.
Figure 14-4. Enter Details dialog box
14-6
Modbus Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4. Indicate a starting address for the new data point. As a default, the Modbus Editor uses the next available address based on the data point you selected in step 2.
5. Click OK. The Choose dialog box displays.
Figure 14-5. Choose dialog box
6. Select a data item type and click OK. The Modbus Editor adds the new data point to the data point listing.
Note: To further define this data point, refer to the procedures described in Section 14.4.6, Edit Modbus Format.
14.4.4
Insert Special
To create the next available address using the same parameters as the selected data item:
1. Select the data type in the hierarchy menu. The associated list displays in the right pane.
2. Select a data point in the right pane. Right-click the data point to display the shortcut menu.
3. Select Insert. The Modbus Editor displays the Enter Details dialog box.
Figure 14-6. Enter Details dialog box
4. Indicate a starting address for the new data point. As a default, the Modbus Editor uses the next available address based on the data point you selected in step 2.
5. Click OK. The Connect Wizard displays.
Revised January-2021
Modbus Editor
14-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 14-7. Connect Wizard
6. Define the new data point by highlighting values in each of the four columns (source, type, item, field). Select from left to right. Click or to display more values.
7. Click OK. The Modbus Editor displays, showing the newly added data point.
14.4.5 Delete a Data Point
The Modbus Editor does not have an "undo" function. Once you delete
Caution a data point, you cannot restore it. You must re-create it.
To delete a data point: 1. Right-click a data point. A shortcut menu displays. 2. Select Delete from the shortcut menu. The Modbus Editor screen
displays without the selected data point.
14.4.6
Edit Modbus Format
To edit the format of a Modbus register: 1. Select a register from the hierarchy menu. Config600 highlights
the register in the left-hand pane. 2. Right-click a data item. Config600 displays a shortcut menu.
Note: The options on the shortcut menu are also available on the Edit menu on the Modbus Editor's menu bar.
3. Select Edit Format from the shortcut menu. The Edit Format dialog box displays.
14-8
Modbus Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Revised January-2021
Figure 14-8. Edit Format dialog box
4. Select an address format. Click to display additional formats.
Field Scale n nnnn
Float
Double Enron 16 Bit Enron 32 Bit Enron Float Rosemount
Phillips Float
Description
Reads holding registers as integers, scaled between the values n and nnnn. In master mode, the S600+ displays the value returned in terms of the selected scaling. For example, 500 would represent 50% on the scaling 0 999 or 5% on the scaling 0 9999. You can configure data at every address (such as 0 to 65535).
Reads holding registers as IEEE-format singleprecision floating point numbers, Most Significant Byte (MSB) first. For each point required, one address is requested in the Modbus message and 4 bytes are returned. You can configure data at every address (such as 0 to 65535).
Reads holding registers as IEEE-format doubleprecision floating point numbers. For each point required, one address is requested in the Modbus message and 8 bytes are returned. You can configure data at every address (such as 0 to 65535).
Reads holding registers as signed integers, in the range 32767 (Hex 8001) to 32767 (Hex 7FFF). You can configure data at every address (such as 0 to 65535).
Reads holding registers as unsigned long integers. Negative numbers are not allowed. You can configure data at every address (such as 0 to 65535).
Reads holding registers as IEEE-format singleprecision floating point numbers, MSB first. For each point required, one address is requested in the Modbus message and 4 bytes are returned. You can configure data at every address (such as 0 to 65535).
Reads holding registers as IEEE-format singleprecision floating point numbers, Least Significant Byte (LSB) first used on Rosemount DCS systems. For each point required, two addresses are requested in the Modbus message and 4 bytes are returned. You can configure data at every other address (such as 0, 2, 4 to 65534).
Reads holding registers as IEEE-format singleprecision numbers, MSB first. For each point required, two addresses are requested in the Modbus message and 4 bytes are returned. You can configure data at alternate addresses (such as 0, 2, 4 to 65534).
Modbus Editor
14-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Phillips Double
RFT 64 Bit MVD Total
Description
Reads holding registers as IEEE-format doubleprecision numbers, MSB first. For each point required, four addresses are requested in the Modbus message and 8 bytes are returned. You can configure data at every fourth address (such as 0, 2, 4 to 65534).
Reads totals from a Micro Motion RFT transmitter using a proprietary data format.
Reads totals from a Micro Motion MVD transmitter using a proprietary data format.
5. Complete the Addr/Item field to indicate the number of addresses Config600 must poll for each variable.
6. Select the Eventing type if required. Click to display additional options.
Field Disabled Changes
All
Description The eventing for this data point is disabled (default).
When the value written to the data point is different to the current value an event is logged.
Every time a write to the data point is performed an event is logged.
7. If necessary, select the Security Level. Click to display additional options.
Option 0 9
Description Maximum possible security level Minimum possible security level.
8. Click OK to apply the edits. Config600 displays the Modbus Editor.
14.4.7
Insert a Message
Use this option to insert a message request into a Master Modbus map file. This message requests defined slave devices or all slaves for specific information.
Note: Slave Modbus map files do not allow the message option.
To insert a new message: 1. Select Slave > Add New Message from the Modbus Editor menu
bar. The Message Details dialog box displays.
14-10
Figure 14-9. Message Details dialog box
Modbus Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Select a Message Function. Click to display additional options. 3. Define a Start Address and a Message Length in the dialog box. 4. Click the Trigger button to define a trigger value for the message.
The Connect Wizard displays.
Figure 14-10. Connect Wizard
Note: Select a KPINT or KPINTARR value from the Connect Wizard if the message uses an object as a trigger mechanism. When the object value is set to 1, the system polls the message and, once the polls complete, sets the object's value back to zero.
5. Highlight values in each of the four columns (source, type, item, field). Select from left to right. Click or to display more values.
6. Click OK to apply this definition. The Message Details dialog box displays showing the Trigger event you selected.
Figure 14-11. Message Details dialog box (with trigger)
7. Click OK to apply this message. Config600 displays a Select Slaves dialog box.
Revised January-2021
Modbus Editor
14-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 14-12. Select Slaves dialog box
8. Select a displayed Slave Address and click OK to apply the selection. Config600 displays the Modbus Editor.
14.4.8
Insert a Slave
You can add slaves into a Master Modbus map file at any time. When initially added, the new slave address has blank tables. You can either complete these blank tables one data point at a time or cut-and-paste data points from another slave.
To create a new slave:
1. Click in the hierarchy menu in the left pane.
2. Select Slave > Add New Slave from the menu bar. A Choose dialog box displays.
Figure 14-13. Choose dialog box
3. Select the Slave Address from the list of available addresses on the left-hand side of the screen.
4. Click OK. The Modbus Editor screen redisplays, showing your new slave in the hierarchy menu.
Note: You can also request a new start address at this time.
14.5 Regenerating Maps
Using an option in PCSetup, you can restore Modbus maps to the default values defined in the selected configuration.
14-12
Modbus Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
This option overwrites any edits or customisations you may have made
Caution to the maps in the selected configuration. 1. Select File > Regenerate from the PCSetup menu bar. The Display and Modbus Regeneration dialog box displays.
Figure 14-14. Modbus Map Regeneration
2. Select the Modbus Maps check box. The Modbus Map Options panel displays, showing the default Modbus options:
Revised January-2021
Figure 14-15. Modbus Map Options
3. Select the options you want to enable and click OK. Config600 restores all Modbus maps to the default values defined in the selected configuration.
Modbus Editor
14-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual [This page is left intentionally blank.]
14-14
Modbus Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Chapter 15 LogiCalc Editor
In This Chapter
15.1 15.2
15.3 15.4
15.5
Accessing the LogiCalc Editor ........................................................ 15-2 15.1.1 LogiCalc Tips.................................................................... 15-4 15.1.2 Starting a LogiCalc ........................................................... 15-5 Creating a LogiCalc ........................................................................ 15-5 15.2.1 Variables........................................................................... 15-6 15.2.2 LogiCalc Loops................................................................. 15-7 15.2.3 LogiCalc Constants .......................................................... 15-8 15.2.4 Connecting to Data Items ................................................. 15-9 15.2.5 If/Then/Endif ................................................................... 15-11 15.2.6 Special Functions ........................................................... 15-12 15.2.7 Saving and Compiling a LogiCalc .................................. 15-13 15.2.8 Running a LogiCalc in Simulation Mode ........................ 15-14 Installing a LogiCalc on the S600+ ............................................... 15-15 15.3.1 Remotely Debugging a LogiCalc.................................... 15-16 LogiCalc Examples ....................................................................... 15-16 15.4.1 Perform PTZ Calculations .............................................. 15-17 15.4.2 Convert Temperature Units ............................................ 15-18 15.4.3 Convert Density Units to Kgm3 ...................................... 15-18 15.4.4 Convert Density Units from Kgm3 .................................. 15-19 15.4.5 Perform PTZ Calculations and Convert Units ................ 15-20 15.4.6 Perform PTZ Calculations on All Streams...................... 15-22 LogiCalc Lanuage Specifications.................................................. 15-23 15.5.1 LogiCalc Statements ...................................................... 15-23 15.5.2 Built-In Functions............................................................ 15-26 15.5.3 Alarms ............................................................................ 15-28
Note: This editor is available only with the Config600 Pro software.
Caution
The S600+ can run LogiCalc programs written in LogiCalc, a Basiclike language proprietary to Emerson Process Management. You can add LogiCalc programs to an existing S600+ configuration without rebuilding the base software. This allows you to customise and extend the functionality of the S600+. LogiCalc programs can read, write, and perform calculations on values in the S600+ database.
This chapter is intended for use in conjunction with materials from the RA901 Advanced Config600 training course. That training is critical to understanding the concepts in this section. Unless you have completed that training, do not attempt to use the material in this section as a sole means of learning about the LogiCalc Editor.
The LogiCalc Editor enables you to write, test, and debug programs. You can test LogiCalc programs on the PC against an actual S600+ config file or test them in-place, running on the S600+. You can also monitor LogiCalc programs running in the S600+ from the Webserver under Diags > LogiCalc.
Revised January-2021
LogiCalc Editor
15-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Notes:
In-place testing with Version 1.2 or earlier of Config600 requires a serial connection between your PC and the S600+. Version 1.3 or higher allows an Ethernet connection.
The S600+ can execute several LogiCalcs in parallel, they run at a low task priority so in a large configuration they may run slowly. Hence they are not suitable for use where timing is critical.
Example LogiCalcs
The Config600 3.3 directory contains a LCLIB folder. In this folder are sample LogiCalc programs, provided solely as models to help you create your own LogiCalc programs. No warranty, expressed or implied, accompanies these programs. Additionally, no support is available for these programs.
15.1 Accessing the LogiCalc Editor
To access the LogiCalc Editor:
1. Select Start > All Programs > Config600 3.3 > LogiCalc Editor. The Config600 LogiCalc screen displays.
Note: If you have more than one version of Config600 on your machine, select the version appropriate to the configuration file.
Figure 15-1. LogiCalc screen
2. Click the Load Config icon located in the upper left-hand corner of the toolbar. The Select Config dialog displays.
15-2
LogiCalc Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure 15-2. Select Config dialog box Note: You can also display this dialog by selecting File > Load
Local Config from the LogiCalc screen's menu bar. 3. Select a configuration file and click OK. The LogiCalc screen
redisplays, loaded with the LogiCalc in the selected configuration.
Revised January-2021
Figure 15-3. LogiCalc screen (loaded)
The LogiCalc Editor screen consists of four panes: Alarm, Program (or Code), Variable, and Status. You can dock, hide, or move each pane to suit your needs.
The LogiCalc Editor is designed for ease of use. The Program pane prompts you for the next step in writing the program by intelligently moving the cursor to the next task, either a necessary statement or portion of a statement. You can place statements in the program by
LogiCalc Editor
15-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
typing them in, by using keyboard shortcuts, or through the Statements menu. The LogiCalc Editor also uses the Connect Wizard to permit you easy access to items in the database.
For quick reference, the Editor always displays the cursor's position at the bottom of the window, below the Status pane, such as "Ln 2, Col 17" = line 2, column 17.
The Editor provides a "Goto Line" facility. It helps you navigate in longer LogiCalcs, enabling you to move the cursor to a specific line in the file. To access this facility, select Edit > Goto Line from the menu bar at the top of the screen.
The Alarms pane is useful when setting, accepting, and clearing alarms using the LogiCalc Editor. During debugging of the program, the test appears in the Alarms pane.
15.1.1
LogiCalc Tips
Review the following tips before you begin work on a LogiCalc program.
Structurally, a LogiCalc is a list of one or more functions laid out sequentially in a text file. Functions start with the "function" keyword and end with the "end" keyword. Place the actual code to be executed (in statements) between these two keywords.
End all functions and statements with a semicolon (;).
Indent code within functions to improve readability.
Some programming languages require you to specify what type of data (such as textural or numeric) a variable holds. LogiCalc automatically converts between the various data types, depending on the context.
LogiCalc evaluates mathematical expressions using precedence rules and not from left to right. Use brackets and parentheses as a guide accordingly.
The LogiCalc Editor supports both Undo (Edit > Undo Typing or Ctrl + Z) and Redo (Edit > Redo Typing or Ctrl + Y) functions.
Limit the length of LogiCalc filenames to eight characters. The file extension is ".lc".
LogiCalc always starts to execute a LogiCalc at the beginning of the last function in the file.
Type constant names in uppercase letters with underscores. Variable names should not be all uppercase.
The LogiCalc Editor colour-codes statements in blue and comments in green to differentiate them from the code.
Use the "#" character at the start of a line to identify comments (short lines of explanatory text) you add to the code for documentation. You can place comments on their own line or on the end of a line.
15-4
LogiCalc Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
15.1.2
Starting a LogiCalc
Writing LogiCalcs generally requires an existing S600+ configuration. If you do not have on your PC a copy of the configuration file with which the LogiCalc will eventually run, you can generate a file using the PCSetup Editor.
Note: If you generate a fresh configuration, make sure that it matches the destination configuration in all pertinent settings. Pay specific attention to database connections.
To start a LogiCalc, either create a new empty LogiCalc by clicking the New icon on the toobar ( ) or modify an existing LogiCalc using the File > Import option.
When you create a new LogiCalc, the LogiCalc Editor displays a new window:
Figure 15-4. LogiCalc screen (loaded)
15.2 Creating a LogiCalc
The following example demonstrates how to build a simple LogiCalc function. Once you start LogiCalc, the LogiCalc Editor positions the cursor where you should type the Function name. If you type test, the LogiCalc looks like this.
Revised January-2021
LogiCalc Editor
15-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
function test()
end;
Note: All code examples in this chapter use this font convention to distinguish them from the text.
Next, you add some instructions to be executed. If you move the cursor down from the function tag to the next blank line, you see that the LogiCalc Editor has also inserted a tab on the next blank line. This provides indentation to help in readibilty.
15.2.1
Variables
Variables are boxes that hold data, which can be a number (such as 4) or a text string (such as "Hello"). You create variables with names and refer to them by these names in the LogiCalc code. To create a variable with a name "my_value", add the following line after the tab:
dim my_value;
The Dimension (dim) statement is used heavily in Basic-type languages for creating variables. You may have noticed that the LogiCalc Editor has recognised the dim statement and coloured it blue.
This new variable does not yet have a value. LogiCalc does not require you to specify what type of data (text or numeric) a variable holds. For this example, the variable should hold a number 1. You initialise the variable on the next line by changing the code to:
dim my_value; my_value = 1;
LogiCalc allows you to save space and increase readability by creating and initialising the variable in one step, so change the existing statement to:
dim my_value = 1;
Add the following statement on the next line:
my_value = my_value + 2 * 3;
This statement sets the value of my_value to the result of the expression on the right of the = sign. LogiCalc evaluates expressions using precedence rules, so it evaluates the * (multiply) before the +, giving the answer of 1 + 6 = 7. That is different from a left-to-right evaluation of our expression, which would be 3 * 3 = 9.
Use brackets to force a left-to-right evaluation of the expression:
my_value = (my_value + 2) * 3;
The program is now complete and should look like this:
function test() dim my_value = 1; my_value = (my_value + 2) * 3;
end;
15-6
LogiCalc Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
15.2.2 LogiCalc Loops
The example in the previous section executes a couple of statements and then stops. To create a LogiCalc that runs continuously, you need a loop.
while/do/wend To insert a while/do/wend loop, position the cursor at the beginning of the line "my_value = (my_value + 2) * 3;".
Insert a while/do/wend statement from the Statements > while/do/wend menu option or Ctrl + W. The LogiCalc Editor inserts a while/do/wend statement and positions the cursor in the brackets where you need to enter an expression.
Enter "my_value < 100" as the expression and use Edit > Cut and Edit > Paste to rearrange the "my_value = (my_value + 2) * 3;" line into the while loop.
The while/do/wend statement allows nesting like the function/end statement, so the semicolon comes after the wend.
The format of the statement is "while <expression> do <nested statements> wend;"
When executing, the expression is first evaluated and, if it is true, the nested statements within the while are then executed. Once this is done, execution goes back to the top to evaluate the expression again and this continues until the expression is false.
In our case, the expression is true initially and remains true a couple of times through the loop, my_value growing each time the loop is executed. Eventually, my_value stops being less than 100 (that is, it becomes greater than or equal to 100) and execution "breaks out" of the loop and continues down the LogiCalc.
The program is now complete and should look like this:
function test() dim my_value = 1;
while (my_value < 100) do my_value = (my_value + 2) * 3;
wend; end;
for/next
To insert a for/next loop that will run for a number of times specified explicitly, position the cursor at the beginning of the "my_value = (my_value + 2) * 3;". Insert a for/next statement by using the Statement > for/next menu or Ctrl + R.
To perform our calculation 10 times, enter the following:
function test() dim my_value = 1; dim stream_number;
for stream_number = 1 to 10 my_value = (my_value + 2) * 3;
next; end;
Revised January-2021
LogiCalc Editor
15-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Summary
This loop requires another variable called stream_number. It has no assigned value in the dim statement, as the for/next statement has control over its value and it would overwrite any initialised value.
The for/next statement sets the stream_number variable to 1. Then the statement tests the value against 10. If the value is greater than 10 execution breaks out of the loop and continues on down the LogiCalc. If the value is not greater than 10, the nested statements within the loop execute. Once the execution completes, it goes back to the top of the loop, adds 1 to the loop variable (in this case, stream_number), and repeats the test against 10.
The while/do/wend is functionally identical to the for/next statement. But it exists as a separate statement because for/next looping is more precise, compact, and readable than the while/do/wend.
The following example is a for/next loop repeated with a while/do/wend loop around it. The while/do/wend statement evaluates 1 as an expression, which is always true. LogiCalc actually understands true and false as non-zero and zero respectively, so the while loop never terminates and the code performs the same task forever. This loop is useful if some of your variables are real world values, like Analog Input readings.
function test() while (1) do dim my_value = 1; dim stream_number;
for stream_number = 1 to 10 my_value = (my_value + 2) * 3;
next; wend; end;
15.2.3
LogiCalc Constants
LogiCalc has the ability to create and define variables that are not allowed to change. For instance, the statement:
for stream_number = 1 to 10
Uses two numbers, but the variable name indicates that they are being used as stream numbers and that 1 means stream 1 and 10 means stream 10.
However, a statement may not fully show what is being done, such as:
pressure_mode = 1;
Obviously a mode for pressure is being set up, but what is type 1? A constant (const) statement can make this sort of code more readable by specifying somewhere in the LogiCalc:
const ADC_KEYPAD = 1;
This allows you to change the assignment to:
pressure_mode = ADC_KEYPAD;
which is much more specific.
15-8
LogiCalc Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
The const statement is similar to the dim statement. However, you must assign a value in the const statement, whereas in a dim statement it is optional.
The following example shows the use of the const statement.
function test() const TRUE = 1;
while (TRUE) do dim my_value = 1; dim stream_number;
for stream_number = 1 to 10 my_value = (my_value + 2) * 3;
next; next; end;
15.2.4
Connecting to Data Items
LogiCalc provides the connect statement so that data items from the S600+ database can be read and written from the program.
To simplify the process of building connect statements, the Editor uses a Connect Wizard that offers a point-and-click method of choosing data to use within LogiCalcs. To open the Connect Wizard, select Statements > Connect from the menu bar or press Ctrl + T.
Note: The Connect Wizard displays only if you have already loaded a configuration file. If the Connect Wizard does not display, save your LogiCalc before you attempt to load a configuration file.
Creating a Const Statement
The Connect (const) statement is similar to a dim statement, since it also creates a new variable. But instead of the new variable being empty and open to any value, the new variable is implicitly connected to a point in the S600+ database. For example, the Analog Input scanning task within the S600+ is continually updating a data point with new values read from the input. If a LogiCalc program reads that data point at any time, it should get the current value of meter pressure.
To further explain this example, we can write a LogiCalc to read our stream 1 meter pressure into a variable and examine it. Position the cursor on the blank line in a new LogiCalc, and bring up the Connect Wizard by selecting Statements > Connect or Ctrl + T.
In the Connect Wizard, navigate to the Stream 1 meter pressure by selecting Stream 1 : GAS DP, IOASSIGN, STR01 METER PRESSURE, and INUSE. Once you find the desired data point, click OK.
The Connect Wizard adds two lines of code, and the Editor positions the cursor just after the connect statement so that you can complete the statement by typing a variable name. Type pressure.
Revised January-2021
LogiCalc Editor
15-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
The LogiCalc should now look like this:
function test() const IOASSIGN_GASDP_METERPRESSURE = 0;
connect pressure(stream(1), "IOASSIGN",IOASSIGN_GASDP_METERPRESSURE, "INUSE"); end;
Const statements can define a number by use of the constant name. So the const statement above with a name defines 0 to mean "IOASSIGN_GASDP_METERPRESSURE". The constant name may help you to recognize it later.
In the Connect statement, stream(1) refers to the database section that is reserved for stream 1.
The S600+ database is divided into sections, each section having within it a selection of the available data types. Within the sections, the database item locations are numbered:
0: System 17: I/O Modules 1 to 7 1011: Stations 1 and 2 1524: Streams 1 to 10.
Note: Database item locations 8, 9, and 12 through 14 are reserved for system use.
Using a Const Statement
LogiCalc accesses the S600+ database by calling upon these numbers in parentheses after functions and statements. LogiCalc translates the section number by adding or subtracting out the number of sections before the pertinent one.
For example, a const statement calls stream(1). This is another built-in function, stream(x), which just adds 14 to the stream number so that it conforms to the above section table. LogiCalc could refer to it as 15 instead of stream(1) but, that would be less understandable to the user reading the code.
To further explain this example, you can write a LogiCalc to read the stream 1 meter pressure into a variable and examine it. Position the cursor on the blank line in a new LogiCalc, and bring up the Connect Wizard by selecting Statements > Connect or Ctrl + T.
To demonstrate performing calculations on a connected data item, multiply the meter pressure from the example above by 2 and store the value back in the database. To make sure the program knows where to store the value back, create a new data item using the System Editor. This example uses an unused data point in the database.
Position the cursor on the next line from the connect statement and summon the Connect Wizard. Select System, KPREAL, Spare, and Value. Type "spare" as the Constant name.
This operation loops again and again, so the value tracks the pressure in real time. Note how the while/do/wend loop is only around the calculation. If it were around the whole program, the code would be reconnecting pressure and spare every time, which would increase the amount of time necessary to track changes in pressure.
15-10
LogiCalc Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Modify the LogiCalc as follows:
function test() const IOASSIGN_GASDP_METERPRESSURE = 0; const KPREAL_SYS_SPARE = 13;
connect pressure(stream(1), "IOASSIGN", IOASSIGN_GASDP_METERPRESSURE, "INUSE"); connect spare(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_SPARE, "INUSE");
while (1) do spare = pressure * 2;
wend; end;
15.2.5 If/Then/Endif
The if/then/endif and the if/then/else/endif statements allow LogiCalc to make decisions.
A LogiCalc can make a decision based on some external conditions. For example, if the meter pressure is in keypad (R/W) mode, it should be multiplied by 3 instead of 2.
First, connect to the mode of the meter pressure. Open the Connect Wizard and select Board 1:P144I/O, ADC, I/O ADC 01, and MODE. Select the Define Options checkbox, which creates const statements for all the different options of the parameter. In this case, all the modes area assigned a const statement with an integer value.
Type the variable name as pressure_mode and change the const names for the modes (that is, from IO1ADC01_MEASURED to ADC_MEASURED, and such.).
Add the if/then statements. The full format for this statement is if <expression> then <nested statements> else <nested statements> endif; and execution is directed either to the first set of statements or the second, depending on the outcome of the expression evaluation.
The if <expression> then <nested statements> endif; variant only has the one set of nested statements and executes them only if the expression is true. Otherwise they are skipped.
The new LogiCalc continually evaluates the pressure_mode and, if it is in keypad executes the * 3 statement. Otherwise, it executes the * 2 statement.
The complete LogiCalc looks like this:
function test() const IOASSIGN_GASDP_METERPRESSURE = 0; const KPREAL_SYS_SPARE = 13; const ADC_P144IIO_IO01ADC01 = 0;
const ADC_MEASURED = 0; const ADC_KEYPAD = 1; const ADC_AVERAGE = 2; const ADC_LASTGOOD = 3; const ADC_KEYPADF = 4; const ADC_AVERAGEF = 5; const ADC_LASTGOODF = 6;
connect pressure(stream(1), "IOASSIGN", IOASSIGN_GASDP_METERPRESSURE, "INUSE");
connect spare(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_SPARE, "INUSE");
Revised January-2021
LogiCalc Editor
15-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
connect pressure_mode(ioboard(1), "ADC", ADC_P144IIO_IO01ADC01, "MODE");
while (1) do if (pressure_mode = ADC_KEYPAD) then spare = pressure * 3; else spare = pressure * 2; endif;
wend; end;
15.2.6 Special Functions
LogiCalc can use data from the S600+ which is not an item in the database. It can read configuration-specific details, such as the number of streams present and what type they are. Use the numstream() function to determining the number of streams. Two other functions-- numstations() and numioboards()--perform the same functions for stations and I/O boards.
For example, the following simple LogiCalc reads the stream 1 meter pressure and copies it to a hard coded keypad real object.
function test() const IOASSIGN_GASDP_METERPRESSURE = 0; const KPREAL_SYS_SPARE = 13;
connect pressure(stream(1), "IOASSIGN", IOASSIGN_GASDP_METERPRESSURE, "INUSE"); connect spare(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_SPARE, "INUSE");
while (1) do spare = pressure * 2;
wend; end;
To expand it to sum the results of all stream pressures into this keypad real, use the numstreams() function. This is a built-in function that returns the number of streams in a configuration. Then, use a for/next statement to span the streams.
function test() const IOASSIGN_GASDP_METERPRESSURE = 0; const KPREAL_SYS_SPARE = 13;
connect spare(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_SPARE, "INUSE");
while (1) do dim stream_number;
# Hold the current stream number
spare = 0; for stream_number = 1 to numstreams()
connect pressure(stream(stream_number), "IOASSIGN", IOASSIGN_GASDP_METERPRESSURE, "INUSE");
spare = spare + pressure * 2; next; wend; end;
Note the added variable, stream_number (which is used as the variable in the for/next loop), and the comment.
15-12
LogiCalc Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
The spare variable is cleared down and the for/next loop sets stream_number to each stream present before executing the summing code. This code connects to the stream pressure for the current stream.
Note: Stream (stream_number) in the connect pressure statement determines the stream to which the pressure variable is connected. Once pressure is connected to the correct stream, the LogiCalc reads it, multiplies it by 2 and adds it into the spare variable.
You can modify this example. The spare variable is a direct link to the data item in the S600+ database, so it would be constantly changing back to zero and summing. It could be modified to sum it in another variable and then set this variable when the final sum is reached.
The stream_number variable is created inside the while/do/wend loop which means it is created every time around. This is not necessary and needs only to be created once. To make the program more efficient, move this statement out of the loop.
The modified LogiCalc now looks like:
function test() const IOASSIGN_GASDP_METERPRESSURE = 0; const KPREAL_SYS_SPARE = 13;
connect spare(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_SPARE, "INUSE");
dim stream_number;
# Hold the current stream number
while (1) do dim sum = 0;
# Hold the sum of two times the meter pressures
for stream_number = 1 to numstreams() connect pressure(stream(stream_number), "IOASSIGN",
IOASSIGN_GASDP_METERPRESSURE, "INUSE"); sum = sum + pressure * 2;
next;
spare = sum; wend; end;
15.2.7
Saving and Compiling a LogiCalc
Before you compile the program, first save it to the configuration directory. Until you save the program to the configuration directory, the program is only saved in the PC's memory.
To save, click Save ( ) on the toolbar and type a name for your new LogiCalc. Logica1 is the default program name. The file extension is ".lc".
Note: Limit all LogiCalc filenames to eight or fewer characters, all in lower case letters, such as myapplic.lc. The S600+ operating system requires this.
The Save As dialog box opens the LogiCalc folder in the open configuration directory. If for any reason, the Save As command does
Revised January-2021
LogiCalc Editor
15-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
not open in the LogiCalc folder, navigate to the appropriate configuration folder and find a LogiCalc sub-folder.
Compilation allows the LogiCalc Editor to check your code, ensure that it is valid, and to create some internal data structures that allow the code to run. If you make changes to a LogiCalc and run it without first compiling it, the last compiled version runs instead.
To compile your LogiCalc, click Compile ( ) on the toolbar. After a short pause, the Status pane should show the message Program LOGICA1 OK.
The compiler contains an error checking mechanism. When the LogiCalc Editor compiles a program with an error, it displays the location and type of error in the Status pane, as shown below:
Error: test.lc - Line 2 : Expecting variable, constant or bracket dim my_value = ; ^
This message indicates an error on line number 2 of the program. Also, the Editor positions the cursor on the offending line at the position where the error was encountered to allow you to type a correction.
Once saved and successfully, compiled, the LogiCalc is ready to run.
15.2.8
Running a LogiCalc in Simulation Mode
The LogiCalc Editor allows you to run your LogiCalc in simulation mode before you actually download it to the S600+ to test it. The LogiCalc Editor can run LogiCalcs either at full speed or line-by-line (debug mode).
Free Running Line by Line
Breakpoint
To halt execution at any time, click Stop .
To run the program at full speed, compile it and click Run ( ). The program will finish with the message: program TEST.LC has stopped.
To run the LogiCalc in single step mode, ensure the LogiCalc has compiled successfully and then click Step ( ).
The LogiCalc Editor first displays the message Program TEST.LC has started. Then it displays a yellow arrow in the Code pane, indicating the statement that is about to run. Finally, it also fills in the Variable pane with a list of all the variables currently active in the LogiCalc, together with their current values.
Click Step until the Editor has moved through through the entire LogiCalc. Click Step again and the program finishes, displaying the message: Program TEST.LC has stopped.
A breakpoint is a line marker which stops a free-running LogiCalc.
Once the Editor reaches the breakpoint, it continues to run using single-stepping. Breakpoints are useful when running a long LogiCalc.
To use a breakpoint, position the cursor anywhere on the desired breakpoint line, and click Toggle Breakpoint ( ). A red stop sign
15-14
LogiCalc Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
displays next to the statement, indicating that a breakpoint is active. Clicking Toggle Breakpoint again turns off the breakpoint.
Changing Variables
Click Run ( ) to permit the LogiCalc to free-run at full speed. After a short pause, the yellow arrow marker appears on top of the red breakpoint icon, indicating that the LogiCalc has executed all the statements before the breakpoint and has now stopped at the breakpoint. Also, the variable window will now update with current values.
Single-step the program through the remaining steps. The program finishes and displays the message: program TEST.LC has stopped.
While single-stepping through a LogiCalc, you can manually change a variable.
Double-click on the variable text in the Variable pane. The Editor displays the Set Variable dialog.
Figure 15-5. Set Variable dialog
Change the variable value, click OK, and then continue singlestepping through the LogiCalc. The value updates, using the newly supplied value in the calculation statement.
Note: You can change values while the program is free running (not single stepping), but the Variables pane will not update until the program hits a breakpoint. This is not a recommended procedure as you do not know what your LogiCalc is doing when you set the value.
15.3 Installing a LogiCalc on the S600+
Once you have compiled and tested a LogiCalc, save it to the configuration directory. To install the LogiCalc to a S600+, start the Config Transfer utility and transfer the configuration (including with any associated LogiCalcs files in the configuration) to the LogiCalc folder. For further information, refer to Chapter 9, Config Transfer.
Revised January-2021
LogiCalc Editor
15-15
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
15.3.1
Remotely Debugging a LogiCalc
You can test LogiCalc programs on-line in the S600+. To accomplish this in-place testing, you need either a serial connection between your PC and the S600+ (if you are using Config600 version 1.2 or earlier) or an Ethernet connection (if you are using a version higher than 1.2). You can also use shell commands to monitor LogiCalc programs running in the S600+.
Ensure that the connection between the S600+ and the PC is working. Also ensure that the PCSetup transfer program is not using the
connection. Start the LogiCalc Editor and click Connect to S600 ( ). Select the connection details and click OK.
After a few seconds, the following message displays in the Status pane:
Connecting to S600. Please wait... Program TEST.LC OK Done.
The running LogiCalc should also appear in the Code pane. If it does not appear, check the connection settings and try again.
To view the currently running LogiCalc without interrupting it, use the shell functions. To examine a free-running LogiCalc from the LogiCalc Editor, insert a breakpoint and stop the LogiCalc temporarily.
Place the cursor on the desired line and press F9 or click Toggle
Breakpoint ( ). The breakpoint marker ( ) displays to the left of the line. Soon thereafter the program reaches the breakpoint and the yellow execution arrow appears on top of this red stop sign. Values of all the variables display in the variables pane.
To see the effect on the variables, step through the program line-byline. The information you view is the real data from the S600+, sent through the serial or Ethernet link. It is not a LogiCalc Editor simulation.
If the value is in keypad mode, go to the front panel and change it. Do another single-step and see the values update to your newly entered keypad value.
To disconnect from the S600+, click Connect ( ). If the LogiCalc is sitting at a breakpoint, disconnecting restarts the LogiCalc freerunning.
15.4 LogiCalc Examples
The following examples may be useful references in building LogiCalc programs for your application. Remember, LogiCalc considers any text following a # to be comments and ignores it.
15-16
LogiCalc Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: The folder LCLIB is included in the directory in which you installed the Config600 software. This LCLIB folder contains some sample LogiCalc programs. These are only examples for illustrative purposes. They are not provided with any express or implied guarantee or warranty. Additionally, Remote Automation Solutions does not provide support if you choose to use these example programs.
15.4.1 Perform PTZ Calculations
############################################################################
# Perform PTZ for all gas dp & gas turbine streams in the system.
#
# Version History
#
# v0.6 - 17/10/2000 - GW - conversion routines fixed. There were several
# errors in the calculations. CalcPtz() function removed to avoid duplication of
# constants
#
# v0.5 - 26/06/2000 - GW - temp variable removed from main loop. Unnecessary
# when calling a function if a return value is not required.
#
# v0.4 - 23/12/1999 - GW - const 's' made dim as it hasn't been initialised by
# a constant expression as required by LogiCalc v0.20 and above. Support added
# for gas turbine.
#
# v0.3 - 26/11/1999 - GW - s in ptz() made const.
#
# v0.2 - 24/11/1999 - GW - Ported to v0.15 of LogiCalc. Units conversion added
# in. Some connects moved inside main loop for efficiency.
#
# v0.1 - 22/11/1999 - GW - 's' added as intermediate variable to shrink code
# down and make it run a bit faster.
#
##############################################################################
# Name:
PressToBarg
# function:
Convert pressure to barg from the system units.
# Arguments:
press - The pressure in the system units.
# return value:
Pressure in barg.
##############################################################################
function PressToBarg(press)
const KPINT_SYS_PRESSUNITS = 45; const PRESSUNITS_BARG = 0; const PRESSUNITS_BARA = 1; const PRESSUNITS_KPAG = 2; const PRESSUNITS_KPAA = 3; const PRESSUNITS_PSIG = 4; const PRESSUNITS_PSIA = 5;
const KPREAL_SYS_BARGBARA = 2; const KPREAL_SYS_BARKPA = 4; const KPREAL_SYS_BARPSI = 5;
connect sysUnits(0, "KPINT", KPINT_SYS_PRESSUNITS, "VALUE"); if (sysUnits = PRESSUNITS_BARG) then
return press; endif;
if (sysUnits = PRESSUNITS_BARA) then connect bargToAbs(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_BARGBARA, "VALUE"); return press - bargToAbs;
Revised January-2021
LogiCalc Editor
15-17
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
endif;
if (sysUnits = PRESSUNITS_KPAG) then connect bargToKpa(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_BARKPA, "VALUE"); return press / bargToKpa;
endif;
if (sysUnits = PRESSUNITS_KPAA) then connect bargToAbs(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_BARGBARA, "VALUE"); connect bargToKpa(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_BARKPA, "VALUE"); return press / bargToKpa - bargToAbs;
endif;
if (sysUnits = PRESSUNITS_PSIG) then connect bargToPsi(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_BARPSI, "VALUE"); return press / bargToPsi;
endif;
if (sysUnits = PRESSUNITS_PSIA) then connect bargToAbs(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_BARGBARA, "VALUE"); connect bargToPsi(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_BARPSI, "VALUE"); return press / bargToPsi - bargToAbs;
endif; end;
15.4.2 Convert Temperature Units
##############################################################################
# Name:
TempToDegc
# function:
Convert temperature to degc from the system units.
# Arguments:
temp - The temperature in the system units.
# return value:
temperature in degc.
##############################################################################
function TempToDegc(temp)
const KPINT_SYS_TEMPUNITS = 47; const TEMPUNITS_DEGC = 0; const TEMPUNITS_DEGF = 1; const TEMPUNITS_DEGK = 2; const KPREAL_SYS_DEGCK = 7;
connect sysUnits(0, "KPINT", KPINT_SYS_TEMPUNITS, "VALUE"); if (sysUnits = TEMPUNITS_DEGC) then
return temp; endif;
if (sysUnits = TEMPUNITS_DEGF) then return (temp - 32.0) / 9.0 * 5.0;
endif;
if (sysUnits = TEMPUNITS_DEGK) then connect degcToDegk(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_DEGCK, "VALUE"); return temp - degcToDegk;
endif; end;
15.4.3 Convert Density Units to Kgm3
##############################################################################
# Name:
DensToKgm3
# function:
Convert density to Kgm3 from the system units.
# Arguments:
dens - The density in the system units.
15-18
LogiCalc Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
# return value:
density in kgm3.
##############################################################################
function DensToKgm3(dens)
const KPINT_SYS_DENSUNITS = 48; const DENSUNITS_KGM3 = 0; const DENSUNITS_KGL = 1; const DENSUNITS_LBSCF = 2; const DENSUNITS_GMCC = 3; const DENSUNITS_KGSM3 = 4;
const KPREAL_SYS_LBKG = 0; const KPREAL_SYS_M3CF = 9;
connect sysUnits(0, "KPINT", KPINT_SYS_DENSUNITS, "VALUE");
if (sysUnits = DENSUNITS_KGM3) then return dens;
endif;
if (sysUnits = DENSUNITS_KGL) then return dens * 1000;
endif;
if (sysUnits = DENSUNITS_LBSCF) then connect lbToKg(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_LBKG, "VALUE"); connect m3ToCf(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_M3CF, "VALUE");
return dens * lbToKg * m3ToCf; endif;
if (sysUnits = DENSUNITS_GMCC) then return dens * 1000;
endif;
if (sysUnits = DENSUNITS_KGSM3) then return dens;
endif; end;
15.4.4 Convert Density Units from Kgm3
##############################################################################
# Name:
DensFromKgm3
# function:
Convert density from Kgm3 to the system units.
# Arguments:
dens - The density in kgm3.
# return value:
density in system units.
##############################################################################
function DensFromKgm3(dens)
const KPINT_SYS_DENSUNITS = 48; const DENSUNITS_KGM3 = 0; const DENSUNITS_KGL = 1; const DENSUNITS_LBSCF = 2; const DENSUNITS_GMCC = 3; const DENSUNITS_KGSM3 = 4;
const KPREAL_SYS_LBKG = 0; const KPREAL_SYS_M3CF = 9;
connect sysUnits(0, "KPINT", KPINT_SYS_DENSUNITS, "VALUE");
if (sysUnits = DENSUNITS_KGM3) then
Revised January-2021
LogiCalc Editor
15-19
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
return dens; endif;
if (sysUnits = DENSUNITS_KGL) then return dens / 1000;
endif;
if (sysUnits = DENSUNITS_LBSCF) then connect lbToKg(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_LBKG, "VALUE"); connect m3ToCf(0, "KPREAL", KPREAL_SYS_M3CF, "VALUE");
return dens / (lbToKg * m3ToCf); endif;
if (sysUnits = DENSUNITS_GMCC) then return dens / 1000;
endif;
if (sysUnits = DENSUNITS_KGSM3) then return dens;
endif; end;
15.4.5 Perform PTZ Calculations and Convert Units
##############################################################################
# Name:
DoStreamPtz
# function:
Get the data from the database for the passed stream,
# calculate the PTZ and place the result back into the database. Do units
# conversion on all values.
# Arguments:
s - stream number
# return value:
1 if we did calc, 0 if we didn't
##############################################################################
function DoStreamPtz(s) const ATMOSPHERIC_PRESSURE = 1.01325; const ABSOLUTE_ZERO = 273.15;
const KPINT_STREAMTYPE = 0; const STREAMTYPE_GASDP = 0; const STREAMTYPE_GASTURB = 1; const STREAMTYPE_GASUS = 2; const STREAMTYPE_LIQTURB = 3; const STREAMTYPE_PRVBIDI = 4;
const KPREAL_GASDP_STDPRESS = 9; const KPREAL_GASTURB_STDPRESS = 1; const KPREAL_GASDP_STDTEMP = 8; const CALCALMITEM_GASDP_UPSTRCOMPRESS = 16; const CALCALMITEM_GASDP_STDDENS = 8; const CALCALMITEM_GASDP_STDCOMPRESS = 17; const CALCALMITEM_GASDP_UPSTRPRESS = 10; const CALCALMITEM_GASDP_UPSTRTEMP = 7; const CALCALMITEM_GASDP_UPSTRDENS = 4; const CALCALMITEM_GASTURB_STRCOMPRESS = 10; const IOASSIGN_GASTURB_STREAMTEMP = 5; const CALCALMITEM_GASTURB_STDDENS = 5; const CALCALMITEM_GASTURB_STDCOMPRESS = 11; const KPREAL_GASTURB_STDTEMP = 0; const IOASSIGN_GASTURB_METERPRESSURE = 0; const CALCALMITEM_GASTURB_STREAMDENS = 4;
connect strType(s, "KPINT", KPINT_STREAMTYPE, "VALUE");
if (strType <> STREAMTYPE_GASDP) AND (strType <> STREAMTYPE_GASTURB) then
15-20
LogiCalc Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
return 0; endif;
# Define all the indexes for the various gas stream types dim stdPress; dim upstrCompress; dim upstrTemp;
# connect all the data if (strType = STREAMTYPE_GASDP) then connect dbStdPress(s, "KPREAL", KPREAL_GASDP_STDPRESS, "VALUE"); stdPress = dbStdPress; connect dbUpstrCompress(s, "CALCALMITEM",
CALCALMITEM_GASDP_UPSTRCOMPRESS, "INUSE"); upstrCompress = dbUpstrCompress; connect dbUpstrTemp(s, "CALCALMITEM", CALCALMITEM_GASDP_UPSTRTEMP, "INUSE"); upstrTemp = dbUpstrTemp;
endif;
if (strType = STREAMTYPE_GASTURB) then connect dbStdPress(s, "KPREAL", KPREAL_GASTURB_STDPRESS, "VALUE"); stdPress = dbStdPress; connect dbUpstrCompress(s, "CALCALMITEM",
CALCALMITEM_GASTURB_STRCOMPRESS, "INUSE"); upstrCompress = dbUpstrCompress; connect dbUpstrTemp(s, "IOASSIGN", IOASSIGN_GASTURB_STREAMTEMP, "INUSE"); upstrTemp = dbUpstrTemp;
endif;
# Convert the data dim stdPressBarg; call stdPressBarg = PressToBarg(stdPress);
dim upstrTempDegc; call upstrTempDegc = TempToDegc(upstrTemp);
dim denom = (upstrTempDegc + ABSOLUTE_ZERO) * upstrCompress * (stdPressBarg + ATMOSPHERIC_PRESSURE);
if (denom > 0.0) then dim stdDens; dim stdCompress; dim stdTemp; dim upstrPress;
# connect more data if (strType = STREAMTYPE_GASDP) then connect dbStdDens(s, "CALCALMITEM", CALCALMITEM_GASDP_STDDENS, "INUSE"); stdDens = dbStdDens; connect dbStdCompress(s, "CALCALMITEM",
CALCALMITEM_GASDP_STDCOMPRESS, "INUSE"); stdCompress = dbStdCompress; connect dbStdTemp(s, "KPREAL", KPREAL_GASDP_STDTEMP, "VALUE"); stdTemp = dbStdTemp; connect dbUpstrPress(s, "CALCALMITEM", CALCALMITEM_GASDP_UPSTRPRESS, "INUSE"); upstrPress = dbUpstrPress;
endif;
if (strType = STREAMTYPE_GASTURB) then
Revised January-2021
LogiCalc Editor
15-21
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
connect dbStdDens(s, "CALCALMITEM", CALCALMITEM_GASTURB_STDDENS, "INUSE"); stdDens = dbStdDens; connect dbStdCompress(s, "CALCALMITEM", CALCALMITEM_GASTURB_STDCOMPRESS, "INUSE"); stdCompress = dbStdCompress; connect dbStdTemp(s, "KPREAL", KPREAL_GASTURB_STDTEMP, "VALUE"); stdTemp = dbStdTemp; connect dbUpstrPress(s, "IOASSIGN", IOASSIGN_GASTURB_METERPRESSURE, "INUSE"); upstrPress = dbUpstrPress; endif;
# Convert the data dim stdDensKgm3; call stdDensKgm3 = DensToKgm3(stdDens);
dim stdTempDegc; call stdTempDegc = TempToDegc(stdTemp);
dim upstrPressBarg; call upstrPressBarg = PressToBarg(upstrPress);
# Do the calculation and convert back dim upstrDensKgm3 = stdDensKgm3 * (stdCompress * (stdTempDegc +
ABSOLUTE_ZERO) * (upstrPressBarg + ATMOSPHERIC_PRESSURE)) / denom;
dim ndxUpstrDens; if (strType = STREAMTYPE_GASDP) then
ndxUpstrDens = CALCALMITEM_GASDP_UPSTRDENS; endif; if (strType = STREAMTYPE_GASTURB) then
ndxUpstrDens = CALCALMITEM_GASTURB_STREAMDENS; endif;
connect dbUpstrDens(s, "CALCALMITEM", ndxUpstrDens, "CALC3"); call dbUpstrDens = DensFromKgm3(upstrDensKgm3); endif;
return 1; end;
15.4.6 Perform PTZ Calculations on All Streams
##############################################################################
# Name:
ptz
# function:
Attempt ptz calculation on all streams.
# Arguments:
-
# return value:
-
##############################################################################
function ptz() while (1) do dim str; for str = 1 to numstreams() DoStreamPtz(stream(str)); next; wend;
end;
15-22
LogiCalc Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
15.5 LogiCalc Lanuage Specifications
This section provides specifications on the LogiCalc language.
Name Supported Types
Supported Operators
Supported Statements
Built-in Functions
Comments Max Program File
Line Length Max
Variable/Function Name Length Max Chars for
String Variable Max Number of
ARGs in a Function
Variable Names
Max Terms in a Single Arithmetic
Expression Max LogiCalc Program File Name Length
Definition Decimal Integer (e.g. -999) Binary Integer (e.g. 11001100b) Double Precision Floating Point (e.g. 3.14159265) String (e.g. "hello mum") + - * / ( ) >, <, =, >=, <=, <> AND, OR (boolean) & (bitwise AND), | (Bitwise OR) $ (string concatenation) <<, >> (Bit shifting) function/end, dim, const, let, if/then/else/endif, while/do/wend, for/next, call, return, connect, setalarm/clearalarm/accalarm ioboard(x), station(x), stream(x), numioboards(), numstations(), numstreams(), numobjects(x, "type"), log(x), exp(x), abs(x), int(x), pow(x, y), sin(x), cos(x), tan(x), timenow() leftstring("string", len), rightstring("string", len) NOT(), NOTB() # as first character in a line denotes a comment 255 chars
63 chars
127 chars
16
a-z, A-Z, 0-9 and _. (First char can't be 0-9) 32
8.3 characters (S600+ uses FAT) For example, "my_progy.lc" is ok; "myprogram.lc" is not.
15.5.1 LogiCalc Statements
Use these statements to create custom LogiCalc statements.
function/end A program consists of one or more user defined functions in a text file. These functions should be laid out one after the other. The last function found is used as the first one to run. Each function can call the other user-defined functions as long as the functions called are defined earlier in the file (that is, you can only call "upwards"). User defined functions can take any number of arguments. They are evaluated at run time and passed by value. A function can return one value which must be assigned to a variable using the "call" keyword. User functions cannot be used directly in expressions.
Revised January-2021
LogiCalc Editor
15-23
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
function <function1_name>(<arg1>, <arg2>, ...) . . .
end;
dim Defines a variable for use in the current scope.
dim <variable_name>; dim <variable_name> = <expression>;
const Defines a constant for use in the current scope. This is the same as a variable except a value must be assigned at define time and the value cannot be changed (like a #define in C).
const <constant_name> = <expression>;
let Assigns a value to a variable. The let command is optional.
let <variable_name> = <expression>; <variable_name> = <expression>;
if/then/else/endif Conditionally changes the path of execution in a program.
if <expression> then . .
endif;
if <expression> then . .
else . .
endif;
while/do/wend Conditionally loops the path of execution in a program.
while <expression> do . .
wend;
for/next Loops the path of execution in a program a set number of times. The variable name on the "next"' is optional.
for <variable_name> = <expression> to <expression> . .
next <variable_name>;
for <variable_name> = <expression> to <expression> . .
next;
15-24
LogiCalc Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
call Required to call a user function that returns a value. The returned value from a function is assigned to the specified variable. If a return value is not required, just specify the function name on its own without the call keyword. You can call a function in any of the following three shown examples.
Note: The third variant works on only version 1.2 and above; avoid using it to ensure compatibilty.
<function_name>(<expression1>, <expression2>, ...); call <variable_name> = <function_name>(<expression1>, <expression2>, ...); call <function_name>(<expression1>, <expression2>, ...);
return Returns a value from a function.
return <expression>;
connect Connects a data point from the S600+ database for use in the program.
connect <variable_name>(<expression>, <expression>, <expression>, <expression>);
The four valid statement parameters are: Section index:
Usually 0 (for system) or derived from stream(x), station(x) or ioboard(x) Data type: A string such as "KPREAL", "KPINT", "KPSTRING", etc. Data index: An index into the data of the section specified in the first argument. Field name: A string representing the field name (which as "INUSE", "VALUE", etc.) The connect wizard or system editor will help you out specifying these values.
Note: The variable is only dynamically connected to its data point within the scope of the function to which it is connected. If you pass the variable as a parameter to another function, the function will receive a static snapshot of the value when it was passed in, as in the following:
Revised January-2021
function copydouble(in, out) out = in * 2;
end;
function main() connect adc1(ioboard(1), "ADC", 0, "MEASURED"); connect dac1(ioboard(1), "DAC", 0, "MEASURED"); while 1 do copydouble(adc1, dac1); wend;
end;
LogiCalc Editor
15-25
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Although this LogiCalc will compile and run, it will not do anything useful since the 'in' and 'out' variables are not connections; they are just values. The act of passing them into the function 'copydouble' has evaluated them from connected variables (adc1, dac1) to normal variables with values in them (in, out).
setalarm/clearalarm/ Manipulates S600+ alarms. accalarm
setalarm <variable_name>(<expression>, <expression>);
The two statement parameters are:
Alarm number (between 0 15) An alarm value. The alarm value has no significance apart from that it will print as part of the alarm event message. This only happens if it is non-0 so just pass 0 if no value is required on the printout. You can pass different values (such as setalarm, clearalarm, and accalarm) and they all print out against the relevant alarm event messages.
15.5.2 Built-In Functions
LogiCalc provides a number of built in functions you can include directly in expressions to perform common tasks.
ioboard(x), These section index functions return the base index for the specified station(x), stream, station, and ioboard section. Typically you would use these stream(x) functions in a call to connect to index data within a stream.
For example, if you are using a direct index or just a system index, pass zero (0) instead of these functions. For example, to update a variable of known index in stream 2:
# Relative stream index for a KPREAL const INDEX_KPREAL_VISC = 14; connect strVisc(stream(2), "KPREAL", INDEX_KPREAL_VISC, "VALUE"); strVisc = 0.317;
numioboards(), These resource evaluation functions return the number of streams, numstations(), stations, or I/O modules present in the current running configuration.
numstream() For example, to iterate through the IO modules:
dim io; for io = 1 to numioboards()
connect xxx(io, xxxx, xxxx, xxxx); ... next;
numobjects(x, "type") This object evaluation function returns the number of objects of the specified type present in section (x) of the currently running configuration. For example, to iterate through all the system keypad ints:
dim numints = numobjects(0, "KPINT"); for i = 1 to numints
15-26
LogiCalc Editor
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
connect xxx(0, "KPINT", i, "VALUE"); ... next;
setalarm(x, v), These alarm handling functions set, clear, and accept system alarms. clearalarm(x, v), The parameters are alarm numbers (015) and alarm value (which
accalarm(x, v) gets printed).
connect adc1(ioboard(1), "ADC", 0, "INUSE"); if (adc1 > 50) then
setalarm adc1(1, adc1); else
clearalarm adc1(1, adc1); endif; accalarm adc1(1, 0.0);
timenow() Provides a snapshot of the system time; useful for working out relative times.
while (1) do dim t = timenow(); . . . # Have we taken too long??? (i.e. exceeded 1.5 seconds) if (timenow() - t > 1.5) then setalarm timeout(0, t); endif
wend
log(x) Provides a natural logarithm.
exp(x) Provides an exponential value.
pow(x, y) Provides a power function, taking x to the power y. Arguments can be double precision. This function is processor-intensive, so do not use this function in a loop unless it is absolutely necessary.
abs(x) Returns the absolute value of x. If x is positive, return x. If x is negative, return x.
int(x) Returns the integer portion of x. Always truncates, so int(1.9) returns 1. If you want to round up, call int(x + 0.5).
sin(x), cos(x), Provides associated trigonometric functions. X must be in radians. . tan(x)
NOT(x), NOTB(x) NOT() is a Boolean not, and returns 1 or 0 depending on the value of the passed expression, such as: NOT(1) = 0 NOT(0) = 1 NOT(25.6) = 0 NOTB() is a bitwise NOT, and is typically used for masking bits, as in:
Revised January-2021
LogiCalc Editor
15-27
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
function ClearBit(value, bitpos) return value & NOTB(1 << bitpos);
end;
15.5.3 Alarms
Testing Alarms You can test for alarms being set or clear, accepted or unaccepted by connecting to ALARM objects, as in:
connect adcstatus(ioboard(1), "ALARMS", ALARMS_P144IIO_IO01ADC01, "STATUS"); connect adcunacc(ioboard(1), "ALARMS", ALARMS_P144IIO_IO01ADC01, "UNACC");
This object allows access to the alarm status of an ADC. The value returned is a 16-bit mask with a 1 in each alarm position representing an alarm that is set or unaccepted, respectively. To test if alarm 'x' (remember alarms start at 0) is set:
if adcstatus & (1 << x) then . .
endif;
# alarm is set
To test if alarm 'x' (remember alarms start at 0) is unaccepted:
if adcunacc & (1 << x) then . .
endif;
# alarm is unaccepted
Suppressing Alarms Access to the alarm object allows you to suppress and test suppression. For example, To suppress alarm "x" (where x = 0 to 15) on an ADC, connect to an alarm object's "SUPPRESS" field:
connect adcsuppress(ioboard(1), "ALARMS", ALARMS_P144IIO_IO01ADC01, "SUPPRESS");
adcsuppress = adcsuppress | (1 << x);
The field is a 16-bit mask as are the Status and Unacc fields of the alarm object. Suppressed alarms are represented by a set bit in the mask. Setting a bit in the mask suppresses the alarm. Bear in mind that the above code first reads out the current suppress mask, OR's in a bit and writes it back. This happens pretty quickly but may conflict with anything else that is updating the value. Ensure the LogiCalc is the only task updating the alarm suppression word to avoid missing the odd suppression.
15-28
LogiCalc Editor
Revised January-2021
Appendix A Glossary
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
A
ADC Address
AGA
AI Alphanumeric Analogue Annubar
ANIN ANOUT ANSI
ASCII
AWG
Analog to Digital Converter. Used to convert analog inputs (AI) to a format the flow computer can use. Also known as A/D Converter.
A character or group of characters used to identify a particular item (such as a particular area of memory or a particular computer on a communication link with many other computers).
American Gas Association. A professional organisation that oversees the AGA3 (orifice), AGA5 (heating value), AGA7 (turbine), AGA8 (compressibility), AGA9 (Ultrasonic) and AGA11 (Coriolis) gas flow calculation standards. See http://www.aga.org.
Analogue input, also known as ANIN.
Consisting of only the letters A through Z and the numbers 0 through 9.
A signal with no defined steps, its value being determined by its size.
A primary flow element that operates by sensing an impact pressure and a reference pressure through multiple sensing ports connected to dual averaging plenums. The resultant difference is a differential pressure signal. Sensing ports are located on both the up- and downstream sides of the flow element. The number of ports is proportional to the pipe diameter.
Analogue input, also know as AI.
Analogue output, also known as AO.
American National Standards Institute. An organization responsible for approving U.S. standards in many areas, including computers and communications. Standards approved by this organisation are often called ANSI standards (for example, ANSI C is the version of the C language approved by ANSI). ANSI is a member of ISO. See http://www.ansi.org.
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. Numeric values assigned to letters, numbers, and other characters to enable exchange of information between devices (for example, "A" = 65, "B"=66, and so on).
American Wire Gauge, a system of sizing wiring.
B
Back up/backup Baud Basetime Batch control
Baud rate Binary Bit
Bit Link
The process of copying or creating a duplicate of computer files (called "a backup file") that can be used to restore the original content in the event of a data loss.
An indicator of the rate of serial data transfer (for example, a baud rate of 10 indicates 10 bits per second).
The end of day time when any daily, weekly, or monthly reports print; also known as "contract hour." S600+ supports three basetimes.
A system option used to allow a liquid station within the S600+ to control a number of streams to dispatch a precise amount of product. If batch control is required, it should be enabled on all relevant streams and on the station settings during the configuration generation stage.
An indicator of the rate of serial data transfer (for example, a baud rate of 10 indicates 10 bits per second, or approximately 1 character per second).
Numbers in base 2 (that is, only numbers 0 and 1 are used). May be represented as a digital signal and referred to as True/False, High/Low, or On/Off.
A binary digit, either a binary 0 or 1. One byte is the amount of memory needed to store each character of information (text or numbers). Eight bits constitute one byte (or character).
A bridge (also known as a jumper) that closes an electrical circuit. Typically a bit link consists of a plastic plug that fits over a pair of protruding pins. Placing a bit link over a different set of pins allows you to change a board's parameters.
Revised January-2021
Glossary
A-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Bit switch Buffer
Bus Byte
C
Calorific value (CV)
CATS
Cold Start Config600 software Constants Control bus CPS CPU CTL_CPL
CTS
CTS CUI
D
DAC
Databus DCS DCU
Densitometer DI A-2
Switches that represent data bits by on or off state.
A device inserted between devices to match impedance, equipment speeds, or to supply additional drive capability. Also, a storage area for data that compensates for the speed difference when transferring data from one device to another; usually refers to an area reserved for I/O operations into which data is either read or from which data is written.
One or more conductors used as a path over which information transmits.
Block of 8 bits, which can define 256 states (0 through 255).
Superior calorific value (CV) is the amount of heat which could be released by the complete combustion in air of a specified quantity of gas, in such a way that the pressure at which the reaction takes place remains constant, and all the products of combustion are returned to the same specified temperature as that of the reactants, all of these products being in the gaseous state except for water formed by combustion, which is condensed to the liquid state (source ISO6976, 1995).
CV can also be calculated in accordance with AGA Report No. 5.
For inferior calorific value, water remains in a gaseous state (vapour).
Common Area Transmission System. An agreed standard for measurement of gases and light hydrocarbons which are to be delivered to and redelivered for the CATS Transportation Facilities and Input Facilities (EU only).
A process of starting the FloBoss S600+ that copies the configuration file from Flash memory.
PC-based software tool used to configure the S600+.
Numbers that only infrequently change. Examples would include the conversion value between Degrees Celsius and Degrees Fahrenheit or pipe diameter.
Bus connections for control signals (such as read/write).
Correction for pressure on steel (of meter or prover)
Central Processing Unit; in the S600+, the CPU module (P152+).
Factors for the Correction for the temperature of the liquid and correction for the pressure of the liquid. In the Calculations portion of the Config600 Configuration Generator, this option is set to include the Liquid Volume Correction Table for a US configuration (tables 23, 24, 53, or 54).
Clear to Send. The signal asserted (logic "0", positive voltage) by the remote device to inform the flow computer that transmission may begin. RTS and CTS are commonly used as handshaking signals to moderate the flow of data into the remote device.
Correction for temperature on steel (of meter or prover)
Daniel USM interface
Digital to Analog converter, also known as the D/A converter. Used to convert the digital signals used within the S600+ to an analog value for use with an analog transducer or for an analog readout.
A group of bi-directional lines capable of transferring data to and from the CPU storage and peripheral devices.
Distributed Control System. A computer system which manages the process of a plant or site.
Data Concentrator Unit. Used to connect one device (such as a printer) to multiple S600s. Control of the shared device is determined by the hardware handshaking lines of the RS-232 port.
Transducer used to measure the density of the product at current conditions in the pipework where it is mounted.
Digital or discrete input, as known as DIGIN.
Glossary
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Digital DIN Discrepancy
DO DP DPR DRAM DVM
E
E-Format EEPROM Ethernet
Exponent EU EU
F, G
Flash memory
Flow Balance Flow Switching
FRQ
H
HART®
Hex Heating Value (HV) Holding Register Hz
A signal with only two states, such as on/off, input/output, or 5V/0V. Deutsches Institut fur Normung. German Standard. Used to check the difference between a measured variable and a preset value. For example, if Flow Discrepancy was selected during the generation phase, the S600+ would check the current uncorrected volume flow rate against the proved uncorrected volume flow rate. If the discrepancy exceeded the preset limit, the S600+ would raise an alarm indicating that a prove was required. Note: This example is only applicable to a liquid turbine configuration. Digital or discrete output, also known as DIGOUT. Differential Pressure. Dual Pulse Receiver or turbine input. Dynamic Random-Access Memory. Volatile storage memory used in the S600+. When power is removed from the S600+, the contents of the DRAM memory are lost. Digital voltmeter.
Mathematical notation where the mantissa is any number greater than 10 and less than 10 and the exponent is the multiplier. Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory, a non-volatile memory chip which may be erased and reprogrammed electronically. A 10- or 100-megabit-per-second (Mbps) baseband-type network that uses the contention-based CMSA/CD media access method. Invented by Robert Metcalf at Xerox's Palo Alto Research Center in the mid-1970s. Base 10 multiplier. European Union. Engineering unit
Non-volatile storage memory. Although slower to access than SRAM and DRAM, once programmed flash memory retains the data and requires no further support. In the S600+, configuration files and the operating system are typically stored in flash memory. Write protect jumpers are used to prevent accidental programming of flash memory. Used to balance the flow through a liquid system so a required flow rate can be attained through a prover. This option allows the station within the S600+ to control the number of streams open according to the current flow rates. If flow switching is required it should be enabled on all relevant streams and on the station settings during the generation phase. Frequency input.
Highway Addressable Remote Transducer (or HART) is a communication protocol designed for industrial process measurement and control applications. It combines both analogue and digital communication and can communicate a single variable using a 4-20 mA analogue signal, while also communicating added information on a digital signal. Hexadecimal, referring to numbers in base 16 (that is, numbers from 0 through 9 and letters from A through F). See Calorific Value (CV).
Analog Output number value to be read.
Hertz.
Revised January-2021
Glossary
A-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
I, J, K
Integer Intelligent I/O I/O IP IP2 IS
ISO
ISO 5167 ISO 6976
L
LED
M
Mantissa Meter Correction Meter Linearisation Modbus
Modem Modulate MOV
Multiplexor MVS
N
Noise Non-volatile Memory NX-19
Any positive or negative whole number, including zero. The Intelligent Input Output module (P144), also known as "IIO". Input and Output. Institute of Petroleum or Ingress protection standard, referring to British standard 5420 or International Electro-Technical Commission standard 144. In the calculations section of the generator, this option includes the Liquid Volume Correction Tables (53 or 54) for a non-US configuration. Intrinsic Safety. A technique used to prevent excess electrical energy, or faults, in instrumentation from causing explosions in hazardous atmospheres. Often found in the process industry. It is the only protection method accepted for use in Zone 0 hazardous areas. International Organisation for Standards. A voluntary, non-treaty organization founded in 1946 which is responsible for creating international standards in many areas, including computers and communications. Its members are the national standards organizations of the 89 member countries, including ANSI for the U.S. See http://www.iso.org. Measurement of fluid flow by means of pressure differential devices (such as orifice plates, nozzles, or Venturi tubes) inserted in circular cross-section conduits. Natural gas calculation of calorific values, density, relative density and Wobbe index from composition.
Light-Emitting Diode (an indicator). On the S600+, a light to show the status of the S600+ in a visual form. As examples, the Alarm LED shows the status of the machine by the color of the LED and communications between the main processor board and the IO boards is shown on the rear of the flow computer by use of the transmit and receive LEDs.
Numerically significant part of a floating-point number. An option applicable only to liquid turbine applications and used to correct the flow rate due to temperature and pressure effects on the body of the meter. An option used to correct the K Factor or Meter Factor of a pulse input according to the input frequency. This is used to correct discrepancies caused by the non-linearity of the transducer connected to the pulse input. A device communications protocol developed by Gould-Modicon and used on the station supervisory computer data link, as well as communicating with Coriolis meters, gas chromatographs, ultrasonic meters, and other devices. Modulator Demodulator; a device used to communicate with other equipment using a telephone network. Superimposing one signal upon another. Motor Operated Valve; a valve that is motorized and requires a signal to drive the valve open, a signal to drive the valve closed, and has a two signals returning to the S600+ to describe the valve as being open, closed, moving, or illegal. Multiple Input Selector. Multi-variable sensor
Random electrical interference. Memory type that retains data when the power supply is disconnected.
An AGA report developed for the calculation of supercompressibility factors.
A-4
Glossary
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
O
Object
Octal Off-line
On-line
Open Collector Opto-Isolator Overrange
Generally, any item that can be individually selected and manipulated. This can include shapes and pictures that appear on a display screen as well as less-tangible software entities. In object-oriented programming, for example, an object is a selfcontained entity that consists of both data and procedures to manipulate the data.
Numbers in base 8 (that is, numbers 0 through 8).
Accomplished while the target device is not connected (by a communications link). For example, "off-line configuration" refers to configuring an electronic file that is later loaded onto the S600+.
Accomplished while connected (by a communications link) to the target device. For example, "on-line configuration" refers to configuring an S600+ while connected to it, so you can view the current parameter values and immediately load new values.
Digital output that is driven by a transistor and requires external power.
Optical device for connecting signals while maintaining electrical isolation.
Over the preset current limit for the A/D Converter.
P, Q
PCB PID
Peer to Peer Link Port Program Protocol Prove Sequence PRT PSU PTZ
Printed circuit board.
Three-term control action that uses Proportional, Integral, and Derivative components to modify a control output, with the goal of achieving a measured process variable at a set point.
Communications mode implemented by giving each communication node both server and client capabilities.
Group of inputs or outputs to the computer.
Series of instructions.
Precise description of data interchange over a telemetry link.
An order of events set into the S600+ to perform a calibration (or "prove") of flow balancing, stability checking, or valve-routing.
Platinum resistance thermometer. See also RTD.
Power supply unit.
Calculation of Compressibility, Relative Density and Line Density using the Solartron 7915 PTZ method.
R
RAM
Relative Density (RD)
Random-access memory. Volatile memory that becomes unreliable when power is removed from the computer.
Liquid relative density: the ratio of the mass of a given volume of liquid at 15°C (or other standard temperature, such as 60°F) to mass of an equal volume of pure water at the same temperature. When reporting results, explicitly state the standard reference temperature (for example, relative density 15/15°C). [Source API Vocabulary 1994].
Gas relative density: As above except that air is used as the reference instead of water.
Ideal and Real gas relative density. See Specific Gravity.
ROM
RS-232 RS-422
Note: Water at 15°C is 999.058 kg/m3. Water at 60°F is 999.012 kg/m3. [Source API 2540 volume X] Air at 15°C is 1.2255 kg/m3.
Read-only memory (fixed storage). Typically used to store firmware. Flash memory. This type of memory cannot be written to by default; however, some modern memory allows writing to occur under certain conditions.
Voltage standard for multi-drop serial data transmission. Also EIA-232.
Voltage standard for serial data transmission; used as extender for RS-232.
Revised January-2021
Glossary
A-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
RS-485 RTD RTS
RTU RTV RX or RXD
Voltage standard for multi-point digital data transmission.
Resistance thermometer device.
Request to Send. This signal is asserted (logic '0', positive voltage) to prepare the other device for accepting transmitted data from the flow computer. Such preparation might include enabling the receive circuits, or setting up the channel direction in halfduplex applications. When the other device is ready, it acknowledges by asserting Clear to Send.
Remote terminal unit.
Room temperature vulcanizing, typically a sealant or caulk such as silicon rubber.
Received information.
S
Sampler
Security Code Specific Gravity (SG)
Device used to take samples of the product in the pipework where it is mounted. This can either be timed according to throughput or number of samples required in a certain timeframe.
Codes that limit operator access to software parameters; typically stored in micro memory.
Ideal gas relative density (specific gravity), Gi is defined as the ratio of the ideal density of the gas to the ideal density of dry air at the same reference conditions of pressure and temperature. Since the ideal densities are defined at the same reference conditions of pressure and temperature, the ratio reduces to a ratio of molar masses (molecular weights). [Source AGA3 1992]
Real gas relative density (specific gravity), Gr, is defined as the ratio of the real density of the gas to the real density of dry air at the same reference conditions of pressure and temperature. To correctly apply the real gas relative density (specific gravity) to the flow calculation, the reference conditions for the determination of the real gas relative density (specific gravity) must be the same as the base conditions for the flow calculation. [Source AGA3 1992]
See also Relative Density (RD).
SRAM S600+
Note: Real relative density differs from ideal relative density in that the ratio of the gas compressibilities is also taken into account.
Static random-access memory. Stores data as long as power is applied; typically backed up by a lithium battery or supercapacitor.
FloBossTM S600+ Flow Computer.
T
Task
TCP/IP Time and Flow Averaging Totaliser Transducer TRI-REG
TX
An operating system concept that refers to the combination of a program's execution and the operating system's bookkeeping information. Whenever a program executes, the operating system creates a new task for it.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
An option that allows the S600+ to average process variables based on time, flow or time and flow.
Area of RAM for integrating totals.
Device that converts energy from one state to another.
Triple register; an area of RAM where data is stored in triplicate, normally used to store totals.
Transmitted information.
U
Underrange
Under the preset current limit for the A/C Converter.
V
Variables
Changeable values.
A-6
Glossary
Revised January-2021
V-Cone® Volatile VWI
W
Warm Start Watchdog
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
A differential pressure device produced by McCrometer. Memory that is unstable in the absence of power. View Interface; now superseded by the Daniel Ultrasonic Interface.
An S600+ startup process in which the configuration remains untouched. A hardware circuit that monitors correct program operation and restarts the program in the event of malfunction.
Revised January-2021
Glossary
A-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual [This page is intentionally left blank.]
A-8
Glossary
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Appendix B Proving
In This Chapter
B.1 Bi-Directional (Ball) Prover Liquid Only ...........................................B-2 B.1.1 Inputs/Outputs......................................................................B-3 B.1.2 Communications ..................................................................B-3 B.1.3 Pulse Measurement .............................................................B-4 B.1.4 Sphere Switch Interface.......................................................B-5 B.1.5 Valve Interface .....................................................................B-8 B.1.6 Prove Sequence and Control...............................................B-9 B.1.7 Prover Run Control Stages ................................................B-20 B.1.8 Prove/Stream Data.............................................................B-28 B.1.9 Prove Reports ....................................................................B-30 B.1.10 Proving Calculations ..........................................................B-31
B.2 Compact Prover Liquid Only..........................................................B-39 B.2.1 Inputs/Outputs....................................................................B-40 B.2.2 Communications ................................................................B-41 B.2.3 Pulse Measurement ...........................................................B-42 B.2.4 Proving Control Signal Timing ...........................................B-42 B.2.5 Prove Sequence and Control.............................................B-44 B.2.6 Prover Run Control Stages ................................................B-54 B.2.7 Run Stage Abort Index.......................................................B-60 B.2.8 Run Stage Calculation Index .............................................B-61 B.2.9 Prove/Stream Data.............................................................B-61 B.2.10 Prove Reports ....................................................................B-63 B.2.11 Proving Calculations ..........................................................B-64
B.3 Master Meter Prover Gas and Liquid.............................................B-73 B.3.1 Master Meter/Stream combinations ...................................B-75 B.3.2 Inputs/Outputs....................................................................B-76 B.3.3 Communications ................................................................B-76 B.3.4 Pulse Measurement ...........................................................B-76 B.3.5 Prove Sequence and Control.............................................B-77 B.3.6 Prover Run Control Stages ................................................B-86 B.3.7 Prove/Stream Data.............................................................B-92 B.3.8 Prove Reports ....................................................................B-93 B.3.9 Proving Calculations ..........................................................B-95
This appendix provides an overview of the four S600+-supported proving methods--bi-directional, uni-directional, compact, and master meter--and their specifications and applications.
Note: Refer to Chapter 5, Station Configuration, for a discussion of prover configuration screens.
The uni-directional prover differs from the bi-directional prover only in the run control sequence described in Section B.1.7.
Station-Based
In Config600 software, proving is a station-based function. Each S600+ can support two stations, and you can assign up to 10 streams (depending on the complexity of the configured streams) to each station. The provers do not need to be the same type. However, the S600+ supports only one Prover (P154) module, which means that you can perform only one prove sequence at a time.
Local or Remote The software also allows you to prove streams that are "local" (that is, part of the same configuration) or prove streams that are "remote" (in a separate configuration or separate S600+) to the prover.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
However, you cannot mix the two (for example, have a prover config with three metering streams and prove a remote, separate stream).
B.1 Bi-Directional (Ball) Prover Liquid Only
Two components enable you to control the prove:
Prove sequence, a station-based function which sets up the prove environment, and
Run control, a prover-based function which drives the 4-way valve, counts pulses, and performs the K-factor calculations.
Following a successful prove, the system verifies the stream's normal flow rate value:
If the normal flow rate is set to a value greater than zero (Aramcostyle linearisation), the run control waits for a predefined amount of time for you to reject the current prove results. If a prove is rejected, the proving report is annotated as "ABORTED". If the time-out elapses, the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved and the data is automatically used in the subsequent calculations.
If the normal flow rate is zero (non-Aramco-style linearisation), the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved, but does not use the data until it is accepted either locally at the S600+ or via a supervisory computer.
When the prove runs complete, you can either re-run the prove or terminate, at which point (if so configured) the sequence restores the valves to their pre-prove state.
Notes:
The prove sequence downloads both a K-factor and a meter factor. Applications typically use the original K-factor from the meter calibration report and update the meter factor, which may be either a fixed value or derived from a linearisation process. Alternatively the meter factor can remain unchanged and the K-factor (fixed or linearised) updated.
The meter factor deviation tests and the historical meter factor database are only supported for "local" streams (part of the same configuration with the prover), if you configure the stream normal flow rate to a value greater than zero and you select "Product Table with History" when you create your configuration.
B-2
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
You define a ticket as Official or Unofficial when you configure a prove. This selection applies to both the Aramco-style and nonAramco-style linearisation. Following an Official prove, the prove sequence is determined by the Aramco / non-Aramco style linearisation selection. Following the Unofficial prove, the prove sequence does not download the prove results to the stream being proved. This is typically used to determine an approximate K-Factor / Meter Factor before an official prove takes place or when maintenance activities are being performed on the site. The Official/Unofficial selection displays in the report header.
B.1.1 Inputs/Outputs
For bi-directional proving the S600+ requires the following hardware: A CPU module (P152+) An I/O module (P144) A Prover module (P154) Inputs A bi-directional prover normally has the following inputs:
Prover Inlet Pressure Prover Outlet Pressure Prover Inlet Temperature Prover Outlet Temperature Stream Raw Pulses Prove Enable Status 4-way Valve Forward Status 4-way Valve Reverse Status 4-way Valve Seal Status 4-way Valve Local/Remote Status Sphere Switches 1 4
4-20mA ADC 4-20mA ADC 4-wire PRT 4-wire PRT Raw Pulse Input Digital Input Digital Input Digital Input Digital Input Digital Input Switch Inputs 1 4
Note: If there is only one pressure and temperature input, assign inlet and outlet objects to use the same input.
Outputs A bi-directional prover normally has the following outputs:
4-way Valve Forward Command 4-way Valve Reverse Command
Digital Output Digital Output
B.1.2 Communications
Using the Modbus protocol, a slave link provides communications with any remote stream flow computers.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
To set up the link at the prover (which is the master), select Tech/Engineer > Communications > Assignment > Prover Master Link.
To set up the Modbus address, select Tech/Engineer > Communications > Assignment > Prover Master Lin.
Prover/Stream Link
Modbus RTU Master Prover/Stream Link
Default Setting
Serial RS485 - Comm 5 9600 8 bits No Parity 1 stop bit Address = 1 (front panel)
To set up the link at the stream (which is the slave), select Tech/Engineer > Communications > Assignment > Next > Prover Slave Lin.
Note: You can reset the ports, baud rate, number of bits, and parity values through the S600+'s front panel.
B.1.3 Pulse Measurement
The primary function of the prover is to calculate an accurate K-factor or meter factor value for the meter under prove. The bi-directional prover does this by counting the number of pulses from the stream meter and equating them to the known volume of the prover.
The stream flow computer receives a known volume or mass from its meter and transmits a pulse train output (Raw Pulse Output) which represents the number of pulses received, including bad pulse correction. The prove sequence commands the selected stream to turn on its Raw Pulse Output, which allows the prover computer to monitor the pulses from the meter. The prover counts pulses during a proof run, and corrects the count for temperature and pressure.
When the proof run completes, the prover calculates the stream's Kfactor from the corrected pulse count and the known prover volume.
Note: The electrical diagram for the Prover module shows a Raw Pulse Output, but this is not available. You cannot use this raw pulse output to pass pulses input to the Prover module to Raw Pulse Input.
Pulse Gating
When a proof run starts, a sphere launches into the flow and passes forward through the prover, triggering the two sphere detector switches as is goes. The 4-way valve then reverses and the sphere again launches into the flow, passing back through the prover and again triggering the two sphere detector switches.
The raw pulses are counted on both the forward and reverse pass, during the period between the sphere switch detectors being triggered.
B-4
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure B-1. Components of a Bidirectional Prover
Pulse Interpolation Pulse interpolation is used when the pulse count is low (typically less than 10,000 pulses per round trip).
The S600+ supports two methods of pulse interpolation: dual chronometry (the standard) or an optional Pulse Interpolation module (PIM). Either method allows the prover computer to resolve the pulse count to better than the API recommendation of 1 part in 10,000.
Dual chronometry adds accurate timing of the period between detectors so in effect partial pulses can be counted.
If you do not select dual chronometry, you can use a Pulse Interpolation module (PIM) to achieve greater resolution. Using the S600+ keypad, you enter an interpolation factor corresponding to the PIM setting into the S600+ prover.
B.1.4 Sphere Switch Interface
You can select four possible calibrated (base) volumes, as shown in Figure B-2:
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
LAUNCH / HOME
CHAMBER
RETURN CHAMBER
4 WAY VALVE
SS1
SS4
SS2
SS3
FORWARD DIRECTION
REVERSE DIRECTION
Figure B-2. Sphere Switch Selections
The value for each volume entered represents the "round trip" volume between a pair of sphere switches (that is, twice the calibrated volume). You can enter the calibration conditions through the S600+ keypad. All four switches are connected directly to the prover computer. Table B-1 through Table B-4 detail the possible sphere switch selections:
Table B-1. Bi-Directional Sphere Switch Selections (Prover mode set to BIDI 4-WAY and the number of switches set to 2)
Sphere Switch (SS)
P154 Connections
1 & 2
SS1 = Sw1 (A17) SS2 = Sw3 (A5)
B-6
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Table B-2. Bi-Directional Sphere Switch Selections (Prover mode set to BIDI 4-WAY and the number of switches set to 4)
Base Volume 1
2
3
4
Sphere Switch (SS) 1 & 3
2 & 4
1 & 4
2 & 3
P154 Connections
First part of pass:
SS1 = Sw1 (A17) SS3 = Sw3 (A5) Return: SS3 = Sw3 (A5) SS1 = Sw1 (A17)
First part of pass:
SS2 = Sw2 (A18) SS4 = Sw4 (A6) Return: SS4 = Sw4 (A6) SS2 = Sw2 (A18)
First part of pass:
SS1 = Sw1 (A17) SS4 = Sw4 (A6) Return: SS4 = Sw4 (A6) SS1 = Sw1 (A17)
First part of pass: SS2 = Sw2 (A18) SS3 = Sw3 (A5) Return:
SS3 = Sw3 (A5) SS2 = Sw2 (A18)
Table B-3. Type 2 ( Prover mode set to UNI TYPE 2)
Sphere Switch (SS)
P154 Connections
1 & 2
SS1 = Sw1 (A5) SS2 = Sw2 (A17)
Table B-4. Rotork (Prover mode set to UNI ROTORK and the number of switches set to 4)
Base Volume 1 2 3 4
Sphere Switch (SS) 1 & 3 2 & 4 1 & 4 2 & 3
P154 Connections
SS1 = Sw1 (A17) SS3 = Sw3 (A5)
SS2 = Sw2 (A18) SS4 = Sw4 (A6)
SS1 = Sw1 (A17) SS4 = Sw4 (A6)
SS2 = Sw2 (A18) SS3 = Sw3 (A5)
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
B.1.5 Valve Interface
The flow computer interfaces to a motor-operated 4-way valve. This section discusses the specifics of that valve.
Operating Mode
The valve has two available modes, remote and local. The flow computer accepts a digital input signal in order to determine the status of the valve mode. In remote mode (the valve's remote status is "SET"), the S600+ controls the valve. In local mode (the valve's remote status is "CLEAR"), you control the valve manually at the valve.
Note: If you start a prove when the 4-way valve is in local mode, the run control expects the operator to manually move the valve. The sequence waits indefinitely for the valve to attain the correct position before continuing.
Valve Position The prover computer monitors two digital input signals in order to Inputs determine the position of the 4-way valve.
Table B-5 shows the interpretation of the two inputs. 1 indicates a contact closure/active signal; 0 indicates an open contact/inactive signal. CAS2 is the Valve Closed/Reverse Limit switch and OAS2 is the Valve Open/Forward Limit switch.
For correct operation the Valve Closed Limit switch remains closed until the closed stop is reached, and the Open limit switch remains closed until the Open stop is reached. This means that both inputs are active when the valve is moving and ensures that a valve illegal alarm is raised due to a wiring fault.
Actual Valve Position OPEN/FWD MOVING CLOSED/REV FAULT
Table B-5. Valve Positions
Valve Closed Limit Switch
(CAS2) 1 1 0 0
Valve Open Limit Switch
(OAS2) 0 1 1 0
Flow Computer Valve Closed Input
0 1 1 0
Flow Computer Valve Open Input
1 1 0 0
To achieve this operation you must wire the Closed Limit Switch (CAS2) to the flow computer's valve open input, and wire the Open Limit Switch (OAS2) to the flow computer's valve closed input.
Note: If the Limit Switches show the fault state as bits 1/1 not 0/0 there is a work around by swapping the digital inputs for open & closed and inverting the signals.
Valve Command Outputs
Two digital outputs command the valve to move. The forward/reverse output signals can either be held continuously until the valve travel is complete or initiate a pulse where the output is activate for an entered period (such as two seconds).
A valve timeout alarm is raised if the valve position inputs do not reflect the required position within a configurable timeout period. The
B-8
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
timer activates when the flow computer issues the valve move command. Valve Seal The S600+ accepts a digital input signal in order to monitor the Detection position of the seal of the valve. The operator can enter two parameters: a valve "Settle" time (initialised to 30 seconds) and a "Test" time (initialised to 120 seconds), which starts when the settle time expires.
Note: The prover does not function correctly if the value is not sealed correctly (without leaks).
When the valve attains position, the following events occur: 1. The valve settle time expires.
2. At the expiration of the settle time, the program checks the seal status and raises a Seal Fail alarm if the seal has not set.
3. At the expiration of the test time, the test aborts.
Valve Travel This represents the time, in seconds, for the valve to reach its Time commanded position prior to raising a timeout alarm.
Valve Simulation Valve simulation is available, accessible through the security-protected Mode display. When the valve simulation mode is enabled, the status line changes when a command has been issued.
Alarms and The following alarms and events are typically raised on this input.
Events
Alarms Events
Valve illegal Valve seal fail Move fail if status does not change when command
issued (when the valve is in remote mode). Move Uncom if valve status changes when no
command has been issued (when the valve is in remote mode). Valve unavailable (when the valve is in local mode)
Each Mode change (Measured to Keypad) etc.
Note: If a prove fails (aborts) because of a Seal Fail alarm, you must manually command the valve to move when the seal is made before the prove sequence "knows" the valve is now sealed.
B.1.6 Prove Sequence and Control
Two components enable you to control the prove:
Prove sequence, a station-based function which sets up the prove environment, and
Run control sequence, a prover-based function which drives the 4-way valve, counts pulses, and performs the K-factor and meter factor calculations.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: In normal operation, the prove sequence automatically controls the run control sequence. However, you can manually control the run control sequence (for example, to diagnose problems).
The S600+'s front panel display provides the following commands you can use to control and monitor the two prove control tasks (Operator > Station > Sequence Ctl):
Display SEQ CTL SEQ STREAM NO.
SEQ STAGE INDEX SEQ STAGE PREV
SEQ ABORT INDEX RUN CTL Run permit Run stage index Run abort index
Description
Operator commands for sequence control (outer loop)
Enter the designated stream number to be proved
Note:
For local streams, this is the logical stream number. For remote streams, this is the slave number in the Modbus master map. For example, if the first slave has a Modbus address of 22, this is stream 1. If the second slave in the master map has an address of 33, this is stream 2.
Shows current sequence stage as the sequence progresses.
Indicates the sequence stage immediately prior to the current stage. If an abort occurs, use this value to help identify the source of the abort.
In the event of a sequence error, an abort reason index will be shown here.
Operator commands for proof run (inner loop)
Interlock required for starting proof run.
Shows current proof run stage as the sequence progresses.
In the event of a proof run sequence error, displays an abort reason index.
Following a successful prove, the system verifies the stream's normal flow rate:
If the normal flow rate is set to a value greater than zero (Aramcostyle linearisation), the run control waits for a predefined amount of time for you to reject the current prove results. If a prove is rejected, the proving report is annotated as "ABORTED". If the time-out elapses, the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved and the data is automatically used in the subsequent calculations.
B-10
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
If the normal flow rate is zero (non-Aramco-style linearisation), the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved, but does not use the data until it is accepted either locally at the S600+ or via a supervisory computer.
You then have two options for accepting the prove results:
If you select ACCEPT, the currently running batch is retroactively adjusted with the new factor.
If you select ACCEPT NO ADJUST, no adjustment is performed on the currently running batch.
B.1.6.1
Default Prove Sequence Stages
The prover sequence functions in stages. Table B-6 shows the default stages for a typical application's normal, reprove, and abort situations.
If an abort occurs either automatically or by operator command then the prove sequence stage changes to Aborted. No further action is taken until the computer receives either a Continue command to initiate a re-prove or a Terminate command to finish the sequence.
Table B-6. Default Prove Sequence Stages
Stage 0 1 2 8 16 18 19 20
Display IDLE INITIALISE PULSES ON SEAT SPHERE A PRV FLOW/T/P STAB PROOF RUN KF DOWNLOAD AWAIT REPROVE
26 ABORTED STAGE
Continue (Reprove) 28 RE-SEAT SPHERE A 29 RE STAB CHECKS 18 PROOF RUN
Terminate 21 SEAT SPHERE B 25 PS PULSES OFF 30 TERMINATE
Description Halted: idle, await Start command Initialise Turn proving stream pulses on Ensure sphere is in the launch chamber Hold stable temperature, pressure and flowrate Perform proof runs (execute Run Control stages) K-factor download Halted: prove runs complete, await Continue/Terminate command Halted: sequence aborted, await Continue/Terminate command
Seat sphere Hold stable temperature, pressure and flowrate Perform proof runs (execute Run Control stages)
Seat sphere (at end of prove) Turn off pulses Terminate (return to idle)
Revised January-2021
To use stages not included in the sequence you need to create your own sequence file (or two files, if you have configured two provers). Example sequence files are included in C:\Users\<username>\Config600 3.3\pseqlib directory. Copy one of these to C:\Users\<username>\Config600 3.3\Configs\Project\extras directory so that you can download it to the S600+ with the configuration.
Proving
B-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: An explanation of this procedure is provided in How To No.72 available from SupportNet.
B.1.6.2
Complete Sequence Stage Descriptions
Table B-7 shows all the stages of a prove sequence.
Stage 0 1
2
3
Table B-7. Prove Sequence Stages (Complete)
Title Idle Validate + Initialise
Pulses On
Prover FCV initialise
Description Wait for a command to start the sequence, then proceed to stage 1 (Validate and Initialise). Verify: The proving stream is flowing. The proving stream is not in maintenance mode. Telemetry to the proving stream is OK. The prove permit state (run control status) is OK. Initialise: Copy the proving stream meter variables into the proving set. Copy the product stream product data into the proving set. Initialise proof run date (via Initialise command to run control
task). Determine required proof flowrate from current rate (snapshot) or
preset flowrate. Save all FCV settings. Proceed to stage 2 (Pulses On). Command all online streams to turn pulses off Command proving stream to turn pulses on Wait for pulses to be aligned Proceed to stage 3 (Prover FCV Initialise) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. Set prover FCV manual output to initial output Set prover FCV mode to manual Set proving stream FCV tracking on Set proving stream FCV mode to manual Proceed to stage 4 (Open prover outlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty.
B-12
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 4
Title
Prover open outlet
5 Non-proving stream close prover inlet
6 Proving stream open prover inlet
7 Proving stream close stream outlet
Description Command Prover Outlet Valve to open Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 5 (Non-proving stream close prover inlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valve fails to reach position. Command non-proving streams Prover Inlet Valves to close Wait for valves to reach position Proceed to stage 6 (Proving stream open prover inlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position. Command proving streams Prover Inlet Valve to open Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 7 (Proving stream close stream outlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position. Command proving streams Outlet Valve to close Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 8 (Seat sphere A) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 8
9
Title Synchronise with Run Control (Seat sphere A)
Non-proving stream FCVS track
Description Command 4-way valve to reverse (via Seat Sphere command to run control task). Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 9 (Non-proving stream FCV track) or stage 16 (Temperature / Pressure Stability) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position. Set FCV for non-proving streams to tracking Proceed to stage 10 (Non-proving stream flow balance) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned.
B-14
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 10
Title
Non-proving stream flow balance
11 Not used
12 Close suspend
Description Enable flow balancing for non-proving streams Flow error = proving stream flowrate - (selected proof flowrate + offset). If the error is too low then: If there are no on-line streams then go to abort stage. Turn down value = abs (error / no. of on line none proving
streams). For each on line proving stream, new setpoint = current rate - turn
down. If all new set points (for each stream) are within the low flow range then download the new set points and delay for adjustment prior to rechecking the flow error. If any new set point is less than the low flow range then go to stage 12 (operator close) If the error is too high then: If there are no on-line streams then go to abort stage. Turn up value = error / no. of on line none proving streams. For each on line proving stream, new setpoint = current rate +
turn up. If all new set points (for each stream) are within the high flow range then download the new set points and delay for adjustment prior to rechecking the flow error. If any new set point is higher than the low flow range then go to stage 13 (operator open). Proceed to stage 14 if the error is within tolerance (Non-proving stream FCV manual). Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position. If flow balance is not achieved (timeout / hold fails).
Flow balancing wait for operator to close stream Return to flow balancing stage 10 if continue command issued Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position. If flow balance is not achieved (timeout / hold fails).
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-15
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 13
Title
Open suspend
14 Non-proving stream FCVS manual
15 Prover flowrate stability
Description Flow balancing wait for operator to open stream Return to flow balancing stage 10 if continue command issued Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position. If flow balance is not achieved (timeout / hold fails). Set all non-proving stream FCV tracking on Set all non-proving stream FCV mode to manual Proceed to stage 15 (Prover flowrate stability) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. Set prover FCV to selected prove flow rate + offset Set prover FCV mode to auto Set prover FCV tracking to on Hold proving stream flow rate within tolerance for a user configurable time Proceed to stage 16 (Temperature / Pressure Stability) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If stability not achieved.
B-16
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 16
17
18
19 20
Title Synchronise with Run Control (Temperature / pressure stability)
Prover FCV manual
Synchronise with Run Control (Proof runs)
K-factor Download
Await reprove
Description Hold stability for a user-configurable time Proceed to stage 17 (Prover FCV manual) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If stability not maintained. Set prover FCV tracking on Set prover FCV mode to manual Proceed to stage 18 (Proof runs) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. Start the prove runs (via Start command to run control task). On success proceed to stage 19 (KF download) Abort: If a run fails (such as a timeout for a sphere switch). If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. Copy proof K-factor, meter factor, flow rate, and frequency into proving stream data points for subsequent telemetry download. Notes: The stream metering calculations do not use these until
commanded separately. If the historical meter factor option is enabled then the historical
meter factors and deviations arrays are also copied. Proceed to stage 20 (Await reprove) Go to stage 21 (Seat sphere B) if the Terminate or abort command is issued. Go to stage 28 (Re-seat Sphere) if Continue (Reprove) command is issued.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-17
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 21
22
23
24
Title Synchronise with Run Control (Seat sphere B)
Proving stream open stream outlet
Proving stream close prover inlet
Restore FCVS
Description Command 4-way valve to reverse (via Seat Sphere command to run control task). Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 22 (Proving stream open stream outlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valve fails to reach position. Command proving stream Outlet Valve to open Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 23 (Proving stream close prover inlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If valve fails to reach position. Command proving stream Prover Inlet Valve to close Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 24 (Restore FCV) or stage 25 (Proving stream pulses off) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valve fails to reach position. Reset FCV's to previous (pre-prove) settings as noted in stage 1 Proceed to stage 25 (Proving stream pulses off) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty
B-18
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 25
Title
Proving stream pulses off
26 Aborted stage
27 Not used 28 Synchronise
with Run Control (Re seat sphere A)
29 Synchronise with Run Control (Stability checks)
30 Terminate
31 to 40 41 42
User Stages
Not used User Comms Suspend 1
43 User Comms Normal 1
44 User Comms Suspend 2
45 User Comms Normal 2
Description Command proving stream to turn pulses off. Wait for the pulses to be turned off Proceed to stage 1 Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty An abort condition has occurred. Go to the next relevant stage if the Terminate command is issued. Go to stage 28 (Re-seat Sphere) if Continue (Reprove) command is issued.
Command 4-way valve to reverse (via Seat Sphere command to run control task). Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 29 (Stability Checks) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valve fails to reach position. Wait to achieve stability (via Stabilise command to run control task) for temperatures, pressure rate of change. Upon achieving stability, wait for stability to be held for a userconfigurable time. Proceed to the stage 18 (Proof runs). Ensure the run control sequence terminates. Return to stage 1 (Idle). Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality.
Suspends the prover / stream communications. Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality. Re-enables the prover / stream communications. Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality. Suspends the prover / stream communications. Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality. Re-enables the prover / stream communications. Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality.
B.1.6.3
Prove Sequence Abort Index
Table B-8 shows the abort values for a prove sequence.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-19
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Table B-8. Prove Sequence Abort Index
Display OP ABORT Not Used PS TELEM FAIL RUN CTL BUSY METER NO FLOW RUN CTL ABORT ILLEGAL PULSES ANY TELEM FAIL NPS PRV I-VLV OPEN PS PRV I-VLV CLOSED PS STR O-VLV OPEN PRV I-VLV CLOSED PRV O-VLV CLOSED PS IN MAINT FBAL TIMEOUT FBAL NO NPS ON LINE FBAL NO NPS IN AUTO FBAL HOLD FAIL PS I-ISL-VLV CLOSED PS O-ISL-VLV CLOSED PS P-ISL-VLV CLOSED PEER STATUS STANDBY
Description Operator Requested Abort
Proving Stream Telemetry Fail Run Control Task Busy No Flow at Meter Run Control Task Aborted More than one stream has raw pulses enabled Non Proving Stream Telemetry Fail Non Proving Stream Prover Valve Not Closed Proving Stream Prover Offtake Valve Not Open Proving Stream Outlet Valve Not Closed Prover Inlet Valve Not Open Prover Outlet Valve Not Open Proving Stream Is In Maintenance Mode Flow Balance Timeout Flow Balance Error - No Non Proving Streams On-line Flow Balance Error - No Non Proving Streams In Auto Flow Balance Error - Stability Not Achieved Proving Stream Inlet Isolation Valve Not Open Proving Stream Header Isolation Valve Not Open Proving Stream Prover Isolation Valve Not Open Unit is in standby mode when peer-to-peer is configured
B.1.7 Prover Run Control Stages
The Run Control sequence is specific to the type of prover (such as a ball prover, a compact prover, or a master meter). The Run Control sequence initiates the prove runs and performs the calculations that produce a K-factor and meter factor when the runs complete.
Normally the sequence runs when commanded by the Prove Sequence at stage 18 (Perform Proof Runs). However, you can initiate the sequence from the S600+ front panel display or (by using custom controls) from elsewhere.
Table B-9 shows the default stage sequencing for a typical bidirectional prove.
Stage 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9
Table B-9. Bi-Directional Prover Run Control Stages
Display IDLE INITIALISE AWAIT SEAT CMD SEAT SPHERE A POST SEAT SPHERE A AWAIT STAB CMD WAIT STAB AWAIT RUN CMD DRIVE FORWARD
Description Halted: idle Initialise run data Halted: await Seat Sphere command Seat sphere (drive 4-way valve to reverse) Delay to allow sphere to fully seat Halted: await Stabilise command Wait until stability is achieved Halted: await start runs command Drive 4-way valve to forward
B-20
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 10 11 23 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 26
20 25 27
Display FORWARD WAIT SW1 FORWARD WAIT SW2 BI HALF RUN COMP HALF RUN CALCS TURN RND1 DELAY DRIVE REVERSE REVERSE WAIT SW2 REVERSE WAIT SW1 FULL RUN CALCS RUN AVG CALCS STD RPT CHECKS CHECK RUNS EXCEEDED TURN RND2 DELAY FINAL AVG MF DEVIATION CHECKS
28 WAIT REJECT COMMAND
21 FINAL
Description Wait switch 1 hit (forward run) Wait switch 2 hit (forward run) Bidi half run complete Perform half run calculations Delay for turn around Drive 4-way valve to reverse Wait switch 2 hit (reverse run) Wait switch 1 hit (reverse run) Perform full run calculations Perform run average calculations Perform repeatability checks (if success go to stage 25) Check runs exceeded (if yes go to stage 21)
Delay for turn around (then go to stage 9) Perform final average calculations Perform meter factor deviation checks. This stage occurs only if you configure the meter normal flow rate to a value greater than zero. Note: This stage is performed only if you configure the meter
normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramcostyle linearisation) and you select "Product Table with History" when you create your configuration. Allow a time-out for rejecting the current prove. If the time-out elapses then print the proof report. This stage occurs only if you configure the meter normal flow rate to a value greater than zero. Note: This stage is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramcostyle linearisation). Halted: final await Terminate/Reprove command
Uni-directional
A configuration option (Prover Mode) on the PCSetup Run Data screen enables you to run a uni-directional prover. In a sequence similar to the one shown in Table B-9, the uni-directional prover uses stage 24 instead of stage 23 and bypasses the return stages 12 through 16.
User Stages You can also enable user stages on the PC Setup Run Data screen. These invoke a LogiCalc which you can edit to provide user specific logic as the prove progresses.
The folder C:\Users\<username>\Config600 3.3\lclib\prover includes example LogiCalcs.
First, copy one of these to the C:\Users\<username>\Config600 3.3\Configs\Project\LogiCalc directory so that you can download it to the S600+ with the configuration so you can edit it to be compatible with your configuration and then download it to the S600+ with the configuration.
Note: You must edit the LogiCalc file to connect to the correct objects in your configuration.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-21
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: The displays showing the switch hit only update during a prove. You cannot use them independently to test the hardware.
B.1.7.1
Run Control Stage Description
Table B-10 shows all the stages of a Run Control sequence in bi- and uni-directional provers.
Table B-10. Prover Run Control Stages
Run Stage 0
1 2 3
4
5
Description
Idle
Wait for the Initialise command to start the Run Control sequence. Proceed to next stage only if the prove is permitted (that is, if the Run Control stage is Idle or Final and the available signal is zero; normally, the available signal is assigned to a digital input which may be connected to a valve or a key-switch).
Initialise Run Data
Zero down all run data and arrays. Proceed to next stage.
Halted: Await Seat Sphere Command
Wait for Seat Sphere command then proceed to next stage. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued.
Seat The Sphere (Drive 4-Way Valve To Reverse)
Issue hardware command to drive 4-way valve to reverse then wait for valve to travel to reverse. Proceed to next stage upon reaching reverse. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued. If the 4-way valve raises Move Fail or Leak alarms.
Delay After Sphere Seating
Delay for a period (estimated from flowrate and the base volume) to allow sphere to fully seat, then proceed to next stage. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued.
Halted: Await Stabilise Command
Wait for Stabilise command then proceed to next stage. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued.
B-22
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Run Stage 6
7 8 9
Description
Wait Until Stability Is Achieved
Proceed to next stage if stability override is on. Set stability wait timer running. Continuously monitor deviations for:
prover inlet pressure vs. prover outlet pressure meter pressure vs. prover inlet pressure meter pressure vs. prover outlet pressure prover inlet temperature vs. prover outlet temperature meter temperature vs. prover inlet temperature meter temperature vs. prover outlet temperature Continuously monitor (over 5-second periods) rates of change for: prover inlet pressure prover outlet pressure prover inlet temperature prover outlet temperature meter flowrate Proceed to next stage when stability is achieved. Abort: If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If Terminate command is issued. If stability wait timer expires.
Hold Stability For Entered Period
Proceed to next stage if stability override is on. Set stability hold timer running. Repeat the stability checks from the previous stage to ensure stability is maintained for the given period. Proceed to next stage when stability hold timer expires. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued. If any of the stability checks fail.
Halted: Await Start Runs Command
Wait for Start Runs command then proceed to next stage. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued.
Drive 4-Way Valve To Forward
Issue command to reset the prover hardware. Issue hardware command to drive the 4-way valve to forward then wait for the valve to travel to the forward position. Proceed to next stage upon reaching forward. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued. If the 4-way valve raises Move Fail or Leak alarms.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-23
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Run Stage 10
11
12 13 14
Description
Wait Switch 1 Hit (Forward Run)
Estimate time for switch 1 hit based on stream flowrate and pre switch 1 volume. Set switch timer running based on this estimate. (Setting this switch to 0 disables the timer and enters permanent wait state.) Proceed to next stage when switch 1 is hit. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued. If the 4-way valve raises Move Fail or Leak alarms. If pulse lock is lost. If switch timer expires. If switch sequence error.
Wait Switch 2 Hit (Forward Run)
Estimate time for switch 2 hit based on stream flowrate and prover volume. Set switch timer running based on this estimate. (Setting this switch to 0 disables the timer and enters permanent wait state.) Average meter and prover data whilst the sphere is between detectors. Perform stability checks whilst the sphere is between detectors. Proceed to next stage when switch 2 is hit. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued. If the 4-way valve raises Move Fail or Leak alarms. If pulse lock is lost. If stability checks fail. If switch timer expires. If switch sequence error.
Perform Half Run Calculations
No action; proceed to next stage.
Delay For Turn Around
Set timer running to allow sphere to reach the chamber (having passed the sphere switch). Proceed to next stage when timer expires. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued.
Drive 4-Way Valve To Reverse
Issue command to reset the prover hardware. Issue hardware command to drive the 4-way valve to reverse then wait for the valve to travel to the reverse position. Proceed to next stage upon reaching reverse. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued. If the 4-way valve raises Move Fail or Leak alarms.
B-24
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Run Stage 15
16
17 18 19 20
Description
Wait Switch 2 Hit (Reverse Run)
Estimate time for switch 2 hit based on stream flowrate and pre switch 2 volume. Set switch timer running based on this estimate. Proceed to next stage when switch 2 is hit. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued. If the 4-way valve raises Move Fail or Leak alarms. If pulse lock is lost. If switch timer expires. If switch sequence error.
Wait Switch 1 Hit (Reverse Run)
Estimate time for switch 1 hit based on stream flowrate and prover volume. Set switch timer running based on this estimate. Average meter and prover data whilst the sphere is between detectors. Perform stability checks whilst the sphere is between detectors. Proceed to next stage when switch 1 is hit. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued. If the 4-way valve raises Move Fail or Leak alarms. If pulse lock is lost. If stability checks fail. If switch timer expires. If switch sequence error.
Perform Full Run Calculations
Based on forward and reverse run pulse counts, flight times and data averaged during the forward and reverse run. Proceed to next stage if calculations are all valid. Abort if there is a calculation failure (such as K-factor out of range).
Perform Run Average Calculations
Average the individual run data over the last n good runs and place the data in the 12th slot of the run arrays. Proceed to the next stage.
Perform Repeatability Checks
If the required number of runs has not been performed then proceed to next stage. If the required number of runs has been performed then check each of the last n run's K-factor against the average. If each K-factor is within tolerance then proceed to stage 21 (Await Reprove/Terminate).
If any K-factors are outside tolerance and the maximum number of runs has been exceeded then proceed to stage 21 (Await Reprove/Terminate) otherwise proceed to the next stage.
Delay For Turn Around (Then Go To Stage 9)
Set timer running to allow sphere to reach the chamber (having passed the sphere switch). Proceed to next stage when timer expires. Abort if the Terminate command is issued.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-25
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Run Stage 21
22
23 24 25 26 27
Description
Halted: Final - Await Terminate/Reprove Command
End of prove. If: Run control command is Initialise, proceed to stage 1 (Initialise Run Data). Run control command is Terminate, proceed to stage o (Idle). Run control command is Seat Sphere, proceed to the next stage (Seat Sphere) stage.
Seat The Sphere (Drive 4-Way Valve To Reverse)
Issue hardware command to drive 4-way valve to reverse then wait for valve to travel to reverse. Proceed to next stage upon reaching reverse, by default the idle stage. Abort:
If the Terminate command is issued. If the 4-way valve raises the Move Fail or Leak alarms.
Bi-directional Half Run Complete
Extract the forward run pulse count and flight time ready for calculations. Proceed to the next stage.
Uni-Directional Full Run Calculations
Based on forward run pulse counts, flight times and data averaged during the forward run. Proceed to next stage if calculations are all valid. Abort if there is a calculation failure (such as K-factor out of range).
Perform Final Average Calculations
Calculate the final (average) K-factor and meter factor. Proceed to the next stage.
Check Runs Exceeded
Check the number of runs executed against the maximum allowed. Proceed to the next stage. Abort if the maximum runs have been exceeded.
Perform Meter Factor Deviation Checks
Perform tolerance tests (calculated meter factor versus initial base meter factor: maximum deviation of 0.25% and calculated meter factor versus average of saved historical meter factors: maximum deviation of 0.1%).
Only valid meter factors at normal flow rate are incorporated in the historical database. When the limit from either test is exceeded, the meter fact is not used for measurement and the corresponding meter factor at normal meter flow rate is not entered in the historical database. Proving reports are annotated as "ABORTED" with cause of failure stated. Proceed to stage 26 if any of the tolerance test fail. Proceed to the next stage.
Note: This stage is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow rate to a value greater than zero (Aramcostyle linearisation) and you select "Product Table with History" when you create your configuration.
B-26
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Run Stage 28
Description
Await for Current Prove to be Rejected
You can reject the current prove results within a predefined timeout. Print report when timer expires Abort if the prove is rejected. Proceed to the next stage.
Note: This stage is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation).
B.1.7.2
Run Stage Abort Index
Following an abort the program displays a value in the Run Control abort index display.
Value 0 1 2 3
4
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21
Table B-11. Run Stage Abort Index
Display NULL OPERATOR 4WAY FAIL SW1 TIMEOUT
SW2 TIMEOUT
STAB WAIT STAB HOLD AVG CALC HALF CALC FULL CALC
RUNS EXCEEDED SS ERROR PLS LOCK LOST IO FAIL NULL BVOL CHANGED KF/MF RANGE
4WAY MOVED UNAVAIL NULL INV CALC MF DEV INVALID
Description Not used Operator abort 4-way valve command timeout Switch 1 timeout (the switch was not hit within the predicted time). To resolve, check wiring; set pre-switch volume to 0; or check that raw pulse bus frequency is greater than 0. Switch 2 timeout (the switch was not hit within the predicted time). To resolve, check wiring; set pre-switch volume to 0; or check that raw pulse bus frequency is greater than 0. Note: If the flow computer does not see SW2, check the raw
pulse bus. Temperature/Pressure/Flowrate wait stability timeout Temperature/Pressure/Flowrate hold stability timeout Average calculation error; number of samples exceeds 30,000 Not used Error occurred when performing full run calculations (for details refer to Run Stage Calculation Index). Maximum number of runs exceeded Sphere switch sequence error Pulse interpolator module lock lost I/O module failed to respond to prove request Not used Base volume changed K-factor or meter factor out of range, even if alarms not configured. To resolve, check the high and low limits for the meter factor, the K-factor, and pulse count objects. 4-way valve moved unexpectedly; pulse count range checked. Prover unavailable Not used Unsupported volume/mass calculations Failed during meter factor deviation checks.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-27
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
B.1.7.3
Run Stage Calculation Index
If a prover calculation fails, the program displays a value indicating the failed calculation in the Run Stage Calc Index display.
Value 0 1
2
3 4 5
6
7 8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Table B-12. Run Stage Calculation Index
Display IDLE CTSP
CPSP
N/A N/A CPLP
CPLM
N/A CTLP
CTLM
PRV VOL MCF K-FACTOR METER FACTOR PRV MASS MTR MASS IND MTR VOL
Description
No calculation errors
The calculation to determine the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the steel at the prover (CTSp) failed because the CTSp value is less than 0.5 or greater than 1.5.
The calculation to determine the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the steel at the prover (CPSp) failed because the modulus of elasticity or wall thickness is 0 and the CPSp value is less than 0.5 or greater than 1.5.
Not used
Not used
The calculation to determine the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the prover (CPLp) failed because of low density.
The calculation to determine the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the meter (CPLm) failed because of low density
Not used
The calculation to determine the correction factor of the effect of temperature on the liquid at the prover (CTLp) failed because of low density.
The calculation to determine the correction factor of the effect of temperature on the liquid at the meter (CTLm) because of low density
The calculation to determine the gross standard volume of the prover (GSVp) failed because no error checks occurred.
The calculation to determine the meter correction factor (MCF) failed because the CTLm or CPLm values are less than or equal to 0.
K-factor calculation is outside the low/high alarm limits
Meter factor calculation is outside the low/high alarm limits
Prover mass calculation failed because the prover gross volume or density is less than or equal to 0
Mass K- factor calculation failed because the pulses or prover mass is less than or equal to 0
Calculation to determine the indicated volume at the meter (IVm) failed because pulses or base K-factor is less than or equal to 0
B.1.8 Prove/Stream Data
The prover computer reads the following data from the stream under prove:
Stream Temperature (in use) Stream Pressure (in use) Stream Standard Density (in use) Alpha Constant K0 Alpha Constant K1 Alpha Constant K2
B-28
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Equilibrium Vapour Pressure Meter Factor (in use) K-factor (in use) CTSm (in use) CPSm (in use) Flowrate Minimum Flowrate Maximum FCV Setpoint FCV Output Reference Temperature Meter Density (in use) FCV Auto/Manual Status FCV Tracking Status Volume Correction Rounding Status Volume Correction Units Selection Volume Correction Product Type Volume Correction CPL Option Volume Correction Product Subtype Volume Correction Density Type K-factor Units Normal Meter Flow Rate Initial Base Meter Factor Initial Base Meter Factor Time Stamp Base Meter Factor Linearisation Points Historical Meter Factors Historical Meter Factors Time Stamp
If the prove completes successfully, the system transfers the following prove data to the stream but does not use it until you accept the data at the stream.
Proved K-factor Proved Meter Factor Proved Turbine Frequency Proved Flowrate Proved Meter Temperature Proved Meter Pressure Historical Meter Factors Historical Meter Factors Time Stamp Proved Meter Factor Acceptance Flag
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-29
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
B.1.9 Prove Reports
The system provides two reports, volume or mass K-factor. Which report generates is determined by the K-factor units, pulses/volume, or pulses/mass.
Following are two customized proof reports:
=============================================================================================
1
METER PROOF REPORT
06/08/2013 09:58:40
=============================================================================================
STREAM ON PROOF PROVING RATE
: 0 :
0.000 m3/h
STANDARD DENSITY
:
BASE VOLUME
:
STREAM TEMPERATURE
:
PROVER TEMP
:
0.000 kg/m3 0.000 m3 0.000 Deg.C 0.000 Deg.C
STREAM PRESSURE : 0.000 barg
PROVER PRESS
: 0.000 barg
TRIAL NO.
STREAM
TEMP
PRESSURE
(Deg.C) (barg)
PROVER
TEMP
PRESSURE
(Deg.C) (barg)
STANDARD DENSITY (kg/m3)
METER
PULSES FLOWRATE K-FACTOR
(
) (m3/h) (pls/m3)
1
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
2
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
3
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
4
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
5
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
6
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
7
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
8
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
9
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
10
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
11
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
12
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
AVE
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
CTLM
1
0.000000
2
0.000000
3
0.000000
4
0.000000
5
0.000000
6
0.000000
7
0.000000
8
0.000000
9
0.000000
10
0.000000
11
0.000000
12
0.000000
AVE
0.000000
CURRENT K-FACTOR
NEW K-FACTOR
NEW METER FACTOR
REPEATABILITY
CPLM
CTSP
CPSP
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
:
0.00 pls/m3
:
0.00 pls/m3
: 0.000000
: 0.000000 %
CTLP 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
CPLP 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
FTIME 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
=============================================================================================
=============================================================================================
=============================================================================================
2
PROVING REPORT
Emerson Process Management
=============================================================================================
LOCATION : AAAAAAA
DATE/TIME : MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
METER MANUFACTURER: METER MODEL: METER SERIAL NUMBER: METER SIZE (mm): NOMINAL K-FACTOR: METER TAG NUMBER:
AAAAAAA AAAAAAA AAAAAAA 0.000 0.000 AAAAAAA
PROVER MANUFACTURER: AAAAAAA PROVER SERIAL NUMBER: AAAAAAA
PRIMARY FLOW COMPUTER: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX LIQUID: A CRUDE OBSERVED DENSITY: 0.000 kg/m3 AT 0.00 Deg.C = 0.000
kg/m3 AT 0.000 Deg.C
B-30
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
TRIAL NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 AVE
PULSES TOTAL
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
TOTAL TIME
S
PRESS PROVER
barg
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
METER barg
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00
TEMP PROVER Deg.C
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000
METER Deg.C
TRIAL M.F. MFT
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.
REPEATABILITY FOR LAST 10 TRIALS = 0.000 %
A. TEMP. CORRECTION FACTOR FOR LIQUID IN PROVER (CTLp)
B. PRESS. CORRECTION FACTOR FOR LIQUID IN PROVER (CPLp)
C. COMBINED CORRECTION FACTOR FOR PROVER
(CCFp)
D. GROSS STANDARD VOLUME FOR PROVER
(GSVp)
E. INDICATED METER VOLUME
(IVm)
F. TEMP. CORRECTION FACTOR FOR LIQUID IN METER (CTLm)
G. PRESS. CORRECTION FACTOR FOR LIQUID IN METER (CPLm)
H. COMBINED CORRECTION FACTOR FOR METER
(CCFm)
I. GROSS STANDARD VOLUME FOR METER
(GSVm)
J. AVG. METER FLOW RATE
K. METER FACTOR @ PROVING FLOW RATE
L. METER FACTOR @ NORMAL METER FLOW RATE OF 0.000 m3/h 0.000
METER FACTOR TEST RESULTS (%): 1) 0.00 2) 0.00
M. PROVER MASS
N. METER MASS
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Sm3 0.000 m3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Sm3 0.000 m3/h 0.000
0.000 tonne 0.000 tonne
HISTORICAL DATA OF METER FACTORS @ NORMAL METER FLOW RATE OF 0.000 m3/h INITIAL BASE METER FACTOR (DATE: MM/DD/YY) = 0.000
DATE:
MM/DD/YY
FACTOR:
0.000
DEVIATION(±): 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
DATE:
MM/DD/YY
FACTOR:
0.000
DEVIATION(±): 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
PROVED FOR: ______________________ BY : _____________________ DATE: ____________
WITNESSED BY : ______________________________________________ DATE: ____________
============================================================================================= ==========================================================================================
B.1.10 Proving Calculations
This section provides information on calculations used in the prove procedure.
The calculations are for volume or mass K-factor and the choice is determined by the K-factor units, pulses/volume or pulses/mass.
Average Method The "average method" option directs how the system performs the final averaging:
The Meter Factor option calculates a meter factor for each run and takes the average of these to arrive at the final meter factor.
The K-factor option calculates a K-factor for each run and takes the average of these to arrive at the final K-factor.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-31
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
The Pulses option takes the average of the pulses, temperature, pressure, and other variables and performs a final set of calculations using this average data to arrive at the final meter and K-factor.
The Meter Factor and K-factor options are equivalent to the `average meter factor' method used for API Ch.12 Section 2 Part 3 Proving reports. The Pulses option is equivalent to the `average data' method.
Standard References The prover volume correction calculations correspond to those used by the meter under prove, in which the system transfers the calculation steering variables from the stream.
Name Averaging Calcs Stability Calcs Correction Factor (CTLm/CTLp) Correction Factor (CPLm/CPLp) Correction Factor (CTSp/CPSp) K-factor/Flowrate K-factor Deviation K-factor Deviatoin Statistical Method Meter Factor
Standard Reference General mathematic principles General mathematic principles Corresponds to meter calculations Corresponds to meter calculations API Ch 12 API Ch 12 API Ch 4 NORSOK I-105 Annex F
API Ch 12
B.1.10.1 Formulae: Averaging Calculations
Run Average Data
X run
=
Xinst Samples
where:
Xrun Xinst
Samples
is the average value of the variable for a single run is the instantaneous sample value of the variable being averaged is the number of samples taken during the run
The sampled variables (Xinst) are: Prover temperature (average of inlet and outlet) Prover pressure (average of inlet and outlet) Meter temperature Meter pressure Standard density
Run Average Frequency (Hz)
PC FREQrun = t
where:
FREQrun PC t
is the average meter frequency for a single run is the run pulse count is the run flight time (secs)
B-32
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Final Average Data (Over Consecutive Good Runs)
X = final
X run
N
where:
Xfinal the final average value of a relevant variable for the N
consecutive good runs
Xrun the value of the variable for a single run
N
the number of consecutive good runs
The final average variables are: Pulse count Flight time Prover temperature (average of inlet and outlet) Prover pressure (average of inlet and outlet) Meter temperature Meter pressure Vapour pressure Standard density Prover density Meter density Meter frequency Prover flowrate Alpha Prover beta Meter beta CTSm CPSm CTLm CPLm CTSp CPSp CTLp CPLp Prover standard volume Prover mass Meter mass K-factor Meter factor
B.1.10.2 Formulae: Stability Calculations
Stream/Prover Discrepancy Checks Xdiff = XA - XB where: XA, XB are the variables being compared
The variables compared are: Prover Inlet - Prover Outlet (Temperature and Pressure) Prover Inlet - Meter (Temperature and Pressure) Prover Outlet - Meter (Temperature and Pressure)
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-33
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Variable Rate of Change
X rate =
X new - X old Period
where:
Xrate the rate of the variable Xnew the new sample value Xold the previous sample value Period the sampling interval
The variables compared are: Prover Inlet (Temperature and Pressure) Prover Outlet (Temperature and Pressure) Meter Flowrate
B.1.10.3 Formulae: Correction Factor (CTLm/CTLp)
Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on the Liquid
These factors are calculated according to the product, using the same calculations as the meter under prove.
B.1.10.4 Formulae: Correction Factor (CPLm/CPLp)
Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on the Liquid
These factors are calculated according to the product, using the same calculations as the meter under prove.
B.1.10.5 Formulae: Correction Factor (CTSp/CPSp)
Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on the Prover Steel
CTSp = 1 + [(T Tb) Gc]
where:
Gc
Mean coefficient of cubical expansion per degree
temperature of the material of which the container is made
between Tb and T.
Tb
Base temperature.
T
Average liquid temperature in the container.
Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on the Prover Steel
CPSp = 1 + (Pp - Pb) D/Et
where:
Pp
Pressure of the liquid at the prover (barg)
Pb
Base Pressure (barg)
D
Inside diameter of the flow tube (mm)
E
Modulus of elasticity of the flow tube steel (bar)
t
Wall thickness of the prover flow tube (mm)
B-34
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: The average Tp, Pp over the run is used for calculating the correction factors.
B.1.10.6 Formulae: Volume Prover Calculations
Prover Gross Standard Volume (Sm3)
GSVprun = BV × CTLprun × CPLprun × CTSprun × CPSprun
where:
BV
is the entered volume for the prover at standard conditions
CTLprun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid at the prover, using the average prover run temperature
CPLprun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the prover, using the average prover run pressure
CTSprun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the steel at the prover, using the average prover run temperature
CPSprun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the steel at the prover, using the average prover run pressure
Meter Indicated Volume (m3)
IVmrun
=
PC run KFmrun
where:
PCrun KFm
is the run pulse count (pls) is the meter K-factor (pls/m3)
Meter Indicated Standard Volume (Sm3)
ISVmrun = IVmrun × CTLm run × CPLm run
where: IVmrun is the indicated volume for the meter CTLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the
liquid at the meter, using the average meter run temperature CPLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the
liquid at the meter, using the average meter run pressure
Volume K-factor (pls/m3)
KFmrun
=
PC run
×
CTLmrun × GSVp run
CPLmrun
where:
PCrun is the run pulse count (pls)
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-35
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
CTLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid at the meter, using the average meter run temperature
CPLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the meter, using the average meter run pressure
GSVprun is the prover gross standard volume (m3)
Meter Factor MF = GSVprun ISVmrun where: GSVprun is the prover gross standard volume (m3) ISVmrun is the meter indicated standard volume (m3)
Prover Volume Flowrate (m3/h)
VFRp run
=
GSVp run t × CTLmrun × CPLmrun
× 3600
where:
GSVp is the prover gross standard volume (m3)
CTLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid at the meter, using the average meter run temperature
CPLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the meter, using the average meter run pressure
t
is the run flight time (s)
B.1.10.7 Formulae: Mass Prover Calculations
Prover Gross Volume (m3)
GVprun = BV × CTSp run × CPSprun
where:
BV
is the entered volume for the prover at standard conditions
CTSprun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the steel at the prover, using the average prover run temperature
CPSprun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the steel at the prover, using the average prover run pressure
Prover Mass (kg)
Mprun = GVprun × Density
where: GVprun Density
is the prover gross volume (m3) is the density at prover conditions (kg/m3)
B-36
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Meter Mass (kg)
Mm run
=
PC run KFmrun
where:
PCrun is the run pulse count (pls)
KFmrun is the meter K-factor (pls/kg)
Meter Factor MF = Mprun Mm run where: Mprun is the prover mass (kg) Mmrun is the meter mass (kg)
Mass K-factor (pls/kg)
KFm run
=
PC run Mp run
where:
PCrun is the run pulse count (pls)
Mprun is the prover mass (kg)
Prover Mass Flowrate (kg/h)
MFRprun
=
Mp run t
× 3600
where:
Mprun is the mass for the master meter (kg)
t
is the run flight time (s)
B.1.10.8 K-factor Deviation
When the required number of consecutive good runs has been achieved, the program checks each individual run (which make up the N consecutive good runs) to see how far it deviates from the average. If any run's K-factor deviates by more than the allowable limit then additional runs are performed and the test is repeated.
When all the required run K-factors fall within the deviation limit, then the prove is considered successful and Final average data is calculated. At the same time the program stores the single maximum deviation value (repeatability) of the good run K-factors as an indication of how well the prove fell within the deviation tolerance.
API Ch.4 Method 1 (default)
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-37
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
( ) K dev =
K avg - K run K avg
×100
MX-MN/AVG
( ) K dev =
K max - K min K avg
×100
MX-MN/MX+MN2
( ( ) ) K dev =
K max - K min ×100 K max + K min ÷ 2
MX-MN/MN
( ) K dev =
K max - K min K min
×100
MX-MN/MX*MN
(( )) K dev =
K max - K min K max × K min
×100
MX-AV/AV
( ) K dev =
K max - K avg K avg
×100
AV-MN/AV
( ) Kdev =
K avg - K min K avg
×100
where:
Kdev is the K-factor deviation (%) Kavg is the average K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3) Kmin is the minimum K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3) Kmax is the maximum K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3) Krun is the run K-factor being checked (pls/m3)
Statistical
K dev
=
200
x
t N-1
x
S N -1 K avg ×
N
where:
Kdev is the K-factor deviation (%) Kavg is the average K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3)
tN-1 is the uncertainty band confidence level, which is a selectable value (95%, 99%, 99.5%, or a user-defined value). NORSOK
B-38
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
requires this method (using the student-t distribution) at a recommended value of 95%. API MPMS Ch.4.8 also recommends 95%.
SN-1 is the standard deviation of K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3)
B.1.10.9 Meter Factor Deviation Tests
This section defines the Meter Factor Deviation tests.
Calculated Meter Factor versus Initial Base Meter Factor)
% Deviation Test 1 =
(MFCPFRN Initial Base Meter Factor) (Initial Based Meter Factor)
X 100
where:
MFCPFRN is the calculated meter factor from current prove at normal flow rate.
Maximum deviation of ± 0.25 %.
Calculated Meter Factor versus Average of Previous Historical Meter Factors)
% Deviation Test 2 =
(MFCPFRN Average of Previous Meter Factors) (Average of Previous Meter Factors)
X 100
where:
MFCPFRN is the calculated meter factor from current prove at normal flow rate.
Maximum deviation of ± 0.1 %.
B.2 Compact Prover Liquid Only
Two components enable you to control the prove:
Prove sequence, a station-based function which sets up the prove environment, and
Run control, a prover-based function which drives the prover hardware, counts pulses, and performs the K-factor calculations.
Following a successful prove, the system verifies the stream normal flow rate value:
If the normal flow rate is set to a value greater than zero (Aramcostyle linearisation), the run control waits for a predefined amount of time for you to reject the current prove results. If a prove is rejected, the proving report is annotated as "ABORTED". If the time-out elapses, the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved and the data is automatically used in the subsequent calculations.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-39
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
If the normal flow rate is zero (non-Aramco-style linearisation), the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved, but does not use the data until it is accepted either locally at the S600+ or via a supervisory computer.
When the prove runs complete, you can either re-run the prove or terminate, at which point (if so configured) the sequence restores the valves to their pre-prove state.
The compact prover has a small volume chamber so a proof run consists of repeated proof passes (a default of 5, a maximum of 39). The S600+ does not create a proof report, although you can add this option through a user stage. Contact Technical Support.
Notes:
The prove sequence downloads both a K-factor and a meter factor. Applications typically use the original K-factor from the meter calibration report and update the meter factor, which may be a fixed value or derived from a linearisation process. Alternatively, the meter factor can remain unchanged and the K-factor (fixed or linearised) updated.
The meter factor deviation tests and the historical meter factor database are only supported for "local" streams (part of the same configuration with the prover), if you configure the stream normal flow rate to a value greater than zero and you select "Product Table with History" when you create your configuration.
You define a ticket as Official or Unofficial when you configure a prove. This selection applies to both the Aramco-style and nonAramco-style linearisation.
Following an Official prove, the prove sequence is determined by the Aramco / non-Aramco style linearisation selection.
Following the Unofficial prove, the prove sequence does not download the prove results to the stream being proved. This is typically used to determine an approximate K-Factor / Meter Factor before an official prove takes place or when maintenance activities are being performed on the site.
The Official/Unofficial selection displays in the report header.
B.2.1 Inputs/Outputs
For compact proving, the S600+ requires the following hardware: A CPU module (P152+) An I/O module (P144) A Prover module (P154)
B-40
Inputs A compact prover normally has the following inputs:
Prover Inlet Pressure Prover Outlet Pressure
4-20mA ADC 4-20mA ADC
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Prover Plenum Pressure Prover Inlet Temperature Prover Outlet Temperature Stream Raw Pulses Prove Enable Status Prover Ready (Upstream) Status Piston Detector Switch
4-20mA ADC 4-wire PRT 4-wire PRT Raw Pulse Input Digital Input Digital Input Switch Input 1
Note: If there is only one pressure and temperature input, assign inlet and outlet objects to use the same input.
Outputs A compact prover normally has the following outputs:
Hydraulics On/Off Prove Launch (Run) Command Plenum Charge Plenum Vent
Digital Output Digital Output Digital Output Digital Output
You can regulate plenum pressure to lie within boundary limits by means of two digital outputs a charge and vent system. The control logic is described in the Run Control stages.
B.2.2 Communications
Using the Modbus protocol, a slave link provides communications with any remote stream flow computers.
To set up the link at the prover (which is the master), select Tech/Engineer > Communications > Assignment > Prover Master Lin > Seq Enable.
To set up the Modbus address, select Tech/Engineer > Communications > Assignment > Prover Master Lin > Seq Addr.
Prover/Stream Link
Modbus RTU Master Prover/Stream Link
Default Setting
Serial RS485 - Comm 5 9600 8 bits No Parity 1 stop bit Address = 1 (front panel)
To set up the link at the stream (which is the slave), select Tech/Engineer > Communications > Assignment > Next > Prover Slave Lin.
Note: You can reset the ports, baud rate, number of bits, and parity values through the S600+'s front panel.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-41
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
B.2.3 Pulse Measurement
The primary function of the prover is to calculate an accurate K-factor value for the meter under prove. The compact prover does this by counting the number of pulses from the stream meter and equating them to the known volume of the prover.
The stream flow computer receives pulses from its meter and transmits a pulse train output (`Raw Pulse Output') which represents the number of pulses received, including bad pulse correction. The prove sequence commands the selected stream to turn on its Raw Pulse Output, which allows the prover computer to monitor the pulses from the meter. The prover counts pulses during a proof run, and corrects the count for temperature and pressure.
When the proof run completes, the prover calculates the stream's Kfactor from the corrected pulse count and the known prover volume.
Note: The electrical diagram for the Prover module shows a Raw Pulse Output, but this is not available. You cannot use this Raw Pulse Output to pass pulses input to the Prover module to the Raw Pulse Input.
Pulse Gating
When a proof pass is launched the flow drives a piston forward through the chamber, triggering a detector switch twice as it goes. Hydraulic pressure is then used to reverse the piston through the chamber ready for the next pass to commence.
For each pass the raw pulses are counted during the period between the detector switch triggers as the piston moves forward through the chamber.
Pulse Interpolation Pulse interpolation is used when the pulse count is low (typically less than 10,000 pulses per run).
The S600+ support two methods of pulse interpolation: dual chronometry (the standard) or a pulse interpolation module (optional). Either method allows the prover computer to resolve the pulse count to better than the API recommendation of 1 part in 10,000.
Dual chronometry adds accurate timing of the period between detectors so in effect partial pulses can be counted.
If you do not select dual chronometry, you can use a Pulse Interpolation Module (PIM) to achieve greater resolution. You enter an interpolation factor corresponding to the PIM setting into the prover S600+ using a keypad.
A pulse lock lost digital input is provided to indicate whether the PIM pulses are valid. The input is active when the PIM output is considered good.
B.2.4 Proving Control Signal Timing
Figure B-3 is a timing diagram showing the sequence of relevant signals during the initial pass of a proof run. Table B-13 describes each stage of the diagram.
B-42
Proving
Revised January-2021
Enable Hydraulics (S600 O/P)
Launch Command (Hydraulic Solenoid) (S600 O/P)
Prove Ready Detector) (S600 I/P)
Piston Detector (S600 I/P)
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
t1 t2
t3 t4
t5
t6 t7 t8
t9
t10
t11
Figure B-3. Initial Pass of Proof Run Timing
Pass t1
t2 t3
t4 t5 t6
Table B-13. Proof Run Signals
Description
At the start of a prove cycle there is no hydraulic pressure (the hydraulic pump is switched off) so if there is flow the piston is stationary downstream. The Enable Hydraulics signal (an S600+ digital output) is switched to start the hydraulic pumps. The Hydraulic Solenoid signal (an S600+ digital output) is high, closing the associated solenoid valve and returning the piston returns upstream due to the increased hydraulic pressure.
The piston returns upstream and is held there by the hydraulic pressure. When the piston is upstream the upstream detector triggers, switching the associated Upstream Detector signal (an S600+ digital input) to high.
A user-configurable time after t1 (providing that the Upstream Detector signal is switched to high), the piston launches, switching the Hydraulic Solenoid signal to low and opening the solenoid valve which reduces the hydraulic pressure. The Hydraulic Solenoid signal remains low until the Volume Detector switch has been triggered a second time.
As the piston moves down the chamber it is no longer upstream and the Upstream Detector signal switches to low.
The first volume piston detector switch triggers and the Volume Piston Detector signal (an S600+ digital input) produces a pulse, switching from high to low and back to high again.
The second volume piston detector switch triggers and the Volume Piston Detector signal produces a second pulse, switching from high to low and back to high again.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-43
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Pass t7 t8
t9 t10 t11
Description
When it detects the second Volume Piston Detector signal pulse, the Hydraulic Solenoid signal switches to low to close the solenoid valve. This increases the hydraulic pressure and returns the piston upstream.
The returning piston triggers the second volume piston detector switch, generating a third pulse on the Volume Piston Detector signal.
Note: The piston moving down the chamber slowly (switching the Hydraulic Solenoid signal low on detection of the second Volume Piston Detector signal) could result in the piston starting to return prior to having fully cleared the second volume chamber detector switch. In that case, the two pulses which commenced at passes t6 and t8 may form a single pulse of longer duration.
The first Volume Piston Detector switch triggers on the return of the piston, generating a fourth pulse on the Volume Piston Detector signal.
The piston returns upstream and is held there by hydraulic pressure. When the piston is upstream the upstream detector triggers and switches the associated Upstream Detector signal to high.
The piston launches for the second pass, switching the Hydraulic Solenoid signal to low, which opens the solenoid valve and reduces the hydraulic pressure.
The prove cycle continues for the required number of passes.
When the prove cycle completes the Enable Hydraulics switches to high to stop the hydraulic pumps.
B.2.5 Prove Sequence and Control
Two components enable you to control the prove:
Prove sequence, a station-based function which sets up the prove environment, and
Run control, a prover-based function which drives the hardware, counts pulses, and performs the K-factor calculations.
The S600+'s front panel display provides the following commands you can use to control and monitor the two prove control tasks (Operator > Station > Sequence Ctl):
Display SEQ CTL SEQ STREAM NO.
SEQ STAGE INDEX
Description
Operator commands for sequence control (outer loop).
Enter the designate stream number to be proved.
Note:
For local streams, this is the logical stream number. For remote streams, this is the slave number in the Modbus master map. For example, if the first slave has a Modbus address of 22, this is stream 1. If the second slave in the master map has an address of 33, this is stream 2.
Shows current sequence stage as the sequence progresses.
B-44
Proving
Revised January-2021
Display SEQ STAGE PREV
SEQ ABORT INDEX
RUN CTL Run permit Run stage index Run abort index
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description Indicates the sequence stage immediately prior to the current stage. If an abort occurs, use this value to help identify the source of the abort. In the event of a sequence error, an abort reason index displays here. Operator commands for proof run (inner loop) Interlock required for starting proof run. Shows current proof run stage as the sequence progresses. In the event of a proof run sequence error, an abort reason index displays here.
Following a successful prove, the system verifies the stream normal flow rate value:
If the normal flow rate is set to a value greater than zero (Aramcostyle linearisation), the run control waits for a predefined amount of time for you to reject the current prove results. If a prove is rejected, the proving report is annotated as "ABORTED". If the time-out elapses, the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved and the data is automatically used in the subsequent calculations.
If the normal flow rate is zero (non-Aramco-style linearisation), the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved, but does not use the data until it is accepted either locally at the S600+ or via a supervisory computer.
You then have two options for accepting the prove results:
If you select ACCEPT, the currently running batch is retroactively adjusted with the new factor.
If you select ACCEPT NO ADJUST, no adjustment is performed on the currently running batch.
B.2.5.1
Default Prove Sequence Stages
The prover sequence functions in stages. Table B-14 shows the default stages for a typical application's normal, reprove, and abort situations.
If an abort occurs either automatically or by operator command then the prove sequence stage changes to Aborted. No further action is taken until the computer receives either a Continue command to initiate a re-prove or a Terminate command to finish the sequence.
Table B-14. Default Prove Sequence Stages
Stage 0 1 2 41 16
Display IDLE INITIALISE PULSES ON ENABLE HYDRAULICS PRV FLOW/T/P STAB
Description Halted: idle, await Start command Initialise Turn proving stream pulses on Enable piston hydraulics (execute Run Control stages) Hold stable temperature, pressure and flowrate
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-45
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
18 PROOF RUN 19 KF DOWNLOAD 20 AWAIT REPROVE
26 ABORTED STAGE
Perform proof runs (execute Run Control stages)
K-factor and data download
Halted: prove runs complete, await Continue/Terminate command
Halted: sequence aborted, await Continue/Terminate command
Continue (Reprove) 29 RE STAB CHECKS 18 PROOF RUN
Hold stable temperature, pressure and flowrate Perform proof runs (execute Run Control stages)
Terminate 25 PS PULSES OFF 30 TERMINATE
Turn proving stream raw pulses off Terminate (return to idle)
B.2.5.2
Complete Sequence Stage Descriptions
Table B-15 shows all the stages of a prove sequence.
Stage 0 1
2
Table B-15. Complete Prove Sequence Stages
Title Idle Validate + Initialise
Pulses On
Description Wait for a command to start the sequence, then proceed to stage 1 (Validate and Initialise). Verify: The proving stream is flowing. The proving stream is not in maintenance mode. Telemetry to the proving stream is OK. The prove permit state (run control status) is OK. Initialise: Copy the proving stream meter variables into the proving set. Copy the product stream product data into the proving set. Initialise proof run date (via Initialise command to run control
task). Determine required proof flowrate from current rate (snapshot) or
preset flowrate. Save all FCV settings. Proceed to stage 2 (Pulses On).
Command all online streams to turn pulses off Command proving stream to turn pulses on Wait for pulses to be aligned Proceed to stage 3 (Prover FCV Initialise) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty.
B-46
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 3
Title
Prover FCV initialise
4 Prover open outlet
5 Non-proving stream close prover inlet
6 Proving stream open prover inlet
Description Set prover FCV manual output to initial output Set prover FCV mode to manual Set proving stream FCV tracking on Set proving stream FCV mode to manual Proceed to stage 4 (Open prover outlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. Command Prover Outlet Valve to open Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 5 (Non-proving stream close prover inlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valve fails to reach position. Command non-proving streams Prover Inlet Valves to close Wait for valves to reach position Proceed to stage 6 (Proving stream open prover inlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position. Command proving streams Prover Inlet Valve to open Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 7 (Proving stream close stream outlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-47
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 7
Title
Proving stream close stream outlet
8 Not used
9 Non-proving stream FCVS track
Description Command proving streams Outlet Valve to close Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 41 (Enable Hydraulics) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position.
Set FCV for non-proving streams to tracking Proceed to stage 10 (Non-proving stream flow balance) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned.
B-48
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 10
Title
Non-proving stream flow balance
11 Not used
12 Close suspend
Description Enable flow balancing for non-proving streams Flow error = proving stream flowrate - (selected proof flowrate + offset). If the error is too low then: If there are no on-line streams then go to abort stage. Turn down value = abs (error / no. of on line none proving
streams). For each on line proving stream, new setpoint = current rate - turn
down. If all new set points (for each stream) are within the low flow range then download the new set points and delay for adjustment prior to rechecking the flow error. If any new set point is less than the low flow range then go to stage 12 (operator close) If the error is too high then: If there are no on-line streams then go to abort stage. Turn up value = error / no. of on line none proving streams. For each on line proving stream, new setpoint = current rate +
turn up. If all new set points (for each stream) are within the high flow range then download the new set points and delay for adjustment prior to rechecking the flow error. If any new set point is higher than the low flow range then go to stage 13 (operator open). Proceed to stage 14 if the error is within tolerance (Non-proving stream FCV manual). Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position. If flow balance is not achieved (timeout / hold fails).
Flow balancing wait for operator to close stream Return to flow balancing stage 10 if continue command issued Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position. If flow balance is not achieved (timeout / hold fails).
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-49
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 13
Title
Open suspend
14 Non-proving stream FCVS manual
15 Prover flowrate stability
Description Flow balancing wait for operator to open stream Return to flow balancing stage 10 if continue command issued Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position. If flow balance is not achieved (timeout / hold fails). Set all non-proving stream FCV tracking on Set all non-proving stream FCV mode to manual Proceed to stage 15 (Prover flowrate stability) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. Set prover FCV to selected prove flow rate + offset Set prover FCV mode to auto Set prover FCV tracking to on Hold proving stream flow rate within tolerance for a user configurable time Proceed to stage 16 (Temperature / Pressure Stability) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If stability not achieved.
B-50
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 16
17
18
19 20 21
Title Synchronise with Run Control (Temperature / pressure stability)
Prover FCV manual
Synchronise with Run Control (Proof runs)
K-factor Download
Await reprove
Not used
Description Hold stability for a user-configurable time Proceed to stage 17 (Prover FCV manual) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If stability not maintained. Set prover FCV tracking on Set prover FCV mode to manual Proceed to stage 18 (Proof runs) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. Start the prove runs (via Start command to run control task). On success proceed to stage 19 (KF download) Abort: If a run fails (such as a timeout for a sphere switch). If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. Copy proof K-factor, meter factor, flow rate, and frequency into proving stream data points for subsequent telemetry download. Notes: The stream metering calculations do not use these until
commanded separately. If the historical meter factor option is enabled then the historical
meter factors and deviations arrays are also copied. Proceed to stage 20 (Await reprove) Go to stage 22 (Proving stream open stream outlet) if the Terminate or abort command is issued. Go to stage 29 (Stability Checks) if Continue (Reprove) command is issued.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-51
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 22
23
24
25
26 27 28
Title Proving stream open stream outlet
Proving stream close prover inlet
Restore FCVS
Proving stream pulses off
Aborted stage Not used Not used
Description Command proving stream Outlet Valve to open Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 23 (Proving stream close prover inlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If valve fails to reach position. Command proving stream Prover Inlet Valve to close Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 24 (Restore FCV) or stage 25 (Proving stream pulses off) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valve fails to reach position. Reset FCV's to previous (pre-prove) settings as noted in stage 1 Proceed to stage 25 (Proving stream pulses off) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty Command proving stream to turn pulses off. Wait for the pulses to be turned off Proceed to stage 1 Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty An abort condition has occurred. Go to the next relevant stage if the Terminate command is issued. Go to stage 29 (Stability Checks) if Continue (Reprove) command is issued.
B-52
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 29
30
Title Synchronise with Run Control (Stability checks)
Terminate
31 to 40
41
User Stages
Enable Hydraulics
42 User Comms Suspend 1
43 User Comms Normal 1
44 User Comms Suspend 2
45 User Comms Normal 2
Description Wait to achieve stability (via Stabilise command to run control task) for temperatures, pressure rate of change. Upon achieving stability, wait for stability to be held for a userconfigurable time. Proceed to the stage 18 (Proof runs).
Ensure the run control sequence terminates. Return to stage 1 (Idle).
Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality.
Command prover to turn on the compact prover piston hydraulics (via Enable hydraulics command to run control task) Proceed to stage 9 (Non-proving stream FCV track) or stage 16 (Temperature / Pressure Stability) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty
Suspends the prover / stream communications. Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality.
Re-enables the prover / stream communications. Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality.
Suspends the prover / stream communications. Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality.
Re-enables the prover / stream communications. Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality.
B.2.5.3
Prove Sequence Abort Index
Table B-16 shows the abort values for a prove sequence.
Table B-16. Prove Sequence Abort Index
Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Display OP ABORT Not Used PS TELEM FAIL RUN CTL BUSY METER NO FLOW RUN CTL ABORT ILLEGAL PULSES ANY TELEM FAIL NPS PRV I-VLV OPEN PS PRV I-VLV CLOSED PS STR O-VLV OPEN PRV I-VLV CLOSED PRV O-VLV CLOSED
Description Operator Requested Abort
Proving Stream Telemetry Fail Run Control Task Busy No Flow at Meter Run Control Task Aborted More than one stream has raw pulses enabled. Non Proving Stream Telemetry Fail Non Proving Stream Prover Valve Not Closed Proving Stream Prover Offtake Valve Not Open Proving Stream Outlet Valve Not Closed Prover Inlet Valve Not Open Prover Outlet Valve Not Open
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-53
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Value 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Display PS IN MAINT FBAL TIMEOUT FBAL NO NPS ON LINE FBAL NO NPS IN AUTO FBAL HOLD FAIL PS I-ISL-VLV CLOSED PS O-ISL-VLV CLOSED PS P-ISL-VLV CLOSED PEER STATUS STANDBY
Description Proving Stream Is In Maintenance Mode Flow Balance Timeout Flow Balance Error - No Non Proving Streams On-line Flow Balance Error - No Non Proving Streams In Auto Flow Balance Error - Stability Not Achieved Proving Stream Inlet Isolation Valve Not Open Proving Stream Header Isolation Valve Not Open Proving Stream Prover Isolation Valve Not Open Unit is in standby mode when peer-to-peer is configured
B.2.6 Prover Run Control Stages
The Run Control sequence is specific to the type of prover (such as a bi-direction or uni-directional [ball] prover, a compact prover, or a master meter). The Run Control sequence initiates the prove runs and performs the calculations that produce a K-factor and meter factor when the runs complete.
Normally the sequence runs when commanded by the Prove Sequence at stage 18 (Perform Proof Run). However, you can initiate it from the S600+ front panel display or (by using custom control) from elsewhere.
The Prover Run sequence below shows the default stage sequencing for a typical compact prove.
Table B-17. Compact Prover Run Control Stages
Stage 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 21 17 20
19
Display IDLE INITIALISE AWAIT HYD CMD WAIT READY AWAIT STAB CMD WAIT STAB AWAIT RUN CMD CONTROL PLENUM PRE FLIGHT AVG LAUNCH WAIT 1ST HIT WAIT 2ND HIT PASS CALCS RETRIEVE RUN CALCS AVG CALCS STD POST RUN STD RPT CHECKS CHECK RUNS EXCEEDED FINAL AVG
Description Halted: idle Initialise run data Halted: await Enable Hydraulics command Wait for the Ready signal (piston upstream) Halted: await Stabilise command Wait until stability is achieved Halted: await start runs command Balance the plenum pressure Average tmp/prs etc prior to launch Issue Run command Wait detector first hit Wait detector second hit Perform pass calculations Return piston to upstream (if another pass go to stage 9) Perform run calculations Perform run average calculations No action Perform repeatability checks (if success go to stage 19) Check runs exceeded (if yes go to stage 18 else stage 8)
Perform final average calculations
B-54
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 22
23
24 18
Display MF DEVIATION CHECKS
WAIT REJECT COMMAND
REPORT STAGE FINAL
Description
Perform meter factor deviation checks.
Note: This stage is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation) and you select "Product Table with History" when you create your configuration.
Allow a time-out for rejecting the current prove. If the timeout elapses then print the proof report.
This stage only occurs if you configure the meter normal flow rate to value great than zero.
Note: This stage is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation).
Generates the proof report.
Halted: final await Terminate/Reprove command.
You can also enable user stages on the PC Setup Run Data screen. These invoke a LogiCalc which you can edit to provide user specific logic as the prove progresses. Example LogiCalcs are included in the C:\Users\<username>\Config600 3.3\lclib\prover directory. Copy one of these to the C:\Users\<username>\Config600 3.3\Configs\Project\LogiCalc directory so that you can edit it to be compatible with your configuration and then download it to the S600+ with the configuration.
Notes:
You can enable user stages by editing a configuration using the System Editor.
The displays showing the detector hit only update during a prove. They cannot be used independently for testing the hardware.
B.2.6.1
Run Control Stage Description
Table B-18 shows all the stages of a Run Control sequence.
Table B-18. Compact Run Control Stages
Run Stage 1
Description
Idle
Wait for the Initialise command to start the run control sequence. Proceed to next stage only if the prove is permitted (that is, the run control stage is `idle' or `final' and the available signal is zero). The available signal is normally assigned to a digital input which may be connected to a valve or a key-switch.
Initialise Run Data
Zero down all run data and arrays. Proceed to next stage.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-55
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Run Stage 2 3 4 5
6
Description
Wait Prior to Enabling the Hydraulics
Issue hardware command to enable hydraulics, then proceed to the next stage. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued.
Wait Prover Ready Signal
Wait for the prover ready (upstream) signal to be set (indicating the piston is in the upstream position). When set, proceed to the next stage. Abort:
If ready wait timer expires. If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued.
Wait Prior To Stability Checks
Wait for Stabilise command then proceed to next stage. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If Terminate command is issued.
Wait Stability
If stability override is selected, ignore the checks and proceed to the next stage. Set stability wait timer running. Continuously monitor deviations for:
prover inlet pressure vs. prover outlet pressure meter pressure vs. prover inlet pressure meter pressure vs. prover outlet pressure prover inlet temperature vs. prover outlet temperature meter temperature vs. prover inlet temperature meter temperature vs. prover outlet temperature Continuously monitor (over 5-second periods) rates of change for: prover inlet pressure prover outlet pressure prover inlet temperature prover outlet temperature meter flowrate Proceed to next stage when stability is achieved. Abort: If stability wait timer expires, that is stability not achieved. If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If Terminate command is issued.
Hold Stability
If stability override is selected, ignore the checks and proceed to the next stage. Set stability hold timer running. Check that stability is maintained for the timer period by repeating stability checks from stage 5. Proceed to next stage when stability hold timer expires. Abort:
If any of the stability checks fail. If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued.
B-56
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Run Stage 7 8
9
Description
Wait Prior to Starting the Runs
Wait for the Start Runs command. Proceed to next stage. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued.
Control Plenum Pressure
Set pass number = 1, increment run number. Set plenum timer running. Adjust plenum pressure if necessary. The adjustment can be ignored by setting the plenum timer to zero.
Inputs: prover pressure, plenum pressure (psig) Constants: R (such as 3.5 for 8" prover), N2K (such as 60
psig), and tolerance (such as 2 psig) Formula: required pressure = prover pressure / R + N2K.
o if plenum pressure > (required pressure + tolerance) then open the vent solenoid.
o if plenum pressure < (required pressure - tolerance) then open the charge solenoid (timeout if N2 bottle has suspected low pressure).
o if plenum pressure < (required pressure + tolerance) and plenum pressure > (required pressure tolerance) then proceed to next stage.
Outputs: charge solenoid and vent solenoid (digital outputs)
Abort: If pressure not achieved within timeout period. If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If the Terminate command is issued.
Pre-flight Average
Average all stream and prover variables which serve as inputs into the calculations.
Note:
The system would normally sample and average data during the period between detector switches. However, if this period is very short or if the mechanical arrangement of the hardware (such as a prover-mounted densitometer) makes the measured values unreliable, they can be sampled at this point instead. Trigger the sampling mechanism by specifying the number of samples (to a maximum of 3000). If the number of samples is zero then proceed to the next stage.
Check that stability is maintained while averaging unless stability override is selected. Abort:
If number of samples is greater than 3000. If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If Terminate command is issued.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-57
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Run Stage 10
11 12
13 14
Description
Launch (Run)
Reset internal prover hardware. Set the launch timer running. Set the run digital output when the hardware indicates ready. When the prover ready (upstream) signal clears proceed to the next stage. Abort:
If ready signal doesn't clear within launch timeout period. If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If Terminate command is issued.
Wait Detector 1st Hit
Set switch timer running uses flight timer value. Proceed to next stage when detects hit 1. Abort:
If flight timer expires. If switch sequence error. If pulse lock is lost (if PIM) If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If Terminate command is issued.
Wait Detector 2nd Hit
Set flight timer running. Average all stream and prover variables (which serve as inputs into the calculations) to activate set the number of samples required to zero (see stage 9). Check stability is maintained for this period between detectors by repeating the stability checks from stage 5. Proceed to next stage when detects hit 2. Abort:
If stability checks fail. If flight timer expires. If switch sequence error. If number of samples is greater than 3000. If pulse lock is lost (if PIM) If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If Terminate command is issued.
Pass Calculations
Run the calculations for this pass and store the results. Abort:
If very few pulses or very short flight time. If calculations fail.
Retrieve
Clear the run digital output signal. Set retrieve timer running. Wait for the prover ready (upstream) signal. If the required number of passes has been performed then go to stage 15. If more passes are required then go to stage 9 for the next pass. Abort:
If retrieve timer expires. If the prove is no longer permitted. If the base volume has changed. If terminate command is issued.
B-58
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Run Stage 15 16 17
18
19 20 21
Description
Run Calculations
Perform the end of run calculations. Proceed to the next stage if all the calculations are valid. Abort if there is a calculation failure (such as the K-factor is out of range).
Run Average Calculations
Average the individual run data either for the runs so far or the last n runs (where n is the required number of good runs) and store the results. Proceed to stage 21 (Post Run Logic).
Repeatability Checks
If the required number of runs has not been performed, then proceed to stage 20. If the required number of runs (n) has been performed, then check each of the last n run's K-factor against the average. If the K-factors are within tolerance, then proceed to final calculations stage 19 (Final Average Calculations). If the Kfactors are not within tolerance, proceed to stage 20 to check maximum runs.
Wait Terminate/Reprove Command
Wait for the operator or supervisory computer to issue the run control command to terminate the proof or to start a re-prove. If the command is Initialise then proceed to stage 1 (Initialize Run Data) to start a re-prove. If the command is Terminate then disable the hydraulics and proceed to stage 0 (Idle).
Final Average Calculations
Average the run data for the n good runs. Calculate the final K-factor and meter factor. Print the final proof report. Proceed to stage 22.
Maximum Runs
If the maximum number of runs has been exceeded then proceed to stage 18. Otherwise, proceed to stage 8 to start the next run.
Perform Meter Factor Deviation Checks
Perform tolerance tests (calculated meter factor versus initial base meter factor: maximum deviation of 0.25% and calculated meter factor versus average of saved historical meter factors: maximum deviation of 0.1%) Only valid meter factors at normal flow rate are incorporated in the historical database. When the limits from either test exceeds the meter factor they are not entered in the historical database. Proving reports are annotated as "ABORTED" with cause of failure stated. Proceed to stage 20 if any of the tolderance tests fila. Proceed to next stage. Note: This stage is performed only if you configure the meter
normal flow rate to a value greater than zero (Aramcostyle linearisation) and you select "Product Table with History" when you create your configuration.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-59
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Run Stage 22
23
Description
Await for Current Prove to be Rejected
You can reject the current prove results within a predefined timeout. Print report when timer expires. Abort if the prove is rejected. Proceed to stage 18. Note: This stage is performed only if you configure the meter
normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation).
Post Run Logic
No action. Proceed to stage 17 (Repeatability Checks).
B.2.7 Run Stage Abort Index
Following an abort the program displays a value in the Run Control Abort Index display.
Value 0 1 2 3
4
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14
15 16
17 18 19
Table B-19. Run Stage Abort Index
Display NULL OPERATOR READY TIMEOUT SW1 TIMEOUT
SW2 TIMEOUT
STAB WAIT STAB HOLD AVG CALC PASS CALC FULL CALC RUNS EXCEEDED SS ERROR PLS LOCK LOST
Description Not used Operator abort Prover ready timeout, piston upstream signal not set Switch 1 timeout (the switch was not hit within the predicted time). To resolve, check wiring; set pre-switch volume to 0; or check that raw pulse bus frequency is greater than 0. Switch 2 timeout (the switch was not hit within the predicted time). To resolve, check wiring; set pre-switch volume to 0; or check that raw pulse bus frequency is greater than 0. Note: If the flow computer does not see SW2, check the raw pulse bus. Temperature/Pressure/Flowrate wait stability timeout Temperature/Pressure/Flowrate hold stability timeout Average calculation error - number of samples exceeds 3000 Not used An error occurred when performing a run calculation; see the Run Stage Calculation Index Maximum number of runs exceeded Detector switch sequence error Pulse interpolator module lock lost
IO FAIL NULL DATA
BVOL CHANGED KF/MF RANGE
PLENUM CTL PLENUM CONFIG LAUNCH TIMEOUT
I/O module failed to respond to prove request
Pass calculation fail, no pulses or flight time very short. This can occur when noise/signal bounce affects the switch input. Adjust the switch delay.
Base volume changed during prove runs
K-factor or meter factor out of range, even if alarms not configured. To resolve, check the high and low limits for the meter factor, the K-factor, and pulse count objects.
Fail to achieve in range plenum pressure timeout
Plenum pressure config invalid
Launch timeout
B-60
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Value 20 21 22 23
Display RETRIEVE TIMEOUT UNAVAIL INV CALC MF DEV INVALID
Description Retrieve timeout, ready signal not set Prover unavailable Unsupported volume/mass calculations Failed during meter factor deviation checks
B.2.8 Run Stage Calculation Index
The Run Stage Calculation Index shows the current prove run calculation. If the calculations cause an abort this value indicates which calculation failed.
Value 0 1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
Table B-20. Run Stage Calculation Index
Display IDLE CTSP CPSP
CPLP CPLM CTLP CTLM PRV SVOL/GVOL MTR GVOL/PRV MASS
MTR SVOL/MTR/MASS K-FACTOR METER FACTOR FLOWRATE
Description
No calculation errors
The calculation to determine the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the steel at the prover (CTSp) failed because the CTSP value is less than 0.5 or greater than 1.5
The calculation to determine the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the steel at the prover (CPSp) failed because the modulus of elasticity or wall thickness is 0 and the CPSp value is less than 0.5 or greater than 1.5
The calculation to determine the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the prover (CPLp) failed because of low density
The calculation to determine the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the meter (CPLm) failed because of low density
The calculation to determine the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid at the prover (CTLp) failed because of low density
The calculation to determine the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid at the meter (CTLm) failed because of low density
The calculation to determine the gross standard volume at the prover (GSVp) failed; no error checks occurred.
The calculation to determine the indicated volume at the meter (IVM) failed. For gross volume, this was due either to no Kfactor or a pulse count less than 1.0. For prover mass, this was due to lack of a value for gross volume at the prover or a pulse count less than or equal to zero.
The calculation to determine the indicated standard voume at the meter (IVSM) failed because no error checks occurred, no K-factor was available, or the pulse count was less than 1.0
The calculation to determine the K-factor failed because the value is outside low/high alarm limits
The calculation to determine the Meter factor failed because the value is outside low/high alarm limits
The calculation to determine the flowrate failed because the CTLm or the CPLM is less than or equal to 0
B.2.9 Prove/Stream Data
The prover computer reads the following data from the stream under prove:
Stream Temperature (in use)
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-61
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stream Pressure (in use) Stream Standard Density (in use) Alpha Constant K0 Alpha Constant K1 Alpha Constant K2 Equilibrium Vapour Pressure Meter factor (in use) K-factor (in use) CTSm (in use) CPSm (in use) Flowrate Minimum Flowrate Maximum FCV Setpoint FCV Output Reference Temperature Meter Density (in use) FCV Auto/Manual Status FCV Tracking Status Volume Correction Rounding Status Volume Correction Units Selection Volume Correction Product Type Volume Correction CPL Option Volume Correction Product Subtype Volume Correction Density Type K-factor Units Normal Meter Flow Rate Initial Base Meter Factor Initial Base Meter Factor Time Stamp Base Meter Factor Linearisation Points Historical Meter Factors Historical Meter Factors Time Stamps
If the prove completes successfully, the following prove data transfers to the stream, but is not used until you accept the data at the stream.
Proved K-factor Proved Meter Factor Proved Turbine Frequency Proved Flowrate Proved Meter Temperature Proved Meter Pressure Historical Meter Factors
B-62
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Historical Meter Factors Time Stamp Proved Meter Factor Acceptance Flag
B.2.10 Prove Reports
The system provides two reports, volume or mass K-factor. Which report generates depends on the K-factor units, pulses/volume, or pulses/mass.
Following are two customized proof reports:
=============================================================================================
1
METER PROOF REPORT
06/08/2013 09:58:40
=============================================================================================
STREAM ON PROOF PROVING RATE
: 0 :
0.000 m3/h
STANDARD DENSITY
:
BASE VOLUME
:
STREAM TEMPERATURE
:
PROVER TEMP
:
0.000 kg/m3 0.000 m3 0.000 Deg.C 0.000 Deg.C
STREAM PRESSURE : 0.000 barg
PROVER PRESS
: 0.000 barg
TRIAL NO.
STREAM
TEMP
PRESSURE
(Deg.C) (barg)
PROVER
TEMP
PRESSURE
(Deg.C) (barg)
STANDARD DENSITY (kg/m3)
METER
PULSES FLOWRATE K-FACTOR
(
) (m3/h) (pls/m3)
1
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
2
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
3
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
4
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
5
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
6
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
7
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
8
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
9
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
10
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
11
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
12
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
AVE
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0
0.0
CTLM
CPLM
CTSP
CPSP
1
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
2
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
3
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
4
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
5
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
6
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
7
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
8
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
9
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
10
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
11
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
12
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
AVE
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
CTLP 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
CPLP 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
FTIME 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
CURRENT K-FACTOR NEW K-FACTOR NEW METER FACTOR REPEATABILITY
:
0.00 pls/m3
:
0.00 pls/m3
: 0.000000
: 0.000000 %
============================================================================================= =============================================================================================
========================================================================
2
PROVING REPORT
Emerson Process Management
(0)OFFICIAL (0)UNOFFICIAL (0)ABORTED
LOCATION :
AAAAAAA
DATE/TIME : MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
METER MANUFACTURER: METER MODEL:
AAAAAAA AAAAAAA
PROVER MANUFACTURER: AAAAAAA PROVER SERIAL NUMBER: AAAAAAA
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-63
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
METER SERIAL NUMBER: METER SIZE (mm): NOMINAL K-FACTOR: METER TAG NUMBER:
AAAAAAA 0.000 0.000 AAAAAAA
PRIMARY FLOW COMPUTER: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
LIQUID: A CRUDE OBSERVED DENSITY: 0.000 kg/m3 AT 0.00 Deg.C = 0.000
kg/m3 AT 0.000 Deg.C
TRIAL NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 AVE
PULSES TOTAL
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
TOTAL TIME S
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
PRESS PROVER
barg 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
METER barg
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
TEMP PROVER Deg.C 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
METER Deg.C
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
REPEATABILITY FOR LAST 10 TRIALS = 0.000 %
A. TEMP. CORRECTION FACTOR FOR LIQUID IN PROVER (CTLp)
B. PRESS. CORRECTION FACTOR FOR LIQUID IN PROVER (CPLp)
C. COMBINED CORRECTION FACTOR FOR PROVER
(CCFp)
D. GROSS STANDARD VOLUME FOR PROVER
(GSVp)
E. INDICATED METER VOLUME
(IVm)
F. TEMP. CORRECTION FACTOR FOR LIQUID IN METER (CTLm)
G. PRESS. CORRECTION FACTOR FOR LIQUID IN METER (CPLm)
H. COMBINED CORRECTION FACTOR FOR METER
(CCFm)
I. GROSS STANDARD VOLUME FOR METER
(GSVm)
J. AVG. METER FLOW RATE
K. METER FACTOR @ PROVING FLOW RATE
L. METER FACTOR @ NORMAL METER FLOW RATE OF 0.000 m3/h 0.000
METER FACTOR TEST RESULTS (%):
1) 0.00
2) 0.00
M. PROVER MASS
N. METER MASS
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Sm3 0.000 m3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Sm3 0.000 m3/h 0.000
0.000 tonne 0.000 tonne
HISTORICAL DATA OF METER FACTORS @ NORMAL METER FLOW RATE OF 0.000 m3/h INITIAL BASE METER FACTOR (DATE: MM/DD/YY) = 0.000
DATE:
MM/DD/YY
FACTOR:
0.000
DEVIATION(±): 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
DATE:
MM/DD/YY
FACTOR:
0.000
DEVIATION(±): 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
PROVED FOR: ______________________ BY : _____________________ DATE: ____________
WITNESSED BY : ______________________________________________ DATE: ____________
TRIAL M.F. MFt
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
================================================================================
B.2.11 Proving Calculations
This section provides information on various calculations used in the prove procedure.
The calculations are for volume or mass K-factor and the choice is determined by the K-factor units, pulses/volume or pulses/mass.
Average Method The "average method" option steers how the system performs the final averaging:
The Meter Factor option calculates a meter factor for each run and takes the average of these to arrive at the final meter factor.
B-64
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
The K-factor option calculates a K-factor for each run and takes the average of these to arrive at the final K-factor.
The Pulses option takes the average of the pulses, temperature, pressure, and other variables and performs a final set of calculations using this average data to arrive at the final meter and K-factor.
Options 1 and 2 are equivalent to the "average meter factor" method used for API Ch.12 Section 2 Part 3 Proving reports. Option 3 is equivalent to the `average data' method.
Standard References The prover volume correction calculations correspond to those used by the meter under prove, in which the system transfers the calculation steering variables from the stream.
Name Averaging Calcs Stability Calcs Correction Factor (CTLm/CTLp) Correction Factor (CPLm/CPLp) Correction Factor (CTSp/CPSp) K-factor/Flowrate K-factor Deviation K-factor Deviation Statistical Method Meter Factor
Standard Reference General mathematic principles General mathematic principles Corresponds to Meter calculations Corresponds to Meter calculations API Ch 12 API Ch 12 API Ch 4 NORSOK I-105 Annex F
API Ch 12
B.2.11.1
Formulae: General
At the end of a pass, the system calculates a K-factor, flowrate, and frequency based on the uncorrected prover base volume and samples the measured inputs either prior to the piston launch or whilst the piston is between detector hits (the default).
The measured values are averaged for the required number of passes (default of five passes and a maximum of 39 passes) to provide values for the run calculations. (For more than 39 passes, refer to the latest calculation table document available for Config600 Pro users only.) The run's K-factor and flowrate are then re-calculated using the pass average meter pulse count (corrected to standard conditions) and the prover base volume (corrected to standard conditions). Final K-factor and flowrate are averaged run values from the required number of good runs (a default of five runs and a maximum of 12 runs).
B.2.11.2 Formulae: Averaging Calculations
Pass Average Data (Sampled during each Pass)
X
pass
=
X inst Samples
where:
Xpass Xinst
is the average value of the variable for a single pass is the instantaneous sample value of the variable being averaged
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-65
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Samples is the number of samples taken during the pass
The sampled variables (Xinst) are: Prover temperature Prover pressure Meter temperature Meter pressure Meter vapour pressure Meter standard density
Pass Average Frequency (Hz)
FREQpass
=
PC t
where:
FREQpass PC t
is the average meter frequency for a single pass is the pass pulse count is the pass flight time (s)
Pass Average Flowrate
FR pass
=
BV t
× 3600
where:
FRpass BV t
is the average prover flowrate for a single pass is the prover base volume at standard conditions is the pass flight time (s)
Pass K-factor
KFpass
=
PC BV
where:
KFpass PC BV
is the K-factor for a single pass is the pass pulse count is the prover base volume at standard conditions
Run Average Data (Over Number of Passes)
X run =
X pass N pass
where:
Xrun
the average value of the variable for N passes
Xpass the value of the variable for a single pass
Npass the number of passes
The run average variables are: Pulse count Flight time
B-66
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Prover temperature Prover pressure Meter temperature Meter pressure Meter vapour pressure Meter standard density Meter frequency
Final Average Data (Over Consecutive Good Runs)
X final =
X run N run
where:
Xfinal the final average value of the variable for N consecutive
good runs
Xrun
the value of the variable for a single run
Nrun
the number of consecutive good runs
The final average variables are: Pulse count Flight time Prover temperature (average of inlet and outlet) Prover pressure (average of inlet and outlet) Meter temperature Meter pressure Vapour pressure Standard density Prover density Meter density Meter frequency Prover flowrate Alpha Prover beta Meter beta CTSm CPSm CTLm CPLm CTSp CPSp CTLp CPLp Prover standard volume Meter gross volume Meter standard volume Prover mass Meter mass K-factor Meter factor
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-67
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
B.2.11.3 Formulae: Stability Calculations
Meter/Prover Discrepancy Checks X diff = X A - X B where: XA, XB are the variables being compared
The variables compared are: Prover temperature Meter temperature Prover pressure Meter pressure
Variable Rate of Change
X rate
=
X new - X old Period
where:
Xrate Xnew Xold Period
the rate of the variable the new sample value the previous sample value the sampling interval
The variables compared are: Meter temperature Meter pressure Meter flowrate
B.2.11.4 Formulae: Correction Factor (CTLm/CTLp)
Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on the Liquid
These factors are calculated according to the product, using the same calculations as the meter under prove.
B.2.11.5 Formulae: Correction Factor (CPLm/CPLp)
Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on the Liquid
These factors are calculated according to the product, using the same calculations as the meter under prove.
B.2.11.6 Formulae: Correction Factor (CTSp/CPSp)
Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on the Prover Steel
CTSp = (1+(Tp - Tb)Y1) ×(1+(Tamb - Tb)Y2)
where:
Tp
Temperature of the liquid at the prover (°C or °F or °K)
Tb
Base Temperature (°C or °F or °K)
Y1
Area Thermal Coefficient of Cubic expansion of the prover
tube (/°C or /°F or /°K dependent on temperature units
selected)
B-68
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Tamb Ambient Temperature (°C or °F or °K)
Tcal Calibration Temperature of the prover (°C or °F or °K)
Y2
Linear Thermal Coefficient of Cubic expansion of the prover
rod (/°C or /°F or /°K dependent on temperature units
selected)
Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on the Prover Steel
CPSp = 1 + (Pp - Pb) D/Et
where:
Pp
Pressure of the liquid at the prover (barg)
Pb
Base Pressure (barg)
D
Inside diameter of the flow tube (mm)
E
Modulus of elasticity of the flow tube steel (bar)
t
Wall thickness of the prover flow tube (mm)
Note: The average Tp, Pp over the run is used for calculating the correction factors.
B.2.11.7 Formulae: Volume Prover Calculations
Prover Gross Standard Volume (Sm3)
GSVprun = BV × CTLprun × CPLprun × CTSprun × CPSprun
where:
BV
is the entered volume for the prover at standard conditions
CTLprun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid at the prover, using the average prover run temperature
CPLprun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the prover, using the average prover run pressure
CTSprun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the steel at the prover, using the average prover run temperature
CPSprun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the steel at the prover, using the average prover run pressure
Meter Indicated Volume (m3)
IVmrun
=
PC run KFmrun
where:
PCrun KFm
is the run pulse count (pls) is the meter K-factor (pls/m3)
Meter Indicated Standard Volume (Sm3) ISVmrun = IVmrun × CTLm run × CPLm run where:
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-69
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
IVmrun is the indicated volume for the meter
CTLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid at the meter, using the average meter run temperature
CPLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the meter, using the average meter run pressure
Volume K-factor (pls/m3)
KFmrun
=
PC run
×
CTLmrun × GSVp run
CPLmrun
where:
PCrun is the run pulse count (pls)
CTLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid at the meter, using the average meter run temperature
CPLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the meter, using the average meter run pressure
GSVprun is the prover gross standard volume (m3)
Meter Factor MF = GSVprun ISVmrun where: GSVprun is the prover gross standard volume (m3) ISVmrun is the meter indicated standard volume (m3)
Prover Volume Flowrate (m3/h)
VFRp run
=
GSVp run t × CTLmrun × CPLmrun
× 3600
where: GSVprun is the prover gross standard volume (m3)
CTLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid at the meter, using the average meter run temperature
CPLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the meter, using the average meter run pressure
t
is the average pass flight time (s)
B.2.11.8 Formulae: Mass Prover Calculations
Prover Gross Volume (m3) GVprun = BV × CTSp run × CPSprun where:
B-70
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
BV CTSprun
CPSprun
is the entered volume for the prover at standard conditions
is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the steel at the prover, using the average prover run temperature
is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the steel at the prover, using the average prover run pressure
Prover Mass (kg)
Mprun = GVprun × Density
where: GVprun Density
is the prover gross volume (m3) is the density at prover conditions (kg/m3)
Meter Mass (kg)
Mm run
=
PC run KFmrun
where:
PCrun is the run pulse count (pls)
KFmrun is the meter K-factor (pls/kg)
Meter Factor MF = Mprun Mm run where: Mprun is the prover mass (kg) Mmrun is the meter mass (kg)
Mass K-factor (pls/kg)
KFm run
=
PC run Mp run
where:
PCrun is the run pulse count (pls)
Mprun is the prover mass (kg)
Prover Mass Flowrate (kg/h)
MFRprun
=
Mp run t
× 3600
where:
Mprun is the mass for the master meter (kg)
t
is the average pass flight time (s)
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-71
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
B.2.11.9
K-factor Deviation
When the required number of consecutive good runs has been achieved, the program checks each individual run's K-factor (which make up the N consecutive good runs) to see how far it deviates from the average. If any run's K-factor deviates by more than the allowable limit then additional runs are performed and the test is repeated.
When all K-factors for the required runs fall within the deviation limit, then the prove is considered successful and a final average data is calculated. At the same time the program stores the single maximum deviation value (repeatability) of the good run K-factors as an indication of how well the prove fell within the deviation tolerance.
API Ch.4 Method 1 (default)
( ) K dev =
K avg - K run K avg
×100
MX-MN/AVG
( ) K dev =
K max - K min K avg
×100
MX-MN/MX+MN2
( ( ) ) K dev =
K max - K min ×100 K max + K min ÷ 2
MX-MN/MN
( ) K dev =
K max - K min K min
×100
MX-MN/MX*MN
(( )) K dev =
K max - K min K max × K min
×100
MX-AV/AV
( ) K dev =
K max - K avg K avg
×100
AV-MN/AV
( ) K dev =
K avg - K min K avg
×100
where:
Kdev is the K-factor deviation (%) Kavg is the average K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3) Kmin is the minimum K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3) Kmax is the maximum K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3) Krun is the run K-factor being checked (pls/m3)
B-72
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Statistical
K dev
=
200
x
t N-1
x
S N -1 K avg ×
N
where:
Kdev is the K-factor deviation (%) Kavg is the average K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3)
tN-1 is the uncertainty band confidence level, which is a selectable value (95%, 99%, 99.5%, or a user-defined value). NORSOK requires this method (using the student-t distribution) at a recommended value of 95%. API MPMS Ch.4.8 also recommends 95%.
SN-1 is the standard deviation of K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3)
B.2.11.10 Meter Factor Deviation Tests
This section defines Meter Factor Deviation tests. Calculated Meter Factor versus Initial Base Meter Factor
% Deviation Test 1 =
(MFCPFRN Initial Base Meter Factor) (Initial Base Meter Factor)
X 100
where:
MFCPFRN is the calculated meter factor from current prove at normal flow rate.
Maximum deviation of ± 0.25 %.
Calculated Meter Factor versus Average of Previous Historical Meter Factors
% Deviation Test 2 =
(MFCPFRN Average of Previous Meter Factors) (Average of Previous Meter Factors)
X 100
where:
MFCPFRN is the calculated meter factor from current prove at normal flow rate.
Maximum deviation of ± 0.1 %.
B.3 Master Meter Prover Gas and Liquid
The primary function of the Master Meter is to provide an accurate "meter factor" value for the proving stream. The S600+ then uses this value to calibrate all other meters.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-73
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
The proving stream receives pulses from its meter and generates a pulse train output, which represents the number of pulses received. The Master Meter counts these pulses during a proof run and also counts the pulses from its own meter (the master). When the proof run completes, the S600+ calculates a Meter Factor for the stream, based on the Master Meter's Meter Factor and the ratio of the correct stream output pulse count to the Master Meter's turbine pulse count.
Caution It is extremely unlikely that any one S600+ configuration would contain all the settings discussed in this section. For that reason, several sample configurations demonstrate the settings.
Two components enable you to control the prove:
Prove sequence, a station-based function which sets up the prove environment, and
Run control, a prover-based function which drives the prover hardware, counts pulses, and performs the K-factor calculations.
Following a successful prove, the system verifies the stream normal flow rate value:
If the normal flow rate is set to a value greater than zero (Aramcostyle linearisation), the run control waits for a predefined amount of time for you to reject the current prove results. If a prove is rejected, the proving report is annotated as "ABORTED". If the time-out elapses, the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved and the data is automatically used in the subsequent calculations.
If the normal flow rate is zero (non-Aramco-style linearisation), the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved, but does not use the data until it is accepted either locally at the S600+ or via a supervisory computer.
When the prove runs complete, the sequence offers you the option of re-running the prove or terminating, at which point (if configured) the sequence restores the valves to their pre-prove state.
Notes:
Aramco-style linearisation is only applicable to Liquid Master Meter proving. Gas Master Meter proving will always use the nonAramco style linearisation.
The prove sequence downloads both a K-factor and a meter factor. Applications typically use the original K-factor from the meter calibration report and update the meter factor, which may be a fixed value or derived from a linearisation process. Alternately, the meter factor can remain unchanged and the K-factor (fixed or linearised) updated.
The meter factor deviation tests and the historical meter factor database are only applicable to Liquid Master Meter proving.
B-74
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
B.3.1
The meter factor deviation tests and the historical meter factor database are only supported for "local" streams (part of the same configuration with the prover), if you configure the stream normal flow rate to a value greater than zero and you select "Product Table with History" when you create your configuration.
You define a ticket as Official or Unofficial when you configure a prove. This selection applies to both the Aramco-style and nonAramco-style linearisation.
Following an Official prove, the prove sequence is determined by the Aramco / non-Aramco style linearisation selection.
Following the Unofficial prove, the prove sequence does not download the prove results to the stream being proved. This is typically used to determine an approximate K-Factor / Meter Factor before an official prove takes place or when maintenance activities are being performed on the site.
The Official/Unofficial selection displays in the report header.
Master Meter/Stream combinations
The following tables show the supported liquid and gas Master Meter / Stream combinations:
Table B-21. Master Meter/Stream Combinations Liquid
Liquid
Stream Meter Turbine (V) USM (V) Coriolis (V)
Turbine (V)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Master Meter
USM (V)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Coriolis (V)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Coriolis (M)
No
No
No
Notes: 1. (V) represents volume pulse-based meter input
2. (M) represents mass pulse-based meter input
Coriolis (M) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Table B-22. Master Meter/Stream Combinations Gas
Gas Stream Meter
Turbine (V) USM (V) Coriolis (V)
Master Meter
Turbine (V)
Yes
Yes*
Yes*
USM (V)
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Coriolis (V)
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Coriolis (M)
No
No
No
Notes: 1. (V) represents volume pulse-based meter input
2. (M) represents mass pulse-based meter input
Coriolis (M) No No No No
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-75
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
B.3.2
3. AGA6 Gas Master Metering is based on Volume comparison
4. Coriolis Meter must be configured to provide volume not mass flow rate
*. This combination needs the Master Meter and Stream Meter in separate stations.
Inputs/Outputs
For master meter proving the S600+ requires the following hardware: A CPU module (P152+) An I/O module (P144) A Prover module (P154) Inputs Master meter proving normally has the following inputs:
Prover Pressure Prover Temperature Master Meter Pulses Stream Raw Pulses
Prove Enable Status
4-20mA ADC 4-20mA PRT Pulse Input Raw Pulse Input Note: Pulse input must be on
Prover module (P154). Digital Input
Outputs Master meter proving has no outputs.
B.3.3 Communications
Using the Modbus protocol, a slave link provides communications with the stream flow computers.
To set up the link at the prover (which is the master), select Tech/Engineer > Communications > Assignment > Prover Master Lin > Seq Enable.
To set up the Modbus address, select Tech/Engineer > Communications > Assignment > Prover Master Lin > Seq Addr.
Prover/Stream Link
Modbus RTU Master Prover/Stream Link
Default Setting
Serial RS485 - Comm 5 9600 8 bits No Parity 1 stop bit Address = 1 (front panel)
To set up the link at the stream (which is the slave), select Tech/Engineer > Communications > Assignment > Next > Prover Slave Lin.
Note: You can reset the ports, baud rate, number of bits, and parity values through the S600+'s front panel.
B.3.4 Pulse Measurement
The primary function of the prover is to calculate an accurate K-factor
B-76
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
or meter factor value for the meter under prove. The master meter does this by comparing pulses from the stream meter with those from the master meter.
The stream flow computer receives pulses from its meter and transmits a pulse train output (`Raw Pulse Output') which represents the number of pulses received, including bad pulse correction. The prove sequence commands the selected stream to turn on its `Raw Pulse Output', which allows the prover computer to monitor the pulses from the meter. The prover counts pulses during a proof run, and corrects the count for temperature and pressure.
During the proof run the prover also counts the pulses received from its own master meter and the count is corrected for temperature and pressure.
When the proof run completes, the prover calculates the stream's Kfactor from the master meter K-factor and the ratio of the corrected stream output pulse count and the master meter pulse count.
For a master meter prove, a run's duration is determined by counting a set number of pulses (typically 10000), by the flow for a set volume or mass of liquid, or by the flow of a liquid for a set period of time.
Note: The electrical diagram for the Prover module shows a Raw Pulse Output, but this is not available. You cannot use the Raw Pulse Output to pass pulses input to the Prover module to the Raw Pulse Input.
Pulse Gating The Prover module independently and synchronously snapshots and counts the master meter pulses together with the raw pulse inputs from the meter under prove.
Pulse Interpolation Use pulse interpolation when the pulse count is low (typically less than 10,000 pulses per run).
For master metering proving, you can use a Pulse Interpolation Module (PIM) and enter an interpolation factor corresponding to the PIM setting into the prover S600+ using a keypad.
A pulse lock lost digital input is provided to indicate whether the PIM pulses are valid. The input is active when the PIM output is considered good.
B.3.5 Prove Sequence and Control
Two components enable you to control the prove:
Prove sequence, a station-based function which sets up the prove environment, and
Run control sequence, a prover-based function which drives the hardware, counts pulses, and performs the K-factor and meter factor calculations.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-77
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
The S600+'s front panel display provides the following commands you can use to control and monitor the two prove control tasks (Operator > Station > Sequence Ctl):
Display SEQ CTL SEQ STREAM NO.
SEQ STAGE INDEX SEQ STAGE PREV
SEQ ABORT INDEX RUN CTL Run permit Run stage index Run abort index
Description
Operator commands for sequence control (outer loop)
Enter the designated stream number to be proved.
Note: For local streams, this is the logical stream number. For remote streams, this is the slave number in the Modbus master map. For example, if the first slave has a Modbus address of 22, this is stream 1. If the second slave in the master map has an address of 33, this is stream 2.
Shows current sequence stage as the sequence progresses.
Indicates the sequence stage immediately prior to the current stage. If an abort occurs, use this value to help identify the source of the abort.
In the event of a sequence error, an abort reason index displays here.
Operator commands for proof run (inner loop)
Interlock required for starting proof run.
Shows current proof run stage as the sequence progresses.
In the event of a proof run sequence error, an abort reason index displays here.
Following a successful prove, the system verifies the stream normal flow rate value:
If the normal flow rate is set to a value greater than zero (Aramcostyle linearisation), the run control waits for a predefined amount of time for you to reject the current prove results. If a prove is rejected, the proving report is annotated as "ABORTED". If the time-out elapses, the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved and the data is automatically used in the subsequent calculations.
If the normal flow rate is zero (non-Aramco-style linearisation), the prove sequence downloads the prove results to the stream being proved, but does not use the data until it is accepted either locally at the S600+ or via a supervisory computer.
You then have two options for accepting the prove results:
If you select ACCEPT, the currently running batch is retroactively adjusted with the new factor.
If you select ACCEPT NO ADJUST, no adjustment is performed on the currently running batch.
B.3.5.1
Default Prove Sequence Stages
The prover sequence functions in stages. Table B-23 shows the default stages for a typical application's normal, reprove, and abort situations.
B-78
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
If an abort occurs either automatically or by operator command then the prove sequence stage changes to Aborted. No further action is taken until the computer receives either a Continue command to initiate a re-prove or a Terminate command to finish the sequence.
Table B-23. Default Prove Sequence Stages
Stage 0 1 2 16 18 19 20
Display IDLE INITIALISE PULSES ON PRV FLOW/T/P STAB PROOF RUN KF DOWNLOAD AWAIT REPROVE
26 ABORTED STAGE
Description Halted: idle, await Start command Initialise Turn proving stream pulses on Hold stable temperature, pressure and flowrate Perform proof runs (execute Run Control stages) K-factor and data download Halted: prove runs complete, await Continue/Terminate command Halted: sequence aborted, await Continue/Terminate command
Continue (Reprove) 29 RE STAB CHECKS 18 PROOF RUN
Hold stable temperature, pressure and flowrate Perform proof runs (execute Run Control stages)
Terminate 25 PS PULSES OFF 30 TERMINATE
Turn proving stream raw pulses off Terminate (return to idle)
B.3.5.2
Complete Sequence Stage Descriptions
Table B-24 shows all the stages of a prove sequence.
Stage 0
1
Table B-24. Complete Prove Sequence Stages
Title Idle
Validate + Initialise
Description Wait for a command to start the sequence, then proceed to stage 1 (Validate and Initialise).
Verify: The proving stream is flowing. The proving stream is not in maintenance mode. Telemetry to the proving stream is OK. The prove permit state (run control status) is OK. Initialise: Copy the proving stream meter variables into the proving set. Copy the product stream product data into the proving set. Initialise proof run date (via Initialise command to run control
task). Determine required proof flowrate from current rate (snapshot) or
preset flowrate. Save all FCV settings. Proceed to stage 2 (Pulses On).
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-79
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage Title 2 Pulses On
3 Prover FCV initialise
4 Prover open outlet
5 Non-proving stream close prover inlet
Description Command all online streams to turn pulses off Command proving stream to turn pulses on Wait for pulses to be aligned Proceed to stage 3 (Prover FCV Initialise) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. Set prover FCV manual output to initial output Set prover FCV mode to manual Set proving stream FCV tracking on Set proving stream FCV mode to manual Proceed to stage 4 (Open prover outlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. Command Prover Outlet Valve to open Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 5 (Non-proving stream close prover inlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valve fails to reach position. Command non-proving streams Prover Inlet Valves to close Wait for valves to reach position Proceed to stage 6 (Proving stream open prover inlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position.
B-80
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 6
Title
Proving stream open prover inlet
7 Proving stream close stream outlet
8 Not used
9 Non-proving stream FCVS track
Description Command proving streams Prover Inlet Valve to open Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 7 (Proving stream close stream outlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position. Command proving streams Outlet Valve to close Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 9 (Non-proving stream FCVS track) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position.
Set FCV for non-proving streams to tracking Proceed to stage 10 (Non-proving stream flow balance) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-81
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 10
Title
Non-proving stream flow balance
11 Not used
12 Close suspend
Description Enable flow balancing for non-proving streams Flow error = proving stream flowrate - (selected proof flowrate + offset). If the error is too low then: If there are no on-line streams then go to abort stage. Turn down value = abs (error / no. of on line none proving
streams). For each on line proving stream, new setpoint = current rate - turn
down. If all new set points (for each stream) are within the low flow range then download the new set points and delay for adjustment prior to rechecking the flow error. If any new set point is less than the low flow range then go to stage 12 (operator close) If the error is too high then: If there are no on-line streams then go to abort stage. Turn up value = error / no. of on line none proving streams. For each on line proving stream, new setpoint = current rate +
turn up. If all new set points (for each stream) are within the high flow range then download the new set points and delay for adjustment prior to rechecking the flow error. If any new set point is higher than the low flow range then go to stage 13 (operator open). Proceed to stage 14 if the error is within tolerance (Non-proving stream FCV manual). Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position. If flow balance is not achieved (timeout / hold fails).
Flow balancing wait for operator to close stream Return to flow balancing stage 10 if continue command issued Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position. If flow balance is not achieved (timeout / hold fails).
B-82
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 13
Title
Open suspend
14 Non-proving stream FCVS manual
15 Prover flowrate stability
Description Flow balancing wait for operator to open stream Return to flow balancing stage 10 if continue command issued Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If valves are not correctly aligned. If the valve fails to reach position. If flow balance is not achieved (timeout / hold fails). Set all non-proving stream FCV tracking on Set all non-proving stream FCV mode to manual Proceed to stage 15 (Prover flowrate stability) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. Set prover FCV to selected prove flow rate + offset Set prover FCV mode to auto Set prover FCV tracking to on Hold proving stream flow rate within tolerance for a user configurable time Proceed to stage 16 (Temperature / Pressure Stability) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If stability not achieved.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-83
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 16
17 18
19
20 21 22
Title Synchronise with Run Control (Temperature / pressure stability)
Not used Synchronise with Run Control (Proof runs)
K-factor Download
Await reprove
Not used Proving stream open stream outlet
Description Hold stability for a user-configurable time Proceed to stage 18 (Proof runs) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. If stability not maintained.
Start the prove runs (via Start command to run control task). On success proceed to stage 19 (KF download) Abort: If a run fails (such as a timeout for a sphere switch). If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valves are not correctly aligned. Copy proof K-factor, meter factor, flow rate, and frequency into proving stream data points for subsequent telemetry download. Notes: The stream metering calculations do not use these until
commanded separately. If the historical meter factor option is enabled then the historical
meter factors and deviations arrays are also copied. Proceed to stage 20 (Await reprove) Go to stage 22 (Proving stream open stream outlet) if the Terminate or abort command is issued. Go to stage 29 (Stability Checks) if Continue (Reprove) command is issued.
Command proving stream Outlet Valve to open Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 23 (Proving stream close prover inlet) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If valve fails to reach position.
B-84
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 23
24
25
26 27 28 29 30 31 to 40 41 42
Title Proving stream close prover inlet
Restore FCVS
Proving stream pulses off
Aborted stage
Not used Not used Synchronise with Run Control (Stability checks) Terminate User Stages Not used User Comms Suspend 1
Description Command proving stream Prover Inlet Valve to close Wait for valve to reach position Proceed to stage 24 (Restore FCV) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty. If the valve fails to reach position. Reset FCV's to previous (pre-prove) settings as noted in stage 1 Proceed to stage 25 (Proving stream pulses off) Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream raw pulse output is not switched on. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty Command proving stream to turn pulses off. Wait for the pulses to be turned off Proceed to stage 1 Abort: If an abort command is issued. If proving stream telemetry fails. If prove permit state (run control status) is off. If no flow at proving stream. If proving stream is in maintenance mode. If peer status is not duty An abort condition has occurred. Go to the next relevant stage if the Terminate command is issued. Go to stage 29 (Stability Checks) if Continue (Reprove) command is issued.
Wait to achieve stability (via Stabilise command to run control task) for temperatures, pressure rate of change. Upon achieving stability, wait for stability to be held for a userconfigurable time. Proceed to the stage 18 (Proof runs). Ensure the run control sequence terminates. Return to stage 1 (Idle). Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality.
Suspends the prover / stream communications. Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-85
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 43
Title
User Comms Normal 1
44 User Comms Suspend 2
45 User Comms Normal 2
Description Re-enables the prover / stream communications. Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality.
Suspends the prover / stream communications. Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality.
Re-enables the prover / stream communications. Requires the implementation of the expseq.txt file and a logicalc to perform any specific functionality.
B.3.5.3
Prove Sequence Abort Index
Table B-25 shows the abort values for a prove sequence.
Table B-25. Prove Sequence Abort Index
Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Display OP ABORT Not Used PS TELEM FAIL RUN CTL BUSY METER NO FLOW RUN CTL ABORT ILLEGAL PULSES ANY TELEM FAIL NPS PRV I-VLV OPEN PS PRV I-VLV CLOSED PS STR O-VLV OPEN PRV I-VLV CLOSED PRV O-VLV CLOSED PS IN MAINT FBAL TIMEOUT FBAL NO NPS ON LINE FBAL NO NPS IN AUTO FBAL HOLD FAIL PS I-ISL-VLV CLOSED PS O-ISL-VLV CLOSED PS P-ISL-VLV CLOSED PEER STATUS STANDBY
Description Operator Requested Abort
Proving Stream Telemetry Fail Run Control Task Busy No Flow at Meter Run Control Task Aborted More than one stream has raw pulses enabled. Non Proving Stream Telemetry Fail Non Proving Stream Prover Valve Not Closed Proving Stream Prover Offtake Valve Not Open Proving Stream Outlet Valve Not Closed Prover Inlet Valve Not Open Prover Outlet Valve Not Open Proving Stream Is In Maintenance Mode Flow Balance Timeout Flow Balance Error - No Non Proving Streams On-line Flow Balance Error - No Non Proving Streams In Auto Flow Balance Error - Stability Not Achieved Proving Stream Inlet Isolation Valve Not Open Proving Stream Header Isolation Valve Not Open Proving Stream Prover Isolation Valve Not Open Unit is in standby mode when peer-to-peer is configured
B.3.6 Prover Run Control Stages
The Run Control sequence is specific to the type of prover (such as a ball prover, a compact prover, or a master meter). The Run Control sequence initiates the prove runs and performs the calculations that produce a K-factor and meter factor when the runs are completed.
Normally the sequence runs when commanded by the Prove Sequence at stage 18 (Perform Proof Runs). However, you can initiate it from the S600+ front panel display or (by using custom control) from elsewhere.
The Prover Run sequence below shows the default stage sequences for a typical master meter prove.
B-86
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 0 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 12 10 13 14 15
16
17 11
Table B-26. Prover Run Control Stages
Display IDLE INITIALISE AWAIT STAB CMD WAIT STAB AWAIT RUN CMD START RUN COUNT PULSES RUN CALCS AVG CALCS STD POST RUN STD RPT CHECKS CHECK RUNS EXCEEDED FINAL AVG MF DEVIATION CHECKS
WAIT REJECT COMMAND
REPORT GENERATION FINAL
Description
Halted: idle
Initialise run data
Halted: await Stabilise command
Wait until stability is achieved
Halted: await start runs command
Start the pulse counters
Count the pulses
Perform run calculations
Perform run average calculations
No action
Perform repeatability checks (if success go to stage 14)
Check runs exceeded (if yes go to stage 11 else stage 6)
Perform final average calculations
Perform meter factor deviation checks. Note: This stage applicable to Liquid Master Meter
Proving and is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation) and you select "Product Table with History" when you create your configuration.
Allow a time-out for rejecting the current prove. If the time-out elapses go to the next stage. Note: This stage applicable to Liquid Master Meter
Proving and is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation).
Print the proof report.
Halted: final await Terminate/Reprove command.
You can also enable user stages on the PC Setup Run Data screen. These invoke a LogiCalc which you can edit to provide user-specific logic as the prove progresses. Example LogiCalcs are included in the C:\Users\<username>\Config600 3.3\lclib\prover directory. Copy one of these to the C:\Users\<username>\Config600 3.3\Configs\Project\LogiCalc directory so you edit it to be compatible with your configuration and then download it to the S600+ with the configuration.
Note: You can enable user stages by editing a configuration using the System Editor.
B.3.6.1
Run Control Stage Description
Table B-27 shows all the stages of a Run Control sequence.
Table B-27. Master Meter Prover Run Control Stages
Run Stage Description
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-87
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
B-88
Run Stage 0 1 2 3
4
5 6
Description
Idle
Wait for the Initialise command to start the Run Control sequence. Proceed to next stage only if the prove is permitted (that is, if the Run Control stage is Idle or Final and the available signal is zero; normally, the available signal is assigned to a digital input which may be connected to a valve or a keyswitch).
Initialise Run Data
Zero down all run data and arrays. Proceed to next stage.
Halted: Await Stabilise Command
Wait for Stabilise command then proceed to next stage. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the master meter number has changed. If the Terminate command is issued.
Wait Until Stability Is Achieved
Proceed to next stage if stability override is on. Set stability wait timer running. Continuously monitor deviations for:
meter pressure vs. prover pressure meter temperature vs.prover temperature Continuously monitor (over 5-second periods) rates of change for: prover pressure prover temperature meter flowrate Proceed to next stage when stability is achieved. Abort: If the prove is no longer permitted. If the master meter number has changed. If Terminate command is issued. If stability wait timer expires.
Hold Stability For Entered Period
Proceed to next stage if stability override is on. Set stability hold timer running. Repeat the stability checks from the previous stage to ensure stability is maintained for the given period. Proceed to next stage when stability hold timer expires. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the master meter number has changed. If the Terminate command is issued. If any of the stability checks fail.
Halted: Await Start Runs Command
Wait for Start Runs command then proceed to next stage. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the master meter number has changed. If the Terminate command is issued.
Start Run
Start the pulse counters. Proceed to next stage. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the master meter number has changed. If the Terminate command is issued.
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Run Stage 7
8 9 10
11 13 14
Description
Count Pulses
Set flight timer running. Count and monitor the pulses. Average meter and prover data. Check stability is maintained for duration of the prove run by repeating the stability checks from the wait stability stage. Proceed to next stage when the required number of pulses has been counted, or the required volume/mass has been metered, or the specified run duration has elapsed. Abort:
If the prove is no longer permitted. If the master meter number has changed. If the Terminate command is issued. If master meter K-factor equals 0. If master meter and meter under prove bad pulse
counts differ. If pulse lock is lost (if PIM). If flight timer expires.
Perform Run Calculations
Based on data averaged during the run. Proceed to next stage if calculations are all valid. Abort if there is a calculation failure (such as K-factor out of range).
Perform Run Average Calculations
Average the individual run data over the last n good runs and store the results. Proceed to the next stage.
Perform Repeatability Checks
If the required number of runs has not been performed then proceed to next stage. If the required number of runs has been performed then check each of the last n run's K-factor against the average. If each K-factor is within tolerance then proceed to the Await Reprove/Terminate stage (11).
If any K-factors are outside tolerance and the maximum number of runs has been exceeded then proceed to the Await Reprove/Terminate stage (11), otherwise proceed to the next stage.
Halted: Final - Await Terminate/Reprove Command
End of prove. If: Run control command is Initialise, proceed to Initialise stage 1 (Run Data) Run control command is Terminate, proceed to stage 0 (Idle)
Run control command is Seat Sphere, proceed to the next stage (Seat Sphere).
Check Runs Exceeded
Check the number of runs executed against the maximum allowed. Proceed to the next stage. Abort if the maximum runs have been exceeded.
Perform Final Average Calculations
Calculate the final (average) K-factor and meter factor. Proceed to the next stage.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-89
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Run Stage 15
16 17
Description Perform Meter Factor Deviation Checks
Perform tolerance tests (calculated meter factor versus meter factor: maximum deviation of 0.25% and calculated meter factor versus average of saved historical meter factors: maximum deviation of 0.1%).
Only valid meter factors at normal flow rates are incorporated in the historical database. When the limits for either test exceed the meter factor they are not used for measurement and the corresponding meter factor at normal meter flow rate is not entered in the historical database. Proving reports are annotated as "ABORTED" with cause of failure stated.
Proceed to stage 13 if any of the tolerance test fail.
Proceed to the next stage.
Note: This stage is only applicable to Liquid Master Meter Proving and is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow rate to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation) and you select "Product Table with History" when you create your configuration.
Await for Current Prove to be Rejected
You can reject the current prove results within a predefined time-out.
Abort if the prove is rejected.
Proceed to the next stage.
Note: This stage is performed only if you configure the meter normal flow to a value greater than zero (Aramco-style linearisation).
Print the Proof Report
Proceed to stage 11.
B.3.6.2
Run Stage Abort Index
Following an abort the program displays a value in the Run Control abort index display.
Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11
Table B-28. Run Stage Abort Index
Display NULL OPERATOR PC TIMEOUT STAB WAIT STAB HOLD AVG CALC RUN CALC
RUNS EXCEEDED PLS LOCK LOST IO FAIL NULL DATA KF/MF RANGE
Description Not used Operator abort Not used Temperature/Pressure/Flowrate wait stability timeout Temperature/Pressure/Flowrate hold stability timeout Not used Error occurred when performing run calculations. For details refer to Run Stage Calc Index Maximum number of runs exceeded Pulse interpolator module lock lost I/O module failed to respond to prove request Not used K-factor or meter factor out of range, even if alarms not
B-90
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Value
12 13 14 15 16 17
Display
UNAVAIL TIMEOUT INVALID CONSTANTS BAD PULSES MM NO CHANGED INV CALC
Description configured. To resolve, check the high and low limits for the meter factor, the K-factor, and pulse count objects. Prover unavailable Flight timeout Master meter K-factor = 0 or selection option invalid Master meter and meter under prove bad pulse counts differ Master meter number changed during prove runs Unsupported volume/mass calculations
B.3.6.3
Run Stage Calculation Index
If a prover calculation fails, the program displays a value indicating the failed calculation in the Run Stage Index S600+ front panel display.
Value 0 11 12
13
14
15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 31 32 33 34
Table B-29. Run Stage Calculation Index
Display IDLE FREQ CPLP
CPLM
CTLP
CTLM
PRV GVOL MTR GVOL PRV SVOL MTR SVOL K-FACTOR METER FACTOR PRV FLOWRATE MTR FLOWRATE PRV PCF PRV MASS MTR MASS METER FACTOR
Description
No calculation errors
Calculation failed because flight time equaled 0
The calculation to determine the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the prover (CPLp ) failed because of low density applicable to Liquid only
The calculation to determine the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the meter (CPLm) failed because of low density applicable to Liquid only
The calculation to determine the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid at the prover (CTLp) failed because of low density applicable to Liquid only
The calculation to determine the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid at the meter (CTLm) failed because of low density applicable to Liquid only
The calculation to determine the gross volume at the prover failed because the K-factor or the pulse count equaled 0
The calculation to determine the gross volume at the meter failed because the K-factor or the pulse count equaled 0
The calculation to determine the volume at standard conditions (SVOL) at the prover failed because of no error checks
The calculation to determine the volume at standard conditions (SVOL) at the meter failed because of no error checks
The calculation to determine K-factor failed because the value was outside low/high alarm limits
The calculation to determine meter factor failed because the value was outside low/high alarm limits
The calculation to determine the flowrate at the prover failed because the flight time equaled 0
The calculation to determine the flowrate at the meter failed because the flight time equaled 0
The calculation to determine the pressure correction factor (PCF) at the prover failed.
The calculation to determine the mass at the prover failed because the K-factor, pulse count, or pressure correction factor was 0
The calculation to determine the mass at the meter failed because the K-factor, pulse count, or pressure correction factor was 0.
The calculation to determine meter factor failed because the value was outside low/high alarm limits
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-91
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Value 35
36
37
Display PRV FLOWRATE
MTR FLOWRATE
K-FACTOR
Description
The calculation to determine the flowrate at the prover failed because the flight time equaled 0
The calculation to determine the flowrate at the meter failed because the flight time equaled 0
The calculation to determine the K-factor failed because the value was outside low/high alarm limits
B.3.7 Prove/Stream Data
The prover computer reads the following data from the stream under prove:
Stream Temperature (in use) Stream Pressure (in use) Stream Standard Density (in use) Alpha Constant K0 applicable to Liquid only Alpha Constant K1 applicable to Liquid only Alpha Constant K2 applicable to Liquid only Equilibrium Vapour Pressure applicable to Liquid only Zf (Flowing Compressibility) applicable to Gas only Meter Factor (in use) K-factor (in use) CTSm (in use) applicable to Liquid only CPSm (in use) applicable to Liquid only Flowrate Minimum Flowrate Maximum FCV Setpoint FCV Output Reference Temperature Meter Density (in use) FCV Auto/Manual Status FCV Tracking Status Volume Correction Rounding Status Volume Correction Units Selection applicable to Liquid only Volume Correction Product Type applicable to Liquid only Volume Correction CPL Option applicable to Liquid only Volume Correction Product Subtype applicable to Liquid only Volume Correction Density Type applicable to Liquid only K-factor Units Normal Meter Flow Rate applicable to Liquid only Initial Base Meter Factor applicable to Liquid only Initial Base Meter Factor Time Stamp applicable to Liquid only Base Meter Factor Linearisation Points applicable to Liquid only
B-92
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Historical Meter Factors applicable to Liquid only Historical Meter Factors Time Stamps applicable to Liquid only
If the prove completes successfully the system transfers the following prove data to the stream, but does not use it until you accept the data at the stream.
Proved K-factor Proved Meter Factor Proved Turbine Frequency Proved Flowrate Proved Meter Temperature Proved Meter Pressure Historical Meter Factors applicable to Liquid only Historical Meter Factors Time Stamp applicable to Liquid only Proved Meter Factor Acceptance Flag applicable to Liquid only
B.3.8 Prove Reports
Two reports are available, for volume or mass K-factor, and the choice is determined by the K-factor units, pulses/volume or pulses/mass.
The following are two sample proof reports for liquid:
=============================================================================================
1
METER PROOF REPORT
06/08/2006 10:00:00
=============================================================================================
STREAM ON PROOF PROVING RATE
: 0 :
0.000 m3/h
STANDARD DENSITY
:
STREAM TEMPERATURE
:
PROVER TEMP
:
0.000 kg/m3 0.000 Deg.C 0.000 Deg.C
STREAM PRESSURE : 0.000 barg
PROVER PRESS
: 0.000 barg
TRIAL No.
STREAM
TEMP
PRESSURE
(Deg.C) (barg)
PROVER
TEMP
PRESSURE
(Deg.C) (barg)
STANDARD DENSITY (kg/m3)
PROVER PULSES
METER PULSES
FLIGHT TIME (pls/m3)
1
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0 0.000000
2
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0 0.000000
3
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0 0.000000
4
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0 0.000000
5
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0 0.000000
6
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0 0.000000
7
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0 0.000000
8
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0 0.000000
9
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0 0.000000
10
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0 0.000000
11
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0 0.000000
12
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0 0.000000
AVE
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.000
0.0
0.0 0.000000
PROVER
STREAM
METER
CTLM
CPLM
CTLP
CPLP
VOLUME
VOLUME FLOWRATE FACTOR
No.
(Sm3 )
(Sm3 )
1
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.00
0.00
0.0 0.000000
2
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.00
0.00
0.0 0.000000
3
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.00
0.00
0.0 0.000000
4
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.00
0.00
0.0 0.000000
5
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.00
0.00
0.0 0.000000
6
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.00
0.00
0.0 0.000000
7
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.00
0.00
0.0 0.000000
8
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.00
0.00
0.0 0.000000
9
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.00
0.00
0.0 0.000000
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-93
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
10
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
11
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
12
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
AVE
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.0 0.000000 0.0 0.000000 0.0 0.000000 0.0 0.000000
CURRENT K-FACTOR NEW K-FACTOR NEW METER FACTOR REPEATABILITY
:
0.00 pls/m3
:
0.00 pls/m3
: 0.000000
: 0.000000 %
============================================================================================= =============================================================================================
================================================================================
1
PROVING REPORT
Emerson Process Management
(0)OFFICIAL (0)UNOFFICIAL (0)ABORTED
LOCATION : AAAAAAA
DATE/TIME : MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
METER MANUFACTURER: METER MODEL: METER SERIAL NUMBER: METER SIZE (mm): NOMINAL K-FACTOR: METER TAG NUMBER:
AAAAAAA AAAAAAA AAAAAAA 0.000 0.000 AAAAAAA
PROVER MANUFACTURER: AAAAAAA PROVER SERIAL NUMBER: AAAAAAA
PRIMARY FLOW COMPUTER: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
LIQUID: A CRUDE
OBSERVED DENSITY: 0.000 kg/m3 AT 0.00 Deg.C = 0.000
TRIAL PULSES TOTAL PRESS
TEMP
TRIAL
kg/m3 AT 0.000 Deg.C
TRIAL No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 AVE
PLUSES TOTAL
TOTAL TIME s
PRESS PROVER barg
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
0.000000 0.000000
0.000000
METER barg
TEMP PROVER Deg.C
METER Deg.C
TRIAL M.F. MFt
0.000000
0.00 0.00
0.0
0.000000
0.00 0.00
0.0
0.000000
0.00 0.00
0.0
0.000000
0.00 0.00
0.0
0.000000
0.00 0.00
0.0
0.000000
0.00 0.00
0.0
0.000000
0.00 0.00
0.0
0.000000
0.00 0.00
0.0
0.000000
0.00 0.00
0.0
0.000000
0.00 0.00
0.0
0.000000
0.00 0.00
0.0
0.000000
0.00 0.00
0.0
0.000000
0.00 0.00
0.0
REPEATABILITY FOR LAST 10 TRIALS = 0.000 %
A. TEMP. CORRECTION FACTOR FOR LIQUID IN PROVER
(CTLp)
B. PRESS. CORRECTION FACTOR FOR LIQUID IN PROVER (CPLp)
C. COMBINED CORRECTION FACTOR FOR PROVER
(CCFp)
D. GROSS STANDARD VOLUME FOR PROVER
(GSVp)
E. INDICATED METER VOLUME
(IVm)
F. TEMP. CORRECTION FACTOR FOR LIQUID IN METER
(CTLm)
G. PRESS. CORRECTION FACTOR FOR LIQUID IN METER
(CPLm)
H. COMBINED CORRECTION FACTOR FOR METER
(CCFm)
I. GROSS STANDARD VOLUME FOR METER
(GSVm)
J. AVG. METER FLOW RATE
K. METER FACTOR @ PROVING FLOW RATE
L. METER FACTOR @ NORMAL METER FLOW RATE OF 0.000 m3/h
METER FACTOR TEST RESULTS (%): 1) 0.00 2) 0.00
M. PROVER MASS
N. METER MASS
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Sm3 0.000 m3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Sm3 0.000 m3/h 0.000 0.000
0.000 tonne 0.000 tonne
HISTORICAL DATA OF METER FACTORS @ NORMAL METER FLOW RATE OF 0.000 m3/h INITIAL BASE METER FACTOR (DATE: MM/DD/YY) = 0.000
DATE:
MM/DD/YY
FACTOR:
0.000
DEVIATION(±): 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
DATE:
MM/DD/YY
FACTOR:
0.000
DEVIATION(±): 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
MM/DD/YY 0.000 0.00%
B-94
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
PROVED FOR: ______________________ BY : _____________________ DATE: ____________ WITNESSED BY : ______________________________________________ DATE: ____________ ================================================================================
B.3.9 Proving Calculations
This section provides information on calculations used in the prove procedure.
The calculations are for volume or mass K-factor and the choice is determined by the K-factor units, pulses/volume or pulses/mass.
Average Method The "average method" option indicates how the system performs final averaging:
The Meter Factor option calculates a meter factor for each run and takes the average of these to arrive at the final meter factor.
The K-factor option calculates a K-factor for each run and takes the average of these to arrive at the final K-factor.
The Pulses option takes the average of the pulses, temperature, and pressure and performs a final set of calculations using this average data to arrive at the final meter and K-factor.
Options 1 and 2 are equivalent to the "average meter factor" method used for API Ch.12 Section 2 Part 3 Proving reports. Option 3 is equivalent to the "average data" method.
Standard References The prover volume correction calculations correspond to those used by the meter under prove, in which the system transfers the calculation steering variables from the stream.
Name Averaging Calcs Stability Calcs Correction Factor (CTLm/CTLp)
Correction Factor (CPLm/CPLp)
K-factor/Flowrate K-factor Deviation K-factor Deviation Statistical Method Meter Factor
Standard Reference General mathematic principles General mathematic principles Corresponds to Meter calculations applicable to Liquid only Corresponds to Meter calculations applicable to Liquid only API Ch 12 API Ch 4 NORSOK I-105 Annex F
API Ch 12
B.3.9.1 Formulae: Averaging Calculations
Run Average Data
X run
=
Xinst Samples
where:
Xrun
is the average value of the variable for a single run
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-95
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Xinst
is the instantaneous sample value of the variable being
averaged
Samples is the number of samples taken during the run
The sampled variables (Xinst) are: Prover temperature Prover pressure Meter temperature Meter pressure Standard density
Run Average Frequency (Hz)
PC FREQrun = t
where:
FREQrun PC t
is the average meter frequency for a single run is the run pulse count is the run flight time (secs)
Final Average Data (Over Consecutive Good Runs)
X = final
X run N
where:
Xfinal the final average value of a relevant variable for the N
consecutive good runs
Xrun the value of the variable for a single run
N
the number of consecutive good runs
The final average variables are: Prover pulse count Meter pulse count Flight time Prover temperature Prover pressure Meter temperature Meter pressure Vapour pressure applicable to Liquid only Standard density Prover density Meter density Meter frequency Prover flowrate Meter flowrate Alpha applicable to Liquid only Prover beta applicable to Liquid only Meter beta applicable to Liquid only CTLm applicable to Liquid only CPLm applicable to Liquid only
B-96
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
CTLp applicable to Liquid only CPLp applicable to Liquid only Flowing Compressibility (Zf) applicable to Gas only Pressure correction factor Prover standard volume Meter standard volume Meter indicated volume Prover mass Meter mass K-factor Meter factor
B.3.9.2 Formulae: Stability Calculations
Stream/Prover Discrepancy Checks
Xdiff = XA - XB
where:
XA, XB are the variables being compared
The variables compared are: Prover - Meter Temperature Prover - Meter Pressure
Variable Rate of Change
X rate =
X new - X old Period
where:
Xrate the rate of the variable Xnew the new sample value Xold the previous sample value Period the sampling interval
The variables compared are: Prover Temperature Prover Pressure Meter Flowrate
B.3.9.3 Formulae: Correction Factor (CTLm/CTLp)
Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on the Liquid
These factors are calculated according to the product, using the same calculations as the meter under prove applicable to Liquid only.
B.3.9.4 Formulae: Correction Factor (CPLm/CPLp)
Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on the Liquid
These factors are calculated according to the product, using the same calculations as the meter under prove applicable to Liquid only.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-97
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
B.3.9.5 Formulae: Volume Prover Calculations
Prover Indicated Volume (m3)
IVprun
=
PCp run KFp
where: PCprun KFp
is the run pulse count for the master meter (pls) is the master meter K-factor (pls/m3)
Meter Indicated Volume (m3)
IVmrun
=
PCm run KFm run
where:
PCmrun is the run pulse count for the meter (pls)
KFm
is the meter K-factor (pls/m3)
Prover Gross Standard Volume (Sm3) Liquid
GSVprun = IVprun x CTLprun x CPLprun x MFp
where: IVprun is the indicated volume for the master meter CTLprun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the
liquid at the prover, using the average prover run temperature CPLprun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the prover, using the average prover run pressure MFp is the master meter Meter Factor
Meter Indicated Standard Volume (Sm3) Liquid
ISVmrun = IVmrun x CTLmrun x CPLmrun
where:
IVmrun is the indicated volume for the meter
CTLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid at the meter, using the average meter run temperature
CPLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the meter, using the average meter run pressure
Volume K-factor (pls/m3) Liquid
KFmrun
=
PCmrun x CTLmrun PCprun x CTLprun
x CPLmrun x CPLprun
x KFp
where:
PCmrun is the run pulse count for the meter (pls)
B-98
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
PCprun is the run pulse count for the master meter (pls)
CTLprun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid at the prover, using the average prover run temperature
CPLprun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the prover, using the average prover run pressure
CTLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid at the meter, using the average meter run temperature
CPLmrun is the correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid at the meter, using the average meter run pressure
KFp
is the master meter K-factor (pls/m3)
PTZ Factor - Gas
where: PresPrun is the prover pressure (psia) PresMrun is the meter pressure (psia) TempPrun is the prover temperature (Deg F) TempMrun is the meter temperature (Deg F) ZfPrun is the prover flowing compressibility ZfMrun is the meter flowing compressibility
Meter Factor Liquid MF = GSVprun ISVmrun where: GSVprun is the prover gross standard volume (m3) ISVmrun is the meter indicated standard volume (m3)
Meter Factor - Gas
where:
IVprun is the prover indicated volume (m3)
PTZ
is the PTZ factor
IVmrun is the meter indicated volume (m3) Prover Indicated Volume Flowrate (m3/h)
IVFRprun
=
IVp run t
x 3600
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-99
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
B-100
where: IVprun t
is the indicated volume for the master meter (m3) is the meter run flight time (secs)
Meter Indicated Volume Flowrate (m3/h)
IVFRmrun
=
IVm run t
x 3600
where:
IVmrun is the indicated volume for the meter (m3)
t
is the meter run flight time (secs)
B.3.9.6 Formulae: Mass Prover Calculations
Prover Pressure Correction Factor
PCF = 1 + KTPF × (Prun - Pref )
where:
Prun
is the master meter pressure (bar)
Pref
is the master meter PCF reference pressure (bar)
KTPF is the master meter KTPF
Prover Mass (kg)
Mp run
=
PCprun × PCF KFp
where:
PCprun KFp
is the run pulse count for the master meter (pls) is the master meter K-factor (pls/kg)
PCF
is the master meter pressure correction factor
Meter Mass (kg)
Mm run
=
PCmrun ×1.0 KFm run
where:
PCmrun is the run pulse count for the meter (pls)
KFm is the meter K-factor (pls/kg)
Meter Factor MF = Mprun Mm run where: Mprun is the master meter mass (kg) Mmrun is the meter mass (kg)
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Mass K-factor (pls/kg)
KFm run
=
KFp MFrun
where:
MFrun is the run meter factor
KFp
is the master meter K-factor (pls/kg)
Prover Mass Flowrate (kg/h)
MFRp run
=
Mp run t
x 3600
where:
Mprun is the mass for the master meter (kg)
t
is the meter run flight time (secs)
Meter Mass Flowrate (kg/h)
MFRm run
=
Mm run t
x 3600
where:
Mmrun is the mass for the meter (kg)
t
is the meter run flight time (secs)
B.3.9.7 Formulae: K-factor Deviation
When the required number of consecutive good runs has been achieved, the program checks each individual run K-factor (which make up the N consecutive good runs) to see how far it deviates from the average. If any run's K-factor deviates by more than the allowable limit then additional runs are performed and the test is repeated.
When all K-factors for the required runs fall within the deviation limit, then the prove is considered successful and the system calculated Final Average Data. At the same time the program stores the single maximum deviation value (repeatability) of the good run K-factors as an indication of how well the prove fell within the deviation tolerance.
API Ch.4 Method 1 (default)
( ) K dev =
K avg - K run K avg
×100
MX-MN/AVG
( ) K dev =
K max - K min K avg
×100
MX-MN/MX+MN2
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-101
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
( ( ) ) K dev =
K max - K min ×100 K max + K min ÷ 2
MX-MN/MN
( ) K dev =
K max - K min K min
×100
MX-MN/MX*MN
(( )) K dev =
K max - K min K max × K min
×100
MX-AV/AV
( ) K dev =
K max - K avg K avg
×100
AV-MN/AV
( ) K dev =
K avg - K min K avg
×100
where:
Kdev is the K-factor deviation (%) Kavg is the average K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3) Kmin is the minimum K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3) Kmax is the maximum K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3) Krun is the run K-factor being checked (pls/m3)
Statistical
K dev
=
200
x
t N-1
x
S N -1 K avg ×
N
where:
Kdev is the K-factor deviation (%) Kavg is the average K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3)
tN-1 is the uncertainty band confidence level, which is a selectable value (95%, 99%, 99.5%, or a user-defined value). NORSOK requires this method (using the student-t distribution) at a recommended value of 95%. API MPMS Ch.4.8 also recommends 95%.
SN-1 is the standard deviation of K-factor of N consecutive good runs (pls/m3)
B.3.9.8
Meter Factor Deviation Test
This section defines Meter Factor Deviation tests applicable to Liquid only.
B-102
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Calculated Meter Factor versus Initial Base Meter Factor
% Deviation Test 1 =
(MFCPFRN Initial Base Meter Factor) (Initial Base Meter Factor)
X 100
where:
MFCPFRN is the calculated meter factor from current prove at normal flow rate.
Maximum deviation of ± 0.25 %.
Calculated Meter Factor versus Average of Previous Historical Meter Factors
% Deviation Test 2 =
(MFCPFRN Average of Previous Meter Factors) (Average of Previous Meter Factors)
X 100
where:
MFCPFRN is the calculated meter factor from current prove at normal flow rate
Maximum deviation of ± 0.1 %.
Revised January-2021
Proving
B-103
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual [This page is intentionally left blank.]
B-104
Proving
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Appendix C Batching
In This Chapter
C.1 Batching Overview............................................................................. C-2 C.1.1 Product Table...................................................................... C-2 C.1.2 Station Batch Setup ............................................................ C-8 C.1.3 Product Detection Interface .............................................. C-14 C.1.4 Slops Handling Examples ................................................. C-16
C.2 Batch Sequence and Control........................................................... C-17 C.2.1 Batch Sequence Stages ................................................... C-18 C.2.2 Retrospective Batch Totals ............................................... C-27 C.2.3 Batch Alarms..................................................................... C-28 C.2.4 Batch Report ..................................................................... C-28
C.3 Interface Detection........................................................................... C-29 C.4 Batch Recalculation ......................................................................... C-34
C.4.1 Displays............................................................................. C-34 C.4.2 Batch Ticket ...................................................................... C-38 C.4.3 Recalculating Batches ...................................................... C-41 C.5 Flow Switching ................................................................................. C-50 C.5.1 Station Flow Switching Setup ........................................... C-50 C.5.2 Stream Flow Switching Setup ........................................... C-52 C.5.3 Flow Switching Algorithms ................................................ C-53 C.5.4 Alarms ............................................................................... C-56 C.6 Batch Stack...................................................................................... C-56 C.6.1 Configuring the Batch Stack Through the PCSetup EditorC-57 C.6.2 Configuring the Batch Stack with the System Editor ........ C-59 C.6.3 Configuring the Batch Stack through the Front Panel ...... C-61 C.6.4 Slot Edit Commands (Front Panel Display) ...................... C-62 C.6.5 Configuring the Batch Stack from the Webserver............. C-67 C.6.6 Slot Edit Commands (Webserver) .................................... C-68 C.7 Basic Batching Setup....................................................................... C-72
This appendix provides an overview of the three batching methods the S600+ supports: standalone station, supervised station, and standalone stream.
Notes:
You must select Batching and a Product Table option in your initial S600+ configuration in order to perform a batching operation.
You must configure at least one Product Table prior to starting a batch. For more information, refer to Product Table.
If you have two stations, you must configure both stations for batching in your initial S600+ configuration.
Batching assumes that the densitometer is at the station header (Station Option 3 in the wizard). Density inputs at the stream level (Stream options 3, 4 and 5 in the wizard) are not supported.
An S600+ running firmware version 6.22 or greater cannot use a batching configuration created with a Config600 version prior to 3.2.7.0. In this situation, you must create a new configuration.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
C.1 Batching Overview
Batching provides the control process for loading a defined quantity of product. The process is run as a sequence stepping through a series of stages.
During a batch, each stream is assigned a volume or mass total to flow; the data passes to the stream that then controls its own batch through the various batch stages, which may include opening and closing stream valves and regulating the flow using a flow control valve.
An operator or supervisory computer can set the batch quantity and specify a startup flowrate, a nominal flowrate for the main body of the batch, and a top off flowrate at the end of batch to provide an accurate quantity. The quantity can be measured by volume or mass.
The batch can be controlled from the station that distributes the flow across available streams configured within the same S600+. It does not work with streams in separate S600+ flow computers, such as requiring a comms link. Each stream then runs its own batch. The sequence can be stepped along automatically by the station or it can be supervised by a remote host computer.
Alternatively, each stream can control its own batch sequence in a standalone mode
The station sequence employs flow switching to open and close streams according to their availability and the required flowrate.
The batch sequence also provides a mechanism for retrospective adjustment of totals if the K-factor or meter factor changes during the batch. The process occurs at the stream and can be done either at most stages during the batch once flow starts or at the end of batch (if you enable user stages). The adjustment automatically reflects in the station totals. However, the adjustment can be made only once though the S600+ uses the new K-factor/meter factor in subsequent totalisation.
Note: This adjustment method is not valid for applications using Kfactor/meter factor linearisation because it is difficult to derive an accurate historic K-factor/meter factor.
C.1.1 Product Table
The product table allows you to define up to 16 sets of constants for the Observed Density Correction / Standard Density Correction calculations at run time. This is useful for batching applications where the product being metered changes. The product details are sent to the stream when a batch starts or if the operator manually changes the product number at the station.
C-2
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Notes:
If the product table with meter factor curve option was selected, then remember to setup the associated product Meter factor / Kfactor curve on the Linearisation form. Please refer to the Stream Configuration document.
The active product can be changed at run time via the station menu
PRODUCT TABLE.
1. Select Product Table from the hierarchy menu. The Product Table screen displays in the right-hand pane.
Revised January-2021
Figure C-1. Product Table Options
2. Indicate a product in the Product Selection field. Click to display all valid products (product range is 1 through 16).
3. Enter the Product Details for the selected product.
Field Density Unit
Description
Indicates the density units the S600+ uses for the density correction calculations. Click to display all valid values.
DEG.API Use degress API.
S.G.
Use specific gravity.
Batching
C-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Iteration Type
Description
KG/M3
Use kilograms per cubic meter. The default is KG/M3.
CH. 11 2004/7 CUST
Use API MPMS Chapter 11.1 2004, Addendum 1, 2007 Imperial Units.
CH. 11 2004/7 METRIC
Use API MPMS Chapter 11.1 2004, Addendum 1, 2007 Metric Units.
NORSOK I- Use I-105 Appendix D density
105
correction.
Indicates the iteration type for the density correction calculations. Click to display all valid values.
ASTM
Use the iterative temperature and pressure correction as defined by ASTM/API, Chapter 12.
IP2
Use the iterative temperature and
pressure correction as defined in IP
Paper 2 (ISO 92-1). The default is IP2.
Hydrometer Correction
Product Type
Indicates whether the S600+ applies the hydrometer correction values to the calculation.
NO
Do not apply hydrometer correction
values. The default is NO.
YES
Do apply hydrometer correction values.
Indicates the type of petroleum product involved in the calculation. Click to display all valid values. The default is A CRUDE.
A CRUDE
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59A and 60A.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
C-4
Batching
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Field
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description
B REFINED
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53B and 54B.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59B and 60B.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23B and 24B.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5B and 6B.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
C SPECIAL
If Density Table Units = KG/M3, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Table 54C.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23C and 24C.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5C and 6C.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Note: Table 53C is not implemented as the assumption is made that the base density is already known. This is because Table 53C allows for a keypad entry of Alpha, and if this is known then the base density would be known.
D LUBE OILS If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 15 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 53D and 54D.
If Density Table Units = KG/M3 and reference temperature = 20 Deg C, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1988 Tables 59D and 60D.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 23D and 24D.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1982 Tables 5D and 6D.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Cust API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
If Density Table Units = CH.11 2004/7, Metric API MPMS Chapter 11 2004.
Batching
C-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
CPL Calculation
Description
LIGHT 1986 ASTM-IP-API Petroleum Measurement Tables for Light Hydrocarbon Liquids 1986 Tables 53 and 54.
ASTM IP 1952
ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 23, 24, 53 and 54.
TABLE LOOKUP
S600+ reads values from a file in the Config600 3.0/Config/Project Name/extras directory and transfers that data into the S600+ with the configuration file. The default files hold values for for the ASTM-IP Petroleum Measurement Tables 1952 Tables 5 and 6.
USER K0K1
If Density Table Units = KG/M3, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 53A and 54A with user entered values K0 and K1.
If Density Table Units = SG, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 23A and 24A with user entered values K0 and K1.
If Density Table Units = DEG API, Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables 5A and 6A with user entered values K0 and K1.
LIGHT TP25 GPA TP-25 1998 (API Tables 23E and 24E).
AROMATICS ASTM D1555-95 Table lookup. D1555-95
LIGHT TP27 GPA TP-27 2007 (API Tables 23E, 24E, 53E, 54E, 59E and 60E).
AROMATICS ASTM D1555M-00 Table lookup. D1555M-00
AROMATICS ASTM D1555M-04a Calculation. D1555M-04A
AROMATICS ASTM D1555M-08 Calculation. D1555M-08
STO5.9 08 B1 Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.1
UGC
Unstable Gas Condensate.
STO5.9 08 B2 Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.2
SLH
Stable Liquid Hydrocarbon.
STO5.9 08 B3 Gazprom STO-5.9 2008 Addendum B.3
WFLH
Wide Fraction Liquid Hydrocarbon.
Indicates the specific CPL calculation the S600+ uses to calculate the liquid pressure correction factor for the selected product. Click to display all valid values.
Note: This field does not display if you select Density Table Units CH.11 2004 CUST or CH.11 2004 METRIC or a Gazprom Product Type because these standards also specify the CPL calculation.
OFF
No CPL calculation.
API1121 API MPMS Ch.11.2.1 1984.
API1122 API MPMS Ch.11.2.1 1986.
API1121M API MPMS Ch.11.2.1M 1984. The default is API1121M.
C-6
Batching
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Description
API1122M API MPMS Ch.11.2.1M 1986.
CONSTANT Use a value you enter.
DOWNER
Paper entitled Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International Use presented by L. Downer 1979.
Rounding
Indicates whether the S600+ rounds the calculation
results for the selected product. Click to display all valid values.
OFF
No rounding occurs. The default is OFF.
NATIVE
Rounding to the rules specified in the selected calculation standard.
API Ch.12.2 Rounding to API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part
Part 2
2 Measurement Tickets 1995.
API Ch.12.2 Rounding to API MPMS Ch.12.2 Part
Part 3
3 Proving Reports 1998.
Flocheck
Rounding to Emerson Flocheck verification software package.
ASTM D1250-04 Ch. 11
API MPMS Ch.11.1 2004 (ASTM D1250-04) method to round to the
Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables.
DECC 1980
DTI/DECC requirements for Petroleum Measurement Tables 1980 Tables. No rounding occurs and an iteration tolerance of 0.0001.
Reference Temp
Sets the reference temperature for the correction calculations. The default is 15 degrees C.
Alpha
Sets the coefficient of thermal expansion. The default is 0.
FFactor
Sets the compressibility factor for the liquid (also known as the beta factor). The default is 0.
PE Calculation
PE Calculation provides a method to calculate the fluid Equilibrium Vapour Pressure for the selected product. The PE Calculation is normally assumed to be zero, but you may use it for Natural Gas Liquids (NGL) and similar applications.
OFF
S600+ does not use a PE Calculation. The default is OFF.
GPA TP-15 Calculate using the GPA TP-15 1988 1988 EQN 2 Equation 2.
GPA TP-15 Calculate using the GPA TP-15 2003 2003 EQN 2 Equation 2.
GPA TP-15 Calculate using the GPA TP-15 1988 1988 EQN 3 Equation 3.
GPA TP-15 Calculate using the GPA TP-15 2003 2003 EQN 4 Equation 4.
Observed Density
Sets the observed density for the selected product.
Base Density Sets the base density for the selected product.
Pe Calculation Sets the observed equilibrium vapour pressure (Pe) for the selected product.
Batching
C-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
C.1.2 Station Batch Setup
To configure the Batching application: 1. Select Batching from the hierarchy menu. The system displays the
associated settings in the right-hand pane.
Figure C-2. Station Batching
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Batch Type
Description
Identifies the type of batch. Click to display all valid values.
Note:
If you require a simple daily batch volume report, you can request this through the Reports screen. Click Reports Editor to access the Reports option on the hierarchy menu.
VOL LOAD
Bases the batch on GUVOL flow. This is the default.
All stages are followed (Define, start, nominal, topoff, terminate etc).
Batch automatically goes to COMPLETE once the required volume has been loaded.
Current batch information is copied to previous and FWA reset on start of new batch.
C-8
Batching
Revised January-2021
Field
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description MASS LOAD
DIGIN
INTERFACE
BASE TIME 1
Bases the batch on mass flow.
All stages are followed (Define, start, nominal, topoff, terminate etc).
Batch automatically goes to COMPLETE once the required mass has been loaded.
Current batch information is copied to previous and FWA reset on start of new batch.
Triggers batches by the station digital input BCH START.
Uses DEFINE command (operator) and goes straight to MONITOR MODE.
Will then accept TERMINATE command (operator) only.
Uses a digital input to do a RESTART which will copy current batch data to previous and reset (including FWA).
Bases the batch on the differences in density (see Section C.3).
Uses DEFINE command (operator) and goes straight to MONITOR MODE.
Will then accept TERMINATE command (operator) only.
Uses a density change to do a RESTART which will copy current batch data to previous and reset (including FWA).
Bases the batch on the "Base Time 1" hour. Each batch lasts one day.
Uses DEFINE command (operator) and goes straight to MONITOR MODE.
Will then accept TERMINATE command (operator) only.
Uses a day change to do a RESTART which will copy current batch data to previous and reset (including FWA).
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field
Description BASE TIME 2
BASE TIME 3
CONT VOL LOAD
Bases the batch on the "Base Time 2" hour. Each batch lasts one day.
Uses DEFINE command (operator) and goes straight to MONITOR MODE.
Will then accept TERMINATE command (operator) only.
Uses a day change to do a RESTART which will copy current batch data to previous and reset (including FWA).
Bases the batch on the "Base Time 3" hour. Each batch lasts one day.
Uses DEFINE command (operator) and goes straight to MONITOR MODE.
Will then accept TERMINATE command (operator) only.
Uses a day change to do a RESTART which will copy current batch data to previous and reset (including FWA).
Bases the batch on GUVOL flow and a new batch is automatically triggered when the current batch ends. A new batch can be triggered manually, before the required quantity is achieved, by using the RESTART command.
Uses DEFINE command (operator) and goes straight to MONITOR MODE.
Will then accept RESTART command (operator) or TERMINATE command (operator) only.
Uses a USER START/STOP object to do a RESTART which will copy current batch data to previous and reset (including FWA).
Notes:
Select this option only if the flow is continuous.
The current flow weighted average values are copied to the previous flow weighted average values if a RESTART is performed when there is flow.
C-10
Batching
Revised January-2021
Field
Supervised User Stages
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description
CONT MASS LOAD
Bases the batch on mass flow and a new batch is automatically triggered when the current batch ends. A new batch can be triggered manually, before the required quantity is achieved, by using the RESTART command.
Uses DEFINE command (operator) and goes straight to MONITOR MODE.
Will then accept RESTART command (operator) or TERMINATE command (operator) only.
Uses a USER START/STOP object to do a RESTART which will copy current batch data to previous and reset (including FWA).
Notes:
Select this option only if the flow is continuous.
The current flow weighted average values are copied to the previous flow weighted average values if a RESTART is performed when there is flow.
Indicates the point from which the batch is controlled. Leave this option blank to permit the batch to automatically step through each phase. Select this option if you intend either to manually monitor the process or have a supervisory computer monitor the batch process.
Note: If Supervised is selected at the station, only a subset of batch commands are accepted and only VOL LOAD and MASS LOAD Batch Types are supported.
User stages provide a halt in the sequence waiting for the sequence stage number to be changed. This is normally handled by a LogiCalc which you can edit to provide user specific logic as the prove progresses. If the stage number does not change, the sequence will not progress past these stages. Click to display all valid values.
DISABLED
S600+ does not execute user stages. The default is Disabled.
ENABLED
S600+ executes user stages and requires a LogiCalc.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Pwr Fail Mode
Max Duration Prealarm Setting Reports Editor Density Change Limit
Line Pack
Description
ARAMCO
Enables specific application features. If you require this feature contact Technical Support.
Sets how the system handles the currently running batch after a power cycle.
CONTINUE Continues the batch after
BATCH
power is resumed.
START NEW BATCH
Stops the batch that started before the power failure and starts a new batch when the power resumes.
STOP BATCH
Stops the batch that started before the power failure after the power resumes.
Sets the maximum number of days a batch will run .The batch restarts after the max duration has been reached.
Triggers an operator warning based on the batch's percentage of completion. Indicate a percentage value (such as 95) to raise a warning alarm or set a value of 100 to disable this alarm.
Click Reports Editor to display a screen identifying the reports currently associated with your configuration.
Sets the minimum change in density, per m3 or second, for which an interface should be flagged. All density variations which are below this limit are ignored by the algorithm. If the ROC Algorithm option is set to VOLUME, the parameter is specified in units of density divided by units of volume. If the ROC Algorithm option is set to TIME, the parameter is specified in units of density divided by units of time.
Sets the amount of product that is required to pass between the moment a valid interface has been detected at the station densitometer and the moment the interface is actually flagged (reported) when the interface has reached the stream meter. The line pack is expressed as a volume. If you set the parameter to 0, the interface is flagged as soon as the algorithm detects it at the station densitometer.
C-12
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field Slops Handling
ROC Algorithm
Description
Sets how the system handles transmix ("slops"). Valid option are:
ADD TO NEXT
The slops (transmix) is considered part of the batch that just started. The interface is considered to be right at the boundary between the end of the previous product and the start of the slops.
ADD TO CURRENT
The slops (transmix) is considered part of the batch that just ended. The interface is considered to be right at the boundary between the end of the slops and the start of the next product.
SEPARATE
The slops (transmix) is considered to be a separate batch. Its properties are considered to be the same as the batch that just ended.
Sets how the system computes the density rate of change. Valid values are:
TIME
Rate of change is computed as the change in density with respect to time
VOLUME
Rate of change is computed as the change in density with respect to volume.
3. Complete the Required, Startup, and Top-off values for both Quantities and Flowrates, so that:
Revised January-2021
Figure C-3. Flowrate Totals
Batching
C-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Where:
A Startup flowrate. B Nominal flowrate. C Top-off flowrate. D Startup volume. E Nominal volume. F Top-off volume.
4. Click on the hierarchy menu when finished. A confirmation dialog box displays.
5. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
C.1.3 Product Detection Interface
The Interface Detection logic detects and flags the boundary between two adjacent products, determining the end of one product and the beginning of another. To enable Interface Detection you must first enable the Batching option at the station level when generating a new configuration file. You enable the option only at the station level, although you can configure the option for each station independently. Once started the option runs in the background, monitoring density changes in a fixed volume of product and flagging any interfaces.
You define four parameters to configure the interface detection algorithm, which you access either through PCSetup, the S600+'s front panel, or Webserver.
To access the parameters from PCSetup, select Station (number) > Batching.
To access the parameters from the front panel or the Webserver, select Operator > Station (number) > Batch I/F.
Figure C-4. Product Interface Detection Form (in PCSetup)
C-14
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
By comparing product densities in the same unit of volume, the algorithm notes changes in base density over a fixed amount of product. When the algorithm detects a change above a certain configurable limit it marks an interface. The algorithm performs an average rate of change check to filter out small changes in density or sudden density spikes.
Generally, two products with similar densities mix much more than two products with largely different densities. The rate of change in density in the first case is lower than the rate of change in the second case.
The following graphic uses three products (A, B, and C) in an idealized example of how the algorithm works. The density of Product A (100 [units of density]) is much closer to the density of Product C (700 [units of density]) than to the density of Product B (900 [units of density]). Accordingly, the transition from Product A to Product B is much faster (in terms of units of volume) than the transition from Product A to Product C. The rates of change can be seen in the following graphic:
From Product A to Product B: ROC = 200 [units of density / units of volume]
From Product A to Product C: ROC = 100 [units of density / units of volume]
The algorithm computes the average rate of change (ROC) over a fixed number of volume or time units. If the computed ROC is greater than the operator-entered ROC, the algorithm considers this variation as a change in product and flags it. Otherwise, the algorithm ignores the change.
The following graphic shows three different operator-set ROC limits (indicated by the dashed lines): 300 [units of density / units of volume], 150 [units of density / units of volume], and 75 [units of density / units of volume]. The three operator-set limits depict three different situations. If the ROC limit is set too high for the product density changes for that particular pipeline then the algorithm ignores all transitions. If the ROC limit is set too low then the algorithm picks up most transitions but it might also pick up unwanted transitions. For the algorithm to work properly, you must set the ROC lower than the lowest product transitions for that mix.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-15
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure C-5. Idealised Example of Transitions between Products with Different Densities
C.1.4 Slops Handling Examples
The three following examples show how the system handles slops, based on the option (respectively, Add to Current, Add to Next, or Separate) you select in the Slops Handling field.
C-16
Figure C-6. Slops Handling Examples
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Legend PD
PR
Line Pack T1, T2, T3, etc.
Point of Detection; the point at which the densitometer first detects the interface
Point of Report; the point at which the meter reports the interface
The difference in volume between PD and PR
Points (or triggers) in the flowing product at which an interface is triggered
C.2 Batch Sequence and Control
The sequence can be stepped along automatically by the station or it can be supervised by a remote host computer. Each stream can control its own batch sequence in a standalone mode.
Before you initiate a batch, ensure that the Delivery/Receipt and Official/Unofficial modes are correctly configured on the S600+'s front panel displays (BCH CURR INPUTS).
The S600+ flow computer's front panel display provides the following commands you can use to control the batch sequence (Operator > Station > Batch > Batch Command):
Display Define Start Nominal
Topoff
Hold
Terminate Restart
Description
Accept the load parameters and reset batch totals.
Open valves and commence startup flow. Available only for the VOL LOAD and MASS LOAD batch types.
Ramp up to the nominal flowrate. Available only for the VOL LOAD and MASS LOAD batch types.
Note: Command will be rejected if Supervised is selected at the station.
Ramp down to the top-off flowrate. Available only for the VOL LOAD and MASS LOAD batch types.
Note: Command will be rejected if Supervised is selected at the station.
Pause the batch. Available only for the VOL LOAD and MASS LOAD batch types.
Note: Command will be rejected if Supervised is selected at the station.
End the batch.
Stops the current batch and starts a new one. Available only for the CONT, VOL LOAD and CONT, MASS LOAD batch types.
Notes: Select this option only if the flow is continuous. The current flow weighted average values are
copied to the previous flow weighted average values if a RESTART is performed when there is flow. Command will be rejected is Supervised is selected at the station.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-17
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
C.2.1 Batch Sequence Stages
The batch sequence functions in stages. Table C-1 shows the complete list of station stages for a typical application batching scenario.
Stage 0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Table C-1. Station Batch Sequence Stages
Display IDLE WAIT SAMPLER BATCH DEFINED WAIT STREAMS START BEGIN STARTUP IN STARTUP BEGIN NOMINAL IN NOMINAL BEGIN TOPOFF IN TOPOFF BEGIN HOLD IN HOLD STREAM BATCH WAIT STREAMS CLOSE WAIT STREAMS END BATCH COMPLETE BATCH MONITOR WAIT RECALC CMND RECALCULATING TERMINATING
RECALCULATE COMPLETE
Description Halted: idle, await Define command Wait for the sampler to reset Halted: await Start command Wait for streams to start
Set the startup flowrate, wait for station flowrate > startup flowrate Wait for station total > startup volume Set the nominal flowrate, wait for station flowrate > nominal flowrate Wait for station total > (specified top-off) total Set the top-off flowrate, wait for station flowrate > top-off flowrate Wait for station total > specified total Suspend flow, wait for station flowrate = 0 Halted: await Start or Terminate command Not implemented Wait for station flowrate = zero
Wait for streams to return Idle Print report, return to Idle Halted: await a stage change. Halted: await Recalc or Terminate command Wait for streams to return Recalc Complete Wait for streams to return to Idle Halted: await Terminate command or an external stage change
C-18
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
C.2.1.1
Station Sequence Stage Descriptions
Table C-2 shows all the stages of a default batch sequence.
Sequence Stage 0
1
2 3
Table C-2. Batch Sequence Stages (Complete)
Description Halted: Idle Wait for the Define command to start the sequence. If the batch permit state is OK, then: Increment the batch number, max 9999. Record the cumulative totals. Command available streams to initialise (via Define command to each stream batch
task). Streams are available if: Stream berth no = station berth no displays as STATION NO. Stream control type = supervised. Stream flow switching is enabled. Stream batch permit is enabled. Initialise the sampler. Proceed to the next stage. Wait for Sampler to Reset If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the streams to terminate. Go to the Batch Complete stage. Check the sampler status. If the sampler is reset or the stage times out, then: Proceed to the next stage. Halted: Batch Defined If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the streams to terminate. Go to the Batch Complete stage. Wait for the Start command then proceed to the next stage. Wait for Streams to Start If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the streams to terminate. Go to the Batch Complete stage. Wait for the streams for this berth to indicate they have reset and are ready to start the batch (stream status = Batch Monitor). Proceed to the next stage.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-19
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Sequence Stage 4
5
Description Begin Startup Set the station flow switching setpoint = batch startup flowrate If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the streams to terminate. Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Wait Streams Close stage. If the Hold command is issued, then: Command streams to hold Set the station setpoint = 0 Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Begin Hold stage. If a totals retrospective adjustment is required, then: Carry out the adjustment. If the required batch total has been achieved (prematurely), then: Set the station setpoint = 0 Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Wait Streams Close stage. Wait for the station startup flowrate to be achieved. Proceed to the next stage. In Startup Set the station flow switching setpoint = batch startup flowrate If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the streams to terminate. Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Wait Streams Close stage. If the Hold command is issued, then: Command streams to hold Set the station setpoint = 0 Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Begin Hold stage. If a totals retrospective adjustment is required, then: Carry out the adjustment. If the required batch total has been achieved, then: Set the station setpoint = 0 Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Wait Streams Close stage. Wait for the station startup total to be achieved. Proceed to the next stage.
C-20
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Sequence Stage 6
7
Description Begin Nominal Set the station flow switching setpoint = batch nominal flowrate If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the streams to terminate. Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Wait Streams Close stage. If the Hold command is issued, then: Command streams to hold Set the station setpoint = 0 Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Begin Hold stage. If the Top-Off command is issued, then: Go to the Begin Top-off stage. If a totals retrospective adjustment is required, then: Carry out the adjustment. If the required batch total has been achieved, then: Set the station setpoint = 0 Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Wait Streams Close stage. Wait for the station nominal flowrate to be achieved. Proceed to the next stage. In Nominal Set the station flow switching setpoint = batch nominal flowrate If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the streams to terminate. Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Wait Streams Close stage. If the Hold command is issued, then: Command streams to hold Set the station setpoint = 0 Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Begin Hold stage. If the Top-Off command is issued, then: Go to the Begin Top-off stage. If a totals retrospective adjustment is required, then: Carry out the adjustment. If the required batch total has been achieved, then: Set the station setpoint = 0 Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Wait Streams Close stage. Wait for the station nominal total (= batch top-off) to be achieved. Proceed to the next stage.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-21
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Sequence Stage 8
9
10
Description Begin Top-Off Set the station flow switching setpoint = batch top-off flowrate If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the streams to terminate. Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Wait Streams Close stage. If the Hold command is issued, then: Command streams to hold Set the station setpoint = 0 Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Begin Hold stage. If a totals retrospective adjustment is required, then: Carry out the adjustment. If the required batch total has been achieved, then: Set the station setpoint = 0 Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Wait Streams Close stage. Wait for the station top-off flowrate to be achieved. Proceed to the next stage. In Top-Off Set the station flow switching setpoint = batch top-off flowrate If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the streams to terminate. Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Wait Streams Close stage. If the Hold command is issued, then: Command streams to hold Set the station setpoint = 0 Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Begin Hold stage. If a totals retrospective adjustment is required, then: Carry out the adjustment. Wait for the required batch total to be achieved, then: Set the station setpoint = 0 Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Wait Streams Close stage. Begin Hold Set the station flow switching setpoint = 0 If the Start command is issued, then: Command the flow switching to start. Go to the Begin Startup stage. If a totals retrospective adjustment is required, then: Carry out the adjustment. Wait for the station flowrate to reduce to zero. Proceed to the next stage.
C-22
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Sequence Stage 11
12 13
14
15 15 16
Description Halted: In Hold Set the station flow switching setpoint = 0 If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the streams to terminate. Command the flow switching to shut down. Go to the Wait Streams End stage. If the Start command is issued, then: Command the flow switching to start. Go to the Begin Startup stage. Stream Batch Not currently configured Wait for Streams Close Set the station flow switching setpoint = 0 If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the streams to terminate. Go to the Wait Streams End stage. Wait for the station flowrate to reduce to zero, then: Command streams to terminate. Command the sampler to stop. Go to the Wait Streams End stage. Wait for Streams End If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the sampler to stop. If User stages are disabled, then:
Go to the Batch Complete stage. else Go to the Wait Re-Calc stage. If the User stages are disabled, then: Command the sampler to stop. Wait for the streams to indicate they have individually returned to the Idle stage. Go to the Batch Complete stage. else Command the sampler to stop. Wait for the streams to indicate they have individually reached the Wait Re-Calc Command stage. Go to the Wait Re-Calc Command stage. Batch Complete (Station) Go to the Idle stage. Batch Complete (Stream) If the User stages are disabled, then: Handle the totals Go to the Idle stage. else Go to the Wait Re-Calc Command stage. Halted: Batch Monitor Used by supervised batching. If the Terminate command is issued, then: Go to the Wait Streams Close stage. If a totals retrospective adjustment is required, then: Carry out the adjustment. Wait for the next stage to be determined by the supervisory system.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-23
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Sequence Stage 17
18
19
20
Description Halted: Wait Re-Calc Command If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the streams to terminate. Go to the Terminated stage. If the Re-Calc command is issued, then: Command streams to re-calculate. Go to the Re-Calculating stage. Re-Calculating If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the streams to terminate. Go to the Terminated stage. Wait for the streams to indicate they have individually completed their re-calcs. Proceed to the Re-Calculate Complete stage. Terminating If the Terminate command is issued, then: Go to the Idle stage. Wait for the streams to indicate they have individually returned to the Idle stage. Proceed to the Idle stage. Halted: Re-Calculate Complete If the Terminate command is issued, then: Command the streams to terminate. Go to the Terminated stage. Wait for the stage to be changed externally.
C.2.1.2
Standalone Station Stages
Station batching is designed for a station/stream(s) combination within the same FloBoss S600+ flow computer. It monitors and controls a load using the required batch quantity together with the flow rate setpoints for start up, nominal and top off.
The system supports two modes of batch control: Standalone (the sequence is controlled by the S600+) Supervised, such as by a remote host computer.
The batch steps through a set of stages where the current stage is executed every second. The stage remains the same until an event (such as an operator command or the loading of a required volume) causes a change.
Standalone mode enables the FloBoss S600+ station computer to drive a batch from start to completion allowing for operator interaction along the way. Table C-3 presents the sequence stages for standalone station batching.
Stage 0 1 2 3 4
Table C-3. Standalone Station Batch Sequence Stages
Display IDLE WAIT SAMPLER BATCH DEFINED WAIT STREAMS START BEGIN STARTUP
Description Halted: idle, await Define command Wait for the sampler to reset Halted: await Start command Wait for streams to start Set the startup flowrate, wait for station flowrate > startup flowrate
C-24
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 5 6 7 8 9 13 14
Display IN STARTUP BEGIN NOMINAL IN NOMINAL BEGIN TOPOFF IN TOPOFF WAIT STREAMS CLOSE WAIT STREAMS END
15 BATCH COMPLETE Hold (Suspend Batch)
10 BEGIN HOLD 11 IN HOLD
Recalc 17 WAIT RECALC CMND 18 RECALCULATING 20 RECALC COMPLETE
Terminate 19 TERMINATING
Description Wait for station total > startup volume Set the nominal flowrate, wait for station flowrate > nominal flowrate Wait for station total > (specified top-off) total Set the top-off flowrate, wait for station flowrate > top-off flowrate Wait for station total > specified total Wait for station flowrate = zero Wait for streams to return Idle wait for recalculation command if user stages are selected Print report, return to Idle
Suspend flow, wait for station flowrate = 0 Halted: await Start or Terminate command Note: Only available if you select User Stages Halted: await Recalc or Terminate command Recalculating the totals Halted: await Terminate command
Wait streams Idle, go to Station Idle
If user stages are enabled, you can use a LogiCalc to perform specific recalculation functions. The folder C:\Users\<username>\Config600 3.3\lclib\batch includes a sample station batch logicalc.
C.2.1.3
Supervised Station Stages
Supervised mode is intended to be controlled from a remote supervisory system, but the station still issues individual batch commands to the streams. Table C-4 shows the batch sequence stages for a supervised station.
Table C-4. Supervised Station Batch Sequence Stages
Stage Display 0 IDLE 1 WAIT SAMPLER 2 BATCH DEFINED 3 WAIT STREAMS
START 4 BEGIN STARTUP 5 IN STARTUP 6 BEGIN NOMINAL 7 IN NOMINAL 8 BEGIN TOPOFF 9 IN TOPOFF 16 BATCH MONITOR 13 WAIT STREAMS
CLOSE 14 WAIT STREAMS END
15 BATCH COMPLETE Hold (Suspend Batch)
10 BEGIN HOLD
Description Halted: idle, await Define command Wait for the sampler to reset Halted: await Start command Wait for streams to start
Remain in Batch Monitor stage Remain in Batch Monitor stage Remain in Batch Monitor stage Remain in Batch Monitor stage Remain in Batch Monitor stage Remain in Batch Monitor stage Halted: await next stage from the supervisory system Wait for station flowrate = zero
Wait for streams to return Idle wait for recalculation command if user stages are selected Print report, return to Idle
Suspend flow, wait for station flowrate = 0
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-25
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage Display 11 IN HOLD
Recalc 17 WAIT RECALC CMND 18 RECALCULATING 20 RECALC COMPLETE
Terminate 19 TERMINATING
Description Halted: await Start or Terminate command Note: Only available if you select User Stages. Halted: await Recalc or Terminate command Recalculating the totals Halted: await Terminate command
Wait streams Idle, go to Station Idle
If user stages are enabled, a LogiCalc can be used to perform specific recalculation functions. The folder C:\Users\<username>\Config600 3.3\lclib\batch includes a sample station batch logicalc.
C.2.1.4
Standalone Stream Stages
Standalone mode is intended for a single stream to control a batch with no interaction with any other streams or supervisory sequences. Table C-5 shows the batch sequence stages for standalone streams.
Note: Standalone Stream stages can only be implemented by using How To 83. This requires the use of the System Editor which is only available with the Config600 Pro software.
The sequence stage logic is essentially the same as for the station, with the addition of:
The Startup and Nominal stages can accept Nominal and Top-Off commands to move them on to the next stage.
The Batch Complete and Re-Calc stages handle enabled user stages.
Table C-5. Standalone Stream Batch Sequence Stages
Stage
Display
0 IDLE
1 WAIT SAMPLER
2 BATCH DEFINED
4 BEGIN STARTUP
5 IN STARTUP
6 BEGIN NOMINAL
7 IN NOMINAL
8 BEGIN TOPOFF
9 IN TOPOFF
13 WAIT STREAMS CLOSE
15 BATCH COMPLETE
Hold (Suspend Batch) 10 BEGIN HOLD 11 IN HOLD
Recalc 17 WAIT RECALC CMND 18 RECALCULATING 20 RECALC COMPLETE
Terminate
Description Halted: idle, await Define command Wait for the sampler to reset Halted: await Start command Set the startup flowrate, wait for station flowrate > startup flowrate Wait for station total > startup volume Set the nominal flowrate, wait for station flowrate > nominal flowrate Wait for station total > (specified top-off) total Set the top-off flowrate, wait for station flowrate > top-off flowrate Wait for station total > specified total Wait for station flowrate = zero Print report, return to Idle wait for recalculation command if user stages are selected
Suspend flow, wait for station flowrate = 0 Halted: await Start or Terminate command Note: Only available if you select User Stages Halted: await Recalc or Terminate command Recalculating the totals Halted: await Terminate command
C-26
Batching
Revised January-2021
Stage
Display
19 TERMINATING
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Description Transfer the batch totals from current to previous, go to Idle
If user stages are enabled, a LogiCalc can be used to perform specific recalculation functions. The folder C:\Users\<username>\Config600 3.3\lclib\batch includes a sample stream batch logicalc.
C.2.1.5
Supervised Stream Stages
Supervised mode is controlled either in conjunction with the S600+ station batch sequence or from a remote supervisory system. Table C6 shows the batch sequence stages for a supervised stream.
Stage 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 16 13 14 15
10 11
19
Table C-6. Supervised Stream Batch Sequence Stages
Display IDLE WAIT SAMPLER BATCH DEFINED WAIT STREAMS START BEGIN STARTUP IN STARTUP BEGIN NOMINAL IN NOMINAL BEGIN TOPOFF IN TOPOFF BATCH MONITOR WAIT STREAMS CLOSE WAIT STREAMS END BATCH COMPLETE Hold (Suspend Batch) BEGIN HOLD IN HOLD
Terminate TERMINATING
Description Halted: idle, await Define command Wait for the sampler to reset Halted: await Start command Wait for streams to start Remain in Batch Monitor stage Remain in Batch Monitor stage Remain in Batch Monitor stage Remain in Batch Monitor stage Remain in Batch Monitor stage Remain in Batch Monitor stage Halted: await next stage from the supervisory system Wait for station flowrate = zero Wait for streams to return Idle Print report, return to Idle
Suspend flow, wait for station flowrate = 0 Halted: await Start or Terminate command
Wait streams Idle, go to Station Idle
C.2.2 Retrospective Batch Totals
The system applies retrospective totals adjustment at the stream.
Stream batching can run as a standalone (self contained) batch or as part of a station (supervised) batch. Both methods support retrospective K-factor or meter factor corrections at any stage during the batch after flow has started.
By enabling user stages, you can also apply retrospective totals adjustments after a stream batch completes and before it returns to the Idle stage. This passes control to the Wait Recalc Command stage rather than the Batch Complete stage (at the station). The sequence then halts at this stage until the Recalc command is received.
For example, if you modify the K-factor or meter factor after a prove, the system adjusts each batch total as follows:
Adjusted total = batch total * ratio
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-27
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Where: ratio = old K-factor / new K-factor
or ratio = new meter factor / old meter factor
or ratio = GVC1 / GV1 where: GVC1 = corrected gross volume for period 1. GV1 = gross volume for period 1.
Further K-factor / meter factor changes do not invoke this correction but the S600+ uses the latest value in subsequent totalisations. Retrospective adjustment is not applied to Indicated Volume totals.
Note: This adjustment method is not valid for applications using Kfactor / meter factor linearisation because it is difficult to derive an accurate historic K-factor / meter factor.
C.2.3 Batch Alarms
The system generates alarms at the following events:
Batching not permitted.
Pre-warning of batch approaching completion.
Batch complete.
C.2.4 Batch Report
The system provides two reports, volume or mass K-factor. The Kfactor units (pulses/volume or pulses/mass) determines which report generates.
Following is a sample batch report:
================================================================================
1
BATCH REPORT
24/01/2011 12:51:50
================================================================================
================================================================================ STATION 1
RETROSPECTIVE K-factor APPLIED POWER OFF DURING BATCH
CLEAR CLEAR
GUVOL GSVOL MASS IVOL
CUMULATIVE 1651.28 1651.28 1238.46 1651.28
BATCH
200.92 m3 200.92 Sm3 150.70 tonne 200.92 m3
FLOW RATE 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
m3/h Sm3/h t/h m3/h
PULSE
0
0
================================================================================
STREAM 1 NAME:
LIQ TURBINE
LOCATION: LINE 01
C-28
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
RETROSPECTIVE K-factor APPLIED POWER OFF DURING BATCH
GUVOL GSVOL MASS IVOL
CUMULATIVE 825.64 825.64 619.23 825.64
BATCH
NO CLEAR
100.46 m3 100.46 Sm3
75.35 tonne 100.46 m3
FLOW RATE 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
m3/h Sm3/h t/h m3/h
PULSE
0
0
OBS PRESS (MTR):
OBS TEMP (MTR) :
MTR DENS
:
GUVOL FR
:
100.00 100.00 750.00 31752.74
! barg ! Deg.C ! kg/m3
m3/h
================================================================================
STREAM 2 NAME:
LIQ TURBINE
LOCATION: LINE 02
RETROSPECTIVE K-factor APPLIED POWER OFF DURING BATCH
NO CLEAR
GUVOL GSVOL MASS IVOL
CUMULATIVE 825.64 825.64 619.23 825.64
BATCH
100.46 m3 100.46 Sm3
75.35 tonne 100.46 m3
FLOW RATE 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
m3/h Sm3/h t/h m3/h
PULSE
0
0
OBS PRESS (MTR):
OBS TEMP (MTR) :
MTR DENS
:
GUVOL FR
:
100.00 100.00 750.00 31755.50
! barg ! Deg.C ! kg/m3
m3/h
================================================================================
STREAM 3 NAME:
LIQ TURBINE
LOCATION: LINE 03
RETROSPECTIVE K-factor APPLIED POWER OFF DURING BATCH
NO CLEAR
GUVOL GSVOL MASS IVOL
CUMULATIVE 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
BATCH
0.00 m3 0.00 Sm3 0.00 tonne 0.00 m3
FLOW RATE 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
m3/h Sm3/h t/h m3/h
PULSE
0
0
OBS PRESS (MTR):
OBS TEMP (MTR) :
MTR DENS
:
GUVOL FR
:
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
! barg ! Deg.C ! kg/m3
m3/h
================================================================================
C.3 Interface Detection
The Interface Detection logic detects and flags the boundary between two adjacent products, determining the end of one product and the beginning of another.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-29
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
By comparing product densities in the same unit of volume, the algorithm notes changes in density over a fixed amount of product. When the algorithm detects a change above a certain configurable limit it marks an interface. To filter out small changes in density or sudden density spikes, the algorithm performs an average rate of change check
The rate of change of density varies depending on the process conditions and the relative density of the two products.
Figure C-7 uses three products (A, B, and C) in an idealized example of how the algorithm works. The density of Product A (100 [units of density]) is much closer to the density of Product Cs density (700 [units of density]) than to the density of Product B (900 [units of density]). Accordingly, the transition from Product A to Product B is much faster (in terms of units of volume) than the transition from Product A to Product C. The rates of change can be seen in Figure C8:
From Product A to Product B: ROC = 200 [units of density / units of volume]
From Product A to Product C: ROC = 100 [units of density / units of volume]
The algorithm computes the average rate of change (ROC) over a fixed number of volume units. If the computed ROC is greater than the operator-entered ROC, the algorithm considers this variation as a change in product and flags it. Otherwise, the algorithm ignores the change.
Figure C-7 shows three different operator-set ROC limits (indicated by the dashed lines): 300 [units of density / units of volume], 150 [units of density / units of volume], and 75 [units of density / units of volume].
The three operator-set limits depict three different situations. If the ROC limit is set too high for the product density changes for that particular pipeline then the algorithm ignores all transitions. If the ROC limit is set too low then the algorithm picks up most transitions but it might also pick up unwanted transitions. For the algorithm to work properly, you must set the ROC lower than the lowest product transitions for that mix.
C-30
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure C-7. Idealised Example of Transitions between Products with Different Densities
Configuration To use Interface Detection, you must first enable the option in the Config600 configuration file. You enable the option only at the station level, although you can configure the option for each station independently.
Once started the option runs in the background, monitoring density changes in a fixed volume of product and flagging any interfaces.
You define three parameters to configure the interface detection algorithm, which you access either through the S600+'s front panel or web browser.
To access the parameters select Operator > Station (number) > Batch DENS I/F. The parameters are:
ROC Identifies the minimum density rate of change for which an interface should be flagged. Specify the parameter in units of density divided by units of volume. The algorithm ignores all density variations below this limit. See Figure C-7.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-31
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure C-8. Interface Detection Algorithm (ROC Parameter at 0.31 kg/m6)
Line Pack Identifies the amount of product that has to pass between the moment a valid interface has been detected at the station densitometer and the moment the interface reaches the metering point (stream flow meter). Specify the line pack as a volume. If you set the parameter to 0, the algorithm flags the interface as soon as the algorithm detects it at the station densitometer. See Figure C-9.
C-32
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure C-9. Interface Detection Algorithm (Line Pack at 300 m3)
Stability Wait: Indicates when to flag the interface. This option has two valid values, Clear or Set. Select Clear to flag an interface as soon as the density rate of change is above the limit the ROC parameter specifies. Select Set to have the algorithm wait until the average density rate of change drops below the value the ROC parameter specifies and stabilizes before flagging the interface, after a valid rate of change has been detected. Figure C-10 shows an example of the interface detection algorithm running with the stabilization option active. The algorithm flags the interface only after the average rate of change has fallen under the ROC value.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-33
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure C-10. Interface Detection Algorithm (Stabilisation Option On)
C.4 Batch Recalculation
Batch recalculation enables the recalculation of batch totals based on a newly modified observed density, observed temperature, observed pressure, meter temperature, meter pressure, or modified BS&W (for crude oil). It should be noted that the recalculation of totals takes into account the units and rounding option configured for the product.
When triggered by an operator-issued recalculation command, the system recalculates the totals for the selected batch ticket according to specific settings. You can run recalculation for a specific day for a selected batch, for either the current batch or for a chosen historical batch ticket. You can enter values for the density, temperature, pressure, meter temperature, meter pressure and BS&W manually or use the flow weighted average.
C.4.1 Displays
The following tables describe the displays associated with the batch totals recalculation. Access the displays through the S600+ front panel or web browser.
For station recalculations the menus can be found by navigating to Operator>Station n> (where "n" is the station number). For stream recalculations navigate to Operator>Station n> (where "n" is the stream number).
The BCH CURR BASE DENS (Station), BCH CURR BS&W (Station), BCH CURR RECALC (Station), BCH
C-34
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
CURR RESULTS (Station and Stream), BCH CURR MTR TEMP (Stream) and BCH CURR MTR PRESS (Stream) menu locations include the displays which deal with the current batch ticket.
The RECALL TICKET (Station), RECALL BASE DENS (Station), RECALL BS&W (Station), RECALL RECALC (Station), RECALL RESULTS (Station and Stream), RECALL MTR TEMP (Stream) and RECALL MTR PRESS (Stream) menu locations include the displays which deal with a recalled historic batch ticket.
Some of the displays behave differently although they are the same for both current and recalled batch tickets. These differences are described below. To distinguish between the CURRENT and the RECALL displays, their descriptions were prefixed with C. and R., respectively.
Table C-7. BATCH CONTROL and RECALL TICKET Displays
Display TICKET NUMBER
BATCH NUMBER DAY NUMBER OFFICIAL/ UNOFFICIAL
DELIVERY/ RECEIPT
Description
Identifies the batch ticket the recalculation will be performed on. The number must be a valid batch ticket. If viewed from the BATCH CONTROL menu this location indicates the number of the current/last ticket and cannot be changed. If viewed from the RECALL TICKET menu you can change the value of this location to select the desired batch ticket for which the calculations should be performed.
Sets the operator entered batch number
Indicates the total number of days in the currently selected batch ticket
Determines whether this is an official or unofficial batch. Valid values are OFFICIAL (the BATCH NUMBER increases by one) or UNOFFICIAL (the BATCH NUMBER is 0). This must be set before starting a batch. Found only a station level in the BATCH CONTROL menu.
Determines whether this is a delivery or a receipt. Values: YES, NO. This must be set before starting a batch. Found only at station level in the BATCH CONTROL menu.
Table C-8. BCH CURR BASE DENS and RECALL BASE DENS Displays
Display BASE DENSITY (BATCH)
RECALC BASE DENSITY
BASE DENSITY SOURCE
Description
Shows the flow weighted average value for the selected batch.
Note: This value is found only at the station level.
Sets the base density value that the system uses in recalculations. The system uses this value only if you set the BASE DENSITY SOURCE field to RECALC.
Note: This value is found only at the station level.
Sets the source for base density that the system uses for recalculations. Valid values are ORIGINAL (use the flow weighted average as the source for the base density) or RECALC (use the value in the RECALC BASE DENSITY field as the source for base density). The default is ORIGINAL. Note: This value is found only at the station level.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-35
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Display
BASE DENSITY (DAY NO.)
Description
Shows, for each day, the base density of the selected batch. Note: This value is found only at the station level.
Table C-9. STATION BCH CURR BS&W and RECALL BS&W Displays
Display BS&W (BATCH)
RECALC BS&W
BS&W SOURCE
Description
Shows the BS&W flow weighted average value for the selected batch.
Note: This value is found only at the station level.
Sets the BS&W value that the system uses in recalculations.
Note: This value is found only at the station level.
Sets the source for BS&W that the system uses for recalculations. Valid values are ORIGINAL (use the flow weighted average) or RECALC (use the value in the RECALC BS&W field). Note: This value is found only at the station level.
BS&W (DAY NO.)
Shows, for each day, the BS&W of the selected batch. Note: This value is found only at the station level.
Table C-10. STATION BCH CURR MTR TEMP and RECALL METER TEMP Displays
Display MTR TEMP (BATCH)
RECALC MTR TEMP
MTR TEMP SOURCE
Description
Shows the flow weighted average value for the selected batch.
Note: This value is found only at the stream level.
Sets the observed temperature value that the system uses in recalculations.
Note: This value is found only at the stream level.
Sets the source for the meter temperature that the system uses for recalculations. Valid values are ORIGINAL (use the flow weighted average) or MANUAL (use the value set in the RECALC MTR TEMP field). Note: This value is found only at the stream level.
MTR TEMP (DAY NO.)
Shows, for each day, the meter temperature of the selected batch. Note: This value is found only at the stream level.
MTR PRESS (BATCH)
RECALC MTR PRESS
MTR PRESS SOURCE
Shows the flow weighted average value for the selected batch.
Note: This value is found only at the stream level.
Sets the meter pressure value that the system uses in recalculations.
Note: This value is found only at the stream level.
Sets the source for the meter pressure that the system uses for recalculations. Valid values are ORIGINAL (use the flow weighted average) or RECALC (use the value set in the RECALC MTR PRESS field). Note: This value is found only at the stream level.
MTR PRESS (DAY NO.)
Shows, for each day, the meter pressure of the selected batch. Note: This value is found only at the stream level.
C-36
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Table C-11. BCH CURR RECALC and RECALL RECALC Displays
Display RECALC COMMAND ACCEPT COMMAND
RECALC DAY
Description
Enables the system to perform recalculation with the currently set values. Valid values are YES (enable) and NO (disable).
Marks the current values as accepted for the selected batch. Valid values are ACCEPT (prevent further recalculations) and IDLE (allow further recalculations).
Note:
Also a new Batch Ticket is generated which indicates that the recalculated values have been accepted.
Shows the day of the selected batch for which the recalculations will be performed.
Note: This value is found only at the station level.
DIAGNOSTIC
Shows a diagnostic message for the batching and recalculation functionality.
Table C-12. STATION/STREAM BATCH CURR RESULTS and RECALL RESULTS Displays
Display OBS DENSITY
OBS TEMP
OBS PRESS
BS&W
BASE DENSITY
BATCH IVOL/ GUVOL/GSVOL/ NSVOL/SWVOL
BATCH MASS/ NMASS
TOTAL HOURS
Description
Shows the observed density for each day of the selected batch ticket and the flow weighted average value for the whole batch.
Note: This value is found only at the station level.
Shows the observed temperature for each day of the selected batch ticket and the flow weighted average value for the whole batch.
Note: This value is found only at the station level.
Shows the observed pressure for each day of the selected batch ticket and the flow weighted average value for the whole batch.
Note: This value is found only at the station level.
Shows the recalculated BS&W for each day of the selected batch ticket and the recalculated flow weighted average for the whole batch.
Note: This value is found at both the stream and station levels.
Shows the recalculated base density for each day of the selected batch ticket and the base flow weighted average for the whole batch.
Note: This value is found only at the station level.
Shows the recalculated volume totals for the currently selected batch ticket. It should be noted that the recalculation of totals takes into account the units and rounding option configured for the product.
Note: This value is found at both the stream and station levels.
Shows the recalculated mass totals for the currently selected batch ticket. It should be noted that the recalculation of totals takes into account the units and rounding option configured for the product.
Note: This value is found at both the stream and station levels.
Indicates the duration in hours of the currently selected batch.
Note: This value is found at both the stream and station levels.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-37
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Display TOTAL MINUTES FLOWING HOURS FLOWING MINUTES IDLE HOURS IDLE MINUTES
MTR DENSITY
MTR TEMP
MTR PRESS
BASE DENSITY
Description
Number of minutes elapsed in addition to the TOTAL HOURS location.
Note: This value is found at both the stream and station levels.
Number of hours during which there was flow for the selected batch.
Note: This value is found at both the stream and station levels.
Number of minutes during which there was flow for the selected batch in addition to the FLOWING HOURS location.
Note: This value is found at both the stream and station levels.
Number of hours during which there was no flow for the selected batch.
Note: This value is found at both the stream and station levels.
Number of minutes during which there was no flow for the selected batch in addition to the IDLE HOURS location.
Note: This value is found at both the stream and station levels.
This set of displays shows the recalculated meter density for each day of the selected batch ticket and the recalculated flow weighted average for the whole batch.
Note: This value is found only at the stream level.
This set of displays shows the recalculated meter temperature for each day of the selected batch ticket and the recalculated flow weighted average for the whole batch.
Note: This value is found only at the stream level.
This set of displays shows the recalculated meter pressure for each day of the selected batch ticket and the recalculated flow weighted average for the whole batch.
Note: This value is found only at the stream level.
This set of displays shows the recalculated base density for each day of the selected batch ticket and the recalculated flow weighted average for the whole batch.
Note: This value is found only at the stream level.
C.4.2 Batch Ticket
The system generates a batch ticket at the beginning of a batch. The system updates a ticket with new data and generates a new instance of the ticket under the REPORTS>BATCH TICKET location when a batch ends, when a recalculation occurs, or when you issue an Accept command on a selected ticket.
Each ticket has a number you can use for recalling the ticket. This number appears on the same row as the ()DELIVERY or ()RECEIPT TICKET flags and can be read from a generated batch ticket.
Use the Recall Ticket option to recall the latest instance of the batch ticket.
C-38
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: Data copied from the meter contains values irrespective of whether that meter has been flowing. These include (but are not limited to) Average Meter Factor, Average K Factor, Average Meter Density, CTLM, CPLM and CCFM.
Following is an example of a batch ticket.
================================================================================
528
BATCH END TICKET
10/04/2012 06:28:48
================================================================================
(X)DELIVERY
OR ( )RECEIPT TICKET 264
(X)OFFICIAL
OR ( )UNOFFICIAL
LOCATION:
Pickering
( )RECALC ALL
OR ( )ACCEPTED
Company :Emerson Process Management
================================================================================
STATION 1
1. BATCH NUMBER
2. TYPE OF LIQUID
3. METER CLOSING (DATE/TIME)
4. METER OPENING (DATE/TIME)
5. NET DELIVERY/RECEIPT TIME
6. METER CLOSING IVOL
7. METER OPENING IVOL
8. PULSE
9. IVOL
10. GUVOL
11. AVERAGE FLOW RATE
12. OBS DENSITY
13. OBS TEMP
14. OBS PRESS
15. BS&W
16. BASE DENSITY AT 15.0 Deg.C
17. GSVOL
18. MASS
19. NSVOL
AT 15.0 Deg.C
20. NETT MASS
21. SW VOL
16
A CRUDE
10/04/2012 06:28:45
10/04/2012 06:12:04
0: 16
h : m
1072502 m3
1068499 m3
400232
4002 m3
4002.320 m3
14394.0 m3/h
750.0000 ! kg/m3
11.00 ! Deg.C
1.00 ! barg
60.000 ! %
750.0 ! kg/m3
4010.3300 Sm3
3007.74 tonne
1604.130 Sm3
1203.11 tonne
2406.2200 m3
================================================================================
STREAM 1 NAME:
LIQ TURBINE
LOCATION: LINE 01
METER MANUFACTURER: METER MODEL: METER SERIAL NUMBER: METER TAG NUMBER: METER SIZE: K-FACTOR:
METER MAN METER MODEL METER SERIAL NO METER TAG 0.00 mm 100.0 pls/m3
PRIMARY FLOW COMPUTER: 00:A0:D8:F8:00:24
1. NET DELIVERY/RECEIPT TIME 2. METER CLOSING IVOL 3. METER OPENING IVOL 4. PULSE 5. IVOL 6. GUVOL 7. AVERAGE FLOW RATE 8. AVERAGE METER FACTOR 9. MTR TEMP 10. MTR PRESS 11. CTLM 12. CPLM 13. CCFM 14. GSVOL 15. MASS
0: 16
h : m
268125 m3
267125 m3
100058
1001 m3
1000.580 m3
3598.5 m3/h
1.0000
12.00 ! Deg.C
2.00 ! barg
1.0033
1.0002
1.0035
1004.0600 Sm3
753.04 tonne
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-39
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
16. NSVOL 17. NETT MASS 18. SW VOL
AT 15.0 Deg.C
401.620 301.22
602.4400
Sm3 tonne m3
================================================================================
STREAM 3 NAME:
LIQ TURBINE
LOCATION: LINE 03
METER MANUFACTURER: METER MODEL: METER SERIAL NUMBER: METER TAG NUMBER: METER SIZE: K-FACTOR:
METER MAN METER MODEL METER SERIAL NO METER TAG 0.00 mm 100.0 pls/m3
PRIMARY FLOW COMPUTER: 00:A0:D8:F8:00:24
1. NET DELIVERY/RECEIPT TIME
2. METER CLOSING IVOL
3. METER OPENING IVOL
4. PULSE
5. IVOL
6. GUVOL
7. AVERAGE FLOW RATE
8. AVERAGE METER FACTOR
9. MTR TEMP
10. MTR PRESS
11. CTLM
12. CPLM
13. CCFM
14. GSVOL
15. MASS
16. NSVOL
AT 15.0 Deg.C
17. NETT MASS
18. SW VOL
0: 16
h : m
268125 m3
267125 m3
100058
1001 m3
1000.580 m3
3598.5 m3/h
1.0000
13.00 ! Deg.C
3.00 ! barg
1.0022
1.0003
1.0025
1003.0800 Sm3
752.31 tonne
401.230 Sm3
300.92 tonne
601.8500 m3
================================================================================
STREAM 5 NAME:
LIQ TURBINE
LOCATION: LINE 05
METER MANUFACTURER: METER MODEL: METER SERIAL NUMBER: METER TAG NUMBER: METER SIZE: K-FACTOR:
METER MAN METER MODEL METER SERIAL NO METER TAG 0.00 mm 100.0 pls/m3
PRIMARY FLOW COMPUTER: 00:A0:D8:F8:00:24
1. NET DELIVERY/RECEIPT TIME
2. METER CLOSING IVOL
3. METER OPENING IVOL
4. PULSE
5. IVOL
6. GUVOL
7. AVERAGE FLOW RATE
8. AVERAGE METER FACTOR
9. MTR TEMP
10. MTR PRESS
11. CTLM
12. CPLM
13. CCFM
14. GSVOL
15. MASS
16. NSVOL
AT 15.0 Deg.C
17. NETT MASS
18. SW VOL
0: 16
h : m
268125 m3
267125 m3
100058
1001 m3
1000.580 m3
3598.5 m3/h
1.0000
14.00 ! Deg.C
4.00 ! barg
1.0011
1.0004
1.0015
1002.0900 Sm3
751.56 tonne
400.840 Sm3
300.63 tonne
601.2600 m3
C-40
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
================================================================================
STREAM 7 NAME:
LIQ TURBINE
LOCATION: LINE 07
METER MANUFACTURER: METER MODEL: METER SERIAL NUMBER: METER TAG NUMBER: METER SIZE: K-FACTOR:
METER MAN METER MODEL METER SERIAL NO METER TAG 0.00 mm 100.0 pls/m3
PRIMARY FLOW COMPUTER: 00:A0:D8:F8:00:24
1. NET DELIVERY/RECEIPT TIME
0: 16
h : m
2. METER CLOSING IVOL
268125 m3
3. METER OPENING IVOL
267125 m3
4. PULSE
100058
5. IVOL
1001 m3
6. GUVOL
1000.580 m3
7. AVERAGE FLOW RATE
3602.1 m3/h
8. AVERAGE METER FACTOR
1.0000
9. MTR TEMP
15.00 ! Deg.C
10. MTR PRESS
5.00 ! barg
11. CTLM
1.0000
12. CPLM
1.0005
13. CCFM
1.0005
14. GSVOL
1001.1000 Sm3
15. MASS
750.83 tonne
16. NSVOL
AT 15.0 Deg.C
400.440 Sm3
17. NETT MASS
300.34 tonne
18. SW VOL
600.6700 m3
================================================================================
C.4.3 Recalculating Batches
The S600+ can store data for up to eight historic batches. When the history is full, a new batch overwrites the oldest batch data. You cannot recalculate a batch after it's been overwritten, although you may still be able to view its reports depending on your reports settings.
Each batch can hold up to 20 days of data; you can adjust this using PCSetup. You can recall each batch in the history and adjust different batch parameters, based either on a certain day or on the whole batch. Each time you trigger a recalculation, the system generates a new batch report that shows the recalculated data for the whole batch.
The system saves batch data on a per day basis. A day is considered to start at the base time 1 hour and is 24 hours long. To change the base time 1 hour, select System Settings on the top menu and then select Report Setup on the left-hand side menu. Scroll to the BASETIME 1 display and change the value.
This section gives step by step descriptions of the batching and batch recalculation procedures for the S600+. The batching procedure described here refers to the Volume Load batch type, but most of the steps apply to the other batch types, as well.
Configuring the To configure the settings for the next batch:
Next Batch
1. Select Operator from the top menu.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-41
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. On the left side menu, select Station 1>Bch Stack.
Figure C-11. Batch Configuration
3. Select Batch Slot 1. 4. Enter the PRODUCT NUMBER. 5. Enter the BATCH QUANTITY. Once this quantity has flowed
through the meter, the batch ends.
Note: Refer to section Batch Stack for further details about editing the batch stack.
Starting a Batch To start a batch: 1. Select Operator from the top menu. 2. On the left side menu, select Station 1>Batch Control. 3. Scroll to the right until you see the BATCH TYPE, and set the Status to VOL LOAD.
Note: You can only change the BATCH TYPE while the batch is idle. It cannot be changed while the batch is running.
C-42
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure C-12. Volume Load
4. Under the same menu, navigate to the BATCH COMMAND display and set its Status to BATCH DEFINED.
Note:
Setting the status to BATCH DEFINED generates the Batch Start report. You can view the report by selecting Reports on the top menu and then selecting Batch Ticket on the left side menu. This action also triggers a Load Started alarm. You can check this by selecting Alarms on the top menu.
Figure C-13. Batch Defined
5. From the same display, select the START command. The status on the STAGE NO display page changes to IN NOMINAL.
Note: Use of the START command is required only when the batch type is either VOL LOAD or MASS LOAD. DIGIN, INTERFACE, BASETIME, CONT VOL LOAD, and CONT MASS LOAD batch types only need the DEFINE command to start and run a batch.
Stopping a Batch You can stop a VOL LOAD batch type either manually or automatically. To stop the batch at any time, use the TERMINATE command:
1. Select Operator from the top menu.
2. On the left side menu, select Station 1>Batch Control.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-43
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3. On the BATCH COMMAND display change the status to TERMINATE.
4. For the batch to stop automatically, the REQUIRED QUANTITY must be achieved.
Note: The end of a batch generates a BATCH END ticket. To view the ticket, click Reports on the top menu and the click Batch Ticket on the left-hand side menu. Additionally, the end of a batch triggers a Load Complete alarm. You can check this by clicking on Alarms on the top menu.
Viewing Batch To view information about the running batch, select Operator on the Information top menu. Select Station 1 on the left side menu to view the Batch Control, Bch Curr Base Ds, Bch Curr Bs&W, Bch Curr Recalc, and Bch Curr Results menus. These menus provide information regarding the current running batch or the last stopped batch.
Figure C-14. Batch Information
To review data about historical batches, use the Recall Ticket, Recall Base Dens, Recall Bs&W, Recall Recalc, and Recall Results menus. You can find these menus be selecting Operator > Station 1. To see data for a batch, click on Recall Ticket. Go to the TICKET NUMBER display and change the value to the ticket number you wish to review. All the Recall menus update with information about the recalled ticket.
C-44
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure C-15. Batch Information
You can find the same menus at stream level as well.
Notes:
To get a ticket number, select Reports on the top menu and access the Batch Ticket menu on the left hand side menu. Choose a report and on the header of the report you can see the ticket number next to the RECEIPT TICKET flag.
Both the Btch Curr and the Recall menus have a similar layout.
The Bch Control/Recall Ticket menus provide information about ticket number, batch number, the number of days elapsed since the start of the batch and the ACCEPT command.
The Bch Curr Base Dens/Recall Base Dens, Bch Curr Bs&W/Recall Bs&W, Bch Curr Mtr Temp/Recall Mtr Temp, Bch Curr Mtr Press/Recall Press menus show information about input batch parameters such as BASE DENSITY, BS&W, METER TEMPERATURE and METER PRESSURE. The data is stored as a weighted average and is displayed on a per day basis. You can also change the values of any of these parameters to issue a recalculated batch ticket.
The Bch Curr Recalc/Recall Recalc menus include the RECALC COMMAND, the ACCEPT COMMAND, the RECALC DAY and the DIAGNOSTIC display. These are used when performing a recalculation on the current or a historic batch ticket.
The Bch Curr Results/Recall Results menus show information about the batch, such as quantities accumulated during the batch or recalculated quantities and the duration of the batch.
Recalculating a To recalculate a current batch:
Current Batch
1. Select Operator on the top menu.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-45
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Select Station 1>Batch Control on the left-hand side menu. The TICKET NUMBER display shows the ticket number of the current running batch or of the previously stopped batch, if no batch is running now.
Figure C-16. Ticket Number 3. Select Bch Curr Recalc on the left side menu and scroll to the
RECALC DAY display. Select the day you wish to recalculate (the example uses Day 2). Note: If the current batch is running you cannot recalculate
either the current day or the whole batch.
Figure C-17. Recalculate Day
4. To recalculate the batch with a new base density for day 2, go to the Operator menu, select Bch Curr Base Dens, and scroll to the BASE DENSITY (DAY NO) displays. This shows the original value for the base density on a given day or for the whole batch.
5. Scroll to the BASE DENSITY SOURCE display and change the status from ORIGINAL to RECALC.
6. To change the base density, scroll to the RECALC BASE DENSITY display and enter a new value.
C-46
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure C-18. Recalculate Base Density 7. Select Bch Curr Recalc on the left side menu. and scroll to the
RECALC COMMAND display. 8. Set the status to YES. This triggers a recalculation on the selected
batch with the changed parameter. A new batch ticket is triggered, reflecting the changes for the whole batch. The displays under the Bch Curr menus update with the new data. That is, the density on the selected day match the one we've entered previously, and the volumes for that day are recalculated. The totals for that batch update correspondingly.
Figure C-19. Recalculate Command
Note: Perform steps 1 through 8 for any of the other parameters which can be modified.
Recalculating To recalculate an historic batch:
an Historic Batch
Note: This procedure assumes that at least one batch is available in batch history.
1. To recalculate a historic batch ticket, you need the batch ticket number. To get the batch ticket number, go to Reports on the top menu and access Batch Ticket on the left side menu. Choose a report. The header of the report displays the ticket number next to the RECEIPT TICKET flag.
2. Go to Operator on the top menu, then Station 1 on the left side menu and click on Recall Ticket. On the TICKET NUMBER display enter the batch ticket number from the batch ticket. Once
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-47
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
you've entered the ticket number the Recall displays updates with the data particular to that ticket.
Figure C-20. Recall Ticket Number
3. Go to the Recall Recalc menu and scroll to the RECALC DAY display. Select the day to recalculate. This example selects day two and recalculates the batch with an new base density for day two.
Note: If the batch you've recalled is running you cannot recalculate either the current day or the whole batch.
Figure C-21. Day Selection
4. To see the original value for the base density on a given day or for the whole batch, go to Operator > Station 1 > Recall Base Density and scroll to the BASE DENSITY (DAY NO.) displays.
C-48
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure C-22. Base Density Display 5. Scroll to the BASE DENSITY SOURCE display and change the
status from ORIGINAL to RECALC. 6. To change the base density, scroll to the RECALC BASE
DENSITY display and enter a new value.
Figure C-23. Base Density Display
7. Select Operator > Station 1 > Recall Recalc and set the status on the RECALC COMMAND display to YES. This triggers a recalculation on the selected batch with the changed parameter. A new batch ticket will be triggered, reflecting the changes for the whole batch. The displays under the Recall menus update with the new data. That is, the density on the selected day will match the one we've entered previously and the volumes for that day will be recalculated. The totals for that batch update correspondingly.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-49
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure C-24. Base Density Display
Note: Perform steps 1 through 7 for any of the other parameters which can be modified.
C.5 Flow Switching
Flow switching is a station-based function that the batching process uses. In a standalone mode, flow switching determines how many streams are required to flow in order to maintain a required overall flowrate, depending on the availability of each stream. If a stream fails, the stream can be closed and a new available stream given its remaining total. Regulating flow is achieved by passing flowrate setpoints to the streams to control flowrate using PID control to drive flow control valves.
Note: Station flow switching calculations require that you configure stream flow switching calculations.
C.5.1 Station Flow Switching Setup
Flow switching settings define the method and parameters to determine which streams should open and close. You can set up flow switching for a station and then disable it until you need this option. 1. Select Flow Switching from the hierarchy menu. The Flow
Switching screen displays.
C-50
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Revised January-2021
Figure C-25. Station Flow Switching screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Enabled Algorithm Flowrate Setpoint Loading Units
Auto Close First
Manually Open First Manually Close Last Deviation Time
Post Move Time
Description Disables flow switching for the station. The default is checked (flow switching is Enabled). Sets the algorithm to open and close streams. The default is 1. Sets, if applicable, the required station flowrate. Identifies whether the Measured Flowrate is Mass (=1) or Volume (=0) units. The default is Volume. Identifies whether to close highest priority stream first (checked) or to close lowest priority stream first. Note: This does not apply to Algorithm 1. Opens the first stream manually if selected.
Closes the last stream manually if selected.
Sets the minimum time the flowrate must be above or below the limit before automatically opening or closing a stream. Sets a delay time after opening or closing a valve before moving to the monitor flow stage.
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
Batching
C-51
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
C.5.2 Stream Flow Switching Setup
Flow switching settings define the priorities and number of valves present, as well as control loop specifics. You can set up flow switching for a stream and then disable it until you need this option. 1. Select Flow Switching from the hierarchy menu. The Flow
Switching screen displays.
C-52
Figure C-26. Stream Flow Switching screen
2. Complete the following fields.
Field Priority
Number of Valves Disabled
Setpoint PID Loop
Description
Sets the priority of the stream. The higher the number, the higher the stream's priority. For example, 2 has priority over 1, and 3 has priority over 2. The default is 1.
Sets the number of valves the stream controls. The default is 2.
Disables flow switching for the selected stream. The default is unchecked (flow switching is disabled).
Sets, if applicable, the ideal flowrate required on the selected stream.
Identifies the PID loop used to control the flowrate of the selected stream. Click to display all valid options. The default is I/O 01 PID CNTRL 1.
Note: Define flowrate band settings for each stream on the Flowrate screen.
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3. Click in the hierarchy menu when you finish defining settings. A confirmation dialog displays.
4. Click Yes to apply your changes. The PCSetup screen displays.
C.5.3 Flow Switching Algorithms
This section details flow switching algorithms, which provide alternative rules for deciding which streams to use: Algorithm 1 compares the stream flowrate against its low/high
limits. Algorithm 2 compares the station flowrate against the summated
low/high limits. Algorithm 3 compares the station flowrate setpoint against the
summated low/high limits. Algorithm 4 is the same as algorithm 3 and also distributes a
setpoint to each open stream to spread the flowrate evenly.
Algorithm 1 For each open stream, the system compares the observed flow rate against the low and high bands. If the lowest priority stream's flow rate is less than its low band for the specified Deviation Time and more than one stream is online, the stream closes. If only one stream is online, flow switching takes no action.
If the lowest priority stream's high band is exceeded for the specified Deviation Time and at least one other stream is available for opening, the flow switching then opens the available highest priority stream. If no stream is available for opening, an alarm occurs but flow switching performs no switching actions.
This algorithm requires you to carefully initialize the stream low and high bands to avoid continuously switching between open and close stages.
Sample settings could include:
Stream 1: low band = 150 m3/hr, high band = 300 m3/hr Stream 2: low band = 140 m3/hr, high band = 280 m3/hr Stream 3: low band = 150 m3/hr, high band = 300 m3/hr
These settings then set the ranges:
One online stream has the range 150 to 300 m3/hr Two online streams have the range 290 to 580 m3/hr Three online streams have the range 440 to 880 m3/hr
Algorithm 2 This algorithm uses the stream low and high bands but compares the station observed flow rate against the current operating range (that is, the summated low and high bands of the online streams).
If the observed station flow is less than the summated low range for the specified Deviation Time and two or more streams are open, Config600 closes the lowest priority open stream. If only one stream is online, Config600 takes no action.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-53
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
If the observed station flow is greater than the summated high range for the specified Deviation Time and another stream is available for opening, Config600 opens the highest priority available stream. If no stream is available for opening, an alarm occurs but Config600 performs no switching actions.
Algorithm 3 This algorithm uses the stream low and high bands but compares the station flow rate setpoint against the current operating range (that is, the summated low and high bands of the online streams).
If the station flow setpoint is less than the summated low range for the specified Deviation Time and two or more streams are open, Config600 closes the lowest priority open stream. If only one stream is online, Config600 performs no actions.
If the station flow setpoint is greater than the summated high range for the specified Deviation Time and another stream is available for opening, then Config600 opens the highest priority available stream. If no stream is available for opening, an alarm occurs but Config600 performs no switching actions.
Algorithm 4 This algorithm is the same as Algorithm 3, but adds the ability to distribute the flow rate setpoint across the online streams.
Having determined the streams that should be open, Config600 uses the following formula for the distribution of the flow setpoint to each open (or opening) stream:
Station offset is the station setpoint minus (sum of low bands of streams to be opened).
Station span is the (sum of high bands of streams to be opened) minus (sum of low bands of streams to be opened).
For each open (or opening) stream:
Stream span is stream high band minus low band. Stream setpoint is stream low band plus (station offset / station
span) multiplied by stream span. The following example uses the cited parameters, a setpoint of 350 m3/hr, and streams 1 and 2 are open;
For stream 1, low band = 150 m3/hr and high band = 300 m3/hr. For stream 2, low band = 140 m3/hr and high band = 280 m3/hr. Station offset is 350 - (150+140) = 60. Station span is (300+280) - (150+140) = 290. Stream 1 span is 300 150 = 150. Stream 1 setpoint is 150 + (60 / 290) * 150 = 181 m3/hr. Stream 2 span is 280 140 = 140. Stream 2 setpoint is 140 + (60 / 290) * 140 = 169 m3/hr.
Based on this, the station downloads a value of 181 m3/hr to the setpoint for stream 1 and 169 m3/hr to the setpoint for stream 2.
Flow Switching Stages You associate a station with a stream using the stream flow switching configuration table, which means that the stream shares a number with the station (displayed as Station No). This enables you to dynamically allocate a single stream to different loads.
C-54
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Prior to performing stage handling, flow switching performs a set of calculations to determine:
The number of streams open for each station. The number of streams still available for opening. The highest priority stream for opening (algorithm-dependent). The highest priority stream for closing (algorithm-dependent). The number of open streams. The number of streams still available for opening.
For each station, the flow switching stage assumes one of the following values, remaining in that stage until an event occurs.
Display IDLE
MONITOR FLOW
OPEN 1ST STREAM
OPEN STREAM
CLOSE STREAM
Description
On issue of the Start-up command:
If no streams are open and at least one stream is available, proceed to Open First Stream.
If at least one stream is on line then proceed to Monitor Flow.
On issue of the Shutdown command, proceed to Shutdown.
On issue of the ESD command, proceed to Emergency Shutdown.
Invoke the configured switching algorithm (this may invoke a change of stage number).
If the manual Open First Stream parameter is not set, issue Line Open command to the stream marked for opening.
On issue of the Shutdown command, proceed to Shutdown.
On issue of the ESD command, proceed to Emergency Shutdown.
When the stream has opened, proceed to Post Open Delay.
Issue Line Open command to the stream marked for opening.
On issue of the Shutdown command, proceed to Shutdown stage.
On issue of the ESD command, proceed to Emergency Shutdown.
When the stream has opened, proceed to Post Open Delay.
Issue Line Close command and zero the flow rate setpoint for the stream marked for closing.
On issue of the Shutdown command, proceed to Shutdown.
On issue of the ESD command, proceed to Emergency Shutdown.
When the stream has closed, proceed to Post Close Delay.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-55
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Display CLOSE LAST STREAM
POST OPEN DELAY
POST CLOSE DELAY
SHUTDOWN
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN
Description
If the manual close last stream parameter is not set then issue line close command and zero the flow rate setpoint for the stream marked for closing.
On issue of the shutdown command, proceed to Shutdown.
On issue of the ESD command, proceed to Emergency Shutdown.
When the stream has closed, proceed to Delay after Closing.
On issue of the Shutdown command, proceed to Shutdown.
On issue of the ESD command, proceed to Emergency Shutdown.
On expiration of the delay timer, proceed to Monitor Flow.
On issue of the shutdown command, proceed to Shutdown stage.
On issue of the ESD command, proceed to Emergency Shutdown stage.
On expiration of the delay timer, if all streams are now closed, proceed to Idle else proceed to Monitor Flow.
On issue of the Startup command, proceed to Monitor Flow
On issue of the ESD command, proceed to Emergency Shutdown.
Issue Line Close command and zero the flow rate setpoint for the next stream marked for closing.
When the marked stream closes:
If there is only one more stream to close then proceed to Close Stream, else
Repeat this stage until there is only one stream left to close.
At issue of the Startup command, proceed to Monitor Flow.
Issue Line Close command and zero the flow rate setpoint for all the open streams. When all streams are closed, proceed to Idle.
C.5.4 Alarms
Flow switching does not raise any alarms.
C.6 Batch Stack
Batching allows you to configure and edit a stack of 16 products, called a "batch stack." Each batch stack element is called a "batch slot" and each batch slot holds the relevant information for batching (product number, batch ID, customer number, batch type, meter type, quantities, and flowrates).
A batch slot is considered empty or undefined if the product number is not set (that is, the product number is zero).
C-56
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Each time a batch starts, the system copies information from data in stack position #1 and uses it in the batching logic. The first batch slot is then deleted and the rest of the slots advance one position. This is "advancing the stack." As a result, after the batch starts, the first slot element contains the data for the next batch.
When the system advances the stack, it ignores empty or undefined batch slots and uses the first defined slot it encounters.
If the batch is continuous, when the batch ends the system automatically advances the batch stack and copies the next element so that the data can be used for the next batch. Advancing a continuous volume load or mass load batch is done only if the required quantity for the next product is non-zero. If the required quantity for the next batch stack slot is zero, the batch stops and an alarm occurs to mark that the batch stopped.
A volume or mass load batch cannot start if there is no required quantity, and the system will reject the start command. For a batch stack of only one product, regardless of the batching type, advancing is not performed. The defined slot is not deleted when starting or restarting a batch and the data defined in that slot is used for all batches. However, the data is copied every time a start or restart is performed. This allows you to edit the slot information.
If you select batching when creating a configuration file, the objects needed for the batch stack are added by default, but they are not initialised. Batching will not work until the batch stack slots are configured, and all batch commands will be rejected.
You can configure the batch stack slots four different ways: through the Batch Stack screen in the PCSetup Editor, by directly editing the configuration file through System Editor, at run-time from the front panel of the S600+, and at run-time from the Webserver.
C.6.1 Configuring the Batch Stack Through the PCSetup Editor
The Batch Stack screen in the PCSetup Editor allows you to configure batch slots. You can edit the parameters of a batch slot, delete a batch slot entirely, or copy the parameters of a batch slot to another slot in the stack.
To configure the Batch Stack through the PCSetup Editor:
1. Select Batch Stack from the hierarchy menu. The Batch Stack screen displays.
Note: The screen below shows available fields for all options in the Actions pane.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-57
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure C-27. Batch Stack
2. Click to select the batch slot you want to change. The Action pane displays.
3. To delete the selected batch slot, select Delete in the Action pane and click Ok to delete the selected batch slot. The system displays a confirmation screen. Click Yes to delete the batch slot.
4. To copy parameters from the selected batch slot to another, select Copy to in the Action pane, click to select the batch slot to which the parameters are copied, and click Ok. The system displays a confirmation screen. Click Yes to copy the batch slot.
5. To modify parameters for the selected batch, select Edit. The Batch Slot Editor displays.
C-58
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6. Complete the following fields:
Field Slot
Batch id
Meter type
Description
This read-only field displays the number of the currently selected batch slot.
Sets the Batch ID for the selected batch slot. Valid values are 0 through 65535.
Determines whether this is a delivery or a receipt. Possible values are:
RECEIPT The batch is a receipt.
Batch type
Product number Customer Batch Start Top-off quantity Start flow-rate Nominal
Top flow-rate Pre-alarm
DELIVERY The batch is a delivery.
Determines whether this is an official or unofficial batch. Possible values are:
UNOFFICIAL The BATCH NUMBER is 0.
OFFICIAL The BATCH NUMBER increases by 1.
Sets the product number used by the selected batch slot. Valid values are 1 through 16. Sets the customer number for the selected batch slot. Valid values are 0 through 65535. Sets the total quantity of the batch.
Sets the start quantity of the batch. The system uses the flow rate set in the Start flowrate field at the beginning of the batch until this quantity is met. Sets the top-off quantity of the batch. The system uses the flow rate set in the Top flowrate field for the remainder of the batch when this quantity is remaining. Sets the flow rate the system uses at the start of the batch until the quantity set in the Start field is met. Sets the nominal flow rate for the selected batch slot. The nominal flow rate is used after Start flow rate and before the Top flow-rate. Quantities and Flowrates are always positive values. Sets the flow rate the system uses at the end of the batch when the quantity set in the Topoff quantity field is remaining. Quantities and Flowrates are always positive values. Sets a percentage of the entire batch amount that, when reached, raises an alarm. Valid values are 0% to 100%.
7. Click Save to apply your changes.
C.6.2 Configuring the Batch Stack with the System Editor
When you use the System Editor to configure the batch stack, it is recommended that you first define all the data batch ID, product number, customer number, quantities, flowrates, and pre-alarm percentage for each slot.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-59
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1. Select Start > Programs > Config600 3.3 > System Editor.
2. Select Station X > KPINTARR.
3. Double-click STN0X NEXT PRODUCT and edit Fields 1 through 16 for the corresponding batch stack slots. This array holds the product type of each stack slot. Valid values are 0 through 16. Values 1 through 16 define correct product types. If using product number 0, the slot is considered as undefined.
4. Select OK to save changes.
5. Double-click STN0X NEXT CUST and edit Fields 1 through 16 for the corresponding batch stack slots. This array holds the Customer number for each stack slot. Valid values are 0 through 65535.
6. Select OK to save changes.
7. Double click STN0X NEXT BATCH ID and edit Fields 1 through 16 for the corresponding batch stack slots. This array holds the Batch ID for each stack slot. Valid values are 0 through 65535.
8. Select OK to save changes.
9. Double-click STN0X MTR TYPE and edit Fields 1 through 16 for the corresponding batch stack slots. This array holds the Meter Type for each stack slot. Valid values are 0 and 1.
10. Select OK to save changes.
11. Double-click STN0X BCH TYPE and edit Fields 1 through 16 for the corresponding batch stack slots. This array holds the Batch Type for each stack slot. Valid values are 0 and 1.
12. Select OK to save changes.
13. Select Station X > KPREALARR.
14. Edit the fields of arrays STN0X START QTY, STN0X REQD QTY, STN0X TOP QTY, STN0X F/R START, STN0X F/R NOMINAL, STN0X F/R TOPOFF, and STN0X PRE ALARM to edit the properties corresponding to (in order): Start quantity, Required quantity, Top-off quantity, Start flowrate, Nominal flowrate, Top-off flowrate, Pre-alarm percentage.
Valid values for STN0X PRE ALARM are between 0.0 and 100.0 while values for all of the other arrays should be positive.
C-60
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure C-28. Config600 System Editor (1)
Figure C-29. Config600 System Editor (2)
C.6.3 Configuring the Batch Stack through the Front Panel Display
1. Navigate to OPERATOR > STATION X > BCH STACK. 2. The display shows all the batch stack slots in numerical order.
Press the Left and Right keys to navigate through the slots.
BATCH SLOT 2
BATCH ID 43 PRODUCT 3 D LUBE OILS
EXIT *
Figure C-30. Batch Slots
3. Press CHNG to edit the selected slot.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-61
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1. MOVE TO TOP 2. MOVE TO SLOT 3. MOVE DOWN 4. INS BCH 5. INS BCH TO SLOT 6. COPY TO SLOT 7. EDIT SLOT 8. DELETE SLOT
Figure C-31. Slot Editing Options
4. Press the number key that corresponds to the action you want to perform.
C.6.4 Slot Edit Commands (Front Panel Display)
The slot edit commands you can access through the Front Panel Displays have the following functions: MOVE TO TOP / MOVE DOWN
These commands move the stack slot up and down by one slot, respectively. If you are editing the first slot, the system disables the MOVE TO TOP command; if you are editing the last slot, the system disables the MOVE DOWN command. MOVE TO SLOT Select MOVE TO SLOT to access a display that enables you to set the destination slot. When moving a slot, if the destination slot number is smaller than the source slot number, the system moves the source up the stack, to the destination slot. All slots from the destination slot to the source slot are moved down one position and the source slot is copied over the destination slot. Similarly, if the destination slot number is greater than source slot number, the system moves the source down in the stack, to the destination slot. All slots from the source to the destination are moved up one position and the source slot is copied over the destination slot. For example, if you have a batch stack slot order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and you move slot 6 to slot 3, the resulting batch stack slot order would be 1, 2, 6, 3, 4, 5. INS BCH / INS BCH TO SLOT The system disables these commands if the batch stack is full. When you select INS BCH TO SLOT the system displays a screen that changes the slot in which the data is inserted:
ENTER SLOT NUMBER:
VALUE: 14
ENTER - NEXT CLEAR - CANCEL
Figure C-32. Insert Batch Command
C-62
Batching
Revised January-2021
BATCH ID
VALUE:
12345
*
ENTER - NEXT CLEAR - CANCEL
PRODUCT NUMBER
VALUE:
1
*
ENTER - NEXT CLEAR - CANCEL
START QUANTITY
VALUE(m3): 0.0000 *
ENTER - NEXT CLEAR - CANCEL
NOMINAL FLOWRATE
VALUE(m3/h): 0.0000 *
ENTER - NEXT CLEAR - CANCEL
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Following this screen or selecting INS BCH TO SLOT you are taken to a succession of screens where you can change the data (batch ID, meter type, batch type, product number, customer number, batch quantity, start quantity, top-off quantity, start flowrate, nominal flowrate, top-off flowrate, and pre-alarm percentage) for the new slot. Press ENTER to move to the next screen; press LEFT to return to the previous screen.
METER TYPE
BATCH TYPE
VALUE:
VALUE:
RECEIPT
*
OFFICIAL
*
ENTER - NEXT CLEAR - CANCEL
CUSTOMER NUMBER
VALUE:
12345
*
ENTER - NEXT CLEAR CANCEL
BATCH QUANTITY
VALUE(m3): 0.0000 *
ENTER - NEXT CLEAR - CANCEL
TOP-OFF QUANTITY
VALUE(m3): 0.0000 *
ENTER - NEXT CLEAR - CANCEL
START FLOWRATE
VALUE(m3/h): 0.0000 *
ENTER - NEXT CLEAR - CANCEL
TOP-OFF FLOWRATE
VALUE(m3/h): 0.0000 *
ENTER - NEXT CLEAR - CANCEL
PRE-ALARM PERCENTAGE
VALUE(%): 0.0000 *
ENTER - NEXT CLEAR - CANCEL
ENTER - NEXT CLEAR - CANCEL
Each of these displays shows the current value of the field. Press CHNG to access a screen showing the current value and the range limits, and where you can insert a new value using the numerical keys. The LEFT key works as backspace, deleting one character at a time.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-63
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Each data field has its own specific entry limits: Batch ID and Customer number range is 0 to 65535; Product number and batch slot range is 1 to 16; Quantities and Flowrates are always positive values, Pre-alarm percentage range is 0 to 100%. If you enter a value which is out of the valid range for the respective field, the system displays an error message and returns you to the screen showing the current value of the field. Press ENTER to accepts the new data; press CLEAR to abort a data change. After you press ENTER or CLEAR, the system returns you to the screen, showing the field you edited.
CURRENT VALUE: 0.00
% LIMITS OF ENTRY:
100.000
0.000
ENTER NEW VALUE: 54.23
Figure C-33. Entering Data
CURRENT VALUE: 0.00
% LIMITS OF ENTRY:
100.000
0.000
ENTER NEW VALUE: ABORTED
Figure C-34. Pressing CLEAR
CURRENT VALUE: 0.00
% LIMITS OF ENTRY:
100.000
0.000
OUT OF RANGE
Figure C-35. Input out of Range
Press ENTER in the last screen (Pre-alarm percentage) to accept the data entered in the previous screens.
C-64
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
If you have selected INS BCH, the system accepts data to the next free slot in the batch stack. That is, if the next free slot is slot number 14, after you complete all the steps to insert a batch slot and press ENTER, the system saves data in slot number 14. If you select INS BCH TO SLOT and the slot in which you want to insert data is not empty, the system moves all the slots following that slot towards the first empty slot by one position, filling up the first empty slot in the stack, in order to prevent the loss of nonempty batch stack slots. For example, if the batch stack slots 1 through 10 are defined and you want to insert a batch slot to slot number 5, the system moves slots 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10 down one position (to positions 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11) and places the data entered in the INS BCH TO SLOT procedure in slot number 5. Pressing CLEAR at any time in the screen succession displays a confirmation screen, verifying that you want to abort the insert for the new batch slot. Aborting takes you back to the batch stack slot screens.
ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO ABORT?
ENTER - ABORT CLEAR - CANCEL
Figure C-36. Abort Confirmation Screen
If a batch has started and it advances while you are editing the data in the screen sequence, when you press ENTER in the last screen the system displays an error message showing that the batch stack has advanced. The system then discards all the changes.
BATCH STACK ADVANCE WHILE EDITING
CHANGES DISCARDED
PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE
Figure C-37. Changes Discarded Message
COPY TO SLOT When you select this option, the system displays a screen where you can enter the destination slot:
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-65
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
COPY SLOT 4 RANGE 1..16
5
ENTER - ACCEPT CLEAR - CANCEL
Figure C-38. Copy to Slot
If the destination slot is not empty, the system displays a confirmation screen and gives you the option to overwrite the destination slot. If you choose not to overwrite the destination slot, the system makes no changes.
COPY TO SLOT 5
SLOT IS NOT EMPTY OVERWRITE DATA?
ENTER - ACCEPT CLEAR - CANCEL
Figure C-39. Confirmation Screen
EDIT SLOT When you select this option, the system displays a screen sequence that enables you to change the data of the batch slot. The succession of displays and functionality is identical to the one for the INS BCH command. Please see the section describing the INS BCH command for details on functionality. When you press ENTER at the last screen of the sequence (Pre-alarm percentage), the system stores the new data in the selected batch slot without displaying a confirmation screen.
If a batch has started and it advances while you are editing the data in the screen sequence, when you press ENTER in the last screen, the system displays an error message indicating that the batch stack has advanced. The system then discards all the changes.
BATCH STACK ADVANCED WHILE EDITING
CHANGES DISCARDED
PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE
Figure C-40. Changes Discarded
DELETE SLOT When you select this option the system displays a screen prompting you to confirm the deletion of the selected slot:
C-66
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
DELETE SLOT 5
ENTER - ACCEPT CLEAR - CANCEL
Figure C-41. Delete Confirmation When deleting a slot, if there are valid slots in the batch stack after the deleted slot, the system advances the remaining valid batch slots one position in the batch stack. For example, if the first ten slots are configured and you delete slot number 4, the system moves slots 5 to 10 up one position so that slot 5 moves to slot 4, slot 6 moves to slot 5, and so on. If there is a continuous batch running (volume load or mass load) and there is only one batch slot defined, the system disables the DELETE command.
C.6.5 Configuring the Batch Stack from the Webserver
1. Navigate to OPERATOR > STATION X > BCH STACK. 2. Navigate to the batch slot you wish to edit.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-67
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure C-42. Batch Slots
3. Select EDIT; the system displays a page showing the edit options for the selected slot:
Figure C-43. Slot Editing Options
4. Press the numeric keys corresponding to the command you wish to perform.
C.6.6 Slot Edit Commands (Webserver)
The slot edit commands you can access through the Webserver have the following functions: MOVE TO TOP / MOVE DOWN / MOVE TO SLOT
Select any of these options and click OK to move the slot is moved
C-68
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
to the top of the batch stack, to move the slot down by one position, or to move the slot to a specific location (as defined in the MOVE TO SLOT field).
Whenever you move a slot, the system does not lose o overwrite data. If the number of the destination slot is smaller than the number of the source slot, the source moves up in the stack, to the destination slot. All slots from the destination slot to the source slot move down one position and the system copies the source slot over the destination slot. If the number of the destination slot is greater than the number of the source slot, the system moves the source down in the stack, to the destination slot. All slots from the source to the destination move up one position and the system copies the source slot over the destination slot. For example, you have a batch stack slot order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and you move slot 6 to slot 3, the resulting batch stack slot order would be 1, 2, 6, 3, 4, 5.
The system validates the text field which contains the destination slot. If the value is not the correct range (1 to 16), the system displays an error message below the OK and CANCEL buttons and resets the text field to the default value, which is the slot number of the selected slot.
If you select the first slot in the batch stack, the system disables the MOVE TO TOP command. If you select the last slot in the batch stack, the system disables the MOVE DOWN command.
INS BCH / INS BCH TO SLOT When you select this option, you enter the slot number where the new slot will be inserted in the text field next to the command name.
After you click OK, the system displays another pages with all the data that needs to be edited for a new slot. All the text fields (except the SLOT NUMBER) are pre-loaded with default values.
The system disables these two commands if the batch stack is full (that is, all 16 slots are defined).
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-69
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
When you select INS BCH, the system disables the SLOT NUMBER text field and sets it to the number of the next free slot in the batch stack. When you select INS BCH TO SLOT, the system displays the value entered on the previous page in the SLOT NUMBER text field and enables it for editing. The system performs range checks on all data, according to each field's specific entry limits: Batch ID and Customer number range is 0 to 65535; Product number and batch slot range is 1 to 16; Quantities and Flowrates are always positive values; and Pre-alarm percentage range is 0 to 100%.
C-70
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
When you press OK, if at least one of the fields is out of range, the system displays an error message ("Error data out of range") on the bottom of the screen. Additionally, the system highlights those fields in orange and resets them to 0.0.
If the batch stack advances while you are inserting a new batch, the system displays an error indicating that the batch stack has advanced. The system then discards all changes.
COPY TO SLOT When you select this option and click OK, the system copies the selected slot to the destination slot entered in the text field next to the COPY TO SLOT text.
If the slot is invalid, the system displays an error message on the bottom of the page and resets the value in the text field set to the default value, which is the slot number of the selected slot.
If the destination slot is not an empty slot, the system then prompts you to overwrite the data in the destination slot.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-71
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
EDIT SLOT When you select this option and click OK, the system displays a page where you can edit all the data for a batch stack slot. Note that the SLOT NUMBER of the edited slot is not available for editing and is disabled.
The functionality for this option is identical to the INS BCH options; refer to that description for further details of use.
The system pre-loads all the text fields with the current data of the selected batch stack slot so there is no chance of accidentally changing important data.
When you click OK the system saves new data to the selected batch stack slot.
DELETE SLOT When you select this option and click OK, the system deletes the selected batch stack slot and moves the rest of the batch stack slots below the deleted slots up one position. The system automatically inserts a new empty slot in the last position of the batch stack as slot number 16. No confirmation screen follows the selection of the DELETE command.
If there is a continuous volume load or mass load batch running and only one batch stack slot is defined, the system disables the DELETE command.
C.7 Basic Batching Setup
If basic batching is required (i.e. single product with the start / stop commands being issued manually (i.e. no enterable required batch quantity and no recalculation) then the following steps should be followed.
1. Create a batching application containing "station batching with product table" and "stream batching with product table basic".
2. Configure Product 1 in the station product table with the correct information.
3. Configure the station batching as VOL LOAD or MASS LOAD.
4. Configure Slot 1 in the batch stack with a large batch quantity (9,999,999,999) and product id for Product 1.
5. Configure the stream batching as supervised.
6. Update the displays so that only the station batch command, station batch stage and batch number are visible.
C-72
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
7. Remove all station product displays (if required the data for product 1 can remain).
8. Remove all the station batch current displays (Stack, Interface, Control, Base Dens, BSW, Recalc and Results).
9. Remove all the station batch recall displays (Ticket, Base Dens, BSW, Recalc, Results).
10. Remove all the stream batch current displays (Mtr Temp, Mtr Press, Avg KF and Results).
11. Remove all the stream batch recall displays (Mtr Temp, Mtr Press, Avg KF and Results).
12. To start a batch the operator should use the Batch Define command. The batch totals will then start incrementing once flow is received (note the batch status will remain at Batch Defined for the duration of the batch).
13. The batch can be stopped at any time by the operator entering the Batch Terminate command.
Revised January-2021
Batching
C-73
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual [This page is intentionally left blank.]
C-74
Batching
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Appendix D Field Calibration
In This Chapter
D.1 Analogue Input Calibration............................................................... D-1 D.1.1 Calibration Control Requirements ..................................... D-2 D.1.2 Linear Two-point ADC Device Calibration......................... D-3 D.1.3 Non-linear 3-point Curve-fit ADC Device Calibration ........ D-6 D.1.4 Non-linear 3-point Curve Calibration Control Mechanism. D-7 D.1.5 Offset PRT Device Calibration .......................................... D-8 D.1.6 Linear 2-point Device PRT Calibration .............................. D-8 D.1.7 Non-linear 3-point Curve-Fit PRT Device Calibration ....... D-9
D.2 Analogue Output Calibration .......................................................... D-10 D.2.1 Calibration Control Requirements ................................... D-10 D.2.2 DAC Device Calibration................................................... D-11
This appendix describes the hardware calibration you perform after production to determine the relationship between analogue converter counts and current.
D.1 Analogue Input Calibration
Do not confuse process calibration with the production hardware calibration you perform on all IO modules subsequent to manufacturing. You perform hardware calibration after production to determine the relationship between analogue converter counts and current in mA for Analog to Digital Converters (ADCs) or converter counts and resistance in the case of Platinum Resistance Thermometers (PRTs). Hardware calibration process essentially "fixes" each individual input channel the way in which the S600+ measures the current or resistance.
Process calibration does not alter this counts-to-measure relationship.
In the case of ADCs, there are two methods of calibration available:
1. The first method defines the relationship between the perceived input current (as measured by the analogue converter using the hardware calibration data) and plant transducer engineering units. Even after a process calibration, the analogue device may not produce a current reading corresponding to the true circuit current. However, the device should perform a conversion to provide an accurate representation of the engineering units associated with the transducer applied to the analogue input.
2. The second method (current calibration) calibrates the input current applied at the transducer and the perceived raw current (as measured by the analogue converter using the hardware calibration data), this uses mA for both.
In the case of the PRTs, you can use the process calibration to modify the conversion or to bypass the temperature lookup tables which the S600+ normally employs.
Revised January-2021
Field Calibration
D-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
D.1.1
Calibration Control Requirements
The firmware automatically controls the calibration mechanism internally to ensure that the system integrity is not impaired during the calibration process. The firmware applies the following three conditions during a calibration:
1. The operational status of any PID control loops during calibration. Any loop employing a field input device which is under calibration should be automatically disabled. Thus if the control loop is in auto mode, the control output remains at the last generated state until the field device returns to normal operation. This safeguard does not extend to locking the output if the control loop is in manual mode or switching to manual mode during calibration. Manual mode overrides the loop disable.
2. You cannot perform part of a calibration and effectively impair the integrity of field input data. The calibration control task uses a configurable timer to monitor all calibration operations. If you perform part of a calibration but do not complete the process prior to timeout, the control task reverts all calibration data to its initial state prior to the start of the calibration operation. The calibration terminates and an error displays. The default timeout setting for an online calibration is 15 minutes; the default timeout setting for a manual calibration is 30 seconds. These times are configurable. For more information contact Technical Support.
3. For an online calibration, you are not required to manually change the mode of a field input prior to initiating the calibration sequence. The calibration control mechanism ensures that the mode switches to a known safe state prior to continuing. For a manual calibration the mode is unchanged. The following table presents the online calibration mode changes for the ADCs and PRTs.
Pre-calibration Mode Measured Keypad Average LastGood Keypad-F Average-F LastGood-F
Calibration Mode LastGood Keypad Average LastGood Keypad Average LastGood
At the end of an online calibration (or if the calibration was aborted), the mode of the ADC or PRT automatically reverts back to the precalibration mode. For manual calibrations, the mode remains unchanged.
D-2
Field Calibration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Notes:
You can change a device's mode during calibration. The calibration package updates calibration specific object data, (such as Gradient or Offset) only when a coherent data set is available.
The online calibration mode reads values directly from the ADC. The manual calibration mode, uses default values for a 4-20 mA or 1.5 Vdc ADC (hi-current = 20, mid_current = 12 and lo_current = 4) and for a 0-20mA or 0-5 Vdc ADC (hi-current = 20, mid_current = 10 and lo_current = 0).
D.1.2 Linear Two-point ADC Device Calibration
This method enables you to calibrate an ADC device across a linear range by entering high and low range process setpoints as well as an offset adjustment factor. You can then define the setpoints and offset making the calibration device/process dependent.
Operator Interface To calibrate the linear two-point ADC device:
1. Navigate to an analogue input channel requiring calibration.
2. Move to the low range calibration display page. This page has an entry for the low range setpoint, an indication of the associated current reading at this setpoint, and the current measured value associated with this device.
ADC Channel 1
Meter Temperature
CALIB (LO/CUR/MEAS)
xxxx.xx
DegF *
xxxx.xx
mA
xxxx.xx
DegF
P12.3 <of 10>
3. Once you stabilise the plant device to the low range process setting, enter a low range setpoint. When you press Return the flow computer takes and stores a current reading for the selected channel. The display page then indicates the low range setpoint and the associated low range current reading. For current calibration, the low range setpoint and the associated low range raw current value display.
ADC Channel 1
Meter Temperature
CALIB (LO/CUR/MEAS)
23.00
DegF *
10.87
mA
23.54
DegF
P12.3 <of 10>
Revised January-2021
Field Calibration
D-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4. Repeat this process for the high range setpoint.
ADC Channel 1
Meter Temperature
CALIB (HI/CUR/MEAS)
89.00
DegF *
18.27
mA
89.94
DegF
P12.4 <of 10>
5. Include an additional device offset adjustment if required. You define this by setting the plant device to its zero position and then navigating to the offset display for the relevant analogue input. The system then prompts you to accept a change request which initiates the acquisition of an offset current reading. Following are examples of the display before and after the acquisition of the offset calibration.
ADC Channel 1
Meter Temperature
CALIB (OFF/CUR/MEAS)
0.00
DegF
4.63
mA
1.07
DegF
P12.5 <of 10>
ADC Channel 1
Meter Temperature
CALIB (OFF/CUR/MEAS)
1.07
DegF
4.63
mA
0.00
DegF
P12.5 <of 10>
Notes:
You can perform the low- and high-range calibrations in any order; there is no need to perform the low range calibration prior to the high range. The only requirement is that you complete both points within the calibration timeout period.
The calibration is deemed to have initiated when the first setpoint is entered. At this point the device mode is handled and any associated control loops are disabled.
Analogue Input The calibration process uses the following fields:
Object (ADC)
ADC Object Field LastGood field LOrange field LOcurrent field
Description Holds the last good value read from the analogue input. The lowest value of the inputs total range to use in the calibration. The measured current at the LOrange point.
Data Type [double] [double] [double]
D-4
Field Calibration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
ADC Object Field HIrange field
HIcurrent field Gradient field Offset field
Offset adjustment field Calibration control field
Description The highest value of the inputs total range to be used in the calibration. The measured current at the HIrange point. The gradient of the line between the LO and Hi range setpoints. The actual offset value used by the ADC, updated after a successful calibration. The offset entered during the calibration.
Keeps track of the calibration status.
Where:
HIScale LOScale Gradient =
HICurrent LOCurrent
Offset = LOScale (LOCurrent x Gradient)
Data Type [double]
[double] [double] [double]
[double]
[char]
The calibration control field is used to perform controlled data readings from the analogue input channels at the IO board.
Then each analogue input current reading to plant value conversion is performed using:
Value = (Current x Gradient) + Offset OffsetAdjust
Two-Point Control Mechanism
The background control task auto-configures regardless of the IO configuration of a particular system. This task monitors each of the ADC object's calibration control fields. The task remains idle until a control field is set indicating a calibration request has been made.
The calibration control field of each of the system's ADC input objects identifies what type of modification has been requested. The displays task is responsible for marking the calibration control field when:
You change the LOrange field. You change the HIrange field.
Revised January-2021
Field Calibration
D-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
You perform an offset adjustment data capture.
When you modify the calibration control field the control task:
Captures and places the current reading into the relevant data field. The previous settings are also logged internally.
Initiates a calibration timer that monitors the operator. Continues the timer until you set the second of the two points.
Note: If the timer completes before you set the second point, the device reverts to its original (logged) settings and the calibration cycle aborts with an error (and associated alarm).
Updates the relevant gradient, offset, and offset adjustment fields each time you perform a complete calibration cycle. The internally held previous settings will be discarded at this point.
When you make changes, an audit trail print initiates to indicate that a device calibration change has been performed. This trail indicates:
The operator making the change. The change made. The old setting for this field. The new setting for this data field.
This printout uses a system event generation mechanism and as such has the same data attributes as any other system event. Additionally, the system stores the event data in the event record buffer (as is the case with all events generated by the flow computer). For example:
27/10/1998 13:48:58 S600+ USER: super-2
27/10/1998 13:50:03 S600+ Meter Temp MODE
27/10/1998 13:50:03 S600+ Meter Temp CALIB
27/10/1998 13:54:17 S600+ Meter Temp CALIB
27/10/1998 13:54:17 S600+ Meter Temp CALIB
27/10/1998 13:54:17 S600+ Meter Temp CALIB
27/10/1998 13:56:55 S600+ Meter Temp OFFSET
27/10/1998 13:56:59 S600+ Meter Temp CALIB
27/10/1998 13:50:03 S600+ Meter Temp MODE
27/10/1998 14:02:00 S600+ USER: super-2
LOGGED IN LEVEL: 3 LASTGOOD LO SETPT CHANGED FROM 0.0 TO 23.0 LO CURR CHANGED FROM 0.0 TO 10.87 HI SETPT CHANGED FROM 100.0 TO 89.0 HI CURR CHANGED FROM 20.0 TO 18.27 CHANGED FROM 0.0 TO 1.07 CYCLE COMPLETED MEASURED LOGGED OUT
D.1.3
Non-linear Three-point Curve-fit ADC Device Calibration
This method enables you to calibrate an ADC device across a nonlinear range by entering high, mid, and low range process setpoints. The selection of these setpoints is user definable and thus device/process dependent.
D-6
Field Calibration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: The three-point calibration process is not applicable to ADC11/12.
Operator Interface
You perform this calibration in exactly the same manner as the linear two-point calibration with the exception that there is one additional display to accommodate the mid range calibration setpoint. Again, the order in which you define the three setpoints is irrelevant.
Analogue Input The calibration process uses the following fields:
Object (ADC)
ADC Object Field
Description
LastGood field
Holds the last good value read from the analogue input.
LOrange field
The lowest value of the inputs total range to use in the calibration.
LOcurrent field
The measured current at the LOrange point.
MIDrange field
The mid range value of the inputs total range to use in the calibration.
MIDcurrent field The measured current at the MIDrangepoint.
HIrange field
The highest value of the inputs total range to be used in the calibration.
HIcurrent field
The measured current at the HIrange point.
CurveCoeff_1 field
Calculated coefficient 1 value for use in the curve fit equation.
CurveCoeff_2 field
Calculated coefficient 2 value for use in the curve fit equation.
CurveCoeff_3 field
Calculated coefficient 3 value for use in the curve fit equation.
Calibration control Keeps track of the calibration status. field
Data Type [double] [double] [double] [double] [double] [double] [double] [double]
[double]
[double]
[char]
Then each analogue input current reading to plant value conversion is performed using the second order curve equation:
Value = (Coef 1 x Current2) + (Coef 2 x Current) + Coef 3 OffsetAdjust
D.1.4
Non-linear Three-point Curve Calibration Control Mechanism
The displays task marks the calibration control field when:
You change the LOrange field. You change the MIDrange field. You change the HIrange field. You perform an offset adjustment data capture.
When you modify the calibration control field of an ADC / PRT input the control task:
Captures and places the current reading into the relevant data field and internally logs the previous settings.
Initiates a calibration timer that monitors the operator. Continues the timer until you set the last of the three points.
Note: If the timer completes before you set the third point, the device reverts to its original (logged) settings and the calibration cycle aborts with an error (and associated alarm).
Revised January-2021
Field Calibration
D-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Recalculates the relevant polynomial coefficients and offset adjustment fields each time you perform a complete calibration cycle. The system also discards internally held previous settings at this point.
The audit trail functionality is similar to that produced by the linear method with the exception that a midpoint change event exists.
D.1.5 Offset PRT Device Calibration
The conversion types (OffsetCalDIN and OffsetCalUS) enable you to crudely calibrate a PRT device across the linear range defined by the respective resistance-to-temperature lookup tables. The calibration consists of simply determining an offset from the temperature table conversion value.
Operator Interface The operator performs the calibration in exactly the same manner as required for the ADC calibration offset point defined previously.
PRT Input Object The calibration process uses the following fields:
Offset adjustment field [double] Calibration control field [char]
Conversions are performed at the IO module using the following mechanism:
Resistance measured by IO board PRT input. Conversion made using selected lookup table. Temp_actual = Temp_conv Offset_adjust
Offset PRT Calibration The displays task, as with the ADCs, marks the calibration control Control Mechanism field when:
You performsan offset adjustment capture.
When you modify the calibration control field of a PRT the control task:
Captures the measured temperature reading into the offset data field.
Note: The previous offset value is discarded. Additionally, there is no timer associated with an offset calibration type device. Finally, the audit trail functionality is similar to that produced for ADCs.
D.1.6
Linear Two-point Device PRT Calibration
The two-point calibration of PRTs operates in the same manner as the two-point calibration for ADCs. The displays task is responsible for marking the calibration control field when:
You change the LOrange field. You change the HIrange field. You perform an offset adjustment data capture.
D-8
Field Calibration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
When you modify the calibration control field the control task: Captures and places the resistance reading into the relevant data
field and logs the previous settings. Initiates a calibration timer that monitors the operator. Continues a timer until you set the second of the two points.
Note: If the timer completes before you set the second point, the device reverts to its original (logged) settings and the calibration cycle aborts with an error (and associated alarm).
Updates the relevant gradient, offset and offset adjustment fields each time you perform a complete calibration cycle. The system also discards internally held previous settings at this point
The audit trail handling is the same as for ADCs.
PRT Input Object The calibration process uses the following fields:
PRT Object Field LastGood field LOrange field LOresist field HIrange field HIresist field Gradient field Offset field
Offset adjustment field Calibration control field
Description Holds the last good value read from the PRT input. The lowest value of the inputs total range to use in the calibration. The measured resistance at the LOrange point. The highest value of the inputs total range to use in the calibration. The measured resistance at the HIrange point. The gradient of the line between the LO and Hi range setpoints. The actual offset value used by the ADC, updated after a successful calibration. The offset entered during the calibration. Keeps track of the calibration status.
Where:
Data Type [double] [double] [double] [double] [double] [double] [double]
[double] [char]
HIScale LOScale Gradient =
HIResist LOResist
Offset = LOScale (LOResist x Gradient)
Then each analogue input current reading to plant value conversion is performed using:
Temperature = (Resist tance x Gradient) + Offset OffsetAdjust
D.1.7 Non-linear Three-point Curve-Fit PRT Device Calibration
This method enables you to calibrate a PRT device across a non-linear range by entering high, mid, and low range temperature setpoints. The selection of these setpoints is user definable and thus device dependent.
Operator Interface Same as the process for a three-point ADC calibration
PRT Input Object The calibration process uses the following fields:
Revised January-2021
Field Calibration
D-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
PRT Object Field LastGood field LOrange field LOresist field MIDrange field MIDresist field HIrange field HIresist field CurveCoeff_1 field CurveCoeff_2 field CurveCoeff_3 field Calibration control field
Description Holds the last good value read from the analogue input. The lowest value of the inputs total range to use in the calibration. The measured resistance at the LOrange point. The mid range value of the inputs total range to use in the calibration. The measured resistance at the MIDrangepoint. The highest value of the inputs total range to use in the calibration. The measured resistance at the HIrange point. Calculated coefficient 1 value for use in the curve fit equation. Calculated coefficient 2 value for use in the curve fit equation. Calculated coefficient 3 value for use in the curve fit equation. Keeps track of the calibration status.
Data Type [double] [double] [double] [double] [double] [double] [double] [double] [double] [double] [char]
Then each PRT input resistance reading to plant value conversion is performed using the second order curve equation:
Value = (Coef1 x Re sis tance2) + (Coef2 x Re sis tance) + Coef3 OffsetAdjust
D.2 Analogue Output Calibration
Do not confuse process calibration with the production hardware calibration you perform on all IO boards subsequent to manufacturing. You perform hardware calibration after production to determine the relationship between analogue converter counts and current in mA for Digital to Analog Converters (DACs). This calibration process essentially "fixes" each individual output channel the way in which the S600+ outputs the current.
Process calibration does not alter this counts-to-measure relationship.
In the case of DACs, calibration defines the adjustment made to the transducer engineer units before driving the output current. Thus; after process calibration, the analogue device produces a current equal to the one that would be produced by an ideal device.
D.2.1
Calibration Control Requirements
1. You must disconnect any device connected to the analog output. The current driven by the device changes abruptly during calibration and this might damage the device.
2. You cannot perform part of a calibration and effectively impair the integrity of field output data. The calibration control task uses a configurable time to monitor all calibration operations. Thus, if you perform part of a calibration but do not complete the process prior to timeout, the control task reverts all calibration data to its initial state prior to the start of the calibration operation. The calibration terminates and an error displays. The default timeout setting for the analog output calibration is 20 minutes. This time value is not configurable.
D-10
Field Calibration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
D.2.2 DAC Device Calibration
This is a linear calibration. The purpose is to adjust the current for the LOW and the HIGH values of the DAC's scale.
Operator Interface To calibrate the DAC device:
1. Connect a digital multimeter to read the current (mA) from the analog ouput that you will calibrate.
2. Navigate to an analog output channel requiring calibration.
3. Move to the calibration display page. Press CHNG to start calibration.
DAC01 I/O01 DAC 01
FOR CALIBRATION
PRESS
CHANGE
*
P51.3 <of 3>
4. Calibrate the low current. Use the up and down arrows from the keypad to adjust the current until the measured current is equal to the expected current (the one shown on the display). Once they are equal, press Enter to go to the next step.
DAC01 I/O01 DAC 01
UP DOWN ENTER CLEAR
4mA - INCREASE - DECREASE - NEXT - ABORT
Note: In the event the calibration offset limits are reached, the system displays a message for the operator on the display.
5. Calibrate the high current. Use the up and down arrows from the keypad to adjust the current until the measured current is equal to the expected current (the one shown on the display). Once they are equal, press Enter to go to the next step.
DAC01 I/O01 DAC 01
UP DOWN ENTER CLEAR
20mA - INCREASE - DECREASE - ACCEPT - ABORT
Revised January-2021
Field Calibration
D-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 by pressing keypad 2 until you can see no further improvement. When no improvement can be seen, select 1 (SAVE CHANGES) to save the changes.
DAC01 I/O01 DAC 01
CALIBRATION FINISHED
1. SAVE CHANGES 2. GO AGAIN 2. ABORT
7. In order to make the adjustments consistent through a cold start, perform a system backup. If you do not do this, you lose the changes on a cold start (although they persist on a warm start).
Notes:
The system saves values for a specific board. If you change the board, you must redo the calibration.
In steps 4 or 5, press CLEAR to abort the process.
DAC Control Mechanism
The calibration control task monitors each of the DAC objects calibration control fields. The task remains idle until a control field is set indicating a calibration request has been made. The calibration control field of each of the systems DAC objects identifies what type of modification has been requested. The display task is responsible for marking the calibration control field when:
You change the low calibration offset (calibrate the low current). You change the high calibration offset (calibrate the high current).
When you modify the calibration control field, the control task:
Captures and saves the current calibration offsets. Initiates a calibration time that monitors the operation. Continues the timer until you save the calibration changes.
Note: If the timer completes before you save the calibration changes, the device reverts to its original (logged) settings and the calibration cycle aborts with an error (and associated alarm).
Updates relevant offset adjustment fields each time you perform a complete calibration cycle. The system discards internally held previous settings at this point.
When you make changes, an audit trail print indicates that a device calibration has been performed and logs:
The operator making the change. The change made.
This printout uses a system event generation mechanism and has the same data attributes as any other system event. Additionally, the
D-12
Field Calibration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
system stores the event data in the event record buffer (as is the case with all events generated by the flow computer). For example:
11/02/2011 07:25:36 S600 FP USER: LOGGED IN LEVEL: 1 11/02/2011 07:26:45 S600 CALIBRATION STARTED FOR DAC01 11/02/2011 07:26:45 S600 CALIBRATION ABORTED FOR DAC01
11/02/2011 07:26:55 S600 CALIBRATION STARTED FOR DAC01 11/02/2011 07:46:55 S600 CALIBRATION TIMED OUT FOR DAC01 11/02/2011 07:46:55 S600 CALIBRATION ABORTED FOR DAC01
11/02/2011 07:50:45 S600 CALIBRATION STARTED FOR DAC01 11/02/2011 08:05:52 S600 CALIBRATION POINTS SAVED FOR DAC01
Revised January-2021
Field Calibration
D-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual [This page is intentionally left blank.]
D-14
Field Calibration
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Appendix E S600+ Database Objects and Fields
In This Chapter
E.1 Database Objects...............................................................................E-2 E.1.1 ADC ....................................................................................E-2 E.1.2 ALARM ...............................................................................E-3 E.1.3 ALARMHIST .......................................................................E-3 E.1.4 ARRTXT .............................................................................E-3 E.1.5 CALCALMITEM ..................................................................E-4 E.1.6 CALCTAB ...........................................................................E-5 E.1.7 CONFTAB ..........................................................................E-6 E.1.8 CUMTOT ............................................................................E-6 E.1.9 DACOUT ............................................................................E-6 E.1.10 DIGIO .................................................................................E-6 E.1.11 DOSETUP ..........................................................................E-7 E.1.12 DPCELL..............................................................................E-7 E.1.13 EVENTHIST .......................................................................E-8 E.1.14 FREQT ...............................................................................E-8 E.1.15 HART..................................................................................E-8 E.1.16 HARTTAB.........................................................................E-10 E.1.17 IOASSIGN ........................................................................E-10 E.1.18 KPINT ...............................................................................E-10 E.1.19 KPINTARR .......................................................................E-10 E.1.20 KPREAL ...........................................................................E-12 E.1.21 KPREALARR....................................................................E-12 E.1.22 KPSTRING .......................................................................E-13 E.1.23 LOG ..................................................................................E-13 E.1.24 MULTI ...............................................................................E-14 E.1.25 PID....................................................................................E-14 E.1.26 PIP ....................................................................................E-14 E.1.27 POP ..................................................................................E-14 E.1.28 PRDTOT...........................................................................E-14 E.1.29 PRT ..................................................................................E-15 E.1.30 PRV_CTL .........................................................................E-16 E.1.31 REP00 REP39...............................................................E-17 E.1.32 SECURITY .......................................................................E-17 E.1.33 SYSOBJ ...........................................................................E-17 E.1.34 TASK ................................................................................E-17 E.1.35 TOTTAB ...........................................................................E-17
E.2 Database Fields ...............................................................................E-18 E.2.1 Alarm Text Tables ............................................................E-19 E.2.2 Batching/Totalisation ........................................................E-19 E.2.3 DIGIO Setup Table ...........................................................E-19 E.2.4 DP Stack Type..................................................................E-19 E.2.5 DP Live/Check Mode Selection........................................E-19 E.2.6 DP Cut Off Mode ..............................................................E-19 E.2.7 Event History Type ...........................................................E-19 E.2.8 HART Poll Format ............................................................E-20 E.2.9 HART Master Mode..........................................................E-20 E.2.10 I/O (P144) PID Type .........................................................E-20 E.2.11 Prover (P154) Dual Chronometry Switch Pair..................E-20 E.2.12 Prover (P154) Type ..........................................................E-21 E.2.13 Password Tables ..............................................................E-21 E.2.14 Truth Tables .....................................................................E-21 E.2.15 Turbine Meter Setup Tables.............................................E-21
E.3 Mode Tables.....................................................................................E-21 E.3.1 ADC/PRT Modes (MODE TAB PLANTI/O) ......................E-21 E.3.2 CALC/ALM Auto Switch Modes........................................E-22 E.3.3 CALC/ALM modes (MODE TAB CALC)...........................E-22 E.3.4 Density Transducer Modes (MODE TAB DENS IP).........E-22 E.3.5 DP Modes (MODE TAB DP STACK) ...............................E-22
Revised January-2021
Database Objects and Fields
E-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual E.3.6 HART Modes (MODE TAB PLANTI/O) ............................E-23
This appendix provides a alphabetic listing of the database objects you can access through the Connect Wizard, which is part of the Reports Editor, Modbus Editor, LogiCalc Editor, Display Editor, and System Editor.
E.1 Database Objects
This section provides an alphabetic listing of all database objects.
E.1.1 ADC
Object DESC CONVTYP TAG MODE
HEALTH INUSE
KEYPAD
MEASURED CURRENT LOSCALE HISCALE LOCALIB MIDCALIB HICALIB LOCURRENT MIDCURRENT HICURRENT GRADIENT OFFSET OFFSETADJ COEFF1 COEFF2 COEFF3 ROC
SETPOINT DEVIATION
AVERAGE
LASTGOOD HIHILIM HILIM
Descriptor Descriptor ADC conversion type (integer) Tag name associated with the object Integer mode / field selection for `INUSE' field. Measurement status. 0 if OK Value copied from MEASURED, KEYPAD, AVERAGE , LASTGOOD, or WEIGHTED as indexed by the `MODE' field Value used in KEYPAD / KEYPAD-F mode Measured value Measured current Low ADC scale value (4mA or 0mA) High ADC scale value 20mA Low engineering value * Mid engineering value * High engineering value * Snapshot low current * Snapshot mid current * Snapshot high current * Calculated gradient * Calculated offset * In-use offset adjust * Calculated low calibration coefficient * Calculated mid calibration coefficient * Calculated high calibration coefficient * The maximum rate at which the `INUSE' field can change, per second Expected value Maximum allowed variation from `SETPOINT' Rolling average of the MEASURED field: AVERAGE=(AVERAGE+MEASURED)/2 Last MEASURED value High high alarm limit High alarm limit
Type String Byte String Byte
Byte Double
Double
Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double
Double Double
Double
Double Double Double
E-2
Database Objects and Fields
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Object
Descriptor
LOLIM
Low alarm limit
LOLOLIM
Low low alarm limit
OFFSETENTRY
Operator offset adjust field *
LOFAIL
Under-range current limit
HIFAIL
Over range current limit
WEIGHTED
Time/flow weighted average (updated at the end of the period)
MODETEXT
Text string associated with the integer `MODE' field. See mode table
CONVTEXT
ADC type
ID
For internal use
UNITTEST
Units associated with the object
DESCSHORT
Short descriptor of the object
* These fields are used for field calibration.
Type Double Double Double Double Double Double
String
String Double String String
E.1.2
ALARM
Object DESC STATUS UNACC
INHIBIT SUPPRESS
Description Descriptor Current alarm status for alarms 1 16 Current alarm accept status for alarms 1 16 Alarm inhibit bit mask for alarms 1 16 Current alarm suppression bit mask for alarms 1 16
Type String Word Word
Word Word
E.1.3
ALARMHIST
Object PRINTED STATE
NUM ID ENRONID ENRONBIT LIMIT VALUE
Description Printed flag Current status for alarms (ALM_SET, ALM_CLR, or ALM_ACC) Alarm number Alarm audit ID counter Enron Modbus ID Enron bitmask Alarm limit Value when the alarm was raised
Type Byte Byte
Byte Word Word Word Double Double
E.1.4
ARRTXT
Object DESC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Description Descriptor Array text 0 Array text 1 Array text 2 Array text 3 Array text 4 Array text 5 Array text 6 Array text 7 Array text 8 Array text 9
Type String String String String String String String String String String String
Revised January-2021
Database Objects and Fields
E-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Object 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Description Array text 10 Array text 11 Array text 12 Array text 13 Array text 14 Array text 15 Array text 16 Array text 17 Array text 18 Array text 19 Array text 20 Array text 21 Array text 22 Array text 23 Array text 24 Array text 25 Array text 26 Array text 27 Array text 28 Array text 29 Array text 30 Array text 31 Array text 32 Array text 33 Array text 34 Array text 35 Array text 36 Array text 37 Array text 38 Array text 39
Type String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String
E.1.5
CALCALMITEM
Object DESC MODE
INUSE
KEYPAD
CALC1 CALC2 CALC3 CALC4 HIHILIM HILIM LOLIM LOLOLIM WEIGHTED
Description Descriptor Integer mode / field selection for `INUSE' field. Refer to CALC/ALM Modes, Density Transducer Modes, and CALC/ALM Auto Switch Modes. Value copied from KEYPAD, CALC1, CALC2, CALC3, or CALC4 as indexed by the `MODE' field Value used in KEYPAD / KEYPAD-F mode Calculation result 1 Calculation result 2 Calculation result 3 Calculation result 4 High High alarm limit High alarm limit Low alarm limit Low low alarm limit Rolling time/flow weighted average
Type String Byte
Double
Double
Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double
E-4
Database Objects and Fields
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Object MODETEXT UNITTEXT DESCSCHORT
Description Mode text Units associated with the object Short descriptor of the object
Type String String String
E.1.6
CALCTAB
Object DESC TYPE INPUT01 INPUT02 INPUT03 INPUT04 INPUT05 INPUT06 INPUT07 INPUT08 INPUT09 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 OUTPUT01 OUTPUT02 OUTPUT03 OUTPUT04 OUTPUT05 OUTPUT06 OUTPUT07 OUTPUT08 OUTPUT09 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14 OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16 OUTPUT17 OUTPUT18 OUTPUT19 OUTPUT20 ERRORNUM DESCSHORT
Description Descriptor Calculation type, i.e., AGA3 = 104 CONFTAB index for input 1 CONFTAB index for input 2 CONFTAB index for input 3 CONFTAB index for input 4 CONFTAB index for input 5 CONFTAB index for input 6 CONFTAB index for input 7 CONFTAB index for input 8 CONFTAB index for input 9 CONFTAB index for input 10 CONFTAB index for input 11 CONFTAB index for input 12 CONFTAB index for input 13 CONFTAB index for input 14 CONFTAB index for input 15 CONFTAB index for input 16 CONFTAB index for input 17 CONFTAB index for input 18 CONFTAB index for input 19 CONFTAB index for input 20 CONFTAB index for output 1 CONFTAB index for output 2 CONFTAB index for output 3 CONFTAB index for output 4 CONFTAB index for output 5 CONFTAB index for output 6 CONFTAB index for output 7 CONFTAB index for output 8 CONFTAB index for output 9 CONFTAB index for output 10 CONFTAB index for output 11 CONFTAB index for output 12 CONFTAB index for output 13 CONFTAB index for output 14 CONFTAB index for output 15 CONFTAB index for output 16 CONFTAB index for output 17 CONFTAB index for output 18 CONFTAB index for output 19 CONFTAB index for output 20 Calculation error number (for diagnostics) Short descriptor of the object
Type String Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word String
Revised January-2021
Database Objects and Fields
E-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
E.1.7
CONFTAB
Object DESC OBJTYPE OBJINDEX OBJFIELD BITNO DESCSHORT
Description Descriptor Object type Object index Object field Bit number Short descriptor of the object
Type String Word Word Word Word String
E.1.8
CUMTOT
Object DESC ROLLOVER DECPLACE
SCALE PREVIOUS SNAPSHOT TOTAL val_1 REMAINDER rem_1 SNAPTIMETEXT UNITTEXT DESCSHORT
Description Descriptor The power of 10 at which rollover occurs Number of figures after the decimal point stored in the `TOTAL' field, all others are held in the `REMAINDER' field Not used Not used Cumulative total at the last period end Current cumulative total (tri-reg) For internal use The remainder not included in TOTAL For internal use The time when SNAPSHOT was updated Units associated with the object Short descriptor of the object
Type String Byte Byte
Double Double Double Double Double Double Double String String String
E.1.9
DACOUT
Object DESC CONVTYP TAG RAW LOSCALE HISCALE LOOFFSET HIOFFSET CONVTEXT UNITTEXT DESCSHORT
Description Descriptor DAC conversion type (integer) Tag name associated with the object DAC output value (engineering units) Low scale output value (4mA or 0mA) High scale output value (20mA Low calibration offset High calibration offset DAC type Units associated with the object Short descriptor of the object
Type String Byte String Double Double Double Double Double String String String
E.1.10 DIGIO
Object DESC TAG HEALTH INPUT
OUTPUT
RAWIN
Description Description Tag name associated with the object Measurement status. 0 if OK Digital output status, where bits 0 to 11 represent digital outputs 1 to 12 Digital input status, where bits 0 to n represent digital inputs 1 to n As INPUT
Type String String Byte Word
Word
Word
E-6
Database Objects and Fields
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Object RAWOUT INPUTTEXT OUTPUTTEXT
Description As OUTPUT Status text Status text
Type Word String String
E.1.11 DOSETUP
Object DESC SENSE
WIDTH
Description
Descriptor Channel mode: normal, invert, pulse, or pulse off Duration of the pulse in mSec, if channel is set to pulse or pulse off.
Type String Word
Word
E.1.12 DPCELL
Object DESC MODE DPTYPE DPCOMODE LIVECHK CELL INUSE
MEASURED KEYPAD CHECK CUTOFF FLOWRATE FRCONST SWITCHUP
SWITCHDN
DISCREP
DISCTOUT
HIHILIM HILIM LOLIM
Description
Descriptor
Integer mode / field selection for `INUSE' field. Refer to DP Modes.
DP stack type. Refer to DP Stack Type.
DP cut off mode. Refer to DP Cutoff Mode.
Live/check status. Refer to DP Live/Check Mode Selection.
Current active cell.
Value copied from MEASURED or CHECK as indexed by the MODE field or the keypad.
DP measured value.
Value used in KEYPAD / KEYPAD-F mode
DP for testing.
Value below which the S600+ does not totalize DP measurements
Calculated flow rate Sqrt (DP) * Const
Flow rate constant
The switch-up point between two input cells, expressed as a percentage of the range of the lower cell. The S600+ uses this value for all cell ranges
The switch-down point between two input cells, expressed as a percentage of the range of the lower cell. The S600+ uses this value for all cell ranges
The discrepancy allowed between the readings of active input cells in the operating range. The value is defined as a percentage of the high scale value from the lower of the two cells.
The period of time during which the S600+ ignores the discrepancy between the readings of available transducers. When the duration of the discrepancy exceeds this time limit, the S600+ raises an alarm.
High high alarm limit
High alarm limit
Low alarm limit
Type String Byte Byte Byte Byte Word Double
Double Double Double Double Double Double Double
Double
Double
Double
Double Double Double
Revised January-2021
Database Objects and Fields
E-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Object LOLOLIM MODETEXT OBJTYPE1 OBJTYPE2 OBJTYPE3 OBJTYPE4 OBJTYPE5 OBJTYPE6 OBJINDEX1 OBJINDEX2 OBJINDEX3 OBJINDEX4 OBJINDEX5 OBJINDEX6 HEALTH UNITTEXT DESCSHORT
Description Low low alarm limit Mode text Object type for DP cell 1 Object type for DP cell 2 Object type for DP cell 3 Object type for DP cell 4 Object type for DP cell 5 Object type for DP cell 6 Object index for DP cell 1 Object index for DP cell 2 Object index for DP cell 3 Object index for DP cell 4 Object index for DP cell 5 Object index for DP cell 6 Health status byte Units associated with the object Short descriptor of the object
Type Double String Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Byte String String
E.1.13 EVENTHIST
Object EVENT PRINTED ID ENRONID ENRONBIT
Descriptor Event type. Printed flag Unique ID Enron Modbus ID Enron bitmask
Type Byte Byte Word Word Word
E.1.14 FREQT
Object DESC TAG HEALTH PERIOD FREQ UNITTEXT DESCSHORT
Descriptor Descriptor Tag name associated with the object Measurement status. 0 if OK Measured period Measured frequency Units associated with the object Short descriptor of the object
Type String String Byte Double Double String String
E.1.15 HART
Object DESC MODE
ID TAG HEALTH
Descriptor
Descriptor
Integer mode / field selection for `INUSE' field. Refer to "HART Modules."
For internal use
Tag (HART revision 5 command 13)
Measurement status. 0 if OK. Bit 0 is set for over range, bit 1 set for under range. These are back-calculated from the PV, UPRANGE and LORANGE when STATUS2 indicates analogue output saturation or PV is out of limits.
Note: Bit 6 is set when nothing is connected (Status2=128).
Type String Byte
Double String Byte
E-8
Database Objects and Fields
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Object STATUS2 / SECOND_STAT_BYTE PVUNIT / PV_UNIT_CODE SVUNIT / SV_UNIT_CODE TVUNIT / TV_UNIT_CODE FVUNIT / FV_UNIT_CODE UNIVCMDREV / UNIV_COMMAND_REV TXCMDREV / TX_COMMAND_REV SWREV / SW_REV
HWREV / HW_REV
STATUS1 / FIRST_STAT_BYTE INUSE
KEYPAD
ROC
SETPOINT DEVIATION
AVERAGE
LASTGOOD / LAST_GOOD HIHILIM / HH_LIMIT HILIM / H_LIMIT LOLIM / L_LIMIT LOLOLIM / LL_LIMIT CURRENT PV
SV
TV
FV
UPRANGE / UPPER_RANGE LORANGE / LOWER_RANGE UPPERLIM / UPPER_LIM LOWERLIM / LOWER_LIM
Descriptor Second status byte (HART revision 5)
Primary variable unit code (HART revision 5 command 3) Secondary variable unit code (HART revision 5 command 3) Tertiary variable unit code (HART revision 5 command 3) Fourth variable unit code (HART revision 5 command 3) Universal command revision (HART revision 5 command 0) Transmitter Specific Command Revision (HART revision 5 command 0) Software Revision (HART revision 5 command 0) Hardware Revision (HART revision 5 command 0) First status byte (HART revision 5)
Value copied from PV, KEYPAD, AVERAGE, LASTGOOD, or WEIGHTED as indexed by the `MODE' field Value used in KEYPAD / KEYPAD-F mode The maximum rate at which the `INUSE' field can change, per second Expected value Maximum allowed variation from `SETPOINT' Rolling average of the MEASURED field: AVERAGE=(AVERAGE+MEASURED)/2 Last MEASURED value
High high alarm limit High alarm limit Low alarm limit Low low alarm limit Current mA (HART revision 5 command 3) Primary variable (HART revision 5 command 3) Secondary variable (HART revision 5 command 3) Tertiary variable (HART revision 5 command 3) Fourth variable (HART revision 5 command 3) Upper range value from HART transmitter (HART revision 5 command 15) Lower range value from HART transmitter (HART revision 5 command 15) Upper Sensor Limit (HART revision 5 command 14) Lower Sensor Limit (HART revision 5 command 14)
Type Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Double
Double Double Double Double Double
Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double
Database Objects and Fields
E-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Object WEIGHTED MODETEXT UNITTEXT DESCSHORT
E.1.16 HARTTAB
Object DESC POLLFMT
MSTMODE
SWVER ALTVER ALTCHANS
E.1.17 IOASSIGN
Object DESC INUSE MODE
KEYPAD
ROC
SETPOINT DEVIATION
AVERAGE
LASTGOOD/ LAST_GOOD HIHILIM /HH_LIMIT HILIM / H_LIMIT LOLIM / LL_LIMIT LOLOLIM / LL_LIMIT UNITTEXT DESCSHORT
E.1.18 KPINT
Object DESC VALUE STATUS
E.1.19 KPINTARR
Object DESC 0
Descriptor Rolling time/flow weighted average Mode text Unit text Short description
Type Double String String String
Descriptor Descriptor Hart module type. Refer to HART Poll Format. Primary / secondary master mode. Refer to HART Master Mode. Module (P188) software version number Module (P188) Altera version number Number of channels supported
Type String Byte
Byte
Word Word Word
Descriptor
Descriptor Current in-use value Integer mode / field selection for `INUSE' field Value used in KEYPAD / KEYPAD-F mode Maximum rate at which the `INUSE' field can change, per second Expected value Maximum allowed variation from `SETPOINT' Rolling average of the MEASURED field: AVERAGE=AVERAGE+MEASURED/2 Last MEASURED value
Type String Double Byte
Double
Double
Double Double
Double
Double
High high alarm limit High alarm limit Low alarm limit Low low alarm limit Units associated with the object Short descriptor of the object
Double Double Double Double String String
Descriptor Descriptor Value (1 to 39) Status text for VALUE field (1 to 39)
Type String Word String
Descriptor Descriptor Value 0
Type String Word
E-10
Database Objects and Fields
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Object 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 STATUS1 STATUS2 STATUS3 STATUS4 STATUS5 STATUS6 STATUS7 STATUS8 STATUS9 STATUS10 STATUS11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Descriptor Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Value 5 Value 6 Value 7 Value 8 Value 9 Value 10 Value 11 Value 12 Value 13 Value 14 Value 15 Value 16 Value 17 Value 18 Value 19 Value 20 Value 21 Value 22 Value 23 Value 24 Value 25 Value 26 Value 27 Value 28 Value 29 Value 30 Value 31 Value 32 Value 33 Value 34 Value 35 Value 36 Value 37 Value 38 Value 39 Status text for value 0 Status text for value 1 Status text for value 2 Status text for value 3 Status text for value 4 Status text for value 5 Status text for value 6 Status text for value 7 Status text for value 8 Status text for value 9 Status text for value 10
Type Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word String String String String String String String String String String String
Database Objects and Fields
E-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Object STATUS12 STATUS13 STATUS14 STATUS15 STATUS16 STATUS17 STATUS18 STATUS19 STATUS20 STATUS21 STATUS22 STATUS23 STATUS24 STATUS25 STATUS26 STATUS27 STATUS28 STATUS29 STATUS30 STATUS31 STATUS32 STATUS33 STATUS34 STATUS35 STATUS36 STATUS37 STATUS38 STATUS39 STATUS40
E.1.20 KPREAL
Object DESC VALUE UNITTEXT DESCSHORT
E.1.21 KPREALARR
Object DESC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Descriptor Status text for value 11 Status text for value 12 Status text for value 13 Status text for value 14 Status text for value 15 Status text for value 16 Status text for value 17 Status text for value 18 Status text for value 19 Status text for value 20 Status text for value 21 Status text for value 22 Status text for value 23 Status text for value 24 Status text for value 25 Status text for value 26 Status text for value 27 Status text for value 28 Status text for value 29 Status text for value 30 Status text for value 31 Status text for value 32 Status text for value 33 Status text for value 34 Status text for value 35 Status text for value 36 Status text for value 37 Status text for value 38 Status text for value 39
Descriptor Descriptor Value Units associated with the object Short descriptor of the object
Descriptor Descriptor Value 0 Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Value 5 Value 6 Value 7 Value 8
Type String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String String
Type String Double String String
Type String Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double
E-12
Database Objects and Fields
Revised January-2021
Object 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 UNITTEXT DESCSHORT
E.1.22 KPSTRING
Object DESC VALUE
E.1.23 LOG
Object DESC TYPE
HEAD COUNT
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Descriptor Value 9 Value 10 Value 11 Value 12 Value 13 Value 14 Value 15 Value 16 Value 17 Value 18 Value 19 Value 20 Value 21 Value 22 Value 23 Value 24 Value 25 Value 26 Value 27 Value 28 Value 29 Value 30 Value 31 Value 32 Value 33 Value 34 Value 35 Value 36 Value 37 Value 38 Value 39 Units associated with the object Short descriptor of the object
Type Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double String String
Descriptor Descriptor Value
Type String String
Descriptor
Descriptor
Object type associated with the log, i.e., ALARMHIST or EVENTHIST
Index to the oldest object
Total number of alarms / events. This may be different than the value of Head because one event may use several EVENTHIST objects
Type String Byte
Word Word
Revised January-2021
Database Objects and Fields
E-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Object MODE
RECORDS
Descriptor
Integer mode / field selection for `INUSE' field.
Number of ALARMHIST or EVENTHIST objects associated with this log
Type Word
Word
E.1.24 MULTI
Object
Descriptor
Type
DESC
Descriptor
String
OUTPUT
Control value
Word
INPUT
Status value
Word
CONTROL
Control text
String
STATUS
Status text
String
Note: CONTROL and STATUS text result from a Truth Table lookup.
E.1.25 PID
Object DESC DACCTL
Descriptor Descriptor For internal use only
Type String Byte
E.1.26 PIP
Object DESC TAG HEALTH GOOD BAD DELTAGOOD DELTABAD FREQ TIME
KFACTOR
Descriptor Descriptor Tag name associated with the object Measurement status. 0 if OK Good pulse counter Bad pulse counter For internal use For internal use Measured pulse frequency P144: the time main board last polled the I/O module for pulse count P154: the exact time the I/O module read the hardware pulse counters For internal use
Type String String Byte Double Double Double Double Double Double
Double
E.1.27 POP
Object DESC TAG FREQ
GRABSIZE PREVTOTAL REM PULSEOUT
Descriptor Descriptor Tag name associated with the object Pulse output frequency. Valid range is 0.5 to 500 Hertz (this is, 2 seconds to 1 mS) The number of units per pulse Snap shot taken at last calculation cycle Pulse fraction awaiting output Whole pulses awaiting output
Type String String Double
Double Double Double Double
E.1.28 PRDTOT
Object DESC
Descriptor Descriptor
Type String
E-14
Database Objects and Fields
Revised January-2021
E.1.29 PRT
Revised January-2021
Object ROLLOVER DECPLACE
SCALE PREVIOUS SNAPSHOT
TOTAL Val REMAINDER Rem ALMHEADSNAP
ALMHEADPREV
EVTHEADSNAP EVTHEADPREV ALMCOUNT
ALMCOUNTSNAP ALMCOUNTPREV
EVTCOUNT
EVTCOUNTSNAP EVTCOUNTPREV ALMLOG EVTLOG SNAPTIMETEXT UNITTEXT DESCSHORT
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Descriptor The power of 10 at which rollover occurs Number of figures after the decimal point stored in the `TOTAL' field, all others are held in the `REMAINDER' field Not used Previous period total Snapshot cumulative at the last period end Current period total Current period total Not used Not used The index of the oldest alarm history object at the last period end The index of the oldest alarm history object at the start of the last period As ALMHEADSNAP, but for events As ALMHEADPREV, but for events The number of alarms in the previous period The alarm counter at the last period end The alarm counter at the start of the last period The number of events in the previous period As ALMCOUNTSNAP, but for events As ALMCOUNTPREV, but for events Alarm history for reports only Event history for reports only The time when SNAPSHOT was updated Units associated with the object Short descriptor of the object
Type Byte Byte
Double Double Double
Double Double Double Double Word
Word
Word Word Word
Word Word
Word
Word Word Alarm Event String String String
Object DESC RTDTYP TAG MODE
HEALTH INUSE
KEYPAD
MEASURED RESISTANCE LOCALIB MIDCALIB HICALIB
Descriptor Descriptor Type of transducer Tag name associated with the object Integer mode / field selection for `INUSE' field. Refer to ACD/PRT Modes. Measurement status. 0 if OK Value copied from MEASURED, KEYPAD, AVERAGE, LASTGOOD, or WEIGHTED as indexed by the `MODE' field Value used in KEYPAD / KEYPAD-F mode Measured temperature Measured resistance Low engineering value * Mid engineering value * High engineering value *
Type String Byte String Byte
Byte Double
Double
Double Double Double Double Double
Database Objects and Fields
E-15
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Object
Descriptor
LORESISTANCE
Snapshot low resistance *
MIDRESISTANCE
Snapshot mid resistance *
HIRESISTANCE
Snapshot high resistance *
GRADIENT
Calculated gradient *
OFFSET
Calculated offset *
OFFSETADJ
In-use offset adjust *
COEFF1
Calculated low calibration coefficient *
COEFF2
Calculated mid calibration coefficient *
COEFF3
Calculated high calibration coefficient *
ROC
The maximum rate at which the `INUSE' field can change, per second
SETPOINT
Expected value
DEVIATION
Maximum allowed variation from `SETPOINT'
AVERAGE
Rolling average of the MEASURED field: AVERAGE=(AVERAGE+MEASURED)/2
LASTGOOD
Last MEASURED value
HIHILIM
High high alarm limit
HILIM
High alarm limit
LOLIM
Low alarm limit
LOLOLIM
Low low alarm limit
OFFSETENTRY
Operator offset adjust field *
WEIGHTED
Rolling time/flow weighted average
MODETEXT
Mode text
CONVTEXT
PRT type
ID
For internal use
UNITTEXT
Units associated with the object
DESCSHORT
Short descriptor of the object
* Fields used for field calibration
Type Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double
Double Double
Double
Double Double Double Double Double Double Double String String Double String String
E.1.30 PRV_CTL
Object DESC MODTYP
DUALPLSSEL PLSSTRSEL CTLINPSEL SWITCHDELAY SWITCHSEL
SWITCH SWITCHSTAT STATE PLSCNT01 PLSCNT23 PLSCNT03 PLSCNT21 FLTTM01 FLTTM23
Descriptor Descriptor Prover configuration type. Refer to Prover (P154) Type. Select dual pulse channel A/B Multiplexer pls selection Phase locked loop control Optional switch delay Switch sequence selection. Refer to Prover (P154) Switch Sequence Selection. Switch status Switch status Prove state. Refer to Prover (P154) State. Switch 0 1 count data Switch 2 3 count data Switch 0 3 count data Switch 2 1 count data Switch 0 1 flight time Switch 2 3 flight time
Type String Word
Word Word Word Word Word
String Word Word Double Double Double Double Double Double
E-16
Database Objects and Fields
Revised January-2021
Object FLTTM03 FLTTM21 DCFLTTM
E.1.31 REP00 REP39
Object TIMETEXT ID PRINTED VALID FILE DOCKET 0 N
E.1.32 SECURITY
Object DESC USERNAME PASSWORD
E.1.33 SYSOBJ
Object DESC
E.1.34 TASK
Object DESC USERSRT1 USERSRT2 USERSRT3 USERSRT4 USERSRT5
E.1.35 TOTTAB
Object DESC STRCUMINDEX* STNCUMINDEX* XXBATINDEX* XXBATINDEX* STRMAINTINDEX* STAMAINTINDEX* STRPRD11INDEX
STNPRD11INDEX
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Descriptor Switch 0 3 flight time Switch 2 1 flight time Dual chronometry flight time
Type Double Double Double
Descriptor Report time string For internal use Current printed flag status Valid flag Internal report filename Unique report docket number First placement on the top left of the report Last placement on the bottom right of the report
Type String Double Byte Byte String String Dynamic Dynamic
Descriptor Descriptor Username Password
Type String String String
Descriptor Descriptor
Type String
Descriptor Descriptor User supplies task argument 1 User supplies task argument 2 User supplies task argument 3 User supplies task argument 4 User supplies task argument 5
Type String String String String String String
Descriptor Descriptor Cumulative object index for the stream Cumulative object index for the station Batch object index for XXX stream Batch object index for XXX station Maintenance object for the stream Maintenance object for the station Basetime 1 period 1 object index for the stream Basetime 1 period 1 object index for the station
Type String Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
Byte
Revised January-2021
Database Objects and Fields
E-17
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Object
Descriptor
STRPRD12INDEX
Basetime 1 period 2 object index for the stream
STNPRD12INDEX
Basetime 1 period 2 object index for the station
STRPRD13INDEX
Basetime 1 period 3 object index for the stream
STNPRD13INDEX
Basetime 1 period 3 object index for the station
STRPRD14INDEX
Basetime 1 period 4 object index for the stream
STNPRD14INDEX
Basetime 1 period 4 object index for the station
STRPRD21NDEX
Basetime 2 period 1 object index for the stream
STNPRD21INDEX
Basetime 2 period 1 object index for the station
STRPRD22NDEX
Basetime 2 period 2 object index for the stream
STNPRD22INDEX
Basetime 2 period 2 object index for the station
STRPRD23NDEX
Basetime 2 period 3 object index for the stream
STNPRD23INDEX
Basetime 2 period 3 object index for the station
STRPRD24NDEX
Basetime 2 period 4 object index for the stream
STNPRD24INDEX
Basetime 2 period 4 object index for the station
STRPRD31NDEX
Basetime 3 period 1 object index for the stream
STNPRD31INDEX
Basetime 3 period 1 object index for the station
STRPRD32NDEX
Basetime 3 period 2 object index for the stream
STNPRD32INDEX
Basetime 3 period 2 object index for the station
STRPRD33NDEX
Basetime 3 period 3 object index for the stream
STNPRD33INDEX
Basetime 3 period 3 object index for the station
STRPRD34NDEX
Basetime 3 period 4 object index for the stream
STNPRD34INDEX
Basetime 3 period 4 object index for the station
DESCSHORT
Descriptor
* Fields used for field calibration
Type Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte String
E.2 Database Fields
This section provides an alphabetic list of the database fields.
E-18
Database Objects and Fields
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
E.2.1 Alarm Text Tables
Field Text_1 ...
Text_n
Description Alarm text associated with bit 0 of the alarm object
Alarm text associated with bit n of the alarm object
E.2.2 Batching/Totalisation
For keypad integer array BATCH-TOT-CTL.
Field 0 1 2
Description Stop Start Change
E.2.3 DIGIO Setup Table
Field 0 1 2 3
Description Sense normal Sense invert Sense pulse on Sense pulse off
E.2.4 DP Stack Type
Field 0 1 2 3 4 5
Description Single Lo hi Hi hi Lo mid hi Lo hi hi 3 Identical
E.2.5 DP Live/Check Mode Selection
Field 0 1
Description Select live Select keypad
E.2.6 DP Cut Off Mode
Field 0
1
Description
CATS (Common Area Transmission System). Totalisation does not occur when the measured DP is less than the defined LOLOLIM alarm limit
Normal. Totalisation does not occur when the measured DP is less than the CUTOFF value
E.2.7 Event History Type
Field 0 1 2
Description Default type Double type Multi input type
Revised January-2021
Database Objects and Fields
E-19
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Description Multi output type Keypad int type Keypad int array type Security type Mode type Text 1 type Text 2 type Text 3 type Message 1 type Message 2 type Message 3 type Reject type Standard type
E.2.8 HART Poll Format
Field 0 1
Description HART poll format CIMAT HART poll format P188
E.2.9 HART Master Mode
Field 0 1
Description Hart primary master Hart secondary master
E.2.10 I/O (P144) PID Type
Field 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 11 12 13 14 15
Description Pulse DP stack Analog In PRT External pulse Download Pulse square root DP stack square root Analog In (square root) PRT square root External pulse square root Download square root
E.2.11 Prover (P154) Dual Chronometry Switch Pair
Field 0 1 2 3
Description Switch 0-1 Switch 2-3 Switch 0-3 Switch 2-1
E-20
Database Objects and Fields
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
E.2.12 Prover (P154) Type
Field 0 1 2 3
Description Ball/Bi-directional (BIDI) prover Uni-directional prover Compact prover Master meter prover
E.2.13 Password Tables
Object DESC USERNAME ALPHAPASSWORD NUMBPASSWORD SEDEV
Descriptor Descriptor Username Password Password Security level 1 to 9; 1 being the highest with full read/write access to all parameters.
Type String String String String String
E.2.14 Truth Tables
Field Stext1
Ctext1 Sval1 Alm_en1 ... Stext100
Ctext100 Sval100 Alm_en100
Description Text associated with the value field of a KPINT or the text associated the input field of a multi. Value associated with the output field of a multi. Value enumeration associated with the text Enables an alarm on digital I/O
Text associated with the value field of a KPINT or the text associated the input field of a multi. Value associated with the output field of a multi. Value enumeration associated with the text Enables an alarm on digital I/O
E.2.15 Turbine Meter Setup Tables
Field DESC TYPE Pulse Level
Description Descriptor Type of pulse mode: Single or Dual Level at which the pulse is read: Level A or Level B
E.3 Mode Tables
This section provides an alphabetic list of the database fields you can access through the Report Editor.
E.3.1 ADC/PRT/HART Modes (MODE TAB PLANTI/O)
Number 0 1 2 3 4
Description Measured mode Keypad mode Average mode Last good mode Keypad fail mode
Revised January-2021
Database Objects and Fields
E-21
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Number 5 6 10 12
Description Average fail mode Last good fail mode Weighted mode Weighted fail mode
E.3.2 CALC/ALM Auto Switch Modes
Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Description CALC1 auto mode CALC2 auto mode CALC3 auto mode CALC4 auto mode Keypad auto mode CALC1 force mode CALC2 force mode CALC3 force mode CALC4 force mode Keypad force mode Keypad shift mode
E.3.3 CALC/ALM modes (MODE TAB CALC)
Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Description CALC1 mode CALC2 mode CALC3 mode CALC4 mode Keypad mode Average mode Lastgood Keypad fail mode Average fall mode Lastgood fail mode
E.3.4 Density Transducer Modes (MODE TAB DENS IP)
Number 0 1 2 3 4 10 11
Description Keypad mode Dens A mode Dens B mode Average mode Keypad fail mode Weighted mode Weighted fail mode
E.3.5 DP Modes (MODE TAB DP STACK)
Number 0 1 2
Description Measured mode Keypad fail mode Check mode
E-22
Database Objects and Fields
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
E.3.6 HART Modes (MODE TAB PLANTI/O)
Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 11 12
Description Measured mode Keypad mode Average mode Last good mode Keypad fail mode Average fail mode Last good fail mode Weighted mode Weighted fail mode
Revised January-2021
Database Objects and Fields
E-23
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual [This page is intentionally left blank.]
E-24
Database Objects and Fields
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Appendix F Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
In This Chapter
F.1 Peer-to-Peer Link Input Functionality ............................................. F-1 F.2 Enabling the Peer-to-Peer Link ...................................................... F-3
F.2.1 Configuring the Peer-to-Peer Link ....................................... F-4 F.3 Critical Data .................................................................................... F-9
F.3.1 Passing an Object from the Duty to the Standby S600+................................................................... F-14
F.3.2 Period Object Transfer ....................................................... F-16 F.4 Automatic Failover........................................................................ F-17
F.4.1 Configuring the S600+ for Automatic Failover ................... F-19 F.5 External / Custom Failover Modes ............................................... F-25 F.6 Displays ........................................................................................ F-26
F.6.1 Control Displays ................................................................. F-26 F.6.2 Feed-back Displays............................................................ F-27 F.6.3 Option Displays .................................................................. F-28 F.7 Downloading and Verifying the Peer to Peer Link........................ F-28
The Peer to Peer facility enables you to connect two S600+ flow computers together in an application requiring dual-redundancy. You can select one S600+ to be the main fiscal accounting device (the "duty machine") and one S600+ to be the backup device ("standby machine"). The failover between duty and standby can be either automatic or manual. The Duty / Standby status (D=Duty, S=Standby) displays in the bottom right hand corner of the S600+ front panel.
This appendix describes the bi-directional communication link between the duty and standby computers that allows the duty S600+ computer to update the standby S600+ computer with any operator changes made locally at the duty S600+ keypad or via the supervisory.
F.1 Peer-to-Peer Link Input Functionality
Peer-to-peer link functionality includes:
Automatic real-time synchronization of constants (such as the keypad K-factor and the orifice diameter) that affect the integrity of the metering system.
A mechanism to pass operator commands (such as the Batch Start command) to the standby machine in real-time.
A mechanism to transfer a user defined list of data from the duty machine to the standby machine on a regular basis.
The system uses three processes:
Event Data
The duty machine uses the event log to identify changes that need transferring to the standby machine. When the duty identifies a change to a specific data point, the duty machine sends the value in the event log to the standby machine.
Peer Critical
The duty machine transfers a user defined block of objects to the standby machine as part of the main program cycle. It is possible to define separate source and destination objects for each data point. The critical data transfers as one coherent block at least once every 5 seconds.
Revised January-2021
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Notes:
When the S600+ becomes the duty machine, it only starts transferring critical data after the re-synchronisation process completes.
You can only configure the peer critical data via the System Editor, and the System Editor is only available after successful completion of the RA901 S600+ Advanced Training course.
Re-sync at Start-up and Automatic Re-sync
At start-up, the peer-to-peer link identifies a list of objects that you can change via the front panel / web server. The duty machine sends the latest values from this list to the standby machine. The standby machine compares the latest value from the duty machine and updates values that do not match.
The automatic re-synchronisation process has two operational scenarios:
When the duty machine first establishes communications with the standby machine, the re-sync takes priority over events / critical data. In this situation, the re-synchronisation process may take approximately a minute to complete (depending on number of streams and such).
Once the peer-peer link is operational, the re-synchronisation operates in the background by interleaving messages with higher priority event log / peer critical data. In this situation, the resynchronisation process may take several minutes to complete. You enable this via the RESYNC BGRND option. If the RESYNC BGRND option is not enabled then the re-synchronisation only occurs when the communications link is (re)-established.
The automatic re-synchronisation list omits items in the filter list. Only constants transfer; commands do not. After all constants transfer, an optional "accept constants" command triggers. This causes the standby machine to trigger any density constants / keypad composition Accept commands.
Eventing
The standby machine has the option to event any changes it receives from the duty machine. Note that enabling this option will cause all changes to be evented. Therefore, it is recommended that it is not enabled if peer critical data is required.
Changes via Modbus Changes made via Modbus only transfer to the standby machine if you enable Modbus eventing via the Modbus Editor. Eventing supports all registers.
Filter List The peer-peer link filter identifies a list of changeable objects from the displays and determines whether they should be transferred based on their type and the Peer-to-Peer option selection.
The following items are always excluded from transfer:
Cold Start / Warm Start / Backup
System / Stream Maintenance Mode and Maintenance Enable / Disable
Totals Reset
F-2
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
PCSetup Link Enable / Disable Front Panel Disable / Enable Serial Port Settings Download Time Command Version information
The following items are excluded unless selected in the Peer-to-Peer options (refer to Section F.2.1 Configuring the Peer-to-Peer Link for more details):
PID Commands Valve Position Station / Stream Batch Commands Samper Commands / Reset Can Prove Commands Flow Switching Commands Peer to Peer Commands / Time Delay The following items are always transferred: Keypad Values Modes High / Low Alarm limits ADC / DAC Scalings Proved Data Valve Commands Accept Commands (Density / Composition / KF/MF) note that
these commands are always transferred as part of the event data but only transferred during re-synchronisation if configured on the peer-to-peer options Peer Critical Data
F.2 Enabling the Peer-to-Peer Link
You enable the peer-to-peer link with the default settings when you create a new configuration file. To enable a peer-to-peer communications port to configure peer-to-peer communications:
1. Select Start > All Programs > Config600 3.3 > Config Generator or PCSetup and create a new configuration file.
2. After you have set up the configuration file, select the Peer to Peer Link checkbox in Step 6, Comms Ports.
Revised January-2021
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure F-1. Select Communications
F.2.1
Configuring the Peer-to-Peer Link
To configure the peer-to- peer link in PCSetup:
1. Select I/O Setup > Comms from the hierarchy menu. The system displays the Communication Task configuration screen.
F-4
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure F-2. Comms Link with Peer Master Link and Port Settings
2. Select PEER MASTER LINK in the Comms Links field. 3. Select the communication Port from the drop-down list box and
click Setup. A port com setup dialog box displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure F-3. Port Com Setup Dialog
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
4. Complete the following fields.
Field Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity
Hardware Handshake
Description
Indicates the serial transfer rate. Click to display all values. The default value is 9600.
Indicates the number of data bits the port uses. Click to display all values. The default value is 8.
Indicates the period length. Click to display all values. The default value is 1.
Indicates the type of parity used to detect data
corruption during transmission. Click to display all values. The default value is None.
Sets RTS/CTS handshaking. When you select this check box, the Ready to Send (RTS) line fluctuates between on and off.
RTS On Delay
Sets, in milliseconds, the amount of time Config600 waits after turning on the ready to send (RTS) signal before beginning transmission. The default is 0. You can change this value to optimise communications.
The default value should be sufficient for dial-up modems and EIA-232 (RS232) connections. For older radios, you may need to set this value to 0.2 seconds. For newer radios, 0.02 seconds should be sufficient.
RTS Off Delay
Sets, in milliseconds, the amount of time Config600 waits after transmitting a message before turning off the ready to send (RTS) signal. The default is 0. You can change this value to optimise communications.
The default value should be sufficient for dial-up modems and EIA-232 (RS-232) connections. For radios, a value of 0.01 may be appropriate.
Note:
These variables may change based on your situation. These are general values that you need to assess for each circumstance.
5. Click OK. The Peer to Peer PCSetup screen displays.
6. Click Setup Peer to Peer Options. The Peer Params Setup screen displays.
F-6
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Revised January-2021
Figure F-4. Peer Params Setup screen
7. Select the appropriate parameters for your peer to peer communications.
Field COMMS ENABLE CMD BATCH
CMD SAMP
CMD PROVER
CMD PID
CMD VALVE
Description Enables the peer-to-peer communications link.
Synchonises batching-related commands If selected, data items transferred are: Station Batch Command Stream Batch Command Synchronises sampling-related commands. If selected, data items transferred are: Sampler Command Reset Can Command Synchronises proving-related commands. If selected, data items transferred are: Prove Sequence Command Run Command (Bi-Di / Cprv / MM) Meter Variables (Bi-Di / Cprv / MM) Synchronises PID-related commands. If selected, data items transferred are: Auto-Manual Command Direction Command Tracking Command Manual Position Setpoint Synchronises valve-related commands. If selected, data items transferred are: Valve Position
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Field CMD FSW
KP DOWNLOAD RESYNC BGRND
ACC
ACC DENS
ACC CHROMAT ACC KF/MF
CRITICAL
I AM A
EVENTING
EXCLUDE DISABLE DISPLAY Peer Method
Description Synchronises flow switching-related commands.
If selected, data items transferred are:
Station Flow Switching Command
Stream Flow Switching Command
Sets an older peer-to-peer communications protocol.
Note: Do not enable this command.
Perform auto synchronisation in background. Enables auto-resychronisation of constants (not command) as part of the regular duty cycle. If box un-ticked, resynchronisation only occurs when the communications are (re)-established between the duty and standby machines.
Re-synchronisation only. Trigger automatic acceptance of density constants, keypad composition, KF and MF. This over-rides ACC DENS, ACC CHROMAT and ACC KF/MF. If un-ticked no automatic acceptance occurs.
Re-synchronisation only. Trigger automatic acceptance of density constants during re-synchronisation. If unticked no automatic acceptance occurs.
Re-synchronisation only. Trigger automatic acceptance of keypad chromatograph during re-synchronisation. If un-ticked no automatic acceptance occurs.
Re-synchronisation only. Trigger automatic acceptance of KF and MF during re-synchronisation. If un-ticked no automatic acceptance occurs.
Critical data transfer enabled allows transfer of data that is not user enterable (such as FCV Output % to allow bumpless transfer on changeover). Can also be used to exclude items from transfer using the Peer Regular calculation table by configuring the required data item as an input only.
Alters the timeout period before designating the standby machine to be duty. If ticked the timeout is 10 seconds otherwise it is 20 seconds.
Enables the eventing of changes of the standby event.
Note: This can cause the standby event log to fill up if used in conjunction with the Peer Critical option.
Not currently supported. Do not enable this command.
Prevents the operator from making changes on the standby machineby disabling the front panel and webserver.
Indicates how failover from duty machine to standby machine occurs. Click to display all valid values.
Auto Failover Sets the duty machine via an internal algorithm. This is the default.
Manual Failover Sets the duty machine manually through the front panel or webserver.
Digital Input Sets the duty machine using digital inputs.
Custom Sets the duty machine using a LogiCalc to create the failover logic.
8. Click OK. The PCSetup screen displays.
F-8
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
F.3 Critical Data
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
9. Click the Save icon on the toolbar to save the changes to the configuration.
You can use the peer-to-peer link to update the standby S600+ with critical data that is not operator-enterable, such as:
FCV output % to allow bumpless transfer if a changeover occurs. Prover results (such as meter factor or proved conditions). Items specific to individual flow computers; such as ADC
calibration points. Certain data points you must frequently send to the standby machine (such as the position of a PID required for smoother transaction from manual to automatic mode) or information you need to send selectively (such as the ADC Scales, although you may need to send other ADC parameters [like keypad values or modes] separately). If sending data (such as the position of the PID) then it is recommended that EVENTING is disabled on the standby machine.
Note: Totals and time are not supported.
To send critical data:
1. Click Start > All Programs > Config600 3.3 > System Editor and open the configuration.
2. Select System > ALARM. The Alarm screen displays.
3. Create a new alarm object by scrolling down to the last alarm and right-clicking in the right frame. A pop-up menu displays.
Revised January-2021
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure F-5. Pop-up menu on Alarms screen
4. Select Append to create a new alarm object. An Edit dialog box displays.
5. Select DESC in the Columns pane and enter PEER CRITICAL in the Data field.
Figure F-6. Edit dialog (1)
6. Select Columns > DESC and enter PEER CRITICAL in the Data field.
F-10
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
7. Select Columns > tab_almtxt_id* and enter 23 in the Data field to select the ATXT TAB CALCS.
Figure F-7. Edit dialog (2) 8. Click OK. The Alarm screen displays. The new alarm object Peer
Critical appears at the bottom of the screen's listing.
Figure F-8. Peer Critical Alarm
9. Select System > CALCTAB to create a new calculations table.The CALCTAB screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure F-9. CALCTAB screen
10. Scroll down to the last calculation and right-click in the right frame. An Edit dialog box displays
11. Select Append to create a new calculation object. 12. Select DESC in the Columns pane and enter SYS PEER
CRITICAL in the Data field.
Figure F-10. Edit dialog (1)
13. Select Columns > obj_almitem_id* in the Columns pane and select the PEER CRITICAL alarm you previously created.
F-12
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure F-11. Edit dialog (2)
14. Select TYPE* in the Columns pane and enter 621 to display the Peer Regular Data point.
Figure F-12. Edit dialog (3)
15. Click OK. The CALCTAB screen displays. Note the new calculation object SYS PEER CRITICAL in the System > Calculation list.
Revised January-2021
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
F.3.1
Figure F-13. Peer Critical CALCTAB Object
Passing an Object from the Duty to the Standby S600+
This example shows how to pass a user-chosen object from the duty S600+ to the standby S600+.
Note: Each computer derives its own totals independently. Copying totals from one computer to the other could result in copying erroneous data if the totals someone get corrupted.
1. Double click on the SYS PEER CRITICAL calc table you created in the Critical Data section. The Calc Editor opens.
2. Click to view the Outputs.
3. Click
on the right side. A new output should appear in the
Outputs group with default data.
Figure F-14. Calc Editor Outputs
4. Click the numbered button on the left side of the newly created output. The Connect Wizard displays.
5. Select System > KPINT > SYSTEM RUN MODE > VALUE. This is the location on the duty S600+ that transfers to the standby S600+.
F-14
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: The selected field and other similar fields is only an example to illustrate this process.
Figure F-15. Connect Wizard Assigning an object to an output of the SYS PEER CRITICAL Calctab
6. Click OK to confirm the changes and close the Connect Wizard.
Figure F-16. New Output with Object Assigned
7. Click to view the Inputs.
8. Click
on the right side. A new input should appear in the
Inputs group with default data.
9. Click on the numbered button on the left side of the newly created input. The Connect Wizard displays.
Revised January-2021
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-15
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure F-17. Connect Wizard Assigning an object to an input of the SYS PEER CRITICAL calctab
F.3.2
10. Select System > KPINTARR > PEER SPARE 1 > FIELD 01. This is the location on the standby S600+ to which data from the Output field transfers.
11. Click OK to confirm the changes and OK on the Calc Editor to confirm and close it.
12. Open the configuration file in PCSetup and enable the CRITICAL peer parameter as in Configuring the Peer to Peer Link.
13. Add the newly created output to the S600+ displays using the Display Editor to see the values being transferred over the peer to peer communications link.
14. Save the configuration file and upload it to both S600+ machines.
15. Configure one machine as the duty machine and the other as the standby machine (as described in PCSetup Editor).
16. On the Standby S600+ front panel/webserver, navigate to the location where you created the new display and the object displays with the current second number from the duty S600+.
Period Object Transfer
You can configure the system to send objects at specific time intervals, in order not to overload the peer to peer link with data that is not of very high importance. Use the System Editor to set these time intervals:
1. Click Start > All Programs > Config600 3.3 > System Editor and open the configuration
2. Select the section where the calculation table of type Peer Regular you wish to edit the timing is stored. For example, select Stream x > CALCTAB and double-click the calculation table STR0X PEER PID to open the Calc Editor
F-16
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure F-18. System Editor
3. Click to view the Outputs of the calculation table
4. Change the bit number of the output to the desired time interval (in seconds) you want the system to use when sending that object through the peer to peer link. The default value is 30, which corresponds to 30 seconds
5. Click OK to confirm the changes in the Calc Editor
6. Save the configuration file.
F.4 Automatic Failover
Both the duty S600+ and standby S600+ use digital (status) inputs and outputs in the automatic selection process, as shown in Figure F-19. In the event of any computer alarm (i.e. any alarm assigned to alarm group 1), except for those in the following table, the health inputoutput link changes logic state to invoke a failover. On completion of the failover, the standby S600+ becomes the duty S600+.
Note: If you have configured the automatic failover option and it is invoked during a prove, the system transfers the values and control, but the prove run may fail during changeover depending on the prove stage.
Table F-1. Computer Alarms Not Invoking a Failover
ALARM TYPE SYS HOST
ALARM COLD ST
WARM ST BATT FAIL RESET TOT RESET TOT ROLL OVR TOT ROLL UDR PRINTING ERR
ALARM GROUP ALM GRP 1 COMP
Revised January-2021
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-17
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure F-19. Status Input and Output Description
Figure F-19 shows two computers designated as A and B. In the event that computer A fails, computer B takes over the duty role (if computer B is itself healthy). Following the changeover from A to B, computer B remains the duty machine until computer A again becomes healthy and is manually reinstated as the duty machine or until computer B fails. If computer B fails and computer A is healthy, then A automatically becomes the duty machine.
Table F-2. Status Input and Output Description
Input/Output Designation A Health
B Health
Description
Indicates the health status for computer A. It is true as long as there are not any group 1 alarms set (apart from those indicated in Table F-1). This signal is continuously monitored by computer B. If the signal goes down, computer B requests to become the duty machine via the I Want Duty output.
Indicates the health status for computer B. It is true as long as there are not any group 1 alarms set (apart from those indicated in Table F-1). This signal is continuously monitored by computer A. If this signal goes down, computer A requests to become the duty machine via the I Want Duty output.
F-18
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Input/Output Designation I Am Duty
I Want Duty
Peer to Peer Comms
Process Inputs (Field I/Ps) Control Outputs (Field O/Ps)
Description
Designates which computer is the duty machine. When it is set high, the computer is the duty machine. When set low, the computer is the standby machine. This signal goes high after a Duty request has been made if the relay is working properly
Whenever a computer needs to become the duty machine, it asserts this signal to make the relay switch and set "I Am Duty" high. The signal is asserted only for a period of time that you configure in the PCSetup Editor.
A bi-directional communication link between the A and B computers allows the duty S600+ to update the standby S600+ with any operator changes made locally at the duty S600+ keypad. The Duty/Standby status displays in the bottom right hand corner of the S600+ display (D=Duty and S=Standby). This link also updates all settings and values within the Standby computer following a communications failure of the peer to peer link, such as following computer replacement.
All field inputs connect in parallel to both S600+ computers allowing each to perform independent processing and totalisation. Discrepancy checking between data reported from the A and B computers is performed elsewhere, such as at a supervisory computer
All control outputs switch via changeover relay contacts so that only the computer with Duty status has actual control of plant equipment.
Note: Control Outputs are only used in particular applications (for example, when the 600+ sends a DAC signal to an FCV.
F.4.1
Configuring the S600+ for Automatic Failover
This section shows the necessary steps to configure the flow computers to perform Duty/Standby automatic failovers.
Figure F-20. Duty/Standby Connection Diagram
Step 1: Wiring Digital Channels
Connect Duty/Standby wiring. The following example uses Digital Output Channel 4 (SKT C: Pin 36) and Return CH1-4 (SKT C: Pin 35) to drive the relay by asserting the `I Want Duty' signal. Digital Input Channel 1 (SKT B: Pin 13) and Return CH1-4 (SKT B: Pin 17) are used to read the state of the relay which is the `I Am Duty' signal as in the previous figure. The channels used in the example were chosen arbitrarily.
The relay must be a latching double pole double throw (DPDT) relay for the Duty/Standby logic to work.
Each computer requires a pair of digital channels to connect the health output of one computer to the health input of the other computer. The
Revised January-2021
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-19
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
following example shows how to connect A's health digital output to B's digital input. The same must be done for computer B.
Figure F-21. Connecting A's Health Digital Output to B's Digital Input Step 2: After you complete the first step, assign all the digital channels from
PCSetup the previous step to database objects. From PCSetup: 1. Select the I/O Setup > Discrete Inputs to channels. The SYS PEER HEALTH and SYS PEER DUTY IO items are currently unassigned. Refer to Table F-2 and Figure F-19 where: HEALTH DO = SYS PEER HEALTH output HEALTH DI = SYS PEER HEALTH input (reported from the other computer) I AM DUTY DO = SYS PEER DUTY IO output I WANT DUTY DI = SYS PEER DUTY IO input (the duty / standby status from the relay)
Figure F-22. List of Discrete Inputs before Assignment
F-20
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Double-click SYS PEER HEALTH and assign it to Channel 15 of the P144 I/O Board.
Figure F-23. Digital Input Selection
3. Click OK. 4. Double-click SYS PEER DUTY IO, assign it to Channel 12 of
the P144 I/O Board, and click OK.
Figure F-24. SYS PEER HEALTH and PEER HEALTH Object (after assignment to Digital Inputs) 5. Select the I/O Setup > Discrete Outputs to channels.
Figure F-25. List of Discrete Outputs before Assignment
Revised January-2021
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-21
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: The SYS PEER DUTY IO output signal is asserted whenever the owning computer requests duty.
6. Double-click Channel 3 and select SYS PEER DUTY IO.
Figure F-26. SYS PEER DUTY IO Digital Output Assignment
7. Select PULSE ON in the Sense field.
8. Set Pulse Width to indicate the number of seconds the SYS PEER DUTY IO signal asserts after receiving a Duty request. The minimum is 5 seconds. If this period of time elapses and the computer has not become the duty machine, the SYS PEER A FAILED alarm triggers.
9. Double-click Channel 4 and select SYS PEER HEALTH. This is the computer's own health output signal and it is also read by the partner computer.
Figure F-27. SYS PEER HEALTH Digital Output Assignment 10. Click OK.
F-22
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure F-28. Channel 3 and Channel 4 (after assignment to SYS PEER DUTY IO and SYS PEER HEALTH
Step 3: You can activate the Duty/Standby automatic failover logic in either of Activating Automatic two ways: through PCSetup or through the front panel or webserver.
Failover
Using You can activate the Duty/Standby automatic failover logic in either of PCSetup two ways: through PCSetup or through the front panel or webserver.
From PCSetup: 1. Select I/O Setup > Comms. The Comms Link screen displays.
Revised January-2021
Figure F-29. PCSetup Communications
2. Click Setup Peer to Peer Options. The Peer Params Setup screen displays.
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-23
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure F-30. Peer Params Setup dialog
3. Select Auto Failover from the Peer Method field and click OK.
Using From the front panel and the webserver:
Front Panel/Webserver
1. Select TECH/ENGINEER > COMMUNICATIONS > ASSIGNMENT > PEER MASTER LINK. The Peer Duty Logic page displays.
PEER DUTY LOGIC Status: AUTO FAILOVER
P121.2 of 16
Figure F-31. Peer Duty Logic page
2. Select AUTO FAILOVER on the PEER DUTY LOGIC page. This activates the internal HOT BACKUP logic.
Triggering Duty Status The following situations trigger duty status in a computer:
If one of a pair of computers starts first and is healthy, it becomes the duty machine when it sees its partner as "unhealthy" (that is, turned off).
If one of the computers has its alarms cleared first while the other one is still unhealthy, then the first computer becomes the duty machine.
If the computers start exactly at the same time, the one to which the relay points at start-up becomes the duty machine, if it is healthy.
If the computers' alarms are cleared exactly at the same time, the one to which the relay points becomes the duty machine.
If the duty computer becomes unhealthy, it forces the standby computer to become the duty computer, if that machine is healthy.
F-24
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
If one of the computers is standby and healthy, you can set it to duty status by requesting duty status through the Duty/Standby menus.
Care should be taken when triggering duty status manually refer to Section F.5 below.
F.5 External / Custom Failover Modes
The S600+ provides three additional modes for setting the duty/standby computer. These modes determine the duty S600+ using an external logic, as opposed to the AUTOMATIC FAILOVER method described in the previous sections, (which sets the duty machine using an internal algorithm).
MANUAL FAILOVER You manually determine which computer is duty and which is standby by using the front panel or the webserver application. There is no automatic failover. To set the duty S600+, select TECH/ENGINEER > COMMUNICATIONS > ASSIGNMENT > PEER MASTER LINK from the front panel and set the status to DUTY on the Peer Status page or select Standby to set it to standby status.
OPERATOR COMMAND
Status
CLEAR
Figure F-32. Peer Master Link Operator Command Page
Notes:
The order in which you perform a manual hand-over is important. First, set the actual duty computer to standby mode. Second, set the other computer to duty mode. If the machine is not healthy, the system ignores this command.
You should not perform a manual hand-over when the flow computer is proving, batching or sampling. If you need to perform a manual hand-over during one of these processes, you should first abort the process, then perform the manual hand-over, and then restart the process.
DIGITAL INPUT This method enables digital inputs to decide the duty or standby status of an S600+. You must connect each input to SYS PEER DUTY IO in PCSetup for each computer as described in the previous sections.
CUSTOM This mode uses a LogiCalc to create a failover logic.
Revised January-2021
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-25
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
You can access all three modes through PCSetup, the front panel, or the webserver. For example, this procedure uses PCSetup: 1. Select I/O Setup > Comms from the hierarchy menu. 2. Select Peer Master Link in the Comms Links field. 3. Click Setup Peer to Peer Options. The Peer Params Setup screen
displays.
F.6 Displays
Figure F-33. Peer Params Setup
4. Select Peer Method and click OK. 5. Click OK.
Select TECH/ENGINEER > COMMUNICATIONS > ASSIGNMENT > PEER MASTER LINK to view the status or control the Duty/Standby logic. The displays are split in two categories: control and feed-back. You can use the control displays to configure the way the Duty/Standby logic works. The feed-back displays provide useful information about the status of the two computers in the context of the Duty/Standby logic.
F.6.1
Control Displays
Use the PEER DUTY LOGIC display to select the method the Duty/Standby logic uses. You can select AUTO FAILOVER, MANUAL FAILOVER, DIGITAL INPUT, and USER.
PEER DUTY LOGIC Status: AUTO FAILOVER
P121.2 of 16
F-26
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Use the PEER STATUS page to select the status of the peer to peer communications link when the PEER DUTY LOGIC is set to either MANUAL FAILOVER or CUSTOM. Otherwise, it only indicates the status of the peer to peer communications link. The available options are DUTY and STANDBY.
PEER STATUS Status: DUTY
P121.3 of 16
Use the OPERATOR COMMAND to issue a `Duty' request to the relay. The command can only be SET manually by you. It automatically reverts to CLEAR.
OPERATOR COMMAND Status: CLEAR
P121.4 of 16
F.6.2
Feed-back Displays
The I AM DUTY page shows the status of the digital input line connected to the SYS PEER DUTY IO object. When the indicated value is 0, the computer status as given by the relay is STANDBY. When the value is 1, the computer status is DUTY.
I AM DUTY Status: 0
P121.5 of 16
The MY HEALTH page shows the status of the digital output line connected to the SYS PEER HEALTH object. It indicates the health of the computer that owns the page. If 0, an alarm that is not in the Automatic Failover table triggers and the computer is considered unhealthy. It can only be STANDBY. If 1, the computer is considered healthy and can be either DUTY or STANDBY. This status is also seen by the other peer and based on it, the computer can decide to be either DUTY or STANDBY. This status is mirrored on the PEER HEALTH page of the peer.
MY HEALTH Status: 0
P121.6 of 16
The PARTNER HEALTH page shows the status of the digital input line connected to the SYS PEER HEALTH object. It indicates the health of the peer. If 0, an alarm that is not in the Automatic Failover table triggers and the peer is considered unhealthy. It can only be STANDBY. If 1, the peer is considered healthy and can be both DUTY
Revised January-2021
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-27
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
F.6.3
and STANDBY. This status is mirrored on the MY HEALTH page of the peer.
PARTNER HEALTH Status: 0
P121.7 of 16
Option Displays
All of the Peer-to-Peer options listed in section F.2.1 are available under the TECH/ENGINEER > COMMUNICATIONS > ASSIGNMENT > PEER MASTER LINK display following on from the partner health display. These can be used to enable / disable peer-to-peer options during run time.
F.7 Downloading and Verifying the Peer to Peer Link
To download and verify the peer to peer link:
1. Click Start > All Programs > Config600 3.3 > Config Transfer.
2. Configure Config Transfer communications. Refer to Config Transfer.
3. Select the Send tab.
4. Select a configuration that has Peer to Peer Option enabled and click Send.
5. Connect the two S600+ flow computers using a communications cable directly between the two devices.
6. Download the file to both S600+ flow computers.
7. Cold Start both S600+ flow computers.
8. Configure the Duty S600+ from the front panel. Select TECH/ENGINEER > COMMUNICATIONS > ASSIGNMENT > PEER MASTER LINK and on the PEER DUTY LOGIC page, set the Status to MANUAL FAILOVER.
9. Navigate to the PEER STATUS page and set the Status to DUTY.
10. Configure the Standby S600+ from the front panel. Select TECH/ENGINEER > COMMUNICATIONS > ASSIGNMENT > PEER MASTER LINK and on the PEER DUTY LOGIC page, set the Status to MANUAL FAILOVER.
11. Navigate to the PEER STATUS page and set the Status to STANDBY.
Note: On startup, both S600+ flow computers are in Standby mode and display an "S" at the bottom of the display in the Communications display. A "D" should display after you configure one of the S600+ and if the communication is working.
F-28
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
12. On both machines, navigate to TECH/ENGINEER > COMMUNICATIONS > SERIAL PORTS and select the Peer to Peer Link Port to use. Verify on the second page that the GOOD TX and GOOD RX are increasing. This indicates the machines are communicating.
Revised January-2021
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
F-29
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual [This page is intentionally left blank.]
F-30
Peer-to-Peer Link Communications
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Appendix G Firewall
In This Chapter
G.1 Rules File .......................................................................................... G-1 G.1.1 *Filter Keyword.................................................................... G-2 G.1.2 Default Policies ................................................................... G-2 G.1.3 User Defined Chains ........................................................... G-2
G.2 Adding Rules to the Chain ................................................................ G-3 G.2.1 Applying a Rule to a Range of IPs ...................................... G-3 G.2.2 Inverting a Rule ................................................................... G-3 G.2.3 After Checking the Rules .................................................... G-3 G.2.4 Committing the Rules.......................................................... G-3
G.3 Operational Behaviour ...................................................................... G-3
The S600+ firewall keeps out unwanted incoming network connections. At its core, the S600+ uses the Linux's Iptables firewall. You can configure the IP firewall rules in a text file specifying which connections are to be accepted and which to be rejected.
This appendix details only the firewall rules for blocking and accepting packets to and from a source. There are many other rules that you can specify. Refer to the Linux Iptables Firewall documentation before making any changes to the configuration text file.
G.1 Rules File
The configuration file is a plain text file containing the rules by which iptables controls network traffic. You can edit or change the rules using a text editor. Place the file that contains the rules in the "Extras" folder of an S600+ standard configuration. The file name is exfwall.txt. The file loads to the S600+ at the same time as the configuration file. The syntax of the rules must be compatible with the one that iptable accepts as valid.
Following is an example exfwall.txt file.
#Example of a exfwall.txt file *filter :INPUT DROP [0:0] :FORWARD ACCEPT [0:0] :OUTPUT DROP [0:0] :ALLOW_IN - [0:0] :ALLOW_OUT - [0:0] -A INPUT -j ALLOW_IN -A OUTPUT -j ALLOW_OUT #ALLOW IN #Allow telnet -A ALLOW_IN -s 10.97.41.72 -p tcp -m tcp --dport 23 -j ACCEPT #End of Allow telnet #Allow Apache -A ALLOW_IN -s 10.97.41.72 -p tcp -m tcp --dport 80 -j ACCEPT #End Allow Apache #Allow Apache Secure -A ALLOW_IN -s 10.97.41.72 -p tcp -m tcp --dport 443 -j ACCEPT #End of Allow Apache Secure
Revised January-2021
Firewall
G-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
#Allow PC Setup -A ALLOW_IN -s 10.97.41.72 -p tcp -m tcp --dport 6000 -j ACCEPT -A ALLOW_IN -s 10.97.41.72 -p tcp -m tcp --dport 6001 -j ACCEPT -A ALLOW_IN -s 10.97.41.72 -p tcp -m tcp --dport 6002 -j ACCEPT -A ALLOW_IN -s 10.97.41.72 -p tcp -m tcp --dport 6010 -j ACCEPT -A ALLOW_IN -s 10.97.41.72 -p tcp -m tcp --dport 6011 -j ACCEPT -A ALLOW_IN -s 10.97.41.72 -p tcp -m tcp --dport 6012 -j ACCEPT #End of Allow PC Setup -A ALLOW_IN -j RETURN #END ALLOW IN #ALLOW OUT -A ALLOW_OUT -d 10.97.41.72 -p tcp -j ACCEPT -A ALLOW_OUT -j RETURN #END ALLOW OUT COMMIT #End of the exfwall.txt file
G.1.1 *Filter Keyword
The *filter keyword tells the iptables that the following rules are for the filtering table. Within each table, there are chains of specifications and rules.
G.1.2 Default Policies
The next three lines in the example file:
:INPUT DROP [0:0] :FORWARD ACCEPT [0:0] :OUTPUT DROP [0:0]
define the default policies of the main firewall chains. A chain is a set of rules a data packet must go through. The INPUT chain policy (DROP) applies to all incoming packets, the OUTPUT chain policy (DROP) applies to all outgoing packets and the FORWARD chain policy (ACCEPT is for all packets that go through this machine but are not destined for it. A package that is inbound to the INPUT chain is DROPped (rejected) unless another rule down the chain lets the packet pass through. The square brackets indicate the packet and byte counters. These lines should be left as they are.
G.1.3 User Defined Chains
The next two lines in the example:
:ALLOW_IN - [0:0] :ALLOW_OUT - [0:0]
are user defined chains for the use of clarity; you can call them anything. Both chains contain proprietary rules for the packets that go through.
The next two lines:
-A INPUT -j ALLOW_IN -A OUTPUT -j ALLOW_OUT
G-2
Firewall
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
add the user defined chains to the already existing default chains. A packet that goes through the INPUT chain also goes through (-jump) the ALLOW_IN chain.
G.2 Adding Rules to the Chain
The following lines define the rules that make up the chains.
-A ALLOW_IN -s 10.97.41.72 -p tcp -m tcp --dport 23 -j ACCEPT
This line tells iptables to add (-A) a new rule to the ALLOW_IN chain which catches all packets that have as source (-source) the given IP, as protocol (-protocol) TCP and as port (-dport) 23 and to accept them.
G.2.1 Applying a Rule to a Range of IPs
To apply a rule to a range of IPs:
-A ALLOW_IN p tcp m iprange --src-range 192.168.1.13-192.168.2.19 j ACCEPT
G.2.2 Inverting a Rule
To invert the rule, add an "!".
-A ALLOW_IN p tcp m iprange ! --src-range 192.168.1.13-192.168.2.19 j ACCEPT
G.2.3 After Checking the Rules
The line:
-A ALLOW_IN -j RETURN
adds a rule that tells iptables what to do after checking all the rules defined above for this chain. It returns to the parent chain, in this case INPUT.
G.2.4 Committing the Rules
The COMMIT keyword tells iptables to commit all the rules specified above it to the kernel.
G.3 Operational Behaviour
The S600+ firewall is off (all connections allowed regardless of the rules in the exfwall.txt file) when the S600+ is in the Cold Start menu.
The S600+ firewall is on (connections filter according to the rules file) as soon as you leave the Cold Start menu and the unit starts metering.
Revised January-2021
Firewall
G-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual [This page is intentionally left blank.]
G-4
Firewall
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Appendix H CFX Reporting
In This Chapter
H.1 Adding CFX Report Functionality to a Configuration File ................. H-1 H.2 Enabling CFX at the Stream Level.................................................... H-3 H.3 Changing CFX Settings from Config600........................................... H-4 H.4 Regenerating the CFX Report Template .......................................... H-5 H.5 Generating a CFX Report from the Web Browser ............................ H-5 H.6 Understanding the CFX File Structure .............................................. H-8
This appendix describes how to configure and produce reports that use the Common File eXchange (CFX) file format from Flow-Cal, Inc. Licences This feature requires that you have a license on your S600+. Without a license, you cannot generate CFX files. Contact Technical Support for further information on purchasing a license key and activating CFX functionality.
Notes:
If you need the capability to extract reports for Flow-Cal server access, contact Technical Support.
When you generate CFX report files from an S600+, ensure that the S600+ supports no more than eight (8) meter runs. Do not create a 9- or 10-meter run application that also creates CFX files.
H.1 Adding CFX Report Functionality to a Configuration File
To add CFX reports to your configuration: 1. Open the Config Generator. 2. Follow the usual steps to add I/O modules and stations.
Note: When you choose a meter type, note that the system supports CFX only for ultrasonic gas meters and for ultrasonic, turbine, and Coriolis liquid meters.
3. At the Streams configuration screen, press Options. · For a liquid stream, the following window displays:
Revised January-2021
CFX Reporting
H-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Choose the appropriate option. The CFX option you select must match the density option. In the example above, Option2 has been selected for density, so you must select CFX Option 2 to enable CFX reports on this stream.
· For a gas stream, the following window displays:
Choose the appropriate option. Choose CFX to enable CFX reports on this stream.
4. Complete the process of generating the configuration.
H-2
CFX Reporting
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
H.2 Enabling CFX at the Stream Level
To enable CFX at the stream level: 1. Open the generated configuration in PCSetup. In the left pane,
select Reports under System Setup. Using the Base Time Reports frame, select the period for the CFX report.
2. Click Add or Configure. The Archive Configuration dialog displays, showing a list of available streams with CFX file capabilities.
3. Select the appropriate checkboxes to enable or disable CFX generation for a specific stream.
Revised January-2021
CFX Reporting
H-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: The dialog also displays standard S600+ period reports for the selected period. The Number of reports to save field refers to both standard S600+ reports and CFX reports. If you select 48, the program generates a total of 48 reports (standard reports and CFX reports). Once the system saves this number of reports, it overwrites older reports. Plan the number of reports you want to save accordingly.
At any time you can edit or delete the CFX reports in your configuration file. Click Configure on the System Setup screen to display the Archive Configuration dialog. If you delete a report period from the configuration file, you also delete any reports (both standard S600+ and CFX) for that period.
H.3 Changing CFX Settings from Config600
Using a Config600 menu, you can change some of the data the system exports to a CFX report. This menu is available for each stream you defined to generate the CFX report (that is, you selected the CFX option for that stream in the Config Generator, discussed in Adding CFX Report Functionality to a Configuration File).
The following example shows the CFX menu for stream 1, which is a liquid turbine stream:
When you select CFX, the system displays the CFX Settings screen, which you use to change the following parameters:
Field Description
Meter Name Altitude
Latitude
Meter Serial Number
Description
Provides a description (with a maximum of 77 alphanumeric characters) of the CFX report.
Indicates the meter generating the CFX report.
Indicates the altitude of the meter generating the CFX report.
Indicates the latitude of the meter generating the CFX report.
Indicates the serial number of the meter generating the CFX report.
H-4
CFX Reporting
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
H.4 Regenerating the CFX Report Template
Each time you change the CFX calculation tables (by removing, adding, or changing objects or object types), you must regenerate the CFX template files. After you finish editing the configuration file (using either System Editor or PCSetup), you should regenerate the CFX report file template.
To regenerate the CFX reports:
1. Open the configuration file (using either PCSetup or the System Editor).
2. Select File > Regenerate. The system displays the Display and Modbus Regeneration dialog.
3. Select the CFX Reports checkbox. 4. Click OK.
H.5 Generating a CFX Report from the Web Browser
To generate a CFX report from the web browser: 1. Start a new browser session and select the Reports options.
Revised January-2021
CFX Reporting
H-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2. Select the CFX option. The CFX control page displays, showing the available controls for any stream for which you have set the CFX option in PCSetup.
H-6
CFX Reporting
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
3. To generate a CFX report for a stream, enter the time range in the corresponding input field. The first field indicates the report's start time; the second field indicates the report's end time. The system exports to the CFX report any historical items, alarms, and events specific to this stream that were generated during the time range you have selected. When completed, your screen might look like this for stream 1:
CFX Files and The time stamp for a generated CFX file is typically several seconds Time Stamps after the period closes. For example, a CFX file that contains historical
flow data, alarms, and events for the hour between 12:00 and 13:00 is generated and given a time stamp of approximately 5 seconds after 13:00 (that is, 13:00:05). To download the CFX file that contains data between 12:00 and 13:00, you need to enter 13:00 for the start time and 13:01 for the time stamp.
4. Click OK to generate the CFX report for the selected stream. A File Download dialog displays.
Revised January-2021
Note: This dialog may not appear instantaneously. The time the system needs to generate a CFX report depends on the number of items (including archive items, alarms, and events) it must include in the report. The greater the number of items, the more time the system needs to generate the report, and the longer the wait for this dialog to display.
CFX Reporting
H-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
5. Click Save and select a location and file name for the report. The default file name is MXX_DD_MM_YYYY_hh_mm_ss.cfx, where:
M is meter XX is the meter number DD_MM_YYYY is the creation date (day, month, year) stamp for the file hh_mm_ss is the creation time stamp (hours, minutes, seconds) for the file. 6. Once you save the file, you can open it with dedicated tools.
H.6 Understanding the CFX File Structure
As stated previously, the time stamps the system applies to generated CFX file reports are typically seconds after the end of the period. Understanding how the system creates CFX files can help.
First, the program creating CFX files uses components which are both time-dependent and time-independent:
Header (not time-dependent) Meter configuration (time-dependent) Collection of historical items (time-dependent) Collection of alarms (time-dependent) Collection of events (time-dependent) File terminator (not time-dependent)
When you select a time range for a particular stream, the system searches for the newest meter configured for that range and all historical items, alarms, and events in that range.
For example, an "hourly" CFX report contains historic items for one hour of flow data. If you specify a start time of 10:00 and an end time of 14.01, the system generates a CFX file containing:
A header A meter configuration at 14:00 A collection of historical items:
o 10:00 flow data from 09:00 to 10:00 o 11:00 flow data from 10:00 to 11:00 o 12:00 flow data from 11:00 to 12:00 o 13:00 flow data from 12:00 to 13:00 o 14:00 flow data from 13:00 to 14:00 A collection of all alarms generated between 09:00 and 14:00 A collection of all events generated between 09:00 and 14:00 A file terminator
All data collection begins at 09:00 but because the time stamp in the S600+ follows ("trails") the flow data, flow data starts at 09:00, but the report generates at 10:00.
H-8
CFX Reporting
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Appendix I Network Printing
In This Chapter
I.1 Overview ............................................................................................... I-1 I.1.1 Supported Printers ..................................................................... I-2 I.1.2 Supported Paper Sizes .............................................................. I-2
I.2 Configuring Printers from PCSetup ...................................................... I-2 I.3 Configuring Printers from the S600+ .................................................... I-4
I.3.1 Configuring at Runtime .............................................................. I-4 I.3.2 Printer Options ........................................................................... I-4 I.4 Printing Retries ..................................................................................... I-5 I.5 Editing Report Line Lengths ................................................................. I-5 I.6 Network Printing Alarms ....................................................................... I-8
This appendix provides an overview of the Network Printing function.
Note: Network printing is available for CPU modules delivered from the factory with the binary ("firmware") at 06.20 or greater. Although you can upgrade the binary on old CPU modules, network printing requires a factory upgrade of additional firmware. No user upgrade of these components is possible. If you wish to use network printing with old CPU modules, you must return them to the factory for firmware upgrades.
I.1 Overview
Network printing enables you to use one or more printers connected in the same network with the S600+ to print reports, alarms, events and all other S600+-printable documents.
Caution To ensure MID compliance, do not use network printing when the printer is legally controlled. In that case, use a serial printer with hardware handshaking.
You can connect to and use a network printer without having to install printer drivers. Once a printer is connected to the network and given an IP address, you specify that IP address (as part of the printer configuration) and start using the printer.
Note: Advanced printer functions such as support for paper sizes other than metric A4 (297mm x 210 mm) or US letter (8.5in x 11in), paper source, color printing, paper orientation, and so on are not currently available with this feature.
Printer configuration is minimized. Each network printer needs to have an IP address and a defined "print task" (reports, alarms, events, or a combination of the three). You can easily change these settings at run time.
The S600+ generates reports periodically and generates alarms and events as they occur. These are "printing tasks." You assign each printer connected to the S600+ one or more tasks. For redundancy,
Revised January-2021
Network Printing
I-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
multiple printers can perform the same task. Report, alarm, and event printing can occur automatically and manually (from the front panel), since each task has specific triggers for automatic printing:
Reports print as soon as they generate. Alarms and events print either as soon as the number of specified
alarms/events since the last print has occurred or as soon as an "elapsed time since the last print" value exceeds the time specified in the configuration.
Network printing does not replace the option to connect a serial printer. This option is still available, and you can combine the two printing protocols as necessary.
I.1.1
Supported Printers
The S600+ uses a generic network printing driver which supports a large number of printers by printing files in RAW format. This format implies that the file is sent to the printer as the S600+ generates it.
To determine if the printer is compatible, check whether port 9100 of the printer is open and whether the printer accepts RAW protocol.
I.1.2
Supported Paper Sizes
Network printing currently supports only two sizes of paper: metric A4 (297mm x 210mm) and US letter (8.5in x 11in). Further, the function supports up to 78 characters per line for A4 paper and up to 80 characters per line for Letter paper.
Note: Refer to Section I.5, Editing Report Line Lengths, for information on adjusting the line lengths of the two supported paper sizes.
I.2 Configuring Printers from PCSetup
Select I/O Setup > Comms from the PCSetup menu to define a printer as a communications link. Any communication link can be defined as a printer link by changing its function to PRINTER.
For each communication link that you set to PRINTER, you need to define the communication protocol and the communication port or IP address (depending on the protocol selected).
Additional printer settings include:
Printing task (Alarm, Event, or Report) Trigger type for automatic printing of Alarms and Events (the
timeout period of number of items) Values for each trigger
You can configure all the Comms links as printers. However, once you define a Comms link as a printer you cannot change it at runtime through either the Webserver or the Front Panel.
I-2
Network Printing
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
You can also define automatic printing triggers in the Comms menu (although this feature is available only for network printers). To enable a trigger type (based on a timeout or number of items), set its value to some non-zero value. Figure I-1 shows a serial printer configured for COM3; compare it to Figure I-2, which shows the configuration for a network printer.
Figure I-1. Defining a Serial Printer on COM3 Port
Figure I-2. Defining a Network Printer
Revised January-2021
Network Printing
I-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure I-3. Defining Comms Task 20 for the Printer
I.3 Configuring Printers from the S600+
You can also configure a printer from the S600+ Front Panel or Webserver.
I.3.1 Configuring at Runtime
The system defines printer tasks as Comms links. To change the printer communication settings (protocol, IP or port) and the general printer options (printing task, trigger value) through the Webserver or the Front Panel, you must access the Communications section.
I.3.2 Printer Options
You can edit printer options (printing task and triggers) through the Webserver and Front Panel.
Printing Task Select a print task by changing the value in the displays from zero (task not checked) to a value other than zero (task checked). The system then assigns all tasks with a non-zero value to the printer.
Printing Trigger You cannot edit the printing task directly. By using a non-zero value for a trigger value, that trigger value also sets the trigger type.
For example, if the Timeout trigger value is zero, printing is not triggered by Timeout. However, if you change that value to 1 minute,
I-4
Network Printing
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
the printer prints new alarms and events every minute, if there are new alarms and events.
I.4 Printing Retries
While printing, the S600+ performs a number of retries reading the response from the printer after sending the print request. During this time the printing task does not send any other print requests to the printer. There is a one-second delay between each retry. By default, the system has a maximum of 10 retries, so there is at most a 10-second interval between two print jobs. Depending on the network to which the S600+ and the printers are connected, more or fewer retries might be needed to be able to complete a print job. You can change the maximum number of retries using the System Editor. Access the System section and edit the Keypad Integer (KPINT) named PRN MAX RETRIES.
Note: The System Editor is available only with Config600 Pro.
Figure I-4. Redefining Printer Retries
In case of a printer error, an alarm occurs. The S600+ then tries to reprint after a 1-minute wait from the previous failed print attempt. Further print attempts continue until the printer recovers from the error, the printer IP address changes (and a new printer is assigned), or the communication protocol changes.
I.5 Editing Report Line Lengths
The Network Printing function currently supports two paper sizes, metric A4 (297 mm x 210 mm) and US letter (8.5 in x 11 in). US letter paper size is the default. A4 paper accommodates up to 78 characters per line, while US letter accommodates up to 80 characters per line. This section describes the process you use to adjust the line length for printed reports so that report content does not exceed the width of the page or the capability of your printer. For example, if your printer uses
Revised January-2021
Network Printing
I-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
A4 paper but can only accommodate 36 characters per line, use this procedure to adjust the report line length. To edit report line lengths: 1. Access the System Editor application and open the configuration
containing the reports you want to edit. 2. Using the left pane, select System > KPINTARR. From the
resulting screen, double-click the ALARM FORMAT object.
Figure I-5. Selecting the ALARM FORMAT Object An Edit dialog displays:
I-6
Network Printing
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Figure I-6. Edit Dialog
Each item in the Column section is associated with a specific piece of information that appears on a report. The information appears on the report based on the position you define in the Data field. Position 0 appears at the start of the line. If you set a field to -1 the system does not include that information on the report. Table I-1 indicates the values of the fields:
Table I-1. Field Descriptions
Field 01 02 03 04
05
06 07 08 09
10
11
Description Date; common for all report/log/archive types Time; common for all report/log/archive types Computer ID; common for all report/log/archive types Object descriptor (alarm, archive, report, etc.); common data for most messages Field descriptor (Value, InUse, etc.); common data for most messages Alarm text (HH, LL, H, L, etc.); data for alarm messages Alarm Status (SET, CLR, ACC); data for alarm messages Alarm Value; data for alarm messages Second line of two-line constant change message; data for constants change message Value field (that is, the value stored in the Value field for a KPINT object); value field for several message types Total number of characters in a log line; common for all log types. Note: The value stored in all fields up to 11 must be smaller
than the value specified in field 11.
3. Edit the value in field 11 and click OK to save your changes. Examples The following examples show settings for various kinds of messages.
Alarm archive examples:
Revised January-2021
Network Printing
I-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
F1
F2
F3 F4
F5
F7
F11
0
11
20 25
50
63
80
06/09/2013 08:48:45 S600 STR01 CORIOLIS FLOW
I/P ERR
CLR
F1
F2
F3 F4
F5
0
11
20 25
50
06/09/2013 09:31:49 S600 STR01 SERIAL DENS
L
F7 F8
F11
63 65
80
CLR 50.000000
In the following example Field 03 is set to -1, which means that the computer ID does not display. Field 04 was moved forward 3 characters.
F1
F2
F3 F4
0
11
1 22
F5
F7 F8
F11
50
63 65
80
04/09/2013 11:12:55 STR01 SERIAL DENS
L
SET
Event archive examples:
F1
F2
F3 F4
F5
F10
F11
0
11
20 25
50
63
80
06/09/2013 08:48:45 S600 STR01 DENS SEL
VALUE
I/O
F1
F2
F3 F4
F6
F10
F11
0
11
20 25
50
63
80
06/09/2013 09:31:20 S600 STR01 KP PULSE FREQ
VALUE
CHANGED FROM 2.0000000E+01 TO 5.0000000E+01 Hz
F9 25
In the following example Fields 01 and 03 are both set to -1. All other relevant fields were set correspondingly to reduce the length of the archive line.
F2
F4
F6
F7
F11
0
11
25
42
60
13:01:37 STR01 SERIAL PRESS MODE
KEYPAD
I.6 Network Printing Alarms
The table below shows the alarms that can be raised as part of the network printing functionality.
Alarm 03 05
06
Description Idle Error The file has been sent to the printer, but no job id has been assigned so it cannot print. Not Defined No network printer has been configured.
I-8
Network Printing
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Alarm 08 09
11 12
Description Job Cancelled Printing has been cancelled at the printer. Job Error The file has been sent to the printer but has not been completed or cancelled. Not Acc Jobs Buffer is full so no new jobs can be accepted. No Net Print Kernel does not support network printing.
Note: If network printing problems occur (i.e. multiple copies of a report), then the printer should be checked for any error messages (e.g. low toner) and these issues rectified. The FloBoss S600+ assumes any reports sent to the device will be printed correctly.
Revised January-2021
Network Printing
I-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual [This page is intentionally left blank.]
I-10
Network Printing
Revised January-2021
Appendix J Sampling
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
In This Chapter
J.1 Overview...............................................................................................J-1 J.2 Input / Outputs ......................................................................................J-1
J.2.1 Sampler Output..........................................................................J-2 J.2.2 Sampler Can Select Output .......................................................J-2 J.3 Sampling Options .................................................................................J-2 J.3.1 Sampler Method ........................................................................J-2 J.3.2 Sampler Mode ...........................................................................J-3 J.3.3 Can Fill Indicator........................................................................J-4 J.3.4 Auto Disable...............................................................................J-4 J.3.5 Auto Restart ...............................................................................J-4 J.4 Sampling Sequence .............................................................................J-5 J.5 Sampling Alarms ................................................................................J-10 J.6 Sampling Displays ..............................................................................J-11 J.7 Sampling System Editor ..................................................................J-13
This appendix provides an overview of the S600+ sampling functionality.
Station or Stream Based When creating a configuration, you can enable sampling either at the stream or at the station to which the stream is assigned, but not both.
Note: Refer to Chapter 5 Station Configuration or Chapter 6 Stream Configuration for details of sampling configuration screens.
J.1 Overview
Sampling is the method by which a sample of the product being metered is collected in a sample container (can). When the can is full it can be removed and sent to a laboratory for analysis.
Whilst sampling is active, the FloBoss S600+ calculates the frequency of the samples (grabs) required to fill the can based on the input parameters. You can configure these parameters via the front panel / webserver or from a supervisory system.
Can full indication is provided, and support is also available for dual can sampling.
J.2 Input / Outputs
You can configure the following inputs and outputs associated with the sampler.
Inputs In a configuration with sampling, the following inputs can be assigned:
Can 1 Fill Indication Can 2 Fill Indication Sampler Flow Rate Low Sampler Can 1 High Sampler Can 2 High
4-20mA ADC 4-20mA ADC Digital Input Digital Input Digital Input
Revised January-2021
Sampling
J-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Flow Switch (Flow Prop 3 Only)
Digital Input
Pressure Switch (Flow Prop 3 Only) Digital Input
Notes:
Some (or none) of these inputs may be required, depending on the sampling configuration.
The Can 1 and Can 2 Fill Indication 4-20mA ADC Low and High Scale values should be configured to correspond to the Can Volume of the sampler.
The flow switch and pressure switch digital inputs are not available by default. They are specific to the FLOW PROP 3 (ANP sampling) functionality and need to be added via the system editor if required.
Outputs In a configuration with sampling, the following outputs can be assigned:
Sampler Output (Grab Command) Sampler Can Select Output
Digital Output Digital Output
J.2.1 Sampler Output
The S600+ sampler logic sets the Sampler Output (Grab Command) digital output to command the sampler to take a grab. The time between grabs is called the Grab Interval and is calculated based on the Sampler Method selected.
If the Sampler Output (Grab Command) digital output is configured with Sense = Normal, the duration of the grab signal is equal to the Minimum Interval value, with a minimum value of 3 seconds.
If a shorter duration is required, the Sense = Pulse On should be selected and the Pulse Width set to the required duration.
For Flow Prop 3 mode, the Sampler Output duration is dictated by the Sampler Pulse Duration (default 3 sec).
J.2.2 Sampler Can Select Output
In Dual mode, when Can Selected = 1, the Sampler Can Select Output is cleared; when Can Selected = 2, the Sampler Can Select Output is set.
J.3 Sampling Options
You can configure many sampler options including Sampler Method, Sampler Mode, Can Fill Indicator, Auto Disable, and Auto Restart.
J.3.1 Sampler Method
The Sampler Method determines the grab interval. Possible options are Time Prop, Flow Prop 1, Flow Prop 2, and Flow Prop 3.
J-2
Sampling
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Time Prop In this mode the grab interval is in seconds.
The number of grabs required to fill the can is calculated from the Can Volume and Grab Volume. Number of grabs = Can volume (m3) / Grab volume (m3)
The Grab interval is then calculated from the Number of grabs and the Can fill period.
Grab interval (s) = Can fill period (hrs) * 3600 / Number of grabs Flow Prop 1 In this mode the grab interval is in volume (m3).
The number of grabs required to fill the can is calculated from the Can Volume and Grab Volume. Number of grabs = Can volume (m3) / Grab volume (m3)
The Grab interval is then calculated from the Number of grabs and the Can volume. Grab interval (m3) = Expected volume (m3) / Number of grabs Flow Prop 2 In this mode the grab interval is in volume (m3) and is equal to the expected volume (m3).
Flow Prop 3 In this mode the grab interval is in volume (m3) and is equal to the expected volume (m3).
It also supports the pressure switch and flow switch digital inputs. If the pressure switch is set during sampling, sampling will be stopped. When the Sampler Output has been set to take a grab, the system expects the flow switch to be set.
J.3.2 Sampler Mode
The Sampler Mode determines the number of containers used by the sampler.
SINGLE/DUAL
In SINGLE mode, the samples are acquired in one can. In DUAL mode, the samples are acquired into two cans and the sampler switches to the second can when the first can is full (according to the Twin Can Changeover Mode selection).
Twin Can Changeover Mode
You can set the can changeover to AUTO (automatically change over to the second can when the first is full) or MANUAL (sampling pauses when the first can is full and requires you to change the value of Sampler Can Select Output before sampling continues on the second can.
Notes:
If sampling is stopped because both cans are full, the Twin Can Changeover Mode is set to MANUAL by the system. You must set back to AUTO if required.
Additionally, the display for Twin Can Changeover Mode must be manually added to the displays.
Revised January-2021
Sampling
J-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
J.3.3 Can Fill Indicator
The Can Fill Indicator is used by the system to determine when the sampler container is full.
Grab Count Uses the number of grabs taken to determine when the can is full.
Grabs Count and Grab Volume are used to calculate Can Volume Filled. When Can Volume Filled is greater than Can High High Percent of Can Volume, the Can Full Status is set.
Digital Input Uses Sampler Can 1 High digital input to determine when the can is full.
Grab Count and Grab Volume are used to calculate the Can Volume Filled. When the Sampler Can 1 High digital input (shown as Can Full I/O Status) is set, the Can Full Status is set.
Analog Input
Uses Can x Fill Indication 4-20mA ADC input to determine when the can is full.
The Can x Fill Indication 4-20mA ADC input (shown as Can Fill Indicator) is used to calculate the Can Volume Filled. When the Can Volume Filled is greater than the Can High High Percent of Can Volume, the Can Full Status is set.
J.3.4 Auto Disable
The system stops sampling based on your selection in the Auto Disable field. You can select more than one Auto Disable option.
On Can Full The system stops sampling if the Can Full Status for the current can is set.
The sampling sequence stage number changes to 6, Stopped Can Full.
Sampling continues on the second can if the Sampler mode is set to DUAL, the Twin Can Changeover Mode is set to AUTO, and the second can is available.
On Flowrate Limit The system stops sampling if the stream or station gross volume flow rate drops below the Flow Rate Low Limit.
The sampling sequence stage number changes to 7, Stopped Low Flow.
On Flow Status System stops sampling if the Sampler Flow Rate Low digital input set.
The sampling sequence stage number changes to 7, Stopped Low Flow.
J.3.5 Auto Restart
If enabled, sampling restarts automatically following a pause for Can Full, Flowrate Limit, or Flow Status after the condition has cleared.
If disabled, you must manually restart sampling by setting Start Command to Start after the condition has cleared.
J-4
Sampling
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
J.4 Sampling Sequence
The sampling sequence functions in stages. Table J-1 shows the stages involved.
Note that some of the stages are only applicable to certain sampling methods as indicated.
Stage Title 0 Idle
Table J-1. Sampling Sequence Stages
Description Wait for a command to start the sequence. Clear all sampler alarms. Handle reset can volume command. Check Operator Commands:
If the Start command has been issued: o If mode is FLOW PROP 3, reset cans, set Sampler Output digital output, increment grab counters and proceed to stage 8 (Initial Time). o Else proceed to stage 1 (Monitor).
Revised January-2021
Sampling
J-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage Title 1 Monitor
2 Digital Output `n'
Description
Monitor sampler status.
Handle reset volume command.
Check Operator Commands:
If the Stop command has been issued, proceed to stage 5 (Stopped Manually) and set `Sampler Stopped when Flowing' alarm (if flow is present).
If the Terminate command has been issued, proceed to stage 0 (Idle). Note: This is only applicable if mode is FLOW PROP 3 and is not available by default. It would need to be added via the system editor if required.
Check Can(s) Full, if set:
If mode is FLOW PROP 3, proceed to stage 0 (Idle).
All other modes proceed to stage 6 (Stopped Can Full) or stage 13 (Can Switch Over Dual Can AUTO only).
Check Low Flow Status, if set:
If mode is FLOW PROP 3, proceed to stage 0 (Idle).
All other modes proceed to stage 7 (Stopped Low Flow) and set `sampler stopped when flowing' alarm if flow is present.
Check if grab required (including overruns awaiting output):
If mode is FLOW PROP 3, check pressure switch.
o If pressure switch ON, proceed to stage 11 (Stopped Pressure Switch) and raise `Pressure Switch' alarm.
o If pressure switch OFF, proceed to stage 9 (Check Flow Switch).
If grab required, proceed to stage 2 (Digital Output `n'), set Sampler Output digital output, increment grab counters and increment current can volume (Grab Count and Dig I/P).
If no grabs required, stay in stage 1 (Monitor).
If mode is FLOW PROP 1 or FLOW PROP 2:
o If number of grabs required > 1, increase overruns by (number of grabs required 1).
Synchronize with IO communications
Handle reset volume command.
Check Operator Commands:
If the Stop command has been issued, maintain the digital output for the configured time then proceed to stage 5 (Stopped Manually) and set `Sampler Stopped when Flowing' alarm (if flow is present).
If the Terminate command has been issued, maintain the digital output for the configured time then proceed to stage 0 (Idle).
Check Pressure Switch:
If mode is FLOW PROP 3, check pressure switch.
o If pressure switch ON, proceed to stage 11 (Stopped Pressure Switch) and raise `Pressure Switch' alarm.
Allow the command to be registered by the IO handling task.
Proceed to stage 3 (Minimum Interval).
J-6
Sampling
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage Title 3 Minimum Interval
4 Post Pulse 5 Stopped Manually 6 Stopped Can Full
Description
Ensure a delay between sampler pulses.
Handle reset volume command.
Check Operator Commands: If the Stop command has been issued, proceed to stage 5 (Stopped Manually) and set `Sampler Stopped when Flowing' alarm (if flow is present). If the Terminate command has been issued, proceed to stage 0 (Idle).
Check Pressure Switch: If mode is FLOW PROP 3, check pressure switch.
o If pressure switch ON, proceed to stage 11 (Stopped Pressure Switch) and raise `Pressure Switch' alarm.
Check Can(s) Full, if set: If mode is FLOW PROP 3, proceed to stage 0 (Idle). All other modes, proceed to stage 6 (Stopped Can Full) or stage 13 (Can Switch Over Dual Can AUTO only).
Once the minimum interval between pulses has been reached, clear Sampler Output digital output. Proceed to stage 4 (Post Pulse).
Post Pulse Output Delay
Allow the command to be registered by the IO handling task.
Proceed to stage 1 (Monitor).
Sampler has been stopped manually
Handle reset volume command.
Check Operator Commands: If the Start command has been issued, proceed to stage 1 (Monitor). If the Stop command has been issued, proceed to stage 0 (Idle).
Raise can full alarms if required.
Sampler has been stopped can(s) full
Handle reset volume command.
Check Operator Commands: If the Start command has been issued, proceed to stage 1 (Monitor). If the Stop command has been issued, proceed to stage 0 (Idle).
Raise low flow alarms if required.
If auto restart is enabled, can is not full, and low flow status clear, proceed to stage 1 (Monitor).
Revised January-2021
Sampling
J-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage Title 7 Stopped Low Flow
8 Initial Time
Description
Sampler has been stopped low flow
Handle reset volume command.
Check Operator Commands: If the Start command has been issued, proceed to stage 1 (Monitor). If the Stop command has been issued, proceed to stage 0 (Idle).
Raise can full alarms if required.
Raise low flow alarms if required.
If auto restart is enabled, can is not full, and low flow status clear, proceed to stage 1 (Monitor).
Monitor for sampler ready feedback
Flow Prop 3 Mode Only.
Check Operator Commands: If the Stop command has been issued, proceed to stage 0 (Idle).
Check Pressure Switch: If mode is FLOW PROP 3, check pressure switch.
o If pressure switch ON, proceed to stage 11 (Stopped Pressure Switch) and raise `Pressure Switch' alarm.
Check Initial Flow Switch Feedback: If mode is FLOW PROP 3, check flow switch.
o Wait for Sampler Pulse Duration to expire (default 3 sec) then clear Sampler Output digital output.
o If Flow Switch digital input set, proceed to stage 1 (Monitor).
o If Flow Switch digital input clear, set Sampler Output digital output again and check for Flow Switch digital input.
o Repeat for Initial Actuations (default 5) until Flow Switch digital input set.
If no feedback received from Flow Switch, proceed to stage 12 (Stopped Initialise) and set `Sampler Failed to Initialise' alarm.
J-8
Sampling
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage Title 9 Check Flow Switch
10 Not Used 11 Stopped Press
Switch
12 Stopped Initialise
Description Monitor Flow Switch status Flow Prop 3 Mode Only Check Operator Commands:
If the Stop command has been issued, proceed to stage 0 (Idle).
Check Pressure Switch: If mode is FLOW PROP 3, check pressure switch. o If pressure switch ON, proceed to stage 11 (Stopped Pressure Switch) and raise `Pressure Switch' alarm.
Check Flow Switch: If mode is FLOW PROP 3, check flow switch. o Wait for Sampler Pulse Duration to expire (default 3 sec) then clear Sampler Output digital output. o If Flow Switch digital input set, proceed to stage 3 (Minimum Interval). o If Flow Switch digital input clear for > 1 sec, raise `Flow Switch Fail' alarm and proceed to stage 3 (Minimum Interval).
Sampler has been stopped pressure switch Flow Prop 3 Mode Only. Handle reset volume command. Check Operator Commands:
If the Start command has been issued, proceed to stage 1 (Monitor).
If the Stop command has been issued, proceed to stage 0 (Idle).
Raise can full alarms if required. Check Pressure Switch:
If pressure switch OFF, proceed to stage 1 (Monitor) and clear `Pressure Switch' alarm
Sampler has been stopped failed to initialise Flow Prop 3 Mode Only. Handle reset volume command. Check Operator Commands:
If the Start command has been issued, proceed to stage 3 (Initial Time).
If the Stop command has been issued, proceed to stage 0 (Idle).
Revised January-2021
Sampling
J-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage Title 13 Can Switch Over
Description
Switchover Cans Dual Can Mode Only. Handle reset volume command. Check Operator Commands:
If the Stop command has been issued, proceed to stage 5 (Stopped Manually) and set `Sampler Stopped when Flowing' alarm if flow is present.
If the Terminate command has been issued, proceed to stage 0 (Idle).
Switch Can Selected, switch Sampler Can Select Output. Once changeover time has elapsed, proceed to stage 1 (Monitor).
J.5 Sampling Alarms
Table J-2 shows the alarms that can be raised as part of the sampling functionality. The alarm limits / dead bands are calculated based on the can volume and the operator entered percentages. High limit = can volume * (can high limit / 100) High high limit = can volume * (can high high limit / 100) High dead band = can volume * ((high limit 2.0) / 100) High high dead band = can volume * ((high high limit 2.0) / 100)
Alarm Can x Full
Can x High Speed
Stopped Low Flow Flow Switch
Press Switch
Table J-2. Sampling Alarms
Description Volume greater than or equal to the High High limit (Grab Count, Analogue Input). Digital input ON (Digital Input) . Volume greater than or equal to the High limit. Alarm is cleared when the volume is less than the high dead band. In Time Prop mode: The configured time proportional interval is less than the minimum interval (This cannot be less than 1 second). In Flow Prop 1 and Flow Prop 2 modes: The number of overruns is greater than 10. (Alarm cleared when number of overruns is less than 6). The sampler has been stopped but flow is still present. The sampler has been automatically stopped. The flow rate is below the low flow limit. Flow Prop 3 Mode Only. The sampler has been automatically stopped. The flow switch digital input status has been set to OFF for more than the permitted time (1 second). Flow Prop 3 Mode Only. The sampler has been automatically stopped. The pressure switch digital input status is set to ON.
J-10
Sampling
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Alarm Init Fail
FSW Stuck
Description Flow Prop 3 Mode Only. The sampler has been automatically stopped. The number of initial grabs taken has exceeded the maximum allowed before the flow switch signal is received from the sampler. Flow Prop 3 Mode Only. The sampler has been automatically stopped. The flow switch has been ON for more than the permitted time (FSW On Limit, default 2 sec).
J.6 Sampling Displays
The following table describes the displays associated with sampling. Access the displays through the S600+ front panel or web browser.
Table J-3. Sampling Displays
Display (SAMP PARAMS) SAMPLER METHOD SAMPLER MODE CAN FILL INDICATOR
A / DISABLE CAN FULL A / DISABLE F/R LIM A / DISABLE F/R STAT A / RESTART EXPECTED VOL PERIOD FR LOW LIMIT TIME PROP INTERVAL MINIMUM INTERVAL CAN VOLUME GRAB VOLUME CAN LOW PERCENT CAN HH PERCENT CAN H PERCENT
Description
Identifies the sampling method in use as described in section J.3.
Single Can or Dual Can.
Identifies the method by which the can full indication is obtained (Grab Count, Digital input, Analogue input).
Auto disable on can full enable / disable.
Auto disable on flow rate limit enable / disable.
Auto disable on flow status (Sampler Flow Rate Low digital input) enable / disable.
Auto restart (following auto disable) enable / disable.
Volume (m3) over which samples are to be taken to fill can used in Flow Prop modes.
Time (hours) over which samples are to be taken to fill can used in Time Prop mode.
Low limit for auto disable on flow rate limit option.
Calculated time (s) between grabs used in Time Prop mode.
Indicates minimum time (seconds) between grabs.
Total can volume.
Required grab volume.
Not used.
High High alarm value as a percentage of the can volume. Used to indicate can full.
High alarm value as a percentage of the can volume.
Revised January-2021
Sampling
J-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Display (SAMP CONTROL) START COMMAND
CAN SELECTED STAGE No LOW FLOW STATUS OVERRUNS
Description
Start or Stop sampling command.
Note: Following a cold start, Reset Can x Vol must be carried out for Can Selected before Start sampling command will be accepted. (Does not apply to Flow Prop 3).
Can 1 or Can 2 (will show can 1 in single can mode).
Current sampling stage.
Set to CLEAR when flow above the flow rate low limit value, otherwise SET. Also set by Sampler Flow Rate Low digital input.
In Flow Prop 1 or Flow Prop 2, if number of grabs required based on the flow increment is greater than 1, overruns will be incremented by (number of grabs required 1).
Note: If sampling has been paused and restarted, overruns will still be calculated based on the flow increment since the last grab was taken.
The sampler will attempt to "catch up" by issuing grabs to decrease the number of overruns, if permitted by the values of Minimum Interval, Expected Volume and volume flow rate.
Display (SAMP CAN x) RESET CAN x VOL
GRABS COUNT GRABS REMAINING GRABS TO FILL CAN CAN VOL FILLED CAN VOL REMAINING CAN FULL STATUS CAN FULL I/O STAT
Description
Updates Can Fill Indicator and Can Volume
Recalculates Grabs to Fill Can and Time Prop Interval
Resets Grabs Count, Grabs Remaining, Overruns, Can Vol Filled and Can Vol Remaining.
Note: If Can Fill Indicator = ANALOG I/P, Can Vol Filled and Can Vol Remaining are not reset.
Clears various sampler alarms.
Current grab count.
Grabs remaining before the can is full.
Calculated number of grabs to fill the can.
Volume (m3) that is currently in the can.
Volume (m3) equal to (Can Volume Can Vol Filled).
Set to CLEAR when can is not full, otherwise SET.
Current status of Sampler Can X High digital input. Applies when using Can Fill
J-12
Sampling
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
CAN FILL INDICATOR
Indicator = Dig. I/P.
Current value of Can X Fill Indication 420mA ADC. Applies when using Can Fill Indicator = Analog I/P.
J.7 Sampling System Editor
For Flow Prop 3 mode, you must configure additional digital inputs used by the system for the flow switch and pressure switch.
For Flow Prop 3 mode, the terminate command must be added to the SAMP RUN CMNDS truth table (Ctext 4 = TERMINATE, sval4 = 3).
Note: System editor is available only with the Config600 Pro software and requires completion of the RA901 Advanced Config600 Training Course.
Revised January-2021
Sampling
J-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual [This page is intentionally left blank.]
J-14
Sampling
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Appendix K Chromatographs
In This Chapter
K.1 Station/Stream Assignment ................................................................. K-2 K.1.1 Single Metering Stream with No Station ................................... K-2 K.1.2 Multiple Metering Streams Assigned to a Common Station ..... K-2 K.1.3 Individual Metering Streams Assigned to a Chromatograph .... K-2 K.1.4 Multiple Metering Streams Separately Assigned to a Stream .. K-3 K.1.5 Multiple S600+s Connected to a Single Chromatograph ......... K-3
K.2 Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................. K-3 K.2.1 Main Setup Parameters ............................................................ K-4 K.2.2 Component Set Selection Inputs .............................................. K-4 K.2.3 Component Set Selection Outputs ........................................... K-4 K.2.4 Telemetry Configuration Parameters........................................ K-4 K.2.5 Telemetry Outputs .................................................................... K-5
K.3 Configuration Type: Keypad Mole Percentage Set Only..................... K-6 K.4 Configuration Type: 2551/2350 Euro .................................................. K-7
K.4.1 Telemetry Stages...................................................................... K-7 K.4.2 Determining the Mole Percentage Set.................................... K-11 K.4.3 Handling Operator Commands ............................................... K-11 K.5 Configuration Type: 2251/2350 USA................................................. K-11 K.5.1 Telemetry Stages.................................................................... K-12 K.5.2 Determining the Mole Percentage Set.................................... K-13 K.5.3 Handling Operator Commands ............................................... K-14 K.6 Configuration Type: Siemens ............................................................ K-14 K.6.1 Telemetry Stages.................................................................... K-14 K.6.2 Determining the Mole Percentage Set.................................... K-16 K.6.3 Handling Operator Commands ............................................... K-17 K.7 Configuration Type: Generic.............................................................. K-17 K.7.1 Telemetry Stages.................................................................... K-17 K.7.2 Determining the Mole Percentage Set.................................... K-19 K.7.3 Handling Operator Commands ............................................... K-20 K.8 Configuration Type: Download from Supervisory System................. K-20 K.9 Normalisation, Additionals, and C+6 Handling .................................. K-20 K.9.1 Normalisation .......................................................................... K-20 K.9.2 Application of Additionals........................................................ K-21 K.9.3 C6+ Handling .......................................................................... K-21 K.9.4 C6+ Handling (SIM 2251 Method) .......................................... K-21 K.9.5 C7+ Handling .......................................................................... K-22 K.9.6 No C6+ or C7+ Handling ........................................................ K-23 K.10 Alarms, Displays, Reports, and Maps ............................................... K-23 K.10.1 Alarms.................................................................................. K-23 K.10.2 Displays ............................................................................... K-23 K.10.3 Reports ................................................................................ K-24 K.10.4 Modbus Maps ...................................................................... K-27
This appendix defines the operation of the gas chromatograph software application module for the FloBoss S600+ flow computer. The module supports the following chromatograph serial interfaces:
Daniels 2551 Euro Daniels 2350 Euro (in SIM2551 emulation mode) Daniels 2350 USA (in SIM2251 emulation mode) Daniels 2251 USA Siemens Generic (user-configurable)
Revised January-2021
Chromatographs
K-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Note: This software does not currently support a paycheck chromatograph.
K.1 Station/Stream Assignment
The S600 chromatograph software supports the following station and metering stream combinations:
Single stream with no station Multiple metering streams assigned to a common station (where
each stream uses the station's mole percentage set) Individual metering streams in the same S600+ (where each
metering stream connects to the same chromatograph but each metering stream maps to a unique chromatograph cycle stream) Multiple S600+s connected to a single chromatograph (using a router which is itself connected to the chromatograph).
The following sections describe each of the station and metering stream combinations.
K.1.1 Single Metering Stream with No Station
This situation uses the single Modbus map that PCSetup generates in conjunction with the chosen chromatograph type and processing options. The identified S600+ chromatograph "cycle stream" must match the reported chromatograph stream.
Mode Handling The stream's relative density (RD) and heating value (CV) modes Note (provided they are in "keypad" or "chromat" mode) can track the mole percentage selection (keypad or chromat).
K.1.2 Multiple Metering Streams Assigned to a Common Station
This situation uses the Modbus map that PCSetup generates to describe the station data which is then passed to any of the metering streams which are assigned to the same station and have their acceptance type set to "station copy".
The module acquires and processes the station's mole percentage set, RD, and CV, and then copies the processed good data into the equivalent data points for any dependent streams.
Mode Handling The station and stream's RD and CV modes (provided they are in Note "keypad" or "chromat" mode) can track the mole percentage selection (keypad or chromat).
K.1.3 Individual Metering Streams Assigned to a Chromatograph
Each metering stream may have an individual serial connection to a chromatograph. Generate an individual Modbus map for each connection.
Mode Handling The individual stream RD and CV modes (provided they are in Note "keypad" or "chromat" mode) can track the individual stream mole %
K-2
Chromatographs
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
selection (keypad or chromat).
K.1.4 Multiple Metering Streams Separately Assigned to a Stream
In this situation, a station-to-chromatograph link exists but the chromatograph is configured to analyse a number of cycle streams where these streams may be assigned to separate metering streams in the S600+.
The intent is that the station performs all the Modbus polling but matches the cycle stream from the analysis report with any from the list of metering streams to identify it.
Each metering stream must be configured as having the same chromatograph type, port number and slave address as the station. Only the cycle stream should be unique.
Mode Handling The individual stream RD and CV modes (provided they are in Note "keypad" or "chromat" mode) can track the individual stream mole % selection (keypad or chromat).
K.1.5 Multiple S600+s Connected to a Single Chromatograph
In this situation, individual S600+s poll a single chromatograph via a data concentrator. The module does not synchorise polling between the S600+s. The concentrator is expected to cleanly separate the messages so that a channel between the S600+ and the chromatograph, once opened, is not disturbed by the other S600+s.
Each S600+ is expected to have a unique cycle stream so that when the chromatograph flags that a new report is available, each S600+ takes one of two possible courses of action:
If the report stream matches the S600+ cycle stream, then the S600+ locks into a data acquisition sequence for the mole percentage data etc. At the end of this and after a delay, the new data flag resets.
If the report stream does not match the S600+ cycle stream, then the S600+ delays polling. After this delay, the S600+ polls again; if the new data flag is still set, then the new data flag resets.
K.2 Inputs and Outputs
The chromatograph application interfaces indirectly with the chromatograph via a set of S600+ data points (described by the PCSetup-generated Modbus map). The application steers the order of S600+ to chromatograph Modbus polling for status data, mole percentages, and so on.
Revised January-2021
Chromatographs
K-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
K.2.1 Main Setup Parameters
Combination Type Split Switch Range Checks
Deviation Checks Critical Checks Non Critical Checks Failure Revert Acceptance Type
Keypad set only /single chromatograph
None/C6+/C7+/C8+/C9+/C10+
Disable/enable mole percentage range alarm handling
Disable/enable mole percentage deviation checking
Disable/enable critical alarms checks
Disable/enable non-critical alarms checks
Keypad/last good set revisions upon failure
Accept and copy Accept, normalise, and copy Automatic normalise and copy
K.2.2 Component Set Selection Inputs
Set Selected Default Mole Set Additionals C6+ etc. Splits
Low Limits
High Limits
Deviation Limits Accept Command
Keypad or chromat (or keypad after failure)
Keypad set of component mole percentages
Keypad values for H2S,H2O,He,O2,CO,and H2
Percentages of C6+ for hexane through to decane
Low alarm bands for component mole percentages
High alarm bands for component mole percentages
Percentage change limits for current versus previous reports
For validation/acceptance of the keypad set
K.2.3 Component Set Selection Outputs
In use mole % Real Relative Density CV
Value of the mole percentage selected As reported from the chromatograph As reported from the chromatograph
K.2.4 Telemetry Configuration Parameters
Status Type Port Address Cycle Stream Analysis Timeout Mole Ordering
Poll Delay
Announces telemetry alarms; is fixed at pay.
See Introduction to this appendix.
Indicates the S600+ telemetry port number
Indicates the telemetry address of slave chromatograph
Identifies the chromatograph analysis stream
Reserved for future use
Mole ordering is based on the S600+ internal order for component codes and specifies the slot in the telemetry buffer for this component's mole percentage value. This ordering array is normally updated upon receipt of the component codes from the chromatograph.
Indicates the interval between polls
K-4
Chromatographs
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Matched Reset Delay
Unmatched Reset Delay
Indicates the interval after receipt of a matched report before resetting the new data flag
Indicates the delay the system takes before resetting the new data flag after the flag is seen as set but the report cycle stream does not match the S600+.
Note: If this value is set to zero, then the sequence does not rest the non-matched new data flag.
K.2.5 Telemetry Outputs
Stage Number
Status Poll Request Flag Mole Codes Request Flag Mole Poll Request Flag CV (etc.) Poll Request Flag Reset Report Flag Current Report Status Good Report Latch Raw Status Data
Any one of the following values:
0 Idle
1 Poll delay, then poll for status data
2 Wait for status data
3
Poll delay, then poll for component codes
4 Wait for component codes
5
Poll delay, then wait for mole percentages
6 Wait for mole percentage data
7 Poll delay, then wait for CV, RD
8 Wait for CV, RD
9 Reset new data flag (reserved)
10
Poll delay, then poll again for status data
11 Wait for status data
12 Process analysis data
13
Delay after a matched report, then poll again for status data
14 Wait for new status data
15 Poll delay, then reset new data flag
16 Wait for new data flag reset
17
Delay after unmatched report, then poll again for status data
18 Wait for status data
19 Poll delay, then reset new data flag
20 Wait for new data flag reset
Trigger for Modbus master telemetry module
Trigger for Modbus master telemetry module
Trigger for Modbus master telemetry module
Trigger for Modbus master telemetry module
Trigger for Modbus master telemetry module Accepted or rejected Flat for receipt of a good report Updated from a successful telemetry poll
Revised January-2021
Chromatographs
K-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Raw Mole %s Raw CV (etc.) Latest Mole %s Last Good Mole % Raw Alarms Register Codes Request Flag Component Codes Last Good Set of Mole %s Time Stamp
Updated from a successful telemetry poll Updated from a successful telemetry poll Adjusted/normalised from latest report Adjusted/normalised from latest report Detailed indication of global alarms Trigger for Modbus master telemetry module Updates from a successful telemetry poll S600+-internally ordered from last good raw set Time of the last good analysis
K.3 Configuration Type: Keypad Mole Percentage Set Only
Use this configuration when there is no chromatograph linked to the S600+. The keypad set describes the entire mole percentage breakdown, including additionals and C6+ entries. Thus, whenever you use the keypad set, the system ignores the entries from the other arrays for additionals and C6+ and uses the keypad set alone.
Processing of the keypad set and its subsequent copying into the in-use set depends on the acceptance type:
Accept and Copy The sum of the keypad components is regularly maintained. When the Accept command is issued:
If range checking is enabled, the keypad set is checked against individual mole percentage low and high limits.
If range checking is disabled, the keypad sum is checked for the range 99.9 to 100.1.
Accept, Normalise, and Copy
If the keypad set is valid, the system copies it to the in-use set. If the keypad set is invalid, an alarm is raised and the in-use set
remains intact.
The sum of the keypad components is regularly maintained. When the Accept command is issued:
If range checking is enabled, the keypad set is checked against individual mole percentage low and high limits.
If range checking is disabled, the keypad sum is checked for the range 99.9 to 100.1.
If the keypad set is valid, the system normalises it and then copies it to the in-use set
If the keypad set is invalid, an alarm is raised and the in-use set remains intact.
Auto Normalise The sum of the keypad components is regularly maintained. On a regular basis:
If range checking is enabled, the keypad set is checked against individual mole percentage low and high limits.
If range checking is disabled, the keypad sum is checked for the range 99.9 to 100.1.
K-6
Chromatographs
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
If the keypad set is valid, the system normalises it and then copies it to the in-use set
If the keypad set is invalid, an alarm is raised and the in-use set remains intact.
K.4 Configuration Type: 2551/2350 Euro
For this configuration, use PCSetup to preconfigure the master Modbus interface. The master Modbus process interfaces to the 2551/2350 as instructed by the chromatograph data handling software. The system can then perform a controlled, sequential series of polls, enabling the orderly acquisition of analysis report data.
Note: The process of configuring a 2551 and 2350 Euro chromatograph is identical. For that reason, we use 2551 to refer to both the 2551 and 2350 devices.
Keypad Mole Refer to Section K.3, Configuration Type: Keypad Mole Percentage Percentage Set Set Only, for information on setting the keypad percentage set.
K.4.1 Telemetry Stages
Data acquisition occurs over a number of stages, during which the data handling module interacts with the Modbus master module to control the order of telemetry polling.
Stage 1 Idle
2 Pre-status Poll Delay (1)
Description
If configured for telemetry, then set next stage to Wait for status data Reply (1).
Delay, then set the flag for the Modbus master process to poll for status data at data addresses 3041 to 3061.
Set next stage to Wait for Status Data Reply (1).
Revised January-2021
Chromatographs
K-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage
Description
3 Wait for Status Data Reply (1)
Wait up to the time-out period for the 2551 to respond. If no reply has been received then set the telemetry fail alarm and set the stage to Idle.
If a reply has been received and the new report available flag is set and the report stream matches the S600+ cycle stream, then set the stage to Pre-component Codes Poll Delay.
If a reply has been received and the new report available flag is set and the report stream does not match the S600+ cycle stream and the delay for non-matched reset is non-zero, then set the stage to Non-matched Delay.
If a reply has been received and the new report available flag is set and the report stream does not match the S600+ cycle stream and the delay for non-matched reset is zero, then set the stage to Idle.
If a reply has been received and the new report available flag is clear, then set the stage to Idle.
4 Pre-component Codes Poll Delay, then flag the Modbus master to
Delay
poll for the component codes at data
addresses 3001 to 3016 and set the next
stage to Wait for Component Codes
Poll Reply.
5 Wait for Component Codes Wait up to the time-out period for the
Poll Reply
2551 to respond. If no reply has been
received, then set the telemetry fail
alarm and set the stage to Idle.
If a reply has been received, then set the stage to Pre-Mole Percentage Poll Delay.
If a reply has been received then set the flag for the Modbus master to poll for the mole percentage results at data addresses 7000 to 7016 and set the next stage to Poll for Mole Percentages.
6 Pre-mole Percentage Poll Delay
Delay, then flag the Modbus master to poll for the mole percentage results at data addresses 7000 to 7016 and set the next stage to Wait for Mole Percentage Poll Reply.
7 Wait for Mole Percentage Poll Reply
Wait up to the time-out period for the 2551 to respond. If no reply has been received, then set the telemetry fail alarm and set the stage to Idle.
If a reply has been received, then set the stage to Pre-RD & CV Poll Delay.
8 Pre-RD & CV Poll Delay
Delay, then set the flag for the Modbus master to poll for heating value (CV) and relative density (RD) results at data addresses 7033 to 7039. Set the next stage to Wait for RD & CV Poll Reply.
K-8
Chromatographs
Revised January-2021
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 9 Wait for RD & CV Poll
Reply 10 Immediate Reset 11 Pre-status Poll Delay (2) 12 Wait for Status Data Reply
(2)
13 Process the Analysis Report
14 Delay after Report
Description
Wait up to the time-out period for the 2551 to respond. If no reply has been received, then set the telemetry fail alarm and set the stage to Idle.
If a reply has been received, then set the next stage to Pre-status Poll Delay (2).
Currently reserved
Delay, then set the flag for the Modbus master process to poll for status data at data addresses 3041 to 3061.
Set next stage to Wait for Status Data Reply (2).
Wait up to the time-out period for the 2551 to respond. If no reply has been received, then set the telemetry fail alarm and set the stage to Idle.
If a reply has been received and the new report available flag is still set and the report stream still matches the S600+ cycle stream, then set the stage to Process the Analysis Report. Otherwise, set the next stage to Idle (since the chromatograph is now out-of-step with the S600+).
1. Reorder the raw telemetered mole percentage into S600+ internal order (as directed by the received component codes, which run in ascending values from 100).
2. If configured to do so, check low/high and deduction limits
3. Normalise the reordered mole percentage set.
4. If enabled (that is, non-zero values entered), apply the additionals.
5. If enabled, apply the C6+ or C7+ splits.
6. Copy the processed mole percentage set into the latest processed set.
7. If enabled, perform critical alarm checks on peak overflow, etc.
8. If enabled, perform non-critical alarm check on ADC fails, etc.
9. If there are no limit, critical, or deviation alarms, then mark the analysis as good, copy the processed mole percentage set into the last good set, update the RD and CV, and record the time.
Wait up to the specified time, then set the flag for the Modbus master to poll for status data at data addresses 3041 to 3061.
Chromatographs
K-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 15 Wait for Status Data Reply
(3)
16 Pre-reset Delay (1) 17 Wait for Reset Response
18 Delay after Report (NonMatching)
19 Wait for Status Data Reply (4)
20 Pre-reset Delay (2) 21 Wait for Reset Response
(2)
Description
Wait up to the time-out period for the 2551 to respond. If no reply has been received, then set the telemetry fail alarm and set the stage to Idle.
If a reply has been received and the new report available flag is still set and the report stream still matches the S600+ cycle stream, then set the stage to Prereset Delay (1). Otherwise, set the next stage to Idle (since the chromatograph is now out-of-step with the S600+).
Delay, then set the flag for the Modbus master process to reset the new data flag at data address 3058. Set the next stage to Wait for Reset Reponse.
Wait up to the time-out period for the 2551 to respond. If no reply has been received, then set the telemetry fail alarm and set the stage to Idle.
If a reply has been received, then set the next stage to Idle. This is the last stage of the normal data acquisition cycle.
Wait up to the specified time, then set the flag for the Modbus master to poll for status data at data addresses 3041 to 3061.
Wait up to the time-out period for the 2551 to respond. If no reply has been received, then set the telemetry fail alarm and set the stage to Idle.
If a reply has been received and the new report available flag is still set and the report stream does not match the S600+ cycle stream, then set the stage to Pre-reset Delay (2). Otherwise, set the next stage to Idle (since the chromatograph is now out-of-step with the S600+, most probably because another S600+ has reset the new data flag).
Delay, then set the flag for the Modbus master process to reset the new data flag at data address 3058. Set the next stage to Wait for Reset Response (2).
Wait up to the time-out period for the 2551 to respond. If no reply has been received, then set the telemetry fail alarm and set the stage to Idle.
If a reply has been received, then set the next stage to Idle. This is the last stage of the cycle where a new report has been flagged by is not assigned to this S600+.
K-10
Chromatographs
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
K.4.2 Determining the Mole Percentage Set
This section details how the module selects the mole percentage set.
Keypad Refer to Section K.3, Configuration Type: Keypad Mole Percentage Set Selected Set Only, for information on setting the keypad percentage set.
Chromatograph The system uses the following logic to select a chromatograph set:
Set Selected
If the current report has no deviations or critical alarms, then: Copy the latest real RD into the Real RD.Chromat field. Copy the latest real CV into the Real CV.Chromat field. Copy the latest mole % set to the in-use mole % set.
Else If the revert switch is set and a previous report is OK then: Copy the last good real RD to the Real RD.Chromat field. Copy the latest real CV to the Real CV.Chromat field. Copy the last good mole % to the in-use mole % set.
Else Switch to using the keypad mole % set.
Endif
K.4.3 Handling Operator Commands
This section details how the module handles operator commands.
Select Keypad Mole Percentage
Select Chromat Mole Percentage
Select the keypad set only if it is valid according to the checks outlined in Section K.4.2, Determining the Mole Percentage Set. Otherwise, leave the in-use set intact.
The system uses the following logic to select a chromat mole percentage:
If there are no system alarms and the latest report is OK, then: Copy the latest mole % set to the in-use set.
Else If the Revert to Last Good switch is on then: If the previous report is OK then: Copy the latest mole % set to the in-use set. Copy the latest RD and CV to the in-use set. Endif Endif
Endif
K.5 Configuration Type: 2251/2350 USA
For this configuration, use PCSetup to preconfigure the master Modbus interface. The master Modbus process interfaces to the 2251/2350 as instructed by the chromatograph data handling software. The system can then perform a controlled, sequential series of polls, which enables the orderly acquisition of analysis report data.
Note: The process of configuring a 2251 and 2350 USA chromatograph is identical. For that reason, we use 2251 to refer to both the 2251 and 2350 device.
Keypad Mole Refer to Section K.3, Configuration Type: Keypad Mole Percentage Percentage Set Set Only, for information on setting the percentage set.
Revised January-2021
Chromatographs
K-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
K.5.1 Telemetry Stages
Data acquisition occurs over a number of stages, during which the data handling module interacts with the Modbus master module to control the order of telemetry polling.
The 2251 may enter a phase in which it is busy printing report and does not respond to poll requests. To avoid spurious poll fail alarms, the S600+ Modbus software tries to elicit a response every three seconds for up to 45 seconds before it issues a timeout alarm.
Note: While the 2251 does not directly report the number of the last stream analysed, this data is assumed to be held as the "current stream" in register 3034.
Stage
Description
1 Idle
Set the flag for the Modbus master process to poll for status data at data addresses 3033-3059.
Set the next stage to Wait for Status Data.
2 Wait for Status Data
Wait up to the time-out period for the 2251 to respond. If no reply has been received, then set the telemetry fail alarm and set the stage to Idle.
If a reply has been received and the new report available flag is on, then set the flag for the Modbus master to poll for the component codes at data addresses 3001 to 3016 and set the next stage to Poll for Component Codes.
If a reply has been received and the new report available flag is clear, then set the stage to Idle.
3 Wait for Component Codes Wait up to the time-out period for the
Poll Reply
2251 to respond. If no reply has been
received, then set the telemetry fail
alarm and set the stage to Idle.
If a reply has been received, then set the flag for the Modbus master to poll for the mole percentage results at data addresses 7001 to 7016 and set the next stage to Poll for Mole Percentages.
4 Wait for Mole Percentage Poll Reply
Wait up to the time-out period for the 2251 to respond. If no reply has been received, then set the telemetry fail alarm and set the stage to Idle.
If a reply has been received, then set the flag for the Modbus master to poll for the heating value (CV) and relative density (RD) results at data addresses 7033 to 7039 and set the next stage to Poll for CV.
K-12
Chromatographs
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 5 Wait for RD and CV Poll
Reply
6 Process the Analysis Report
Description
Wait up to the time-out period for the 2251 to respond. If no reply has been received, then set the telemetry fail alarm and set the stage to Idle.
If a reply has been received, then proceed to Process the Analysis Report.
1. Reorder the raw telemetered mole percentage into S600+ internal order (as directed by the received component codes, which run in ascending values from 0).
2. If configured to do so, check low/high and deduction limits
3. Normalise the reordered mole percentage set.
4. If enabled (that is, non-zero values entered), apply the additionals.
5. If enabled, apply the C6+ or C7+ splits.
6. Copy the processed mole percentage set into the latest processed set.
7. If enabled, perform critical alarm checks on peak overflow, etc.
8. If enabled, perform non-critical alarm check on ADC fails, etc.
9. If there are no limit, critical, or deviation alarms, then mark the analysis as good, copy the processed mole percentage set into the last good set, update the RD and CV, and record the time.
K.5.2 Determining the Mole Percentage Set
This section details how the module selects the mole percentage set.
Keypad Refer to Section K.3, Configuration Type: Keypad Mole Percentage Set Selected Set Only, for information on setting the keypad percentage set.
Chromatograph The system uses the following logic to select a chromatograph set:
Set Selected
If the current report has no deviations or critical alarms, then: Copy the latest real RD into the Real RD.Chromat field. Copy the latest real CV into the Real CV.Chromat field. Copy the latest mole % set to the in-use mole % set.
Else If the revert switch is set and a previous report is OK then: Copy the last good real RD to the Real RD.Chromat field. Copy the latest real CV to the Real CV.Chromat field. Copy the last good mole % to the in-use mole % set.
Else Switch to using the keypad mole % set.
Endif
Revised January-2021
Chromatographs
K-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
K.5.3 Handling Operator Commands
This section details how the module handles operator commands.
Select Keypad Mole Percentage
Select Chromat Mole Percentage
Select the keypad set only if it is valid according to the checks outlined in Section K.4.2, Determining the Mole Percentage Set. Otherwise, leave the in-use set intact.
The system uses the following logic to select a chromatograph mole percentage:
If there are no system alarms and the latest report is OK, then: Copy the latest mole % set to the in-use set.
Else If the Revert to Last Good switch is on then: If the previous report is OK then: Copy the latest mole % set to the in-use set. Copy the latest RD and CV to the in-use set. Endif Endif
Endif
K.6 Configuration Type: Siemens
For this configuration, use PCSetup to pre-configure the master Modbus interface. The master Modbus process interfaces to the unit as instructed by the chromatograph data handling software. The system can then perform a controlled, sequential series of polls, enabling the orderly acquisition of analysis report data.
Keypad Mole Refer to Section K.3, Configuration Type: Keypad Mole Percentage Percentage Set Set Only, for information on setting the keypad percentage set.
K.6.1 Telemetry Stages
Data acquisition occurs over a number of stages, during which the data handling module interacts with the Modbus master module to control the order of telemetry polling. The Siemens unit requires polling for status and analysis data in an alternating sequence each time the unit is polled.
Stage 1 Idle
Description
If configured for telemetry and this is the first time of polling for data send a poll requesting the status of the unit.
Otherwise send a poll to request the analysis data.
K-14
Chromatographs
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 2 Wait for Status or Pre-
Analysis Reply
3 Poll for Mole Percentages
Description
Wait up to the time-out period for the unit to respond and then (depending on the data being polled for) either:
· Process the staus report checcking for any critical alarms, if any alarms are found then raise the alarms. Set the next stage to Idle so that the next poll requests the analysis data.
· Check the returned message for the values of the analysis flags and calibration flags. If either of these has changed value from the previous pre analysis poll, then issue a new poll to request the mole data and set the next stage to Poll for Mole Percentages. If the flags have not changed in value then set the next stage to Idle.
If the poll response indicated a failure then set the next stage to Idle.
Wait up to the time-out period for the unit to respond and then (depending on the data being polled for) either:
· If calibration data has been returned then do not process this. Set the next stage to Idle.
· If this is analysis data then set the next stage to Process Data.
If the poll response indicated a failure then set the next stage to Idle.
Revised January-2021
Chromatographs
K-15
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 4 Process Data
Description
Process the analysis data:
1. Reorder the raw telemetered mole percentage into S600+ internal order (as directed by the received component codes, which run in ascending values from 100).
2. If configured to do so, check low/high and deduction limits.
3. Normalise the reordered mole percentage set.
4. If enabled (that is, non-zero values entered), apply the additionals.
5. If enabled, apply the C6+ or C7+ splits.
6. Copy the processed mole percentage set into the latest processed set.
7. If enabled, perform critical alarm checks on peak overflow, etc.
8. If enabled, perform non-critical alarm check on ADC fails, etc.
9. If there are no limit, critical, or deviation alarms, then mark the analysis as good, copy the processed mole percentage set into the last good set, update the RD and CV, and record the time.
10. Print the chromat report showing the analysis performed.
Once complete set the next stage to Idle.
K.6.2 Determining the Mole Percentage Set
This section details how the module selects the mole percentage set.
Keypad Refer to Section K.3, Configuration Type: Keypad Mole Percentage Set Selected Set Only, for information on setting the keypad percentage set.
Chromatograph The system uses the following logic to select a chromatograph set:
Set Selected
If the current report has no deviations or critical alarms, then: Copy the latest real RD into the Real RD.Chromat field. Copy the latest real CV into the Real CV.Chromat field. Copy the latest mole % set to the in-use mole % set.
Else If the revert switch is set and a previous report is OK then: Copy the last good real RD to the Real RD.Chromat field. Copy the latest real CV to the Real CV.Chromat field. Copy the last good mole % to the in-use mole % set.
Else Switch to using the keypad mole % set.
Endif
K-16
Chromatographs
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
K.6.3 Handling Operator Commands
This section details how the module handles operator commands.
Select Keypad Mole Percentage
Select Chromat Mole Percentage
Select the keypad set only if it is valid according to the checks outlined in Section K.4.2, Determining the Mole Percentage Set. Otherwise, leave the in-use set intact.
The system uses the following logic to select a chromatograph mole percentage:
If there are no system alarms and the latest report is OK, then: Copy the latest mole % set to the in-use set.
Else If the Revert to Last Good switch is on then: If the previous report is OK then: Copy the latest mole % set to the in-use set. Copy the latest RD and CV to the in-use set. Endif Endif
Endif
K.7 Configuration Type: Generic
For this configuration, use PCSetup to pre-configure the master Modbus interface. The master Modbus process interfaces to the unit as instructed by the chromatograph data handling software. The system can then perform a controlled, sequential series of polls, enabling the orderly acquisition of analysis report data.
Keypad Mole Refer to Section K.3, Configuration Type: Keypad Mole Percentage Percentage Set Set Only, for information on setting the keypad percentage set.
K.7.1 Telemetry Stages
Data acquisition occurs over a number of stages, during which the data handling module interacts with the Modbus master module to control the order of telemetry polling. The Siemens unit requires polling for status and analysis data in an alternating sequence each time the unit is polled.
Stage 1 Idle
Description
If configured for telemetry and this is the first time of polling for data send a poll requesting the status of the unit.
Otherwise send a poll to request the analysis data.
Revised January-2021
Chromatographs
K-17
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 2 Poll for Status Data
3 Poll for Mole Percentages 4 Poll for CV 5 Immediate Reset
Description
Wait up to the time-out period for the unit to respond and then (depending on the data being polled for) either:
· Process the status report and, if there is a new report, issue a new poll to request the mole data and set the next stage to be Poll for Mole Percentages
· If there are no new reports, set the next stage to Idle
If the poll response indicated a failure then set the next stage to Idle.
Wait up to the time-out period for the unit to respond and then (depending on the data being polled for) either:
· Issue a new poll to request CV data and set the next stage to Poll for CV.
· If the poll response indicated a failure then set the next stage to Idle.
Wait up to the time-out period for the unit to respond and then (depending on the data being polled for) either:
· Issue a new request to reset the chromatograph and set the next stage to Immediate Reset
· If the poll response indicated a failure, then set the net stage to Idle.
Currently reserved stage; set the next stage to Process Data
K-18
Chromatographs
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Stage 6 Process Data
Description
Process the analysis data:
1. Reorder the raw telemetered mole percentage into S600+ internal order (as directed by the received component codes, which run in ascending values from 100).
2. If configured to do so, check low/high and deduction limits
3. Normalise the reordered mole percentage set.
4. If enabled (that is, non-zero values entered), apply the additionals.
5. If enabled, apply the C6+ or C7+ splits.
6. Copy the processed mole percentage set into the latest processed set.
7. If enabled, perform critical alarm checks on peak overflow, etc.
8. If enabled, perform non-critical alarm check on ADC fails, etc.
9. If there are no limit, critical, or deviation alarms, then mark the analysis as good, copy the processed mole percentage set into the last good set, update the RD and CV, and record the time.
10. Print the chromat report showing the analysis performed.
Once complete set the next stage to Idle.
K.7.2 Determining the Mole Percentage Set
This section details how the module selects the mole percentage set.
Keypad Refer to Section K.3, Configuration Type: Keypad Mole Percentage Set Selected Set Only, for information on setting the keypad percentage set.
Chromatograph The system uses the following logic to select a chromatograph set:
Set Selected
If the current report has no deviations or critical alarms, then: Copy the latest real RD into the Real RD.Chromat field. Copy the latest real CV into the Real CV.Chromat field. Copy the latest mole % set to the in-use mole % set.
Else If the revert switch is set and a previous report is OK then: Copy the last good real RD to the Real RD.Chromat field. Copy the latest real CV to the Real CV.Chromat field. Copy the last good mole % to the in-use mole % set.
Else Switch to using the keypad mole % set.
Endif
Revised January-2021
Chromatographs
K-19
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
K.7.3 Handling Operator Commands
This section details how the module handles operator commands.
Select Keypad Mole Percentage
Select Chromat Mole Percentage
Select the keypad set only if it is valid according to the checks outlined in Section K.4.2, Determining the Mole Percentage Set. Otherwise, leave the in-use set intact.
The system uses the following logic to select a chromat mole percentage:
If there are no system alarms and the latest report is OK, then: Copy the latest mole % set to the in-use set.
Else If the Revert to Last Good switch is on then: If the previous report is OK then: Copy the latest mole % set to the in-use set. Copy the latest RD and CV to the in-use set. Endif Endif
Endif
K.8 Configuration Type: Download from Supervisory System
Use this configuration mode when a supervisory system either is connected to a chromatograph or supports data entry of the mole percentage set. The supervisory system should write to the keypad set and its associated Accept command in the same way, for example, as densitometer constants. In operation, it is identical to the Keypad Only configuration type.
K.9 Normalisation, Additionals, and C+6 Handling
This section discusses how the module normalises data and handles additionals and C6+ components. Terminology The following definitions are helpful in this explanation:
Term Can Cn Cnas
Cu NF Sa Sc Splits
Definition Normalised additionals adjusted component mole percentage Normalised component mole percentage Normalised, additionals and splits adjusted component mole percentage Un-normalised component mole percentage Normalisation factor Sum of additionals Sum of components mole percentage Ratios of C6 (or C7) to C10 to apply to C6+ (or C7+)
K.9.1 Normalisation
The system uses this calcuation for keypad or chromatograph mole percentage sets:
NF = 100 / Sc
K-20
Chromatographs
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Apply NF to each mole percentage value, so that Cn = Cu x NF.
K.9.2 Application of Additionals
Certain systems may have a requirement to carry forward "additional" mole percentages. These are not measured directly by the chromatograph but are entered via keypad as the result of a lab analysis, for example. Usually, additionals are considered to be H2S, H2O, He, O2, CO, and H2. Since these values are assumed to be already normalized, you may have to readjust the previously normalised chromatograph mole percentages using the formula:
NF = (100 Sa) / 100 Apply NF to each previously normalised mole percentage:
Cna(i) = Cn (i)* NF Be sure to carry forward the additionals unchanged to the Cna mole percentage set.
K.9.3 C6+ Handling
Chromatographs often report mole percentages up to C6+, but you may need to break these percentages down to identify hexane, heptane, octane, nonane, and decane components. Use the following formulas.
Note: If included, this breakdown must add up to 100.0.
Cnas(hexane) = Cna(C6+) x splits(hexane) / 100.0
Cnas(heptane) = Cna(C6+) x splits(heptane) / 100.0
Cnas(octane) = Cna(C6+) x splits(octane) / 100.0
Cnas(nonane) = Cna(C6+) x splits(nonane) / 100.0
Cnas(decane) = Cna(C6+) x splits(decane) / 100.0
Cnas (C6+) = 0.0 Be sure to carry forward the other mole percentages from Cna to Cnas.
K.9.4 C6+ Handling (SIM 2251 Method)
The 2251 can report back the C6+ breakdown using component codes 108 through 111. If you have disabled the Apply Splits" (keyboard splits) switch, the system breaks down mole percentage reporting as indicated in the following sections.
Revised January-2021
Chromatographs
K-21
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
108.C6+ The mole percentage reported for code 108 is calculated as: Cnas(hexane) = Cna(C6+) x 0.47466 Cnas(heptane) = Cna(C6+) x 0.35340 Cnas(octane) = Cna(C6+) x 0.17194 Cnas (C6+) = 0.0
Be sure to carry forward the other mole percentages from Cna to Cnas. 109.C6+ The mole percentage reported for code 109 is calculated as:
Cnas(hexane) = Cna(C6+) x 0.5 Cnas(heptane) = Cna(C6+) x 0.5 Cnas(octane) = Cna(C6+) x 0.0 Cnas (C6+) = 0.0 Be sure to carry forward the other mole percentages from Cna to Cnas. 110.C6+ The mole percentage reported for code 110 is calculated as: Cnas(hexane) = Cna(C6+) x 0.5 Cnas(heptane) = Cna(C6+) x 0.25 Cnas(octane) = Cna(C6+) x 0.25 Cnas (C6+) = 0.0 Be sure to carry forward the other mole percentages from Cna to Cnas. 111.C6+ The mole percentage reported for code 111 is calculated as: Cnas(hexane) = Cna(C6+) x 0.57143 Cnas(heptane) = Cna(C6+) x 0.28572 Cnas(octane) = Cna(C6+) x 0.14285 Cnas (C6+) = 0.0 Be sure to carry forward the other mole percentages from Cna to Cnas.
K.9.5 C7+ Handling
Chromatographs often report mole percentages up to C7, but you may need to break these percentages down to identify heptane, octane, nonane, and decane components. Use the following formulas.
Note: If included, this breakdown must add up to 100.0.
K-22
Chromatographs
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Cnas(heptane) = Cna(C7+) * splits(heptane) / 100.0
Cnas(octane) = Cna(C7+) x splits(octane) / 100.0
Cnas(nonane) = Cna(C7+) x splits(nonane) / 100.0
Cnas(decane) = Cna(C7+) x splits(decane) / 100.0
Cnas (C7+) = 0.0 Be sure to carry forward the other mole percentages from Cna to Cnas.
K.9.6 No C6+ or C7+ Handling
In systems where C6+ or C7+ breakdown is not required, update the hexane value live from the chromatograph using the position specified in the telemetry parameters mole ordering array. The system then treats this value as it would any other mole percentage. Additionally, the system copies all elements from Cna into Cnas.
K.10 Alarms, Displays, Reports, and Maps
This section provides additional miscellaneous features.
K.10.1 Alarms
The module supports the following alarms:
Alarm System
Definition Telemetry failure
Configuration
Sum of splits does not equal 100.0
Critical
Critical alarms reported from chromatograph
None Critical
Non-critical alarms reported from chromatograph
Mole % low
Methane < 90%
Mole % high Mole % deviation
Metane > 99% Current previous outside limits
K.10.2 Displays
The displays for the chromatographs can be located under one of two places on the web server or front panel depending on how the application was configured.
For applications that assign a chromat to a station, then the composition information can be found under:
Operator -> Station n -> Composition
where n is the station number
For applications that assign a chromat to a stream, then the composition information can be found under:
Operator -> Stream n -> Composition
where n is the stream number
Revised January-2021
Chromatographs
K-23
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
The following table shows the composition settings\information and chromat settings:
Screen Mole Select
Definition Controls which composition is used in the calculations and is also what displays under the "Selected Moles" display.
Choices for the mole selection are:
· Keypad: Uses the moles under the "Keypad Moles" displays
· Chromat: Uses the analysis from the chromat
· Download: Uses an analysis downloaded to the S600+ from an external supervisory system or PLC
Acceptance Command
· User: Uses a user supplied keypad real array of composition data.
Accepts an updated composition when the analysis changes so that it is copied in to the selected moles. When the Chromat option is selected and if the new analysis is okay, the acceptance is automatically triggered.
Note: When Keypad, Download or User composition is selected, this has to be triggered manually either from the display or by setting the flag via Modbus or Liogicalc.
Keypad Moles
There are 14 screens which list the values for the keypad moles. Each of these values can be modified from the front panel or web server. The total of all the components is summarised on the last keypad moles screen.
Selected Moles
Telem Stage
There are 14 screens which list the values for the selected moles. These values cannot be modified and represent the composition that is being used in the calculations.
Indicates the current stage for the chromat task.
Telem Poll Delay
Specifies the time in seconds to wait between issuing polls to the chromat.
Telem Reset Delay 1
Delay before issuing a reset of the new data flag after a new analysis has been received and processed.
Telem Reset Delay 2
Delay before issuing a reset of the new data flag after a new analysis has been received and processed but the cycle streams do not match, for example on an analysis for stream 1 was expected but the chromat indicated the analysis was for stream 2.
D/Load Timeout
Defines a timeout which, when expired, raises an alarm to indicate that the chromat has not provided a new analysis in time.
K.10.3 Reports
By default, when you select a chromatograph, the system does not automatically add these reports. You must manually add them.
To configure chromatograph reports, select System Setup > Reports. The General Reports screen displays.
K-24
Chromatographs
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
To add the report, click Add and select CHR TELEMETRY from the list. When the Archive Configuration screen displays, select the number of reports you wish to save and click OK when you have finished.
When generated, the report should resemble the following example:
Revised January-2021
Chromatographs
K-25
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Using the Report Editor, you can modify the layout of the report. For more information, refer to Chapter 12, Report Editor.
K-26
Chromatographs
Revised January-2021
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
K.10.4 Modbus Maps
This section contains examples of the Modbus maps that PCSetup creates. 2350 Euro
2551 Euro
Revised January-2021
Chromatographs
K-27
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
2350 USA
2551 USA
K-28
Chromatographs
Revised January-2021
Index
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
1
1.59e-005......................................................... 6-64 15/15 Deg C...............................6-67, 6-111, 6-130 1962 ................................................................. 6-74
3
3 Identical Cell ............................................... 6-103
A
A CRUDE................................................................. ........5-23, 5-35, 5-48, 6-161, 6-184, 6-192, 6-204
About About Config600 ............................................ 2-26 About PCSetup .............................................. 2-27 About System Editor ........................................ 8-6 abs(x) LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-27 ABT 1 Alarm ...................................................... 7-6 ACC/Copy ............... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 ACC/Norm .............. 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Acceptance Type .... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Access Allowed................................................ 7-20 Access, security............................................... 7-13 Accessing Display Editor ................................................. 13-1 LogiCalc Editor ...................................... 15-2, 15-5 Remote Archive Uploader .............................. 11-2 Remote Front Panel ....................................... 10-7 System Editor ................................................... 8-2 Accessing Config600 ......................................... 1-9 Accessing Modbus Editor ................................ 14-2 Activating Activation Code .............................................. 1-10 Config600 ....................................................... 1-10 Active Alarms/Events......................................... 7-4 ADC ........................................................... A-1, E-2 Analogue Input Object.............................. D-4, D-7 Linear Two-point ADC Device Calibration ....... D-3 Modes (MODE TAB PLANTI/O)..................... E-21 Add All Inputs................................................... 7-25 Add All Outputs................................................ 7-26 Adding Adding an Item ............................................... 7-23 Base Time Report to a Configuration............. 3-11 Discrete (Digital) Inputs.................................... 4-4 New I/O Point ................................................. 4-15 Reports........................................................... 3-13 Adding a Data Point......................................... 12-7 Adding a General Report ................................... 3-9 Adding a Modbus Data Point ........................... 14-5 Adding Report Lines ........................................ 12-9 Addnls Alarm ..................................................... 7-6 Address.. 2-15, 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136, A-1 Address Map .................................................. 4-30 Slave Comm Port ........................................... 4-30
Revised January-2021
Address Map.................................................... 4-33 Adiabatic exponent ........................................ 6-122 Advanced Setup Configuration .......................... 7-1 A-Fail Alarm ....................................................... 7-6 AGA ................................................................... A-1 AGA3 ............................................................... 6-77 AGA3 (Volume Flowrate) ................................. 6-77 AGA5 ...................................................... 6-25, 6-30 AGA7 .................................................. 6-116, 6-135 AGA7 (Gross Volume Flowrate) ......... 6-116, 6-135 AGA8 ............................... 6-22, 6-54, 6-109, 6-127 AGA8 (Compressibility) - Gas DP .................. 6-54 AGA8 (Compressibility) - Gas Turbine......... 6-109 AGA8 (Compressibility) - Gas Ultrasonic ..... 6-127 AI ........................................................................ A-1 Air..................................................................... 6-66 Relative Humidity ........................................... 6-66 AirCO2 Content................................................ 6-66 Alarm PR OP Fxd ..................................................... 7-10 ALARM............................................................... E-3 Alarm Acceptance on TX ................................. 4-34 Alarm Limits ...................................6-5, 6-107, 7-14 Ball Prover ...................................................... 5-30 Compact Prover ............................................. 5-43 Master Meter Prover....................................... 5-55 Qsonic .......................................................... 6-151 Station .............................................................. 5-2 ALARMHIST ...................................................... E-3 Alarms ............................................................. 5-10,
6-5, 6-25, 6-30, 6-44, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136, 7-3 ABT 1 ............................................................... 7-6 Addnls .............................................................. 7-6 A-Fail ................................................................ 7-6 AGA3 .............................................................. 6-77 AGA7 ................................................. 6-116, 6-135 AGA8 .............................. 6-22, 6-54, 6-109, 6-128 Alarm Accept on TX ....................................... 4-30 Alarm Accepts ................................................ 7-20 Alarm Archive Size ........................................... 7-4 Alarm Disable & Suppress ............................. 7-14 Alarm Mode Latched ........................................ 7-4 Alarm System Operation .................................. 7-4 Alarm Text Tables .......................................... E-19 Annubar .......................................................... 6-64 Bad Pulse ......................................................... 7-6 Ball Prover Alarm Limits ................................. 5-30 Batching .........................................................C-28 Batt Fail ............................................................ 7-6 B-Fail ................................................................ 7-6 Blocked............................................................. 7-6 Calc Fail ........................................................... 7-6 Can Full ............................................................ 7-6 Can Hgh ........................................................... 7-7 Cell Input ........................................................ 6-92 Check Critical Alarms ............................................
........................... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136
Index-1
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Cold Start ......................................................... 7-7 Common........................................................... 7-7 Compact Prover Alarm Limits ........................ 5-43 Complete .......................................................... 7-7 Conf CSum....................................................... 7-7 Conf Err ............................................................ 7-7 Config ............................................................... 7-7 Config Chg ....................................................... 7-7 Coriolis ................................................ 6-35, 6-177 CRC Fail........................................................... 7-7 Critical .............................................................. 7-7 Data Tout ......................................................... 7-7 Denied .............................................................. 7-7 Dens Limit ........................................................ 7-8 Descriptions ..................................................... 7-6 Dev Err ............................................................. 7-8 Dev Open ......................................................... 7-8 Discrep ............................................................. 7-8 Drv Gain ........................................................... 7-8 Dscrp ................................................................ 7-8 Editing .............................................................. 7-4 EEProm Fail ..................................................... 7-8 Error ................................................................. 7-8 Event 1 ............................................................. 7-8 Event 2 ............................................................. 7-8 Exception ......................................................... 7-8 Fail A ................................................................ 7-8 Fail B ................................................................ 7-8 Fail CH_A ......................................................... 7-8 Fail CH_B ......................................................... 7-8 Fail CH_C......................................................... 7-8 Fail CH_D......................................................... 7-8 Fail IO............................................................... 7-8 Fail Warn .......................................................... 7-8 Fatal Crd .......................................................... 7-8 Fixed Vel .......................................................... 7-9 Flow Switching ............................................... C-56 FRQ O-Rnge .................................................... 7-9 Gas CV......................................................... 6-130 Gas Properties ............................................. 6-122 Gas Properties ............................................... 6-89 Gas Properties (Ultrasonic).......................... 6-143 GOST CV ....................................................... 6-85 GOST Flow .................................................... 6-86 GPA2172........................................................ 6-67 H/W Fail ........................................................... 7-9 Hi ...................................................................... 7-9 High Prd ........................................................... 7-9 Hi-Hi ................................................................. 7-9 I/P Err ............................................................... 7-9 Illegal ................................................................ 7-9 Integ-Fail .......................................................... 7-9 Invalid Inc ......................................................... 7-9 IP O-Rnge ........................................................ 7-9 ISO5167 ......................................................... 6-57 ISO6976 ......................................................... 6-67 ISO6976/GPA .............................................. 6-111 K_Comp ........................................................... 7-9 Limits ................................................................ 7-4 Linearisation ...........................................................
............ 6-39, 6-125, 6-141, 6-156, 6-180, 6-201 Link................................................................... 7-9 Lo ..................................................................... 7-9
Index-2
LogiCalc Editor ............................................... 15-2 LoLo ................................................................. 7-9 Low Flow .......................................................... 7-9 Low Prd ............................................................ 7-9 MA IP Err .......................................................... 7-9 MA Op Fxd ....................................................... 7-9 MA Op Sat ........................................................ 7-9 Master Meter Prover Alarm Limits.................. 5-55 Mole Dv ............................................................ 7-9 Mole Fail ......................................................... 7-10 Mole Hi ............................................................. 7-9 Mole Lo............................................................. 7-9 Monitor ........................................................... 7-10 Move Uncm .................................................... 7-10 No Permit ....................................................... 7-10 NX19 .............................................................. 6-74 O/P Err ........................................................... 7-10 O-Flow ............................................................ 7-10 O-Range ......................................................... 7-10 Overflow ......................................................... 7-10 Pic Fail............................................................ 7-10 Pipe Correction............................................... 6-51 PR OP Sat ...................................................... 7-10 Pre Warn ........................................................ 7-10 Printer Communications ................................... 7-4 Printing Err ..................................................... 7-10 PTZ................................................................. 6-75 Pure Gas/Air ................................................... 6-66 Pwr Reset ....................................................... 7-10 QSonic.......................................................... 6-151 RAM Fail......................................................... 7-11 ROC................................................................ 7-11 ROM Fail ........................................................ 7-11 RT Int.............................................................. 7-11 RX Fail............................................................ 7-11 Sampler .......................................................... 7-11 Scaling............................................................ 7-11 Seal Fail ......................................................... 7-11 Sec OP Fxd .................................................... 7-11 Sec OP Sat..................................................... 7-11 Select ............................................................. 7-12 Self Calib ........................................................ 7-12 Sens Fail ........................................................ 7-12 SGERG .......................................................... 6-72 SICK Control ................................................ 6-152 SICK Ultrasonic ............................................ 6-152 Slug Flow........................................................ 7-12 Speed ............................................................. 7-12 Splits............................................................... 7-12 Station Limits .................................................... 5-4 Stopped .......................................................... 7-12 Suppress Alarms in Maintenance .................... 6-2 Suppress Alarms in Maintenance for Streams. 6-4 Suppress on Cutoff for Streams ....................... 6-5 Suppressing LogiCalc .................................. 15-28 Task Fail ......................................................... 7-12 Temp Fail ....................................................... 7-12 Testing LogiCalc........................................... 15-28 Tot Corr .......................................................... 7-12 Tot Part........................................................... 7-12 Tot Res ........................................................... 7-12 Tot Roll Ovr .................................................... 7-12 Tot Roll Udr .................................................... 7-12
Revised January-2021
TPU Fail ......................................................... 7-12 Tsk Err............................................................ 7-12 Tsk Oflow ....................................................... 7-12 Tx Config ........................................................ 7-12 Tx Elec ........................................................... 7-12 Tx Fail............................................................. 7-12 Ultrasonic ..................................................... 6-146 Ultrasonic Control......................................... 6-149 Unavail ........................................................... 7-13 Undefined ....................................................... 7-13 U-Range ......................................................... 7-12 V-Cone ........................................................... 6-62 Warm St ......................................................... 7-13 Warn Ch_B..................................................... 7-13 Warn Ch_C .................................................... 7-13 Warn Ch_D .................................................... 7-13 Warning .......................................................... 7-13 Zero Div.......................................................... 7-13 Zero High ....................................................... 7-13 Zero Low ........................................................ 7-13 Zero Noise...................................................... 7-13 Zero Op .......................................................... 7-13 Zero Prog ....................................................... 7-13 Alarms pane..................................................... 15-4 ALM_ACC .......................................................... E-3 ALM_CLR .......................................................... E-3 ALM_SET .......................................................... E-3 Alpha Coriolis Observed Density Correction.......... 6-161 Coriolis Standard Density Correction........... 6-170 Turbine Observed Density Correction....................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 An Out Channel ............................................... 4-24 Analog.............................................................. 4-23 Analog I/P ............................................. 6-41, 6-158 Analog Input....................................................... 4-6 Analog Output .................................................. 4-15 Analogue............................................................ A-1 Analogue (Analog) Inputs Assigning.......................................................... 4-6 BSW .................................................. 6-198, 6-217 Calibration Requirements................................. D-1 Editing .............................................................. 4-7 Object (ADC) ............................................ D-4, D-7 Analogue (Analog) Outputs Editing ............................................................ 4-15 PID Loop Settings .......................................... 4-24 Analogue Output Calibration ...................................................... D-10 Calibration Control Requirements .................. D-10 Analysing a Configuration................................ 2-17 Analysis Timeout .... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 ANIN .................................................................. A-1 Annubar .............................................2-8, 6-64, A-1 Annubar (Mass Flowrate)............................... 6-64 Annubar Base Temp ...................................... 6-64 Annubar Diamond 11 + 1998 ......................... 6-64 ANOUT .............................................................. A-1 ANSI .................................................................. A-1 API1121M ................................................................ ........5-23, 5-35, 5-48, 6-161, 6-184, 6-192, 6-204 Append .............................................................. 8-6
Revised January-2021
Config600 User Manual
Append Page ................................................... 13-3 Apply Splits ............. 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Applying Firewall Rule to a Range of IPs....................... G-3 Aromatics CCF.................................... 6-184, 6-204 Aromatics Type ........................6-184, 6-192, 6-204 Arrange Icons................................................... 2-27 ARRTXT............................................................. E-3 ASCII.................................................................. A-1 Assigning Analog Inputs ................................................... 4-6 Discrete (Digital) Inputs .................................... 4-2 Discrete (Digital) Outputs ................................. 4-5 PID Loops....................................................... 4-24 Pulse Outputs ................................................. 4-22 Turbine Inputs ................................................ 4-19 Assignment ..................................2-26, 2-27, 6-107 ASTM ............................................................. 6-161 Atm press (bara/psia) ........................................ 7-1 Auto Disable............................................ 5-14, 6-41 Sampler Coriolis Liquid ................................ 6-158 Auto Disable On Can Full .................................. J-4 Auto Disable On Flow Status ............................. J-4 Auto Disable On Flowrate Limit ......................... J-4 Auto hide unused Displays .............................. 7-20 Auto Restart ..................................... 5-14, 6-41, J-4 Sampler Coriolis Liquid ................................ 6-158 Auto Switch Modes .......................................... E-22 Auto/Manual..................................................... 4-24 Auto/Norm............... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Automatic Failover ........................................... F-17 Automatic Polling ............................................. 11-2 Available Alarms ................................................ 7-4 Average.......................................................... 6-221 Average Temp & Pressure ............................... 5-4 Average Density............................................. 6-221 Average Method Provers ........................................................... B-64 Averaging Flow-weighted (FWA)..................................... 6-19 Mode ................................................................ 5-4 Stations ............................................................ 5-4 Time-weighted (TWA) .................................... 6-20 AV-MN/AV.................................. B-38, B-72, B-102 AWG .................................................................. A-1
B
Bad Pulse Configuration .................................................. 4-19 Reset Mode .................................................... 4-19 Bad Pulse Alarm ................................................ 7-6 Ball Prover ....................................................... 5-19 Alarm Limits.................................................... 5-30 Constants ....................................................... 5-23 Flow Balance Setup ....................................... 5-18 Hardware ........................................................ 5-29 Run Data ........................................................ 5-20 Ball provers ........................................................ B-2 bar - in H2O (@60F) .......................................... 7-1 bar - kPa ............................................................ 7-1 bar - psi .............................................................. 7-1
Index-3
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Base Compressibility (Zb) ....................................... ................................ 6-54, 6-66, 6-72, 6-74, 6-109 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-127
Base Conditions Pressure ......................................................... 6-66 Temperature................................................... 6-66 Base Density (DT) .......................................... 6-35, .6-54, 6-66, 6-72, 6-75, 6-89, 6-109, 6-116, 6-135 BSW .................................................. 6-198, 6-217 Coriolis Observed Density Correction.......... 6-161 Coriolis Standard Density Correction........... 6-170 RHOc.............................................................. 6-85 Turbine Gas ................................................. 6-122 Turbine Observed Density Correction....................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-127 Base K Factor Master Meter Constants................................. 5-48 Base Pressure ...................................... 6-77, 6-143 Base Sediment and Water (BSW) ...... 6-198, 6-217 Base Temperature ........................................... 6-77 Base Time Add Report to a Configuration ....................... 3-11 Base Time Reports .......................................... 3-8 Base Values Ball Prover Constants .................................... 5-23 Base Viscosity ................................................. 6-66 Base Volume Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Basetime ............................................................ A-1 Batch control...................................................... A-1 Batch Recalculation ......................................... C-34 Batch Stack Slot Edit Commands (Front Panel Display) .......................................................... C-62 Batch Stack Slot Edit Commands (Webserver)....... ....................................................................... C-68 Batches Recalculating.................................................. C-34 Batching ............................................ 2-8, C-2, E-19 Alarms ............................................................ C-28 Batch Sequence and Control ......................... C-17 Interface Detection ......................................... C-29 Report............................................................. C-28 Retrospective Batch Totals ............................ C-27 Screen .............................................................. C-8 ScreenStation................................................... C-8 Sequence and Control ................................... C-17 Sequence Stages ........................................... C-18 Setup ................................................................ C-8 Stages ............................................................ C-18 Station Sequence Stage Descriptions ........... C-19 Station Stand Alone Stages ........................... C-24 Stream Standalone Stages ............................ C-26 Stream Supervised Stages ............................ C-27 Supervised Station Stages.............................C-25 Batt Fail Alarm ................................................... 7-6 Baud .................................................................. A-1 Baud rate ........................................................... A-1 Baud Rate ................................................... 9-5, F-4 Behaviour........................................................... 4-9 Beta ......................................6-57, 6-62, 6-77, 6-86 B-Fail Alarm ....................................................... 7-6
Index-4
Bi-di proving Communications............................................... B-3 Inputs................................................................ B-3 Outputs ............................................................. B-3 Pulse interpolation............................................B-5 Pulse measurement ......................................... B-4 Sphere switch interface .................................... B-5 Bi-Directional Prover ........................................ 5-19 Bi-directional proving ......................................... B-2 Binary ................................................................. A-1 Bit ....................................................................... A-1 Bit link (jumper) .................................................. A-1 Bit switch ............................................................ A-2 Block Valves .................................................... 6-16 Valve Setup Type ........................................... 6-16 Valve Timings ................................................. 6-16 Blocked Alarm.................................................... 7-6 Breakpoint ...................................................... 15-14 BSW Parameters ........................................ 6-198, 6-217 Btu - J................................................................. 7-1 Buffer ................................................................. A-2 Bus ..................................................................... A-2 Buttons ............................................................. 2-26 System Editor Icon Bar..................................... 8-6 Bytes .................................................................. A-2
C
Calc Exlorer Options ........................................ 7-22 Calc Explorer .......................................... 2-26, 7-21 Add All Inputs ................................................. 7-25 Add All Outputs .............................................. 7-26 Adding an Item ............................................... 7-23 Button ............................................................... 8-6 Save as Bitmap .............................................. 7-28 Calc Fail Alarm................................................... 7-6 Calc Select BSW .................................................. 6-198, 6-217 CALC/ALM Auto Switch Modes ....................... E-22 CALC/ALM Modes (MODE TAB CALC) .......... E-22 CALCALMITEM ................................................. E-4 Calculated ...................................................... 6-221 Calculated MF versus Avg of Previous Historical MFs ................................................................ B-73 Calculated MF versus Initial Base MF ....................
........................................................... B-73, B-103 Calculated Output ............................................ 6-60 Calculated Pressure Ball Prover Constants..................................... 5-23 Calculated Temperature Ball Prover Constants..................................... 5-23 Calculation Limit Check .......................... 6-57, 6-86 Calculation Limits................................... 6-25, 6-39,
6-51, 6-54, 6-62, 6-64, 6-66, 6-67, 6-72, 6-74, 6-75, 6-77, 6-109, 6-111, 6-156 Turbine Gas.................................................. 6-125 Turbine Liquid.................................... 6-180, 6-201 Ultrasonic Control......................................... 6-149 Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-141 Ultrasonic Gas ................................... 6-127, 6-130 Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-146 Calculation Parameters ...............6-25, 6-67, 6-111
Revised January-2021
Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-130 Calculation Results .......................................... 4-15 Turbine Observed Density Correction....................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Calculation Results Limits ...................... 6-57, 6-86 Calculation Type ......... 6-38, 6-57, 6-62, 6-66, 6-77 Calculation Type Modified.............................. 6-74 Calculation Version................................. 6-62, 6-64 1991 ............................................................... 6-57 GOST8563 97 ................................................ 6-86 Calculations Provers ................................................. B-31, B-64 Calibrated Diameter......................................... 6-51 Calibrated Temperature................................... 6-51 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Calibration Analogue Input ................................................. D-3 Analogue Input Requirements ......................... D-1 Analogue Output ............................................ D-10 Control Requirements ...................................... D-2 DAC Device....................................................D-11 Field Calibration ............................................... D-1 Linear Two-point ADC Device..........................D-3 Linear Two-point Device PRT .......................... D-8 Non-linear Three-point Curve Calibration Control
Mechanism ................................................... D-7 Offset PRT Calibration Control Mechanism ..... D-8 Offset PRT Device Calibration ......................... D-8 Operator Interface ............................................ D-3 Pressure ....................................................... 6-218 PRT/RTD............................................... 4-13, 4-14 Temperature................................................. 6-218 call LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-25 Calorific Value..............................6-25, 6-30, 6-130 AGA5.............................................................. 6-67 GPA2172...................................................... 6-111 ISO6976 ....................................................... 6-111 Calorific Value (AGA5) ........................... 6-25, 6-30 Can Can Fill Indicator ................................... 5-14, 6-41
Sampler Coriolis Liquid ......................... 6-158 Can Fill Period....................................... 5-14, 6-41
Sampler Coriolis Liquid ......................... 6-158 Can High High Limit .............................. 5-14, 6-41
Sampler Coriolis Liquid ......................... 6-158 Can High Limit............................5-14, 6-41, 6-158 Can Limits ............................................. 5-14, 6-41
Sampler Coriolis Liquid ......................... 6-158 Can Low Limit ....................................... 5-14, 6-41
Sampler Coriolis Liquid ......................... 6-158 Can Volume .......................................... 5-14, 6-41
Sampler Coriolis Liquid ......................... 6-158 Can Fill Digital Input............................................J-4 Can Fill Grab Count ............................................J-4 Can Fill Indicator Analogue Input .......................J-4 Can Full Alarm ................................................... 7-6 Can High Alarm ................................................. 7-7 Carbon St......................................................... 6-51 Cascade........................................................... 2-27 CATS ................................................................. A-2
Revised January-2021
Config600 User Manual
Cell 3 Identical ..................................................... 6-103 Hi Hi................................................................ 6-94 Lo Hi ............................................................... 6-92 Lo Hi Hi........................................................... 6-99 Lo Mid Hi ........................................................ 6-95 Single ............................................................. 6-92 Cell Input Stacking ........................................... 6-91 CFX files and time stamps.................................H-7 CFX Reporting Adding reports ..................................................H-1 Changing CFX settings ....................................H-4 Enabling reports ...............................................H-3 File structure.....................................................H-8 Generating from the web browser....................H-5 Regenerating the report template ....................H-5 Changing PC clock .......................................... 1-12 Channel............................................................ 4-23 Characteristics ................................................. 6-86 Check ............................................................. 6-221 Check Critical Alarms .. 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-
136 Check Deviations .. 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Check Non Critical Alarms ..... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-
118, 6-136 Check Limits Coriolis Gas Composition. 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118 Ultrasonic Gas Composition......................... 6-136 Check Mode Selection ..................................... E-19 Checksum ................................................. 7-19, 9-3 Chromat ......................................................... 6-221 Communications.... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Processing............. 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Slave Address ................................................ 2-15 Telemetry .............. 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Chromatograph ....... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Chromatographs ................................................ K-1 Chronometry P154 Dual Chronometry Switch Pair..............E-20 Clone Config Organiser ............................................ 2-29 Close ................................................................ 2-27 Close O/P........................................................... 4-5 CO2 Content .................................................... 6-66 Code ................................................................ 15-2 Coefficient a to c .............................................. 6-51 Coefficient Linear Expansion ........................... 6-64 Cold start............................................................A-2 Cold Start Alarm................................................. 7-7 Columns System Editor ................................................... 8-8 Combustion Heat Hcb ................................................................. 6-85 Hch ................................................................. 6-85 COMMIT ........................................................... G-3 Committing the Firewall Rules .......................... G-3 Common Common Links ............................................... 4-30 Common Stream Settings ................................ 6-4 Coriolis Gas Composition......................................
...................................... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118 Ultrasonic Gas Composition......................... 6-136 Common Alarm .................................................. 7-7
Index-5
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Common File Exchange (CFX)..........................H-1 Common Stream Flowrate Limits ................................................. 6-5 Weighted Average.......................................... 6-18 Comms ............................................................ 4-31 Comms Link ..................................................... 4-31 Comms Properties Remote Archive Uploader .............................. 11-7 Communication................................................ 4-30 Communications ................................ 4-1, 9-4, 14-1 Bi-di proving ..................................................... B-3 Coriolis ................................................ 6-44, 6-177 Defining .......................................................... 2-15 Editing Communications Port......................... 4-30 Master Meter Prover ...................................... B-76 Port................................................................. 4-30 Provers ................................................. B-41, B-76 Qsonic .......................................................... 6-151 Set up Peer-to-Peer ......................................... F-4 Tasks.............................................................. 7-14 Ultrasonic Control......................................... 6-149 Compact Folder Format................................. 11-15 Compact Prover............................................... 5-31 Alarm Limits ................................................... 5-43 Constants ....................................................... 5-35 Hardware........................................................ 5-41 Prover............................................................. B-39 Run Data ........................................................ 5-33 Company Address ............................................. 3-2 Company Fax .................................................... 3-2 Company Information ........................................ 3-2 Company Telephone ......................................... 3-2 Compile.......................................................... 15-14 Complete Alarm ................................................. 7-7 Compress ...................................................... 6-221 Compressibility ........................................................
................. 6-22, 6-54, 6-109, 6-116, 6-127, 6-135 AGA3.............................................................. 6-77 AGA8................................................... 6-54, 6-109 NX19 .............................................................. 6-74 PTZ................................................................. 6-75 SGERG .......................................................... 6-72 Computer Alarms............................................... 7-4 Conf CSum Alarm.............................................. 7-7 Conf Err Alarm ................................................... 7-7 Config Alarm ...................................................... 7-7 Config Chg Alarm .............................................. 7-7 Config Created................................................... 3-3 Config Format .................................................... 3-3 Config Format 8 ................................................. 3-2 Config Last Edited ............................................. 3-3 Config Organiser............................2-26, 2-27, 2-29 Clone .............................................................. 2-29 Delete ............................................................. 2-29 Move Down .................................................... 2-29 Move Up ......................................................... 2-29 Rename.......................................................... 2-29 Config Transfer .................................................. 9-1 Button ............................................................. 2-26 Enabling PCSetup Link .................................... 9-2 Licensing ........................................................ 9-10 Send Configuration .......................................... 9-6 Config Version ................................................... 3-2
Index-6
Config600............................................ 1-1, 1-4, A-2 Accessing ......................................................... 1-9 Activating ........................................................ 1-10 Enhancements in V3.3 ..................................... 1-1 Lite.................................................................... 1-4 Lite Plus............................................................ 1-4 Pro .................................................................... 1-4 Configuration......................................1-4, 9-1, 15-5 I/O..................................................................... 2-4 Measurement Units .......................................... 2-3 Naming ............................................................. 2-2 Saving ............................................................ 2-28 Stations ............................................................ 2-5 Streams ............................................................ 2-8 Configuration screens ...................................... 2-26 Configuration Wizard ......................................... 2-1 Step 1 of 6 Name Configuration ....................... 2-2 Step 2 of 6 Select Measurement Units............. 2-3 Step 3 of 6 Specify I/O ..................................... 2-4 Step 4 of 6 Define Stations .............................. 2-5 Step 5 of 6 Define Streams .............................. 2-8 Step 6 of 6 Define Communications............... 2-15 Configurations Adding a Base Time Report ........................... 3-11 Advanced Setup ............................................... 7-1 Analysing ........................................................ 2-17 Format ................................................... 2-23, 15-2 Initial Stream .................................................... 6-2 Managing Reports .......................................... 3-13 New Button ..................................................... 2-26 Opening an Existing ....................................... 2-23 Save Button .................................................... 2-26 Send ................................................................. 9-6 Station .............................................................. 5-1 Streams ............................................................ 6-2 Updates ............................................................ 1-2 Version .................................................. 2-23, 15-2 Configure Automatic Polling............................................ 11-2 Manual Polling ................................................ 11-6 Configuring Communications Port on your USB
Communications Port.................................. 10-2 Disabling Remote Front Panel ....................... 10-8 PC WITH a Native Serial Communications Port
.................................................................... 10-3 PC without a Native Serial Communications Port
.................................................................... 10-1 S600+ to Use the Remote Front Panel .......... 10-4 Set up Peer-to-Peer Options ............................ F-4 Configuring the Batch Stack Through the Front Panel Display .................................................C-61 Configuring the Batch Stack Through the System Editor ..............................................................C-59 Configuring the Next Batch..............................C-41 CONFTAB .......................................................... E-6 connect .......................................................... 15-25 LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-25 Connect (const)................................................ 15-9 Connect Wizard ...................................... 7-23, 15-4 Connecting S600+ via Serial Cable..................................... 9-2 const ............................................15-8, 15-9, 15-10
Revised January-2021
Const Statement LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-24 Constants...........................................7-1, 15-8, A-2 Ball Prover...................................................... 5-23 Compact Prover ............................................. 5-35 Editing Conversions/Constants ........................ 7-1 Master Meter Prover ...................................... 5-48 Contents .......................................................... 2-27 Control Action .................................................. 4-24 Control bus ........................................................ A-2 Control Limits Flow Switching and Flow Balancing for Streams ...
...................................................................... 6-5 Streams ............................................................ 6-5 Conversion.............................................. 4-15, 4-24 Analog ................................................... 4-10, 4-13 Convert Density Units from Kgm3................ 15-19 Convert Density Units to Kgm3 .................... 15-18 Convert Temperature Units.......................... 15-18 PRT/RTD........................................................ 4-12 Conversions/Constants .............................. 3-3, 7-1 Editing Conversions/Constants ........................ 7-1 Copy ......................................................... 2-26, 8-6 Copy Display.................................................... 13-8 Coriolis ........................................... 2-8, 6-44, 6-177 Communications ................................. 6-44, 6-177 Gas........................................................ 6-22, 6-44 Gas Composition...............5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118 Gas Properties ............................................... 6-35 Liquid................................................. 6-154, 6-177 Observed Density Correction ....................... 6-161 Standard Density Correction ........................ 6-170 Validation Logic .............................................. 6-47 CORR DENS ................................................... 6-48 Corrected ....................................................... 6-221 Corrected Orifice Diameter ............................ 6-51 Corrected Pipe Diameter................................ 6-51 Corrected Volume .......................................... 7-16 Correction Type.............................................. 6-48 Corrections Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-146 CPL Calculation Ball Prover Constants .................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Coriolis Observed Density Correction.......... 6-161 Coriolis Standard Density Correction........... 6-170 Master Meter Constants................................. 5-48 Turbine Observed Density Correction....................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 CPSM for Spool Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-146 CPU ................................................................... A-2 CRC Fail Alarm.................................................. 7-7 Creating LogiCalc ......................................................... 15-5 New Configuration............................................ 2-1 Streams ............................................................ 2-8 Critical Alarm ..................................................... 7-7 cst - mm2s ......................................................... 7-1 CTL Temperature Ball Prover Constants .................................... 5-23 CTL_CPL ........................................................... A-2
Revised January-2021
Config600 User Manual
CTS .................................................................... A-2 CTSM For Spool Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-146 CUMTOT............................................................ E-6 Cumulative Totals ............................................ 4-22 Cut ............................................................ 2-26, 8-6 Cut Display....................................................... 13-8 Cut Off Mode....................................................E-19 CV .................................................................. 6-130 CV CV AGA5 .......................................................... 2-8 CV GOST ......................................................... 2-8 CV GPA2172 .................................................... 2-8 CV ISO6976 ..................................................... 2-8 CV Table ....................................6-25, 6-67, 6-111 CV Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-130 CV .................................................................. 6-221 CV CV Vol Units ................................................... 7-16 CV ...................................................................... A-2 CVAGA5 .......................................................... 6-30 CVOL Fail Mode ................................. 6-116, 6-135 CVOL Flowrate ................................................ 6-77
D
DAC ................................................................... A-2 DAC Control Mechanism .................................D-12 DAC Device Calibration ...................................D-11 Analogue Input ...............................................D-11 DACOUT ............................................................ E-6 Daniel Liquid Ultrasonic ................................. 6-218 Communications........................................... 6-218 Control Data ................................................. 6-218 Flow Source Selection ................................. 6-218 Meter Variable Limits.................................... 6-218 Pressure Source........................................... 6-218 Serial Flow Type........................................... 6-218 Temperature Source .................................... 6-218 Data ................................................................... 8-8 System Editor ................................................... 8-8 Data Bits ..................................................... 9-5, F-4 Data Index LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-25 Data Integrity Remote Archive Uploader ............................ 11-17 Data Items Data Item Security.......................................... 7-16 Data Point ........................................................ 13-6 Adding ............................................................ 12-7 Editing ............................................................ 12-9 Data points ....................................................... 14-5 Data Points Assignment Button ......................................... 2-26 Display Editor ................................................. 13-5 Security .......................................................... 7-16 Data Tout Alarm................................................. 7-7 Data Type LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-25 Database Objects ............................................................. 8-4 Objects and Fields............................................E-2
Index-7
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
S600+ ............................................................... 8-3 Tables........................................................ 8-4, 8-5 Database Fields............................................... E-18 Databus ............................................................. A-2 Daylight Savings changes ............................... 1-12 DCS ................................................................... A-2 DCU ................................................................... A-2 Debug ............................................................ 15-14 Debugging a LogiCalc Remotely ................... 15-16 Passing an Object from the Duty to the Standby
S600+ ......................................................... F-14 Decimal Places ................................................ 13-5 Defaults Time ............................................................... 3-16 Defining Communications ............................................ 2-15 Streams ............................................................ 2-8 DEG C - K .......................................................... 7-1 DEG.API ........................................ 5-23, 5-35, 5-48 Delete ....................................................... 8-6, 14-8 Config Organiser ............................................ 2-29 Deleting Delete Line ..................................................... 12-6 Levels ............................................................. 7-15 Passwords...................................................... 7-15 Reports........................................................... 3-13 Security .......................................................... 7-15 Deleting a Modbus Data Point ......................... 14-8 Deleting Report Lines .................................... 12-10 Denied Alarm ..................................................... 7-7 Dens A ........................................................... 6-222 Dens B ........................................................... 6-222 Dens Exp Constant.......................................... 6-48 Dens Limit Alarm ............................................... 7-8 Dens Units ....................................................... 7-16 Densitometer ..............................................2-8, A-2 Densitometer Input Density Measurement .................................... 6-13 Specified Gravity ............................................ 6-13 Densitometers.................................................. 4-17 Density ............................................. 6-44, 6-48, 7-1 Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Density and CV ................................. 6-116, 6-135 Density Compressibility (Zd) .......................... 6-74 Density Pressure (P2) .................................... 6-74 Density Temperature (T3) .............................. 6-74 Failure Modes .............................................. 6-222 Transducer Modes (MODE TAB DENS IP) ... E-22 Density Calibration Pressure ........................... 6-44 Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Density Inputs .................................................. 4-17 Editing ............................................................ 4-18 Density Measurement...................................... 6-13 Observed Density........................................... 6-13 Density Table Units Coriolis Observed Density Correction.......... 6-161 Coriolis Standard Density Correction........... 6-170 Turbine Observed Density Correction....................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Density Units Ball Prover Constants .................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35
Index-8
Master Meter Constants ................................. 5-48 Derivative Action (D) ........................................ 4-30 Derivative Time ................................................ 4-24 Description ...................... 4-2, 4-9, 4-18, 4-21, 4-22 LogiCalc Editor ............................................... 15-2 Detail ..................................................... 6-54, 6-127 Dev Err Alarm .................................................... 7-8 Dev Open Alarm ................................................ 7-8 Deviation ............................................................ 4-9 DF .................................................................... 6-72 DI ............................................................... A-2, A-3 Diagnostics ...................................................... 7-20 DIAM Units ....................................................... 7-16 Differential Pressure Cell Input ...................................................... 6-122 DIG I/P .................................................. 6-41, 6-158 DIGIO ................................................................. E-6 Setup Table .................................................... E-19 Digital Inputs ...................................................... 4-2 dim ................................................................... 15-6 LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-24 DIN ..................................................................... A-3 Directory Settings........................................... 11-12 Disabling Remote Front Panel ....................................... 10-8 Discharge Coefficients...................6-57, 6-77, 6-86 Discrep Alarm .................................................... 7-8 Discrepancy ............................................6-107, A-3 Discrete Inputs ................................................... 4-2 Adding .............................................................. 4-4 Assigning .......................................................... 4-2 Editing .............................................................. 4-3 Discrete Outputs ................................................ 4-5 Assigning .......................................................... 4-5 Display system graph .................................................. 7-21 Display Editor................................................... 13-1 Accessing ....................................................... 13-1 Append Page......................................... 13-3, 13-5 Button ............................................................. 2-26 Data Point....................................................... 13-5 Decimal Places............................................... 13-5 Displays .......................................................... 13-8 Edit Line ................................................ 13-3, 13-5 Editing ............................................................ 13-3 Exponential Format ........................................ 13-5 Help ................................................................ 13-3 Insert Menu ........................................... 13-3, 13-5 Insert Page ............................................ 13-3, 13-5 Insert/Append Page........................................ 13-5 Leading Zeros ................................................ 13-5 Limits .............................................................. 13-5 Menu/Page ..................................................... 13-3 Menu/Page Clipboard..................................... 13-8 Navigating ...................................................... 13-2 Page Clipboard............................................... 13-8 Regenerating Displays ................................... 13-8 Save ............................................................... 13-3 Text................................................................. 13-5 Translate ............................................... 13-3, 13-7 Displays ............................... 2-26, 7-19, 7-20, F-26 Editing ............................................................ 7-20 Displays/Webserver ......................................... 7-14
Revised January-2021
Editing ............................................................ 7-20 Documents Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
(A6169) ....................................................... 1-12 S600+ Flow Computer Product Data Sheet
(S600+) ....................................................... 1-12 S600+ Flow Manager Instruction Manual (A6115)
.................................................................... 1-12 DOSETUP ......................................................... E-7 Downloading Verifying the Peer to Peer Link ...................... F-28 Downstream Density........................................ 6-48 Downstream Pressure ............................ 6-57, 6-86 Downstream/Upstream Correction .................. 6-48 DP ...............................................................2-8, A-3 Cell Input ........................................................ 6-91 Cell Input Statcking ........................................ 6-91 Cut Off Mode .................................................. E-19 DP Cell Input Conditioning Screen .............. 6-107 DP Cell Type Flange ...................................... 6-77 Gas................................................................. 6-48 Gas Properties ............................................... 6-89 GOST Flow .................................................... 6-86 Live/Check Mode Selection ........................... E-19 Modes (MODE TAB DP STACK) ................... E-22 Stack Type ..................................................... E-19 Units ............................................................... 7-16 DP Cell Input Conditioning .............................. 6-91 DP Stacks ........................................................ 4-15 DPCELL ............................................................. E-7 DPR ................................................................... A-3 DRAM ................................................................ A-3 Drv Gain Alarm .................................................. 7-8 Dscrp Alarm ....................................................... 7-8 DT TO BASE ................................................. 6-161 Dual Chronometry................................... 5-29, 5-41 Ball Prover Hardware ..................................... 5-29 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-41 Dual Chronometry Switch Pair ....................... E-20 Dual Ethernet Module ........................................ 2-4 Dual Ethernet System...................................... 4-34 Dual Ethernet Systems .................................... 4-30 Dual Level A .................................................... 4-19 Dual Level B .................................................... 4-19 Duty / Standby ................................................... F-1 DVC ................................................................... A-3 DYN VISC Units............................................... 7-16
E
E Format ............................................................ A-3 Edit..................................................................... 8-8 Edit Displays .................................................. 2-27 Edit Line ......................................................... 13-3 Edit Menu ....................................................... 2-27 Edit Placement ...................................... 12-6, 12-9 Edit line ............................................................ 13-5 Editing Alarms .............................................................. 7-4 Analog Inputs ................................................... 4-7 Analog Outputs .............................................. 4-15 Communications Port..................................... 4-30 Constants ......................................................... 7-1
Revised January-2021
Config600 User Manual
Conversions/Constants .................................... 7-1 Density Inputs................................................. 4-18 Discrete (Digital) Inputs .................................... 4-3 Display Editor ................................................. 13-3 Displays/Webserver ....................................... 7-20 Edit Line ......................................................... 13-5 Edit Placement ............................................... 12-6 Edit Security ................................................... 2-26 Flowrates .......................................................... 5-2 HART Boards ................................................. 4-23 Levels ............................................................. 7-15 Passwords ...................................................... 7-15 Reports ........................................................... 3-13 Security ................................................. 7-14, 7-15 System Editor ................................................... 8-8 Totals Descriptors ............................................ 7-3 Turbine Inputs ................................................ 4-21 Editing a Data Point ......................................... 12-9 Editing Modbus Register Format ..................... 14-8 Editor Display............................................................ 13-1 Modbus.................................................. 14-1, 14-2 Placement ...................................................... 12-7 Report............................................................. 12-1 Transfer ............................................................ 9-1 EEPROM ........................................................... A-3 EEProm Alarm ................................................... 7-8 Elasticity Ball Prover Constants..................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Email Codes..................................................... 1-10 Enabling Automatic Operation....................................... 11-6 PC Setup Link .................................................. 9-2 Peer-to-Peer Link ............................................. F-3 Energy....................................................... 7-1, 7-16 Energy Fail Mod ................................ 6-116, 6-135 Energy Ration (Ev/Em).......................... 6-25, 6-30 Engineering Values................................... 3-3, 7-16 Enhancements ................................................... 1-1 Equilibrium Vapour Pressure (Pe) ...... 6-184, 6-204 Error Error Check Frequency .................................. 4-19 Error Percent ..........................6-125, 6-141, 6-146 Error Alarm......................................................... 7-8 Ethernet ............................................................. A-3 Ethernet Module................................................. 2-4 Ethylene ........................................................... 6-38 BASE COMP(Zb) ........................................... 6-38 Base Conditions ............................................. 6-38 BASE DENSITY ............................................. 6-38 Calculation Limits ........................................... 6-38 Calculation Type............................................. 6-38 Flowing Conditions ......................................... 6-38 METER DENSITY .......................................... 6-38 UPSTR COMP(Zb)......................................... 6-38 EU ...................................................................... A-3 Event 1 Alarm .................................................... 7-8 Event 2 Alarm .................................................... 7-8 Event Archive Size............................................. 7-4 Event History Type........................................... E-19 Event Logging .................................................. 11-1 EVENTHIST ....................................................... E-8
Index-9
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Example LogiCalcs .......................................... 15-2 Examples LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-16 Exception Alarm................................................. 7-8 exfwall.txt ...........................................................G-1 Exit ................................................................... 2-27 exp(x) LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-27 Expansion Factor...........................6-62, 6-77, 6-86 Calc Type ....................................................... 6-62 Discharge Coeff ............................................. 6-57 Exponent............................................................ A-3 Exponential Format.......................................... 13-5 Extended Folder Format ................................ 11-15 External Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-146 External Access ............................................... 7-19
F
Factors..................................6-57, 6-62, 6-64, 6-86 Fail A Alarm ....................................................... 7-8 Fail B Alarm ....................................................... 7-8 Fail CH_A Alarm ................................................ 7-8 Fail CH_B Alarm ................................................ 7-8 Fail CH_C Alarm................................................ 7-8 Fail CH_D Alarm................................................ 7-8 Fail Warn Alarm ................................................. 7-8 Failure Modes Density ......................................................... 6-222 Fatal Crd Alarm.................................................. 7-8 Fault Totals ......................................... 6-116, 6-135 FFactor Coriolis Observed Density Correction.......... 6-161 Coriolis Standard Density Correction........... 6-170 Turbine Observed Density Correction....................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Field Calibration.................................................D-1 Field Name LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-25 Figures 1-1. Config Upgrade dialog .............................. 1-2 1-2. License Agreement ................................... 1-6 1-3. Choose Components ................................ 1-7 1-4. Install Locationg ........................................ 1-8 1-5. Installation Progress ................................. 1-8 1-6. Installation Complete ................................ 1-9 1-7. Config600 Menu...................................... 1-10 1-8. Config600 Activation Screen .................. 1-11 2-1. Config600 Welcome ................................. 2-1 2-2. Configuration Generator, Step 1............... 2-2 2-3. Configuration Generator, Step 2............... 2-3 2-4. Configuration Generator, Step 3............... 2-4 2-5. Configuration Generator, Step 4............... 2-5 2-6. Gas Station Option Summary ................... 2-6 2-7. Gas Station Options Summarized ............ 2-7 2-8. Liquid Station Options Summary screens ......
...................................................................... 2-7 2-9. Configuration Generator, Step 5............... 2-9 2-10. Gas Stream Options Summary ............. 2-10 2-11. Gas Stream Options Summarized ........ 2-12 2-12. Liquid Stream Options Summary.......... 2-13
Index-10
2-13. Liquid Stream Options Summarized ..... 2-15 2-14. Configuration Generator, Step 6 ........... 2-16 2-15. Generating Config dialog box ............... 2-17 2-16. Example System Graphic ..................... 2-17 2-17. System Graphic (Stations and Streams) .....
.................................................................... 2-18 2-18. Stream Values (expanded) ................... 2-18 2-19. Value selection (expanded) .................. 2-19 2-20. Input Values (expanded) ....................... 2-20 2-21. Input Values (assigned) ........................ 2-21 2-22. Selectable icons .................................... 2-22 2-23. Select Config... ..................................... 2-23 2-24. Configuration-specific System Graphic. 2-24 2-25. PCSetup Editor ..................................... 2-25 2-26. Config Organiser ................................... 2-30 3-1. System Setup screen ................................ 3-1 3-2. Versions screen ........................................ 3-2 3-3. Units screen .............................................. 3-4 3-4. Reports screen.......................................... 3-6 3-5. Archive Configuration dialog box ............ 3-10 3-6. Archive Configuration.............................. 3-12 3-7. Managing Configurations ........................ 3-13 3-8. Totalisation.............................................. 3-14 3-9. Totals Detail dialog ................................. 3-15 3-10. Date/Time Parameters .......................... 3-16 4-1. Typical I/O Setup Screen (Discrete Inputs
Shown) .......................................................... 4-2 4-2. Digital Input Selection dialog box.............. 4-3 4-3. Edit Description dialog box ....................... 4-4 4-4. Digital Input Selection (New I/O Point) ..... 4-4 4-5. Digital Output Selection dialog box ........... 4-5 4-6. Analog Input Assignment dialog box......... 4-6 4-7. Analog Input, PRT/RTD, and HART dialog
boxes............................................................. 4-8 4-8. Analog Input Assignment dialog box....... 4-15 4-9. Analog Output Items ............................... 4-16 4-10. I/O Channels for Density Input.............. 4-17 4-11. Alarm Reminder .................................... 4-18 4-12. Edit Description dialog box ................... 4-18 4-13. Pulse Input Assignment dialog box....... 4-19 4-14. Edit Description dialog box ................... 4-21 4-15. Pulse Output Items ............................... 4-21 4-16. Pulse Output Items ............................... 4-22 4-17. HART Module Configuration screen ..... 4-23 4-18. PID Loop Enabled screen ..................... 4-24 4-19. Analog Output Assignment screen ....... 4-24 4-20. PID Loop Output Assigned screen ....... 4-25 4-21. PID Loop Output Assigned screen ....... 4-25 4-22. PID Loop PV Assigned screen.............. 4-26 4-23. Example Communication Task
Configurations ............................................. 4-31 5-1. Stations on the Hierarchy Menu................ 5-1 5-2. Flowrate Options ....................................... 5-3 5-3. Calculation Result dialog box.................... 5-3 5-4. Calculation Result (with limits) .................. 5-4 5-5. Flowrate Alarms with Limits ...................... 5-4 5-6. Average Temperature & Pressure ............ 5-5 5-7. Calculation Result dialog box.................... 5-5 5-8. Secondary Units STN Setup ..................... 5-6 5-10. Dual Units Setup Periodic Totals dialog
box ................................................................ 5-8 5-11. Flow Switching screen ............................ 5-9 5-12. Station Gas Composition screen .......... 5-10
Revised January-2021
5-13. Station Sampling................................... 5-15 5-14. Flow Balance Setup screen .................. 5-18 5-15. Run Data screen (Ball Prover) .............. 5-21 5-16. Constants screen (Ball Prover) ............. 5-23 5-17. Two-switch Bi-directional Prover Loop . 5-29 5-18. Four-switch Bi-directional Prover Loop. 5-29 5-19. Hardware screen (Ball Prover) ............. 5-30 5-20. Alarm Limits screen (Ball Prover) ......... 5-31 5-21. Run Data screen (Compact Prover) ..... 5-33 5-22. Constants screen (Compact Prover) .... 5-36 5-23. Hardware screen (Compact Prover) ..... 5-42 5-24. Alarm Limts screen (Compact Prover).. 5-43 5-25. Run Data (MMeter Prover) ................... 5-46 5-26. Constants screen (MMeter Prover)....... 5-49 5-27. Hardware screen (MMeter Prover) ....... 5-55 5-28. Alarm Limits screen (MMeter Prover) ... 5-56 5-9. Dual Units Setup Cumulative Totals dialog
box ................................................................ 5-7 6-1. Stream Hierarchy screen .......................... 6-3 6-2. General Settings ....................................... 6-4 6-3. Alarm Suppression dialog box .................. 6-5 6-4. Flowrate Settings ...................................... 6-6 6-5. Calculation Result dialog box ................... 6-6 6-6. Alarm Suppression dialog box .................. 6-7 6-7. Secondary Units STR Setup ..................... 6-8 6-10. Flow Switching screen .......................... 6-11 6-100. BSW screen ...................................... 6-217 6-101. Daniel Liquid Ultrasonic screen ........ 6-219 6-11. Gas Component Flow Weighted Averaging
screen ......................................................... 6-12 6-12. Density Measurement Calculation Limits
screen ......................................................... 6-14 6-13. Density Measurement Densitometer screen
.................................................................... 6-15 6-14. Block Valves screen ............................. 6-17 6-15. Time & Flow Weighted Averaging Example
.................................................................... 6-18 6-16. Weighted Averaging screen.................. 6-21 6-17. AGA8 (Compressibility) screen............. 6-23 6-18. Gas CV screen...................................... 6-26 6-19. Calorific Value screen ........................... 6-30 6-20. Gas Composition screen ...................... 6-31 6-21. Gas Properties screen .......................... 6-35 6-22. Ethylene screen .................................... 6-38 6-23. Linearisation screen.............................. 6-40 6-24. Stream Sampling screen ...................... 6-42 6-25. Coriolis screen ...................................... 6-45 6-26. Temperature/Pressure Correction screen ....
.................................................................... 6-49 6-27. Density Correction screen .................... 6-49 6-28. Pipe Correction screen ......................... 6-51 6-29. AGA8 (Compressibility) screen............. 6-55 6-30. ISO5167 (Mass Flowrate) screen ......... 6-58 6-31. ISOTR9464 screen ............................... 6-61 6-32. VCone (Mass Flowrate) screen ............ 6-62 6-33. Annubar (Mass Flowrate) screen.......... 6-64 6-34. Pure Gas/Air screen ............................. 6-66 6-35. Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172-
ASTMD3588) screen .................................. 6-68 6-36. SGERG (Compressibility) screen ......... 6-72 6-37. NX19 (Compressibility) screen ............. 6-74 6-38. PTZ (Compressibility) screen ............... 6-76 6-39. AGA3 (Volume Flowrate) screen .......... 6-77
Revised January-2021
Config600 User Manual
6-40. Gas Composition screen....................... 6-79 6-41. Z Steam (Compressibility) screen......... 6-84 6-42. GOST CV screen .................................. 6-85 6-43. GOST Flow screen ............................... 6-87 6-44. Gas Properties screen .......................... 6-89 6-45. Lo Hi Cell Input Handling ...................... 6-93 6-46. Lo Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart ..... 6-94 6-47. Hi Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart ...... 6-95 6-48. Lo Mid Hi Cell Input Handlng ................ 6-96 6-49. Lo Mid High Cell Input Handling Flowchart..
.................................................................... 6-97 6-50. Lo Mid Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart6-98 6-51. Lo Mid Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart6-98 6-52. Lo Mid Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart6-99 6-53. Lo Hi Hi Cell Input Handling................ 6-100 6-54. Lo Hi Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart (1)...
.................................................................. 6-101 6-55. Lo Hi Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart (2)...
.................................................................. 6-102 6-56. Lo Hi Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart (3)...
.................................................................. 6-102 6-57. Lo Hi Hi Cell Input Handling Flowchart (4)...
.................................................................. 6-103 6-58. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (1)
.................................................................. 6-104 6-59. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (2)
.................................................................. 6-105 6-60. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (3)
.................................................................. 6-105 6-61. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (4)
.................................................................. 6-105 6-62. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (5)
.................................................................. 6-105 6-63. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (6)
.................................................................. 6-106 6-64. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (7)
.................................................................. 6-106 6-65. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (8)
.................................................................. 6-106 6-66. 3 Identical Cell Input Handling Flowchart (9)
.................................................................. 6-106 6-67. DP Cell Input Conditioning screen ...... 6-107 6-68. AGA8 screen....................................... 6-109 6-69. Gas CV screen.................................... 6-112 6-70. AGA7 screen....................................... 6-116 6-71. Gas Composition screen..................... 6-118 6-72. Gas Properties screen ........................ 6-123 6-73. Linearisation screen ............................ 6-126 6-74. AGA8 screen....................................... 6-128 6-75. Gas CV screen.................................... 6-131 6-76. AGA7 screen....................................... 6-135 6-77. Gas Composition screen..................... 6-137 6-78. Linearisation screen ............................ 6-142 6-79. Gas Properties screen ........................ 6-144 6-8. Dual Units Setup dialog box...................... 6-9 6-80. Ultrasonic Flow Setup screen ............. 6-146 6-81. Ultrasonic Control screen.................... 6-150 6-82. Qsonic Flow Setup screen .................. 6-151 6-83. SICK Control screen ........................... 6-152 6-84. Local Units screen .............................. 6-155 6-85. Linearisation screen ............................ 6-157 6-86. Sampling screen ................................. 6-159
Index-11
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
6-87. Observed Density Correction screens .......... .................................................................. 6-162
6-88. Standard Density Correction screens . 6-170 6-89. BSW screen ........................................ 6-176 6-9. Dual Units Setup Periodic Totals dialog box
.................................................................... 6-10 6-90. Coriolis screen .................................... 6-177 6-91. Local Units screen .............................. 6-180 6-92. Linearisation screen............................ 6-182 6-93. Observed Density Correction screens 6-185 6-94. Standard Density Correction screen... 6-192 6-95. BSW screen ........................................ 6-199 6-96. Local Units screen .............................. 6-200 6-97. Linearisation screen............................ 6-202 6-98. Observed Density Correction screen.. 6-204 6-99. Standard Density Correction screen... 6-211 7-1. Conversion/Constants screen................... 7-2 7-2. Totals Descriptor screen ........................... 7-3 7-3. Edit Description dialog box ....................... 7-3 7-4. Alarms screen ........................................... 7-4 7-5. Security screen ....................................... 7-14 7-6. Passwords dialog box ............................. 7-15 7-7. Security screen, Password Edits ............ 7-16 7-8. Passwords dialog box ............................. 7-16 7-9. Data Item Security .................................. 7-17 7-10. Units Security dialog box ...................... 7-18 7-11. Units Security Level .............................. 7-18 7-12. Login dialog box.................................... 7-19 7-13. Displays/Webserver screen .................. 7-20 7-14. Calc Explorer (blank) ............................ 7-21 7-15. Calc Explorer menu .............................. 7-22 7-16. Calc Explorer Menu Options ................. 7-22 7-17. Connect Wizard .................................... 7-24 7-18. Newly Added Item................................. 7-24 7-19. Adding Inputs ........................................ 7-25 7-20. Added Units .......................................... 7-25 7-21. Adding Outputs ..................................... 7-26 7-22. Added Outputs ...................................... 7-27 7-23. Saving a Bitmap.................................... 7-28 8-1. System Editor screen (blank).................... 8-2 8-2. Open dialog box........................................ 8-2 8-3. Open dialog box (with .cfg file) ................. 8-3 8-4. System Editor screen (loaded) ................. 8-3 8-5. Object/Table Relationship......................... 8-4 8-6. System Editor screen................................ 8-5 8-7. Calc Editor dialog box ............................... 8-7 8-8. Connect Wizard ........................................ 8-8 8-9. Edit Dialog (System Editor)....................... 8-9 8-10. Edit dialog box ........................................ 8-9 9-1. PCSetup Error Message ........................... 9-2 9-2. Config Transfer screen ............................. 9-3 9-3. Config Transfer screen ............................. 9-4 9-4. Config Transfer Send tab.......................... 9-7 9-5. Config Transfer Receive tab ..................... 9-8 9-6. Save As New Config dialog box ............... 9-9 9-7. Config Transfer Logging tab ..................... 9-9 9-8. Config Transfer Licensing tab ................. 9-10 9-9. Licenses on Key...................................... 9-11 9-10. Transferred License .............................. 9-12 10-1. Device Manager.................................... 10-2 10-2. Device Manager Hardware ................... 10-3 10-3. Advanced Settings ................................ 10-4 10-4. Remote Front Panel.............................. 10-7
Index-12
10-5. Remote Front Panel Startup Menu ....... 10-8 11-1. Remote Archive Uploader screen ......... 11-2 11-2. Display Editor with shortcut menu......... 11-3 11-3. Edit FC List Item screen........................ 11-5 11-4. Tools Menu - Automatic Operation Enabled
.................................................................... 11-6 11-5. Typical Display Page (Stream 2 Flow Limits
shown)......................................................... 11-7 11-6. Remote Archive Uploader Tree ............ 11-9 11-7. Progress Bar ....................................... 11-10 11-8. Manual Upload Optons ....................... 11-11 11-9. Report Archive .................................... 11-12 11-10. Select Folder ..................................... 11-13 11-11. Select Folder ..................................... 11-13 11-12. Save As ............................................. 11-15 11-13. Compact Folder Format .................... 11-16 11-14. Extended Folder Format ................... 11-17 11-15. Print dialog ........................................ 11-18 11-16. Print Preview ..................................... 11-19 11-17. Print Setup ........................................ 11-20 11-18. Abort Transfer ................................... 11-20 12-1. PCSetup Reports screen ...................... 12-2 12-2. PCSetup Reports screen with Edit button
.................................................................... 12-3 12-3. Report Editor ......................................... 12-3 12-4. Select Config dialog .............................. 12-4 12-5. Select Config dialog .............................. 12-4 12-6. Report Editor screen (populated).......... 12-5 12-7. Report Editor menu ............................... 12-6 12-8. Placement Editor................................... 12-7 12-9. Connect Wizard..................................... 12-8 12-10. Placement Editor with revised label .... 12-8 12-11. Placement Editor dialog box ............... 12-9 12-12. Connect Wizard................................... 12-9 13-1. Display Editor main menu screen ......... 13-2 13-2. Typical Display Page (Stream 2 Flow Limits
shown)......................................................... 13-3 13-3. Display Editor with shortcut menu......... 13-4 13-4. Edit dialog box....................................... 13-5 13-5. Edit dialog box....................................... 13-6 13-6. Connect Wizard..................................... 13-6 13-7. Translate dialog box.............................. 13-7 13-8. Display Regenerating............................ 13-9 14-1. Modbus Editor main screen .................. 14-3 14-2. Properties dialog box ............................ 14-4 14-3. Insert shortcut menu ............................. 14-6 14-4. Enter Details dialog box ........................ 14-6 14-5. Choose dialog box ................................ 14-7 14-6. Enter Details dialog box ........................ 14-7 14-7. Connect Wizard..................................... 14-8 14-8. Edit Format dialog box .......................... 14-9 14-9. Message Details dialog box ................ 14-10 14-10. Connect Wizard................................. 14-11 14-11. Message Details dialog box (with trigger)
.................................................................. 14-11 14-12. Select Slaves dialog box ................... 14-12 14-13. Choose dialog box ............................ 14-12 14-14. Modbus Map Regeneration............... 14-13 14-15. Modbus Map Options ........................ 14-13 15-1. LogiCalc screen .................................... 15-2 15-2. Select Config dialog box ....................... 15-3 15-3. LogiCalc screen (loaded) ...................... 15-3 15-4. LogiCalc screen (loaded) ...................... 15-5
Revised January-2021
15-5. Set Variable dialog.............................. 15-15 B-1. Components of a BIDI Prover .................. B-5 B-2. Sphere Switch Selections......................... B-6 B-3. Initial Pass of Proof Run Timing ............. B-43 C-1. Product Table Options ............................. C-3 C-2. Station Batching ....................................... C-8 C-3. Flowrate Totals.......................................C-13 C-4. Product Interface Detection Form (in
PCSetup) .................................................... C-14 C-5. Idealised Example of Transitions between
Products with Different Densities................C-16 C-6. Slops Handling Examples ...................... C-16 C-7. Idealised Example of Transitions between
Products with Different Densities................C-31 C-8. Interface Detection Algorithm (ROC
Parameter at 0.31 kg/m6 ............................ C-32 C-9. Interface Detection Algorithm (Line Pack at
300 m3).......................................................C-33 C-10. Interface Detection Algorithm (Stabilisation
Option On) .................................................. C-34 C-11. Batch Configuration..............................C-42 C-12. Volume Load ........................................ C-43 C-13. Batch Defined.......................................C-43 C-14. Batch Information ................................. C-44 C-15. Batch Information ................................. C-45 C-16. Ticket Number ...................................... C-46 C-17. Recalculate Day ................................... C-46 C-18. Recalculate Base Density .................... C-47 C-19. Recalculate Command ......................... C-47 C-20. Recall Ticket Number ........................... C-48 C-21. Day Selection ....................................... C-48 C-22. Base Density Display ........................... C-49 C-23. Base Density Display ........................... C-49 C-24. Base Density Display ........................... C-50 C-25. Station Flow Switching screen ............. C-51 C-26. Stream Flow Switching screen.............C-52 C-27. Batch Stack .......................................... C-58 C-28. Config600 System Editor (1) ................ C-61 C-29. Config600 System Editor (2) ................ C-61 C-30. Batch Slots ........................................... C-61 C-31. Slot Editing Options..............................C-62 C-32. Insert Batch Command ........................ C-62 C-33. Entering Data ....................................... C-64 C-34. Pressing CLEAR .................................. C-64 C-35. Input out of Range................................C-64 C-36. Abort Confirmation Screen ................... C-65 C-37. Changes Discarded Message .............. C-65 C-38. Copy to Slot..........................................C-66 C-39. Confirmation Screen ............................ C-66 C-40. Changes Discarded..............................C-66 C-41. Delete Confirmation ............................. C-67 C-42. Batch Slots ........................................... C-68 C-43. Slot Editing Options..............................C-68 F-1. Select Communications (Step 6 of 6) ....... F-4 F-2. Comms Link with Peer Master Link and Port
Settings ......................................................... F-5 F-3. Port Com Setup Dialog ............................. F-5 F-4. Peer Params Setup screen ...................... F-7 F-5. Pop-up menu on Alarms screen ............. F-10 F-6. Edit dialog (1).......................................... F-10 F-7. Edit dialog (2).......................................... F-11 F-8. Peer Critical Alarm.................................. F-11 F-9. CALCTAB screen ................................... F-12
Revised January-2021
Config600 User Manual
F-10. Edit dialog (1)........................................ F-12 F-11. Edit dialog (2)........................................ F-13 F-12. Edit dialog (3)........................................ F-13 F-13. Peer Critical CALCTAB Object ............. F-14 F-14. Calc Editor Outputs............................... F-14 F-15. Connect Wizard Assigning an object to an
output of the SYS PEER CRITICAL Calctab ..... .................................................................... F-15 F-16. New Output with Object Assigned ........ F-15 F-17. Connect Wizard Assigning an object to an input of the SYS PEER CRITICAL calctab . F-16 F-18. System Editor........................................ F-17 F-19. Status Input and Output Description..... F-18 F-20. Duty/Standby Connection Diagram ...... F-19 F-21. Connecting A's Health Digital Output to B's Digital Input ................................................. F-20 F-22. List of Discrete Inputs before Assignment ... .................................................................... F-20 F-23. Digital Input Selection ........................... F-21 F-24. SYS PEER HEALTH and PEER HEALTH Object (after assignment to Digital Inputs).. F-21 F-25. List of Discrete Outputs before Assignment .................................................................... F-21 F-26. SYS PEER DUTY IO Digital Output Assignment ................................................. F-22 F-27. SYS PEER HEALTH Digital Output Assignment ................................................. F-22 F-28. SYS PEER HEALTH Digital Output Assignment ................................................. F-23 F-29. PCSetup Communications.................... F-23 F-30. Peer Params Setup dialog.................... F-24 F-31. Peer Duty Logic page ........................... F-24 F-32. Peer Master Link Operator Command Page .................................................................... F-25 F-33. Peer Duty Logic page ........................... F-26 I-1. Defining a Serial Printer on COM3 Port ...... I-3 I-2. Defining a Network Printer .......................... I-3 I-3. Defining Comms Task 20 for the Printer..... I-4 I-4. Redefining Printer Retries ........................... I-5 I-5. Selecting the ALARM FORMAT Object ...... I-6 I-6. Edit Dialog ................................................... I-7 File Locations Remote Archive Uploader ............................ 11-12 File Menu ......................................................... 2-27 File names ....................................................... 12-5 Filter (*) Keyword .............................................. G-2 Filter Keyword ................................................... G-2 Finding Objects .................................................. 8-6 Firewall.............................................................. G-1 *Filter Keyword ................................................ G-2 ACCEPT .......................................................... G-2 Adding Rules to the Chain .............................. G-3 After Checking the Rules ................................ G-3 ALLOW_IN ...................................................... G-2 ALLOW_OUT .................................................. G-2 Applying a Rule to a Range of IPs .................. G-3 COMMIT .......................................................... G-3 Committing the Rules ...................................... G-3 Default Policies................................................ G-2 DROP .............................................................. G-2 exfwall.txt......................................................... G-1 FORWARD ...................................................... G-2 INPUT.............................................................. G-2
Index-13
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Inverting a Rule ................................................G-3 Operational Behaviour .....................................G-3 OUTPUT ..........................................................G-2 Rules File .........................................................G-1 User Defined Chains ........................................G-2 Fixed Vel Alarm ................................................. 7-9 Flange .............................................................. 6-86 Flash memory .................................................... A-3 FloBoss S600+ .................................................. 1-4 Flow ................................................................. 6-57 Flow balance...................................................... A-3 Flow Balance Setup Ball Prover...................................................... 5-18 Flow Calibration Pressure ............................... 6-44 Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Flow Coefficient ....................6-57, 6-62, 6-64, 6-86 Flow Computer List.......................................... 11-2 Flow Data Source Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Flow Extension ................................................ 6-77 Flow Integral Acceptance Factor ..................... 6-44 Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Flow Prop.............................................. 6-41, 6-158 Flow Prop 1.........................................................J-3 Flow Prop 2.........................................................J-3 Flow Prop 3.........................................................J-3 Flow Rate Points Ultrasonic Gas Spool Wall Roughness ........ 6-146 Flow switching ................................................... A-3 Flow Switching ................................ 5-8, 6-10, C-50 Alarms ............................................................ C-56 Algorithm 1 ..................................................... C-53 Algorithm 2 ..................................................... C-53 Algorithm 3 ..................................................... C-54 Algorithm 4 ..................................................... C-54 Algorithms ...................................................... C-53 Stages ............................................................ C-54 Station ............................................................ C-50 Stream ............................................................ C-52 Streams .................................................6-10, C-50 Flow Units Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Flowing Conditions .......................................... 6-66 Flowing Viscosity ............................................. 6-66 Flowrate .................................................. 5-2, 6-146 SICK ............................................................. 6-152 Ultrasonic ..................................................... 6-146 Flowrate Low Limit........................................... 6-41 Sampler Coriolis Liquid ................................ 6-158 Flowrate/Frequency .............................. 6-39, 6-156 Turbine Gas ................................................. 6-125 Turbine Liquid ................................... 6-180, 6-201 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-141 Flowrates AGA3................................................................ 2-8 Alarm Limits ..................................................... 6-5 Annubar............................................................ 2-8 Editing .............................................................. 5-2 Flow Switching ......................................6-10, C-50 ISO5167 ........................................................... 2-8 Low Limit for Sampling................................... 5-14 PID Loop Control.............................................. 6-5 Setpoint for Streams .............................6-10, C-50
Index-14
Streams ............................................................ 6-5 Units ................................................................. 3-3 VCone .............................................................. 2-8 VCone Wet Gas ............................................... 2-8 Flow-Weighted Averaging (TWA) .................... 6-19 for/next LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-24 For/next ............................................................ 15-7 Format.............................................................. 2-23 Forward MF Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-146 Forward Premium Flow Limit ... 6-57, 6-62, 6-64, 6146 Free running................................................... 15-14 FREQT ............................................................... E-8 Frequency ........................................................ 4-22 FRQ ................................................................... A-3 FRQ O-Rnge Alarm ........................................... 7-9 Function .................................................. 4-30, 4-31 Numioboards ................................................ 15-12 Numstation ................................................... 15-12 Numstream ................................................... 15-12 Function codes................................................. 14-1 function/end LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-23 FWA ................................................................. 6-18 CG .................................................................. 6-11
G
Gas AGA3 (Volume Flowrate) ............................... 6-77 AGA7 (Gross Volume Flowrate)........ 6-116, 6-135 AGA8 (Compressibility) - Gas DP .................. 6-54 AGA8 (Compressibility) - Gas Turbine......... 6-109 AGA8 (Compressibility) - Gas Ultrasonic ..... 6-127 Annubar .......................................................... 6-64 Calorific Value (AGA5) .......................... 6-25, 6-30 Coriolis .................................................. 6-22, 6-44
AGA8....................................................... 6-22 Coriolis .................................................. 6-177 Gas Properties ........................................ 6-35 Downstream/Upstream Correction................. 6-48 DP................................................................... 6-48 AGA3....................................................... 6-77 Annubar (Mass Flowrate)........................ 6-64 Cell Input ................................................. 6-91 GPA2172................................................. 6-67 ISO5167 (Mass Flowrate) ....................... 6-57 ISO6976 .................................................. 6-67 ISOTR9464(Mass Flowrate) ................... 6-60 NX19 ....................................................... 6-74 PTZ.......................................................... 6-75 Pure Gas/Air (Mass Flowrate)................. 6-66 SGERG ................................................... 6-72 V-Cone (Mass Flowrate) ......................... 6-62 Ethylene ......................................................... 6-38 Gas Component Flow Weighted Averaging ... 6-11 Gas Composition - Coriolis ................................... ...................................... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118 Gas Composition - Ultrasonic ...................... 6-136 Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172) .................... 6-25 Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172) - Gas DP .... 6-67
Revised January-2021
Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172) - Gas Turbine ..... .................................................................. 6-111
Gas CV (ISO6976 or GPA2172) - Gas Ultrasonic .................................................................. 6-130
Gas Expansion ............................................... 6-62 Gas Expansion Factor.................................... 6-64 Gas Options ..................................................... 2-8 Gas Properties - Coriolis ................................ 6-35 Gas Properties - DP ....................................... 6-89 GOST CV ....................................................... 6-85 GOST Flow .................................................... 6-86 ISO5167 (Mass Flowrate) .............................. 6-57 ISOTR9464 .................................................... 6-60 Linearisation - Turbine ................................. 6-125 Linearisation - Ultrasonic.............................. 6-141 NX19 (Compressibility) .................................. 6-74 Pipe Correction .............................................. 6-51 PTZ (Compressibility)..................................... 6-75 SGERG (Compressibility) .............................. 6-72 Steam ............................................................. 6-83 Turbine ......................................................... 6-109
AGA8..................................................... 6-109 Gas Properties ...................................... 6-122 GPA....................................................... 6-111 ISO6976 ................................................ 6-111 Ultrasonic ..................................................... 6-127 AGA8..................................................... 6-127 Gas CV.................................................. 6-130 Gas Properties ...................................... 6-143 Ultrasonic Flow ..................................... 6-146 Ultrasonic SICK Control ............................... 6-152 V-Cone (Mass Flowrate) ................................ 6-62 Z Steam.......................................................... 6-83 Gas Chromatograph ................................................ .............................. 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Gas Composition ............................................. 6-66 Coriolis ..............................5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118 Ultrasonic ..................................................... 6-136 Gas Properties Coriolis ........................................................... 6-35 DP .................................................................. 6-89 Turbine ......................................................... 6-122 Ultrasonic ..................................................... 6-143 Gas Stream AGA8.............................................................. 6-54 Gas Composition... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Gas Turbine ...................................... 6-116, 6-135 Pipe Correction .............................................. 6-51 QSonic ......................................................... 6-151 Gas Turbine AGA7................................................. 6-116, 6-135 Gas Velocity................................................... 6-146 QSonic ......................................................... 6-151 Ultrasonic Control......................................... 6-149 GC FWA .......................................................... 6-11 General Formulae Provers ........................................................... B-65 General Guidelines System Editor ................................................. 8-10 General Reports Adding to a configuration ................................. 3-9 General Settings Streams ............................................................ 6-4
Revised January-2021
Config600 User Manual
GOST 30319.1-96 Calc 52/53 ......................... 6-85 GOST 8563-97................................................. 6-86 GOST CV ......................................................... 6-85 GOST Flow ...................................................... 6-86 GPA ................................................................. 6-25 Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-130 GPA2172 ......................... 6-25, 6-67, 6-111, 6-130 Grab Count ........................................... 6-41, 6-158 Grab Size ......................................................... 4-22 Grab Volume........................................... 5-14, 6-41 Sampler Coriolis Liquid ................................ 6-158 Graphical display ............................................. 7-21 Gross ............................................................... 6-54 Gross Heating Value (HV) .................... 6-54, 6-109 Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-127 Gross1 ................................................ 6-109, 6-127 Gross2 ................................................ 6-109, 6-127 Group Count .................................................... 6-41 Groups Alarms .............................................................. 7-4
H
H/W Fail Alarm................................................... 7-9 Hardware ......................................................... 5-41 Ball Prover ...................................................... 5-29 Compact Prover ............................................. 5-41 Hardware Handshake....................................... F-4 Master Meter Prover....................................... 5-54 HART ................................................................. A-3 Modes (MODE TAB PLANTI/O) ..................... E-21 HART Boards Editing ............................................................ 4-23 HART Module .............................................2-4, E-8 Master Mode .................................................. E-20 Modes (MODE TAB PLANTI/O) ..................... E-23 Poll Format ..................................................... E-20 HART Modules................................................. 4-22 HARTTAB....................................................... E-10 Heating Value .................................................. 6-30 Help Menu........................................................ 2-27 Hex..................................................................... A-3 Hi Alarm ............................................................. 7-9 Hierarchy menu................................................ 2-25 High........................................................... 5-2, 13-5 H 5-2, 6-5 High Band......................................................... 6-5 High Scale ............................................. 4-15, 4-24 High High ........................................................... 5-2 HH ............................................................. 5-2, 6-5 High Prd Alarm................................................... 7-9 High Scale........................................................ 4-16 Highway Addressable Remote Transducer (HART)
....................................................................... 4-22 Hi-Hi Alarm......................................................... 7-9 Hi-Hi Cell .......................................................... 6-94 Holding register..................................................A-3 Hot Duty Standby............................................. 2-15 HV ...................................................................... A-3 Hydrometer Correction Coriolis Observed Density Correction .......... 6-161 Turbine Observed Density Correction...................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204
Index-15
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Hz....................................................................... A-3
I
I/O ...................................................................... A-4 Adding a New Point........................................ 4-15 Assignment & Scalings .................................. 7-14 Ball Prover Hardware ..................................... 5-29 Board.......................................4-2, 4-6, 4-15, 4-19 Channel...................................4-2, 4-6, 4-15, 4-19 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-41 Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Density ................................................ 6-44, 6-177 Master Meter Hardware ................................. 5-54 Meter Variable Limits ..................................... 6-44 Pressure .............................................. 6-44, 6-177 Selection ........................................................ 6-44 Temperature........................................ 6-44, 6-177 I/O alarms .......................................................... 7-4 I/O Board ......................................................... 4-17 I/O Channel............................................. 4-18, 4-20 I/O module ....................................................... 4-20 I/O Module ......................................................... 2-4 I/O Selection Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 I/O Setup..................................................... 2-4, 4-1 Adding a New I/O Point.................................. 4-15 Analog Outputs .............................................. 4-15 Communications Port..................................... 4-30 Density Inputs ................................................ 4-17 Digital Inputs .................................................... 4-2 Discrete (Digital) Outputs ................................. 4-5 Discrete Inputs ................................................. 4-2 HART Modules ............................................... 4-22 PID Loops ...................................................... 4-23 Pulse Outputs................................................. 4-21 Turbine Inputs ................................................ 4-19 I/P Err Alarm ...................................................... 7-9 Icon bar ............................................................ 2-26 Icon Bar ........................................................... 2-26 System Editor ................................................... 8-6 Icons System Editor ................................................... 8-6 Ideal Calorific Value (SUP) .......... 6-25, 6-67, 6-111 Ultrasonic Gas..................................... 6-25, 6-130 Ideal Density ................................ 6-25, 6-67, 6-111 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-130 Ideal Relative Density (RD) ..................................... .............................. 6-25, 6-54, 6-67, 6-109, 6-111 Ultrasonic Gas................................... 6-127, 6-130 Identity ............................................................. 7-20 if / then / else / endif LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-24 if/then ............................................................. 15-11 if/then/else/endif............................................. 15-11 IIO ...................................................................... A-4 Illegal Alarm ....................................................... 7-9 Initial Ball Prover Constants .................................... 5-23 Initial Mode ...... 4-8, 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Initial Stream Configurations ............................. 6-2 Inlet Edge Radius ............................................ 6-86 Input ................................................................... 4-1
Index-16
INPUT Applying a Firewall Rule to a Range of IPs..... G-3 Input Parameters Ultrasonic Control......................................... 6-149 Inputs ................................................................. 8-7 AGA3 (Volume Flowrate) ............................... 6-77 Bi-directional proving........................................B-3 Coriolis Gas Properties .................................. 6-35 Coriolis Standard Density Correction ........... 6-170 DP Gas Properties ......................................... 6-89 ISO5167 (Mass Flowrate) .............................. 6-57 ISOTR9464 .................................................... 6-60 Turbine Gas.................................................. 6-122 Turbine Observed Density Correction...................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Ultrasonic Control......................................... 6-149 Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-146 Insert ................................................................ 14-7 Insert .................................................................. 8-6 Insert Line....................................................... 12-6 Insert Page ..................................................... 13-3 Insert/Append Page........................................ 13-5 Insert Menu ...................................................... 13-3 Display Editor ................................................. 13-5 Insert Special ................................................... 14-6 Inserting Modbus Slaves ............................... 14-12 Inspection Period ............................................. 6-86 Installation.......................................................... 1-5 Installing LogiCalc on the S600+ ................................. 15-15 Int Pipe Roughness ......................................... 6-86 int(x) LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-27 Integer ................................................................ A-4 Integ-Fail Alarm.................................................. 7-9 Integral Action (I).............................................. 4-29 Integral Time .................................................... 4-24 Interface QSonic.......................................................... 6-151 Interface Detection...........................................C-29 Internal Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-146 Interpolation Factor .......................................... 5-29 Ball Prover Hardware ..................................... 5-29 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-41 Introduction ........................................................ 1-1 Inuse Composition ............. 6-35, 6-85, 6-89, 6-143 Turbine Gas.................................................. 6-122 Inuse Meter Factor Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-146 Invalid Inc Alarm ................................................ 7-9 Invert ........................................................... 4-2, 4-5 Inverting a Firewall Rule ................................... G-3 IO Fail Alarm ...................................................... 7-8 IOASSIGN........................................................ E-10 ioboard(x), station(x), stream(x) LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-26 IP ........................................................................ A-4 IP O-Rnge Alarm................................................ 7-9 IP VII/2 4.12 ........................................ 6-198, 6-217 IP2.................................... 6-161, 6-184, 6-204, A-4 iptables.............................................................. G-1
Revised January-2021
IS........................................................................ A-4 Isentropic Exponent ............................... 6-35, 6-57,
6-62, 6-64, 6-66, 6-77, 6-86, 6-89, 6-122, 6-143 ISO..................................................................... A-4 ISO 5167............................................................ A-4 ISO 6976............................................................ A-4 ISO5167...........................................2-8, 6-57, 6-62 ISO5167 (Mass Flowrate) .............................. 6-57 ISO6976............................6-25, 6-67, 6-111, 6-130 ISO6976/1995 .......................... 6-67, 6-111, 6-130 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-130 ISOTR9464 ...................................................... 6-60 Item ......................................................... 4-16, 4-22 Item Type ......................................................... 4-16 Iteration Type Coriolis Observed Density Correction.......... 6-161 Turbine Observed Density Correction..... 6-184, 6-
204
J
Joule-Thompson .............................................. 6-48 JT Coefficient ........................................ 6-48, 6-60 JT ISOTR9464 ................................................. 2-8 JT METHOD................................................... 6-48
K
K Factor ........................................................... 5-20 K Factors Compact Prover Alarm Limits ........................ 5-43 Linearisation ................................................. 6-156 Local Units ........................................ 6-179, 6-200 Turbine Liquid ................................... 6-180, 6-201 Units ............................................................... 7-16 K_Comp Alarm .................................................. 7-9 Kdpf ................................................................. 6-44 Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Keypad.........................................4-9, 6-107, 6-222 Keypad Fail with Recovery......5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-
118, 6-136 Keypad Moles ....... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 K-factor .......................................................... 6-180 K-factors Turbine Gas ................................................. 6-125 KG/M3............................................5-23, 5-35, 5-48 KPINT .............................................................. E-10 KPINTARR....................................................... E-10 KPREAL........................................................... E-12 KPREALARR ................................................... E-12 KPSTRING ...................................................... E-13 Ktpf1 ................................................................ 6-44 Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177
L
Language Specifications LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-23 Last Edited ....................................................... 15-2 Lastgood ........................................................ 6-222 Launching Accessing the System Editor ........................... 8-2 Display Editor ................................................. 13-1 LogiCalc Editor ...................................... 15-2, 15-5
Revised January-2021
Config600 User Manual
Remote Archive Uploader ..................... 11-1, 11-2 Remote Front Panel ....................................... 10-7 Launching Config600 ......................................... 1-9 lb - kg ................................................................. 7-1 Leading Zeros .................................................. 13-5 LED .................................................................... A-4 Left pane .......................................................... 2-25 Length ................................................................ 7-1 let LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-24 Levels Deleting .......................................................... 7-15 Editing ............................................................ 7-15 Security ........................................7-14, 7-15, 7-20 Licensing .......................................................... 9-10 Limit Check ............... 6-57, 6-60, 6-77, 6-86, 6-109 Limits................................................................ 13-5 Coriolis Gas Composition. 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118 Ultrasonic Gas Composition......................... 6-136 Limits alarms...................................................... 7-4 Line Pressure................................................. 6-143 Ultrasonic Gas ................................... 6-127, 6-146 Line Temperature........................................... 6-143 Ultrasonic Gas ................................... 6-127, 6-146 Linear Two-point ADC Device Calibration .........D-3 Linear Two-point Device PRT Calibration .........D-8 Linearisation................................................... 6-180 Alarms ......................................6-39, 6-156, 6-201 Flowrate/Frequency............................. 6-39, 6-156 Gas Coriolis ...................................... 6-39, 6-156 K-factor ......................................................... 6-156 Liquid Turbine................................. 6-180, 6-201 Meter factor ......................................... 6-39, 6-156 Turbine Gas.................................................. 6-125 Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-141 Link Alarm .......................................................... 7-9 Link to Stream.................................................. 4-30 Liquid Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Linearisation ...................................... 6-180, 6-201 Liquid Coriolis................................. 6-154, 6-177 Liquid Turbine............................................ 6-179 Liquid Ultrasonic........................................ 6-200 Turbine
Linearisation .......................................... 6-180 Liquid Stream Sampling ...................................................... 6-158 Live Inputs Coriolis Standard Density Correction ........... 6-170 Turbine Observed Density Correction...................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Live/Check Mode Selection ............................. E-19 Lo Alarm............................................................. 7-9 Lo Mid Hi Cell................................................... 6-95 Load Config...................................................... 15-2 Local Units .......................................... 6-179, 6-200 K-FACTOR UNITS ............................ 6-179, 6-200 LOG ................................................................. E-13 log(x) LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-27 Logging .............................................................. 9-9 LogiCalc .................................................. 15-1, 15-3
Index-17
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
const............................................................... 15-8 Constants ....................................................... 15-8 dim.................................................................. 15-6 for/next ........................................................... 15-7 Function
Numioboards......................................... 15-12 Numstation ............................................ 15-12 Numstream............................................ 15-12 Loops.............................................................. 15-7 Remote debug.............................................. 15-16 Statement const........................................................ 15-9 if/then .................................................... 15-11 if/then/else/endif .................................... 15-11 Variables ........................................................ 15-6 while/do/wend ................................................ 15-7 LogiCalc Editor abs(x) ........................................................... 15-27 Accessing ....................................................... 15-2 Alarms Suppressing ..................................... 15-28 Alarms Testing ............................................. 15-28 Built-in Functions.......................................... 15-26 call ................................................................ 15-25 connect......................................................... 15-25 const............................................................. 15-24 Convert Density Units from Kgm3................ 15-19 Convert Density Units to Kgm3 .................... 15-18 Convert Temperature Units.......................... 15-18 Creating a LogiCalc........................................ 15-5 Data Index .................................................... 15-25 Data Type..................................................... 15-25 Debugging .................................................... 15-16 dim................................................................ 15-24 Examples ..................................................... 15-16 exp(x) ........................................................... 15-27 Field Name ................................................... 15-25 for/next ......................................................... 15-24 function/end.................................................. 15-23 if then/else/endif ........................................... 15-24 Installing on the S600+ ................................ 15-15 int(x) ............................................................. 15-27 ioboard(x), station(x), stream(x) ................... 15-26 Language XE "Language Specifications:LogiCalc Editor" Specifications ............................... 15-23 let.................................................................. 15-24 Load Config .................................................... 15-2 log(x) ............................................................ 15-27 NOT(x), NOTB(x) ......................................... 15-27 numioboards(), numstations(), numstream() 15-26 numobjects(x, ............................................... 15-26 Perform PTZ Calculations ............................ 15-17 Perform PTZ Calculations and Convert Units ........ .................................................................. 15-20 Perform PTZ Calculations on All Streams ... 15-22 pow(x, y)....................................................... 15-27 PTZ Calculations .......................................... 15-17 Remotely Debugging.................................... 15-16 return ............................................................ 15-25 Section Index ............................................... 15-25 setalarm(x, v), clearalarm(x, v), accalarm(x, v)...... .................................................................. 15-27 setalarm/clearalarm/accalarm ...................... 15-26 sin(x), cos(x), tan(x) ..................................... 15-27
Index-18
Starting ........................................................... 15-5 Statements ................................................... 15-23 Suppressing Alarms ..................................... 15-28 Temperature Units........................................ 15-18 Testing Alarms ............................................. 15-28 timenow()...................................................... 15-27 while/do/wend............................................... 15-24 LogiCalc Tips ................................................... 15-4 Login .................................... 2-26, 2-27, 7-18, 7-19 Lo-Hi Cell ......................................................... 6-92 Lo-Hi-Hi Cell..................................................... 6-99 LoLo Alarm......................................................... 7-9 Loop ................................................................. 15-7 Loop Delay ....................................................... 14-4 Low ........................................................... 5-2, 13-5 L ............................................................... 5-2, 6-5 LL............................................................... 5-2, 6-5 Low Band ......................................................... 6-5 Low Data Source............................................ 6-44 Low DP Cut Off ............................................ 6-107 Low Frequency Cutoff .................................... 4-19 Low Low ........................................................... 5-2 Low Scale .............................................. 4-15, 4-24 Low Units........................................................ 6-44 Streams ............................................................ 6-5 Low Flow Alarm ................................................. 7-9 Low Prd Alarm ................................................... 7-9 Low Scale ........................................................ 4-16
M
m - yd ................................................................. 7-1 m3 - bbl .............................................................. 7-1 m3 - cf ................................................................ 7-1 MA IP Err Alarm ................................................. 7-9 MA Op Fxd Alarm .............................................. 7-9 MA Op Sat Alarm ............................................... 7-9 Machine ID ....................................................... 1-10 Machine Name................................................... 3-2 Maintenance mode ............................................ 6-4 Maintenance Mode ..................................... 6-2, 6-4 Managing Configuration Reports ..................... 3-13 Mantissa............................................................. A-4 Manual Comm Settings Remote Archive Uploader .............................. 11-7 Manual Position ............................................... 4-24 Map Properties Modbus........................................................... 14-3 Maps ................................................................ 14-1 Mass ..............................................6-177, 7-1, 7-16 Mass Fail Mode ................................. 6-116, 6-135 Mass Flowrate .................... 6-57, 6-62, 6-64, 6-86 Mass Flowrate Annubar .......................................................... 6-64 ISO5167 ......................................................... 6-57 ISOTR9464 .................................................... 6-60 Pure Gas/Air ................................................... 6-66 V-Cone ........................................................... 6-62 Master .............................................................. 14-1 Master Meter Alarm Limits.................................................... 5-55 Constants ....................................................... 5-48 Hardware ........................................................ 5-54
Revised January-2021
Master Meter Hardware ................................. 5-54 Prover....................................................5-44, B-73 Run Data ........................................................ 5-45 Matching Name.................................................. 3-2 Max Acceptable Gap Between Successive Polls .... ....................................................................... 6-44 Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Max Flowrate Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Max Flowrate Meter Variable Limits............... 6-44 Max Meter Total............................................... 6-44 Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Maximum Max Time Drift ................................................ 4-30 McCrometer ..................................................... 6-62 Measured ............................................ 6-107, 6-222 Measurement Measurement Point ........................................ 6-48 Menu bar.......................................................... 2-26 Menu/Page ...................................................... 13-3 Menu/Page Clipboard .................................... 13-8 Message Function ......................................... 14-11 Message Length ............................................ 14-11 Message Length Mode .................................... 14-4 Meter CCF Coriolis Observed Density Correction.......... 6-161 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Meter CPL Coriolis Observed Density Correction.......... 6-161 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Meter CTL Coriolis Observed Density Correction.......... 6-161 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Meter Density........................................ 6-66, 6-109 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-146 Meter Density (DT) Coriolis Standard Density Correction........... 6-170 Meter Density (SEL) Coriolis Observed Density Correction.......... 6-161 Meter factor................................... 5-20, 6-180, A-4 Meter Factor Compact Prover Alarm Limits ........................ 5-43 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-146 Meter Factor Method Turbine Gas ................................................. 6-125 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-141 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-146 Meter Factors...................................... 6-125, 6-141 Linearisation ........................................ 6-39, 6-156 Turbine Gas ................................................. 6-125 Turbine Liquid ................................... 6-180, 6-201 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-141 Meter linearisation ............................................. A-4 Meter Location ............................................ 6-2, 6-4 Meter Pe Coriolis Observed Density Correction.......... 6-161 Coriolis Standard Density Correction........... 6-170 Meter Port ........................................................ 4-33 Meter Pressure ........................................................ ................... 6-35, 6-48, 6-72, 6-109, 6-116, 6-135 Turbine Gas ................................................. 6-122 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192
Revised January-2021
Config600 User Manual
Meter Pulses Master Meter Alarm Limits ............................. 5-55 Meter Setup Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Gas Coriolis .................................................... 6-44 Meter Slave Addresses.................................... 2-15 Meter Temperature . 6-35, 6-48, 6-72, 6-116, 6-135 Turbine Gas.................................................. 6-122 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Meter Temperature (SEL) Coriolis Observed Density Correction .......... 6-161 Meter Variable Limits ....................................... 6-44 Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Method ...................... 5-14, 6-18, 6-41, 6-54, 6-109 FWA................................................................ 6-11 Sampler Coriolis Liquid ................................ 6-158 Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-127 Weighted Averaging ....................................... 6-20 Min VxWorks .................................................... 15-2 Minimum Interval..................................... 5-14, 6-41 Sampler Coriolis Liquid ................................ 6-158 Mixture SG .............................................. 6-25, 6-30 Modbus Data Point, Deleting ....................................... 14-8 Data Point, Inserting....................................... 14-5 Insert message request................................ 14-10 Map Properties ............................................... 14-3 Modbus ..........................................4-30, 14-1, 14-2 Modbus .............................................................. A-4 Modbus Editor Accessing ....................................................... 14-2 Modbus Editor.................................................. 14-1 Display Editor ................................................. 13-8 Slave Port ....................................................... 2-15 Modbus maps .................................................. 14-2 Modbus Maps Regenerating................................................ 14-12 Modbus Slave Message ................................ 14-10 Modbus Slaves Inserting........................................................ 14-12 Modbus Timeout SICK Control ................................................ 6-152 Mode ..............................................4-19, 5-14, 6-41 Sampler Coriolis Liquid ................................ 6-158 MODE TAB CALC............................................ E-22 MODE TAB DENS IP.......................................E-22 MODE TAB DP STACK ................................... E-22 MODE TAB PLANTI/O........................... E-21, E-23 Mode Tables .................................................... E-21 Modem ............................................................... A-4 Modes of Operation ....................................... 6-221 Modulate ............................................................ A-4 Molar Mass ........................................... 6-54, 6-109 Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-127 Mole Additionals...... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Mole Alarms and Limits Mole Hi Limits ........ 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Mole Lo Limits ....... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Mole Deviation Limits.............................................. .............................. 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Mole Dv Alarm ................................................... 7-9 Mole Fail Alarm ................................................ 7-10 Mole Flag ......................................................... 6-11
Index-19
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Mole Hi Alarm .................................................... 7-9 Mole Lo Alarm.................................................... 7-9 Mole Order ....................................................... 5-10 Mole Order Port..... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Mole Splits .............. 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Moles at Individual Stream ................................ 2-8 Moles from Station Chromat .............................. 2-8 Moles from Station Only .................................... 2-8 Moles Stream..................................................... 2-8 Monel ............................................................... 6-51 Monitor Alarm .................................................. 7-10 MOV..........................................................6-16, A-4 Move Display ................................................... 13-8 Move Uncm Alarm ........................................... 7-10 Moving Config600 from one PC to another ..... 1-11 MTR PRESS (SEL)........................................ 6-161 MULTI .............................................................. E-14 Multiplexer ......................................................... A-4 Murdock ........................................................... 6-57 MV Clamping ................................................... 4-24 MV Slew Rate .................................................. 4-24 MX-AV/AV...................................B-38, B-72, B-102 MX-MN/AVG ...............................B-38, B-72, B-101 MX-MN/MN .................................B-38, B-72, B-102 MX-MN/MX*MN ..........................B-38, B-72, B-102 MX-MN/MX+MN2 .......................B-38, B-72, B-101
N
N2K Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Navigating Display Editor ................................................. 13-2 Navigating PCSetup Editor .............................. 2-25 Negative Limit Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Network printing.................................................. I-1 Network Printing Configuring printers.............................. I-2, I-4, J-2 Editing report line length ................................... I-6 Supported paper sizes ...................................... I-2 Supported printers............................................. I-2 New Configuration ...................................... 2-1, 2-4 Button ............................................................. 2-26 Name................................................................ 2-2 New ................................................................ 2-27 New LogiCalc................................................... 15-5 New Placement................................................ 12-6 New Window .................................................... 2-27 No Permit Alarm .............................................. 7-10 Noise.................................................................. A-4 Non-linear Three-point Curve Calibration Control Mechanism ....................................................... D-7 Non-volatile memory.......................................... A-4 Normal ............................................................... 4-2 Normal Flowrate Turbine Liquid ................................... 6-180, 6-201 Normalisation................................................... 6-11 NOT(x), NOTB(x) LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-27 NTP.................................................................. 4-30 Number of Switches......................................... 5-29 Ball Prover Hardware ..................................... 5-29
Index-20
Number of Valves .................................. 6-10, C-50 Numioboards.................................................. 15-12 numioboards(), numstations(), numstream() LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-26 numobjects(x,................................................. 15-26 Numstation..................................................... 15-12 Numstations ................................................... 15-12 Numstream .................................................... 15-12 NX19 ................................................................ 6-74 NX-19 ................................................................. A-4 NX19 (Compressibility) .................................... 6-74
O
O/P Err Alarm................................................... 7-10 Object................................................................. A-5 Objects ............................................................... 8-4 Observed Density (DT) Coriolis Observed Density Correction .......... 6-161 Turbine Observed Density Correction...................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Observed Density Correction...6-161, 6-184, 6-204 Observed Pressure (DT) Coriolis Observed Density Correction .......... 6-161 Turbine Observed Density Correction...................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Observed Temperature (DT) Coriolis Observed Density Correction .......... 6-161 Turbine Observed Density Correction..... 6-184, 6-
204 Octal................................................................... A-5 Off-line ............................................................... A-5 Offset PRT Calibration Control Mechanism.......D-8 Offset PRT Device Calibration...........................D-8 O-Flow Alarm ................................................... 7-10 On Can Full............................................. 5-14, 6-41 Sampler Coriolis Liquid ................................ 6-158 On Flow Status ....................................... 5-14, 6-41 Sampler Coriolis Liquid ................................ 6-158 On Flowrate Limit.................................... 5-14, 6-41 Sampler Coriolis Liquid ................................ 6-158 On-line ....................................................15-16, A-5 Open collector....................................................A-5 Open Configuration............................................ 8-6 Button ............................................................. 2-26 Open............................................................... 2-27 Open Configurations ...................................... 2-27 Opening Existing Configuration .................................... 2-23 Open O/P ......................................................... 4-5 System Editor ................................................... 8-2 Operational Modes......................................... 6-221 Opto-isolator ...................................................... A-5 O-Range Alarm ................................................ 7-10 Orifice............................................................... 6-51 Orifice Material ............................................... 6-51 Output ................................................................ 4-1 Outputs ....................................................... 4-5, 8-7 Bi-di proving ..................................................... B-3 Coriolis Gas Properties .................................. 6-35 DP Gas Properties ......................................... 6-89 Gas Properties ............................................. 6-143 Turbine Gas.................................................. 6-122
Revised January-2021
Overflow Alarm ................................................ 7-10 Overrange .......................................................... A-5
P
P144 I/O Module........................................................ 2-4 PID Type ........................................................ E-20 P154 ................................................................ 5-29 Prover I/O Module ............................................ 2-4 Prover Type.................................................... E-21 P188 HART Communication Module................. 2-4 P190 Dual Ethernet Module .............................. 2-4 Page Clipboard ................................................ 13-8 Page Toggle .................................................... 2-26 Parameters BSW .................................................. 6-198, 6-217 Calorific Value (AGA5) .......................... 6-25, 6-30 Parity........................................................... 9-5, F-4 Pass K-factor ................................................... B-66 Passing an Object from the Duty to the Standby S600+............................................................. F-14 Password ......................................................... 7-14 Password Tables ............................................. E-21 Passwords ....................................................... 7-14 Deleting .......................................................... 7-15 Editing ............................................................ 7-15 Paste......................................................... 2-26, 8-6 PC Password ................................................... 7-14 PC Setup Link Enabling ........................................................... 9-2 PCB ................................................................... A-5 PCSetup Editor Icon Bar .......................................................... 2-26 Menu Bar........................................................ 2-27 Navigating ...................................................... 2-25 New Configuration............................................ 2-1 Opening an Existing Configuration ................ 2-23 Version Number ............................................. 2-27 Pd Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Pe (DT) Coriolis Observed Density Correction.......... 6-161 Pe ...................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Peer-to-Peer .................................................... 2-15 Critical Data...................................................... F-9 Displays.......................................................... F-26 Downloading and Verifying ............................ F-28 Duty .................................................................. F-1 Functionality ..................................................... F-1 Link................................................................. 2-15 Passing an Object from the Duty to the Standby
S600+ ......................................................... F-14 Peer to Peer Options............................... 4-30, F-4 Standby ............................................................ F-1 Verifying ......................................................... F-28 Peer-to-peer link ................................................ A-5 Peer-to-peer Link ............................................. 4-35 Perform PTZ Calculations ............................. 15-17 Perform PTZ Calculations and Convert Units ........
.................................................................. 15-20 Perform PTZ Calculations on All Streams ... 15-22 Period .............................................................. 6-11
Revised January-2021
Config600 User Manual
Periodic Object Transfer .................................. F-16 Peter Temp .................................................... 6-109 Phase Locked Loop ................................ 5-29, 5-41 Ball Prover Hardware ..................................... 5-29 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-41 Master Meter Hardware ................................. 5-54 Pic Fail Alarm ................................................... 7-10 PID ............................................................4-23, A-5 Control Action ................................................. 4-27 Control Method............................................... 4-26 Derivative Time .............................................. 4-28 Integral Time .................................................. 4-28 Manual Position.............................................. 4-28 MV Clamping High Limit................................. 4-26 MV Clamping Low Limit.................................. 4-27 Proportional Band........................................... 4-28 PV Channel Settings ...................................... 4-27 PV Range ....................................................... 4-28 Setpoint .......................................................... 4-27 SP Rate of Change ........................................ 4-27 SP Tracking .................................................... 4-27 Switch Over Logic .......................................... 4-28 PID Loops ............................................... 4-23, 4-29 Analog Outputs............................................... 4-15 Assigning ........................................................ 4-24 Derivative Action (D) ...................................... 4-30 Flowrate Control for Streams ........ 6-5, 6-10, C-50 I/O Module PID Type......................................E-20 Integral Action (I) ............................................ 4-29 PID.................................................................. E-14 PID Control Loops .......................................... 4-15 PID Controller ................................................. 4-29 PID Type ........................................................ E-20 Proportional Action (P) ................................... 4-29 Runtime .......................................................... 4-24 Type ............................................................... E-20 PIP ................................................................... E-14 Pipe .................................................................. 6-51 Pipe Correction............................................... 6-51 Pipe Material .................................................. 6-51 Pipe Correction ................................................ 6-51 Pipe Diameter .................................................. 6-64 Ball Prover Constants..................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Pipe Inside Diameter ..................................... 6-218 Pipe Outside Diameter................................... 6-218 Placement Editor.............................................. 12-7 Plenum Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Poisson's Ration ............................................ 6-218 Policies Firewall ............................................................ G-2 Poll Delay ......................................................... 14-4 POP ................................................................. E-14 Port ................................................. 4-30, 4-32, A-5 Qsonic .......................................................... 6-151 Positive Limit Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 pow(x, y) LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-27 PR OP Fxd Alarm ............................................ 7-10 PR OP Sat Alarm ............................................. 7-10 PRDTOT .......................................................... E-14
Index-21
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Pre Switch (Forward) Ball Prover Constants .................................... 5-23 Pre Switch (Reverse) Ball Prover Constants .................................... 5-23 Pre Warn Alarm ............................................... 7-10 Premium Billing ....... 6-57, 6-62, 6-64, 6-116, 6-135 Forward Premium Flow Limit ....... 6-57, 6-62, 6-64 Premium Billing Mode ............................................
........................... 6-57, 6-62, 6-64, 6-116, 6-135 Reverse Premium Flow Limit ....... 6-57, 6-62, 6-64 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-146 Premium Flow Limit ............................ 6-116, 6-135 Pressure ................................................ 6-44, 6-54,
6-72, 6-74, 6-75, 6-109, 6-116, 6-135, 7-1, 7-2 Ball Prover Constants .................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Master Meter Constants................................. 5-48 Pressure Loss .....................6-57, 6-62, 6-64, 6-86 Pressure Units................................................ 7-16 QSonic ......................................................... 6-151 Ultrasonic Gas................................... 6-127, 6-146 Pressure and Density ...........6-57, 6-62, 6-64, 6-86 Primary Inputs Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-146 Print ........................................2-26, 2-27, 7-20, 8-6 Print Alarms/Events.......................................... 7-4 Print Preview .................................................. 2-27 Print Setup ..................................................... 2-27 Remote Archive Uploader ............................ 11-18 Printing Err Alarm ............................................ 7-10 Printing, network ................................................. I-1 Priority Streams Flow Switching........................6-10, C-50 Probe Diameter................................................ 6-64 Process alarms .................................................. 7-4 Product Data Sheet Config600 ....................................................... 1-12 S600+ ............................................................. 1-12 Product Detection Interface ............................. C-14 Product Selection Coriolis Standard Density Correction........... 6-170 Turbine Observed Density Correction....................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Product Type Ball Prover Constants .................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Coriolis Observed Density Correction.......... 6-161 Coriolis Standard Density Correction........... 6-170 Master Meter Constants................................. 5-48 Turbine Observed Density Correction....................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Program ............................................................. A-5 Program pane .................................................. 15-3 Programs ......................................................... 15-1 Prop Band ........................................................ 4-24 Proportional Action (P) .................................... 4-29 Protocol........................................... 4-30, 4-31, A-5 Prove sequence................................................. A-5 PROVED KF Master Meter Alarm Limits ............................. 5-55
Index-22
Prover ................................................................ 1-4 Ball
Run Data ................................................. 5-20 Compact
Hardware................................................. 5-41 Dual Chronometry Switch Pair ....................... E-20 Prover board .................................................... 5-41 Provers Abort Index .............. B-19, B-27, B-60, B-86, B-90 Alarm Limits..................................5-30, 5-43, 5-55 API Ch.4 Method 1 (default)..... B-37, B-72, B-101 Average Method ..........................B-31, B-64, B-95 Averaging Calculations ...............B-32, B-65, B-95 AV-MN/AV ................................ B-38, B-72, B-102 Ball......................................................... 5-19, 5-20 Ball Prover Alarm Limits ................................. 5-30 Ball Prover Constants..................................... 5-23 Ball Prover Flow Balance Setup..................... 5-18 Ball Prover Hardware ..................................... 5-29 Bi-Directional ......................................... 5-19, 5-20 Bi-directional (ball)............................................B-2 Bi-directional Constants ................................. 5-23 Bi-directional Prover Alarm Limits .................. 5-30 Bi-directional Prover Flow Balance Setup...... 5-18 Bi-directional Prover Hardware ...................... 5-29 Calcuations..................................................... B-31 Calculated MF versus Avg of Previous History
MFs ............................................................. B-39 Calculated MF versus Initial Base MF............B-39 Calculation Index.........................B-28, B-61, B-91 Calculations .................................................... B-95 Calculations .................................................... B-64 Communications............................B-3, B-41, B-76 Compact ................................................5-31, B-39 Compact Inputs .............................................. B-40 Compact Outputs ........................................... B-40 Compact Prover Alarm Limits ........................ 5-43 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Compact Prover Hardware............................. 5-41 Compact Prover Run Data ............................. 5-33 Complete Sequence Stage Descriptions ..............
.................................................B-12, B-46, B-79 Configuration Screens.................................... 5-17 Constants .....................................5-23, 5-35, 5-48 Control .................................................. B-44, B-77 Control Stage Description .................... B-55, B-87 Control Stages...................................... B-54, B-86 Correction Factor (CPLm/CPLp) .......... B-68, B-97 Correction Factor (CTLm/CTLp) .................... B-34 Correction Factor (CTSp/CPSp) .......... B-34, B-68 Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on the
Liquid........................................B-34, B-68, B-97 Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on the
Prover Steel ...................................... B-34, B-68 Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature
on the Liquid ..................................... B-34, B-97 Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature
on the Prover Steel ........................... B-34, B-68 Default Prove Sequence Stages .................... B-78 Default Sequence Stages .................... B-11, B-45 Final Average Data (Over Consecutive Good
Runs)........................................B-33, B-67, B-96
Revised January-2021
Formulae Averaging Calculations ........B-32, B-65, B-95 Correction Factor (CPLm/CPLp)... B-68, B-97 Correction Factor (CTLm/CTLp) ... B-34, B-97 Correction Factor (CTSp/CPSp) ... B-34, B-68 Mass Prover Calculations ....................... B-70 Stability Calculations............B-33, B-68, B-97 Volume Prover Calculations.................... B-69
General Formulae .......................................... B-65 Gross Standard Volume (Sm3) ............ B-35, B-98 Gross Volume (m3) .............................. B-36, B-70 Hardware......................................5-29, 5-41, 5-54 Indicated Volume (m3) ................................... B-98 Indicated Volume Flowrate (m3/h) ................. B-99 Inputs.............................................B-3, B-40, B-76 K-factor Deviation......................B-37, B-72, B-101 Local................................................................. B-1 Mass (kg) ..................................B-36, B-71, B-100 Mass Flowrate (kg/h).................B-37, B-71, B-101 Mass K-factor (pls/kg) ...............B-37, B-71, B-101 Mass Prover Calculations .............................. B-70 Master Meter .........................................5-44, B-73 Master Meter Alarm Limits ............................. 5-55 Master Meter Constants................................. 5-48 Master Meter Hardware ................................. 5-54 Master Meter Inputs/Outputs ......................... B-76 Master Meter Run Data.................................. 5-45 Meter Factor ...........................................................
..................B-36, B-37, B-70, B-71, B-99, B-100 Meter Indicated Standard Volume (Sm3)...............
.................................................B-35, B-69, B-98 Meter Indicated Volume (m3)......B-35, B-69, B-98 Meter Indicated Volume Flowrate (m3/h)..... B-100 Meter Mass (kg) ........................B-37, B-71, B-100 Meter Mass Flowrate (kg/h) ......................... B-101 Meter/Prover Discrepancy Checks ................ B-68 MX-AV/AV .................................B-38, B-72, B-102 MX-MN/AVG .............................B-38, B-72, B-101 MX-MN/MN ...............................B-38, B-72, B-102 MX-MN/MX+MN2 ......................B-38, B-72, B-101 Options ............................................................. 2-8 Outputs..........................................B-3, B-41, B-76 P154 Prover Type .......................................... E-21 Pass Average Data (Sampled during each Pass)
.................................................................... B-65 Pass Average Flowrate .................................. B-66 Pass Average Frequency (Hz) ....................... B-66 Pressure Correction Factor .......................... B-100 Prove Sequence and Control ......................... B-77 Prove/Stream Data............................... B-61, B-92 Prover Gross Standard Volume (Sm3) .......... B-69 Prover Indicated Volume Flowrate (m3/h) ..... B-99 Prover Mass (kg) .......................................... B-100 Prover Master Link ........................................... B-3 Prover Module .................................................. 2-4 Pulse gating ..................................................... B-4 Pulse Gating......................................... B-42, B-77 Pulse interpolation............................................ B-5 Pulse Interpolation ............................... B-42, B-77 Pulse Measurement ............................... B-4, B-77 Remote............................................................. B-1 Remote Addresses......................................... 2-15 Remote Streams ............................................ 2-15
Revised January-2021
Config600 User Manual
Report............................................................. B-93 Run Average Data................................ B-32, B-95 Run Average Data (Over Number of Passes) B-66 Run Average Frequency (Hz) .............. B-32, B-96 Run Control Stage Description............. B-55, B-87 Run Control Stages .............................. B-54, B-86 Run Data ............................................... 5-33, 5-45 Run Stage Abort Index ................B-27, B-60, B-90 Run Stage Calculation Index.......B-28, B-61, B-91 Screens .......................................................... 5-17 Sequence Abort Index.......................... B-19, B-86 Sequence and Control.......................... B-44, B-77 Sequence Stage Descriptions .....B-12, B-46, B-79 Sequence Stages ........................B-11, B-45, B-78 Sphere switch interface .................................... B-5 Stability Calculations ...................B-33, B-68, B-97 Stage Abort Index........................B-27, B-60, B-90 Stage Calculation Index ..............B-28, B-61, B-91 Stage Description ................................. B-55, B-87 Stage Descriptions ......................B-12, B-46, B-79 Stages ..................... B-11, B-45, B-54, B-78, B-86 Standard References ..................B-32, B-65, B-95 Statistical .................................. B-38, B-73, B-102 Stream Data ......................................... B-61, B-92 Stream/Prover Discrepancy Checks .... B-33, B-97 Type ............................................................... E-21 Valve Command Outputs ................................. B-8 Valve interface..................................................B-8 Valve Operating Mode ..................................... B-8 Valve Position Inputs........................................B-8 Valve Seal Detection ........................................ B-9 Variable Rate of Change .............B-33, B-68, B-97 Volume Flowrate (m3/h) ....................... B-36, B-70 Volume K-factor (pls/m3) ............B-35, B-70, B-98 Volume Prover Calculations ........................... B-69 Proving ............................................................... B-1 PRT .......................................................... A-5, E-15 Input Object .............................................. D-8, D-9 Linear Two-point Device PRT Calibration ........D-8 Modes (MODE TAB PLANTI/O) ..................... E-21 PRT Input Object..............................................D-9 PRT/RTD Inputs ...................................... 4-6, 4-15 PRT/RTD ........................................................... 4-6 PRT/RTD Input .................................................. 4-6 PRV PCF Master Meter Alarm Limits ............................. 5-55 PRV PULSES Master Meter Alarm Limits ............................. 5-55 PRV_CTL ......................................................... E-16 Pseudo Critical................................................. 6-74 PSU.................................................................... A-5 PSW Percent ...................................... 6-198, 6-217 PTZ ...........................................................6-75, A-5 PTZ (Compressibility) ...................................... 6-75 PTZ Calculations............................................ 15-17 Pulse gating ....................................................... B-4 Pulse Gating .................................................... B-42 Pulse I/O Select Master Meter Hardware ................................. 5-54 PULSE I/P ...................................................... 6-177 pulse inputs ...................................................... 4-19 Pulse interpolation Bi-di proving ..................................................... B-5
Index-23
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Pulse Interpolation ........................................... B-42 Pulse measurement Bi-di proving ..................................................... B-4 Pulse Measurement Compact Prover Alarm Limits ........................ 5-43 Provers ............................................................. B-4 Pulse Off .......................................................... 4-5 Pulse On .......................................................... 4-5 Pulse Width ...................................................... 4-5 Pulse Outputs .................................................. 4-21 Assigning........................................................ 4-22 Pulse Width........................................................ 4-6 Pure Air ............................................................ 6-66 Pure Gas.......................................................... 6-66 Pure Gas Air .................................................... 6-66 PUREGAS ......................................................... 2-8 PV Channel...................................................... 4-24 PV Range ........................................................ 4-24 PV Type ........................................................... 4-24 Pwr Reset Alarm.............................................. 7-10
Q
QSonic ........................................................... 6-151 Qsonic Interface.......................6-146, 6-149, 6-151 Communications .......................................... 6-151 Quick Insert...................................................... 14-6
R
R Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 RAM ................................................................... A-5 RAM FailAlarm................................................. 7-11 Rate of Change.................................................. 4-9 Rate of Change (ROC) .................................... 5-23 RD...................................................................... A-5 Read Only ............................................... 4-30, 4-34 Real Calorific Value (SUP) ...................................... ................... 6-25, 6-66, 6-67, 6-111, 6-116, 6-135 Real CV (SUP) ............................................... 6-67 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-130 Real Density ................................ 6-25, 6-67, 6-111 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-130 Real Relative Density (RD)...................................... ..........................................6-25, 6-66, 6-67, 6-111 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-130 Real Relative Density (SG)................... 6-54, 6-109 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-127 Recalculating a Current Batch ......................... C-45 Recalculating an Historic Batch.......................C-47 Receive .............................................................. 9-8 Recent Files ..................................................... 2-27 REF METER DENS ............................ 6-198, 6-217 REF STD DENS ................................. 6-198, 6-217 Reference Ball Prover Constants .................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Master Meter Constants................................. 5-48 Reference Conditions .........6-25, 6-66, 6-67, 6-111 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-130 Reference Temperature Coriolis Observed Density Correction.......... 6-161
Index-24
Coriolis Standard Density Correction ........... 6-170 Turbine Observed Density Correction...................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 Regenerate ............................................. 2-27, 2-29 Regenerating Displays ................................... 13-8 Regenerating Modbus Maps.......................... 14-12 Register............................................................ 14-8 Re-installing Config600.................................... 1-11 Related technical information .......................... 1-12 Relative Density (SG) ............................. 6-72, 6-77 Relative Humidity ............................................. 6-66 Relative IDs........................................................ 8-6 Reload Tree Command Remote Archive Uploader .............................. 11-8 Remote Access................................................ 7-20 Remote Archive Uploader................................ 11-1 Accessing ....................................................... 11-2 Comms Fail .................................................. 11-17 Compact Folder Format ............................... 11-15 Data Integrity ................................................ 11-17 Directory Settings ......................................... 11-12 Enabling Automatic Operation ....................... 11-6 Event Logging ................................................ 11-1 Extended Folder Format .............................. 11-15 File Locations ............................................... 11-12 File Names ................................................... 11-17 File Recovery ............................................... 11-17 File Size........................................................ 11-17 Flow Computer List ........................................ 11-2 Launching ....................................................... 11-1 Manual Polling ................................................ 11-6 Printing ......................................................... 11-18 Reload Tree Command .................................. 11-8 Report Archive.............................................. 11-11 Saving Reports ............................................. 11-14 Setting Communication Options for Manual
Operation .................................................... 11-7 Tools > Manual Comm Settings ..................... 11-7 Upload All Command .......................... 11-5, 11-10 Upload New Command ....................... 11-5, 11-10 Remote Debug............................................... 15-16 Remote Front Panel......................................... 10-1 Accessing ....................................................... 10-7 Bits per second............................................... 10-2 Changing the Communications Port on your USB
Communications Port.................................. 10-2 Configuring PC WITH a Native Serial
Communications Port.................................. 10-3 Configuring PC without a Native Serial
Communications Port.................................. 10-1 Configuring the S600+ ................................... 10-4 Data bits ......................................................... 10-2 Disabling......................................................... 10-8 Flow control .................................................... 10-2 Parity .............................................................. 10-2 Restoring if Remote Communications Fail..... 10-9 Serial Communications Port........................... 10-1 Startup Menu .................................................. 10-7 Stop bits ......................................................... 10-2 Remotely Debugging a LogiCalc ................... 15-16 Removing Report Lines ................................. 12-10
Revised January-2021
Rename Config Organiser ............................................ 2-29 REP00 REP39 .............................................. E-17 Report Archive ............................................... 11-11 Report Editor.................................................... 12-1 Accessing ....................................................... 12-2 Copy ............................................................... 12-6 Cut.................................................................. 12-6 Delete ............................................................. 12-6 Delete Line ..................................................... 12-6 Edit Placement ...................................... 12-6, 12-9 Editing a Data Point ....................................... 12-9 Insert Line ...................................................... 12-6 New Placement .............................................. 12-6 Paste .............................................................. 12-6 Using .............................................................. 12-6 Report files....................................................... 12-5 Report History Firewall Rules to the Chain ..............................G-3 Report Line Length Editing ............................................................... I-6 Report Lines Adding ............................................................ 12-9 Deleting ........................................................ 12-10 Reporting CFX .................................................................. H-1 Reports ................................................... 3-13, 7-20 Adding ............................................................ 3-13 Adding a Base Time Report to a Configuration .....
.................................................................... 3-11 Base Time ........................................................ 3-8 Batch Hourly..................................................... 3-8 Batching ......................................................... C-28 Company Information....................................... 3-2 Daily ................................................................. 3-8 Deleting .......................................................... 3-13 Editing ............................................................ 3-13 Hourly ............................................................... 3-8 Managing Configuration ................................. 3-13 Monthly............................................................. 3-8 Multi Day .......................................................... 3-8 Part Hour .......................................................... 3-8 Printing Remote Archive Uploader............... 11-18 Provers ........................................................... B-93 Remote Archive Uploader Report Archive ... 11-11 Remote Archive Uploader Saving................ 11-14 Saving Remote Archive Uploader ................ 11-14 System Setup ................................................... 3-6 Weekly.............................................................. 3-8 Reports & Totalisation ..................................... 7-14 Required Required Level ............................................... 7-14 Required Level................................................. 7-14 Reset ............................................................... 4-19 Retrieving config files......................................... 9-1 Retrospective Batch Totals..............................C-27 Retry Limit........................................................ 14-4 return LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-25 Reverse MF Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-146 Reverse Premium Flow Limit.........6-57, 6-62, 6-64
Revised January-2021
Config600 User Manual
Reverse Premium Limit Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-146 Revert to Last Good after Failure ........................... .............................. 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Reynolds Number ................ 6-57, 6-62, 6-64, 6-86 Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-146 Right pane........................................................ 2-25 ROC .................................................4-9, 5-23, 5-35 ROC PRS Units .............................................. 7-16 ROC Temp Units ............................................ 7-16 ROC Alarm....................................................... 7-11 Rod Coefficient Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 ROM................................................................... A-5 ROM Fail Alarm ............................................... 7-11 Rounding Ball Prover Constants..................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Coriolis Observed Density Correction .......... 6-161 Coriolis Standard Density Correction ........... 6-170 Master Meter Constants ................................. 5-48 Turbine Observed Density Correction...................
....................................................... 6-184, 6-204 Turbine Standard Density Correction........... 6-192 RS-232 ............................................................... A-5 RS-422 ............................................................... A-5 RS-485 ............................................................... A-6 RSMT Dish Calib Factor ......................... 6-57, 6-86 RT Int Alarm..................................................... 7-11 RTD.................................................................... A-6 RTRIP K FACTOR Ball Prover Alarm Limits ................................. 5-30 RTRIP M.FACTOR Ball Prover Alarm Limits ................................. 5-30 RTRIP PULSES Ball Prover Alarm Limits ................................. 5-30 RTS .................................................................... A-6 RTS Off Delay.................................................... F-4 RTS On Delay.................................................... F-4 RTU.................................................................... A-6 RTV .................................................................... A-6 Run ................................................................ 15-14 Run Control Stage Description ........................ B-22 Run Data Ball Prover ...................................................... 5-20 Compact Prover ............................................. 5-33 Master Meter Prover....................................... 5-45 Run Stage Abort Index .................................... B-60 Runtime............................................................ 4-24 RX Buffer Size ................................................. 14-4 RX Fail Alarm................................................... 7-11 RX/RXD ............................................................. A-6
S
S.G.................................................5-23, 5-35, 5-48 S600 Connection ............................................... 9-5 S600+................................................................. A-6 CFX ..................................................................H-1 Chromatographs............................................... K-1 Connecting via Serial Cable ............................. 9-2 Database .......................................................... 8-3 Database Fields ............................................... E-2
Index-25
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Database Objects............................................. E-2 Firewall .............................................................G-1 Installing a LogiCalc ..................................... 15-15 Network printing ................................................ I-1 Password ....................................................... 7-14 S600+ Database ................................................ 8-3 Objects ............................................................. 8-4 Tables............................................................... 8-5 Sample............................................................... A-6 Sampler ID........................................................... 5-14, 6-41 Sampler Alarm ................................................. 7-11 Sampler ID Coriolis Liquid............................................... 6-158 Sampling ................................................. 2-8, 6-158 Gas Coriolis.................................................... 6-41 Inputs................................................................. J-1 Liquid Coriolis............................................... 6-158 Station ............................................................ 5-14 Save............................................................... 15-13 Saving Save ............................................................... 2-27 Save As .......................................................... 2-27 Save as Bitmap .............................................. 7-28 Save Configuration.................................. 2-26, 8-6 Saving a configuration ..................................... 2-28 Saving Display Editor changes ........................ 13-8 Scaling Alarm................................................... 7-11 Scope of Manual................................................ 1-2 Seal Fail Alarm ................................................ 7-11 Sec OP Fxd Alarm ........................................... 7-11 Sec OP Sat Alarm............................................ 7-11 Secondary Link ....................................... 4-30, 4-34 Secondary Units Setup ...................................... 5-6 Stream.............................................................. 6-7 Section Index ................................................. 15-25 Security ................................................... 2-27, 7-13 Checksum ...................................................... 7-19 Data Item........................................................ 7-16 Deleting Passwords ....................................... 7-15 Display Editor ................................................. 13-5 Edit Button...................................................... 2-26 Editing ............................................................ 7-14 Editing Passwords.......................................... 7-15 Level...................................................... 7-14, 7-20 Security Button ............................................... 2-26 Security for Data editing................................. 7-14 SECURITY....................................................... E-17 Security code ..................................................... A-6 See Observed Density Correction for product selection ............................................ 6-170, 6-192 SEL PRESS Coriolis Standard Density Correction........... 6-170 SEL TEMP Coriolis Standard Density Correction........... 6-170 SEL TO BASE ............................................... 6-161 Select Alarm .................................................... 7-12 Selecting Communications ............................................ 2-15 Self Calib Alarm ............................................... 7-12 Send Send Configuration .......................................... 9-6 Sens Fail Alarm ............................................... 7-12
Index-26
Sense...................................................4-2, 4-3, 4-5 Sensor.............................................................. 4-23 SERG GOST 30319-96 ................................... 6-89 Serial Cable ................................................................ 9-2 Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Density ................................................ 6-44, 6-177 Meter Variable Limits...................................... 6-44 Pressure .............................................. 6-44, 6-177 Temperature ........................................ 6-44, 6-177 Server Address ....................................... 4-30, 4-33 Set up Peer-to-Peer Options ............................................................. F-4 setalarm(x, v), clearalarm(x, v), accalarm(x, v) ......
..................................................................... 15-27 setalarm/clearalarm/accalarm LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-26 Setpoint .............................................................. 4-9 Setpoint (SP).................................................... 4-24 Flowrate for Streams ............................ 6-10, C-50 SP Clamp Rate............................................... 4-24 SP Tracking .................................................... 4-24 Settings ........................................2-26, 2-27, 6-107 Settle ................................................................ 6-16 Setup Ball Prover Constants..................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Master Meter Constants ................................. 5-48 Qsonic .......................................................... 6-151 Slave Port ....................................................... 4-30 SG ...................................................................... A-6 SG/RD.............................................................. 6-74 SGERG ............................................................ 6-72 SGERG (Compressibility) ................................ 6-72 SICK Control .................................................. 6-152 Alarm Limits.................................................. 6-152 Billing Modes ................................................ 6-152 Forward Meter Factors ................................. 6-152 Forward/Reverse Premium Limits ................ 6-152 Input Parameters.......................................... 6-152 Low flow cut off limit ..................................... 6-152 Meter Factor Method .................................... 6-152 Modbus Timeout........................................... 6-152 Reverse Meter Factors................................. 6-152 SICK COMMS .............................................. 6-152 Simulation ...................................................... 15-14 sin(x), cos(x), tan(x) LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-27 Single .........................................4-19, 6-107, 6-158 Single Can / Dual Can Mode ............................. J-3 Single Cell........................................................ 6-92 Single step ..................................................... 15-14 Site Code ......................................................... 1-10 Slave ..................................................... 14-1, 14-12 Slave Address ................................................ 4-30 Slave Link ....................................................... 4-30 Slave address ................................................ 14-12 Slave Address................................................ 14-12 Slops Handling Examples................................C-16 Slug Flow Alarm............................................... 7-12 SOLENOID ...................................................... 6-16 Special Edit ........................................................ 8-7 Specific heat ratio .......................................... 6-122
Revised January-2021
Specify I/O ......................................................... 2-4 Specifying Communications ............................................ 2-15 Streams ............................................................ 2-8 Speed Speed of Sound ..............6-35, 6-89, 6-122, 6-143 Speed Alarm .................................................... 7-12 Sphere switch interface ..................................... B-5 Split .................................................................. 2-27 Splits ....................... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Splits Alarm...................................................... 7-12 SRAM ................................................................ A-6 Stability Bands Ball Prover Constants .................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Master Meter Constants................................. 5-48 Stability R.O.C. Ball Prover Constants .................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Master Meter Constants................................. 5-48 Stack Type ..................................................... 6-107 Stages Close a Stream .............................................. C-54 Close the Last Stream....................................C-54 Delay after Closing.........................................C-54 Delay after Opening ....................................... C-54 Emergency Shutdown .................................... C-54 Flow Switching ............................................... C-54 Idle.................................................................. C-54 Monitor Flow...................................................C-54 Normal Shutdown...........................................C-54 Open a Subsequent Stream .......................... C-54 Open the First Stream....................................C-54 Run Control Stage Description ...................... B-22 Stainless .......................................................... 6-51 Standard .........................6-54, 6-109, 6-116, 6-135 Conditions ............................................. 6-75, 6-77 Density Correction............................. 6-170, 6-192 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-127 Standard Compressibility (Zs) ...... 6-25, 6-54, 6-67,
6-72, 6-74, 6-75, 6-109, 6-111, 6-116, 6-135 Ultrasonic Gas................................... 6-127, 6-130 Standard Density Correction Ultrasonic ..................................................... 6-211 Standby.............................................................. F-1 Start Address ................................................. 14-11 Starting Display Editor ................................................. 13-1 LogiCalc Editor ...................................... 15-2, 15-5 Remote Archive Uploader ..................... 11-1, 11-2 Remote Front Panel ....................................... 10-7 Starting a Batch ............................................... C-42 Startup Menu Remote Front Panel ....................................... 10-7 Startup Mode ................................................. 6-107 Startup Screen................................................. 2-27 Statement const............................................................... 15-9 dim.................................................................. 15-6 if/then............................................................ 15-11 if/then/else/endif ........................................... 15-11 Statements LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-23
Revised January-2021
Config600 User Manual
Station Batching ...........................................................C-8 Secondary Units Setup..................................... 5-6 Station or stream based..................................... J-1 Station-based proving ........................................ B-1 Stations .............................................................. 5-1 Alarm Limits...................................................... 5-2 Averaging ......................................................... 5-4 Configuration .................................................... 5-1 Flow Switching ....................................... 5-8, C-50 Number........................... 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Pressure ........................................................... 5-4 Sampling ........................................................ 5-14 Temperature ..................................................... 5-4 Totals Descriptors ............................................ 7-3 Statiscal ............................................... B-73, B-102 Statistical.......................................................... B-38 Status pane...................................................... 15-4 Status Pane ..................................................... 15-2 Status/Control .................... 6-54, 6-72, 6-74, 6-109 Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-127 Steam............................................................... 6-83 Calc Method Type .......................................... 6-83 Calculation Limits ........................................... 6-83 Enthalpy (H) ................................................... 6-83 Inputs.............................................................. 6-83 Meter Density ................................................. 6-83 Upstream Pressure ........................................ 6-83 Upstream Temperature .................................. 6-83 Stop Bits......................................................9-5, F-4 Stopped Alarm ................................................. 7-12 Stopping a Batch..............................................C-43 Stream Secondary Units Setup..................................... 6-7 Stream Flow Switching Setup..........................C-52 Streams................... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Alarm Limits...................................................... 6-5 Alarms to Suppress on Cutoff .......................... 6-5 Block Valves ................................................... 6-16 Common Settings............................................. 6-4 Configuration .................................................... 6-2 Defining ............................................................ 2-8 Densitometer .................................................... 2-8 Density .............................................. 6-116, 6-135 Details .............................................................. 6-4 Flow Switching ..................................... 6-10, C-50 Flowrates .......................................................... 6-5 Gas Component Flow Weighted Averaging ... 6-11 General Settings............................................... 6-4 Initial Configurations......................................... 6-2 Remote Prover ............................................... 2-15 Stream/Station.................................................. 7-3 Totals Descriptors ............................................ 7-3 Type .......................................................... 6-2, 6-4 Superior Calorific Value ................................... 6-72 Supported Units ................................................. 3-5 Suppress Alarms in Maintenance ............... 6-2, 6-4 Sutherland Constant .......... 6-35, 6-66, 6-89, 6-122 Switching Points............................................. 6-107 SYSOBJ ........................................................... E-17 System alarms ................................................... 7-4 System display................................................. 7-21
Index-27
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
System Editor Accessing ......................................................... 8-2 Buttons ............................................................. 8-6 Edit Dialog ........................................................ 8-8 Finding Objects ................................................ 8-6 General Guidelines ........................................ 8-10 Icon Bar ............................................................ 8-6 Navigating ........................................................ 8-5 Objects ............................................................. 8-4 System Editor ................................................... 8-1 Tables............................................................... 8-5 System Graphic ............................................... 2-17 System Host Alarms .......................................... 7-4 System Setup .................................................... 3-1 Reports............................................................. 3-6 Totalisations ................................................... 3-14 Units ................................................................. 3-3 Versions ........................................................... 3-2
T
Tables 1-1. Config600 Tools........................................ 1-4 1-2. Additional Technical Information............. 1-12 2-1. Config600 Icon Bar ................................. 2-26 2-2. Config 600 Menu Bar .............................. 2-27 3-1. Standard Measurement Units ................... 3-5 6-1. Observed Density Correction Product
Selection ................................................... 6-167 6-2. Standard Density Correction Product
Selection ................................................... 6-174 6-3. Observed Density Correction Product
Selection ................................................... 6-190 6-4. Standard Density Correction Product
Selection ................................................... 6-197 6-5. Observed Density Correction Product
Selection ................................................... 6-209 6-6. Standard Density Correction Product
Selection ................................................... 6-216 B-1. Bi-Directional Sphere Switch Selections
(Prover mode set to BIDI 4-WAY and the number of switches set to 2)......................... B-6 B-2. Bi-Directional Sphere Switch Selections (Prover mode set to BIDI 4-WAY and the number of switches set to 4)......................... B-7 B-3. Type 2 ( Prover mode set to UNI TYPE 2)B-7 B-4. Rotork (Prover mode set to UNI ROTORK and the number of switches set to 4)............ B-7 B-5. Valve Positions ......................................... B-8 B-6. Default Prove Sequence Stages ............ B-11 B-7. Prove Sequence Stages (Complete)...... B-12 B-8. Prove Sequence Abort Index ................. B-20 B-9. BIDI Prover Run Control Stages ............ B-20 B-10. Prover Run Control Stages .................. B-22 B-11. Run Stage Abort Index ......................... B-27 B-12. Run Stage Calculation Index ................ B-28 B-13. Proof Run Signals................................. B-43 B-14. Default Prove Sequence Stages .......... B-45 B-15. Complete Prove Sequence Stages ...... B-46 B-16. Prove Sequence Abort Index ............... B-53 B-17. Prover Run Control Stages .................. B-54 B-18. Compact Run Control Stages............... B-55 B-19. Run Stage Abort Index ......................... B-60
Index-28
B-20. Run Stage Calculation Index ................ B-61 B-21. Master Meter/Stream Combinations
Liquid........................................................... B-75 B-22. Master Meter/Stream Combinations Gas
.................................................................... B-75 B-23. Default Prove Sequence Stages .......... B-79 B-24. Complete Prove Sequence Stages ...... B-79 B-25. Prove Sequence Abort Index................B-86 B-26. Prover Run Control Stages...................B-87 B-27. Prover Run Control Stages...................B-87 B-28. Run Stage Abort Index ......................... B-90 B-29. Run Stage Calculation Index ................ B-91 C-1. Station Batch Sequence Stages.............C-18 C-2. Station Batch Sequence Stages.............C-19 C-3. Standalone Station Batch Sequence Stages
.................................................................... C-24 C-4. Supervised Station Batch Sequence Stages
.................................................................... C-25 C-5. Standalone Stream Batch Sequence Stages
.................................................................... C-26 C-6. Supervised Stream Batch Sequence Stages
.................................................................... C-27 C-7. BATCH CONTROL and RECALL TICKET
Displays ......................................................C-35 C-8. BCH CURR BASE DENS and RECALL
BASE DENS Displays.................................C-35 C-9. STATION BCH CURR BS&W and RECALL
BS&W Displays...........................................C-36 C-10. STATION BCH CURR MTR TEMP and
RECALL METER TEMP Displays...............C-36 C-11. BCH CURR RECALC and RECALL
RECALC Displays.......................................C-37 C-12. STATION/STREAM BATCH CURR
RESULTS and RECALL RESULTS Displays .... .................................................................... C-37 F-1. System Alarms Not Invoking a Failover.. F-17 F-2. Status Input and Output Descriptions ..... F-18 FWA................................................................ 6-11 I-1. Field Descriptions........................................ I-7 J-1. Sampling Sequence Stages ...................... J-5 J-2. Sampling Alarms ..................................... J-10 J-3. Sampling Displays................................... J-11 S600+ Database .............................................. 8-5 Turbine Meter Setup.......................................E-21 Tap Type ................................................. 6-57, 6-86 Tas Oflow Alarm .............................................. 7-12 Task ................................................................... A-6 TASK................................................................ E-17 Task Err Scaling............................................................ 7-12 Task Err Alarm ................................................. 7-12 Task Fail Alarm ................................................ 7-12 Tasks ............................................................... 4-30 TCP/IP ......................................................14-1, A-6 Technical Support ............................................ 1-10 Temp Fail Alarm............................................... 7-12 Temperature .......................................... 6-44, 6-54, 6-66, 6-72, 6-74, 6-75, 6-109, 6-116, 6-135, 7-1 Ball Prover Constants..................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Downstream/Upstream Correction................. 6-48 Expansion Constant ....................................... 6-48
Revised January-2021
Master Meter Constants................................. 5-48 Qsonic .......................................................... 6-151 Security Units ................................................. 7-16 Ultrasonic Gas................................... 6-127, 6-146 Temperature Coefficient ................................ 6-218 Test .................................................................. 6-16 Text .................................................................. 13-5 TFWA............................................................... 7-14 Thermal Expansion.......................................... 6-62 Thermal Expansion Factor .............................. 6-64 Thresholds ....................................................... 4-19 Tile ................................................................... 2-27 Time ................................................................. 3-16 Time Prop....................................................... 6-41 Time-out ....................................................... 6-107 Time & Flow Weighted Averaging ................... 6-18 Method ........................................................... 6-18 Time-Weighted Averaging XFLOW (TW-
XFLOW) ...................................................... 6-20 Variables ........................................................ 6-18 Time and flow averaging ................................... A-6 Time and Flow Weighted Averaging................ 6-18 Time Prop ...........................................................J-3 timenow() LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-27 Timeout ............................................................ 14-5 Time-Weighted Averaging XFLOW (TWXFLOW) ......................................................... 6-20 Time-Weighted Averaging (TWA).................... 6-20 Tips, LogiCalc .................................................. 15-4 tone - US ton...................................................... 7-1 Tool Bar Status Bar ......................................... 2-27 Tools Menu ...................................................... 2-27 Tot Corr Alarm ................................................. 7-12 Tot Part Alarm.................................................. 7-12 Tot Res Alarm .................................................. 7-12 Tot Roll Ovr Alarm ........................................... 7-12 Tot Roll Udr Alarm ........................................... 7-12 Totalisation .............................................3-14, E-19 Totalise .............................................................. A-6 Totals ............................................................... 7-16 Totals & Flowrates .................................. 3-3, 7-16 Totals & Flowrates Units ................................................................. 3-3 Totals Descriptors Editing .............................................................. 7-3 TOTTAB........................................................... E-17 TPU Fail Alarm ................................................ 7-12 Transducer......................................................... A-6 Transducer Modes (MODE TAB DENS IP) ..... E-22 Transfer .................................................... 2-27, 9-4 Transfers Logging ............................................................ 9-9 Translate ................................................. 13-3, 13-7 Travel ............................................................... 6-16 TRI-REG ............................................................ A-6 Troubleshooting Alarms .............................................................. 7-3 Checksum ...................................................... 7-19 Restoring the Remote Front Panel if Remote
Communications Fail .................................. 10-9 Truth Tables..................................................... E-21 Tsk Err Alarm ................................................... 7-12
Revised January-2021
Config600 User Manual
Tube Coefficient Ball Prover Constants..................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Turbine .................................................... 2-8, 6-109 Linearisation ...................................... 6-180, 6-201 Liquid ............................................................ 6-179 Observed Density Correction ............ 6-184, 6-204 Standard Density Correction ........................ 6-192 Turbine Inputs .................................................. 4-19 Assigning ........................................................ 4-19 Editing ............................................................ 4-21 Turbine Meter Setup Tables ............................ E-21 TWA ................................................................. 6-18 Twin Can Changeover ....................................... J-3 Twin can changeover mode.........5-14, 6-41, 6-158 Two Point Control Mechanism...........................D-5 TW-XFLOW Time-Weighted Averaging XFLOW............. 6-20 TX ...................................................................... A-6 TX Buffer Size.................................................. 14-4 Tx Config Alarm ............................................... 7-12 Tx Elec Alarm................................................... 7-12 Tx Fail Alarm.................................................... 7-12 Type .......................................................... 4-7, 6-72 Coriolis Gas Composition......................................
...................................... 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118 Ultrasonic Gas Composition......................... 6-136
U
Ultrasonic Gas Composition.......................................... 6-136 Ultrasonic ................................................ 2-8, 6-127 Ultrasonic ....................................................... 6-146 Ultrasonic Flow Setup ................................................... 6-146 Ultrasonic Communications........................................... 6-149 Ultrasonic Control .......................................................... 6-149 Ultrasonic SICK Control ................................................ 6-152 Ultrasonic Liquid ............................................................ 6-200 Unassigned ............................................... 4-6, 4-15 Unavail Alarm................................................... 7-13 Uncorrected Volume ........................................ 7-16 Uncorrected Volume Flowrate Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-146 Undefined Alarm .............................................. 7-13 Underrange ........................................................ A-6 Understanding the CFX file structure.................H-8 Uni-Directional ................................................. B-21 Units ........................................................ 4-15, 7-16 Configuration
Measurement ............................................ 2-3 Local Units......................................... 6-179, 6-200 System Setup ................................................... 3-3 Unlock application............................................ 1-10 Update Interval................................................. 4-30 Updates Configuration files............................................. 1-2 Upload All Command ............................ 11-5, 11-10
Index-29
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
Upload All Reports......................................... 11-10 Upload New Command Remote Archive Uploader ................... 11-5, 11-10 Upload New Reports...................................... 11-10 Upstream Compressibility (Zf) .................................
6-54, 6-66, 6-72, 6-74, 6-75, 6-109, 6-116, 6-135 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-127 Upstream Conditions ....................................... 6-75 Upstream Correction........................................ 6-48 Upstream Density .................................................... .......6-54, 6-57, 6-62, 6-64, 6-74, 6-75, 6-77, 6-86 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-127 Upstream Pressure.......................6-54, 6-57, 6-60,
6-62, 6-64, 6-66, 6-74, 6-75, 6-77, 6-86, 6-89 Upstream Temperature .................................. 6-51,
6-54, 6-60, 6-64, 6-66, 6-74, 6-75, 6-77, 6-89 U-Range Alarm ................................................ 7-12 Use enhanced error check ............................ 6-107 User ................................................................. 6-51 User Expansion Coefficient............................ 6-51 User Moles ............ 5-10, 6-31, 6-79, 6-118, 6-136 Username ........................................................ 7-14 Using Report Editor .................................................. 12-6 Using Report Editor ......................................... 12-6 UVOL Ball Prover Constants .................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Master Meter Constants................................. 5-48 UVOL Fail Mode................................ 6-116, 6-135 UVOL Flowrate............................................... 6-77
V
Validation Logic Coriolis ........................................................... 6-47 Validation Parameters ..................................... 6-44 Coriolis ......................................................... 6-177 Value LogiCalc Editor ............................................... 15-2 Turbine Gas ................................................. 6-125 Turbine Liquid ................................... 6-180, 6-201 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-141 Valve interface ................................................... B-8 Valve Seal Detection ......................................... B-9 Valves ................................................................ 2-8 Number per Stream...............................6-10, C-50 Valve Setup .................................................... 6-16 Valve Timings................................................. 6-16 Variable.......................................................... 15-15 Variable pane................................................... 15-3 Variables ....................................... 6-143, 15-6, A-6 Coriolis Gas Properties .................................. 6-35 DP Gas Properties ......................................... 6-89 LogiCalc Editor ............................................... 15-2 Turbine Gas ................................................. 6-122 Variable Pane................................................. 15-2 Weighted Averaging....................................... 6-20 V-Cone............................................................... A-7 V-Cone (Mass Flowrate).................................. 6-62 V-CONE 2001.................................................. 6-62 VDI/VDE 2040 ................................................. 6-74
Velocity Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-146 Velocity Correction Factor Ultrasonic Gas .............................................. 6-146 Velocity of Approach Factor...........6-57, 6-77, 6-86 Velocity of sound............................................ 6-151 Velocity of Sound Qsonic .......................................................... 6-151 Ultrasonic Control......................................... 6-149 Velocity Units ................................................... 7-16 Vent Tube ........................................................ 6-57 Verifying Peer to Peer Link............................................ F-28 Version Configuration .................................................. 2-23 System Setup ................................................... 3-2 Version Number ............................................. 2-27 Version 3.3 Enhancements................................ 1-1 View menu ....................................................... 2-27 Viewing Configuration .................................................. 2-17 Viewing Batch Information ...............................C-44 Viscosity .......................................................... 6-35,
6-57, 6-62, 6-64, 6-77, 6-86, 6-89, 6-122, 6-143 Base Viscosity ................................................ 6-66 Sutherland Constant....................................... 6-66 Viscosity @ Tn ............... 6-35, 6-89, 6-122, 6-143 Viscosity Calc ................................................. 6-66 Viscosity Calc Type ........ 6-35, 6-89, 6-122, 6-143 Viscosity Tn .................... 6-35, 6-89, 6-122, 6-143 VNIC ..........................................6-54, 6-109, 6-127 Volatile ............................................................... A-7 Volumes ...........................................5-14, 6-41, 7-1 Sampler Coriolis Liquid ................................ 6-158 Sampling ........................................................ 5-14 VOS (Velocity of Sound) .. 6-35, 6-89, 6-122, 6-143 VWI .................................................................... A-7
W
Wall Thick Ball Prover Constants..................................... 5-23 Compact Prover Constants ............................ 5-35 Warm St Alarm................................................. 7-13 Warm start ......................................................... A-7 Warn Ch_B Alarm ............................................ 7-13 Warn Ch_C Alarm............................................ 7-13 Warn Ch_D Alarm............................................ 7-13 Warning Alarm ................................................. 7-13 Watchdog ........................................................... A-7 Water (kg/m3) .................................................... 7-1 Webserver................................................. 3-2, 7-19 Weighted Averaging Screen ............................ 6-20 Welcome to Config600 screen........................... 2-1 Wet Gas ........................................................... 6-57 while/do/wend LogiCalc Editor ............................................. 15-24 While/do/wend ................................................. 15-7 Windows Menu ................................................ 2-27 Wizard Connect Wizard.............................................. 7-23
Index-30
Revised January-2021
Y
Youngs Modulus ............................................ 6-218 Ultrasonic Gas.............................................. 6-146
Z
Z AGA8 .............................................................. 2-8 Z Ethylene........................................................ 6-38 Z NX19............................................................... 2-8
Config600 User Manual
Z SGERG ........................................................... 2-8 Z Steam ........................................................... 6-83 Zb ..................................................................... 6-72 Zero Div Alarm ................................................. 7-13 Zero High Alarm............................................... 7-13 Zero Low Alarm................................................ 7-13 Zero Noise Alarm ............................................. 7-13 Zero Op Alarm ................................................. 7-13 Zero Prog Alarm............................................... 7-13
Revised January-2021
Index-31
Config600 Configuration Software User Manual
For customer service and technical support, visit www.Emerson.com/SupportNet.
Global Headquarters, North America, and Latin America:
Emerson Automation Solutions Remote Automation Solutions 6005 Rogerdale Road Houston, TX 77072 U.S.A. T +1 281 879 2699 | F +1 281 988 4445 www.Emerson.com/RemoteAutomation
Europe: Emerson Automation Solutions Remote Automation Solutions Unit 1, Waterfront Business Park Dudley Road, Brierley Hill Dudley DY5 1LX UK T +44 1384 487200 | F +44 1384 487258
Middle East/Africa: Emerson Automation Solutions Remote Automation Solutions Emerson FZE P.O. Box 17033 Jebel Ali Free Zone South 2 Dubai U.A.E. T +971 4 8118100 | F +971 4 8865465
Asia-Pacific: Emerson Automation Solutions Remote Automation Solutions 1 Pandan Crescent Singapore 128461 T +65 6777 8211| F +65 6777 0947
© 20042021 Remote Automation Solutions, a business unit of Emerson Automation Solutions. All rights reserved.
This publication is for informational purposes only. While every effort has been made to ensure accuracy, this publication shall not be read to include any warranty or guarantee, express or implied, including as regards the products or services described or their use or applicability. Remote Automation Solutions (RAS) reserves the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of its products at any time without notice. All sales are governed by RAS terms and conditions which are available upon request. RAS accepts no responsibility for proper selection, use or maintenance of any product, which remains solely with the purchaser and/or end-user.
Remote Automation Solutions
Adobe PDF Library 15.0